CRS - Inland Navigation Vessels, Rules - Part3 - 2018-06

RULES
FOR THE CLASSIFICATION OF

INLAND NAVIGATION VESSELS
Part 3 – MACHINERY, SYSTEMS AND ELECTRICITY
June 2018
CROATIAN REGISTER OF SHIPPING

Hrvatska (Croatia) • 10000 Zagreb • Rudeška cesta 89-91
Tel.: (...) 385 (0)1 38 72 444
Fax.: (...) 385 (0)1 38 72 357
E-mail: crs-inland@crs.hr
web site: www.crs.hr
By the decision of the General Committee of Croatian Register of Shipping,
RULES FOR THE CLASSIFICATION OF INLAND NAVIGATION VESSELS

PART 3 – MACHINERY, SYSTEMS AND ELECTRICITY
have been adopted on 29th May 2018 and shall enter into force on 5 st June 2018
1. HISTORICAL RECORD 3. MISSION
 Croatian Register of Shipping (hereinafter referred to as  CRS mission in the field of classification and statutory
CRS) is a heritor of ship classification activities at the certification is to promote the highest internationally
eastern Adriatic coast. adopted standards in the safety of life and property at sea
 The Austrian Veritas was founded in this area, already in and inland waterways, as well as in the protection of the
1858, as the third classification society in the world. sea and inland waterways environment.
 In 1918 the Austrian Veritas changed its name into the
Adriatic Veritas and was acting as such till year 1921.
4. LIABILITY
 CRS, acting till 1992 as JR (Yugoslav Register of 1. CRS is neither, and nor may be considered as, an
Shipping), was founded in 1949. Underwriter, Consulting Engineer, Naval Architect,
 CRS Head Office is situated in Split, Republic of Shipbuilder, Shipowner or Operator, and cannot assume
Croatia. or be exposed to the obligations and responsibilities
 CRS is the classification society, member of incumbent on such functions, even though experience of
International Association of Classification Societies CRS enables it to answer enquiries concerning matters
(IACS), starting from May 2011. not covered by its Rules, Recommendations, Guidance
From April 1973 till January 2005, when IACS generally notes, Instructions, Documents or other evidence.
discontinued associate status, CRS was an associate 2. Practices and procedures of CRS are selected by CRS in
IACS member. its sole and absolute discretion based on its experience
 CRS is the recognised classification society (RO) and knowledge, and in conformity with generally
pursuant to the requirements of the Regulation (EC) No. accepted professional standards in the relevant field of
391/2009 of the European Parliament and of the Council the classification Societies.
on common rules and standards for ship inspection and 3. Nothing contained herein, or in any information, report,
survey organisations. certificate or like document issued in connection with or
 CRS is the conformity assessment notified body notified pursuant to the performance by CRS of its services, shall
under provisions of the Council Directive 2013/53/EU be deemed to relieve any designer, naval architect or
related to recreational craft. engineer, shipbuilder or manufacturer, shipyard, seller,
supplier, contractor or subcontractor, repairer, or owner,
 CRS is the conformity assessments notified body
operator, manager or any other person or entity from any
notified under provisions of the Council Directive
warranty or other contractual obligations or
2014/90/EU on marine equipment.
responsibilities, expressed or implied or from any
 CRS is the conformity assessments notified body noti- negligent act, error or omission whatsoever, nor may
fied under provisions of the Council Directive create any right, claim or benefit to any third party.
2014/68/EU (PED) on pressure vessels.
4. CRS shall exercise due diligence in selection or
CRS is the conformity assessments notified body appointment of its surveyors and all other personnel
notified under provisions of the Council Directive whose attendance and work is employed or engaged for
2014/29/EU (SPVD) on simple pressure vessels. the purpose of performing its services.
 CRS is certified by British Standards Institution (BSI) 5. Nevertheless, if any person or entity uses services of
confirming that CRS operates the Quality Management CRS and suffers loss, damage or expenses thereby,
System which complies with the requirements of BS EN which is attributable or proved to have been caused by
9001:2015 for the scope of classification and statutory any negligent act, omission or error of the surveyors,
certification of ships, statutory certification of marine servants, agents, appointees, officers, managers or
equipment and recreational crafts, and BSI Annual directors of CRS or purporting to act in the name and on
Statement of Compliance confirming that CRS Quality behalf of CRS, or any negligent inaccuracy, advice,
Management System complies with IACS Quality report or evidence is given by or in the name or/and on
System Certification Scheme. behalf of CRS, then the liability of CRS is limited in
2. STATUS respect of any direct or indirect claim whatsoever to an
amount not exceeding five times the amount of the fee
 CRS is an independent, not for profit but common charged or chargeable by CRS for the relevant service.
welfare oriented, public foundation performing: 6. Where the fees are related to a number of services, the
 classification of ships; amount of fees shall be apportioned for the purpose of
 statutory certification of ships on behalf of the the calculation of the maximum compensation of the
national Maritime Administrations; limited liability, as established by the preceding
 statutory certification of recreational crafts; paragraph, in accordance with the estimated time
 certification of materials and products; involved in the performance of each service.
 conformity assessment of recreational crafts; 7. Any liability for consequential damages is expressly
 conformity assessment of marine equipment; excluded.
 conformity assessment of pressure vessels; 8. These rules (General Conditions) are construed and
 certification / registration of quality management interpreted in accordance with the English Law.
systems. 9. Any dispute arising out of the services rendered by CRS
 The present status of CRS is defined by the Law on shall be referred to the Permanent Arbitration Court with
Croatian Register of Shipping (OFFICIAL GAZETTE the Croatian Chamber of Commerce in Zagreb, Republic
No. 1996/81, as amended with No. 2013/76) and Charter of Croatia.
of CRS.
Part 3 – Machinery, Systems and Electricity CONTENTS
Table of contents
I MACHINERY AND SYSTEMS............................................................................................................................. 1
1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 General .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.2 Design and construction .................................................................................................................................................... 2
1.3 Arrangement of machinery and equipment and installation on board ............................................................................... 8
1.4 Tests and trials .................................................................................................................................................................. 9
2 INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES .................................................................................................................................... 10
2.1 General requirements ...................................................................................................................................................... 10
2.2 Documentation to be submitted ....................................................................................................................................... 11
2.3 Materials ......................................................................................................................................................................... 11
2.4 Hydraulic tests................................................................................................................................................................. 12
2.5 Crankcase ........................................................................................................................................................................ 13
2.6 Crankshaft design ............................................................................................................................................................ 14
2.7 Systems ........................................................................................................................................................................... 14
2.8 Controls and governors ................................................................................................................................................... 17
2.9 Control and monitoring equipment ................................................................................................................................. 19
2.10 Starting arrangements...................................................................................................................................................... 19
2.11 Type testing of internal combustion engines ................................................................................................................... 20
2.12 Factory acceptance test and shipboard trials of internal combustion engines.................................................................. 23
2.13 Emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants from internal combustion engines ......................................................... 25
3 MAIN PROPULSION SHAFTING ............................................................................................................................................ 28
3.2 Shafting ........................................................................................................................................................................... 29
4 PROPELLERS ............................................................................................................................................................................ 35
4.2 Definitions....................................................................................................................................................................... 35
4.4 Materials ......................................................................................................................................................................... 36
4.5 Blade thickness ............................................................................................................................................................... 37
4.6 Propeller mounting .......................................................................................................................................................... 38
4.7 Hub and blade fastening parts ......................................................................................................................................... 38
4.8 Propeller balancing.......................................................................................................................................................... 39
4.9 Controllable pitch propellers ........................................................................................................................................... 39
4.10 Tightness tests ................................................................................................................................................................. 40
5 BOILERS AND THERMAL OIL HEATERS, PRESSURE VESSELS AND HEAT EXCHANGERS ..................................... 40
5.2 Boilers ............................................................................................................................................................................. 47
5.3 Thermal oil heaters (boilers) ........................................................................................................................................... 53
5.4 Oil burners and oil firing equipment ............................................................................................................................... 54
5.5 Pressure vessels and heat exchangers .............................................................................................................................. 56
6 GEARS AND COUPLINGS ....................................................................................................................................................... 60
6.2 Definitions (see also standard ISO 1122-1)..................................................................................................................... 61
6.4 Materials ......................................................................................................................................................................... 61
6.5 Teeth ............................................................................................................................................................................... 62
6.6 Wheels and pinions ......................................................................................................................................................... 63
6.7 Gear shafts and bearings ................................................................................................................................................. 63
6.8 Gear casings .................................................................................................................................................................... 64
6.9 Lubrication ...................................................................................................................................................................... 64
6.10 Pressure and temperature control .................................................................................................................................... 64
6.11 Fitting of gears ................................................................................................................................................................ 65
6.12 Balancing ........................................................................................................................................................................ 65
6.13 Meshing test .................................................................................................................................................................... 65
6.14 Testing in the manufacturer’s works ............................................................................................................................... 65
6.15 Design and construction of couplings ............................................................................................................................. 65
7 PIPING SYSTEMS ..................................................................................................................................................................... 66
7.2 Materials: application, manufacture and testing .............................................................................................................. 67
7.3 Hydraulic tests................................................................................................................................................................. 70
Rules for the Classification of Inland Navigation Vessels

June 2018
CONTENTS Part 3 – Machinery, Systems and Electricity
7.4 Pipelines .......................................................................................................................................................................... 71

7.5 Layout, marking and installation ..................................................................................................................................... 78
7.6 Pipe valves and fittings, pumps and expansion bellows .................................................................................................. 78
7.7 River suction chest, ice chest, openings in shell plating and bottom and side fittings..................................................... 80
7.8 Leading of pipelines ........................................................................................................................................................ 81
7.9 Bilge system .................................................................................................................................................................... 82
7.10 Ballast system ................................................................................................................................................................. 86
7.11 Air, overflow and sounding systems ............................................................................................................................... 87
7.12 Exhaust system ................................................................................................................................................................ 90
7.13 Ventilation system........................................................................................................................................................... 91
7.14 Fuel oil system ................................................................................................................................................................ 93
7.15 Lubricating oil system ..................................................................................................................................................... 96
7.16 Cooling water system ...................................................................................................................................................... 97
7.17 Compressed air system .................................................................................................................................................... 98
7.18 Boiler feed water and circulating arrangement, condensate recirculation ..................................................................... 100
7.19 Steam systems ............................................................................................................................................................... 101
7.20 Thermal oil systems ...................................................................................................................................................... 101
7.21 Drinking (potable) water system ................................................................................................................................... 104
7.22 Scuppers and sanitary discharges .................................................................................................................................. 104
7.23 Hydraulic systems ......................................................................................................................................................... 105
8 STEERING GEAR .................................................................................................................................................................... 107
8.1 General requirements .................................................................................................................................................... 107
8.2 Design and equipment ................................................................................................................................................... 108
8.3 Hydraulic system........................................................................................................................................................... 111
8.4 Power, construction and dimensioning.......................................................................................................................... 112
8.5 Requirements for vessels equipped with thrusters as steering means ............................................................................ 114
8.6 Tests in the manufacturer’s works................................................................................................................................. 115
8.7 Testing on board............................................................................................................................................................ 115
9 WINDLASSES, WINCHES AND MOORING MACHINERY................................................................................................ 116
9.2 Design and equipment ................................................................................................................................................... 117
9.3 Power and design .......................................................................................................................................................... 118
9.4 Winches......................................................................................................................................................................... 118
9.5 Tests in the manufacturer’s works................................................................................................................................. 119
9.6 Shipboard trials ............................................................................................................................................................. 119
9.7 Mooring machinery ....................................................................................................................................................... 119
10 LATERAL THRUST UNITS .................................................................................................................................................... 120
10.2 Definitions..................................................................................................................................................................... 120
10.3 Thrusters intended for propulsion ................................................................................................................................. 121
10.4 Documentation to be submitted ..................................................................................................................................... 121
10.5 Materials ....................................................................................................................................................................... 121
10.6 Transverse thrusters and azimuth thrusters ................................................................................................................... 121
10.7 Steering thruster controls .............................................................................................................................................. 123
10.8 Survey and testing ......................................................................................................................................................... 123
10.9 Water-jets ...................................................................................................................................................................... 123
11 AUXILIARY MACHINERY .................................................................................................................................................... 125
11.1 Power-driven air compressor ........................................................................................................................................ 125
11.2 Pumps............................................................................................................................................................................ 126
11.3 Fans and air blowers...................................................................................................................................................... 128
12 HOISTING DEVICES OF WHEELHOUSE ............................................................................................................................ 129
12.2 Requirements relating to construction ........................................................................................................................... 130
12.3 Requirements relating to the hoisting gear drive ........................................................................................................... 130
13 LIQUEFIED GAS INSTALLATIONS FOR DOMESTIC PURPOSES ................................................................................... 131
13.2 Gas installations ............................................................................................................................................................ 131
13.3 Gas receptacles .............................................................................................................................................................. 131
13.4 Location and arrangement of supply units .................................................................................................................... 131
13.5 Spare and empty receptacles ......................................................................................................................................... 131
13.6 Pressure regulators (reducers) ....................................................................................................................................... 131
13.7 Pressure ......................................................................................................................................................................... 132
13.8 Piping and flexible tubes ............................................................................................................................................... 132

June 2018
13.9 Distribution system ....................................................................................................................................................... 132

13.10 Gas-consuming appliances and their installation .......................................................................................................... 132
13.11 Ventilation and evacuation of combustion gases........................................................................................................... 132
13.12 Tests and trials .............................................................................................................................................................. 132
13.13 Acceptance test ............................................................................................................................................................. 133
13.14 Attestation ..................................................................................................................................................................... 133
14 TORSIONAL VIBRATIONS ................................................................................................................................................... 134
14.1 Application .................................................................................................................................................................... 134
14.3 Permissible stresses ....................................................................................................................................................... 134
14.4 Torsional vibration measurements ................................................................................................................................ 137
14.5 Barred speed ranges ...................................................................................................................................................... 137
15 TESTS ON BOARD .................................................................................................................................................................. 138
15.2 General requirements for on board tests ........................................................................................................................ 138
15.3 On board tests for machinery ........................................................................................................................................ 138
15.4 Inspection of machinery after river trials ...................................................................................................................... 141
II ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS ................................................................................................................... 143

1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................................................................. 143
1.1 Application .................................................................................................................................................................... 143
1.2 Definitions and explanations ......................................................................................................................................... 143
1.3 Documents to be submitted ........................................................................................................................................... 144
1.4 Type approvals .............................................................................................................................................................. 145
1.5 Scope of supervision ..................................................................................................................................................... 145
1.6 Environmental conditions ............................................................................................................................................. 146
1.7 Quality of power supply ................................................................................................................................................ 146
1.8 Materials ....................................................................................................................................................................... 146
1.9 Design requirements and protection of electrical equipment ........................................................................................ 147
1.10 Arrangement of electrical equipment ............................................................................................................................ 151
1.11 Supply systems and characteristics of the supply .......................................................................................................... 152
2 POWER SOURCE .................................................................................................................................................................... 153
2.2 Electric power source .................................................................................................................................................... 153
2.3 Emergency source of electric power ............................................................................................................................. 153
2.4 Emergency source of electric power on passenger vessels ............................................................................................ 153
2.5 Power balance ............................................................................................................................................................... 154
3 ELECTRICAL ROTATING MACHINES ................................................................................................................................ 154
3.2 Overload condition ........................................................................................................................................................ 155
3.3 Alternating current generators ....................................................................................................................................... 155
3.4 Direct current generators ............................................................................................................................................... 156
3.5 Generator prime movers ................................................................................................................................................ 156
3.6 Testing of electrical rotating machines.......................................................................................................................... 157
3.7 Electromagnetic brakes ................................................................................................................................................. 157
4 TRANSFORMERS ................................................................................................................................................................... 157
4.1 Application .................................................................................................................................................................... 157
5 STORAGE BATTERIES (ACCUMULATORS) ...................................................................................................................... 158
5.1 Application .................................................................................................................................................................... 158
5.2 Design and construction of cells ................................................................................................................................... 158
5.3 Data plate and operation instructions ............................................................................................................................ 158
5.4 Installation and location ................................................................................................................................................ 158
5.5 Ventilation..................................................................................................................................................................... 159
5.6 Starter batteries ............................................................................................................................................................. 159
5.7 Charging of batteries ..................................................................................................................................................... 159
6 DISTRIBUTION OF ELECTRIC POWER .............................................................................................................................. 159
6.1 Power supply of essential consumers ............................................................................................................................ 159
6.2 Connection to shore or other external networks ............................................................................................................ 160
6.3 Power supply to other vessel ......................................................................................................................................... 160
7 SWITCHGEAR INSTALLATIONS ......................................................................................................................................... 161
7.1 Switchboards ................................................................................................................................................................. 161

June 2018
CONTENTS Part 3 – Machinery, Systems and Electricity
7.2 Switchgear..................................................................................................................................................................... 163

7.3 Arrangement of switching devices, measuring and monitoring devices........................................................................ 163
8 PROTECTION .......................................................................................................................................................................... 164
8.2 Protection of generators ................................................................................................................................................ 165
8.3 Protection of electrical motors ...................................................................................................................................... 165
8.4 Protection of transformers ............................................................................................................................................. 165
8.5 Protection of storage batteries ....................................................................................................................................... 166
8.6 Protection of signal lamps, voltmeters and voltage coils in devices .............................................................................. 166
8.7 Protection of power electronics ..................................................................................................................................... 166
8.8 Exciter circuits .............................................................................................................................................................. 166
8.9 Emergency circuit breakers devices .............................................................................................................................. 166
9 STEERING GEARS, LATERAL THRUST PROPELLER SYSTEMS AND ACTIVE RUDDER SYSTEMS, PUMPS, FANS,
ANCHOR AND MOORING MACHINERY ............................................................................................................................ 167
9.1 Steering gear ................................................................................................................................................................. 167
9.2 Lateral thrust propellers and active rudder systems....................................................................................................... 168
9.3 Electrical drives for pumps ........................................................................................................................................... 169
9.4 Electrical drives for fans ............................................................................................................................................... 169
9.5 Electrical drives for anchor and mooring machinery..................................................................................................... 169
10 ELECTRICAL HEATING AND PREHEATING APPLIANCES ............................................................................................ 170
10.2 Arrangement of heaters ................................................................................................................................................. 170
10.3 Heating appliances ........................................................................................................................................................ 170
10.4 Electrical equipment of heaters ..................................................................................................................................... 170
10.5 Electric ranges and cooking equipment ......................................................................................................................... 170
10.6 Oil and water heaters ..................................................................................................................................................... 170
11 LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS ................................................................................................................................................ 171
11.2 Design of lighting fixtures............................................................................................................................................. 171
11.3 Mounting of lighting fixtures ........................................................................................................................................ 171
11.4 Lighting in cargo holds ................................................................................................................................................. 171
11.5 Power supply of main lighting circuit ........................................................................................................................... 171
11.6 Emergency lighting system ........................................................................................................................................... 172
11.7 Switches in lighting circuits .......................................................................................................................................... 172
11.8 Gas discharge lighting fixtures ...................................................................................................................................... 172
11.9 Socket outlets and plugs ................................................................................................................................................ 172
11.10 Navigation lights and signal lamps................................................................................................................................ 172
12 INSTALLATION MATERIAL................................................................................................................................................. 173
12.1 Design and mounting .................................................................................................................................................... 173
12.2 Plug connections and switches ...................................................................................................................................... 173
13 CABLES AND CONDUCTORS .............................................................................................................................................. 174
13.2 Conductors .................................................................................................................................................................... 174
13.3 Insulating materials ....................................................................................................................................................... 175
13.4 Coatings ........................................................................................................................................................................ 175
13.5 Protective sheathing ...................................................................................................................................................... 175
13.6 Marking ......................................................................................................................................................................... 175
13.7 Conductor laying ........................................................................................................................................................... 175
13.8 Cabling .......................................................................................................................................................................... 176
14 ELECTRICAL PROPULSION SYSTEMS............................................................................................................................... 182
14.1 Definitions..................................................................................................................................................................... 182
14.2 General requirements for electric vessel propulsion systems ........................................................................................ 182
14.3 Generators, transformers and switchgear for electric vessel propulsion systems .......................................................... 182
14.4 Electrical propulsion engines for electric vessel propulsion systems ............................................................................ 183
14.5 Power electronics for electric vessel propulsion systems .............................................................................................. 183
14.6 Measuring, indicating and monitoring equipment ......................................................................................................... 183
14.7 Control and regulation................................................................................................................................................... 184
14.8 Protection of the propulsion systems ............................................................................................................................. 184
14.9 Testing of the propulsion system................................................................................................................................... 184
14.10 General requirements for auxiliary propulsion systems with power electronics ........................................................... 184
14.11 Protective devices for auxiliary propulsion systems with power electronics................................................................. 185
15 POWER ELECTRONICS ......................................................................................................................................................... 185

June 2018

15.2 Cooling.......................................................................................................................................................................... 185
15.3 Test conditions for electronic installations .................................................................................................................... 186
16 CONTROL, MONITORING, ALARM AND SAFETY SYSTEMS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND INTERNAL
COMMUNICATION ................................................................................................................................................................ 187
16.2 Alarm systems ............................................................................................................................................................... 187
16.3 Safety systems ............................................................................................................................................................... 187
16.4 Internal communication facilities on board ................................................................................................................... 188
16.5 Radio telephony systems for vessels with wheelhouses designed for radar navigation by one person ......................... 188
17 TESTS ON BOARD .................................................................................................................................................................. 188
17.1 General .......................................................................................................................................................................... 188
17.2 Tests during construction .............................................................................................................................................. 188
17.3 Testing during commissioning of the electrical equipment ........................................................................................... 188
17.4 Testing during trial voyages .......................................................................................................................................... 189
III FIRE PROTECTION, DETECTION AND EXTINCTION ............................................................................ 191

1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................................................................. 191
1.1 Application .................................................................................................................................................................... 191
1.2 Definitions and explanations ......................................................................................................................................... 191
1.3 Particular areas on board ............................................................................................................................................... 193
1.4 Scope of survey and technical documentation............................................................................................................... 194
1.5 Fire control plans and instructions ................................................................................................................................ 194
2 PREVENTION OF FIRE .......................................................................................................................................................... 195
2.1 Probability of ignition ................................................................................................................................................... 195
2.2 Fire growth potential ..................................................................................................................................................... 196
2.3 Smoke generation potential and toxicity ....................................................................................................................... 197
3 FUEL FIRED HEATING, COOKING AND REFRIGERATING EQUIPMENT .................................................................... 198
3.2 Use of liquid fuels, oil-fired equipment......................................................................................................................... 198
3.3 Vaporising oil burner stoves and atomising oil burner heating appliances ................................................................... 198
3.4 Vaporising oil burner stoves ......................................................................................................................................... 198
3.5 Atomising oil burner heating appliances ....................................................................................................................... 198
3.6 Forced-air heating appliances........................................................................................................................................ 198
3.7 Solid fuel heating .......................................................................................................................................................... 199
4 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEMS........................................................................................................................ 199
4.1 Fire detectors ................................................................................................................................................................. 199
4.2 Construction requirements ............................................................................................................................................ 199
4.3 Installation requirements ............................................................................................................................................... 200
4.4 Protection of accommodation and service spaces, smoke detectors in stairways, corridors and escape route............... 201
4.5 Protection of machinery spaces ..................................................................................................................................... 201
4.6 Acceptance test ............................................................................................................................................................. 201
5 FIRE FIGHTING....................................................................................................................................................................... 202
5.1 General water fire-extinguishing system ....................................................................................................................... 202
5.2 Automatic pressure water spraying system (sprinkler system) ...................................................................................... 203
5.3 Fixed gas fire-extinguishing systems ............................................................................................................................ 205
5.4 Permanently installed firefighting systems for protecting objects ................................................................................. 209
5.5 Portable fire extinguishers............................................................................................................................................. 209
6 ESCAPE .................................................................................................................................................................................... 210
6.2 Means of escape from control centres, accommodation and service spaces .................................................................. 210
6.3 Means of escape from machinery spaces ...................................................................................................................... 211

June 2018
Part 3 – Machinery, Systems and Electricity Chapter I - MACHINERY AND SYSTEMS
I MACHINERY AND SYSTEMS shaftlines, boilers, oil fuel units, internal combustion engines,
generators and major electrical equipment, fuel oil filling
stations, refrigerating, stabilising, ventilation and air-
1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS conditioning machinery, and similar spaces; together with the
trunks to such spaces.
1.1 General
1.1.4.3 Main engine room
1.1.1 Scope
Main engine room is a space where the propulsion
1.1.1.1 The requirements of this Chapter apply to the engines are installed.
design, construction and installation of the main propulsion
1.1.4.4 Engine room
machinery, power transmission systems, shafting systems,
propellers, prime movers other than the main propulsion Engine room is a space where combustion engines
machinery, boilers and related equipment, pressure vessels, are installed.
auxiliaries, piping systems, deck machinery, tests and trials 1.1.4.5 Boiler room
and all of their respective control, monitoring and safety
systems. Boiler room is a space housing a fuel-operated
installation designed to produce steam or heat thermal oil.
1.1.1.2 Machinery installations that do not fully comply
with requirements of this Chapter may be accepted provided 1.1.4.6 Main engines
that they are deemed by the Register to be equivalent to those Main engine refers to machinery intended for the
in this Chapter. vessel propulsion, such as internal combustion engines,
electric or hydraulic motors, driving propellers or propulsors
1.1.1.3 Machinery installations which have been developed (propulsion units).
on novel principles and/or which have not yet been
sufficiently tested in shipboard service require Register’s 1.1.4.7 Engines
special approval. Engines refer to internal combustion engines.
1.1.2 Additional requirements 1.1.4.8 Auxiliary engines and machinery
Additional requirements for machinery and systems Auxiliary engines and machinery refers to
are given in the Rules, Part 4 – Additional Requirements for machinery necessary for the operation of main engines,
Notations, for the assignment of the type and service supply of the vessel with electric power and other kinds of
notations and additional class notations. energy, as well as for normal operation of the systems and
arrangements subject to supervision of the Register.
1.1.3 Documentation to be submitted
1.1.4.9 Essential services
1.1.3.1 Before the start of manufacture, plans showing the 1.1.4.9.1 Essential services is intended to mean a service
general arrangement of the machinery installation together necessary for a vessel to proceed at waterway, be steered or
with all drawings of parts and installations subject to testing, manoeuvred, or undertake activities connected with its
to the extent specified in the following Sections are each to operation, and for safety of life, as far as class is concerned.
be submitted to the Register for information, review and They are subdivided in primary and secondary services.
approval.
1.1.4.9.2 Primary essential services
1.1.3.2 The drawings shall contain all the data necessary
Primary essential services are those which need to
for approval. Where necessary, calculations and descriptions
of the plant shall be submitted. be in continuous operation to maintain propulsion and
steering. Examples of equipment for primary essential
1.1.3.3 Once the documents submitted have been approved services:
by the Register they are binding on the execution of the work. – steering gear;
Any subsequent modifications require Register’s approval
before being put into effect. – actuating systems for controllable pitch propellers;
– scavenging air blowers, fuel oil supply pumps,
1.1.4 Definitions lubricating oil pumps and cooling water pumps for main
and auxiliary engines necessary for the propulsion;
1.1.4.1 Machinery spaces of A category
– azimuth thrusters which are the sole means for
Machinery spaces of A category are those spaces
propulsion/steering with lubricating oil pumps, cooling
and trunks to such spaces containing:
water pumps;
– internal combustion machinery used for main propulsion
– electrical equipment for electric propulsion plant with
purposes; or
lubricating oil pumps and cooling water pumps;
– internal combustion machinery used for other purposes
– electric generators and associated power sources
where such machinery has the aggregate total power
supplying the above equipment;
output of not less than 375,0 kW; or
– hydraulic pumps supplying the above equipment;
– any oil fired boilers or fuel oil units.
– control, monitoring and safety devices/systems for
1.1.4.2 Machinery spaces equipment for primary essential services;
Machinery spaces are all machinery spaces of A – speed regulators dependent on electrical energy for main
category and all other spaces containing main engines, or auxiliary engines necessary for propulsion.

June 2018 1
Chapter I - MACHINERY AND SYSTEMS Part 3 – Machinery, Systems and Electricity
The main lighting system for those parts of the galleys, storage space for provisions, toilets and washing
vessel normally accessible to and used by personnel and facilities, laundry facilities, anterooms and passageways, but
passengers is also considered (included as) primary essential not the wheelhouse.
service.
1.1.4.13 Ductile material
1.1.4.9.3 Secondary essential services For the purpose of the present Rules, ductile
Secondary essential services are those services material is a material having elongation over 12%.
which need not necessarily be in continuous operation.
1.1.4.14 ADN
Examples of equipment for secondary essential
services: ADN is a European agreement concerning the
International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Inland
– thrusters; Waterways.
– starting air and control air compressors;
1.1.4.15 Work station
– bilge and ballast pumps;
Work station is an area where members of the crew
– fire pumps and other fire-extinguishing medium pumps; carry out their duties, including the gangway, derrick and
– ventilation fans for engine rooms; vessel’s boat.
– services considered necessary to maintain dangerous
cargo in safe condition; 1.2 Design and construction
– navigation lights, aids and signals; 1.2.1 General
– internal safety communication equipment; 1.2.1.1 The design and arrangements shall be such that the
– fire detection and alarm systems; machinery can be started and controlled on board vessel,
– electrical equipment for watertight closing appliances; without external aid, so that the operating conditions can be
maintained under all circumstances.
– electric generators and associated power supplying the
above equipment; 1.2.1.2 The machinery, boilers and other pressure vessels,
– hydraulic pumps supplying the above equipment; associated piping systems and fittings shall be of a design
and construction for the service for which they are intended
– control, monitoring and safety devices for cargo
and shall be so installed and protected as to reduce to a
containment systems;
minimum any danger to persons on board, due regard being
– control, monitoring and safety devices/systems for paid to moving parts, hot surfaces and other hazards.
equipment for secondary essential services;
1.2.1.3 The design shall take into consideration the
– windlasses.
materials used in the construction, the intended use of the
1.1.4.9.4 Services for habitability equipment, the working conditions to which it will be
Services for habitability are those intended for subjected and the environmental conditions on board.
minimum comfort conditions for people on board. Engines and their ancillaries shall be designed, built and
installed in accordance with best practice.
Examples of equipment for maintaining conditions
of habitability: 1.2.1.4 Parts exposed to corrosion shall be safeguarded by
– cooking; being manufactured of corrosion-resistant materials or
provided with effective corrosion protection.
– heating;
– domestic refrigeration; 1.2.2 Materials, welding and testing
– mechanical ventilation; 1.2.2.1 General
– sanitary and fresh water; 1.2.2.1.1 Where no specific requirements are given in the
– electric generators and associated power sources Rules regarding dimensioning and choice of materials,
supplying the above equipment. generally recognized standards and engineering principles
may be applied.
1.1.4.10 Service spaces
1.2.2.1.2 Materials, welding, methods of control of welded
Service spaces are those spaces used for galleys, joints and testing procedures shall comply with the Rules,
pantries containing cooking appliances, lockers, mail and Part 25 – Metallic materials, Part 26 – Welding and this
specie rooms, store-rooms, workshops other than those Chapter. In addition, for machinery components fabricated
forming part of the machinery spaces, and similar spaces and by welding, the requirements given in 1.2.2.2 apply.
trunks to such spaces.
1.2.2.1.3 Materials used in the construction of machinery and
1.1.4.11 Wheelhouse its installation are not to contain asbestos.
Wheelhouse is a space or the area which houses all 1.2.2.1.4 Only base materials of proven weldability may be
the control and monitoring instruments necessary for used for welded structures.
manoeuvring the vessel.
1.2.2.2 Welded machinery components
1.1.4.12 Accommodation 1.2.2.2.1 Welding processes shall be approved and welders
Accommodation is defined as a space intended for certified by the Register in accordance with the Rules, Part
the use of persons normally living on board, including 26 – Welding.

2 June 2018
References to welding procedure specifications 1.2.3.5 Under normal operating conditions, sound pressure
(WPS) adopted shall be clearly indicated on the plans generated by the vessel and measured at the level of the
submitted for review/approval. helmsman’s head at the steering position shall not exceed
1.2.2.2.2 Joints transmitting loads shall be either: 70,0 dB(A).
– full penetration butt-joints welded on both sides, except 1.2.3.6 For crew members who are likely to be exposed to
when an equivalent procedure is approved; or noise levels exceeding 85,0 dB(A) every day, individual
– full penetration T- or cruciform joints. acoustic protection devices shall be available. In working
spaces where noise levels exceed 90,0 dB(A) it shall be
1.2.2.2.3 For joints between plates having a difference in indicated that wearing of acoustic protection devices is
thickness greater than 3,0 mm, a taper having a length of not mandatory by a symbol “Wear acoustic protection device”
less than 4 times the difference in thickness is required (see
with a diameter of at least 10,0 cm in accordance with Figure
the Rules, Part 2 – Hull and Hull Equipment, Chapter VII, 7 of Annex 4 (ES-TRIN).
1.2.2). Depending on the type of stress to which the joint is
subjected, a taper equal to three times the difference in 1.2.3.7 Accommodation shall be protected against
thickness may be accepted. inadmissible noise and vibration. Sound pressure levels shall
T-joints on scalloped edges are not permitted. not exceed:
1.2.2.2.4 Lap-joints and T-joints subjected to tensile stresses a) 70,0 dB(A) in communal living quarters;
shall have a throat size of fillet welds equal to 0,7 times the b) 60,0 dB(A) in sleeping cabins. This provision shall not
thickness of the thinner plate on both sides (see Rules, Part 2 apply to vessels operating exclusively outside the rest
– Hull and Hull Equipment, Chapter VII, 1.2.3). periods of the crew as laid down by national regulations.
In the case of welded structures including cast 1.2.3.8 In order to check the maximum sound pressure
pieces, the latter shall be cast with appropriate extensions to levels given above, measured values, measurement
permit connection, through butt welded joints, to the procedures and conditions for the quantitative, reproducible
surrounding structures, and to allow any radiographic and recording of sound pressure levels in accordance with 1.2.3.9
ultrasonic examinations to be easily carried out. and 1.2.3.10, shall be established.
1.2.2.2.5 Where required, preheating and stress relieving
treatments shall be performed according to the welding 1.2.3.9 The measuring instrument shall meet the
procedure specification (WPS). requirements of class 1 according to European Standard EN
61672-1:2003.
1.2.3 Vibrations and noise Before and after each set of measurements, a class
1 calibrator according to European Standard EN 60942:2003
1.2.3.1 Machinery, equipment and hull structures are
shall be placed on the microphone in order to calibrate the
normally subjected to vibration stresses. Special
measurement system. The compliance of the calibrator with
consideration (see Section 14) shall be given to the design,
the requirements of European Standard EN 60942:2003 shall
construction and installation of propulsion machinery
be checked once per year. The compliance of the measuring
systems and auxiliary machinery so that any mode of their
equipment with the requirements of EN 61672-1:2003 shall
vibrations shall not cause undue stresses in this machinery in
be checked every two years.
the normal operating ranges. Working spaces shall be so
situated, equipped and designed that crew members are not 1.2.3.10 Noise measurements
exposed to harmful vibrations. 1. On board vessel
1.2.3.2 Permanent working spaces shall be so constructed Measurements shall be carried out in accordance with
and sound-proofed that the health and safety of crew International Standard ISO 2923:2003 Sections 5 to 8
members are not affected by noise. measuring only A-weighted sound pressure levels.
1.2.3.3 The permissible sound pressure level in the engine 2. Air noise emitted from vessel
rooms shall not exceed 110,0 dB(A). The measuring points Noise emissions from vessel on inland waterways and in
shall be selected as a function of the maintenance work ports are determined by means of measurements in
needed during normal operation of the plant located therein. accordance with European Standard EN ISO 22922:
2013, Sections 7 to 11. Doors and windows of engine
1.2.3.4
rooms shall be closed during measurements.
a) The noise produced by a vessel under way, and in
particular the engine air intake and exhaust noises, shall 1.2.3.11 Measurements shall be recorded according to the
be damped by using appropriate means; “Noise Measurement Report”:
b) the noise generated by a vessel under way shall not – on board vessel in accordance with International Standard
exceed 75,0 dB(A) at lateral distance of 25,0 m from the ISO 2923:2003;
vessel’s side; – air noise emitted from vessel in accordance with
c) apart from transhipment operations the noise generated European Standard EN ISO 2922:2013.
by a stationary vessel shall not exceed 65,0 dB(A) at a
lateral distance of 25,0 m from the vessel’s side; 1.2.4 Operation in inclined position
d) for item c), the noise may exceed 65,0 dB(A) at a lateral Main propulsion machinery and all auxiliary
distance of 25,0 m from the vessel’s side of any machinery essential to the propulsion and the safety of the
stationary floating equipment while its working gear is vessel are, as fitted in the vessel, to be designed to operate
operating. when the vessel is upright and when inclined at any angle of

June 2018 3
list either way and trim by bow or stern as stated in Table 1.2.6.3 For the drive of such machinery as windlasses, life
1.2.4-1. boats, portable I.C. engine-driven fire and drain pumps and
start-up auxiliary machinery liquid fuel with a flashpoint of
Table 1.2.4-1 less than 55°C may be used.
Permanent inclination of vessel 1.2.6.4 The provisions of Annex 8 (Section I) of ES-TRIN
apply to vessels equipped with propulsion or auxiliary
Installation, Angle of inclination 1) systems operating on liquefied natural gas (LNG - natural gas
components Athwartship Fore and aft that has been liquefied by cooling it to a temperature of -
Main and auxiliary 161°C) and address all areas that need special consideration
12° 5° for the usage of liquefied natural gas as fuel.
machinery 2)
Notes: 1.2.7 Power of the main machinery and astern power
1) Athwartship and fore-and-aft inclinations may occur
simultaneously. 1.2.7.1 Unless otherwise stated in each Section of this
2) Higher angle values may be required depending on vessel Chapter, where scantlings of components are based on
operating conditions. power, the values to be used are determined as follows:
– for main propulsion machinery, the power/rotational
1.2.5 Ambient conditions to ensure proper operation speed for which classification is requested;
of machinery and appliances
– for auxiliary machinery, the power/rotational speed
Machinery and systems covered by the Rules shall which is available in service.
be designed to operate properly under the ambient conditions
1.2.7.2 In the case of main propulsion systems with
specified in Table 1.2.5-1, unless otherwise specified.
reversing gears, controllable pitch propellers or electric
1.2.6 Approved fuels propulsion plants, running astern shall not lead to the
overload of propulsion machinery in excess of permissible
1.2.6.1 The flash point of liquid fuels for the operation of values. Where a disengaging coupling (clutch) is applied in
boilers and diesel engines installations shall be above 55°C. the propulsion system, engaging of the coupling must not
For emergency generating sets, however, use may be made of create overload in the propulsion system (temporary, impact,
fuels with a flash point of ≥ 43°C. dynamic) which may lead to the damage to the system
1.2.6.2 In exceptional cases, for vessels intended for elements.
operation in restricted geographical areas or where special 1.2.7.3 Where vessels have only one propulsion engine,
precautions subject to the Register’s approval are taken, fuels that engine shall not be shut down automatically except in
with flash points between 43°C and 55°C may also be used. order to protect against overspeed.
This is conditional upon the requirement that the
temperatures of the spaces in which fuels are stored or used 1.2.7.4 Where vessels have only one propulsion engine,
shall invariably be 10°C below the flash point. Proper that engine may be equipped with an automatic device for the
measures to be taken to fulfil this requirement shall be reduction of the engine speed only if an automatic reduction
separately considered by the Register on a case by case basis. of the engine speed is indicated both visually and audibly in
the wheelhouse and the device for the reduction of the engine
speed can be switched off from the helmsman’s position.
Table 1.2.5-1
Ambient conditions 1.2.7.5 For vessels with twin hulls, the failure of the
machinery installation of one hull is not to put the machinery
Air temperature installation of the other hull out of action.
Location, arrangement Temperature range 1.2.7.6 Vessels and convoys shall achieve a speed in
In enclosed spaces between 0°C and + 40°C relation to the water of at least 13,0 km/h. That condition is
(+ 45°C in tropical zone) 1) not mandatory where pusher/tugs are operating solo.
On machinery components,
boilers according to specific local NOTE: The inspection body may allow derogations to
In spaces subjects to higher or conditions vessels and convoys operating solely in estuaries and ports.
lower temperatures During tests, the following conditions shall be met
On exposed decks between - 20°C and + 40°C in the same way as for the stopping test:
(+ 45°C in tropical zone) a) the keel clearance set out in 1.2.8.1 shall be complied
Water temperature with;
Coolant Temperature range b) the measuring, recording, registration and evaluation of
River water or, if applicable, test data shall be carried out according to the procedure
up to + 25°C in general described in Annex 1 to instruction ESI-II-3 - Measuring,
river water at charge air
up to + 32°C in tropical zone recording and registration of data collected during
coolant inlet
Notes: stopping manoeuvre tests (ES-TRIN).
1) Different temperatures may be accepted by the Register in 1.2.7.7 The machinery installation shall provide sufficient
the case of vessels intended for restricted service. astern power to maintain manoeuvring of the vessel under all
normal service circumstances.

4 June 2018
The main propulsion machinery of a vessel (or a Evasion action tests shall be complied with keeping
pusher with laden convoy) shall be capable of maintaining in a keel clearance of at least 20 % of the draught, but not less
free route astern at least 70% of the rated rotation speed for a than 0,5 m.
period of at least 30 min.
1.2.8.6 Notwithstanding 1.2.8.4 and 1.2.8.5, the following
1.2.7.8 During the river trials, the ability of the main requirements shall be met:
propulsion machinery to reverse the direction of thrust of the a) for manually controlled steering systems, a single turn of
propeller shall be demonstrated and recorded (see 15.3.2.3). the wheel shall correspond to a rudder angle of at least
For passenger vessels and special purpose vessels, 3°;
Register may require increased power in free route astern. b) for powered steering systems, when the rudder is at
maximum immersion, it shall be possible to achieve an
1.2.8 Stopping capacity, turning capacity, capacity for
average angular velocity of 4 °/s over the rudder’s entire
taking evasive action and capacity for going
turning range.
astern
This requirement shall also be checked, with the
1.2.8.1 Vessels and convoys shall be able to stop facing vessel at full speed, for moving the rudder over a range from
downstream in good time while remaining adequately 35° port to 35° starboard. In addition, it shall be checked
manoeuvrable. The vessels and convoys shall carry out a test whether the rudder keeps the position of maximum angle at
in flowing water (current velocity of 1,5 m/s), or in standing maximum propulsion power. For active steering systems or
water (current velocity of less than 0,2 m/s), in a test area as special types of rudder, this provision applies mutatis
referred to in 15.3.1.2, to prove that they are capable of mutandis.
stopping facing downstream only with their propulsion
system without the use of anchors. 1.2.8.7 If any of the additional equipment is needed in
order to reach the required manoeuvring capacities, it shall
Vessels and convoys are deemed able to stop facing
comply with the requirements of Section 8.
downstream in good time when this is proved during a test of
stopping in relation to the ground facing downstream at an 1.2.8.8 The measurements, reports and recording of data
initial speed in relation to the water of 13,0 km/h, with a keel shall be carried out according to the procedure set out in
clearance equal to at least 20% of the draught but not less Annex 2 to instruction ESI-II-4 - Report on evasive action
than 0,5 m. Throughout the entire test, the vessel or the manoeuvre and turning capacity (ES-TRIN).
convoy shall have adequate manoeuvrability.
1.2.8.9 Where the stopping manoeuvre required by 1.2.8.1
1.2.8.2 Where vessels and convoys with a length L of not is carried out in standing water it shall be followed by a
more than 86,0 m and with a breath B of not more than 22,9 navigation test while going astern.
m the stopping capacity mentioned in 1.2.8.1 may be
replaced by turning capacity. 1.2.9 Safety devices
1.2.8.3 Vessels and convoys with a length L of not more 1.2.9.1 Where risk from overspeeding of machinery exists,
than 86,0 m or with a breath B of not more than 22,9 m shall means shall be provided to ensure that the safe speed is not
be able to turn in good time. exceeded.
That turning capacity may be replaced by the 1.2.9.2 Where main or auxiliary machinery including
stopping capacity referred to in 1.2.8.1. pressure vessels or any parts of such machinery are subject to
The turning capacity shall be proven by means of internal pressure and may be subject to dangerous
turning manoeuvres against the current. During the test overpressure, means shall be provided, where practicable, to
involving turning, bow anchors may be used. protect against such excessive pressure.
1.2.8.4 The turning capacity of vessels and convoys 1.2.9.3 Main internal combustion propulsion machinery
mentioned in 1.2.8.3 shall be considered sufficient when and auxiliary machinery shall be provided with automatic
during an upstream turning manoeuvre with an initial speed shut-off arrangements in the case of failures, such as
in relation to the water of 13,0 km/h, the limit values for lubricating oil supply failure, which could lead rapidly to
stopping facing downstream established in instruction ESI-II- complete breakdown, serious damage or explosion. Register
3 (ES-TRIN - Prescribed forward speed, stopping capacity may permit, on case by case basis, provisions for overriding
and capacity for going astern) are complied with. automatic shut-off devices. For vessels with only one main
The keel clearance conditions according to 1.2.8.1 engine, see 1.2.7.3 and 1.2.7.4.
shall be complied with. 1.2.9.4 Where connections exist between systems or plant
1.2.8.5 Vessels and convoys shall be able to take evasive items which are designed for different forces, pressures and
action in good time. That capacity shall be proven by means temperatures (stresses), safety devices shall be fitted which
of evasive manoeuvres carried out within a test area. This prevent the overstressing of the system or plant item designed
shall be proved by simulated evasive action manoeuvres to for the lower design parameters. To preclude damage, such
port and starboard with prescribed values whereby for systems shall be fitted with devices affording protection
specific turning speeds of the vessel in response to putting against excessive pressures and temperatures and/or against
across and then checking the helm a certain time limit shall overflow.
be complied with.

June 2018 5
1.2.10 Control, indicating and monitoring equipment That requirement shall also apply where, in
and steering system convoys, the steering system fitted to vessel other than those
powering the convoy is used.
1.2.10.1 Main and auxiliary machinery essential for the
propulsion, control and safety of the vessel shall be provided 1.2.10.11 In wheelhouses designed for radar navigation by
with effective means for its operation and control. All control one person:
systems essential for the propulsion, control and safety of the a) the radar screen shall not be shifted significantly out of
vessel shall be independent or so designed that failure of one the helmsman’s axis of view in its normal position;
of them does not degrade the performance of the other.
b) the radar image shall continue to be perfectly visible,
1.2.10.2 It shall be possible to control and monitor the main without a mask or screen, whatever the lighting
engines and steering systems from the steering position. Main conditions outside the wheelhouse;
engines fitted with a disengaging coupling (clutch) which can c) the rate-of-turn indicator shall be installed directly above
be actuated from the steering position, or driving a or below the radar image or be incorporated into this.
controllable pitch propeller which can be controlled from the
steering position, need only to be capable of being started up 1.2.10.12 Where a wheelhouse has been designed for radar
and shut down from the engine room. navigation by one person, the helmsman shall be able to
accomplish his task while seated and all of the display or
1.2.10.3 The starting and reversing arrangements shall be so monitoring instruments and all of the controls needed for
designed and placed in such a way that each engine can be operation of the vessel shall be arranged in such a way that
started or reversed by a single operator. The force applied to the helmsman may use them comfortably while the vessel is
the handle in this case is not to exceed 160,0 N. under way without leaving his position or losing sight of the
1.2.10.4 Proper working direction of control handles and radar screen.
hand-wheels shall be clearly indicated by arrows and relevant 1.2.10.13 For control and monitoring equipment, see the
inscriptions. present Rules, Chapter II, 16.1.
1.2.10.5 The control for each main engine shall take the
1.2.11 Turning appliances
form of a single lever which prescribes an arc within a
vertical plane that is approximately parallel to the 1.2.11.1 Machinery shall be equipped with suitable and
longitudinal axis of the vessel. Movement of that lever adequately dimensioned turning appliances.
towards the bow of the vessel shall cause forward motion,
whereas movement of the lever towards the stern shall cause 1.2.11.2 The turning appliances shall be of the self-locking
the vessel to go astern. Clutch engagement and reversal of the type. Electric motors shall be fitted with suitable retaining
direction of motion shall take place about the neutral position brakes.
of that lever. The lever shall catch in the neutral position. 1.2.11.3 An automatic interlocking device shall be provided
1.2.10.6 The duration of reversing (a period of time from the to ensure that the propulsion and auxiliary prime movers
reversing of a steering control to the beginning of the cannot start up while the turning gear is engaged. In case of
propeller operation with a thrust opposite in direction) is not manual turning installations warning devices may be
to exceed: provided alternatively.
– 25 seconds at full speed; 1.2.12 Machinery spaces
– 15 seconds at low speed; 1.2.12.1 Main and auxiliary engines, assemblies and
depending on the vessel’s speed. equipment shall be so arranged as to provide passages from
1.2.10.7 Control arrangements shall be so designed as to the control stations and attendance positions to the exits of
eliminate the possibility of spontaneously changing the machinery spaces. The width of the passages shall be at least
positions prescribed. 600,0 mm. Free passage width may be reduced locally to
500,0 mm.
1.2.10.8 The direction of the propulsion thrust imparted to
The width of escape ladders and exit doors shall be
the vessel and the rotational speed of the propeller or main
at least 600,0 mm.
engines shall be displayed.
1.2.12.2 Each machinery space, shafting tunnels and every
1.2.10.9 Vessels with wheelhouses designed for radar
space where main distribution switchboards are installed
navigation by one person shall be steered by means of a
shall have two exits, one of which may lead through
lever. It shall be possible to move that lever easily by hand.
watertight door to a space which has independent exit way.
The position of the lever in relation to the longitudinal axis of
The second exit shall lead directly to an open deck: for this
the vessel shall correspond precisely to the position of the
purpose a vertical steel ladder may be used. Exits shall
rudder blades. It shall be possible to release hold of the lever
located as far apart as practicable from each other. Ladder
in any given position without that of the rudder blades
trunks shall have free dimensions not less than 600 x 600
changing. The neutral position of the lever shall be clearly
mm.
perceptible.
1.2.12.3 The second exit may be dispensed with if:
1.2.10.10 Where the vessel is fitted with bow rudders or
special rudders, particularly for going astern, these shall be – the total floor area (average length times average width at
actuated in wheelhouses designed for radar navigation by one the level of the floor plating) of the engine or boiler room
person by special levers which, mutatis mutandis, meet the does not exceed 35,0 m2; and
requirements set out in 1.2.10.9.

6 June 2018
– the path between each point where servicing or 1.2.13.4 With each new command, stored commands shall
maintenance operations shall be carried out and the exit, be erased and replaced by the new input.
or foot of the companionway near the exit providing
access to the outside, is not longer than 5,0 m; and 1.2.13.5 In the case of set speed stages, a facility shall be
provided to change the speed in the individual stages.
– a fire extinguisher is located at the servicing point that is
furthest removed from the exit door, and also, by way of 1.2.13.6 An overload limitation facility shall be provided for
derogation from the present Rules, Chapter III, 5.5.2, g), the propulsion machinery.
where the installed power of the engines does not exceed
1.2.13.7 It shall be possible to stop the propeller thrust from
100 kW.
the wheelhouse independently of the remote control system.
1.2.12.4 If two adjacent machinery spaces communicate
1.2.13.8 Manual emergency stop
through a door and each of them has only one escape way
through its casing, these escape ways shall be located at the Manual emergency stops shall be protected against
opposite vessel sides. unintentional activation.
The manual emergency stop shall not be
1.2.12.5 All the doors, covers of companion ways and
automatically cancelled.
skylights through which it is possible to leave the machinery
spaces shall be capable of being operable (opened and It shall be recognizable which manual emergency
closed) both from inside and outside. The locking devices stop has been activated.
shall be made from steel or an equivalent non-combustible The monitored open-circuit principle shall be
material. applied to manual emergency stops. Equivalent monitoring
The covers of companion ways and skylights shall principles are permitted.
bear a clear inscription prohibiting to stow any load on them. Following emergency manual shutdown or
The cover of skylights which do not serve as escape ways automatic shutdown of the main propulsion plant, a restart
shall be fitted with closing device arranged for locking them shall only be possible via the stop position of the command
from outside. entry.
Companionways and ladders providing access to 1.2.13.9 The failure of the remote control system and of the
machinery spaces shall be firmly attached and be made of control power shall not result in any sudden change in the
steel or another shock-resistant and non-combustible propulsion power nor in the speed and direction of rotation of
material. the propeller. In individual cases, the Register may approve
1.2.12.6 Service gangways, operating platforms intended for other failure conditions, whereby it is assumed that:
maintenance and repair of the engines, equipment, devices – there is no increase in vessel’s speed;
and other facilities, stairways and other areas open to access – there is no course change;
during operation shall be safeguarded by guard rails.
– no unintentional start-up processes are initiated.
The outside edges of platforms and floor areas shall
be fitted with coamings unless some other means is adopted Local control shall be possible from local control
to prevent persons and objects from sliding off. positions. The local control positions shall be independent
from remote control of propulsion machinery and continue to
1.2.12.7 The distance from the outer surface of the boiler operate 15 minutes after a black out (see the present Rules,
insulation to the walls of the fuel oil and lubrication oil tanks, Chapter II, 1.2.19).
should be at least 600,0 mm.
1.2.13.10 The failure of the remote control system and of the
1.2.12.8 Walls, ceilings and doors of machinery spaces shall control power shall be signalled by an alarm.
be made of steel or another equivalent non-combustible
material. 1.2.13.11 Wheelhouse and engine room shall be fitted with
indicators indicating that the remote control system is
1.2.13 Remote control of machinery installations operative.
1.2.13.1 The remote control shall be capable to control 1.2.13.12 Remote control systems for main propulsion plants
speed, direction of thrust, and as appropriate torque or are subject to mandatory type approval.
propeller pitch without restriction under all navigating and 1.2.13.13 The transfer of control between the wheelhouse and
operating conditions. machinery space shall be possible only in the machinery area.
1.2.13.2 Commands entered into the remote control system 1.2.13.14 It shall be ensured that control is only possible from
from the wheelhouse shall be recognizable at all control one control station at any time. Transfer of command from
stations. one control station to another shall only be possible when the
1.2.13.3 The remote control system shall carry out respective control levers are in the same position and when a
commands which are ordered, including emergency signal to accept the transfer is given from the selected control
manoeuvres, in accordance with the propulsion plant station. A display at each control station shall indicate
manufacturer’s specifications. whether the control station in question is in operation.
Where critical speed ranges are incorporated, their 1.2.13.15 Each local control position, including partial
quick passing shall be guaranteed and a reference input control (e.g. local control of controllable pitch propellers or
within them have to be inhibited. disengaging couplings) shall be provided with means of
communication with the remote control position.

June 2018 7
1.3 Arrangement of machinery and equipment Particular care shall be taken to obtain a perfect
and installation on board levelling and general alignment between the propulsion
engines and their shafting.
1.3.1 General
1.3.3.2 Chocking resins shall be type approved. Where it is
1.3.1.1 The machinery and equipment shall be fitted and necessary to install engines or machinery on elastic pads, the
fastened to strong and rigid foundations. Boilers shall be pads shall be of a design approved by the Register.
installed on foundations so that their welded joints do not rest The installation of engines on composite material
on supports. pads is subject to the Register acceptance on a case by case
1.3.1.2 Provision shall be made to facilitate cleaning, basis. The composite material shall be approved by the
inspection and maintenance of main propulsion and auxiliary Register.
machinery, including boilers and pressure vessels. 1.3.3.3 The bolts fixing main engines, auxiliary engines
Easy access to the various parts of the propulsion and machinery, and shaft bearings to their foundations as
machinery shall be provided by means of metallic ladders well as the bolts connecting particular segments of the
and gratings fitted with strong and safe handrails. Spaces shafting shall be secured against loosening.
containing main and auxiliary machinery shall be provided
with adequate lighting and ventilation. 1.3.3.4 Generator prime movers shall be fitted on the same
foundations where their generators are installed.
1.3.1.3 Engines shall be installed and fitted in such a way
as to be adequately accessible for operation and maintenance, 1.3.4 Safety devices on moving parts
and shall not endanger the persons assigned to those tasks. It 1.3.4.1 Moving parts, flywheels, chain and belt drives,
shall be possible to make them secure against unintentional couplings, linkages and other components which could
starting. constitute an accident hazard for the operating personnel shall
1.3.1.4 Air compressors shall be fitted in such places where be fitted with guards to prevent contact.
the air, sucked by the compressor, contains the minimum 1.3.4.2 When using hand cranks for starting internal
vapours of combustible liquids. combustion engines, steps shall be taken to ensure that the
1.3.1.5 Machinery with horizontal shafts shall be installed crank disengages automatically when the engines start.
parallel to the centre line of the vessel. If their design is in
compliance with requirements of 1.2.4, any other direction is 1.3.5 Measuring and indicating instruments
permitted. 1.3.5.1 Engines and machinery as well as piping systems
shall be fitted with instruments necessary for monitoring their
1.3.2 Floors proper operation. When choosing the type and number of the
1.3.2.1 Floor panels in engine rooms shall be made of instruments guidance provided by manufacturers of the
metal and they shall have slip-free surface underfoot. The machinery and equipment employed in particular installation
floor panels shall be sufficiently rigid and robustly fixed as shall be taken into consideration.
well as easily removable. The floor panel thickness shall be 1.3.5.2 The scales of pressure gauges shall be dimensioned
such as to avoid its sagging while operation. up to the specified test pressure. The maximum permitted
1.3.2.2 The floor panel weight and dimensions shall be operating pressures shall be marked on the pressure gauges
such as to provide its hoisting by one person (maximum for boilers, pressure vessels and in systems protected by
weight of a single panel is 25,0 kg). safety valves.
1.3.2.3 Engine units, assemblies and fittings shall not have 1.3.5.3 Lines leading to pressure gauges shall be installed
prominent parts above the bottom plating in the passages. in such a way that the readings cannot be affected by liquid
Access to such units shall be provided through covers in heads and hydraulic hammer.
floor. Covers and hoisting arrangements shall not have 1.3.5.4 All the measuring and indicating instruments,
prominent parts. except liquid-filled thermometers, shall be checked by testing
1.3.3 Bolting down institutions approved by the Register.
1.3.3.1 Bedplates of machinery, thrust blocks and shaft line 1.3.5.5 All gauges shall be grouped, as far as possible, near
bearing foundations shall be securely fixed to the supporting each manoeuvring position; in any event, they shall be clearly
structures by means of foundation bolts which shall be visible.
distributed as evenly as practicable and of a sufficient 1.3.5.6 Instruments in the fuel and lubricating oil and other
number and size so as to ensure a perfect fit. readily ignitable oil piping systems shall be fitted with valves
Where the bedplates bear directly on the inner or cocks for cutting the instruments off the medium.
bottom plating, the bolts shall be fitted with suitable gaskets
1.3.5.7 Pressure gauges for boilers, heat exchangers and
so as to ensure a tight fit and shall be arranged with their
pressure vessels shall comply with the 5.2.3.5 and 5.5.3.10.
heads within the double bottom.
Continuous contact between bedplates and 1.3.5.8 Accuracy of tachometer indication shall be within ±
foundations along the bolting line shall be achieved by means 2,5% of the measuring range. Where barred speed ranges for
of chocks of suitable thickness, carefully arranged to ensure a main engines are specified, they shall be clearly and durably
complete contact. marked on the indicating dials of all tachometers (see 14.5.5).

8 June 2018
1.3.6 Bilge wells/bilges the shipboard installation. In such cases, the Register shall be
informed in advance and the tests shall be carried out in
1.3.6.1 Bilge wells and bilges shall be readily accessible, accordance with the provisions of the Rules, Part 26 –
easy to clean and either easily visible or adequately lit. Welding and Part 25 – Metallic materials relative to
1.3.6.2 Bilges beneath electrical machines shall be incomplete tests.
arranged and designed in such way as to prevent water from
penetrating into machinery at all angles of inclination and 1.4.2 All boilers and pressure vessels, all parts of
movements of the vessel in service. machinery, all steam, hydraulic, pneumatic and other systems
and their associated fittings which are under internal pressure
1.3.7 Markings and identification of machinery parts shall be subjected to appropriate tests including a pressure
test before being put into service for the first time as detailed
In order to avoid unnecessary operating and in the other Sections of this Chapter.
switching errors, all parts of the machinery whose function is
not immediately apparent shall be adequately marked and 1.4.3 Tests on board
labelled.
1.4.3.1 Trials on board of machinery are detailed in Section
1.3.8 Hot surfaces and fire protection 15.
1.3.8.1 Surfaces, having temperature exceeding 60°C, with 1.4.3.2 For all types of installation, the trials shall be of
which the crew are likely to come into contact during sufficient duration, and carried out under normal
operation shall be suitably protected or insulated. manoeuvring conditions, to prove the machinery under
power. The trials are also to demonstrate that any vibration
Surfaces of machinery with temperatures above
which may occur, within the operating speed range, is
220°C, e.g. steam, thermal oil and exhaust gas lines,
acceptable.
silencers, exhaust gas boilers and turbochargers, shall be
effectively insulated with non-combustible material or
equivalently protected to prevent the ignition of combustible
materials coming into contact with them. Where the
insulation used for this purpose is oil absorbent or may
permit the penetration of oil, the insulation shall be encased
in steel sheathing or equivalent material.
1.3.8.2 Fire protection, detection and extinction shall
comply with the requirements of the present Rules, Chapter
III – Fire protection, detection and extinction.
1.3.8.3 Measures shall be taken to prevent damage to
insulation from vibration and mechanical shocks.
1.3.8.4 On vessels carrying dangerous goods, the surface
temperature of the outer parts of engines used during loading
and unloading operations, as well as that of their air inlets
and exhaust ducts is not to exceed the permissible
temperature according to the temperature class of the
substance carried.
1.3.9 Manual operation

Every functionally important, automatically or
remote controlled system shall also be capable of manual
operation.
1.3.10 Operating and maintenance instructions

Manufacturers of machinery, boilers and auxiliary
equipment shall supply a sufficient number of operating and
maintenance notices and manuals together with the
equipment.
1.4 Tests and trials

1.4.1 Works tests
Equipment and its components are subjected to
works tests which are detailed in the relevant Sections of this
Chapter and shall be witnessed by the Register. Where such
tests cannot be performed in the workshop, Register may
allow them to be carried out on board, provided this is not
judged to be in contrast either with the general characteristics
of the machinery being tested or with particular features of

June 2018 9
service, the ambient conditions given in Table 2.1.7-1 shall

2 INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES be used.
The engine manufacturer is not expected to provide
2.1 General requirements the ambient conditions given in Table 2.1.7-1 at a test bed.
The rating shall be adjusted according to a recognized
2.1.1 The requirements of this Section are related to the
standard accepted by the Register.
internal combustion engines of rated power 55,0 kW and
above, used as main propulsion units and auxiliary units
(including emergency units) as well as to air compressors. Table 2.1.7-1
Application of the present Rules for engines of power below Ambient conditions
55,0 kW is subject to the special consideration by the
Register on a case by case basis. Barometric pressure 1000 mbar
40°C, in general
2.1.2 For the purpose of these Rules, internal combustion Suction air temperature
45°C, in tropical zone
engines are diesel engines. Relative humidity 60%
2.1.3 Engines are of the same type if they do not vary in River water temperature (inlet 25°C, in general
any detail included in the definition in 2.1.4. When two temperature of charge air coolant) 32°C, in tropical zone
engines shall be considered of the same type it is assumed
that they do not substantially differ in design and their design 2.1.8 Rated power and speed
details and that the materials used meet the Rules 2.1.8.1 Rated power is maximum continuous (not time-
requirements and are approved by the Register. limited) power used as the basis for calculations. It is stated
in the Rules and in the documents issued by the Register.
2.1.4 The type of internal combustion engine is defined Rated speed is rotational speed (rpm) corresponding to rated
by the following characteristics: power.
– the cylinder diameter (bore); The maximum continuous power is the maximum
– the piston stroke; power at ambient reference conditions (see Table 2.1.7-1)
– the maximum continuous power per cylinder at which the engine is capable of delivering continuously, at
maximum continuous speed and/or maximum continuous nominal maximum speed, in the period of time between two
brake mean effective pressure1); consecutive overhauls.
– cylinder arrangement (in-line, V-type)2); 2.1.8.2 Diesel engines shall be designed such that their
– working cycle (4-stroke, 2-stroke); rated power when running at rated speed according to the
definitions of the engine manufacturer at ambient conditions
– the method of fuel injection (direct or indirect injection);
as defined in 2.1.7 can be delivered as a continuous power.
– the kind of fuel (liquid, dual-fuel, gaseous); Diesel engines shall be capable of operating continuously
– the gas exchange (naturally aspirated or supercharged); within power range ① in Figure 2.11.12.3-1 and
– the method of pressure charging (impulse system or intermittently in power range ②. The extent of the power
constant pressure system); ranges shall be specified by the engine manufacturer.
– the charging air cooling system (with or without 2.1.8.3 After running on the test bed, the fuel delivery
intercooler, number of stages, etc.); system of main engines is normally to be so adjusted that
– the means of injection control (mechanically controlled, after installation on board overload power cannot be given in
electrically controlled). service. The limitation of the fuel delivery system has to be
secured permanently.
NOTE 1: After a large number of engines have been proved
successfully by service experience, an increase in power up 2.1.8.4 Subject to the approval of the Register, diesel
to maximum 10% may be permitted, without any further type engines for special vessels and applications may be designed
test, provided approval for such power is given (see 2.11.5). for a blocked continuous power which cannot be exceeded.
NOTE 2: One type test suffices for the whole range of 2.1.8.5 Subject to the prescribed conditions, diesel engines
engines having different numbers of cylinders. driving electrical generators shall be capable of overload
operation (110% rated power) in order to utilize 100% of
2.1.5 The engines shall be capable of working with an rated load in parallel operation.
overload exceeding the rated power by at least 10% for not
less than one hour. 2.1.9 Accessibility of engines
The minimum stable speed of the main engines Engines shall be so arranged in the engine room
used for the direct propeller drive shall not be more than 30% that all the assembly holes and inspection ports provided by
of the rated speed. the engine manufacturer for inspections and repairs are
accessible or easily be made accessible. A change of
2.1.6 Diesel-generating sets intended as emergency units
components, as far as practicable on board, shall be possible.
shall be provided with self-contained fuel supply, lubricating
and cooling systems. 2.1.10 Fuels
2.1.7 In determining the power of all engines used on The use of liquid fuels shall comply with the
board inland waterway vessels with unlimited range of requirements in 1.2.6.1.

10 June 2018
Only internal combustion engines burning liquid 2.2.2 The approval of exhaust gas turbochargers, charge
fuels having a flash point of more than 55°C may be air coolers, etc. shall be obtained by the respective
installed. manufacturer.
The use of gaseous fuels is subject to a further
2.2.3 The manufacturer of exhaust gas turbochargers
design approval (see 1.2.6.4).
shall submit to the Register the documents listed in the Rules,
2.2 Documentation to be submitted Part 1 – Classification and Surveys, Chapter II, Table 3.2-2
(items 30. to 36.).
2.2.1 Each engine manufacturer for each type of engine
that is required to be approved, shall submit the documents 2.3 Materials
listed in the Rules, Part 1 – Classification and Surveys,
2.3.1 Approved materials
Chapter II, Table 3.2-2, as far as applicable to the type of the
engine, to the Register for approval or review. After the The mechanical characteristics of materials used for
approval of an engine type has been given by the Register for the components of diesel engines shall meet the requirements
the first time, only those documents as listed in the Rules, of the Rules, Part 25 – Metallic materials. The materials
Part 1 – Classification and Surveys, Chapter II, Table 3.2-2 approved for the various components are shown in Table
which have undergone substantive changes will have to be 2.3.1-1 together with their minimum required characteristics.
submitted again for consideration by the Register. Number of Materials with properties deviating from those specified may
copies to be submitted shall be agreed with the Register. be used only with the Register’s consent.
Where considered necessary, the Register may request further
documents to be submitted.
Table 2.3.1-1
Approved materials
Components Minimum required characteristics

Crankshafts Forged steel
Connecting rods R m ≥ 360 N/mm2
Tie rods
Bolts and studs
Pistons and pistons crowns
Cylinders covers/heads
Camshaft drive wheels
Counterweights
Tie rods Rolled or forged steel rounds
Bolts and studs R m ≥ 360 N/mm2
Bearing transverse girders (weldable) Cast steel
Pistons and piston crowns
Cylinder covers/heads
Camshaft drive wheels
Counterweights
Engine blocks Nodular cast iron, preferably ferritic grades
Bedplates Rm ≥ 370 N/mm2
Cylinder blocks
Pistons and piston crowns
Cylinders covers/heads
Cylinder liners
Counterweights
Flywheels
Valve bodies and similar parts
Engine blocks Lamellar (grey) cast iron
Bedplates R m ≥ 200 N/mm2
Cylinder covers/heads
Cylinder blocks
Cylinder liners
Flywheels
Welded bedplates Shipbuilding steel
Welded engine blocks – All grade D for plates ≤ 25,0 mm thick
– All grade D for plates > 25,0 mm thick or equivalent structural steel, cast in the fully
killed condition and normalized
Bearing transverse girders Weldable cast steel

June 2018 11
2.3.2.4 Girder and frame assemblies should, so far as

2.3.2 Testing of materials possible, be made from one plate or slab, shaped as
2.3.2.1 Engine components shall be tested in accordance necessary, rather than by welding together a number of small
with Table 2.3.2-1 and in compliance with requirements of pieces.
the Rules, Part 25 – Metallic materials and Part 26 –
Welding.
2.4 Hydraulic tests
2.3.2.2 The Register may require carrying out the non- 2.4.1 Parts of internal combustion engines shall be tested
destructive testing of other machinery parts, if there are according to the requirements specified in Table 2.4-1.
doubts about the absence of defects in the part material.
2.4.2 Pressure pipes (cooling water, lubricating oil, fuel
Examination of welded seams for important structural parts
oil, and compressed air pipes), valves and other fittings shall
of engines shall be performed by approved methods of
be subjected to hydraulic tests at 1,5 times the maximum
inspection.
working pressure, but not less than 0,4 MPa.
2.3.2.3 Bedplates and major components of engine Water, oil and air coolers (tube bundles or coils,
structures shall be made with a minimum number of welded shells and heads) not fitted on the engine and filters shall be
joints. Double-welded butt joints shall be adopted wherever subjected to hydraulic tests at 1,5 times the maximum
possible in view of their superior fatigue strength. working pressure, but not less than 0,4 MPa.
Table 2.3.2-1
Testing of materials
Material tests 1) (mech. Non-destructive tests 6)

Engine component properties and chemical Magnetic particle or Ultrasonic
composition) liquid penetrant
1. Crankshaft all all all
2. Crankshaft coupling flange (non- integral)
if bore > 400,0 mm - -
for main power transmissions
3. Coupling bolts for crankshaft if bore > 400,0 mm - -
4. Steel piston crowns 2) if bore > 400,0 mm if bore > 400,0 mm all
5. Connecting rods, together with connecting
all all if bore > 400,0 mm
rod bearing caps
6. Cylinder liners if bore > 300,0 mm - -
7. Steel cylinder covers2) if bore > 300,0 mm if bore > 400,0 mm all
8. Bed plates of welded construction; plates
and transverse bearing girders made of
all all all
forged or cast steel 2), 3)
9. Frames and crankcases of welded
all - -
construction 3)
10. Entablatures of welded construction 3) all - -
11. Tie rods 4) all if bore > 400,0 mm -
12. Shafts and rotors, including blades, for
if bore > 300,0 mm - -
turbochargers 5)
13. Bolts and studs for cylinder covers, main
bearings, and connecting rod bearings; -
if bore > 300,0 mm if bore > 400,0 mm
nuts for tie rods
14. Steel gear wheels for camshaft drives if bore > 400,0 mm if bore > 400,0 mm -
Notes:
1) In addition, material tests may also be required, at the Register’s discretion, for piping and valves for starting air lines and any
other pressure piping fitting on the engines.
2) For items 4., 7. and 8., material tests are also required for parts made of material other than steel: e.g. aluminium and its alloys,
ductile and lamellar or nodular graphite cast iron.
3) Material tests for bedplates, frames, crankcases and entablatures are required even if these parts are not welded and for any
material except grey cast iron.
4) Magnetic particle test of tie rods/stay bolts shall be carried out at each threaded portion which is twice the length of the thread.
5) Evidence of the suitability of the materials shall be supplied to the Register in the form of details of their chemical and mechanical
properties and of the heat treatment applied. Turbine blades shall be built of corrosion and heat resistant materials.
6) Cylinder covers and liners manufactured from lamellar or nodular graphite iron castings may not be suitable for ultrasonic NDT,
depending upon the grain size and geometry. An alternative NDT procedure shall be agreed with Register.

12 June 2018
Table 2.4-1
Test pressures of engine parts
Parts under pressure Test pressure, p t 1)

2)
1. Cylinder cover, cooling water space 0,7
2. Cylinder liner, over the whole length of cooling space 0,7
3. Cylinder jacket, cooling water space 0,4 (but not less than 1,5∙p w )
4. Cylinder block, cooling water space 0,4 (but not less than 1,5∙p w )
5. Fuel injection system:
a) fuel injection pump body, pressure side; 1,5∙p w (or p w + 30,0, if lesser)
b) fuel injection valve; 1,5∙p w (or p w + 30,0, if lesser)
c) fuel injection pipes. 1,5∙p w (or p w + 30,0, if lesser)
6. Hydraulic system: piping, pumps, etc. 1,5∙p w
7. Turbocharger, cooling water space 0,4 (but not less than 1,5∙p w )
8. Exhaust pipe, cooling water space 0,4 (but not less than 1,5∙p w )
9. Engine driven air compressor (cylinders, covers, intercoolers and
aftercoolers):
a) air side; 1,5∙p w
b) water side. 0,4 (but not less than 1,5∙p w )
10. Coolers, each side 3) 0,4 (but not less than 1,5∙p w )
11. Engine driven pumps (lube. oil, water, fuel oil, bilge) 0,4 (but not less than 1,5∙p w )
where:
pt = test pressure, [MPa];
p w = maximum permissible working pressure of component concerned, [MPa].
Notes:
1) In general, parts shall be tested at the hydraulic pressure indicated in this Table. Where design or testing features may call
for modification on these testing requirements, special consideration will be given by the Register.
2) For forged steel cylinder covers and forged steel piston crowns, test methods other than hydrostatic testing may be
accepted, e.g. suitable non-destructive tests and documented dimensional tests.
3) Turbocharger air coolers are tested on the water side only.
2.5 Crankcase 2.5.2.3 If a forced extraction of the oil mist atmosphere

from the crankcase is provided (for mist detection purposes
2.5.1 General for instance), the vacuum in the crankcase is not to exceed
250,0 Pa.
Crankcase construction and crankcase doors shall
be of sufficient strength to withstand anticipated crankcase 2.5.2.4 To avoid interconnection between crankcases and
pressures that may arise during a crankcase explosion taking the possible spread of fire following an explosion, crankcase
into account the installation of explosion relief valves ventilation pipes and oil drain pipes for each engine shall be
required by 2.5.3. Crankcase doors shall be fastened independent of any other engine.
sufficiently securely for them not be readily displaced by a
2.5.2.5 Lubricating oil drain pipes from the engine sump to
crankcase explosion. Crankcase doors and hinged inspection
the drain tank shall be submerged at their outlet ends.
ports shall be equipped with appropriate latches to effectively
prevent unintended closing. 2.5.2.6 The crankcase drain holes shall be fitted with
gratings or screens to prevent stray object from getting into
2.5.2 Ventilation and drainage the drain piping.
2.5.2.1 Ventilation of crankcase, and any arrangement The above requirement also applies to engines
which could produce a flow of external air within the having a dry crankcase.
crankcase, is in principle not permitted except for dual fuel
engines. 2.5.3 Crankcase explosion relief valves for crankcases
of internal combustion engines
2.5.2.2 Crankcase ventilation pipes, where provided, shall
be as small as practicable to minimize the inrush of air after a 2.5.3.1 Internal combustion engines having a cylinder bore
crankcase explosion. of 200,0 mm and above or a crankcase volume of 0,6 m3 and
above shall be provided with crankcase explosion relief
The crankcase vent pipes of engines having a swept
valves in accordance with 2.5.3.5.
volume of more than 50,0 dm3 per row of cylinders shall be
led into the open and protected to prevent the entry of water. 2.5.3.2 Engines having a cylinder bore not exceeding 250,0
Engines with a swept volume of up to 50,0 dm3 per mm shall have at least one valve near each end, but, over
row of cylinders shall be fitted with vent pipes which shall be eight crankthrows, an additional valve shall be fitted near the
covered over to prevent the entry of foreign matter and which middle of the engine.
may not terminate at hot points.

June 2018 13
2.5.3.3 Engines having a cylinder bore exceeding 250,0 accordance with the Rules, Part 1 – Classification and
mm but not exceeding 300,0 mm shall have at least one valve Surveys, Chapter II, Table 3.2-2, item 26.;
in way of each alternate crankthrow, with a minimum of two .13 valves shall be provided with suitable markings that
valves. include the following information:
2.5.3.4 Engines having a cylinder bore exceeding 300,0 – name and address of manufacturer;
mm shall have at least one valve in way of each main – designation and size;
crankthrow. – month/year of manufacture;
2.5.3.5 Relief valves shall comply with the following: – approved installation orientation.
.1 the free area of each relief valve shall not be less than 2.5.3.6 Each relief valve required may be replaced by not
45,0 cm2; more than two valves of smaller cross sectional area provided
.2 the combined free area of the relief valves fitted on an that the free cross sectional area of each valve is not less than
engine must not be less than 115,0 cm2 per cubic meter of 45,0 cm2.
the crankcase gross volume;
2.5.3.7 All other spaces communicating with the
.3 the total volume of the stationary parts within the crankcase, e.g. gear or chain casings for camshafts or similar
crankcase may be discounted in estimating the crankcase drives, shall be equipped with additional safety valves if the
gross volume (rotating and reciprocating components volume of these spaces exceeds 0,6 m3.
shall be included in the gross volume);
2.5.3.8 A warning signboard shall be fitted either on the
.4 crankcase explosion relief valves shall be provided with
control stand or, preferably, on a crankcase door on each side
lightweight spring-loaded valve discs or other quick-
of the engine. It shall specify that the crankcase doors or sight
acting and self-closing devices to relieve a crankcase of
holes, in case of detected oil mist, shall not be opened before
pressure in the event of an internal explosion and to
a reasonable time has passed. The time shall be sufficient to
prevent the inrush of air thereafter;
permit adequate cooling after stopping in the engine.
.5 the valve discs in crankcase explosion relief valves shall
be made of ductile material capable of withstanding the 2.5.3.9 Covers of crankcase openings shall be so
shock of contact with stoppers at the full open position; dimensioned as not to suffer permanent deformation due to
the pressure occurring during the response of the safety
.6 crankcase explosion relief valves shall be designed and
equipment.
constructed to open quickly and be fully open at a
pressure not greater than 0,02 MPa; 2.6 Crankshaft design
.7 crankcase explosion relief valves shall be provided with a
flame arrester that permits flow for crankcase pressure 2.6.1 Design method
relief and prevents passage of flame following a Crankshafts shall be designed to withstand the
crankcase explosion; stresses occurring when the engine runs at rated power and
.8 crankcase explosion relief valves shall be type tested in a the documentation shall be submitted for approval.
configuration which represents the installation Calculations shall be based on the Rules, Part 9 – Machines,
arrangements that will be used on an engine. Type testing 2.4. Other methods of calculation may be used provided that
shall be done in accordance with the IACS UR M66 Type they do not result in crankshaft dimensions smaller than those
Testing Procedure for Crankcase Explosion Relief specified in the most recent edition of the aforementioned
Valves; Rules. Design methods for application to crankshafts of
.9 where crankcase relief valves are provided with special construction and to the crankshafts of engines of
arrangements for shielding emissions from the valve special type shall be agreed with the Register.
following an explosion, the valve shall be type tested to
demonstrate that the shielding does not adversely affect 2.6.2 Split crankshafts
the operational effectiveness of the valve; Fitted bolts or equivalent fastenings shall be used
.10 crankcase explosion relief valves shall be provided with a for assembling split crankshafts.
copy manufacturer’s installation and maintenance manual
that is pertinent to the size and type of valve being 2.7 Systems
supplied for installation on a particular engine. The
manual shall contain the following information: 2.7.1 Fuel oil system
– description of valve with details of function and 2.7.1.1 General requirements relating to fuel oil systems
design limits; are contained in 7.14.
– copy of the type test certificate; All components of the fuel oil system shall be
– installation instructions; designed to withstand the maximum peak pressures which
– maintenance and service instructions to include will be expected in the system.
testing and renewal of any sealing arrangements; 2.7.1.2 The high-pressure oil fuel pumps of the main
– actions required after an explosion in the crankcase; engines shall be equipped with device for quickly shutting-
.11 a copy of the installation and maintenance manual off the fuel supply to any cylinder of the engine. Exemption
required by .10 shall be provided on board vessel; from this requirement is permitted for engines with cylinders
not over 180,0 mm in diameter having grouped oil fuel
.12 plans of showing details and arrangements of crankcase
pumps.
explosion relief valves shall be submitted for approval in

14 June 2018
2.7.1.3 Relief valves discharging back to the suction of the 2.7.2.3 The combination of the oil drainage lines from the
pumps or other equivalent means shall be fitted on the crankcases of two or more engines shall not be permitted (see
delivery side of the pumps. Precautions shall be taken to 2.5.2.4).
prevent any oil that may escape under pressure from any
pump, filter or heater from coming into contact with heated 2.7.2.4 Main lubricating oil pumps driven by the engine
surfaces. shall be designed to maintain the supply of lubricating oil
over the entire operating range of the engine.
2.7.1.4 The high-pressure oil fuel pipes shall be made from
thick-walled seamless steel pipes without welded or soldered 2.7.3 Filters
intermediate joints. Only pipe connections with metal sealing 2.7.3.1 Lubricating oil filters for main engines
surfaces or equivalent pipe connections of approved design
may be used for fuel injection lines. 2.7.3.1.1 Lubricating oil lines shall be fitted with lubricating
oil filters located in the main oil flow on the delivery side of
2.7.1.5 As far as practicable fuel oil lines, as well as the pumps. Steps shall be taken to ensure that main flow
lubricating oil lines and oils used in power transmission filters can be cleaned without interrupting operation. This
systems, control and activating systems and heating systems requirement is considered to be satisfied by switch-over
shall be arranged far apart from hot surfaces, electrical duplex filters, automatic filters or equivalent devices of
installations or other sources of ignition and screened or approved design.
otherwise suitably protected to prevent oil spraying or oil 2.7.3.1.2 On main engines with a rated power of up to 220
leakage onto the sources of ignition, hot surfaces, or kW, fitted with a lubricating oil line supplied from the engine
machinery air intakes. The number of joints in such piping oil sump, simplex filters may be fitted provided that they are
system shall be kept to a minimum. equipped with a pressure alarm behind the filter and provided
2.7.1.6 External high-pressure fuel oil delivery pipes of also that the filter can be changed during operation. For this
diesel engines, between the high-pressure fuel pumps and purpose, a by-pass with manually operated shut-off valves
fuel injectors shall be protected with a jacketed piping system shall be provided. The switch positions shall be clearly
capable of containing fuel from a high-pressure pipe failure. recognizable.
The jacketed pipe incorporates an outer pipe into which the 2.7.3.2 Lubricating oil filters for auxiliary engines
high-pressure fuel pipe is placed forming a permanent
assembly. For auxiliary engines, simplex filters are sufficient.
2.7.1.7 The jacketed piping system shall include a means 2.7.3.3 Fuel filters for main engines
for collection of leakages and prevent either oil spill or The supply lines to fuel-injection pumps shall be
spraying on engine parts or engine surrounding, which may fitted with switch-over duplex filters or automatic filters.
cause fire. Arrangements shall be provided with an alarm in
2.7.3.4 Fuel filters for auxiliary engines
case of a fuel line failure, except that an alarm is not required
for engines with no more than two cylinders. For auxiliary engines, simplex filters are sufficient.
2.7.1.8 If flexible hoses are used for shielding purposes, 2.7.3.5 Filter arrangements
these shall be approved by the Register. 2.7.3.5.1 Fuel and lubricating oil filters which shall be
mounted directly on the engine shall not be located above
2.7.1.9 When in fuel oil return piping the pulsation of
rotating parts or in immediate proximity of hot components.
pressure with peak to peak values exceeds 2,0 MPa, shielding
Where the arrangement stated here before is unfeasible, the
of this piping is also required as above.
rotating parts and the hot components shall be sufficiently
2.7.1.10 Leaking fuel shall be safely drained away at zero shielded.
excess pressure. Care shall be taken to ensure that leaking 2.7.3.5.2 Drip pans of suitable size shall be mounted under
fuel cannot become mixed with the engine lubricating oil. fuel filters. The same applies to lubricating oil filters if oil
2.7.1.11 Jacketed piping systems need not be applied to can escape when the filter is opened.
engines on open decks operating windlasses and capstans. 2.7.3.5.3 Switch-over filters with two or more filter
chambers shall be fitted with devices ensuring a safe relief of
2.7.1.12 For vessels classed for restricted navigation, the pressure before opening and venting when a chamber is
requirements 2.7.1.6 to 2.7.1.9 may be relaxed at the placed in service. Shut-off valves shall normally be used for
Register’s discretion. this purpose. It shall be clearly discernible which filter
2.7.2 Lubricating oil system chambers are in service and which are out of operation at any
time.
2.7.2.1 General requirements relating to lubricating oil
systems are contained in 7.15. Main and auxiliary engines 2.7.4 Cooling system
having a rated power of 50,0 kW and above, shall be fitted 2.7.4.1 General requirements relating to the design of
with an alarm device with audible and visual signals in case cooling water systems are contained in 7.16.
of failure in the lubricating oil system as well as pressure
drop in lubricating oil system (see 2.9.4.2). 2.7.4.2 Main cooling water pumps driven by the engine
shall be designed to maintain the supply of cooling water
2.7.2.2 Engines whose sumps serve as oil reservoirs shall over the entire operating range of the engine.
be so equipped that the oil level can be established and, if
necessary, topped up during operation. Means shall be
provided for completely draining the oil sump.

June 2018 15
2.7.4.3 If cooling air is drawn from the engine room, the components are subject when in service (see Table 2.3.2-
design of the cooling system shall be based on a room 1, item 12.). Where composite materials are used, their
temperature of at least 40°C. method of manufacture shall be described;
2.7.4.4 The exhaust air of air-cooled engines may not cause .4 turbocharger casings shall be from ductile materials
any unacceptable heating of the spaces in which the plant is (minimum 90% ferritic structure) and properly heat
installed. The exhaust air is normally to be led to the open air treated in order to achieve the required microstructure
through special ducts. and ductility as well as to remove residual stresses.
Deviations from the standard heat treatment have to be
2.7.4.5 Notwithstanding the provisions of 7.4.6, in the approved separately by the Register. For turbocharger
system of internal circulation of fresh water cooling the casings certificate for material issued by the manufacturer
engine short segments of hose pipe connected with a pipeline (EN 10204, type 3.1), may be accepted;
by a hose clip is permitted. Pipes connected to the hose pipes .5 the Register may require to carry out the non-destructive
shall be safely fixed to the engine, and the hoses so shaped testing for the wheels, blades and welded joints of
and fixed with band pipe hangers as to preclude their rotating parts;
disconnection due to the engine vibration.
.6 the air inlet of the turbocharger shall be fitted with a filter
2.7.5 Exhaust arrangements in order to minimise the entrance of dirt or water;
2.7.5.1 General requirements relating to exhaust systems .7 for documentation, see the Rules, Part 1 – Classification
are contained in 7.12. and Surveys, Chapter II, Table 3.2-2.
2.7.5.2 Exhaust pipes from engines shall be installed 2.7.6.1.2 Type test
separately from each other with regard to structural fire Turbochargers shall be type approved, either
protection. The pipes shall be so installed that no exhaust separately or as part of an engine. The type test shall be
gases can penetrate into accommodation spaces. Account carried out on a standard turbocharger.
shall be taken of thermal expansion when laying out and A type test shall consist of a hot gas running test of
suspending the lines. at least one hour duration at the maximum permissible speed
2.7.5.3 All hot surfaces shall be properly insulated and/or and maximum permissible temperature. Following the test
water cooled in such a way that the surface temperature the turbocharger shall be completely dismantled for
cannot exceed 220°C at any point. Insulating materials shall examination of all parts.
be non-combustible. Insulation material used in engine rooms Alternative arrangements will be specially
shall be protected against the intrusion of fuel, lubricant and considered.
fuel lubricant vapours. Manufacturers who have facilities to test the
2.7.5.4 The exhaust gas lines of main and auxiliary engines turbocharger on a diesel engine for which the turbocharger
shall be fitted with efficient silencers. shall be approved, may consider to substitute the hot running
test by a one hour test run at overload (110% of the rated
2.7.5.5 In engines fitted with the exhaust gas turbochargers diesel engine output).
which operate on the impulse system, provision shall be
made to prevent broken piston rings and valve pieces from 2.7.6.1.3 Dynamic balancing
entering the turbine casing. Each shaft and bladed wheel as well as the
complete rotating assembly shall be dynamically balanced
2.7.5.6 Where the exhausts of two or more engines are led individually in accordance with the approved quality control
to a common silencer or exhaust gas boiler, a suitable procedure. For assessment of the balancing conditions the
isolating device shall be provided in each exhaust pipe (see DIN ISO 1940 standard or comparable regulations may be
7.12.2.4). referred to.
2.7.6 Supercharging 2.7.6.1.4 Overspeed test
2.7.6.1 Exhaust gas turbochargers All wheels (compressor and turbine), when
machine finished and compete with all fittings and blades,
2.7.6.1.1 General requirements have to undergo an overspeed test for 3 minutes at 20% over
.1 Turbochargers shall be designed to operate at least under the maximum operational speed at room temperature, or 10%
the ambient conditions given in 1.2.4 and 1.2.5. The over the maximum permissible speed at maximum
arrangement and installation shall be such as to avoid any permissible working temperature.
unacceptable load on the turbocharger; If each forged wheel is individually controlled by
.2 bearing lubrication shall not be impaired by exhaust an approved non-destructive examination method no
gases or by adjacent hot components. Leakage oil and oil overspeed test may be required except for wheels of type test
vapours shall be evacuated in such a way that they do not unit.
come into contact with parts at temperatures equal or
above their self-ignition temperature; 2.7.6.1.5 Mechanical running test (bench test)
.3 exhaust gas turbocharger materials shall fulfil the Each turbocharger has to pass a test run.
requirements imposed by the operating conditions of the Turbochargers shall be given a mechanical running
individual components. In the choice of materials, test of 20 minutes with an overload (110% of the rated diesel
account shall be taken of effects such as creep, thermal engine output) on the engine for which the turbocharger is
fatigue, oxidation and corrosion to which individual intended.

16 June 2018
This test may be replaced by a separate test of the – running the engine in the direction opposite to the desired
turbocharger unit for 20 minutes at maximum operational one;
speed and working temperature. – reversing the engine when the fuel oil supply is cut-in;
In case of sufficient verification of the – starting the engine before reversal is completed;
turbocharger’s performance during the test, a subsequent
dismantling is required only in case of abnormalities such as – starting the engine with the power-driven turning gear
high vibrations or excessive noise or other deviations of engaged.
operational parameters such as temperatures, speed, pressures 2.8.2 Speed governor and overspeed protective device
to the expected operational data. for main internal combustion engines
Upon application, with details of an historical audit
covering previous testing of turbochargers manufactured 2.8.2.1 Each main engine shall be fitted with a speed
under an approved quality assurance scheme, consideration governor so adjusted that the engine speed cannot exceed the
will be given to confining the test outlined above to a rated speed by more than 15%.
representative sample of turbochargers. 2.8.2.2 In addition to this speed governor each main engine
2.7.6.1.6 Hydraulic tests having a rated power of 220 kW and above, and which can be
declutched or which drives a controllable pitch propeller,
The cooling spaces of turbochargers shall be shall be fitted with a separate overspeed protective device so
subjected to hydraulic tests at a pressure of 0,4 MPa or 1,5 adjusted that the engine speed cannot exceed the rated speed
times the maximum working pressure, whichever is the by more than 20%. Equivalent arrangements may be accepted
greater (see Table 2.4-1, item 7.). upon special consideration.
2.7.6.1.7 Dimensional control The overspeed protective device, including its
Rotating parts, turbine, compressor wheels and driving mechanism, has to be independent from the required
shaft, of turbochargers are subjected for dimension control governor.
before assembly of the turbocharger. 2.8.2.3 When electronic speed governors of main internal
2.7.6.1.8 For main propulsion engine equipped with exhaust combustion engines form part of a remote control system,
gas turbochargers, means shall be provided to ensure that they shall comply with the IACS UR M43.8 and M43.10 or
engine can be operated with sufficient power (not less than M47 and namely with the following conditions:
20% of the rated power) to give the vessel a navigable speed – if lack of power to the governor may cause major and
in case of failure of one of the turbocharger. sudden changes in the present speed and direction of
2.7.6.1.9 Exhaust gas turbochargers shall not exhibit any thrust of the propeller, backup power supply shall be
critical speed ranges over the entire operating range of the provided;
engine. The lubricating oil supply shall also be ensured – local control of the engines is always to be possible, as
during start-up and run-down of the exhaust gas required by IACS UR M43.10, and, to this purpose, from
turbochargers. Even at low engine speeds, main engines shall the local control position it shall be possible to disconnect
be supplied with charge air in a manner to ensure reliable the remote signal, bearing in mind that the speed control
operation. according to 2.8.2.1, is not available unless an additional
2.7.6.2 Charge air cooling separate governor is provided for such local mode of
control.
2.7.6.2.1 Means shall be provided for regulating the
temperature of the charge air within the temperature range In addition, electronic speed governors and their
specified by the engine manufacturer. The charge air lines of actuators shall be type tested.
engines with charge air coolers shall be provided with
2.8.3 Speed governor, overspeed protective and
sufficient means of drainage (drain cocks).
governing characteristics of generator prime
2.7.6.2.2 The air intake pipes of engines and charging units movers
shall be fitted with safety nets.
2.8.3.1 Prime movers for driving generators of the main
2.7.7 Turning gear and emergency sources of electrical power shall be fitted
with a speed governor. The speed governor shall prevent
Engines shall be equipped with suitable and
transient frequency variations in the electrical network in
adequately dimensioned hand-operated turning appliances:
excess of ±10% of the rated frequency with a recovery time
where deemed necessary, the turning gear shall be both hand
to steady state conditions not exceeding 5 seconds, when the
and mechanically-operated. The turning appliances shall be
maximum electrical step load is switched on or off. In the
of the self-locking type. Automatic interlocking devices shall
case when a step load equivalent to the rated output of a
be provided to ensure that the engines cannot start up while
generator is switched off, a transient speed variation in excess
the turning gear is engaged.
of 10% of the rated speed may be acceptable, provided this
2.8 Controls and governors does not cause the intervention of the overspeed device as
required by 2.8.2.1.
2.8.1 General 2.8.3.2 At all loads between no load and rated power the
The starting and reversing arrangements shall permanent speed variation should not be more than ± 5% of
eliminate the possibility of: the rated speed.

June 2018 17
2.8.3.3 Prime movers shall be selected in such a way that b) their total consumer load is applied in steps, subject to:
they will meet the load demand within the vessel’s mains. .1 the total load is supplied within 45 seconds since
Application of electrical load should be possible power failure on the main switchboard;
with 2 load steps. It shall be such that prime movers – .2 the maximum step load is declared and demonstrated;
running at no load – can suddenly be loaded to 50% of the .3 the power distribution system is designed such that
rated power of the generator followed by the remaining 50% the declared maximum step loading is not exceeded;
after an interval sufficient to restore the speed to steady state.
.4 the compliance of time delays and loading sequence
Steady state conditions should be achieved in not more than 5
with the above shall be demonstrated at vessel’s
seconds.
trials.
Steady state conditions are those at which the
envelope of speed variation does not exceed +1% of the 2.8.3.5 For alternating current generating sets operating in
declared speed at the new power. parallel, governing characteristics of the prime movers shall
be such that within the limits of 20% and 100% total load the
Application of electrical load in more than 2 load
load on any generating set will not normally differ from its
steps can only be permitted, if the conditions within the
proportionate share of the total load by more than 15% of the
vessel’s mains permit the use of such prime movers which
rated power of the largest machine or 25% of the rated power
can only be loaded in more than 2 load steps (see Figure
of the individual machine in question, whichever is the less.
2.8.3-1) and provided that this is already permitted for in the
designing stage. This shall be verified in the form of system For alternating current generating set intended to
specifications to be approved and to be demonstrated at operate in parallel, facilities shall be provided to adjust the
vessel’s trials. In this case, due consideration shall be given governor sufficiently fine to permit an adjustment of load not
to the power required for the electrical equipment to be exceeding 5% of the rated load at normal frequency.
automatically switched on after black-out and to the sequence 2.8.3.6 In addition to the speed governor, each prime
in which it is connected. This applies analogously also for mover with a rated power of 220 kW and above, driving an
generators to be operated in parallel and where the power has electric generator shall be fitted with a separate overspeed
to be transferred from one generator to another in the event of protective device so adjusted that the speed cannot exceed the
any one generator has to be switched off. rated speed by more than 15%.
2.8.3.4 Emergency generator sets shall satisfy the governor 2.8.3.7 For guidance, the loading for 4-stroke diesel
conditions as per 2.8.3.1 and 2.8.3.2 when: engines may be limited as given by Figure 2.8.3-1.
a) their total consumer load is applied suddenly; or
Figure 2.8.3-1
Limiting curves for loading 4-stroke diesel engines step by step from no-load to rated power as a function of the brake mean effective
pressure

18 June 2018
– engine speed;
2.9 Control and monitoring equipment – lubricating oil pressure;
2.9.1 Control station – cooling water pressure;
2.9.1.1 A control station is a group of control and – cooling water temperature.
monitoring devices by means of which an operator can 2.9.4.2 In addition, engines of over 50 kW power shall be
control and verify the performance of equipment. equipped with an engine alarm system responding to the
2.9.1.2 The indicators shall be fitted at a normally attended lubricating oil pressure and to the pressure or flow rate of the
position (on the engine or at the local control station). cooling water or a failure of the cooling fan, as applicable.
2.9.2 Main engines room control station 2.10 Starting arrangements

2.9.2.1 As a minimum requirement, the engine room 2.10.1 Electric starting equipment
control station shall be equipped with the following main
2.10.1.1 Where main engines are started electrically, one
engine indicators, which shall be clearly and logically
independent set of starter batteries shall be provided for each
arranged:
engine. The set of batteries shall enable the main engine to be
– engine speed indicator; started from cold. The batteries shall be so arranged that they
– lubricating oil pressure at engine inlet and transmissions; cannot be connected in parallel with each other.
– cylinder cooling water pressure; The capacity of the starter set of batteries shall be
– starting air pressure; sufficient for at least 6 start-up operations within 30 minutes
without recharging.
– charge air pressure;
– control air pressure at engine inlet; 2.10.1.2 Electrical starters for auxiliary engines shall be
provided with independent batteries. The capacity of the
– shaft revolution indicator. batteries shall be sufficient for at least 3 start-up operations
2.9.2.2 Indicators shall be provided for the following on within 30 minutes.
the control station and/or directly on the engine: 2.10.1.3 Where machinery installations comprise two or
– lubricating oil temperature; more electrically started main engines, the starting equipment
– coolant temperature; for auxiliary engines can also be supplied from the latter’s
starter batteries. Separate circuits shall be installed for this
– fuel temperature at engine inlet only for engines running
purpose.
on heavy fuel oil;
– exhaust gas temperature, wherever the dimensions 2.10.1.4 The starter batteries may only be used for starting
permit, at each cylinder outlet and at the turbocharger (and possibility for preheating) as well as for monitoring
inlet/outlet. equipment associated with the engine.
2.9.2.3 In the case of geared transmissions or controllable 2.10.1.5 Arrangements shall be made to ensure that batteries
pitch propellers, the scope of the control equipment shall be are kept charged and monitored at all times.
extended accordingly.
2.10.2 Mechanical air starting
2.9.2.4 On the pressure gauges the permissible pressures,
2.10.2.1 Air starting the main and auxiliary engines and the
and on the tachometers any barred speed ranges, shall be
total capacity of air compressors and air receivers shall be
indicated in red.
arranged in compliance with 7.17.1 and 7.17.2.
2.9.2.5 A machinery alarm system shall be installed for the
2.10.2.2 Compressed air receivers shall comply with the
pressures and temperatures specified above, with the
requirements of 5.5.4.
exception of the charge air pressure, the control air pressure
and the exhaust gas temperature. 2.10.2.3 The following equipment shall be fitted to
safeguard main starting air lines against explosions due to
2.9.3 Main engines control from the wheelhouse failure of starting valves:
2.9.3.1 The vessel’s control stand shall be fitted with a) an isolation non-return valve shall be fitted to the starting
indicators, easily visible to the operator, showing the starting air line serving each engine;
and manoeuvring air pressure as well as the direction of b) engines with cylinder bore of > 230,0 mm shall be
rotation and revolutions of the propeller shaft and pitch of equipped with flame arresters or bursting discs as
controllable pitch propeller. follows:
2.9.3.2 In addition, the alarm system required under 2.9.2.5 – on directly reversible engines, in front of each start-
shall signal faults on the wheelhouse. An indicator in the up valve of each cylinder;
engine room and on the wheelhouse shall show that the alarm – on non-reversing engines, in the main starting air line
system is operative. to each engine;
2.9.4 Auxiliary engines c) equivalent safety devices may be approved by the
Register.
2.9.4.1 Instruments or equivalent devices mounted in a
logical manner on the engine shall indicate at least: 2.10.2.4 The requirements of 2.10.2.3 do not apply to
engines started by pneumatic motors.

June 2018 19
2.10.3 Hydraulic starting – 10% of the rpm.

Hydraulic oil accumulators for starting the main 2.11.6 If an engine has been design approved, and internal
propulsion engines shall have sufficient capacity without testing per Stage A, as defined in 2.11.8, is documented to a
recharging for starting the main engines as required in rating higher than the one type tested, the Type Approval
7.17.2.4. may be extended to the increased power/mep/rpm upon
submission of an Extended Delivery Test Report at:
2.11 Type testing of internal combustion engines
– test at over speed (only if nominal speed has increased);
2.11.1 Type approval of internal combustion engine types – rated power, i.e. 100% output at 100% torque and 100%
consists of drawing approval, specification approval, speed corresponding to load point 1 (see 2.11.12.3), 2
conformity of production, approval of type testing measurements with one running hour in between;
programme, type testing of engines, review of the obtained – maximum permissible torque (normally 110%) at 100%
results, and the issuance of the Type Approval Certificate. speed corresponding to load point 3 (see 2.11.12.3) or
The maximum period of validity of a Type Approval maximum permissible power (normally 110%) and speed
Certificate is 5 years. The requirements for drawing approval according to nominal propeller curve corresponding to
and specification approval of engines and components are load point 3a (see 2.11.12.3), 1/2 hour;
specified in 2.2.
– 100% power at maximum permissible speed
2.11.2 Type testing is required for every new engine type corresponding to load point 2 (see 2.11.12.3), 1/2 hour.
intended for installation on board vessels subject to
classification. 2.11.7 An integration test demonstrating that the response
of the complete mechanical, hydraulic and electronic system
2.11.3 A type test carried out for a particular type of is as predicted maybe carried out for acceptance of sub-
engine at any place of manufacture will be accepted for all systems (turbocharger, engine control system, dual fuel,
engines of the same type (see 2.1.3) built by licensees or the exhaust gas treatment) separately approved. The scope of
licensor, subject to each place of manufacture being found to these tests shall be proposed by the designer/licensor taking
be acceptable to the Register. into account of impact on engine.
Safety precautions
2.11.4 One type test will be considered adequate to cover
a range of different numbers of cylinders. However, a type Before any test run is carried out, all relevant equipment
test of an in-line engine may not always cover the V-version. for the safety of attending personnel shall be made
Subject to the individual Register’s discretion, separate type available by the manufacturer/shipyard and shall be
tests may be required for the V-version. On the other hand, a operational, and its correct functioning shall be verified.
type test of a V-engine covers the in-line engines, unless the This applies especially to crankcase explosive conditions
bmep is higher. protection, but also overspeed protection and any other
Items such as axial crankshaft vibration, torsional shut down function.
vibration in camshaft drives, and crankshafts, etc. may vary The inspection for jacketing of high-pressure fuel oil
considerably with the number of cylinders and may influence lines and proper screening of pipe connections (as
the choice of engine to be selected for type testing. required in 2.11.12.7) shall also be carried out before the
test runs.
2.11.5 The engine is type approved up to the tested ratings
Interlock test of turning gear shall be performed when
and pressures (100% corresponding to MCR - maximum
installed.
continuous rating).
Provided documentary evidence of successful 2.11.8 Test programme
service experience with the classified rating of 100% is
submitted and modification of crankshaft calculation and The type test is subdivided into three stages,
crankshaft drawings are approved, an increase may be namely:
permitted without a new type test if the increase from the Stage A - Internal tests
type tested engine is within: This includes some of the testing made during the engine
– 5% of the maximum combustion pressure; or development, function testing, and collection of
– 5% of the mean effective pressure; or measured parameters and records of testing hours. The
results of testing required by the Register or stipulated by
– 5% of the rpm. the designer shall be presented to the Register before
Providing maximum power is not increased by starting stage B.
more than 10%, an increase of maximum approved power Stage B - Type approval test (witnessed tests)
may be permitted without a new type test provided
engineering analysis and evidence of successful service The type approval test shall be carried out in the presence
experience in similar field applications (even if the of the Register representatives.
application is not classified) or documentation of internal Stage C - Inspection of main engine components
testing are submitted if the increase from the type tested After completion of the test programme, the main engine
engine is within: components shall be inspected by the Register.
– 10% of the maximum combustion pressure; or The complete type testing program is subject to approval
– 10% of the mean effective pressure; or by the Register. The extent the Surveyor’s attendance

20 June 2018
shall be agreed on a case by case basis, but at least during – normal case includes the load points 25%, 50%, 75%,
stage B and C. 100% and 110% of the maximum rated power for
Testing prior to the witnessed type testing (stage B continuous operation, to be made along the normal
and C), is also considered as a part of the complete type (theoretical) propeller curve and at constant speed for
testing program. propulsion engines (if applicable mode of operation i.e.
driving controllable pitch propellers), and at constant
2.11.9 Upon completion of complete type testing (stage A speed for engines intended for generator sets including a
through C), a type test report shall be submitted to the test at no load and rated speed;
Register for review. The type test report shall contain: – the limit points of the permissible operating range. These
– overall description of tests performed during stage A. limit points shall be defined by the engine manufacturer;
Records shall be kept by the builders QA management – for high speed engines, the 100 hour full load test and the
for presentation to the Register; low cycle fatigue test apply as required in connection
– detailed description of the load and functional tests with the design assessment;
conducted during stage B; – specific tests of parts of the engine, required by the
– inspection results from stage C. Register or stipulated by the designer.
2.11.10 Measurements and recordings 2.11.12 Stage B - Type approval test in the presence of
the Register (witnessed test)
During all testing the ambient conditions (air
temperature, air pressure and humidity) shall be recorded. 2.11.12.1 During the type test, the tests listed below shall be
As a minimum, the following engine data shall be carried out in the presence of the Register and the results
measured and recorded: shall be recorded in a report signed by both the engine
manufacturer and the attending representative after the type
– engine rpm.; test is completed.
– torque;
2.11.12.2 The over-speed test shall be carried out and shall
– maximum combustion pressure for each cylinder1); demonstrate that the engine is not damaged by an actual
– mean indicated pressure for each cylinder1); engine overspeed within the overspeed shutdown system set-
– charging air pressure and temperature; point. This test may be carried out at the manufacturer’s
choice either with or without load during the speed
– exhaust gas temperature;
overshoot.
– fuel rack position or similar parameter related to engine
load; 2.11.12.3 Load points
– turbocharger speed; The load points at which the engine shall be
operated according to the power/speed diagram of Figure
– all engine parameters that are required for control and
2.11.12.3-1 are those listed below.
monitoring for the intended use (propulsion, auxiliary,
emergency). The data to be measured and recorded when testing
the engine at various load points shall include all necessary
NOTE 1: For engines where the standard production parameters for the engine operation.
cylinder heads are not designed for such measurements, a
The operating time per load point depends on the
special cylinder head made for this purpose may be used. In
engine characteristics (achievement of steady state condition)
such a case, the measurements may be carried out as part of
and on the time for collection of the operating values.
Stage A and shall be properly documented. Where deemed
necessary e.g. for dual fuel engines, the measurement of Normally, an operating time of 0,5 hour per load
maximum combustion pressure and mean indicated pressure point can be assumed per load point, however sufficient time
may be carried out by indirect means, provided the reliability should be permitted for visual inspection by the Surveyor.
of the method is documented. At the maximum continuous power (as per the
following item .1) hereafter, an operating time of two hours is
NOTE 2: Calibration records for the instrumentation used to
required. Two sets of readings shall be taken at a minimum
collect data as listed above shall be presented to/and
interval of one hour.
reviewed by the attending Surveyor.
Additional measurements may be required in connection with .1 Test at maximum continuous power P: i.e. 100% output
the design assessment. at 100% torque and 100% speed, corresponding to load
point 1 (see Figure 2.11.12.3-1). If operation of the
2.11.11 Stage A - Internal tests (function tests and engine at limits as defined by its specified alarm system
collection of operating data) (e.g. at alarm levels of lub. oil pressure and inlet
temperature) is required, the test should be made here;
2.11.11.1 During the internal tests, the engine shall be
operated at the load points important for the engine designer .2 test at 100% power at maximum permissible speed,
and the pertaining operating values shall be recorded. The corresponding to load point 2 (see Figure 2.11.12.3-1);
load conditions to be tested are also to include the testing .3 test at maximum permissible torque (at least and
specified in the applicable type approval programme. normally 110% of nominal torque T) at 100% speed,
corresponding to load point 3 (see Figure 2.11.12.3-1); or
2.11.11.2 Functional tests under normal operating test at maximum permissible power (at least and
conditions normally 110% of P) and 103,2% speed according to the
At least the following conditions shall be tested: nominal propeller curve, corresponding to load point 3a

June 2018 21
(see Figure 2.11.12.3-1). Load point 3a applies to engines Engines intended for single propulsion with a fixed
only driving fixed pitch propellers or water jets. Load pitch propeller shall be able to run continuously at a speed
point 3 applies to all other purposes; (rpm) of 40% of full speed along the theoretical propeller
.4 test at minimum permissible speed at 100% of torque T, curve when one turbocharger is out of operation. (The test
corresponding to load point 4 (see Figure 2.11.12.3-1); can be performed by either by-passing the turbocharger,
fixing the turbocharger rotor shaft or removing the rotor.)
.5 test at minimum permissible speed at 90% of torque T,
corresponding to load point 5 (see Figure 2.11.12.3-1) 2.11.12.5 Functional (additional) tests
(applicable to propulsion engines only); a) Verification of the lowest specified propulsion engine
.6 tests at part loads, e.g. 75%, 50%, 25% of maximum speed according to the nominal propeller curve as
continuous power P and speed according to nominal specified by the engine designer (even though it works on
propeller curve (i.e. 90,8%, 79,3% and 62,9% speed), a water-brake). During this operation, no alarm shall
load points 6, 7 and 8 (see Figure 2.11.12.3-1) or tests at occur.
the above part loads and at speed n with constant b) Starting tests, for non-reversible engines and/or starting
governor setting, corresponding to load points 9, 10 and and reversing tests, for reversible engines, for the purpose
11 (see Figure 2.11.12.3-1) depending on the intended of determining the minimum air pressure and the
application of the engine. consumption for a start.
During all these load points, engine parameters c) Governor tests: tests for compliance with 2.8.2 and 2.8.3
shall be within the specified and approved values. shall be carried out.
2.11.12.4 Operation with damaged turbocharger
For 2-stroke propulsion engines, the achievable
continuous output shall be determined in the case of
turbocharger damage.
Figure 2.11.12.3-1
Power / speed diagram

22 June 2018
2.12.1.2 This applies especially to crankcase explosive

2.11.12.6 Integration test conditions protection, but also to overspeed protection and
For electronically controlled diesel engines, any other shut down function.
integration tests shall verify that the response of the complete
mechanical, hydraulic and electronic system is as predicted 2.12.1.3 The overspeed protective device shall be set to a
for all intended operational modes. The scope of these tests value, which is not higher than the overspeed value that was
shall be agreed with the Register for selected cases based on demonstrated during the type test for that engine. This set
the FMEA (Failure Mode Effects Analysis) required in IACS point shall be verified by the Surveyor.
UR M44.
2.12.2 General
2.11.12.7 Fire protection measures
2.12.2.1 Before any official testing, the engines shall be run-
Verification of compliance with requirements for in as prescribed by the engine manufacturer.
jacketing of high-pressure fuel oil lines, screening of pipe
connections in piping containing flammable liquids and 2.12.2.2 Adequate test bed facilities for loads as required in
insulation of hot surfaces: 2.12.3.3 shall be provided. All fluids used for testing
purposes such as fuel, lubrication oil and cooling water shall
– the engine shall be inspected for jacketing of high-
be suitable for the purpose intended, e.g. they shall be clean,
pressure fuel oil lines, including the system for the
preheated if necessary and cause no harm to engine parts.
detection of leakage, and proper screening of pipe
This applies to all fluids used temporarily or repeatedly for
connections in piping containing flammable liquids;
testing purposes only.
– proper insulation of hot surfaces shall be verified while
running the engine at 100% load, alternatively at the 2.12.2.3 The testing consists of workshop and shipboard
overload approved for intermittent use. Readings of (quay and sea trial) testing.
surface temperatures shall be done by use of Infrared 2.12.2.4 Engines shall be inspected for:
Thermoscanning Equipment. Equivalent measurement
equipment may be used when so approved by the – jacketing of high-pressure fuel oil lines including the
Register. Readings obtained shall be randomly verified system used for the detection of leakage;
by use of contact thermometers. – screening of pipe connections in piping containing
flammable liquids;
2.11.13 Stage C - Inspection of main engine components
– insulation of hot surfaces by taking random temperature
2.11.13.1 The crankshaft deflections shall be measured in the readings that shall be compared with corresponding
specified (by designer) condition (except for engines where readings obtained during the type test. This shall be done
no specification exists). while running at the rated power of engine. Use of
contact thermometers may be accepted at the discretion
2.11.13.2 After the test run the components of one cylinder of the attending Surveyor. If the insulation is modified
for in-line engines and two cylinders for V-engines shall be subsequently to the Type Approval Test, the Register
presented for inspection as follows (engines with long service may request temperature measurements as required by
experience from non-marine fields can have a reduced extent 2.11.12.7.
of opening):
– piston removed and dismantled; 2.12.2.5 These inspections are normally to be made during
the works trials by the manufacturer and the attending
– connecting rod removed; Surveyor, but at the discretion of the Register parts of these
– connecting rod bearings, dismantled; inspections may be postponed to the shipboard testing.
– main bearing, dismantled;
2.12.3 Works trials (factory acceptance test)
– cylinder liner in the installed condition;
2.12.3.1 General
– cylinder head and valves, disassembled;
The purpose of the works trials shall verify design
– cam drive gear or chain, camshaft and crankcase with
premises such as power, safety against fire, adherence to
opened covers (the engine must be turnable by turning
approved limits (e.g. maximum pressure), and functionality
gear for this inspection).
and to establish reference values or base lines for later
2.11.13.3 For V-engines, the cylinder units shall be selected reference in the operational phase.
from both cylinder banks and different crank throws.
2.12.3.2 Records
2.11.13.4 Where deemed necessary by representative of the 2.12.3.2.1 The following environmental test conditions
Register, further dismantling of the engine may be required. shall be recorded:
2.12 Factory acceptance test and shipboard – ambient air temperature;
trials of internal combustion engines – ambient air pressure;
– atmospheric humidity.
2.12.1 Safety precautions
2.12.3.2.2 For each required load point, the following
2.12.1.1 Before any test run is carried out, all relevant parameters shall normally be recorded:
equipment for the safety of attending personnel shall be made – power and speed;
available by the manufacturer/shipyard and shall be
operational. – fuel index (or equivalent reading);

June 2018 23
– maximum combustion pressures (only when the cylinder – 110% power at engine speed n 0 : 15 minutes after having
heads installed are designed for such measurement); reached steady conditions;
– exhaust gas temperature before turbine and from each – governor tests in compliance with 2.8.2 and 2.8.3 shall be
cylinder (to the extent that monitoring is required in carried out;
IACS UR M73 and M35/36); – 75%, 50% and 25% power and idle run, the sequence to
– charge air temperature; be selected by the engine manufacturer.
– charge air pressure; NOTE: After running on the test bed, the fuel delivery system
– turbocharger speed (to the extent that monitoring is shall be adjusted so that full power plus a 10% margin for
required in IACS UR M73). transient regulation can be given in service after installation
2.12.3.2.3 Calibration records for the instrumentation are, on board. The transient overload capability is required so
upon request, to be presented to the attending Surveyor. that the required transient governing characteristics are
achieved also at 100% loading of the engine, and also so that
2.12.3.2.4 For all stages at which the engine shall be the protection system utilized in the electric distribution
tested, the pertaining operational values shall be measured system can be activated before the engine stalls.
and recorded by the engine manufacturer. All results shall be
compiled in an acceptance protocol to be issued by the engine 2.12.3.3.4 Engines driving generators for auxiliary
manufacturer. This also includes crankshaft deflections if purposes
considered necessary by the engine designer. Tests shall be performed as in 2.12.3.3.2.
2.12.3.2.5 In each case, all measurements conducted at the
various load points shall be carried out at steady state 2.12.3.3.5 Engines driving auxiliaries
operating conditions. However, for all load points provision – 100% power (MCR) at corresponding speed n 0 : at least
should be made for time needed by the Surveyor to carry out 30 minutes;
visual inspections. The readings for MCR, i.e. 100% power – 110% power at engine speed n 0 : 15 minutes after having
(rated maximum power at corresponding rated speed) shall be reached steady conditions;
taken twice at an interval of at least 30 minutes.
– approved intermittent overload (if applicable): testing for
2.12.3.3 Test loads duration as agreed with the manufacturer;
2.12.3.3.1 Test loads for various engine applications are – for variable speed engines, 75%, 50% and 25% power in
given below. In addition, the scope of the trials may be accordance with the nominal power consumption curve,
expanded depending on the engine application, service the sequence to be selected by the engine manufacturer.
experience, or other relevant reasons.
NOTE: After running on the test bed, the fuel delivery system
NOTE: Alternatives to the detailed tests may be agreed is normally to be so adjusted that overload power cannot be
between the manufacturer and the Register when the overall delivered in service, unless intermittent overload power is
scope of tests is found to be equivalent. approved. In that case, the fuel delivery system shall be
blocked to that power.
2.12.3.3.2 Main propulsion engines driving propeller
or impeller only 2.12.3.4 Turbocharger matching with engine
– 100% power (MCR) at corresponding speed n 0 : at least 2.12.3.4.1 Compressor chart
60 minutes;
Turbochargers shall have a compressor
– 110% power at engine speed 1,032∙n 0 : records to be characteristic that allows the engine, for which it is intended,
taken after 15 minutes or after steady conditions have to operate without surging during all operating conditions
been reached, whichever is shorter; and also after extended periods in operation.
NOTE: Only required once for each different For abnormal, but permissible, operation
engine/turbocharger configuration; conditions, such as misfiring and sudden load reduction, no
– approved intermittent overload (if applicable): testing for continuous surging shall occur.
duration as agreed with the manufacturer; Surging and continuous surging are defined as
– 90% (or normal continuous cruise power), 75%, 50% and follows:
25% power in accordance with the nominal propeller – surging means the phenomenon, which results in a high
curve, the sequence to be selected by the engine pitch vibration of an audible level or explosion-like noise
manufacturer; from the scavenger area of the engine;
– reversing manoeuvres (if applicable). – continuous surging means that surging happens
NOTE: After running on the test bed, the fuel delivery system repeatedly and not only once.
shall be so adjusted that overload power cannot be given in 2.12.3.4.2 Surge margin verification
service, unless intermittent overload power is approved by
Category C turbochargers (> 2500,0 kW) used on
the Register. In that case, the fuel delivery system shall be
propulsion engines shall be checked for surge margins during
blocked to that power.
the engine workshop testing as specified below.
2.12.3.3.3 Engines driving electric generators used for These tests may be waived if successfully tested
main propulsion purposes earlier on an identical configuration of engine and
– 100% power (MCR) at corresponding speed n 0 : at least turbocharger (including same nozzle rings).
60 minutes after having reached steady conditions;

24 June 2018
For 4-stroke engines the following shall be NOTE: Applies both for manual and automatic passing-
performed without indication of surging: through systems.
– with maximum continuous power and speed (=100%), The vessel’s draft and speed during all these
the speed shall be reduced with constant torque (fuel demonstrations shall be recorded. In the case of a controllable
index) down to 90% power; pitch propeller, the pitch shall also be recorded.
– with 50% power at 80% speed (= propeller characteristic The engine shall be checked for stable running
for fixed pitch), the speed shall be reduced to 72% while (steady fuel index) at both upper and lower borders of the bsr.
keeping constant torque (fuel index). Steady fuel index means an oscillation range less than 5% of
the effective stroke (idle to full index).
2.12.3.5 Integration tests
For electronically controlled engines, integration 2.13 Emission of gaseous and particulate
tests shall be made to verify that the response of the complete pollutants from internal combustion
mechanical, hydraulic and electronic system is as predicted engines
for all intended operational modes and the tests considered as
a system shall be carried out at the works. If such tests are 2.13.1 General provisions
technically unfeasible at the works, however, these tests may
be conducted during river trial. The scope of these tests shall 2.13.1.1 The provisions of this Head shall apply to all
be agreed with the Register for selected cases based on the internal combustion engines with a reference power that is
FMEA (Failure Mode Effects Analysis) required in IACS UR greater than or equal to 19,0 kW installed on board craft.
M44. 2.13.1.2 Internal combustion engines comply with the
requirements of Regulation (EU) 2016/1628 of the European
2.12.3.6 Inspection of engine components
Parliament and of the Council on requirements relating to
Random checks of components to be presented for gaseous and particulate pollutant emission limits and type
inspection after the works trials are left to the discretion of approval for internal combustion engines for non-road mobile
the Register. machinery, amending Regulations (EU) No 1024/2012 and
2.12.3.7 Testing report (EU) No 167/2013, and amending and repealing Directive
97/68/EC.
In the testing report for each engine the results of
the tests carried out shall be compiled and the reference Only internal combustion engines of categories:
number and date of issue of the Type Approval Certificate, a) IWP;
relevant to the engine type, are always to be stated. b) IWA;
2.12.4 Shipboard trials c) NRE with reference power less than 560,0 kW; or
d) engines recognized equivalent according to Regulation
2.12.4.1 General
(EU) 2016/1628; shall be installed. This compliance is
The purpose of the shipboard testing shall verify established by means of a type approval certificate.
compatibility with power transmission and driven machinery
in the system, control systems and auxiliary systems 2.13.1.3 A copy of the type approval certificate, the engine
necessary for the engine and integration of engine/shipboard manufacturer’s instructions and the engine parameter
control systems, as well as other items that had not been dealt protocol shall be kept on board.
with in the FAT (Factory Acceptance Testing). 2.13.1.4 The installation of replacement engines is
2.12.4.2 Starting capacity prohibited.
Starting manoeuvres shall be carried out in order to Replacement engine means an engine that:
verify that the capacity of the starting media satisfies the a) is exclusively used to replace an engine already placed on
required number of start attempts (see 15.3.9.1). the market and installed in non-road mobile machinery;
and
2.12.4.3 Monitoring and alarm system
b) complies with an emission stage which is lower than that
The monitoring and alarm systems shall be checked
applicable on the date of the engine’s replacement.
to the full extent for all engines, except items already verified
during the works trials. 2.13.1.5 For the purpose of discharging tasks pursuant to
this Head, the Register may employ a technical service. Only
2.12.4.4 Test loads
technical services notified according to Regulation (EU)
For tests of diesel engines, the requirements given 2016/1628 are recognized for the purpose of this Rules.
in 15.3.3 apply.
2.13.2 Definitions
2.12.4.5 Torsional vibrations
Barred speed range 2.13.2.1 Engine family
Where a barred speed range (bsr) is required, passages Engine family means an engine manufacturer’s
through this bsr, both accelerating and decelerating, shall grouping of engines which, through their design, have similar
be demonstrated. The times taken shall be recorded and exhaust emission characteristics, and respect the applicable
shall be equal to or below those times stipulated in the emission limit values.
approved documentation, if any. This also includes when
passing through the bsr in reverse rotational direction,
especially during the stopping test.

June 2018 25
2.13.2.2 Engine parameter protocol 2.13.4 Engine manufacturer’s instructions

Engine parameter protocol means the document in 2.13.4.1 The engine manufacturer’s instructions, to be
which all the parameters, together with changes, and drawn up by the engine manufacturer, shall specify the
including components and engine settings which affect the exhaust relevant components as well as adjustments and
level of emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants from parameters, whereby continuous compliance with the exhaust
the engine are duly recorded. gas emission limit values can be assumed.
2.13.2.3 Exhaust after treatment system 2.13.4.2 The instructions contain at least the following
Exhaust after treatment system means a catalyst, details:
particulate filter, deNOx system, combined deNOx a) type of engine and, where appropriate, engine family
particulate filter or any other emission-reducing device, with with an indication of the reference power and rated
the exception of exhaust gas recirculation and turbochargers, speed;
that is part of the emission control system but is installed
downstream of the engine exhaust ports. b) list of the components and engine parameters of
relevance in an exhaust gas emission context;
2.13.2.4 Emission control system c) unambiguous features to identify the permitted
Emission control system means any device, system components of relevance in an exhaust gas emission
or element of design that controls or reduces emissions. context (e.g. part numbers appearing on the components);
2.13.2.5 Internal combustion engines d) engine parameters of relevance in an exhaust gas
emission context such as setting ranges for the injection
Category IWP timing, permitted cooling water temperature, maximum
a) engines exclusively for use in inland waterway exhaust gas backpressure.
vessels, for their direct or indirect propulsion, or
intended for their direct or indirect propulsion, having 2.13.5 Tests of the internal combustion engines
a reference power that is greater than or equal to 19,0
kW; 2.13.5.1 At the time of the installation test and in the event
of intermediate tests and special tests, the Register will
b) engines used in place of engines of category IWA inspect the current state of the engine with reference to the
provided that they comply with Article 24(8) of components, adjustments and parameters specified in the
Regulation (EU) 2016/1628. engine manufacturer’s instructions and the engine parameter
Category IWA protocol.
– auxiliary engines exclusively for use in inland
2.13.5.2 The results of the tests pursuant to 2.13.5.1 shall be
waterway vessels and having a reference power that
registered in the engine parameter protocol.
is greater than or equal to 19 kW.
Category NRE 2.13.5.3 If the installation, intermediate and special tests
– engines having a reference power of less than 560,0 show that, in relation to their parameters, components and
kW used in the place of Stage V engines of categories adjustable features, the internal combustion engines installed
IWP and IWA. on board comply with the specifications set out in the
documents covered by 2.13.1.3, it may be assumed that the
2.13.2.6 Reference power exhaust gas and particulate emissions from the internal
Reference power means the net power that is used combustion engines comply with the limit values.
to determine the applicable emission limit values for the If the Register finds that the internal combustion
engine. engine does not comply with the requirements set out in the
Rated net power means the net power in kW as documents covered by 2.13.1.3, it shall require that steps are
declared by the manufacturer of an engine at rated speed. taken to re-establish internal combustion engine conformity.
2.13.2.7 EC Type approval 2.13.5.4 In the case of internal combustion engines with
exhaust gas after treatment systems, checks shall be carried
EC type approval means the procedure whereby the out to establish that these systems are functioning properly in
competent authority certifies that an engine type or an engine the context of the installation, intermediate or special tests.
family satisfies the relevant administrative provisions and
technical requirements with regard to the levels of gaseous 2.13.6 Installation tests
and particulate pollutants emitted by the engine(s).
2.13.6.1 After the installation of the internal combustion
2.13.3 Provisions for the installation of internal engine on board, but before it is brought into service, an
combustion engines installation test shall be carried out.
The installation of engines in craft shall comply 2.13.6.2 During the installation test, the Register shall
with the restrictions set out in the scope of the type approval. ensure that an engine installed on board still complies with
the technical requirements with regard to the level of
emissions of gaseous and particulate pollutants, even after
undergoing modifications or adaptations since the issuing of
the type approval.

26 June 2018
2.13.6.3 The Register may dispense with an installation test 2.13.9.4 If an after treatment system relies on the use of a
pursuant to 2.13.6.1, if an internal combustion engine having reagent in order to reduce emissions, the required alarms
a reference power output P N of less than 130 kW is replaced shall alert crew to the need to refill the reagent tank before it
by an internal combustion engine covered by the same type is empty, or to replace the reagent if it does not meet the
approval according to 2.13.1.2. As a pre-condition, the concentration specifications.
Register shall be notified of the engine’s replacement and When a control diagnostic system installed
shall be provided with a copy of the type approval document according to Article 25(3)(f) of Regulation (EU) 2016/1628
and details of the identification number of the newly installed can activate power reduction of the internal combustion
engine. engine, the following requirements must be fulfilled:
2.13.7 Intermediate tests a) the activation of the power reduction must allow the craft
to continue to make steerageway under its own power;
2.13.7.1 In the event of intermediate tests, the Register shall
b) in the event of activation of the power reduction, the
ensure that an engine installed on board still complies with
control system shall trigger an audible and optical alarm
signal in the wheelhouse.
emissions of gaseous and particulate pollutants, even after
undergoing modifications or adaptations since the installation 2.13.9.5 The requirement of 2.13.9.1 shall be deemed to be
test, have been undergone. fulfilled when the vessel is equipped with:
2.13.7.2 Intermediate tests on the internal combustion a) a second independent propulsion system (even if that
engine shall be carried out in the context of the craft second system also includes an exhaust gas after
periodical inspection. treatment system) allowing the craft to continue to make
steerageway its own power; or
2.13.8 Special tests b) an after treatment system with a bypass device according
2.13.8.1 In the event of special tests, the Register shall to 2.13.9.2.
ensure that an engine installed on board still complies with
emissions of gaseous and particulate pollutants, after each
significant modification.
2.13.8.2 After each significant modification to an engine,
where such modifications have the potential to affect the
emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants from the
internal combustion engine, a special test must invariably be
carried out.
2.13.9 Specific requirements concerning exhaust gas

after treatment systems
2.13.9.1 The exhaust gas after treatment systems shall not
impair the safe operation of the craft, including propulsion
system and power supply, nor block the exhaust system.
2.13.9.2 When the exhaust gas after treatment system of
internal combustion engines, which ensure the main
propulsion of a craft, is equipped with a bypassing device, the
bypassing device must comply with the following conditions:
a) in the event of a failure of the exhaust gas after treatment
system, the activation of the bypassing device must allow
the craft to continue to make steerageway under its own
power;
b) in the event of activation of the bypassing device, the by-
pass device control system shall trigger an audible and
optical alarm signal in the wheelhouse;
c) a by-pass device control system shall record in non-
volatile computer memory all incidents of engine
operation with use of the bypassing device. The
information shall be readily available for the competent
authorities.
2.13.9.3 When a control diagnostic system is installed
according to Article 25(3)(f) of Regulation (EU) 2016/1628,
the required alarms shall trigger an audible and optical alarm
signal in the wheelhouse in case of malfunctions.

June 2018 27
specifications. The documentation shall contain all the data

3 MAIN PROPULSION SHAFTING necessary to enable the stresses to be evaluated.
3.1 General requirements 3.1.3 Materials

3.1.3.1 The Register shall carry out supervision during
3.1.1 Application
manufacture, in compliance with the approved technical
3.1.1.1 This Section applies to shafts, couplings, documentation, of the following assemblies and items
disengaging couplings (clutches) and other shafting referred to in Table 3.1.3-1: shaftline assemblies, including
components transmitting power/torque for main propulsion. propeller shafts with liners or other corrosion protections,
For shafting components in engines, gears and shaft bearings, thrust bearings and stern tube bearings,
thrusters, see Section 2, Section 6 and Section 10, couplings, glands, etc.
respectively. 3.1.3.2 Materials of parts referred to in the Table 3.1.3-1,
For propellers, see Section 4. item 7. may be chosen according to standards. Materials of
For torsional vibrations, see Section 14. parts referred to in the Table 3.1.3-1, items 2. to 6. and 8.,
may be chosen according to standards as well. The Register
3.1.1.2 Explicitly the following applications are not decides about the application of these materials during the
covered by this Section: approval of the technical documentation.
– gearing shafts; 3.1.3.3 Materials of parts referred to in the Table 3.1.3-1,
– electric motor shafts; items 1. and 3. (coupling separate from shafts) shall be
– generator rotor shafts; supervised by the Register during their manufacture (EN
10204, type 3.2). The Register may require supervision of
– diesel engine crankshafts.
other materials stated in the Table 3.1.3-1.
3.1.2 Documentation to be submitted 3.1.3.4 Where it is intended to make shafts of alloy steels,
The manufacturer shall submit to the Register the corrosion-resistant or high strength steels, data on chemical
documents listed in the Rules, Part 1 – Classification and composition, mechanical and special properties, confirming
Surveys, Chapter II, Table 3.2-3 for review/approval. suitability of the steel for intended application, shall be
Plans of power/torque transmitting parts and shaft liners submitted to the Register.
listed in the Rules, Part 1 – Classification and Surveys,
Chapter II, Table 3.2-3 shall include the relevant material
Table 3.1.3-1
The parts which shall be supervised by the Register during manufacture
Component Material Relevant reference

1. Thrust, intermediate and propeller shafts 1) forged steel the Rules, Part 25, 3.11
copper alloys the Rules, Part 25, 4.2
2. Propeller shaft liners 2)
stainless steel approved by the Register
forged steel the Rules, Part 25, 3.11
3. Coupling flanges cast steel the Rules, Part 25, 3.12
nodular cast iron the Rules, Part 25, 3.13.4
4. Coupling flange bolts 3) forged steel the Rules, Part 25, 3.11
cast steel the Rules, Part 25, 3.12
grey cast iron the Rules, Part 25, 3.13.3
5. Stern tubes
steel plates the Rules, Part 25, 3.2
steel pipes the Rules, Part 25, 3.10.2
6. Stern bushes and strut bushes grey cast iron the Rules, Part 25, 3.13.3
7. Bearing materials bearing alloys and non-ferrous materials approved by the Register
8. Thrust bearing casting grey cast iron the Rules, Part 25, 3.13.3
steel plates the Rules, Part 25, 3.3
Notes:
1) Thrust shafts, propeller and intermediate shafts shall be examined by one of the non-destructive methods approved by the
Register (see 3.1.3.6).
2) In the case of liners fabricated in welded lengths, the material shall be recognized as suitable for welding.
3) Coupling bolts shall be of forged, rolled or drawn steel.

28 June 2018
3.2.1.3 Alternative calculation methods may be considered

3.1.3.5 Plain, flangeless shafts may be made from rolled by the Register. Any alternative calculation method shall
round steel. Where parts of the main shafting are made of include all relevant loads on the complete dynamic shafting
material other than steel, the special consent of the Register system under all permissible operating conditions.
shall be obtained. Consideration shall be given to the dimensions and
3.1.3.6 Intermediate, thrust and propeller shafts shall arrangements of all shaft connections.
undergo non-destructive testing. For acceptance criteria and Moreover, an alternative calculation method shall
rectification of defects and records, the requirements given in take into account design criteria for continuous and transient
the IACS Guidelines for non-destructive examination of hull operating loads (dimensioning for fatigue strength) and for
and machinery steel forgings No. 68 apply as applicable. peak operating loads (dimensioning for yield strength). The
Propeller shafts shall be subjected to the ultrasonic fatigue strength analysis may be carried out separately for
tests in the process of their manufacture. different load assumptions.
After completion of machining, the following parts 3.2.1.4 Material intended for the manufacture of shaftlines
of the shafts: shall meet the requirements in 3.1.3, provided that the tensile
– the aft end of the shaft cylindrical part (150,0 mm) and strength under normal conditions shall be within 400,0 to
around 1/3 of the cone length from its big diameter where 800,0 N/mm2. Steels with other properties or any other
the propeller is fitted onto the propeller shaft cone; or material may be used if approved by the Register on a case
by case basis.
– the aft end of the propeller shaft (250,0 mm) and the
place of its transition into flange where the propeller is Where shafts may experience vibratory stresses
fitted to the shaft flange shall be subjected to the surface close to the permissible stresses for transient operation, the
defect detecting tests by magnetic particle inspection or materials shall have a specified minimum ultimate tensile
liquid penetrant inspection (see Figure 3.1.3-1). strength of 500,0 N/mm2.
3.2.1.5 On vessels with no obstruction for the propeller
shaft to slip out of the stern tube, devices shall be provided
which, in the event of the propeller shaft breaking, will
prevent its slipping out of the stern gland; or measures shall
be taken to preclude flooding of the engine room, in case of
the propeller shaft loss.
3.2.1.6 Cardan shafts, used in installations having more
than one propulsion shaftline, shall be of an approved design,
suitable for the designed operating conditions including short
term high power operation. Consideration will be given to
accepting the use of approved cardan shafts in single
propulsion unit applications if a complete spare coupling
shall be provided on board.
3.2.1.7 Cardan shaft ends shall be contained within
substantial tubular guards that also permit ready access for
Figure 3.1.3-1 inspection and maintenance.
Inspection zones for magnetic particle testing (MT) or liquid
3.2.1.8 For cardan shafts (flanges, crosses, shafts, yokes),
penetrant testing of propeller shaft
requirements given in 3.1.3.3 apply.
3.2 Shafting 3.2.2 Intermediate shafts
3.2.1 General requirements 3.2.2.1 The diameter of the intermediate shaft d M shall not
be less than that determined by the formula:
3.2.1.1 This Head applies to propulsion shafts such as
intermediate and propeller shafts of traditional straight forged P 1 560
design and which are driven by rotating machines such as d M = FM ⋅ k M ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ , [ mm ]
3 n d 
4
RmM + 160 (3.2.2-1)
diesel engines or electric motors. 1 −  uM 
Novel designs will be handled on a case by case  d vM 
basis.
where:
3.2.1.2 Shaft diameters calculated by the formulas referred FM = factor for the type of propulsion installation;
to in this Section apply to the minimum shaft diameters
= 95,0 for internal combustion engine installation
without taking into account additions for weardown. It is
with hydraulic (slip type) couplings and for electric
assumed that additional stresses from torsional vibrations will
propulsion installation;
not exceed permissible values stipulated in Section 14.
= 100,0 for all other internal combustion engine
installations;
kM = factor for different shaft design features chosen
from the Table 3.2.2-1. Transitions of diameters
shall be designed with either a smooth taper or a

June 2018 29
blending radius. For guidance, a blending radius

equal to the change of diameter is recommended. Table 3.2.2-1
P = rated power of the main engine (losses in k M -factors for intermediate shafts
gearboxes and bearings shall be disregarded),
[kW]; Intermediate shafts with kM
n = rated speed of shaft, [rpm]; 1. Integral forged coupling flanges 1)
1,0
d uM = diameter of internal longitudinal shaft bore, 2. Shrink-fitted keyless coupling flanges 2)
[mm]; 3), 4)
3. Keyways (cylindrical or tapered connections)
1,1
d vM = outside shaft diameter, [mm]. 4. Radial bores or transverse holes 5)
6)
R mM = tensile strength of the material taken for 5. Longitudinal slots 1,2
calculation, [N/mm2]; Notes:
= when the intermediate shaft material is a carbon 1) Fillet radius shall not be less than 0,08∙d M .
or carbon-manganese steel having the tensile 2) Factor k M refers to the plain shaft sections only. Where
strength exceeding 760,0 N/mm2, for the shafts may experience vibratory stresses close to the
calculation purpose will be considered that of R mM permissible stresses for continuous operation, an increase
= 760,0 N/mm2 only; in diameter to the shrink fit diameter shall be provided,
= when the intermediate shaft material is an alloy e.g. a diameter increase of 1% to 2% and a blending
steel having the tensile strength exceeding 800,0 radius as described in the Table note stated above.
N/mm2, for the calculation purpose will be 3) At a distance of not less than 0,2∙d M from the end of the
considered that of R mM = 800,0 N/mm2 only. keyway the shaft diameter may be reduced to the diameter
calculated with k M = 1,0. Fillet radius in the transverse
In cases where d uM ≤ 0,4∙d vM the following section of the bottom of the keyway shall not be less than
expression may be used: 0,0125∙d M .
4 4) Keyways are in general not to be used in installations with
d  a barred speed range (see 14.5).
1 −  uM  = 1,0 (3.2.2-2)
 d vM  5) Diameter of radial bore shall not exceed 0,3∙d M .
Intersection between a radial and an eccentric axial bore is
3.2.2.2 The portion of the shaft outside of the keyway, bore a subject of special consideration.
or slot area may be gradually reduced to the diameter 6) Length of the slot shall not exceed 0,8∙d M . Inner diameter
calculated with k M = 1,0. shall not exceed 0,8∙d M . Width of the slot shall be higher
than 0,1∙d M . The end rounding of the slot shall not be less
3.2.2.3 The determination of k M factors for shaft design than half its width. An edge rounding should preferably be
features other than those referred in Table 3.2.2-1 is left to avoided. The values in the Table are valid for 1, 2 and 3
the discretion of the Register. slots, i.e. with slots at 360° respectively, 180° respectively
3.2.3 Thrust shafts and 120° apart
3.2.3.1 The diameter of the thrust shaft which is not 3.2.4 Propeller shafts
incorporated in the main engine shall be determined by the
3.2.4.1 The diameter of the propeller shaft d P shall not be
formula (see 3.2.2.1) with factor k M = 1,1.
less than that calculated from the following formula:
3.2.3.2 The diameter referred to in 3.2.3.1 applies to the
P 1 560
length equal to the diameter of shaft considered from both d P = FP ⋅ k P ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ , [ mm ]
sides of thrust collar (fillet radius shall not be less than 3 n d 
4
RmP + 160 (3.2.4-1)
0,08∙d, where d is the shaft diameter), or to the length of axial 1 −  uP 
bearing, if the anti-frictional bearing is used as thrust bearing.  d vP 
Outside of these lengths, the diameter may be gradually
where:
reduced to the diameter of the intermediate shaft.
FP = factor for the type of propulsion installation:
= 100 for all internal combustion engine
installations and electric propulsion installations;
kP = factor dependent on shaft design features;
= 1,22 for propeller shafts from the area of the aft
stern tube or shaft bracket bearing to the forward
load-bearing face of the propeller boss subject to a
minimum of 2,5∙d P , if the propeller is shrink-fitted,
without key, on the tapered end of the propeller
shaft using a method approved by the Register, or if
the propeller is bolted to a flange forged on the
propeller shaft;
= 1,26 for propeller shafts in the aft area as
specified for k P = 1,22, with tapered key/keyway
connection;

30 June 2018
= 1,40 for propeller shafts in the area specified for 3.2.4.2 Propeller shaft diameters determined in accordance
k P = 1,22, if the shaft inside the stern tube is with formula 3.2.4.1 shall be increased by 5% for vessels
lubricated with grease; intended for navigation in broken ice and 7% for icebreakers.
= 1,15 for propeller shafts forward part outside the 3.2.4.3 Shaft tapers and propeller nut threads
bearing area but inside the stern tube. The portion
of the propeller shaft located forward of the stern 3.2.4.3.1 In general, tapers for securing flange couplings
tube can be reduced to the size of the intermediate should have a cone of between 1:10 and 1:20. In the case of
shaft; shaft tapers for propellers, the cone shall be between 1:10 and
1:15. Where the oil injection method is used to mount the
P = the same as in 3.2.2.1, [kW]; propeller on the shaft, a taper of the cone between 1:15 and
n = rated speed of propeller shaft, [rpm]; 1:20 shall be preferred.
d uP = diameter of internal longitudinal shaft bore, 3.2.4.3.2 For shafts of 100,0 mm in diameter and over, the
[mm]; ends of the keyway should be spoon-shaped. The edges shall
be smoothly rounded off and the keyway corners shall be
d vP = outside shaft diameter, [mm];
rounded to a radius equal to 1,25% of the propeller shaft
R mP = tensile strength of the shaft material taken for diameter, but not less than 1,0 mm. The distance between the
calculation, [N/mm2]; top of the cone and the forward end of the keyway shall not
= when the shaft material is a steel having tensile be less than 20% of the propeller shaft diameter (Figure
strength exceeding 600,0 N/mm2 for the calculation 3.2.4-1).
purposes it shall be taken R mP = 600,0 N/mm2. 3.2.4.3.3 Threaded holes for securing screws for propeller
Parts of the propeller shaft exposed to water and keys shall be located only in the aft half of the keyway
without effective corrosion protection shall be strengthened (Figure 3.2.4-2).
by additional 5%. 3.2.4.3.4 The outside diameter of the threaded end propeller
In cases where d u P ≤ 0,4∙d v P the following retaining nut should not be less than 60% of the calculated
expression may be used: major taper diameter. The propeller nut shall be secured in a
suitable manner.
4
d 
1 −  uP  = 1,0 (3.2.4-2)
 d vP 
d 2 - propeller shaft diameter
Figure 3.2.4-1
Keyways in tapered end of propeller shaft

June 2018 31
3.2.5 Shaft couplings

3.2.5.1 As a rule, couplings of intermediate, thrust and
propeller shafts shall be coupled by means of fitted bolts. The
diameter of the fitted coupling bolts shall not be less than that
given by the formula:
dM3
( R + 160 ) , mm
d S =0,65 ⋅ 3 ⋅ mM [ ] (3.2.5-1)
i⋅D RmS
Figure 3.2.4-2 where:

Securing screw dM = intermediate shaft diameter determined in
accordance with 3.2.2.1, taking into account the ice
3.2.4.4 Sealing strengthening in accordance with 3.2.4.2 where
Propeller shafts running in oil or grease shall be necessary, [mm];
fitted with seals of proven efficiency and approved by the i = number of fitted bolts;
Register at the stern tube ends. The propeller boss seating D = diameter of the pitch circle of the bolts, [mm];
shall be effectively protected against the ingress of water.
The seals at the propeller can be dispensed with if the R mM = tensile strength of the intermediate shaft material
propeller shaft is made of corrosion-resistant material. in accordance with 3.2.2.1, [N/mm2];
Means shall be provided so that polluting lubricants do not R mS = tensile strength of bolts material, taken as R mM ≤
spread into the water. R mS ≤ 1,7∙R mM , [N/mm2];
3.2.4.5 Shaft liner and protection of propeller shaft = if R mS ≥ 1000,0 N/mm2 the value R mS = 1000,0
against corrosion N/mm2 shall be used.
3.2.4.5.1 Metal liners or other protective coatings approved 3.2.5.2 The use of types of bolts other than those in
by the Register are required where propeller shafts are not accordance with 3.2.5.1, shall be a matter of special
made of corrosion-resistant material. consideration by the Register on a case by case basis.
3.2.4.5.2 Metal liners shall be made in a single piece. In
3.2.5.3 The thickness of the flanges of intermediate and
general, they shall be manufactured from castings.
thrust shafts and the propeller shaft forward (inside) flange
Only with the express consent of the Register may shall be at least equal to the one of the following values,
particularly long liners be made up of two parts, provided whichever is greater:
that, after fitting, the abutting edges are connected and made
– 0,2 of the diameter of intermediate shaft, in accordance
watertight by a method approved by the Register and the area
with 3.2.2.1; or
of the joint is subjected to special testing. Butt weld joints of
the liner shall be arranged outside the region of bearings. – diameter of bolts calculated in accordance with 3.2.5.1
for the material with tensile strength equal to the one of
For small shafts, the use of liners manufactured
the shaft in question.
from pipes instead of castings may be considered.
Flanges with surface areas which are not parallel
3.2.4.5.3 The minimum wall thickness of metal shaft liners
shall be a matter of special consideration by the Register. In
in way of bearings fitted on propeller shafts or on
no case flange thickness shall be less than that of the bolt
intermediate shafts inside stern tubes shall not be less than
diameter concerned.
the value s, in [mm], using the following formula:
The thickness of aft (outside) propeller shaft flange
s= 0,33 ⋅ d + 7,5 , [ mm ] (3.2.4-3) shall not be less than 0,25 of the diameter of the shaft in the
flange area.
where:
3.2.5.4 The fillet radius at the base of the flange shall not
d = shaft diameter under the liner, [mm]. be less than 8% of the actual shaft diameter. The surface of
In the case of continuous liners, the wall thickness the rounding shall be smooth and without any recesses in the
between the bearings may be reduced to 0,75·s. way of nut and the bolt head. The rounding may be
3.2.4.5.4 The liners shall be shrunk on the shaft in such a performed with different radius, but the factor of stress
way as to provide tight interference between mating surfaces. concentration shall not exceed the value for the equivalent
Pins, bolts and similar shall not be used for securing the shaft circular rounding with the radius 8% of the actual shaft
liner. diameter.
Appropriate protection between propeller and stern 3.2.5.5 Non-integral couplings which are shrunk on the
tube shall be provided (rope guard). shaft by means of the oil pressure injection method or by
3.2.4.5.5 The propeller shaft surface between the propeller other means may be accepted on the basis of the calculation
and the stern tube, and in way of propeller nut, shall be of shrinking and induced stresses, and assembly instructions.
suitably protected in order to prevent any entry of river water, To this end, the force due to friction between the
unless the shaft is made of austenitic stainless steel. mating surfaces is not to be less than 2,8 times the total force
due to the transmitted torque and thrust (for vessels having
two or more main propulsion shafts value 2,8 may be reduced
to 2,5).

32 June 2018
The values of 0,14 and 0,18 will be taken for the 3.2.6 Shaft bearings
friction coefficient in the case of shrinking under oil pressure
and dry shrink fitting, respectively. 3.2.6.1 Arrangement of shaft bearings
In addition, the equivalent stress due to shrinkage 3.2.6.1.1 Shaft bearings both inside and outside the stern
determined by means of the von Mises-Hencky criterion in tube shall be so disposed that, when the plant is hot and
the points of maximum stress of the coupling is not to exceed irrespective of the condition of loading of the vessel, each
0,8 times the minimum yield strength (R e ), or 0,2% proof bearing is subjected to positive reaction forces equivalent to
stress (R p0,2 ), of the material of the part concerned. not less than 20% of the weight of the shaft length carried by
the bearing. By appropriate spacing of the bearings and by
3.2.5.6 Where couplings are separate from the shafts, alignment of the shafting in relation to the coupling flange at
provision shall be made to resist the astern pull. the engine or gearing, care shall be taken to ensure that no
undue transverse forces or bending moments are exerted on
3.2.5.7 Carbon-manganese steel intermediate shafts having the crankshaft or gear shafts when the plant is hot. By
flanges attached by fusion welding may be accepted provided spacing the bearings sufficiently far apart, steps are also to be
that the following conditions are complied with: taken to ensure that the reaction forces of line or gear shaft
– the materials are of a weldable quality with a carbon bearings are not appreciably affected should the alignment of
content in general not exceeding 0,23% and the carbon one or more bearings be altered by hull deflections or by
equivalent not exceeding 0,4%; displacement or wear of the bearings themselves.
– the weld is of a full penetration type; 3.2.6.1.2 Guide values for the maximum permissible distance
– welding shall be in accordance with an Register approved between bearings l max can be determined using the following
procedure; formula:
– the welding is carried out by qualified welders;
lmax= k1 ⋅ d , [ mm ] (3.2.6-1)
– the shaft fillet radius and flange are machined all over.
Particular attention shall be paid to the smooth blending where:
of the fillet radius; k1 = 450 for oil-lubricated white metal bearing;
– the welds are subsequently examined by magnetic crack = 280 for grey cast iron, grease-lubricated stern
detection methods; tube bearings;
– the shaft shall be post-weld heat treated at a temperature = 280 ÷ 350 for water-lubricated rubber bearings in
of 650°C with a holding time of one hour per 25,0 mm of stern tubes and shaft brackets (upper values for
weld thickness and thereafter allowing the structure to special designs only);
cool slowly in the furnace;
d = diameter of the shaft between bearings, [mm].
– the whole of the work is carried out to the Register’s
satisfaction. 3.2.6.1.3 Where the shaft speed exceeds 350,0 rev/min, it is
recommended that the maximum bearing spacing in
For a typical example of this type of coupling, see accordance with formula here below be observed in order to
Figure 3.2.5-1. avoid excessive loads due to bending vibrations.
In borderline cases a bending stress analysis should
be made for the shafting system.
d
lmax= k2 ⋅ , [ mm ] (3.2.6-2)
n
where:
k2 = coefficient defined as:
= 8400 for oil-lubricated white metal bearings;
= 5200 for grease-lubricated, grey cast iron
bearings and for rubber bearings inside stern tubes and tail
Figure 3.2.5-1 shaft brackets;
Typical example of coupling welded to intermediate shaft n = rated speed of shaft, [rpm];
d = shaft diameter, [mm].
3.2.5.8 All couplings which are attached to shafts shall be In general, the distance between bearings should
of approved dimensions. Types of couplings other than above not be less than 60% of the maximum permissible distance as
mentioned will be specially considered by the Register. calculated using formulas from 3.2.6.1.2 or 3.2.6.1.3
respectively.
3.2.6.2 Stern tube bearings
3.2.6.2.1 Inside the stern tube, the propeller shaft should
normally be supported by two bearings. In short stern tubes,
the forward bearing may be dispensed with, in which case at
least one free-standing journal bearing should be provided.

June 2018 33
3.2.6.2.2 Where the propeller in the stern tube runs in 3.2.6.3.5 Bearings of synthetic material shall be supplied
bearings made of rubber or plastic, the length of the after finished machined to design dimensions within a rigid bush.
bearing should be equal approximately 3 ÷ 4 times the shaft Means shall be provided to prevent rotation of the lining
diameter, while the length of the forward bearing should be within the bush during operation.
approximately 1,0 ÷1,5 times the shaft diameter.
3.2.6.4 Stern tube connections
3.2.6.2.3 Where the propeller shaft inside the stern tube runs
in oil-lubricated white metal bearings, the lengths of the after 3.2.6.4.1 Oil-lubricated stern tubes shall be fitted with filling,
and forward stern tube bearings should be approximately 2 testing and drainage connections as well as with a vent pipe.
and 0,8 times the shaft diameter respectively. Connections and stern tube shall be designed to ensure that
oil, infiltrated water and air can be completely expelled.
3.2.6.2.4 Where the propeller shaft runs in grease-lubricated,
grey cast iron bushes the lengths of the after and forward 3.2.6.4.2 The shut-off valve or cock controlling the supply of
stern tube bearings should be approximately 2,5 and 1,0 water shall be fitted direct to the after peak bulkhead, or to
times the shaft diameter respectively. the stern tube where the water supply enters the stern tube
forward of the bulkhead.
3.2.6.2.5 The peripheral speed of the propeller shafts in
grease-lubricated, grey cast iron bearings should not exceed 3.2.6.5 Cast resin mounting
2,5 ÷ 3,0 m/s, while that of propeller shafts in water- The mounting of stern tubes and stern tube bearings
lubricated rubber bearings should not exceed 6,0 m/s. made of cast resin and also the seating of plummer bearings
3.2.6.2.6 Where the propeller shafts are intended to run in on cast resin parts shall be carried out by the Register
antifriction bearings within the stern tube, such bearings approved companies in the presence of the Register. Only
should be preferably cylindrical roller bearings with cast resins approved by the Register may be used for
cambered rollers or bearing races and with an increased seatings.
bearing clearance. The camber shall be sufficient to tolerate Note shall be taken of the installation instructions
without adverse effects an angular deviation of 0,1% between issued by the manufacturer of the cast resin.
the shaft and the bearing axis. Self-aligning roller bearings
may be used to carry the propeller shaft only if provision is 3.2.7 Shaft locking device
made for the axial adjustment of such bearings.
To prevent dragging of a shut-down propulsion
3.2.6.2.7 Propeller shafts running in anti-friction bearings unit, the shafting shall be fitted with a locking device.
shall be fitted at the stern tube ends with seals approved by
the Register for this type of bearing. 3.2.8 Shaft alignment
3.2.6.2.8 For intermediate bearings shorter bearing lengths or 3.2.8.1 The alignment of the propulsion machinery and
higher specific loads as defined in 3.2.6.2, may be agreed shafting and the spacing and location of the bearings shall be
with the Register. For application of roller bearings the such as to ensure that the loads are compatible with the
required minimum loads as specified by the manufacturer material used and the limits prescribed by the manufacturer.
shall be observed.
3.2.8.2 Before the installation of the propeller shaft the
3.2.6.3 Bearing lubrication correct alignment of the stern tube bearings shall be checked.
3.2.6.3.1 The lubrication and the matching of the materials The final alignment on board shall be checked by suitable
used for journal and anti-friction bearings inside and outside measurement methods in afloat condition in presence of the
the stern tube shall satisfy the requirements of marine service. Register.
3.2.6.3.2 Lubricating oil or grease shall be introduced into
3.2.9 Hydraulic tests
the stern tube in such a way as to ensure a reliable supply of
oil or grease to the forward and after stern tube bearings. 3.2.9.1 After being mechanically treated, propeller shaft
With grease lubrication, the forward and after bearings are liners and stern tubes shall be subjected to hydraulic tests
each to be provided with a grease connection. Wherever with test pressure of 0,2 MPa.
possible, a grease pump driven by the shaft shall be used to Welded and forged-welded stern tubes shall not be
secure a continuous supply of grease. subjected to hydraulic tests if the 100% of welded seam is
3.2.6.3.3 Where the shaft runs in oil within the stern tube, a examined by one of the non-destructive methods.
gravity tank shall be fitted at a sufficient height above the
vessel’s load line. Facilities shall be provided for checking 3.2.9.2 In case of oil lubrication, the sealing glands of the
the level of oil in the tank at any time. Gravity tank shall be stern tube shall be tested for tightness after assembling with
provided with level alarms. hydraulic pressure equal to the maximum lubricating oil head
in the gravity tank. The propeller shaft shall be turning during
3.2.6.3.4 Forced water lubrication shall be provided for all testing.
bearings lined with rubber or plastics. The supply of water
may come from a circulating pump or other pressure source 3.2.10 Keyless fitting of propeller
(e.g. from the main engine cooling system). A mesh filter and
flow indicators with an alarm in the wheelhouse shall be 3.2.10.1 These conditions apply to the solid shafts without a
provided for the water service to plastics and rubber bearings. sleeve between the propeller boss and the shaft. Other cases
Cleaning of the filter shall not bring the necessity to stop the shall be specially considered and approved by the Register.
supply of lubricating water to the bearing. The water grooves
in the bearings shall be of ample section and of a shape which
will be little affected by wear-down, particularly for bearings
for the plastics type.

34 June 2018
3.2.10.2 Prior to the final push-up of the boss onto the cone,
the contact area shall be checked and shall not be less than 4 PROPELLERS
70% of the theoretical fitting area and the contact shall be
uniformly distributed. Continuous non-contact bands 4.1 General requirements
extending circumferentially around the cone or over the full
length of the cone are not acceptable. 4.1.1 This Section applies to screw propellers of any size
and type intended for propulsion. They include solid, built-up
3.2.10.3 After final push-up, the propeller shall be secured propellers and controllable pitch propellers, including those
by a nut on the tailshaft. The nut shall be secured to the shaft. ducted in fixed nozzles.
3.2.10.4 The factor of safety against friction slip at 35°C Propellers for vessels with ice strengthening, are
shall not be less than 2,8 under the combined action of torque additionally subject to provisions of 4.5.2 and Table 4.5.1-1.
and propeller thrust, based on the maximum continuous
power for which classification is requested at the 4.1.2 Where a design is proposed to which the following
corresponding speed of rotation of the propeller, plus requirements cannot be applied, special strength calculations
pulsating torque due to torsionals. shall be submitted to the Register and the necessary tests
shall be agreed with the Register.
3.2.10.5 For the oil injection method, the coefficient of
friction for bosses made of steel or copper alloys shall be 4.1.3 The design and size of propellers for ice-breakers
assumed to be 0,13. For other methods, the coefficient of and cycloidal propellers (Voith-Schneider) will be specially
friction shall be considered by the Register on a case by case considered by the Register on a case by case basis. For
basis. propellers in rotating or bow and stern thrusters, see 10.6.2.
3.2.10.6 The maximum equivalent stresses in the boss at 4.1.4 The finished propeller and controllable pitch
0°C, based on the von Mises-Hencky criterion, shall not propeller systems shall be presented to the Register for final
exceed 70% of the minimum yield strength (R e ), or 0,2% inspection and verification of the dimensions. For non-
proof stress (R p0,2 ), of the propeller material, based on the destructive tests see Table 4.4.1-1, Note 2).
test piece value. For cast iron, the value of the above stress In addition, controllable pitch propeller systems
shall not exceed 30% of the nominal tensile strength. shall undergo pressure, tightness and functional tests.
3.2.10.7 For minimum required surface pressure at 35°C,
minimum push-up length at temperature of 35°C, minimum 4.1.5 Propellers having the characteristics indicated in
pull-up length at temperatures ≤ 35°C, minimum surface 4.1.1 shall be individually tested and certified by the
pressure between mating surface at ≤ 35°C, maximum Register. Mass produced propellers may be accepted within
permissible pressure between mating surfaces at 0°C and the framework of the type approval program of the Register.
maximum permissible push-up length at 0°C, see the Rules, 4.1.6 All parts of propellers shall be free of defects and
Part 7 - Machinery installation, 2.8. shall be built and installed with clearances and tolerances in
3.2.10.8 It is necessary to submit, in addition to calculation, accordance with sound marine practice. Particular care shall
the diagram of propeller push-up to the propeller shaft cone be taken with the surface finish of the blades.
with respect to temperature and all other data necessary to
check up the joint. 4.2 Definitions
3.2.10.9 The approved diagram of the propeller push-up to 4.2.1 Solid propeller
propeller shaft cone with respect to temperature, shift
A solid propeller is a propeller (including hub and
indicator and instructions manual for the fitting and
blades) cast in one piece.
dismantling of propeller shall be available on board vessel.
3.2.10.10 Fixed mark of the longitudinal and circumferential 4.2.2 Built-up propeller
position of propeller to the propeller shaft shall be impressed A built-up propeller is a propeller cast in more than
in the propeller boss, nut and propeller shaft. one piece. In general, built up propellers have the blades cast
3.2.10.11 Test push-up of the propeller to the propeller shaft separately and fixed to the hub by a system of bolts and studs
shall be carried out in workshop to check up shift, pressure (fixed pitch propeller with detachable blades).
and mating surfaces.
4.2.3 Controllable pitch propellers
Controllable pitch propellers are built-up propellers
which include in the hub a mechanism to rotate the blades in
order to have the possibility of controlling the propeller pitch
in different service conditions.
4.2.4 Nozzle
A nozzle is a circular structural casing enclosing
the propeller.

June 2018 35
4.2.5 Ducted propeller tensile brass or stainless steel shall be used for bolts
connecting bronze blades.
A ducted propeller is a propeller installed in a
nozzle. 4.4.5 The use of grey cast iron, nodular cast iron,
unalloyed and low-alloyed cast steel for propellers may be
4.3 Documentation to be submitted permitted on case by case basis.
4.3.1 Solid propellers 4.4.6 Composite materials may also be used, provided
The documents listed in the Rules, Part 1 – that a sufficient strength has been demonstrated and the
Classification and Surveys, Chapter II, Table 3.2-4 shall be propeller is manufactured according to an approved
submitted for solid propellers intended for propulsion. All procedure.
listed plans shall be constructional plans complete with all
4.4.7 Welding and methods of control of welded joints
dimensions and shall contain full indication of types of
shall comply with the Rules, Part 26 – Welding.
materials employed.
4.3.2 Built-up and controllable pitch propellers Table 4.4.3-1

Materials for propellers
The documents listed in the Rules, Part 1 –
Classification and Surveys, Chapter II, Table 3.2-4, as
applicable, shall be submitted for built-up and controllable Specified minimum tensile
Material
pitch propellers intended for propulsion. strength, [N/mm2]
Grey cast iron 250,0
4.4 Materials Nodular cast iron 400,0
Unalloyed cast steel 440,0
4.4.1 The parts stated in Table 4.4.1-1 are subject to
Low-alloy cast steel 440,0
supervision of the Register in the process of manufacture,
regarding their compliance with the approved technical Martensitic stainless steel
590,0
documentation and the requirements of the Rules, Part 25 – 12 Cr 1 Ni
Metallic materials. Martensitic stainless steel
750,0
13 Cr 4 Ni
4.4.2 Materials of parts referred to in the Table 4.4.1-1 Martensitic stainless steel
760,0
under 1 and for all other parts of the mechanism transmitting 16 Cr 5 Ni
torque shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of Austenitic stainless steel
440,0
the Rules, Part 25 – Metallic Materials in the presence of the 19 Cr 11 Ni
Register (EN 10204, type 3.2). Propeller cap may be chosen Grade Cu 1 - Mn bronze 440,0
according to standards. Grade Cu 2 - Ni-Mn bronze 440,0
4.4.3 Castings for solid propellers, blades and hubs of Grade Cu 3 - Ni-Al bronze 590,0
fixed pitch propellers with detachable blades and of Grade Cu 4 - Mn-Al bronze 630,0
controllable pitch propellers shall be made of the materials General notes:
specified in the Table 4.4.3-1. • Where it is proposed to use materials which are not
included in this Table, details of the chemical composition,
4.4.4 In general, steel (preferably nickel-steel) shall be mechanical properties and density shall be submitted for
used for manufacturing the bolts connecting steel blades to approval.
the hub of built-up or controllable pitch propellers, and high
Table 4.4.1-1
Component 3) Material 1) Relevant reference

grey cast iron the Rules, Part 25, 3.13.3
Solid propellers, blades 2) and hubs of built-up nodular cast iron the Rules, Part 25, 3.13.4
1.
propellers cast steel the Rules, Part 25, 3.12 and 3.14
copper alloys approved by the Register
2. Bolts for fastening blades, cap and glands
forged steel the Rules, Part 25, 3.11
3. Propeller cap
copper alloys the Rules, Part 25, 4.2 and 4.3
Notes:
1) Material shall be chosen in accordance with 4.4.3.
2) Propeller blades shall be examined by one of the non-destructive methods approved by the Register.
3) Nomenclature, material and test groups of parts of controllable pitch propellers and cycloidal propellers (Voith-Schneider) shall
be submitted to the Register for special consideration on a case by case basis.

36 June 2018
c = coefficient of centrifugal stresses (determined

4.5 Blade thickness from the Table 4.5.1-2);
4.5.1 The thickness, in [mm], of the expanded cylindrical e = rake at blade tip (see Figure 4.5.1-1), [mm];
blade section (see Figure 4.5.1-1) of solid propellers, fixed ɛ = angle between lines of face generatrix and
pitch propellers with detachable blades, or controllable pitch normal, [°];
propellers shall not be less than: H = propeller blade face pitch, [mm];
2 D = propeller diameter (see Figure 4.5.1-1), [m].
k Pp c ⋅ e ⋅ 9,81  D ⋅ n 
=
t 3,67 ⋅ A ⋅ ⋅ + ⋅  (4.5.1-1) The blade thickness shall be checked at the blade
z ⋅ b R 'm ⋅ n R 'm  300 
root and at the radius 0,6∙R (see Figure 4.5.1-1).
where: The designed root section shall be:
A = coefficient to be determined from the Table .1 for solid propellers:
4.5.1-3 depending on radius r of the section and the − at the radius of 0,2∙R, if the hub radius < 0,2∙R;
corresponding pitch ratio H/D; − at the radius of 0,25∙R, if the hub radius ≥ 0,2∙R;
k = coefficient from the Table 4.5.1-1; .2 for fixed pitch propellers with detachable blades:
z = number of blades; − at the radius of 0,3∙R, where the coefficients A
b = developed blade width of cylindrical sections in and c shall be read off for r = 0,25∙R;
an expanded view, [m]; .3 for controllable pitch propellers:
Pp = shaft power at rated output of main engine, [kW]; − at the radius of 0,35∙R.
n = revolutions per minute of the propeller, [rpm]; NOTE 1: The blade thickness so determined does not take
R' m = 0,6∙R m +175 [N/mm2] but not more than: into account fillets at blade roots.
570,0 N/mm2 for steel blades; NOTE 2: The holes for the blade fastening parts of fixed
608,0 N/mm2 for blades of non-ferrous metals; pitch propellers with detachable blades and of controllable
pitch propellers shall not reduce the design section.
300,0 N/mm2 for blades of grey cast iron;
Rm = tensile strength of blades material, [N/mm2]; NOTE 3: The thickness of propeller blades in vessels of
navigation area 3 may be reduced by 5%.
Figure 4.5.1-1
Blade section

June 2018 37
4.6 Propeller mounting

Table 4.5.1-1
Coefficient k 4.6.1 Screw propeller hubs shall be properly adjusted and
fitted on the propeller shaft cone. The forward end of the hole
in the hub shall have the edge rounded to a radius of
Without ice With ice approximately 6,0 mm.
Material
strengthening strengthening
Special brass or bronze 7,8 8,5 4.6.2 Where the tapered joint between the shaft and the
Cast steel 8,6 9,4 propeller is fitted with a key, the propeller shall be mounted
Grey cast iron 8,8 – on the tapered shaft in such a way that approximately the
General notes: mean torque can be transmitted from the shaft to the propeller
• If the number of cylinders of engines is less than four, by the frictional bond. The propeller nut shall be secured in a
coefficient k shall be increased by 7%. suitable manner.
• In propulsion plants with engines with hydraulic or
electromagnetic couplings, coefficient k may be reduced 4.7 Hub and blade fastening parts
by 5%. 4.7.1 Fillet radius of the transition from blade to hub
• For vessels with two propellers, without ice strengthening, shall exceed: 0,04∙D on the suction side, and 0,03∙D on the
coefficient k may be reduced by 7%. thrust side.
• For the blades of materials different from those specified
in this Table, the value of k shall be determined on a case If the blades are without rake, the fillet radius on
by case basis. both sides shall not be less than 0,03∙D.
Gradual transition from blade to hub with variable
Table 4.5.1-2 radius is permitted.
Values of coefficient of centrifugal forces stresses c
4.7.2 The propeller hub shall be provided with holes
through which the empty spaces between the hub and shaft
r/R = 0,20 0,25 0,35 0,60 cone are filled with non-corrosive mass. The propeller cap
shall be also filled with such a mass.
c= 0,50 0,45 0,30 0,00
4.7.3 The internal diameter of the thread (core diameter)
Table 4.5.1-3 of stud bolts (d v ) for fastening the blades to the hub shall not
Values of coefficient A be less than:
B ⋅ Rmk
H/D r/R = 0,20 r/R = 0,25 r/R = 0,35 r/R = 0,60 dv = K ⋅ t ⋅ , [ mm ] (4.7.3-1)
d 0 ⋅ Rmv
0,5 152,6 147,3 134,1 85,9
0,6 143,5 138,8 126,7 82,0 where:
0,7 135,2 130,9 120,0 78,4 K = 0,33 in case of 3 stud bolts on thrust side;
0,8 127,7 123,8 113,7 75,0
= 0,30 in case of 4 stud bolts on thrust side;
0,9 121,0 117,4 108,1 71,8
1,0 115,0 111,8 103,0 68,8 = 0,28 in case of 5 stud bolts on thrust side;
1,1 109,9 106,8 98,6 66,0 t = maximum thickness of blade at the design root
1,2 105,5 102,5 94,6 63,5 section (see 4.5.1), [mm];
1,3 101,8 98,9 91,3 61,2 B = width of the straightened blade at the design root
1,4 99,0 96,1 88,5 59,1 section, [mm];
1,5 96,9 93,9 86,3 57,3 R mk = tensile strength of the blade material, [N/mm2];
1,6 95,6 92,5 84,7 55,7
R mv = tensile strength of the stud bolts material,
General notes: [N/mm2];
• For controllable pitch propellers H/D shall be based on the
designed service operation. d0 = diameter of pitch circle of stud bolts holes, [mm];
= 0,85 ⋅ l for other arrangements of stud bolts;
4.5.2 The thickness of blade tips shall not be less than:
0,0035∙D - for vessels without ice strengthening; l = maximum distance between stud bolts (see Figure
0,0050∙D - for vessels with ice strengthening. 4.7.3-1), [mm].
4.5.3 The blade thickness calculated in accordance with

4.5.1 and 4.5.2 may be reduced (e.g. for blades of particular
shape) provided the relevant documentation with a detailed
strength calculation are submitted for consideration to the
Register.
4.5.4 The minimum blade thickness of propellers with

wide tip blades running in nozzles is not to be less than the
values obtained by the applicable formula in 4.5.1, increased
by 10%.

38 June 2018
4.8.2 The difference in mass of regular and spare

detachable blades of built propellers shall not exceed 1,5%.
4.9 Controllable pitch propellers

4.9.1 The hydraulic system of the pitch control gear shall
be provided with two separate pumps of equal capacity, one
of which shall be stand-by pump. One of the pumps may be
driven by the main engine in which case the pump shall be
capable of operating the propeller blades under all operating
conditions of the engine.
4.9.2 For propulsion plants up to 220,0 kW, one power-

driven pump set is sufficient provided that, in addition, a
hand-operated pump is provided, capable to control the blade
pitch and being able to move the blades from the ahead to the
Figure 4.7.3-1 astern position in an sufficiently short time for safe
Propeller hub with holes for blade fastening manoeuvring.
4.7.4 The blade retaining bolts or studs shall be properly 4.9.3 Vessels having two controllable pitch propellers,
secured against unintentional loosening. The blade retaining may be provided with one independent stand-by pump for
bolts or studs shall be tightened in a controlled manner such both propellers. A stand-by pump may not be provided where
that the tension on these is approximately 60 ÷ 70% of their the propeller blades can be operated by a hand-driven pump
yield strength. or a hand drive actuated by one person.
4.7.5 Flanges for connection of blades to hubs 4.9.4 The time of putting over the controllable pitch
propeller blades from “full ahead” to “full astern” position
The diameter d F of the flange for connection to the
when main engine is out of operation shall not exceed 20
propeller hub shall not be less than that obtained from the
seconds for propellers with D (propeller diameter) ≤ 2,0 m.
following formula:
d F = d 0 + 1,8 ⋅ d s , [ mm ]
4.9.5 With gravity systems of lubrication used for
(4.7.5-1) controllable pitch propellers, the gravity tanks and lubricating
oil system shall comply with the requirements of 3.2.6.3.3.
where:
d0 = diameter of pitch circle stud, [mm]; 4.9.6 Suitable devices shall be fitted to ensure that an
ds = diameter of studs, [mm]. alteration of the blade pitch setting cannot overload the
propulsion plant or cause it to stall.
The thickness of the flange shall not be less than
1/10 of the diameter d F . Steps shall be taken to ensure that, in the event of
failure of the control system, the setting of the blades:
The formula above is applicable for built-up and
controllable pitch propellers. – does not change; or
– reaches a final position slowly enough to allow the
4.8 Propeller balancing emergency control system to be put into operation or to
take other suitable countermeasures.
4.8.1 The completely finished propeller shall be statically
balanced in accordance with the specified ISO 484 tolerance 4.9.7 The complete hydraulic system for the control of
class. The balancing shall be carried out by means of a test the controllable pitch propeller mechanism shall be
load which, when suspended to any blade in horizontal hydraulically tested at a pressure equal to 1,5 times the
position shall cause the propeller to rotate. design pressure. The proper operation of the safety valve
The mass of test load shall not be greater than the shall be tested in the presence of the Register.
value obtained by the formula:
4.9.8 Controllable pitch propeller systems shall be
mp equipped with means of emergency control enabling the
m= k ⋅ , [ kg ] (4.8.1-1) controllable pitch propeller to remain in operation, should the
R
remote control system fail. It is recommended that a device is
where: fitted which locks the propeller blades in the “ahead” setting.
k = 0,75 with n ≤ 200;
= 0,50 with 200 < n ≤ 500; 4.9.9 Controllable pitch propeller systems shall be
provided with an engine room indicator showing the actual
= 0,25 with n > 500;
pitch setting of the blades. If the controllable pitch propeller
n = rated number of propeller revolutions, [rpm];
is operated from the steering stand of the vessel, the steering
mp = propeller mass, [t];
stand shall also be equipped with an indicator showing the
R = propeller radius, [m].
actual blade pitch setting.
However, for built-up and controllable pitch
propellers, the required static balancing of the complete 4.9.10 The selection and arrangement of filters has to
propeller may be replaced by an individual check of blade ensure an uninterrupted supply with filtered oil, also during
weight and gravity centre position. filter cleaning or exchange. In general, main filters shall be

June 2018 39
arranged on the pressure side directly after the pump. An

additional coarse filtration of the hydraulic oil at the suction 5 BOILERS AND THERMAL OIL
side, before the pump, should be provided. HEATERS, PRESSURE VESSELS AND
4.10 Tightness tests HEAT EXCHANGERS
4.10.1 After fitting of the propeller to the propeller shaft, 5.1 General requirements
the seal shall be tested for tightness by a pressure of 0,2 MPa.
5.1.1 Scope of the Rules
If the seal is exposed to the oil pressure from the
stern tube or the propeller hub, it shall be tested by the 5.1.1.1 The boilers and other pressure vessels, associated
pressure equal to that used for testing of the stern tube seal or piping systems and fittings shall be of a design and
the propeller hub. construction adequate for the service for which they are
intended and shall be so installed and protected as to reduce
4.10.2 The hub of the controllable pitch propeller after to a minimum any danger to persons on board, due regard
being assembled with blades, shall be tested by internal being paid to moving parts, hot surfaces and other hazards.
pressure equal to the lubricating oil head in gravity tank or The design shall have regard to materials used in
equal to the pressure of the lubricating pump of the construction, the purpose for which the equipment is
lubricating system. intended, the working conditions to which it will be subjected
and the environmental conditions on board.
4.10.3 Sealing of cycloidal propellers (Voith-Schneider)
shall be tested by the internal pressure equal to the lubricating So these Rules apply to pressure equipment for the
oil head in gravity tank. following requirements:
– be safe in sight of pressure risk;
– be safe in sight of other risks, moving parts, hot surfaces;
– ensure capability of essential services.
5.1.1.2 Boilers and pressure vessels shall be designed,
constructed, installed and tested in accordance with the
applicable requirements of this Section.
Other national and international standards such as
AD 2000 Code, ASME Section I IV and VIII, TRD,
CODAP, British Standards BS 5500 or harmonized European
Standards EN 13445, EN 12952 and EN 12953 may be
considered as an alternative to the requirements of this
Section.
As regards their construction and installation, steam
boiler plants are also required to comply with the applicable
statutory requirements and regulations of the inland
waterway vessel’s country of registration.
5.1.1.3 For strength (design) calculations see the Rules,
Part 10 – Boiler, heat exchangers and pressure vessels,
Section 2. Strength calculation shall be made by method
agreed by the Register.
5.1.1.4 Typical examples of permissible welded joints are
given in the Rules, Part 10 – Boiler, heat exchangers and
pressure vessels, Section 7.
5.1.2 Scope of supervision

5.1.2.1 Subject to supervision of the Register, in the
process of construction are:
.1 steam boilers as well as exhaust gas boilers, operating at
working pressure of 0,07 MPa and over;
.2 heat exchangers and pressure vessels which under
operating conditions are filled fully or partially with gas
or vapour at working pressure of 0,07 MPa and over and
which have a capacity of 0,025 m3 and over or the
product of pressure in MPa with capacity in m3 is 0,03
MPa m3 and over;
.3 oil burning installations of boilers;
.4 water heating boilers designed for water temperature
above 115°C;

40 June 2018
.5 water, air, lubricating oil coolers, fuel oil heaters/coolers 5.1.3.7 Maximum working pressure pw
and filters of main and auxiliary machinery; Maximum working pressure is the maximum
.6 thermal oil heaters. permissible gauge pressure under normal conditions on
continuous running, excluding permissible short-time
5.1.2.2 Water heating boilers designed for water pressure rises such as may be occasioned by the operation of
temperature above 115°C shall comply, as regards the a safety valve or other protective devices.
material used and scantlings of elements, with the
requirements for steam boilers (boilers heated by fuel or 5.1.3.8 Design boiler capacity
electrically), or heat exchangers (boilers heated by steam of Design boiler capacity is the maximum amount of
hot liquids) specified in this Section. steam that can be generated by the boiler at design
Filters and coolers/heaters of main and auxiliary parameters during one hour on continuous running.
machinery shall comply, as regards the material used and
scantlings of elements, with the requirements for heat 5.1.3.9 Design wall temperature t
exchangers and pressure vessels in this Section. Design wall temperature is the average wall
thickness temperature used in calculation of permissible
5.1.2.3 Cylinders designed for storage of compressed gases stresses in dependence upon the temperature of medium and
used in various systems and units for the purposes of vessel’s heating conditions.
operation, shall be manufactured to the current recognized
standards under the supervision of the Register or body 5.1.3.10 Design pressure p
recognized by the Register taking into consideration Design pressure is the pressure used by the
requirements of 5.5.5. manufacturer to determine the scantlings of the vessel. This
5.1.2.4 Product certificate issued by manufacturer (EN pressure cannot be taken less than the maximum working
10204, type 3.1) may be accepted for “mass produced” small pressure and shall be limited by the set pressure of the safety
pressure vessels of Class I, II and III which are type approved valve, as prescribed by the applicable Rules. Pressure is
by the Register. indicated as gauge pressure above atmospheric pressure,
vacuum is indicated as negative pressure.
5.1.3 Definitions 5.1.3.11 Walls of boilers, heat exchangers and pressure
5.1.3.1 Pressure vessel vessels
Pressure vessel is a welded or seamless container Walls of boilers, heat exchangers and pressure
used for the containment of fluids at a pressure above or vessels are the walls of steam and water (gas and liquid)
below the ambient pressure and at any temperature. Fluid spaces between the stop valves, including the walls of branch
power cylinders in hydraulic or pneumatic plants are also pieces and valve bodies.
considered pressure vessels. 5.1.3.12 Liquid and gaseous substances
5.1.3.2 Fired pressure vessel Liquid and gaseous substances are:
Fired pressure vessel is a pressure vessel which is a) liquid substances are liquids having a vapour pressure at
completely or partially exposed to fire from burners or the maximum permissible temperature of not more than
combustion gases. 0,05 MPa above normal atmospheric pressure;
5.1.3.3 Unfired pressure vessel b) gaseous substances are gases, liquefied gases, gases
dissolved under pressure, vapours and also those liquids
Unfired pressure vessel is any pressure vessel
whose vapour pressure at the maximum permissible
which is not a fired pressure vessel is an unfired pressure
temperature is greater than 0,05 MPa above normal
vessel.
atmospheric pressure.
5.1.3.4 Boiler
5.1.4 Classes
Boiler is one or more fired pressure vessels and
associated piping systems used for generating steam or hot Boilers, pressure vessels and heat exchangers are
water at a temperature above 115°C by means of heat classified in accordance with Table 5.1.4-1, depending on
resulting from combustion of fuel or from combustion gases. parameters and design features.
5.1.3.5 Steam generator 5.1.5 Components subject to supervision
Steam generator is a heat exchanger and associated
5.1.5.1 The components given in Table 5.1.5-1 are subject
piping used for generating steam. In general, the
to the supervision of the Register in the process of
requirements for boilers are also applicable for steam
manufacture to ensure compliance with the technical
generators, unless otherwise indicated.
documentation of 5.1.6, which shall be approved by the
5.1.3.6 Heat exchanger Register.
Heat exchanger is a pressure vessel used to heat or 5.1.5.2 Certificate for material, issued by the manufacturer
cool a fluid with another fluid. In general heat exchangers are (EN 10204, type 3.1), may be accepted, for material of
composed of a number of adjacent chambers and the two mountings and fittings, instead of Certificate for material
fluids flowing separately in adjacent chambers. One or more issued by the Register (EN 10204, type 3.2), if the conditions
chambers may consist of bundles of tubes. stated in Table 5.1.5-2 are fulfilled.

June 2018 41
Table 5.1.4-1
Pressure vessel classification
Item Class I Class II Class III

Boilers (including exhaust gas boilers and water heating boilers
designed for water temperatures above 115°C),
p > 0,35 p ≤ 0,35 –
steam accumulators,
thermal oil heaters
Steam generators p > 1,6 p ≤ 1,6 –
Pressure vessels and heat exchangers with liquid fuels, lubricating p > 1,6 or p ≤ 1,6 p ≤ 0,7
oils, flammable hydraulic fluids t > 150 t ≤ 150 t ≤ 60
Pressure vessels and heat exchangers with steam, compressed air, p > 1,6 or p ≤ 1,6 p ≤ 0,7
gases or thermal oils t > 300 t ≤ 300 t ≤ 170 1)
Pressure vessels and heat exchangers with water, non-flammable p > 4,0 or p ≤ 4,0 p ≤ 1,6
hydraulic fluids t > 300 t ≤ 300 t ≤ 200
Pressure vessels and heat exchangers s > 35 16 < s ≤ 35 s ≤ 16
Pressure vessels and heat exchangers with liquefied gases (propane,
any parameters – –
butane, etc.), toxic and corrosive media
where:
p = design pressure, [MPa];
t = design wall temperature, [°C];
s = wall thickness, [mm].
Notes:
1) For thermal oil t ≤ 150°C
General notes:
• Whenever the class is defined by more than one characteristic, the equipment shall be considered belonging to the highest class of
its characteristics, independently of the values of the other characteristics.
Table 5.1.5-1 Table 5.1.5-2

Components subject to supervision Testing of materials for mountings and fittings
Elements of boilers, heat exchangers and pressure vessels Working

Material 1) DN, p w
1 Boilers and steam generators temperature
1.1 Shells, end plates, tube plates, drums, headers and Steel, cast steel > 300°C DN ≤ 32
chambers Steel, cast steel, DN ≤ 250 or
≤ 300°C
1.2 Heated and non-heated steel tubes nodular cast iron p w ⋅DN ≤ 250
1.3 Furnaces and elements of combustion chambers Copper alloys ≤ 225°C p w ⋅DN ≤ 150
1.4 Long and short stays, girders (see 5.1.5.3) where:
DN = nominal diameter, [mm];
1.5 Bodies of mountings and fittings (see 5.1.5.2)
pw = working pressure, [MPa].
2 Heat exchangers and pressure vessels Notes:
2.1 Shells, distributors, end plates, headers and covers 1) For the fittings made of grey cast iron, certificate for
2.2 Tube plates material issued by Register is not required.
2.3 Tubes
5.1.5.4 For Class I “mass produced” small pressure vessels
2.4 Long and short stays (see 5.1.5.3)
(such as accumulators for valve control, gas bottles etc.):
2.5 Bodies of fittings (see 5.1.5.2) Register certificate for material may be waived and
manufacturer certificate (EN 10204, type 3.1) for material
5.1.5.3 Material testing under supervision of the Register
accepted at the Register discretion.
may be waived in the case of:
– small boiler parts made of unalloyed steels, such as stay 5.1.5.5 For coils of thermal oil heaters with a maximum
bolts, stays of ≤ 100,0 mm diameter, reinforcing plates, permissible working pressure up to 1,0 MPa and an
handhole, headhole and manhole closures, forged flanges permissible discharge temperature up to 300°C certificate for
up to DN 150 and nozzles up to DN 150; and material issued by the manufacturer (EN 10204, type 3.1),
may be accepted.
– smoke tubes (tubes subject to external pressure).
Certificate for above mentioned material, issued by 5.1.5.6 Parts not subject to material testing, such as
the manufacturer (EN 10204, type 3.1), may be accepted. external supports, lifting brackets, pedestals, etc. shall be
designed for the intended purpose and shall be made of
suitable materials.

42 June 2018
5.1.6 Documentation to be submitted Werkstoffblatt” (Iron and Steel Material Specification)

SEW 400;
5.1.6.1 The technical documentation listed in the Rules,
Part 1 – Classification and Surveys, Chapter II, Table 3.2-5 .5 steel flanges conforming to DIN 2528.
shall be submitted to the Register, before manufacture of 5.1.7.6 Steel castings for steam boilers, pressure vessels
boilers, pressure vessels and heat exchangers. and pipelines
5.1.6.2 Documentation on thermal oil heaters shall be The following grades of cast steel may be used:
submitted in accordance with the Rules, Part 1 – .1 grades of cast steel for use at room temperature and high
Classification and Surveys, Chapter II, Table 3.2-6. temperatures conforming to EN 10213-2 “Technical
5.1.6.3 Documentation on oil burners and oil firing Specifications relating to Cast Steel for Pressure
equipment shall be submitted in accordance with the Rules, Vessels”, Part 2 (GP240GH, GP280GH, G20Mo5,
Part 1 – Classification and Surveys, Chapter II, Table 3.2-7. G17CrMo5-5, G17CrMo9-10);
.2 ferritic grades of cast steel GS–38 and GS–45
5.1.6.4 Documentation on compressed gas cylinders shall conforming to DIN 1681 and GS 16Mn5 and GS20Mn5
be submitted in accordance with the Rules, Part 1 – conforming to DIN 17182 up to a wall temperature of
Classification and Surveys, Chapter II, Table 3.2-8. 300 °C;
5.1.7 Materials .3 heat resistant ferritic, ferritic-austenitic and austenitic
grades of cast steel as well as nickel and cobalt based
5.1.7.1 Materials intended for manufacture of components alloys conforming to EN 10295.
of boilers, heat exchangers and pressure vessels shall satisfy
the requirements of the Rules, Part 25 – Metallic materials. 5.1.7.7 For manufacture of boiler mountings and fittings,
Materials for components of boilers, heat and of components and mountings and fittings of heat
exchangers and pressure vessels of Class I and II are subject exchangers and pressure vessels, nodular cast iron (ferritic
to the supervision of the Register (see 5.1.5). type - ordinary qualities) according to the Rules, Part 25 –
Metallic materials, 3.13.4.5 and Table 3.13.4.5 may be used
5.1.7.2 Steels according to the Rules, Part 25 – Metallic for working pressures ≤ 4,0 MPa and working temperatures ≤
materials, 3.5, may be used for manufacture of components 300°C. Diameter of valves and fittings must be DN ≤ 175,0
of boilers, heat exchangers and pressure vessels. Carbon and mm.
carbon-manganese steels are permitted at design temperatures Nodular cast iron of the ferritic/pearlitic and
up to 400°C and low-alloy steels up to 500°C. pearlitic type is in general subject to the limitation of use as
5.1.7.3 For manufacture of components of heat exchangers grey cast iron as specified in 5.1.7.8. Nodular cast iron of the
and pressure vessels, steels according to the Rules, Part 25 – ferritic type with special qualities (see the Rules, Part 25 –
Metallic materials, 3.6 and 3.7 may be used. Steels according Metallic materials, 3.13.4.5 and Table 3.13.4.5), shall not be
to the Rules, Part 25 – Metallic materials, 3.3 may be used used for temperatures exceeding 350°C.
for manufacture of components of heat exchangers and 5.1.7.8 Grey cast iron according to the Rules, Part 25 –
pressure vessels, with the condition that for Class I vessels Metallic materials, 3.13.3 may be used for manufacture of
they must be killed. Steels according to the Rules, Part 25 – valves and fittings which are not exposed to dynamic loads,
Metallic materials, 3.2 may be used for manufacture of for working pressures ≤ 1,0 MPa, working temperatures ≤
components of Class III heat exchangers and pressure 200°C and the diameter of fittings must be ≤ 175,0 mm.
vessels.
Manufacture of components for non-heated
5.1.7.4 Steel pipes according to the Rules, Part 25 – surfaces of boilers, with diameter ≤ 200,0 mm, made of grey
Metallic materials, 3.10.2 and 3.10.3 may be used for cast iron is permitted for working pressures ≤ 1,0 MPa and
manufacture of boilers and heat exchangers. The use of for working temperatures ≤ 200°C.
welded steel pipes is permitted, if it is proved that they are Grey cast iron may be used for manufacture of
equivalent to seamless pipes. components of Class III heat exchangers and pressure
For manufacture of heat exchangers, steel pipes vessels.
according to the Rules, Part 25 – Metallic materials, 3.10.4
and 3.10.5 may be used. 5.1.7.9 Copper alloys according to the Rules, Part 25 –
Metallic materials, 4.2 may be used for manufacture of boiler
5.1.7.5 Forgings for steam boilers, pressure vessels and mountings and fittings, and components and mountings and
pipelines fittings of heat exchangers and pressure vessels, for working
The following materials may be used: pressures ≤ 2,5 MPa and working temperatures ≤ 225°C.
.1 weldable unalloyed structural steels conforming to EN Copper alloy pipes according to the Rules, Part 25
10250-2 up to an operating temperature of 300°C; – Metallic materials, 4.1 may be used for manufacture of heat
exchangers.
.2 forgings made of ferritic and martensitic steels with
specified properties at elevated temperatures conforming 5.1.7.10 Grey cast iron and copper alloys may not be used
to EN 10222-2; for mountings and fittings of thermal oil heaters.
.3 forgings made of weldable fine-grained structural steels
conforming to EN 10222-4;
.4 austenitic or austenitic-ferritic stainless steel forgings
conforming to DIN 17440, EN 10222-5 or “Stahl-Eisen-

June 2018 43
5.1.7.11 Nuts and bolts for general plant engineering to 5.1.8.5 Parts to be welded shall, for a distance of at least
recognized standards, e.g. DIN 267 or DIN EN ISO 898 Part 25,0 mm from the welding edges, be carefully cleaned in
1 and 2 may be used for temperatures ≤ 300°C, pressures ≤ order to remove any foreign matter such as rust, scale, oil,
4,0 MPa and ≤ M30 (see the Rules, Part 25 – Metallic grease and paint. If the weld metal is deposited on a
materials, 3.17). previously welded surface, all slag or oxide shall be removed
to prevent inclusions.
5.1.7.12 In the case of boilers or pressure vessels
constructed in accordance with one of the standards 5.1.8.6 Main welded joints
considered acceptable by the Register as per 5.1.1.2, the All joints of Class I and II pressure parts of boilers
material specifications shall be in compliance with the and pressure vessels shall be butt welded, with the exception
requirements of the standard used. of welding connecting flat heads or tube plates to shells, for
5.1.7.13 Materials shall be checked for defects during the which partial penetration welds or fillet welds may be
manufacturing process. Care shall be taken to ensure that accepted.
different materials cannot be confused. Joints of Class III pressure vessels are also subject
During the course of manufacture care is likewise to the above requirement. However connection of dished
required to ensure that marks and inspection stamps on the heads to shells by lap welds may be accepted. Figure 5.1.8-1
materials remain intact or are transferred in accordance with shows some acceptable details of circumferential lap welds
regulations. for Class III pressure vessels.
The location of main welded joints shall be chosen
5.1.8 Manufacture and welding so that these joints are not submitted to significant bending
5.1.8.1 Class I and II boilers, pressure vessels and heat stresses.
exchangers must be manufactured by works approved by the 5.1.8.7 Shell longitudinal and circumferential welds
Register.
Longitudinal and circumferential joints shall be
5.1.8.2 Welding shall be performed in accordance with welded from both sides of the plates unless otherwise
welding procedures (WPS) approved by the Register. approved. Welding from one side may be permitted only
Welding shall be carried out by approved welders in when there is evidence that the welding process permits a
accordance with the Rules, Part 26 – Welding, 1.3. Methods complete penetration and a sound weld root.
of inspection of welded joints shall comply with the Rules, If a backing strip is used, it shall be removed after
Part 26 – Welding, 3.2.4. welding and prior to any required non-destructive
5.1.8.3 Plates shall be cut by flame cutting (water jet, laser examination.
or plasma), mechanical machining or a combination of both However, permanent backing strips can be accepted
processes. Shearing of plates is not to be used unless the for circumferential welds when the second side is
sheared edge is removed by machining for a distance of 1/4 inaccessible for welding and the following conditions are
of the plate thickness, minimum 3,0 mm. The edges of cut satisfied:
plates shall be examined for laminations, cracks or any other – Class III pressure vessels, or Class II when the cylindrical
defect detrimental to their use. part is seamless;
5.1.8.4 Shells and dished ends shall be formed by hot or – welding procedures are qualified with backing strip;
cold forming, which should not impair the quality of – non-corrosive media.
material. Forming must be carried out by machine. Forming
by hammering is not permitted.
Figure 5.1.8-1
Example of acceptable lap joints (details (b) and (c) may only be used for pressure vessels with internal diameter ≤ 600,0 mm).

44 June 2018
Figure 5.1.8-2
Typical attachment of dished heads to cylindrical shells (types (a), (b) and (c) are acceptable for all pressure vessels, type (d) is
acceptable for Class II and Class III pressure vessels).
5.1.8.8 Before welding is commenced, it shall be 5.1.8.11 Welded connections of nozzles and other fittings,
ascertained that the plate edges are in alignment within the either with or without local compensation, shall be of a
following limits: suitable type, size and preparation in accordance with the
– 10% of the plate thickness with a maximum of 3,0 mm approved documentation.
for longitudinal joints; 5.1.8.12 Preheating, to be effectively maintained during the
– 10% of the plate thickness plus 1 mm with a maximum of welding operation, may be required by the Register when
4,0 mm for circumferential joints. deemed necessary in relation to a number of circumstances,
such as the type of steel, thickness of the base material,
5.1.8.9 welding procedure and technique, type of restraint, and heat
a) If plates of unequal thickness are butt welded and the treatment after welding, if any.
difference between thicknesses is more than 3,0 mm, the The preheating temperature will be determined
thicker plate shall be smoothly tapered for a length equal accordingly to PQR.
to at least four times the offset, including the width of the
weld (see 1.2.2.2.3). For longitudinal joints the tapering However, a preheating temperature of
shall be made symmetrically on both sides of the plate in approximately 150°C is required for 0,5 Mo or 1 Cr 0,5 Mo
order to obtain alignment of middle lines; type steel, and approximately 250°C for 2,25 Cr 1 Mo type
steel. These requirements also apply to welding of nozzles,
b) if the joint shall undergo radiographic examination, the fittings, steam pipes and other pipes subject to severe
thickness of the thicker plate shall be reduced to that of conditions.
the thinner plate next to the joint and for a length of at
least 30,0 mm. 5.1.8.13 Welded joints shall have a smooth surface without
under-thickness; their connection with the plate surface shall
5.1.8.10 Accessories such as doubling plates, brackets and be gradual without undercutting or similar defects.
stiffeners shall be suitable for the surface to which they shall
be attached. The weld reinforcement of butt welds, on each side
of the plate, is not to exceed the following thickness:
Attachment of accessories by welds crossing main
welds or located near such welds shall be avoided; where this – 2,5 mm for plates having a thickness not exceeding 12,0
is impracticable, welds for attachment of accessories shall mm;
completely cross the main welds rather than stop abruptly on – 3,0 mm for plates having a thickness greater than 12,0
or near them. mm but less than 25,0 mm;
Openings crossing main joints or located near main – 5,0 mm for plates having a thickness at least equal to 25,0
joints are also to be avoided as far as possible. mm.

June 2018 45
5.1.8.14 Grooves and other preparations of edges for Welded joints which are oversized or which are of
welding shall be made by machining, chipping or grinding. special design and cannot be subjected to stress relieving heat
Flame cutting may also be used provided that the zones treatment as a whole, shall be heat treated partly in agreement
damaged by this operation are removed by machining, with the Register.
chipping or grinding.
5.1.9.2 Heat treatment is indicated for:
Edges prepared shall be carefully examined to
check that there are no defects detrimental to welding (see .1 plate steel elements of boilers, vessels and heat
5.1.8.3). exchangers, which are subjected during manufacture to
cold stamping, bending and flanging resulting in plastic
5.1.8.15 When a backing weld is foreseen, it shall be carried deformation of surface fibres exceeding 5%;
out after suitable chiselling or chipping at the root of the first .2 elements subjected to hot forming, with the temperatures
weld, unless the welding process applied does not call for during this process being lower than that of
such an operation. normalization;
5.1.8.16 As far as possible, welding shall be carried out in .3 elements assembled by welding in order to be thermally
the down-hand horizontal position and arrangements shall be stress relieved, according to Table 5.1.9-1 and Table
foreseen so that this can be applied in the case of 5.1.9-2;
circumferential joints. .4 boiler tube plates (s ˃ 20,0 mm) welded of several
When welding cannot be performed in this position, components; in this case heat treatment may be
tests for qualification of the welding process and of the performed before drilling tube holes.
welders shall take account thereof.
5.1.8.17 Welding of pressure vessels shall be done in a Table 5.1.9-1
sheltered position free from draughts and protected from cold Thermal stress relieving
and rain.
Unless special justification is provided, no welding Plate thickness above which post weld
shall be performed if the temperature of the base metal is less heat treatment is required, [mm]
Steel grade
than 0°C. Unfired pressure
Boilers
vessels
5.1.8.18 If, for any reason, welding is stopped, care shall be Carbon and carbon
taken on restarting to obtain a complete fusion. 20 30
manganese steels
0,3Mo
5.1.9 Heat treatment
1Mn 0,5Mo
20 20
5.1.9.1 Components in which the material structure may 1Mn 0,5MoV
undergo changes after welding or plastic working operations 0,5Cr 0,5Mo
shall be subjected to the appropriate heat treatment. 1Cr 0,5Mo
all thicknesses all thicknesses
When heat treatment of a vessel shall be carried 2,25Cr1Mo
out, such treatment shall consist of: Other alloyed subject to special subject to special
steels consideration consideration
– heating the vessel slowly and uniformly up to a
temperature suitable for the grade of steel; 5.1.9.3 Upon completion of all welding, including
– maintaining this temperature for a duration determined in connections of nozzles, doublers and fittings, pressure vessels
relation to the actual thickness of the vessel and the grade of Classes I and II, boilers and associated parts shall be
of steel; subjected to an effective stress relieving heat treatment.
– slowly cooling the vessel in the furnace down to a Unless specially justified, heat treatment temperatures and
temperature not exceeding 400°C, with subsequent duration for maintaining these temperatures shall comply
cooling permitted out of the furnace in still air. with the values in Table 5.1.9-2.
Table 5.1.9-2
Heat treatment procedure
Steel grade Temperatures Time per 25,0 mm of maximum thickness Minimum time
Carbon steels 580°C ÷ 620°C 1 hour 1 hour
0,3Mo
1Mn 0,5Mo
620°C ÷ 660°C 1 hour 1 hour
1Mn 0,5MoV
0,5Cr 0,5Mo
1Cr 0,5Mo 620°C ÷ 660°C 1 hour 2 hours
2,25Cr 1Mo 600°C ÷ 750°C 1) 2 hours 2 hours
Note:
1) The temperature shall be chosen, with a tolerance of ± 20°C, in this temperature range in order to obtain the required mechanical
characteristics.

46 June 2018
5.1.10.2 Hydraulic test shall be carried out upon completion

5.1.9.4 Furnaces for heat treatments shall be fitted with of all welding operations and heat treatment and prior to
adequate means for controlling and recording temperature; application of insulation and protective coatings.
temperatures shall be measured on the vessel itself. The
atmosphere in the furnaces shall be controlled in order to 5.1.10.3 Where detailed inspection of surfaces to be tested is
avoid abnormal oxidation of the vessel. difficult or impossible after assembling the individual
components and units, they shall be tested prior to
5.1.9.5 Test plates are normally to be heated at the same assembling.
time and in the same furnace as the vessel.
When separate heat treatment of test plates cannot 5.1.10.4 Stresses in elements which are pressure tested
be avoided, all precautions shall be taken such that this according to Table 5.1.10-1, should not exceed 0,9 times the
treatment is carried out in the same way as for the vessel, yield stress of material.
specifically with regard to the heating rate, the maximum 5.1.10.5 Gas space of exhaust gas boilers shall be tested by
temperature, the duration for maintaining this temperature air pressure of 0,01 MPa. For testing of internal combustion
and the cooling conditions. engine coolers, see Table 2.4-1, item 10. and 2.4.2.
5.1.9.6 Any welding of branches, doubling plates and other 5.1.10.6 Where pressure vessels and equipment contain
accessories on boilers and pressure vessels after heat hazardous substances (e.g. liquefied gases), the Register
treatment shall be submitted for special consideration by the reserves the right to call for a special test of gas-tightness.
Register.
5.1.10.7 Pressure tests with media other than water may be
5.1.9.7 Pressure vessels and pipes of Class III and agreed to in special cases.
associated parts are not required to be stress relieved, except
in specific cases. 5.2 Boilers
5.1.10 Hydraulic tests 5.2.1 General
5.1.10.1 Upon completion of manufacture or assembly, all 5.2.1.1 The boilers shall remain operative under the
elements of boilers, heat exchangers and pressure vessels environmental conditions specified in 1.2.4 and 1.2.5.
shall be subjected to hydraulic tests in accordance with Table
5.1.10-1. 5.2.1.2 To prevent shifting of boilers, these shall be
provided with special stops and stays, the thermal expansion
of the boiler casing being taken into account.
Table 5.1.10-1
Hydraulic tests
Test pressure p t , [MPa]

Elements After manufacture or assembly without After assembly with mountings and
mountings and fittings fittings installed
1,5∙p w but not less than:
1. Boilers and elements thereof 1,25∙p w but not less than: p w + 0,1
p w + 0,1
1,1 times water inlet pressure when
operating at the maximum permissible
2. Continuous flow boilers -
working pressure and maximum steam
output
Heat exchangers, pressure vessels and 1,5∙p w but not less than:
3. -
elements thereof p w + 0,1
4. Hot water generators 1,5∙p w , but not less than 0,4 -
Oil burning installation elements
5. - 1,5∙p w , but not less than 0,5
subject to oil fuel pressure
6. Boiler mountings as per 7.3 but not less than 2∙p w to be tested for tightness at 1,25∙p w
7. Boiler feed valves 2,5∙p w to be tested for tightness at 1,25∙p w
Mountings and fittings of heat
8. as per 7.3 to be tested for tightness at 1,25∙p w
exchangers and pressure vessels
9. Thermal oil heaters 1,5∙p w but not less than 1,0 to be tested for tightness at 0,2
where:
pw = working pressure, [MPa];
= not less than 0,1 MPa.

June 2018 47
5.2.1.3
a) The distance between boilers and vertical bulkheads shall
not be less than the minimum distance necessary to
provide access for inspection and maintenance of the
structure adjacent to the boiler;
b) in addition to the requirement in a), the distance of
boilers from fuel oil tanks shall be such as to prevent the
possibility that the temperature of the tank bulkhead may
reach the flash point of the oil (see 1.2.12.7). Manholes to
fuel oil tanks shall not be arranged close to boiler fronts;
c) in any event, the distance between a boiler and a vertical
bulkhead is not to be less than 450,0 mm. a 1 - weld height in direction of load
5.2.1.4 Minimum distance of boilers from ceilings
a) A space sufficient for adequate heat dissipation shall be Figure 5.2.2-1
provided on the top of boilers; Parameters for welding of stays, stay tubes and stay bolts
b) oil tanks are not permitted to be installed in spaces above
5.2.2.4 Corner stays of fire tube boilers shall be arranged at
boilers (see 7.14.8.13).
a distance of not less than 200,0 mm from the furnaces.
5.2.1.5 Pressure vessels, boilers and heaters shall be Where flat walls are reinforced with welded-on
installed on foundations of substantial strength. girders, this should be done so that the load involved is
5.2.1.6 Each boiler shall be fitted with a permanently transferred directly to the boiler shell or its other most rigid
attached plate made of non-corrosive metal, with indication parts.
of the following information, in addition to the identification 5.2.2.5 Where stays are welded, the cross-sectional area of
marks (name of manufacturer, year and serial number): the weld shall be at least 1,25 times the cross-section of the
– the design pressure; stay.
– the design temperature; The cross-sectional area of the end welding of
– the steam capacity (output), [kg/h]; welded stay tubes shall not be less than 1,25 times the cross-
sectional area of the stay tube.
– the test pressure and the date of the test.
Markings may be directly stamped on the vessel if 5.2.2.6 The distance between furnaces and boiler shell
this does not produce notches having an adverse influence on shall not be less than 100,0 mm. The distance between any
its behaviour in service. two furnaces shall not be less than 120,0 mm.
5.2.2.7 Branches and nozzles shall be of rigid construction
5.2.2 Construction requirements and minimum length sufficient for fixing and dismantling
5.2.2.1 The thickness of tube walls (plates) thinned in the boiler mountings and fittings without removing the insulation
process of bending shall not be less than the design value and preferably welded by full penetration to the shell.
after process of bending. Branch pieces shall not be subjected to excessive
bending stresses and shall be reinforced by stiffening ribs, if
5.2.2.2 As far as possible, stays shall be fitted
so required. Branches must be protected against the radiant
perpendicularly to the supported surface. Stay bars and stay
heat effect. In general, the axis of the nozzle is not to form an
bolts shall be welded preferably by full penetration. Any
angle greater than 15° with the normal to the shell.
vibrational stresses shall be considered for longitudinal stays.
The use of long and short stays and also that of stay 5.2.2.8 The wall thickness of nozzles shall be sufficiently
tubes exposed to bending or shearing stresses should be large to safely withstand additional external loads. The wall
avoided. Stays, strength walls, reinforcements etc. shall not thickness of welded-in nozzles shall be appropriate to the
have abrupt changes in cross-sections. Boiler walls into wall thickness of the part into which they are welded.
which longitudinal stays are welded shall be relieved by Welding-neck flanges shall be made of forged
reinforcing plates. material with favourable grain orientation.
Stay bars and stay bolts shall be drilled at both ends
5.2.2.9 Pads intended for installation of mountings, fittings
in such a way that the holes (d=5,0 mm) extend at least 25,0
and pipes as well as branches, sleeves and nozzles passing
mm into the water or steam space. Where the ends have been
through the entire thickness of the boiler wall shall, in
upset, the continuous shank shall be drilled to a distance of at
general, be attached by welding from both sides. Branches
least 25,0 mm (see Figure 5.2.2-1).
and nozzles may also be welded by a fillet joint, with single-
5.2.2.3 For flat walls reinforced by short stays and exposed edge preparation, using removable backing strip or by some
to flame and high-temperature gases, the distance between other method that ensures penetration throughout the
the stay centres shall not be greater than 200,0 mm. The thickness of the part being attached.
thickness of flat end plates exposed to heating gases with
high temperature should not exceed 30,0 mm.

48 June 2018
5.2.2.10 Tubes shall be adequately secured to drums, 5.2.3.1.2 All boiler mountings shall be fitted on special
headers and/or tube plates by expansion, welding or other welded on branches, nozzles and pads and be secured on
appropriate procedure. Tubes securely seated to drums, those, as a rule, by studs or bolts. The studs shall have a full
headers and tube plates by expansion of their ends shall be thread holding in the pad for a length of at least one external
seamless. diameter. The bore of threaded nozzle fitted mountings is
Bearing in mind the tube expansion procedure and permitted to be not greater than 15,0 mm, special pads being
the combination of materials involved, the ligament width used for attaching them to the boiler.
shall be such as to ensure the proper execution of the 5.2.3.1.3 The valve covers shall be secured to valve cases by
expansion process and the sufficient anchorage of the tubes. studs or bolts. Valves with bore diameters of 32,0 mm and
The expanded length should not be less than 12,0 mm. less may have screwed covers provided that they are fitted
with reliable stops (see 7.6.1.2).
5.2.2.11 Tube ends intended to be expanded shall be
partially annealed when the tubes have not been annealed by 5.2.3.1.4 The valves and cocks shall be fitted with open and
the manufacturer. shut position indicators. Position indicators are not required
where the design allows seeing without difficulty whether the
Tube ends intended to be expanded shall be cleaned fittings are open or shut.
and checked for size and possible defects.
Valves shall be arranged to be shut with a
5.2.2.12 Smoke tubes with welded connection between tube clockwise motion of the hand wheels.
and tube plate at the entry of the second path shall be roller
expanded before and after welding. 5.2.3.2 Feed valves
5.2.3.2.1 Each auxiliary boiler for essential services shall be
5.2.2.13 Tube holes shall be carefully drilled and deburred. equipped with at least two feed valves. Auxiliary boilers for
Sharp edges shall be chamfered. Tube holes should be as other services and also waste heat boilers may have one feed
close as possible to the radial direction, particularly in the valve each.
case of small wall thicknesses.
5.2.3.2.2 Feed valves shall be of a non-return type (check
5.2.2.14 Thickness of smooth flame tube (furnace) shall not valves). A shut-off valve shall be installed between the check
be less than 7,0 mm and not greater than 20,0 mm. Thickness valve and the boiler. Check and shut-off valves may be
of corrugated flame tube shall not be less than 10,0 mm and connected to a single stand pipe at the shell. The shut-off
not greater than 20,0 mm. valve shall be fitted directly on the boiler.
5.2.2.15 Smooth flame tubes with a length up to 1400,0 mm, 5.2.3.2.3 The requirements concerning the feed water system
as a rule, may be made without stiffening rings. Stiffening are given in 7.18.
rings of adjacent tubes shall not lay in one plane if there are 5.2.3.2.4 The feed water shall be introduced into the boiler in
two or more flame tubes in the boiler. such a manner that it does not impinge directly on surfaces
exposed to hot gases.
5.2.2.16 Finned-tube boilers shall be provided with an
effective soot-blowing system and to be accessible for 5.2.3.3 Water level indicators
inspection of heating surfaces. 5.2.3.3.1 Each natural-circulation boiler with free water
5.2.2.17 Fastening elements of the boiler, apart from those evaporating surface shall be provided with at least two
which are not stressed, shall not be attached by welding independent water level indicators with transparent faces (see
directly to boiler walls (shell, ends, headers, drums, etc.), but 5.2.3.3.3). In agreement with the Register, one of these
shall be attached by means of welded-on plates. indicators may not be installed when provision is made on
boiler for the lowest water level protective devices, as well as
5.2.2.18 Stiffeners, straps and lifting eyes the lowest and highest water level alarms (the transducers of
Where flat end surfaces are stiffened by profile protective and signalling systems shall be independent and
sections or ribs, the latter shall transmit their load directly shall have different measuring points) or for remote water
(i.e. without welded-on straps) to the boiler shell. level indicator of an approved type with separate measuring
Doubling plates shall not be fitted at pressure parts points.
subject to flame radiation. Natural-circulation boilers with a steaming capacity
Where necessary to protect the walls of the boiler, of 750,0 kg/h or less, steam generators, waste heat boilers
strengthening plates shall be fitted below supports and lifting with free water evaporating surface and steam accumulators
brackets. of waste heat boilers may be provided with one water level
indicator having a transparent face.
5.2.3 Mountings, fittings, gauges and openings Level indicators shall be of an approved type.
5.2.3.1 General requirements 5.2.3.3.2 Forced circulation boilers shall be provided, instead
5.2.3.1.1 Cocks, valves and other fittings shall be connected of the water level indicators, with two independent alarms to
directly or as close as possible to the boiler shell. signal a shortage of water supply to the boiler. The second
alarm device is not required if the oil burning installation is
operates only at normal water level in boiler.
This requirement is not applicable to the waste heat
boilers.

June 2018 49
5.2.3.3.3 Flat prismatic glass shall be used in water level In case of boilers with design steaming capacities
indicators having a working pressure of less than 3,2 MPa. less than 750,0 kg/h, the said minimum distance between the
Protective devices against splinters and escaping steam shall lowest water level and the highest heating surface point may
be fitted to safeguard in the event of breakage. Cylinder be reduced to 125,0 mm.
glasses water level gauges are not permitted. 5.2.3.4.3 The highest heating surface point is the highest
5.2.3.3.4 Cylindrical boilers shall be fitted with one water point on a heated surface, which is in contact with water and
level gauge in the boiler centre line and with one water level which is exposed to radiant heat or which is heated with
gauge at one of the sides, at the same height. Where this is gases whose temperature exceeds 400°C at a maximum
not possible, the water level gauges shall be fitted one on continuous rating. The position of the upper ends of the upper
each side of the boiler. most down-comers is assumed to be the highest point of
5.2.3.3.5 All water level indicators shall be provided with water-tube boiler.
shut-off devices both on the water and steam sides. 5.2.3.5 Pressure gauges and thermometers
Shut-off devices shall have safe drives for 5.2.3.5.1 Each boiler shall have at least two pressure gauges
disconnection of the devices in case of glass breakage. connected with steam space by separate pipes fitted with stop
5.2.3.3.6 Water level indicators shall be so installed that the valves or stop cocks. Three-way valves or cocks shall be
lower edge of the gauge slot is positioned below the lowest provided between the pressure gauge and the pipes, thus
water level in boiler by not less than 30,0 mm. However, the making it possible to shut off the pressure gauge from the
lowest water level shall not be above the centre line of the boiler, connect it to the atmosphere, blow off the connecting
visible portion of water level indicator. Water level indicators pipe and install the control pressure gauge.
must enable reading of the water level despite the movements 5.2.3.5.2 One of the pressure gauges shall be installed on the
and inclinations of the vessel. front of the boiler on clearly visible and lightened place, the
5.2.3.3.7 Water level indicators shall be connected to the other on the panel at the central control station or at the local
boiler by means of independent branch pieces. The branches boiler control station.
shall be protected from exposure to hot gases, radiant heat 5.2.3.5.3 Boilers with design steaming capacities below
and intense cooling. 750,0 kg/h and waste heat boilers are permitted to have one
Water gauges and connecting pipes shall not be pressure gauge.
permitted to carry nozzles or branch pieces to be used for 5.2.3.5.4 Pressure gauges shall have a scale sufficient to
other purposes. allow boiler hydraulic testing. The pressure gauge scale shall
5.2.3.3.8 The connecting lines between boiler and water have a red line to mark the working pressure in the boiler.
level indicator must have an inside diameter of at least 20 5.2.3.5.5 Pressure gauges fitted on boilers shall be
mm. They must be installed without sharp bends, avoiding adequately protected from the heat emitted by the hot boiler
water and steam pockets. surfaces.
5.2.3.3.9 The design dimensions, number, location and 5.2.3.5.6 The pressure gauges shall be duly tested and
lighting of water level indicator shall provide an adequate marked with the date of testing carried out by the competent
visibility and reliable control of boiler water level. Where authorities recognized by the Register.
water level visibility is inadequate, irrespective of the height
of water level indicator location or where the boilers are 5.2.3.5.7 Temperature gauge shall be fitted at inlet and outlet
remotely controlled, provisions shall be made for highly of exhaust gases in waste heat boilers.
reliable remote water level indicators, or other types of water 5.2.3.6 Safety valves
gauges approved by the Register and installed in the boiler
5.2.3.6.1 Each boiler shall not have less than two type
control stations. These requirements are not applicable to
approved spring-loaded safety valves of identical
waste heat boilers and their steam accumulators.
construction and equal size, to be installed on drums, as a
5.2.3.4 Lowest water level and highest heating-surface rule, on a common branch piece. At least one safety valve
point shall be set to respond if the maximum permissible working
5.2.3.4.1 Each natural-circulation boiler with a free water pressure is exceeded.
evaporating surface shall have its lowest water level marked One safety valve is sufficient for steam boilers with
on the boiler water level indicator with a reference line drawn design steaming capacities below 750,0 kg/h.
on the gauge frame or body. Additionally, the lowest water 5.2.3.6.2 The minimum aggregate cross-sectional area of the
level shall be marked on a plate with a reference line and the orifices of the safety valves for saturated steam shall not be
inscription “lowest level”. less than that determined from the formula:
This plate shall be attached to the boiler shell close
G
to the water level indicators. A= k ⋅ ,  mm 2  (5.2.3-1)
10, 2 ⋅ pw + 1
The reference line and plate shall not be covered
over with boiler insulation. where:
5.2.3.4.2 The lowest water level in the boiler in all cases A = aggregate cross-sectional area of the orifices of
shall not be less than 150,0 mm above the highest heating the safety valves, [mm2];
surface point. This distance shall also be maintained when the
vessel is lifted up to 5° on either side and in all possible G = design steam capacity, [kg/h];
service trim conditions. pw = working pressure of the boiler, [MPa];
k = factor as per Table 5.2.3-1.

50 June 2018
Table 5.2.3-1 5.2.3.6.8 Safety valve bodies shall be fitted with drain pipes
Factor k of a diameter not less than 20,0 mm for double valves, and
not less than 12,0 mm for single valves, leading to the bilge
Valve lift h, [mm] Factor k or to the hot well. Valves or cocks are not to be fitted on
drain pipes. A drain shall be fitted at the lowest point at the
d d
≤h< 22,0 discharge side of the safety valve.
20 16
5.2.3.6.9 Safety valves shall be connected directly to the
d d
≤h< 14,0 boiler steam space without any stopping device or, in the case
16 12 of steam boilers which do not have their own steam space, to
d d the highest point of the boiler or in the immediate vicinity
≤h< 10,5 respectively.
12 4
d d Supply pipes leading to the safety valves are not
≤h< 5,25 permitted to be installed inside the boiler. No provision shall
4 3 be made on safety valve bodies or their connections for steam
d extraction devices for other purposes.
≤h 3,3
3 5.2.3.6.10 Valves shall be so arranged that they can be
where: lifted by a special hand-operated easing gear. Easing gear of
d = internal diameter of valve seat, [mm]; one of the valves shall be operated from the boiler room and
h = valve lift, [mm]. that of the other valve from other readily accessible place
Safety valves shall not be less than 32,0 mm and outside the boiler room.
where only one safety valve is sufficient not less than 50,0 Remote control gear for safety valves of the waste
mm in diameter. heat boilers and their steam accumulators (separators) may be
If specially approved by the Register, the use of operated only from the boiler room.
valves with smaller cross-sectional areas than required by 5.2.3.6.11 Safety valves shall be so designed that they
formula above may be permitted, provided it is proved could be sealed or provided with an equivalent safeguard to
experimentally (according to ISO 4126-1) in the presence of prevent the valves from being adjusted without knowledge of
the Register, that each of these valves has a discharge the operating personnel.
capacity not lower than the design steam capacity of the Springs of the safety valves shall be protected from
boiler. direct exposure to steam and shall be manufactured from heat
5.2.3.6.3 The safety valves shall be adjusted to operate at the and corrosion-resistant materials, as well as the sealing
pressure of 3% to 5% exceeding the working pressure value surfaces of seats and valves.
in the presence of the Register. Safety valves shall be made with working parts
5.2.3.6.4 The safety valve or safety valves shall be designed having adequate clearances to ensure complete freedom of
so that the maximum quantity of steam which can be movement. Valves shall be so designed that in the event of
produced by the steam boiler during continuous operation can fracture of springs they cannot lift out of their seats.
be discharged without the working pressure being exceeded Safety valves shall be so constructed that their
by more than 10%. Safety valves after each actuation shall be setting may not be increased in service.
totally closed at the pressure drop in the boiler not below
85% of the working pressure. 5.2.3.6.12 Test of safety valves
5.2.3.6.5 Where safety valves are fitted on the common The actuation pressure of the safety valves shall be
branch, the cross-sectional area of the branch shall not be less proven by a blow-off test or the adjustment certificate of the
than 1,1 times the total cross-sectional area of the valves. manufacturer shall be presented for the sealed valve.
5.2.3.6.6 Waste steam pipes shall be led to the atmosphere. The sufficient blow-off performance of the safety
They must not impose additional load to the safety valve valves has to be proven by a blow-off test.
connections. For steam boilers heated with exhaust gas the blow-
5.2.3.6.7 The minimum cross-sectional area of the waste off test shall be performed at 100% MCR (maximum
steam branch of safety valve and of the pipe connected continuous rating).
thereto, shall not be less than twice the aggregate area of the For combined steam boilers and combined steam
valve opening, for valves with a lift greater than 0,25∙d, and boiler plants with oil fired steam boiler and exhaust gas boiler
for other valves shall not be less than 1,1 of the aggregate without own steam space, it has to be guaranteed, that the
cross sectional area of the valve. maximum permissible working pressure is not exceeded by
The cross-sectional area of the exhaust manifold of more than 10% for 100% oil burner performance and the
safety valves shall not be less than the sum of the areas of the above mentioned conditions for operation of the exhaust gas
individual exhaust pipes connected to it. boiler.
The safety valves of waste heat boilers should have 5.2.3.7 Shut-off valves
separate waste steam pipes. 5.2.3.7.1 Each boiler shall be separated from all pipelines
leading to it by means of shut-off valves secured directly to
the boiler.

June 2018 51
5.2.3.7.2 In addition to local control, the shut-off-valves of 5.2.3.11.5 Special consideration shall be taken to the
steam lines shall be provided with remote control gears for accessibility for inspection of welded connections subjected
the operation from the upper deck or from other readily to high bending stresses, e.g. corner welds between flat plates
accessible position outside the boiler room. and cylindrical shells or furnaces and attachment welds of
stays.
5.2.3.8 Blow-down valves and drain valves
In all cases it shall be possible to inspect the bottom
5.2.3.8.1 Boilers and steam accumulators shall be fitted with
of the shell and the longitudinal welds.
blow-down valve and with drain valves.
Handholes are sufficient for the inspection of the
Blow-down and drain valves shall be fitted directly boiler’s lower endplate in case of vertical shell boilers.
to the boiler shell. At working pressure below 1,6 MPa these
valves may be installed on welded-on profiled branch pieces. 5.2.3.11.6 Manhole openings shall have dimensions in the
clear not less than:
5.2.3.8.2 Inside diameter of blow-down valves and pipes
shall not be less than 20,0 mm and not more than 40,0 mm. – 300 x 400 mm for oval openings;
For boilers with design steam capacity below 750,0 kg/h, – 400,0 mm for round openings.
diameter of valves and pipes shall not be less than 15,0 mm. Inspection openings are required to have the
5.2.3.8.3 In boilers with free water evaporating surface the following minimum dimensions:
scum arrangements shall ensure scum and sludge removal – holes for the head 220 x 320 mm or Ø320,0 mm;
from the entire evaporating surface.
– handholes 87 x 103 mm;
5.2.3.9 Salinometer valves (water sample) – sight holes Ø50,0 mm.
Each boiler shall be provided with means to Oval manholes in cylindrical shells shall be so
supervise and control the quality of the feed water. Suitable positioned that the minor axis of manhole is arranged
arrangements shall be provided to preclude, as far as longitudinally.
practicable, the entry of oil or other contaminants which may
adversely affect the boiler. For this purpose, boilers shall be 5.2.3.11.7 Vertical fire-tube boilers shall have at least two
fitted with at least one water sample cock or valve. sight holes arranged in the shell opposite to each other in the
area of the working water level.
The fitting of such valves or cocks on pipes and
branches intended for other purposes is not permitted. 5.2.3.11.8 All boiler parts such as may prevent or hinder
free access to and inspection of, internal surfaces shall be of a
Suitable inlets for water additives shall be provided removable type.
in each boiler.
5.2.3.11.9 The edges of manholes and other openings, e.g.
5.2.3.10 Valves for de-aeration for domes, shall be effectively reinforced if the plate has been
Boilers shall be equipped with sufficient number of unacceptably weakened by the cut-outs. The edges of
valves or cocks for de-aeration. openings closed with covers shall be reinforced by welded on
edge-stiffeners.
5.2.3.11 Openings for internal inspection 5.2.3.11.10 Covers for manholes and other openings shall
5.2.3.11.1 Boilers, heat exchangers and pressure vessels, be made of ductile steel, dished or welded steel plates or
shall be provided with manholes, holes for the head, other approved design. Grey cast iron (at least GG-20) may
handholes and sight holes for inspection, cleaning and be used only for small openings, such as handholes and sight
maintenance of all internal surfaces. Welds exposed to high holes, provided the design pressure p does not exceed 1,0
stresses and parts exposed to radiant heat must be accessible MPa and the design temperature t does not exceed 200°C.
for inspection. Where the provision of manholes is not 5.2.3.11.11 Covers shall be of self-closing internal type.
possible, arrangements shall be made for sight holes.
Opening covers of other type, having a diameter not
5.2.3.11.2 Manholes are holes permitting entry and exit of exceeding 150,0 mm, may be accepted by the Register.
a person not carrying any auxiliary equipment. Holes for the 5.2.3.11.12 Unless metal packings are used, cover plates
head are holes into which the head, an arm and a lamp can be shall be provided on the external side with a rim or spigot to
introduced simultaneously. Handholes are holes into which a
prevent the packing from being forced out. The gap between
lamp can be inserted. this rim or spigot and the edge of the opening shall be
5.2.3.11.3 Manholes shall be provided in suitable uniform round the periphery and may not exceed 2,0 mm for
locations in the shells, headers, domes, and steam and water boilers with a working pressure of less than 3,2 MPa. The
drums, as applicable. height of the rim or spigot shall be at least 5,0 mm greater
5.2.3.11.4 Shell boilers with a shell diameter of 1400,0 than the thickness of the packing. Figure 5.2.3.11-1 shows a
mm or greater shall be designed to permit entry of a person typical arrangement.
and shall be provided with a manhole for this purpose. Also Only continuous ring gaskets may be used as
boilers with a shell diameter less than 1400,0 mm which are packing. The materials used shall be suitable for the given
capable of being entered by a person shall be provided with a operating conditions.
manhole. Boilers with a shell diameter between 800,0 mm 5.2.3.11.13 Closing devices of internal type covers, having
and 1400,0 mm shall be provided with a hole for the head as dimensions not exceeding 180 x 230 mm, may be fitted with
a minimum requirement. a single fastening bolt or stud. Larger closing devices shall be
fitted with at least two bolts or studs.

52 June 2018
Figure 5.2.3.11-1
Opening cover
circulated for the purpose of heating fuel oil, or cargo, or for

5.2.4 Installation of boilers production of steam or hot water for auxiliary purposes.
5.2.4.1 Boilers shall be installed in the inland waterway 5.3.2 Definitions
vessel with care and shall be secured to ensure that they
cannot be displaced by any of the circumstances arising when 5.3.2.1 The thermal oil temperature is the temperature of
the inland waterway vessel is at sea. the thermal oil at the centre of the flow cross-section.
Boilers and their seatings shall be well accessible 5.3.2.2 The discharge temperature is the temperature of
from all sides or shall be easily made accessible. the thermal oil immediately at the heater outlet.
5.2.4.2 Safety valves and shut-off mechanisms shall be 5.3.2.3 The return temperature is the temperature of the
capable of being operated without danger. Wherever thermal oil immediately at the heater inlet.
necessary, permanent steps, ladders or platforms shall be
fitted. Water level indicator cocks and valves, except safety 5.3.2.4 The film temperature is the wall temperature on
valves, which cannot be directly reached by hand from the the thermal oil side. In the case of heated surfaces, this may
floor plates or a platform shall be fitted with draw rods or differ considerably from the temperature of the thermal oil.
chains enabling them to be operated from the boiler control
platform. Cocks shall be so arranged that they are open when 5.3.3 The requirements for material and manufacture of
the draw rod is in its lowest position. heaters and expansion vessels are set forth in 5.1.7, 5.2, and
5.5.
5.2.5 Manufacturing test The surfaces which come into contact with the
5.2.5.1 After completion, boilers shall undergo a thermal oil shall be designed for the maximum permissible
constructional check. working pressure subject to a minimum gauge pressure of 1,0
MPa.
The constructional check includes verification that
the boiler complies with the approved drawings and is of The requirements which apply to oil burning
satisfactory construction. For this purpose, all parts of the installations are set forth in 5.4.
boiler shall be accessible to allow adequate inspection. If The piping and fittings in thermal oil systems must
necessary, the constructional check shall be performed at comply with 7.20.
separate stages of manufacture.
5.3.4 Heaters shall be designed thermodynamically that
5.2.5.2 The following documents shall be presented: neither the surfaces nor the thermal oil become excessively
material test certificates covering the materials used, reports heated at any point. The flow of the thermal oil shall be
on the non-destructive testing of welds and, where applicable, ensured by forced circulation.
the results of tests of workmanship and proof of the heat
treatment applied. 5.3.5 Heaters heated by exhaust gas shall be provided
with inspection openings at the exhaust gas inlet and outlet.
5.3 Thermal oil heaters (boilers) Oil fired heaters shall be provided with inspection
openings for examination of the combustion chamber.
5.3.1 Application
The opening for the burner may be considered as an
The following requirements apply to thermal oil inspection opening, provided its size is sufficient for this
heaters in which organic liquids (thermal oils) are heated by purpose.
oil fired burners, exhaust gases or electricity to temperatures
The heater shall be so designed and installed that
below their initial boiling point at atmospheric pressure and
all tubes may be easily and readily inspected for signs of
corrosion and leakage.

June 2018 53
5.3.6 Equipment extinguishing or the cleaning medium cannot penetrate

during heater cleaning, respectively.
5.3.6.1 Each heater shall be equipped with shut-off device
at the thermal oil inlet and outlet. The devices shall be 5.3.13 If the specified smoke gas temperature or exhaust
arranged in readily accessible position safe for maintenance gas temperature is exceeded, an alarm must be ensured and
and shall be remote controlled. for oil fired heaters the heating must be switched off.
5.3.6.2 Heaters shall be equipped with at least one safety 5.3.14 Each boiler shall be fitted with pressure gauges
valve having a blow-off capacity at least equal to the increase according to 5.2.3.5, unless the boiler working pressure is
in volume of the thermal oil at the maximum heating power, equal to the atmospheric pressure.
without the maximum permissible working pressure being
exceeded by over 10%. Means (cocks or valves) shall be provided to take
samples of thermal oil.
5.3.6.3 Heaters shall be fitted with means enabling them to
be completely drained. 5.3.15 Thermometers shall be provided at thermal oil inlet
and outlet. The thermometer measuring range shall be at least
5.3.6.4 The thermal oil heater heated by exhaust gas shall by 10% more than the thermal oil service temperature.
be arranged with the possibility for bypassing the exhaust by
means of damper(s). Temperature measuring devices shall be fitted at
the heaters outlet in the flue gas or exhaust gas stream.
The dampers will not be accepted as a means for
controlling the temperature of the thermal oil heaters. 5.3.16 Waste heat boilers shall be provided with a shut-off
The bypass may be internal or external to the device to stop gas supply in case of operation of protective
heater. In either case, the arrangements shall be such that fire devices.
extinguishing in the heater is possible without stopping the
5.3.17 For electrically heated heaters, the same
propulsion of the vessel.
requirements as for oil fired heaters apply.
5.3.7 If the permitted discharge temperature (about 50°C
5.3.18 A name plate made of non-corrosive metal with the
lower than the maximum permissible film temperature) is
following information must be attached to the heater in a
exceeded, for oil fired heaters the heat supply must be
visible place:
switched off, and for heaters heated by exhaust gases an
alarm shall be activated. – manufacturer’s name;
The flow of the thermal oil must be indicated and – serial number;
monitored by a flow monitor. If the flow rate falls below a – year of manufacture;
minimum value, the heating must be cut out in case of oil – maximum permissible heating power;
fired heaters, while in case of heaters heated by exhaust gases
an alarm must be activated. – maximum permissible operating pressure;
– maximum permissible discharge temperature;
5.3.8 The discharge temperature of heaters heated by
– minimum flow rate;
exhaust gas must be controlled independently of the control
of the engine output by automatic regulation of the heat – liquid capacity.
input.
5.3.19 The equipment must be capable of being manually
5.3.9 Measures must be taken to ensure that the operated. In this case control of flow and temperature of the
maximum permissible film temperature is not exceeded in thermal oil must function.
case of failure of the circulating pump.
5.3.20 Testing of thermal oil system
5.3.10 If the circulating pump is stationary, an alarm shall The thermal oil heaters shall be subjected to a
be provided in case the diesel engine is started, and start-up constructional check and a hydraulic pressure test, at 1,5
of the burner must be prevented by interlocks in case of oil times the maximum permissible working pressure, at the
fired heaters. manufacturer’s works in the presence of the Register.
5.3.11 The heaters must be equipped with a leakage After completion of installation on board, the
detector which, when actuated, trips an alarm and shuts down system including associated monitoring equipment shall be
the circulating pump as well as the heating system in case of subjected to pressure, tightness and operational tests in the
oil fired heaters. When a leakage detector is actuated, the presence of the Register.
start-up of the burner must be prevented.
5.4 Oil burners and oil firing equipment
5.3.12 Thermal oil heaters heated by exhaust gases shall
be fitted with a permanent system for extinguishing and 5.4.1 General requirements
cooling in the event of fire, for instance a pressure water 5.4.1.1 Scope
spraying system, approved by the Register. Heaters must be
fitted with a fire alarm. The following requirements apply to oil burners
and oil firing equipment that shall be used for the burning of
The exhaust gas intake shall be arranged in a way liquid fuels and installed in auxiliary steam boilers, thermal
that the thermal oil cannot penetrate the engine or the oil heaters and water heating boilers.
turbocharger in case of a leakage in the heater, fire
In addition, the following general requirements of
this Head are mandatory for all installations and appliances.

54 June 2018
5.4.1.2 Approved fuels 5.4.3 Safety equipment

See 1.2.6.1. 5.4.3.1 Oil burning installation shall be equipped with two
5.4.1.3 Boiler equipment and burner arrangement automatic quick-closing devices at the fuel oil supply line to
the burner. They must not release the oil supply to the
Oil burners shall be designed, fitted and adjusted in burners on start-up and must interrupt the oil supply during
such a manner as to prevent flames from causing damage to
operation (automatic restart possible) if one of the following
the boiler surfaces or tubes which border the combustion
faults occurs:
space. Boiler parts which might otherwise suffer damage
shall be protected by refractory lining. – burner retracted or pivoted out of position;
The firing system shall be so arranged as to prevent – failure of the required pressure of the atomising medium
flames from blowing back into the boiler or engine room and (steam or compressed-air atomisers);
shall allow unburnt fuel to be safely drained. – failure of the oil pressure needed for atomisation
Observation holes and openings in the burner (pressure atomisers);
registers for the insertion of ignition torches shall be arranged – insufficient rotary speed of spinning cup (rotary
and closed off by sliding or rotating flaps in such a way that atomisers);
any danger to the operators from flame blowbacks is avoided. – failure of combustion air supply or insufficient air
The functioning of explosion doors or rupture disks pressure;
may not endanger personnel or important items of equipment – actuation of limit switches (e.g. for water level or
in the boiler room. temperature);
Fuel leaking from potential leak points shall be – actuation of flame monitor (flame extinguished);
safely collected in oil-tight trays and to be drained away.
– failure of control power supply;
5.4.1.4 Simultaneous operation of oil burning – failure of induced-draught fan or insufficient opening of
equipment and internal combustion machinery exhaust gas register (dampers insufficiently opened).
The operation of oil burning equipment in spaces For the fuel oil supply line to the ignition burner
containing other items of plant with high air consumption, one automatic quick-closing device will be sufficient, if the
e.g. internal combustion engines or air compressors, must not fuel oil pump is switched off after ignition of the burner.
be impaired by variations in the air pressure.
5.4.3.2 Each installation shall be shut down automatically
5.4.1.5 All equipment to be used in oil burning installations and secured by the oil burner control box if:
such as pumps, fan, quick-closing valves, electric drives shall
be approved by the Register and shall be manufactured and – a flame does not develop within the safety period
tested under supervision of the Register or of the other following start up;
competent authority recognized by the Register. – a flame is extinguished during operation and an attempt
to restart the burner within the safety period is
5.4.2 Pumps, pipelines, valves and fittings unsuccessful;
5.4.2.1 Fuel oil service pumps may be connected only to – limit switches are actuated.
the fuel system. 5.4.3.3 Burning installations shall be equipped with a
Pipelines shall be permanently installed and joined burner flame-jet monitor. Such a monitor shall respond only
by oil-tight welds, oil-tight threaded connections of approved to the flame-jet of the burner under control.
design or with flanged joints. This appliance must comply with the following
5.4.2.2 Flexible hoses of a type approved by the Register safety periods (the maximum permitted time during which
may be used only immediately in front of the burner or to fuel oil may be supplied to the combustion space in the
enable the burner to swivel. They shall be installed with absence of a flame):
adequate bending radius and shall be protected against undue – on burner start up 5 seconds;
heating. For non-metallic flexible pipes, see 7.4.6. – in operation 1 second.
5.4.2.3 Suitable devices, e.g. relief valves, shall be fitted to Where this is justified, longer safety periods may
prevent any excessive pressure increase in the fuel oil pump be permitted for burners with an oil throughput of up to 30,0
or pressurized fuel lines. kg/h.
5.4.2.4 By means of a hand-operated, quick-closing device Measures shall be taken to ensure that the safety
mounted at the fuel oil manifold, it shall be possible to isolate period for the main flame is not prolonged by the action of
the fuel supply to the burners from the pressurized fuel lines. the igniter (e.g. pilot burners).
Depending on the design and method of operation, a quick- 5.4.3.4 Oil firing equipment with electrically operated
closing device may also be required directly in front of each components shall also be capable of being shut down by an
burner. emergency switch located outside the space in which the
equipment is installed.

June 2018 55
5.4.3.5 The return line of burners with return lines must is reduced below a certain minimum value. The position of
also be provided with an automatic shut off device. This the damper has to be indicated at the boiler control platform.
requirement may be dispensed with if the return line is not
under pressure and no oil is able to flow back when the 5.4.5.4 Where an induced-draught fan is fitted, an
burner is shut down. interlocking system must prevent start-up of the burner
equipment before the fan has started. A corresponding
5.4.3.6 Burning installation of auxiliary boilers for interlocking system is also to be provided for any covers
essential services shall be capable of being manually which may be fitted to the funnel opening.
controlled in case of emergence. Manual controls shall be
provided directly at the boiler. In this case flame monitoring 5.4.6 Testing of oil firing equipment after installation
specified in 5.4.3.3 must remain operative. 5.4.6.1 The reliable operation of the safety equipment and
5.4.4 Oil burning installations satisfactory combustion at all load settings shall be checked.
Purging time required prior to burner start up shall
5.4.4.1 The burners shall be so designed as to ensure the be determined and manual operation shall be demonstrated.
possibility of controlling the size and shape of the flame jet.
Boiler parts which might suffer damage from flame shall be 5.4.6.2 The pressurized fuel oil system shall be subjected
adequately protected. to a pressure and tightness test in accordance with 7.3.
5.4.4.2 Oil burners shall be so designed and constructed 5.5 Pressure vessels and heat exchangers
that personnel cannot be endangered by moving parts. This
applies particularly to blower intake openings. The latter 5.5.1 General
shall also be protected to prevent the entry of drip water.
5.5.1.1 The following requirements apply to pressure
5.4.4.3 Oil burners shall be so constructed that they can be vessels and heat exchangers for the operation of the main
retracted or pivoted out of the operating position only when propulsion plant and its auxiliary machinery. They also apply
the fuel oil supply has been cut-off. The high-voltage ignition to pressure vessels and equipment necessary for the operation
system shall be automatically disconnected when this occurs. of the inland waterway vessels.
5.4.4.4 Every burner shall be equipped with an igniter. The 5.5.1.2 The materials for pressure vessels and heat
ignition shall be initiated immediately after purging. In the exchangers shall be suitable for the intended use and shall
case of low-capacity burners of monobloc type (permanently comply with 5.1.7. For components subject to supervision,
coupled oil pump and blower impeller) ignition may begin see 5.1.5.
with start-up of the burner unless the latter is located in the
5.5.1.3 Design calculations shall be performed according to
roof of the chamber.
the Rules, Part 10 – Boiler, heat exchangers and pressure
5.4.4.5 Where dampers or similar devices are fitted in the vessels, Section 2. or to international standards accepted by
air supply duct, care shall be taken to ensure that air for the Register, taking into consideration the special
purging the combustion space is always available unless the requirements for pressure vessels installed on inland
oil supply is positively interrupted. waterway vessels.
5.4.4.6 The firing system shall be arranged as to allow 5.5.1.4 Pressure vessels and equipment shall be installed in
unburnt fuel to be safely drained. Where burners are blown such a way as to provide for practicable all-round visual
through after shut-down, provision must be made for the safe inspection and to facilitate the execution of inspection and
ignition of the residual oil ejected. periodic tests.
5.4.5 Purging of combustion chamber and flues, 5.5.1.5 The design of vessels and equipment has to take
exhaust gas ducting account of possible thermal expansion, e.g. between the shell
and bundle of heating tubes.
5.4.5.1 The combustion chamber and flues shall be
adequately purged with air prior to every burner start up. A 5.5.1.6 Ship’s service pressure vessels manufactured to
warning sign shall be mounted to this effect. recognized standards, e.g. pressure vessels for the water
supply system and fan heaters, are not subject to these
5.4.5.2 A threefold renewal of the total air volume of the requirements with respect to their wall thicknesses or the
combustion chamber and the flue gas ducts up to the funnel materials used.
inlet is considered sufficient. Normally purging shall be
performed with the total flow of combustion air needed for 5.5.1.7 Pressure vessels dedicated for the operation of the
the maximum heating power of the firing system for at least vessel shall be checked by a Surveyor of the Register to
15 seconds. verify that they are safe for operation:
It shall, however, in any case be performed with at a) before being put into service for the first time;
least 50% of the volume of combustion air needed for the b) before being put back into service after any modification
maximum heating power of the firing system. or repair; and
5.4.5.3 Bends and dead corners in the exhaust gas ducting c) regularly at least every five years.
shall be avoided. The inspection shall involve an internal and an
Dampers in uptakes and funnels should be avoided. external inspection. Compressed air vessels the interior of
Any damper which may be fitted shall be so installed that no which cannot be properly inspected, or the condition of
oil supply is possible when the cross-section of the purge line which cannot be clearly established during the internal

56 June 2018
inspection, are required to undergo additional non-destructive 5.5.3.2 Rupture disks are permitted only with the consent
testing or a hydraulic pressure test. of the Register in application where their use is specially
An inspection attestation shall be issued, signed by justified. They must be designed that the maximum working
the Surveyor and showing the date of the inspection. pressure p w cannot be exceeded by more than 10%.
Rupture disks shall be provided with a guard to
5.5.1.8 Marking catch the fragments of the rupture element and shall be
Each pressure vessel shall be provided with a plate against damage from outside. The fragments of the rupture
or permanent inscription indicating the manufacturer, the element shall not be capable of reducing the necessary
serial number, the year of manufacture, the capacity, the section of the discharge aperture.
maximum permissible working pressure and in case of
service temperatures of more than 50°C or less than -10°C 5.5.3.3 The discharge capacity of safety valves shall be
the maximum permissible temperature of the pressurized such that under no conditions the working pressure is
parts. On smaller items of equipment, an indication of the exceeded by more than 10%. Safety valves shall be adjusted
maximum permissible working pressures is sufficient. to a pressure 3% ÷ 5% exceeding the working pressure.
5.5.3.4 The safety valves shall, in general, be of a spring
5.5.2 Construction requirements
loaded type. The safety valves shall be so designed as to
5.5.2.1 Where necessary, the construction shall provide for allow their being sealed or fitted with an equivalent safeguard
thermal elongation of the shells and various parts of heat to prevent valve adjustment without the knowledge of the
exchangers and pressure vessels. operating personnel. Materials used for springs and sealing
surfaces of valves shall be capable of withstanding the
5.5.2.2 The shells of heat exchangers and pressure vessels corroding effect of the medium.
shall be provided with suitable lugs for reliable attachment to
the foundations. Overhead attachments shall be provided, 5.5.3.5 Special attention shall be paid to the protection
where necessary. against overpressure of vessels, such as heat exchangers,
which have parts that are designed for a pressure which is
5.5.2.3 Every heat exchanger and pressure vessel must below that to which they might be subjected in the case of
have a name plate which contains basic data about rupture of the tubular bundles or coils contained therein and
equipment. that have been designed for a higher pressure.
5.5.2.4 Pressure vessels and equipment exposed to 5.5.3.6 Sight glasses in surfaces subject to pressure are
accelerated corrosion due to the medium which they contain permitted only if they are necessary for the operation of the
shall be protected in a suitable manner. plant and other means of observation cannot be provided.
5.5.2.5 Pressure vessels over 2,0 m long shall have They shall not be larger than necessary and shall preferably
inspection openings at each end at least. Where the pressure be round.
vessel can be entered, one access opening is sufficient. Level indicators must be fitted on heat exchangers
and pressure vessels which are heated and in which a fall of
5.5.2.6 Pressure vessels with an inside diameter of more
the liquid level can result in unacceptably high temperatures
than 800,0 mm shall be capable of being entered.
in the vessel walls. Level indicators and sight glasses shall be
5.5.2.7 Where pressure vessels and equipment contain of a reliable design and shall have an adequate protection
dangerous substances (e.g. liquefied or toxic gases), the (e.g. by wire mesh for sight glasses). Flat glass plates shall be
covers of inspection and access openings shall not be secured used for level indication containing steam, fuel or oil. In
by crossbars but by bolted flanges. deaerators cylindrical glasses may be used.
5.5.2.8 Special inspection and access openings are not 5.5.3.7 Heat exchangers and pressure vessels shall be fitted
necessary where internal inspection can be carried out by with shut-off valves, which shall, in general, be secured
removing or dismantling parts. directly to the shell on welded plates and on short stiffened
flanged pipes. Attachment with threads may be permitted on
5.5.3 Fittings and gauges hydraulic accumulators.
5.5.3.1 Each heat exchanger, pressure vessel or their banks 5.5.3.8 Where several pressure vessels are grouped
in permanent communication shall be fitted with safety together, it is not necessary that each pressure vessel should
valves directly connected to the vessel or to the branch be capable of being shut-off individually and means need
without stopping devices. Where there are several non- only be provided for shutting off the group. In general, not
communicating spaces, safety valves shall be provided for more than three pressure vessels should be grouped together.
each space. Hydraulic accumulators shall be fitted with a Starting air receivers and other pressure vessels which are
safety valve to be installed on the water side and fan heaters opened in service shall be capable of being shut off
at the cold water inlet. individually. Devices incorporated in piping, e.g. water and
In separate cases, in agreement with the Register, oil separators, do not require shut-off devices.
the departure from the present requirements may be 5.5.3.9 Heat exchangers and pressure vessels shall be
permitted. equipped with blow-through and drainage devices. Means of
For type approval of safety valves, the test drainage which cannot be shut off shall be provided at the
requirements outlined in ISO/EN 4196 should be observed. lowest point on the discharge side of the safety valves.

June 2018 57
5.5.3.10 Each heat exchanger, pressure vessel or their banks 5.5.5.2 The gas cylinders shall be manufactured by
in permanent communication shall be equipped with pressure methods approved by the Register, using suitable materials.
gauges or compound gauges. Where heat exchangers have The cylinders shall be manufactured to the same standard
several non-communicating spaces, pressure gauges shall be which form basis of the design.
provided for each space.
5.5.5.3 Testing of gas cylinders
Pressure gauges shall comply with the requirements
set forth in 5.2.3.5. 5.5.5.3.1 The gas cylinders shall be certified by the Register.
The Register’s product certificate (EN 10204, type 3.2) will
5.5.3.11 Oil heaters where oil temperature may exceed be issued after completion of the testing as specified bellow.
220°C shall be provided with signalling devices indicating 5.5.5.3.2
the temperature in excess or the break of fuel flow, in
addition to temperature control. .1 Two cylinders-samples from each 200 originating from
one melt and one heat treatment shall be taken;
5.5.4 Air receivers .2 one longitudinal tensile test specimen, three transverse
bending test specimens and a set of ISO V - type notched
5.5.4.1 When lifted, the safety valves on air receivers of
bar impact test specimens at – 20°C shall be taken from
the main and auxiliary engines and of fire extinguishing
the sample cylinder. The average impact work shall be at
systems shall fully stop the fluid bleeding in case of the
least 35,0 J.
pressure drop in the receiver to 85% of the working pressure.
On other sample cylinder the bursting test shall be carried
5.5.4.2 Where compressors, reduction valves or pipelines out. Curve of pressure as a function of time at a room
intended for air supply to air receivers are provided with temperature (determination of the pressure at which
safety valves which are so installed that the air supply to the plastic deformation of the cylinder commences, together
air receivers under pressure exceeding the working pressure with the bursting pressure) shall be recorded. The
is excluded, the installation of safety valves on the air required bursting pressure has to be at least 1,8 times the
receivers is not obligatory. In this case, the air receivers shall test pressure. The appearance of the fracture has to be
be equipped with fusible plugs instead of safety valves. evaluated. It shall not be brittle and no breaking pieces
5.5.4.3 The fusible plug shall have a fusion temperature of shall be detached;
100°C ÷ 130°C. The fusion temperature shall be punched out .3 the cylindrical wall thickness of all sample cylinders shall
on the fusible plug. Air receivers having a capacity over be measured in transverse planes at three levels (neck,
700,0 l shall be fitted with plugs not less than 10,0 mm in middle, base), and also the thickness of end plate;
diameter. .4 examination of the inner surface of the neck and bottom
5.5.4.4 Each air receiver shall be equipped with a device portions of the sample cylinders shall be carried out in
for moisture removal. In case of air receivers arranged order to detect possible manufacturing defects;
horizontally, the moisture removed devices shall be provided .5 hydrostatic testing of all cylinders and hardness testing of
at both ends of the receiver. all quenched and tempered cylinders shall be carried out.
As far as not otherwise agreed, the hardness values
5.5.4.5 Wherever possible, horizontally fastened evaluated for one test lot according to .1 shall not be
compressed air receivers shall be installed at an angle and differing by more than 55 HB;
parallel to the fore-and-aft line of the inland waterway vessel.
The angle should be at least 10° (with the valve head at the .6 final visual inspection of cylinders and a check of weight
top). Where vessels are installed athwartship, the angle and volumetric capacity of about 10% of the cylinders.
should be greater. Manufacturer must establish the volumetric capacity and
weight of each cylinder.
5.5.4.6 Where necessary, compressed air receivers shall be 5.5.5.3.3 As far as not agreed otherwise, the presence of the
so marked on the outside that they can be installed on board Register is required for the tests according to 5.5.5.3.2.2,
inland waterway vessels in the position necessary for 5.5.5.3.2.5 (hydrostatic testing) and 5.5.5.3.2.6.
complete venting and drainage.
The gas cylinders have to meet the requirements
5.5.5 Compressed gas cylinders (seamless pressure defined in the documentation for approval.
vessels - receptacles) 5.5.5.4 The wall thicknesses of the pressure-containing
5.5.5.1 Compressed gas cylinders are considered to be parts, in [mm], shall be determined by the following
portable pressure vessels, specially manufactured for storage formulas:
of compressed gas, refrigerant or CO 2 and are installed on Cylindrical surfaces:
board vessel during navigation and cannot be filled with
Da ⋅ p
existing means on the vessel. Capacity of cylinders is not = s + c , [ mm ] (5.5.5-1)
more than 150,0 l, outside diameter ≤ 420,0 mm and a length 20 ⋅ s d ⋅ ϕ + p
≤ 2000,0 mm.
Spherical ends:
For compressed gas cylinders exceeding the above
Da ⋅ p
+ c , [ mm ]
capacity and dimensions, the following requirements may be
= s (5.5.5-2)
applied at the discretion of the Register. 40 ⋅ s d ⋅ ϕ + p

58 June 2018
Ends dished to outside: Figure 5.5.5-1

Ends dished to inside
Da ⋅ p ⋅ β
=s + c , [ mm ] (5.5.5-2)
40 ⋅ s d 5.5.5.5 Alternative calculation
Ends dished to inside Alternatively a calculation according to EN 1964-1
The conditions applicable to dished ends are shown in or ISO 9809-1 may be performed.
Figure 5.5.5-1.
where: 5.5.5.6 The following particulars shall be specified on the
cylinders:
p = design pressure specified test pressure according
to current recognized standards can be taken, which – manufacturer;
is subject to special consideration by the Register – number of cylinder;
on a case by case basis, [bar]; – date of test;
= for CO 2 cylinders with filling factor of 0,67, – kind of gas;
specified test pressure is 250 bar;
– volume (capacity);
s = wall thickness, [mm];
– test pressure;
c = corrosion allowance taken as 1,0 if required,
– empty weight;
[mm];
– test stamp.
Da = outside diameter of gas cylinder, [mm];
R eH = guaranteed upper yield point, [N/mm2];
R p0,2 = guaranteed 0,2% proof stress, [N/mm2];
Rm = guaranteed minimum tensile strength, [N/mm2];
sd = permissible stress, [N/mm2];
= for normalized or normalized and tempered
cylinders:
 3 ⋅ ReH ( R p 0,2 )   2, 25 ⋅ Rm  
σ d = MIN  ; 
 4   4  
= for quenched and tempered cylinders:
2,7 ⋅ Rm
σd =
4
φ = weakening factor, (see the Rules, Part 10 –
Boiler, heat exchangers and pressure vessels,
2.5.2.6);
ß = design coefficient, (see the Rules, Part 10 –
Boiler, heat exchangers and pressure vessels,
2.5.2.2).
Figure 5.5.5-2
Heads with openings
5.5.6 Accumulators for hydraulic systems

5.5.6.1 Design
5.5.6.1.1 The accumulators shall be designed according to a
recognized international Code accepted by the Register, e.g.
EN 14359, ISO 11120 or ISO 9809, where applicable.
The information or documentation, as required by
the standard, shall be submitted for approval.
5.5.6.1.2 Corrosion allowance shall not be less than 1,0 mm
for accumulators made from ferrous materials.
5.5.6.2 Fabrication
The accumulators shall be made by a manufacturer
approved by the Register for pressure equipment Class I and
II.
The accumulators shall be manufactured to the
same standard which form basis of the design.

June 2018 59
All forming, heat treatment, prototype testing and

product testing shall meet with the requirements of the same 6 GEARS AND COUPLINGS
standard.
6.1 General requirements
5.5.6.3 Certification
The accumulators shall be certified by the Register. 6.1.1 Unless otherwise specified, the requirements of this
The Register’s product certificate (EN 10204, type 3.2) will Section apply to:
be issued after completion of the testing as specified in the .1 reduction and/or reverse gears intended for propulsion
standard. plants with a transmitted power of 220,0 kW and above;
.2 other reduction and step-up gears with a transmitted
power of 110,0 kW and above.
All other gears shall be designed and constructed
according to sound marine practice and delivered with an
acceptance test certificate issued by the manufacturer (EN
10204, type 3.1).
6.1.2 The requirements of this Section are applicable to

propulsion and auxiliary gearing with cylindrical pinions and
wheels, external and internal toothing, having spur or helical
teeth with involute profile, provided that the axes of the
shafts are parallel and bevel gears.
6.1.3 The sufficient load-bearing capacity of the gear-

tooth system of main and auxiliary gears in main propulsion
systems of inland water vessels shall be demonstrated by
load-bearing capacity calculations according to the
international standards ISO 6336 and ISO 9083 for spur and
helical gear tooth systems respectively, ISO 10300 for bevel
gears.
The requirements for the design, construction and
calculation of gears according to the Rules, Part 9 –
Machines, 4.2 are applicable.
6.1.4 The additional loads due to torsional vibrations,

stormy weather, manoeuvres, towage, different loading of a
vessel, propeller resistance irregularity and its dependence on
number of blades shall be taken into account.
6.1.5 Application factor, KA

6.1.5.1 Factor K A accounts for additional dynamic loads
from sources external to the gearing.
6.1.5.2 The factor K A mainly depends on:
– characteristics of driving and driven machines;
– ratio of masses;
– type of couplings;
– operating conditions (overspeeds, changes in propeller
load conditions, etc.).
When operating near a critical speed of the drive
system, a careful analysis of conditions must be made.
6.1.5.3 Factor K A should be determined by measurements
or by system analysis (e.g. from the calculation of torsional
vibrations, taking into account the possible combinations of
various working conditions, or on the basis of the
measurement results on similar installations) acceptable to
the Register. Where a value determined in such a way cannot
be supplied, the following values can be taken.
a) Main propulsion:
– diesel engine with hydraulic or electromagnetic slip
coupling, K A = 1,0;
– diesel engine with high elasticity coupling, K A = 1,3;

60 June 2018
– diesel engine with other couplings, K A = 1,5. 6.2.5 External gearing

b) Auxiliary gears: External gearing is a gear pair consisting of a
– electric motor, K A = 1,0; pinion and a wheel, both with external toothing.
– diesel engine with hydraulic or electromagnetic slip
coupling, K A = 1,0; 6.2.6 Internal gearing
– diesel engine with high elasticity coupling, K A = 1,2; Internal gearing is a gear pair consisting of a pinion
– diesel engine with other couplings, K A = 1,4. with external toothing and a wheel with internal toothing.
In other cases value of K A is determined in
6.3 Documentation to be submitted
agreement with the Register.
6.3.1 Before starting construction, all plans,
6.2 Definitions (see also standard ISO 1122-1) specifications and calculations listed in the Rules, Part 1 –
6.2.1 Gear Classification and Surveys, Chapter II, Table 3.2-9 (items 1.
to 10.) shall be submitted to the Register.
Gear is a toothed member designed to transmit
motion to, or receive motion from, another toothed member, 6.3.2 The data listed in the Rules, Part 1 – Classification
by means of successively engaging teeth. and Surveys, Chapter II, Table 3.2-9 (items 11. to 20.) shall
be submitted with the documents required in 6.3.1.
6.2.2 Gear pair
6.4 Materials
Gear pair is a mechanism consisting of two gears
able to rotate around axes relative positions of which are 6.4.1 Forged, rolled and cast materials stated in Table
fixed and one gear turns the other by the action of teeth 6.4-1 are subject to supervision of the Register in the process
successively in contact. of manufacture, regarding their compliance with the
approved technical documentation and the requirements of
6.2.3 Pinion the Rules, Part 25 –Metallic materials and Part 26 –
Pinion is the gear of a gear pair which has the Welding.
smaller number of teeth. For the material of the gearings the requirements
according to ISO 6336, Part 5 shall be considered.
6.2.4 Wheel
Materials other than steels will be given special
Wheel is the gear of a gear pair which has the consideration by the Register.
larger number of teeth.
Table 6.4-1

Grey cast iron the Rules, Part 25, 3.13.3
Nodular cast iron the Rules, Part 25, 3.13.4
1. Casing Cast steel the Rules, Part 25, 3.12
Rolled steel the Rules, Part 25, 3.2
Aluminium alloy 2) the Rules, Part 25, 5.2
2. Shafts 1) Forged steel the Rules, Part 25, 3.11
Pinions, gear wheels and gearwheel rims (see Forged steel the Rules, Part 25, 3.11
3.
6.4.4) Cast steel the Rules, Part 25, 3.12
Forged steel the Rules, Part 25, 3.11
Non flexible parts of elements transferring Cast steel the Rules, Part 25, 3.12
4.
torque Nodular cast iron the Rules, Part 25, 3.13.4
Aluminium alloy the Rules, Part 25, 5.1 and 5.2
Rubber -
5. Flexible parts Synthetic materials -
Spring steel -
6. Coupling bolts Forged steel the Rules, Part 25, 3.11
Notes:
1) For plain and flangeless shafts, rolled steel bar may also be used.
2) Gear casings manufactured from material other than steel will be considered upon full details being submitted.

June 2018 61
An ultrasonic examination of the forgings shall be

6.4.2 Steels intended for shafts, pinions and wheels shall performed by the manufacturer when there is still an
be selected considering their compatibility in service. Pinions adequate amount of excess material on the surfaces in respect
and wheels may be made from separate forgings, rolled bars of the final position of the teeth.
or blanks cut out of a forged bar. In particular, for through-
In general, ultrasonic examination is required for
hardened pinion/wheel pairs, the hardness of the pinion teeth
forging having a finished diameter, of the part where teeth
shall exceed that of the corresponding wheel. For this
will be cut, higher than 200,0 mm.
purpose, the minimum tensile strength of the pinion material
shall exceed that of the wheel by at least 15%. 6.5 Teeth
6.4.3 The minimum tensile strength of the core is not to 6.5.1 Manufacturing accuracy
be less than:
– 750,0 N/mm2 for case-hardened teeth; Mean roughness (peak-to-valley) of shaved or
ground teeth is not to exceed 4,0 μm. Wheels shall be cut by
– 800,0 N/mm2 for induction-hardened or nitride teeth. cutters with a method suitable for the expected type and
6.4.4 Gear wheel bodies may be made of grey cast iron, quality. Whenever necessary, the cutting shall be carried out
nodular cast iron or may be fabricated from welded steel in a temperature-controlled environment.
plates with steel or cast steel hubs. The peripheral speed of 6.5.2 Tooth root
cast iron gear wheels shall, in general, not exceed 60,0 m/s,
that of cast iron coupling clamps or bowls, 40,0 m/s. Teeth shall be well faired and rounded at the root.
The fillet radius at the root of the teeth, within a plane normal
6.4.5 Couplings in the main propulsion plant shall be to the teeth, shall not be less than 0,25 times the normal
made of steel, cast steel or nodular cast iron having mainly module (m n ).
ferritic structure. Grey cast iron or suitable cast aluminium
Profile-grinding of gear teeth shall be performed in
alloys may also be permitted for lightly stressed external
such a way that no notches are left in the fillet.
components of couplings and the rotors and casings of
hydraulic slip couplings. 6.5.3 Tooth tips and ends
6.4.6 Flexible coupling bodies for essential auxiliary 6.5.3.1 All sharp edges on the tips and ends of gear teeth
machinery may, in general, be made of grey cast iron, and for shall be removed after cutting and finishing of teeth.
the outer coupling bodies a suitable aluminium alloy may
also be used. 6.5.3.2 Where the ratio B/d 1 (B - effective face width, d 1 -
reference diameter) exceeds 0,3 (see Figure 6.5.3-1), the ends
6.4.7 Chemical composition and mechanical properties of pinion and wheel shall be chamfered to an angle φ
shall be tested in accordance with the applicable requirements between 45° and 60°. The chamfering depth shall be at least
of the Rules, Part 25 – Metallic materials, 3.11.4, 3.11.6, equal to 1,5 times the normal module (m n ).
3.12.4 and 3.12.6 for the following items:
– pinions and wheel bodies;
– rims;
– shafts;
– plates and other elements intended for propulsion gear
casings of welded construction.
Testing materials for above mentioned parts of
reduction and/or reverse gears intended for propulsion plants
with a transmitted power:
a) ≥ 220,0 kW: Register certificate for material (EN 10204,
type 3.2);
b) ˂ 220,0 kW: Manufacturer inspection certificate for
material (EN 10204, type 3.1). Figure 6.5.3-1
Other reduction and step-up gears with a Gear wheel section
transmitted power:
6.5.4 Surface treatment
a) ≥ 110,0 kW: Register certificate for material (EN 10204,
type 3.2); 6.5.4.1 The hardened layer on surface-hardened gear teeth
b) ˂ 110,0 kW: Manufacturer inspection certificate for shall be uniform and extended over the whole tooth flank and
material (EN 10204, type 3.1). fillet.
6.4.8 Non-destructive examination 6.5.4.2 Where the pinions and the toothed portions of the
wheels are case-hardened and tempered, the teeth flanks shall
Magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examination be ground while the bottom lands of the teeth remain only
shall be carried out on all surface-hardened teeth. This case-hardened. The superficial hardness of the case-hardened
examination may also be requested on the finished machined zone shall be at least equal to 56 C Rockwell units.
teeth of through-hardened gears.

62 June 2018
6.5.4.3 Where the pinions and the toothed portions of the 6.6.4 Bolting
wheels are nitrided, the hardened layer shall comply with
Table 6.5.4-1. Where rims and hubs are joined together through
bolted side plates or flanges, the assembly shall be secured
6.5.4.4 The use of other processes of superficial hardening by:
of the teeth, such as flame hardening, will be given special – tight fit bolts; or
consideration, in particular as regards the values to be
adopted for the endurance limit for contact stress (herzian – bolts and tight fit pins.
pressure) and the endurance limit for tooth root bending The nuts shall be suitably locked by means other
stress. than welding.
Table 6.5.4-1 6.7 Gear shafts and bearings

Characteristics of the hardened layer for nitrided gears 6.7.1 Minimum diameter
Minimum thickness 6.7.1.1 The dimensions of shafts of reversing and reduction

Type of Minimum hardness gears shall be calculated by applying the following formula:
of hardened layer,
steel (HV)
[mm] 1)
P
Nitrided 500 (at 0,25 mm d ≥ F ⋅k ⋅ ⋅ CW , [ mm ]
steel
0,6
depth)   d 4  (6.7.1-1)
n ⋅ 1 −   
3 i
Other steel 0,3 450 (surface)   da  
 
Note:
1) Depth of the hardened layer where the hardness is reduced where:
to the core hardness. When the grinding of nitrided teeth is
d = required outside diameter of shaft, [mm];
performed, the depth of the hardened layer to be taken into
account is the depth after grinding. di = diameter of shaft bore for hollow shafts, [mm];
da = actual shaft diameter, [mm];
6.6 Wheels and pinions P = driving power of shaft, [kW];
6.6.1 General n = shaft rotational speed, [rpm];
Wheel bodies shall be so designed that radial F = factor for the type of drive:
deflections and distortions under load are prevented, so as to = 90,0 for electrical drives and engines with slip
ensure a satisfactory meshing of teeth. couplings;
= 94,0 for all other types of drive;
6.6.2 Welding
= the Register reserves the right to specify higher F
6.6.2.1 Where welding is employed for the construction of values if this appears necessary in view of the
wheels, the welding procedure (WPS) shall be submitted to loading of the plant;
the Register for approval. Welding processes and their CW = material factor;
qualification shall comply with the Rules, Part 26 – Welding.
Stress relieving treatment shall be performed after welding. 560
= ;
Rm + 160
6.6.2.2 Examination of the welded joints shall be
performed by means of magnetic particle or dye penetrant Rm = tensile strength of the shaft material, [N/mm2];
tests to the satisfaction of the Register. Suitable arrangements = however, for wheel shafts, the value applied for
shall be made to permit the examination of the internal side R m in the formula shall not be higher than 800,0
of the welded joints. N/mm2. For pinion shafts the actual tensile strength
value may, in general, be substituted for R m .
6.6.3 Shrink-fits
k = coefficient defined as:
6.6.3.1 The shrink-fit assembly of rim and wheel body as
= 1,10 for gear shafts;
well as of wheel body and shaft shall be designed with a
safety factor against slippage of not less than 2,8∙c where c is = 1,15 for gear shafts in the area of the pinion or
coefficient equal to: wheel body, if this is keyed to the shaft, and for
– 1,0 for gears driven by electric motors; multi-spline shafts;
– 1,0 for gears driven by diesel engines through a = higher values of k may be specified by the
hydraulic, electromagnetic or high elasticity Register where increased bending stresses in the
coupling; shaft are liable to occur because of the bearing
arrangement, the casing design, the tooth pressure,
– 1,2 in the other cases.
etc.
NOTE: The manufacturer shall ensure that the maximum In cases where d i ≤ 0,4∙d a the following expression
torque transmitted during the clutch engagement does not may be used:
exceed the nominal torque by more than 20%.
4
6.6.3.2 The shrink-fit assembly shall take into account the d 
1−  i  =1,0 (6.7.1-2)
thermal expansion differential between the shrunk-on parts in  da 
the service conditions.

June 2018 63
6.7.1.2 Shafts, pinions and gear wheels of propulsion gears 6.9 Lubrication
for vessels strengthened for navigation in ice shall be
designed for a torque exceeding the main engine designed 6.9.1 General
torque.
6.9.1.1 Manufacturers shall take care of the following
The requirements of this item do not apply to the points:
installations protected against torque overload.
.1 reliable lubrication of gear meshes and bearings is
6.7.2 Bearings ensured:
– over the whole speed range, including starting,
6.7.2.1 Thrust bearings and their supports shall be so stopping and, where applicable, manoeuvring;
designed as to avoid detrimental deflections under load.
– for all angles stated in 1.2.4;
6.7.2.2 Life duration of bearings is not to be less than .2 in multi-propellers plants not fitted with shaft brakes,
40000 hours. Shorter durations may be accepted on the basis provision shall be made to ensure lubrication of gears
of the actual load time distribution, and subject to the likely to be affected by windmilling.
agreement of the owner.
6.9.1.2 Lubrication by means other than oil circulation
6.7.2.3 The design of the main gearing shall provide an under pressure will be given special consideration.
easy access to all bearings.
6.9.1.3 Lubrication of tooth engagements and bearings
6.8 Gear casings shall be arranged in such way as to prevent oil foaming and
emulsification.
6.8.1 General
6.9.2 Pumps
6.8.1.1 Gear casings and their supports shall be designed
sufficiently stiff such that misalignment at the mesh due to 6.9.2.1 Gears intended for propulsion or other essential
movements of the external foundations and the thermal services shall be provided with:
effects under all conditions of service do not disturb the – one main lubricating pump, capable of maintaining a
overall tooth contact. sufficient lubrication of the gearbox in the whole speed
6.8.1.2 In order to prevent corrosion gear casings shall be range; and
provided with ventilating arrangements. The vent pipes of – one standby pump independently driven of at least the
gear casings with volume of 0,5 m3 and above shall be led to same capacity.
the open deck or other positions where exhaust ventilation is
6.9.2.2 In the case of:
provided. The ends of the vent pipes shall be fitted with
flame-arresting devices and arranged so as to prevent water – gears having a transmitted power not exceeding 375,0
from getting into the gearing. kW; or
– multi-engines plants;
6.8.1.3 Where the main thrust bearing is housed in the
one of the pumps mentioned in 6.9.2.1 may be a spare pump
gearing case, the lower part of the case shall have proper
ready to be connected to the reduction gear lubricating oil
strengthening.
system, provided disassembling and reassembling operations
6.8.2 Welded casings can be carried out on board in a short time.
6.8.2.1 For gear casings fabricated by fusion welding the 6.9.2.3 Lubricating oil pumps driven by the gearing shall
carbon content of steels should, in general, not exceed 0,23%. be mounted in such a way that they are accessible and can be
Steels with higher carbon content may be approved subject to replaced.
satisfactory results from weld procedure tests.
6.9.3 Filtration
6.8.2.2 The welded joints shall be so arranged that welding
6.9.3.1 Forced lubrication systems shall be fitted with a
and inspection can be performed satisfactorily. They shall be
device which efficiently filters the oil in the circuit.
of the full penetration type.
6.9.3.2 When fitted to gears intended for propulsion
6.8.2.3 The gear casings shall be stress relief heat treated
machinery or machinery driving electric propulsion
on completion of all welding.
generators, such filters shall be so arranged that they can be
6.8.3 Openings easily cleaned without stopping the lubrication of the
machines.
The gear casing shall have a sufficient number of
sight openings with easily detachable covers for carrying out 6.9.4 Lubricating oil level indicator
internal inspection. The sight openings shall be so arranged
For monitoring the lubricating oil level in main and
as to allow for inspection of the teeth over their full length
auxiliary gears, equipment shall be fitted to enable the
and of the bearings inside the gearing. This means that no
lubricating oil level to be determined.
piping or coolers etc. shall be positioned to prevent access.
6.10 Pressure and temperature control
Temperature and pressure gauges shall be fitted to
monitor the lubricating oil pressure and the lubricating oil
temperature at the oil-cooler outlet before it enters the gears.

64 June 2018
6.11 Fitting of gears 6.14 Testing in the manufacturer’s works

6.11.1 Manufacturers and shipyards shall take care 6.14.1 Pressure piping, pumps casings, valves and other
directly that stiffness of gear seating and alignment fittings shall be hydraulically tested in accordance with the
conditions of gears are such as not to adversely affect the requirements of 7.3.
overall tooth contact and the bearing loads under all
operating conditions of the vessel. 6.14.2 When the testing of material and component tests
have been carried out, gearing systems for the main
6.11.2 Means such as stoppers or fitted bolts shall be propulsion plant and for important auxiliaries shall be
arranged in the case of gears subject to propeller thrust. presented to the Register for final inspection and operational
However, where the thrust is transmitted by friction and the testing in the manufacturer’s works. The final inspection
relevant safety factor is not less than 2, such means may be shall be combined with a trial run lasting several hours (at
omitted. least two hours) under part or full-load conditions, on which
occasion the tooth clearance and contact pattern shall be
6.12 Balancing checked. In the case of a trial at full-load conditions, any
necessary running-in of the gears shall have been completed
6.12.1 The parts rotating at speeds from 5,0 to 20,0 m/s beforehand.
shall be statically balanced, while those rotating at speeds
over 20,0 m/s shall be subjected to dynamic balancing. 6.14.3 Where no test facilities are available for the
The accuracy of dynamic balancing shall be operational and on-load testing of large gear trains, these tests
obtained from the formulas: may also be performed on board vessel on the occasion of the
river trials.
24000
=f , for v > 300,0 m/s 6.14.4 Tightness tests shall be performed on those
n
(6.12-1) components to which such testing is appropriate.
63000
=f = , for v 20,0 m/s
n 6.14.5 Reductions in scope of tests require the consent of
the Register.
where:
ν = distance between the centre of gravity and the 6.15 Design and construction of couplings
geometrical axis of rotation of the part concerned,
[µm]; 6.15.1 Couplings for propulsion of single engine vessels
shall be of such design that in the case of their failure, is
n = rotational speed, [rps]. possible to maintain navigation with the speed ensuring easy
Intermediate values of v from 20,0 to 300,0 m/s steering.
shall be determined by linear interpolation.
6.15.2 Flexible couplings
Elements of couplings shall be balanced together
with the parts they are rigidly adjoined to. 6.15.2.1 Flexible couplings shall be approved for the loads
specified by the manufacturer and for use in main propulsion
6.12.2 Balancing of rotating parts and subassemblies of plants and essential auxiliary machinery. In general flexible
rotors shall be documented with manufacturer certificates and couplings shall be type approved.
shall be within the approved specification.
6.15.2.2 Flexible couplings in the main propulsion plant and
6.13 Meshing test in power-generating plants shall be so dimensioned that they
are able to withstand for a reasonable time operation with any
6.13.1 A tooth meshing test shall be performed in the one engine cylinder out of service
presence of the Register. This test shall be carried out at a
load sufficient to ensure tooth contact, with the journals 6.15.2.3 When subjected to the mean driving torque, shear-
located in the bearings according to the normal running loaded elastic components made of non-reinforced rubber or
conditions. Before the test, the tooth surface shall be coated plastic may not absorb a shear load greater than 0,35 ÷ 0,45
with a thin layer of suitable coloured compound. N/mm2 depending on the quality of the rubber and, where
applicable, on the design of the elastic part so as to ensure
The results of such test shall demonstrate that the
favourable stress distribution within such elastic elements. To
tooth contact is adequately distributed on the length of the
reduce notch effects, any clamped end-pieces shall be
teeth. Strong contact marks at the end of the teeth are not
suitably reinforced. The quality of the rubber used is
acceptable.
recognized as sufficient if the impact resilience is between
6.13.2 A permanent record of the tooth contact shall be 35% and 65% and the elastic elongation between 250% and
made for the purpose of subsequent checking of alignment 550%.
following installation on board. 6.15.2.4 With regard to casings, flanges and bolts the
requirements specified in Section 3, shall be complied with.
6.13.3 For type approved cylindrical gears, with a power
not greater than 375,0 kW and a cast casing, the above 6.15.2.5 If a flexible coupling is so designed that it exerts an
required workshop meshing test could be waived at the axial thrust on the coupled members of the driving
Register satisfaction. mechanism, provision shall be made for the absorption of this
thrust.

June 2018 65
6.15.2.6 Flexible couplings for diesel generator sets shall be

capable of absorbing impact moments due to electrical short 7 PIPING SYSTEMS
circuits up to a value of 6 times the nominal torque of the
plant. 7.1 General requirements
6.15.2.7 Loading of flexible couplings intended for main 7.1.1 Scope of supervision
propulsion and for diesel-generator sets with design torque
shall be possible at environment temperature of 5°C to 60°C. 7.1.1.1These Rules apply to piping systems, including
valves, fittings and pumps, which are necessary for the
6.15.3 Flange and clamp-type couplings operation of the main propulsion plant together with its
auxiliaries and equipment. They also apply to piping systems
In the dimensional design of the coupling bodies,
used in the operation of the vessel whose failure could
flanges and bolts of flange and clamp-type couplings, the
directly or indirectly impair the safety of vessel or cargo, and
requirements specified in Section 3 shall be complied with.
to piping systems which are dealt with in other parts of the
6.15.4 Disengaging couplings (clutches) Rules.
6.15.4.1 Disengaging couplings are couplings which can be 7.1.1.2 Piping is defined to include the following
engaged and disengaged mechanically, hydraulically or components:
pneumatically. The following requirements apply for their – pipes;
use in shaft lines and as integrated part of gear boxes that are – flanges with gaskets and bolts and other pipe
subject to certification. Disengaging couplings of standard connections;
design shall be type approved.
– expansion elements (bellows);
6.15.4.2 The mechanical characteristics of materials used for – valves, including hydraulic and pneumatic actuators, and
the elements of the disengaging couplings shall conform to fittings;
the Rules, Part 25 – Metallic materials.
– hangers and supports;
6.15.4.3 The disengaging couplings of main engines shall be – flexible hoses;
fitted with devices to prevent slipping during appreciable
periods of time. – other accessories (filters, level gauges, etc.);
– pump housings.
6.15.4.4 It should be possible to control disengaging
couplings from the stations where the main engines are 7.1.1.3 For purpose of testing, selection of joint types and
controlled. Provision shall be made for local control of heat treatment, depending on intended service and working
couplings in case of emergency. media characteristics, piping systems are subdivided into
Classes in accordance with Table 7.1.1.3-1.
6.15.4.5 Where two or more engines drive a single propeller
shaft through disengaging couplings, their control 7.1.1.4 Pipes, valves and fittings of Class I and Class II, as
arrangement shall make a simultaneous engagement of the well as the valves and fittings on the collision bulkhead, on
engines impossible when running in opposite directions. vessel’s sides and bottom, and distance controlled (remote)
valves are subject to supervision by the Register in the course
6.15.4.6 Pumps, electric motors, coolers, piping, filters, of manufacture and shall be delivered with the Register
valves, etc. that are delivered as integral parts of the certificate (EN 10204, type 3.2). Valves and fittings on the
hydraulic/pneumatic system of the clutch, shall be checked collision bulkhead, on vessel’s sides and bottom and
by the manufacturer’s quality system as found relevant. flammable oil tanks boundary exposed to static pressure
6.15.4.7 Magnetic particle or dye penetrant inspection shall belong to Class II.
be applied for crack detection at surface hardened zones with 7.1.1.5 Machinery and other elements of piping systems
increased stress level as well as at shrinkage surfaces. The shall ensure their reliable operation under environmental
manufacturer shall issue a Manufacturer inspection certificate conditions according to requirements stated in 1.2.4 and
(EN 10204, type 3.1). 1.2.5.
6.15.4.8 Disengaging couplings not integrated in a gearbox 7.1.1.6 Piping systems shall be constructed and
or thruster, shall be checked for axial and radial alignment in manufactured on the basis of standards generally used in
the presence of the Register. shipbuilding.
6.15.4.9 Disengaging couplings for vessel’s propulsion 7.1.1.7 Fuel oil, lubrication oil, hydraulic oil and thermal
plants, for generator sets and transverse thrusters shall be oil are regarded as “flammable oils”.
presented to the Register for final inspection and, where
appropriate, for the performance of functional and tightness 7.1.2 Documentation to be submitted
tests. Regarding couplings for transverse thrusters, this
applies only to power ratings of 110,0 kW and more. Above Unless otherwise specified, the documents listed in
mentioned requirements also apply to flexible couplings. the Rules, Part 1 – Classification and Surveys, Chapter II,
Table 3.2-10 (items 1. to 22.) as well as the additional
6.15.4.10 As part of the river trials the installed documents listed in the Rules, Part 1 – Classification and
disengaging couplings will be tested for correct functioning Surveys, Chapter II, Table 3.2-10 (items 23. to 29.) shall be
on board in presence of the Register. submitted for approval as applicable.

66 June 2018
Table 7.1.1.3-1
Class of piping systems
Pipe Class 4) I II III

Design pressure 2) p, [MPa]
Medium conveyed by the piping system
Design temperature 3) t, [°C]
Toxic or corrosive media, flammable media heated above 1)
all –
flash point or with flash point below 55°C, liquefied gas
p > 1,6 or p ≤ 1,6 and p ≤ 0,7 and
Steam
t > 300 t ≤ 300 t ≤ 170
p > 1,6 or p ≤ 1,6 and p ≤ 0,7 and
Thermal oil
t > 300 t ≤ 300 t ≤ 150
Air, gases, non-flammable hydraulic oil, river and fresh p > 4,0 or p ≤ 4,0 and p ≤ 1,6 and
cooling water, boiler feed water, condensate t > 300 t ≤ 300 t ≤ 200
p > 1,6 or p ≤ 1,6 and p ≤ 0,7 and
Liquid fuels, lubricating oil, and flammable hydraulic oil
t > 150 t ≤ 150 t ≤ 60
Cargo pipelines for tank vessels – – all
Open-ended pipelines (without shut-off), e.g. drains,
– – all
venting pipes, overflow lines and boiler blowdown lines
Notes:
1) Classification in pipe Class II is possible if special safety arrangements are available and structural safety precautions are
arranged. Class II pipes are not to be used for toxic media.
2) For design pressure see 7.3.1.6.
3) Design temperature of a piping system is the maximum temperature of the medium inside the system.
4) For Class II and III piping both specified conditions shall be met, for Class I piping one condition only is sufficient.
7.2 Materials: application, manufacture and 7.2.3 Pipes, valves and fittings of copper and copper
testing alloys
7.2.1 General 7.2.3.1Pipes of copper and copper alloys shall be of

seamless drawn material or produced by a method approved
7.2.1.1 Materials used for manufacture of pipes, valves and by the Register. Copper pipes for Classes I and II shall be
fittings shall comply with the requirements of the Rules, Part seamless.
25 – Metallic Materials. Copper and copper alloy pipes, valves and fittings,
Materials for pipes, valves and fittings intended for in general, shall not be used for temperatures exceeding
aggressive corrosive media, will be considered by the 200°C, and copper-nickel alloy piping for temperatures
Register on a case by case basis. exceeding 300°C. Bronze valves and fittings shall not be
used for temperatures exceeding 260°C.
7.2.1.2 Lead pipes shall not be fitted in positions where
they may cause the risk of flooding, if damaged. 7.2.3.2 Pipes for starting air shall not be of copper or
copper alloys when the outer diameter exceeds 44,5 mm.
7.2.2 Pipes, valves and fittings of steel
7.2.4 Nodular cast iron of the ferritic type (GGG)
Steel pipes for piping systems of Classes I and II
shall be seamless pipes, or pipes fabricated with a welding 7.2.4.1 Nodular cast iron of the ferritic type may be
procedure, considered by the Register to be equivalent to accepted for bilge, ballast and cargo oil pipes, valves and
seamless pipes. In general, pipes, valves and fittings of fittings.
carbon steel and carbon manganese steel shall be used for
temperatures not exceeding 400°C, and these of low-alloy 7.2.4.2 Nodular cast iron of the ferritic type, with specified
steel for temperatures not exceeding 500°C. minimum elongation of 12%, may be used in Class II and III
piping and in pipes and valves located on the vessel’s side
These steels may be admitted for temperatures and bottom and valves on the collision bulkhead. The use of
higher than the above mentioned, if their mechanical nodular cast iron in Class I piping shall be subject to
properties and the average stress to produce rupture (i.e. consideration for approval on a case by case basis.
tensile strength after 100000 hours at the design temperature)
comply with the effective standards and are guaranteed by 7.2.4.3 Nodular cast iron valves and fittings shall not be
the steel maker as suitable for high temperature service. accepted for media with temperatures exceeding 350°C.
Pipes, valves and fittings for media with 7.2.4.4 The use of nodular cast iron for media having a
temperature above 500°C shall be manufactured of alloy temperature below 0°C shall be considered on a case by case
steel. Exhaust gas pipes are excluded from this requirement. basis.

June 2018 67
7.2.5 Nodular cast iron of the ferritic/pearlitic and 7.2.9 Metal pipes for water services
pearlitic type
7.2.9.1 General
Nodular cast iron of the ferritic/pearlitic and 7.2.9.1.1 These requirements, except where it is specifically
pearlitic type shall be subject to the limitation of use as grey stated, apply to outboard water (river water) piping systems.
cast iron as specified in 7.2.6.
7.2.9.1.2 In addition to the selection of suitable materials,
7.2.6 Cast iron with lamellar graphite (grey cast iron - careful attention should be given to the design details of the
GG) piping system and the workmanship in fabrication,
construction and installation of pipework in order to obtain
7.2.6.1 Pipes, valves and fittings of grey cast iron may be maximum life in service.
accepted by the Register for Class III piping. Pipes of grey
cast iron may be used for cargo and ballast pipelines within 7.2.9.2 Material
cargo tanks of tank vessels. 7.2.9.2.1 Materials used in outboard (river) water piping
Grey cast iron valves and fittings may be also used systems include:
for open deck cargo lines with pressure below 1,6 MPa – galvanized steel;
except for the valves and fittings of cargo piping for – steel pipes lined with rubber, plastics or stoved coatings;
connection to the cargo loading and discharge hoses.
– copper;
7.2.6.2 Grey cast iron is not permitted for pipes, valves and – 90/10 copper-nickel-iron (CuNi10Fe1Mn);
fittings for media having temperatures above 2200C and for
pipelines subject to water hammer, excessive strains and – 70/30 copper-nickel (CuNi30Mn1Fe);
vibrations. – aluminium brass (CuZn21Al2-Yorcalbro).
Grey cast iron is not permitted for valves and pipes 7.2.9.2.2 Welds should be free from lack of fusion and
fitted on the vessel’s sides and bottom and for valves fitted crevices. The surfaces should be dressed to remove slag and
on the collision bulkhead (see 7.8.1.3). spatter and this should be done before coating. The coating
Grey cast iron is not permitted for valves fitted to should be continuous around the ends of the pipes and on the
fuel oil and lubricating oil tanks under static pressure head faces of flanges.
and for relief valves. 7.2.9.2.3 Galvanising the bores and flanges of steel pipes as
Grey cast iron is not permitted for thermal oil protection against corrosion is common practice, and is
systems. recommended as the minimum protection for pipes in
overboard water systems, including those for bilge and
7.2.7 Aluminium and aluminium alloys ballast service.
Aluminium and aluminium alloys shall comply 7.2.9.2.4 Austenitic stainless steel pipes are not
with the Rules, Part 25 – Metallic Materials and may in recommended for brackish or salt water services as they are
individual cases, with the agreement of the Register, be used prone to pitting, particularly in polluted waters.
for temperatures up to 200°C. They are not acceptable for use 7.2.9.2.5 Rubber lined pipes are effective against corrosion
in fire-extinguishing systems and sounding and air pipes of and suitable for higher water velocities. The rubber lining
fuel oil tanks. should be free from defects, e.g. discontinuities, pinholes, etc.
and it is essential that the bonding of the rubber to the bore of
7.2.8 Plastic pipes the pipe and flange face is sound. Rubber linings should be
applied by firms specialising in this form of protection.
7.2.8.1 Plastic pipes may be admitted in shipboard piping
systems. The use will be considered in relation to the The foregoing comments on rubber lined pipes also
intended service, the location, the operating conditions, and apply to pipes lined with plastics.
properties of the material. The requirements for plastic pipes 7.2.9.2.6 Stove coating of pipes as protection against
as well as conditions for their application in vessels shall corrosion should only be used where the pipes will be
comply with the Rules, Part 8 - Piping, 1.7. efficiently protected against mechanical damage.
7.2.8.2 Pipe penetrations through watertight bulkheads and 7.2.9.2.7 Copper and copper alloy pipes
decks as well as through fire divisions shall be approved by Copper pipes are particularly susceptible to
the Register. perforation by corrosion/erosion and should only be used for
7.2.8.3 Plastic pipes shall be continuously and permanently low water velocities and where there is no excessive local
marked with the following particulars: turbulence.
– manufacturer’s marking; Aluminium brass and copper-nickel-iron alloy
pipes give good service in reasonably clean overboard water.
– standard specification number;
For service with polluted river or harbour waters, copper-
– outside diameter and wall thickness of pipe; nickel iron alloy pipes with at least 10% nickel are
– year of manufacture. preferable. Alpha brasses, i.e. those containing 70% or more
Valves and connecting pieces made of plastic shall, copper, must be inhibited effectively against dezincification
as a minimum requirement, be marked with the by suitable additions to the composition. Alpha beta-brasses,
manufacturer’s marking and the outside diameter of the pipe. i.e. those containing less than 70% copper, should not be
used for pipes and fittings.

68 June 2018
7.2.9.3 Water velocity 7.2.9.4.2 Water with a slight salt content should not be left
The water velocity in the pipes of the materials below should stagnant for long periods in mild steel pipes. Low salinity and
normally be not less than about 1,0 m/s in order to avoid the limited supply of oxygen in such conditions promote the
fouling and subsequent pitting, but should not be greater than formation of black iron oxide, and this may give rise to
the following: severe pitting. Where stagnant conditions are unavoidable,
steel pipes should be galvanized, or pipes of suitable non-
– cast iron and GRP 5,0 m/s; ferrous material used.
– galvanized steel 3,0 m/s; 7.2.9.4.3 Brass fittings and flanges in contact with water
– aluminium brass 3,0 m/s; should be made of an alpha-brass effectively inhibited against
– 90/10 copper-nickel-iron 3,5 m/s; dezincification by suitable additions to the composition.
– 70/30 copper-nickel 5,0 m/s. 7.2.10 Testing of materials
As a general rule, the water velocity in copper pipes
should not exceed 1,0 m/s. 7.2.10.1 For piping systems belonging to Class I and II, tests
in accordance with the Rules, Part 25 – Metallic Materials
7.2.9.4 Metal pipes for fresh water services and under Register supervision shall be carried out in
7.2.9.4.1 Mild steel or copper pipes are normally satisfactory accordance with Table 7.2.10-1.
for service in fresh water applications. Hot fresh water, 7.2.10.2 Material manufacturers
however, may promote corrosion of mild steel pipes unless
the hardness and PH of the water are controlled. Pipes, elbows, fittings, valve and pump casings,
flanges and semi-finished products intended to be used in
pipe Class I and II shall be manufactured by the Register
approved manufacturers. For the use in pipe Class III piping
systems an approval according to other recognized standards
may be accepted.

June 2018 69
Table 7.2.10-1
Approved materials and types of material certificates
Design Pipe Nominal diameter Type of certificate 2)

Type of component Approved material
temperature class DN, [mm] A B C
Steel,
Copper, DN ˃ 50 x – –
1)
Pipes , I, II
Copper alloys,
pipe elbows, –
fittings
Aluminium, DN ≤ 50 – x –
Aluminium alloys,
Plastics III all – – x
Steel, DN ˃ 100 x – –
Cast steel, > 300°C I, II
Nodular cast iron DN ≤ 100 – x –
Copper, DN ˃ 100 x – –
> 225°C I, II
Copper alloys DN ≤ 100 – x –
p w ∙DN ˃ 250 or
Steel, x – –
DN ˃ 250
Cast steel, ≤ 300°C I, II
p w ∙DN ≤ 250 and
Nodular cast iron – x –
Valves 1), DN ≤ 250
flanges Steel,
Cast steel,
– III all – – x
Nodular cast iron,
Grey cast iron
Copper, p w ∙DN ˃ 150 x – –
≤ 225°C I, II
Copper alloys p w ∙DN ≤ 150 – x –
Aluminium, p w ∙DN ˃ 150 x – –
≤ 200°C I, II
Aluminium alloys p w ∙DN ≤ 150 – x –
According to Type
Plastics III all – – x
approval certificate
I x – –
Pump casings II – x –
III – – x
Semi-finished I, II – – x –
products, screw and –
other components III – – – x
where:
pw = maximum permissible working pressure, [MPa].
Notes:
1) Casings of valves and pipes fitted on vessel’s side and bottom, bodies of valves fitted on collision bulkhead and bodies of valves
fitted on fuel and lubricating oil tanks and under static pressure shall be included in pipe Class II (see 7.1.1.4). For DN ≥ 100 mm:
type of certificate A (type 3.2) and for DN ˂ 100 mm: type of certificate B (type 3.1) apply.
2) A - Register’s certificate for material (EN 10204, type 3.2);
B - Manufacturer inspection certificate (type 3.1);
C - Manufacturer test report (type 2.2).
7.3 Hydraulic tests 7.3.1.3 Maximum permissible working pressure, pw

This is the maximum permissible internal or
7.3.1 General and definitions external working pressure for a component or piping system
7.3.1.1 The piping systems, in general, and their with regard to the materials used, piping design requirements,
components shall be a subject to relevant hydraulic test the working temperature and undisturbed operation.
performed in accordance with the provision of this Section. 7.3.1.4 Nominal pressure, pn
7.3.1.2 The pneumatic tests shall be avoided as much as This is the term applied to a selected pressure
possible. Where such testing is absolutely necessary in lieu of temperature relation used for the standardization of structural
the hydrostatic pressure test, relevant procedure shall be components. In general, the numerical value of the nominal
submitted to the Register for acceptance prior to testing. pressure for a standardized component made of the material

70 June 2018
specified in the standard will correspond to the maximum 7.3.4 Pressure testing of valves
permissible working pressure p w at 20°C.
7.3.4.1 The following valves shall be subjected in the
7.3.1.5 Test pressure, pt manufacturer’s works to a hydraulic pressure test in the
This is the pressure to which components or piping presence of the Register:
systems are subjected for testing purposes. – valves of pipe Classes I and II to 1,5∙p;
7.3.1.6 Design pressure, p – valves on the vessel’s side and bottom to not less than 0,5
MPa.
This is the maximum permissible working pressure
p w for which a component or piping system is designed with Shut-off devices of the above type shall be
regard to its mechanical characteristics. In general, the design additionally tested for tightness with the 1,1 nominal pressure
pressure is the maximum permissible working pressure at pn.
which the safety equipment will interfere (e.g. activation of 7.3.4.2 The test pressure need not be more than 7,0 MPa in
safety valves, opening of return lines of pumps, operating of excess of the nominal pressure.
overpressure safety arrangements, opening of relief valves) or
at which the pumps will operate against closed valves. 7.3.4.3 Butterfly valves fitted on the vessel’s side and
bottom (see 7.7.2.6) shall also be hydrostatically tested at a
7.3.2 Pressure tests of piping before assembly on pressure equal to 0,5 MPa applied independently on each side
board of the closed disc.
7.3.2.1 All Class I and II pipes, as well as steam lines, feed 7.3.4.4 The valves and fittings intended for a design
water pressure pipes, compressed air and fuel lines having a pressure of 0,1 MPa and less, as well as for vacuum, shall be
design pressure p greater than 0,35 MPa (irrespective of tested by a pressure not less than 0,2 MPa.
Class) together with their associated fittings, connecting
pieces, branches and bends, after completion of manufacture 7.3.4.5 For testing of valves standard EN 12266-1 may be
but before insulation and coating, if this is provided, shall be used.
subjected to a hydraulic pressure test, in the presence of the
Register, at the following value of pressure:
7.4 Pipelines
t 1,5 ⋅ p , [ MPa ]
p= 7.4.1 Minimum wall thickness
(7.3.2-1)
7.4.1.1 The pipe thicknesses stated in Table 7.4.1-1 to
where: Table 7.4.1-4 are the assigned minimum thicknesses.
p = the design pressure defined in 7.3.1.6, [MPa].
7.4.1.2 Bilge and ballast pipes and fittings of nodular cast
7.3.2.2 Where for technical reasons it is not possible to iron shall have minimum wall thickness not less than:
carry out complete hydraulic pressure tests on all sections of
piping before assembly on board, proposals shall be s=K ⋅ ( 0,5 + 0,001 ⋅ DN ) , [ mm ] (7.4.1-1)
submitted to the Register for approval for testing pipe where:
connections on board, particularly in respect of welding DN = nominal diameter, [mm];
seams.
K = 9 for pipes;
7.3.2.3 When the hydraulic pressure test of piping is = 12 for fittings other than tees;
carried out on board, these tests may be conducted in
conjunction with the tests required under 7.3.3. = 14 for tees.
7.3.2.4 Pressure testing of a small bore pipes with a 7.4.2 Bending radius
nominal diameter less than 15,0 mm of any Class may be 7.4.2.1 Radius of bend means the inner, i.e. the least radius
omitted at the Register discretion depending on the of pipe curvature after bending. The bending process shall be
application of these pipes. such as not to have a detrimental influence on the
7.3.3 Pressure tests of piping after assembly on board characteristics of the materials or on the strength of the pipes.
7.3.3.1 After assembly on board, all pipelines covered by 7.4.2.2 Inner radius of bend of steel, copper and aluminium
these requirements shall be subjected to a tightness test in the pipes subjected to a pressure exceeding 0,5 MPa or
presence of the Register. temperatures above 60°C, as well as bending radius of pipes
with allowance for thermal expansion shall be at least 2,5∙d
In general, all pipe systems shall be tested for (where d is the outside diameter of pipe). If, in process of
leakage under operational conditions. If necessary, special bending, no thinning of the pipe wall is observed, the
techniques other than hydraulic pressure tests shall be specified radius may be reduced.
applied.
7.4.2.3 Radius of bend of pipes operating under conditions
7.3.3.2 Heating coils in tanks and pipelines for fuels shall other than those specified above may be reduced up to 1,5∙d,
be tested to not less than 1,5∙p but in no case less than 0,4 provided machine bending is applied.
MPa.
7.3.3.3 Liquefied gas process piping systems shall be leak
tested (by air, halides, etc.) to a pressure depending on the
leak detection method applied.

June 2018 71
Table 7.4.1-1
Minimum wall thickness for steel pipes
Air, overflow and Bilge, ballast and Bilge, air, overflow and sounding pipes through
External diameter Pipes in
sounding pipes for general river ballast or fuel oil tanks, ballast lines through fuel
D, [mm] general
structural tanks water pipes oil tanks and fuel oil lines through ballast tanks
10,2 < D ≤ 12 1,6
13,5 < D ≤ 17,2 1,8
20,0 2,0
21,3 < D ≤ 25,0 2,0 3,2
26,9 < D ≤ 33,7 2,0 3,2
38,0 < D ≤ 44,5 2,0 4,5 3,6 6,3
48,3 2,3 4,5 3,6 6,3
51,0 < D ≤ 63,5 2,3 4,5 4,0 6,3
70,0 2,6 4,5 4,0 6,3
76,1 < D ≤ 82,5 2,6 4,5 4,5 6,3
88,9 < D ≤ 108,0 2,9 4,5 4,5 7,1
114,3 < D ≤ 127,0 3,2 4,5 4,5 8,0
133,0 < D ≤ 139,7 3,6 4,5 4,5 8,0
152,4 < D ≤ 168,3 4,0 4,5 4,5 8,8
177,8 4,5 5,0 5,0 8,8
193,7 4,5 5,4 5,4 8,8
219,1 4,5 5,9 5,9 8,8
244,5 < D ≤ 273,0 5,0 6,3 6,3 8,8
289,5 < D ≤ 368,0 5,6 6,3 6,3 8,8
406,4 < D ≤ 457,0 6,3 6,3 6,3 8,8
General notes:
• Diameter and thickness according to other national or international standards may be accepted.
• The minimum thicknesses listed in this Table are the nominal wall thickness. No allowance needs to be made for negative
tolerance or for reduction in thickness due to bending.
• The wall thickness of pipes within cargo oil and ballast tanks in systems for remote control of valves shall be no less than 4,0 mm.
• Exhaust gas pipe minimum wall thickness will be subject to special consideration by the Register.
• For sounding pipes the minimum wall thicknesses in column 3 is intended to apply only to the part outside the tank.
• For threaded pipes, where permitted, the minimum wall thickness shall be measured at the bottom of the thread.
• The minimum wall thickness for cargo oil lines will be subject to special consideration by the Register.
• Where pipes and any integral pipe joints are protected against corrosion by means of coating, lining etc. at the discretion of the
Register, the thickness may be reduced by not more than 1,0 mm.
• For stainless steel pipes, the minimum wall thickness shall be specially considered, but it shall not be less than given in Table
7.4.1-3.
Table 7.4.1-2 Table 7.4.1-3

Minimum wall thickness for pipes of copper and copper Minimum wall thickness for stainless steel pipes
alloys
Minimum wall thickness,
External diameter D, [mm]
External diameter D, Minimum wall thickness, [mm] [mm]
[mm] Copper Copper alloy 10,2 < D ≤ 17,2 1,0
D ≤ 10,0 1,0 0,8 21,3 < D ≤ 48,3 1,6
10,0 < D ≤ 20,0 1,2 1,0 60,3 < D ≤ 88,9 2,0
20,0 < D ≤ 44,5 1,5 1,2 114,3 < D ≤ 168,3 2,3
44,5 < D ≤ 76,1 2,0 1,5 219,1 2,6
76,1 < D ≤ 108,0 2,5 2,0 273,0 2,9
108,0 < D ≤ 159,0 3,0 2,5 323,9 < D ≤ 406,4 3,6
159,0 < D ≤ 267,0 3,5 3,0 D > 406,4 4,0
267,0 < D ≤ 470,0 4,0 3,5 General notes:
470,0 < D ≤ 508,0 4,5 4,0 • The external diameters and thickness have been selected
General notes: from ISO - Standard 1127. Diameter and thicknesses
• A different thickness may be considered by the Register on according to other National or International Standards may
a case by case basis, provided that it complies with be accepted. For pipes covered by other standards,
recognized standards. thickness slightly less may be accepted.

72 June 2018
Table 7.4.1-4 Aluminium-brass pipes shall be stress-relieved or

Minimum wall thickness for aluminium and aluminium alloy soft annealed at a temperature of 350°C to 400°C or 600°C to
pipes 650°C respectively, after cold bending.
7.4.3.4.2 Steel
Minimum wall thickness,
External diameter D, [mm] a) After hot bending carried out within the temperature
[mm]
range specified in 7.4.3.3, the following applies:
D ≤ 10,0 1,5
– for C, C-Mn and C-Mo steels, no subsequent heat
12,0 < D ≤ 38,0 2,0
treatment is required;
43,0 < D ≤ 57,0 2,5
76,0 < D ≤ 89,0 3,0 – for Cr-Mo and C-Mo-V steels, a subsequent stress
108,0 < D ≤ 133,0 4,0 relieving heat treatment in accordance with Table
159,0 < D ≤ 194,0 4,5 7.4.3-1 is required;
219,0 < D ≤ 273,0 5,0 b) after hot bending performed outside the temperature
D > 273,0 5,5 range specified in 7.4.3.3, a subsequent new heat
General notes: treatment in accordance with Table 7.4.3-2 is required for
• A different thickness may be considered by the Register on all grades;
a case by case basis, provided that it complies with c) after cold bending at a radius lower than 4 times the
recognized standards. external diameter of the pipe (see 7.4.3.1), a heat
• For river water pipes, the minimum thickness is not to be treatment in accordance with Table 7.4.3-2 is required.
less than 5,0 mm.
Table 7.4.3-1
7.4.3 Bending of pipes Heat treatment temperature
7.4.3.1 Application
This Item applies to pipes made of: Stress relief
Thickness of
treatment
– alloy or non-alloy steels; Type of steel thicker part,
temperature,
[mm]
– copper and copper alloys. [°C]
All grades of pipes may be cold formed when r > C and C-Mn steels t ≥ 15 1), 2) 550 ÷ 620
4∙d (where r is the mean bending radius and d is the outside 0,3 Mo t ≥ 15 1) 580 ÷ 640
diameter of pipe). 1 Cr 0,5 Mo t≥8 620 ÷ 680
2,25 Cr 1 Mo and
7.4.3.2 Acceptance criteria any 3) 650 ÷ 720
0,5 Cr 0,5 Mo 0,25 V
The pipes shall be bent in such a way that, in each Notes:
transverse section, the difference between the maximum and 1) Where steels with specified Charpy V notch impact
minimum diameters after bending does not exceed 10% of properties at low temperature are used, the thickness
the mean diameter; higher values, but not exceeding 15%, above which post-weld heat treatment shall be applied
may be permitted in the case of pipes which are not subjected may be increased, subject to the special agreement of the
in service to appreciable bending stresses due to thermal Register.
expansion or contraction. The bending shall be such that the 2) For C and C-Mn steels, stress relieving heat treatment
depth of the corrugations is as small as possible and does not may be omitted up to 30,0 mm thickness, subject to the
exceed 5% of their length. special agreement of the Register.
7.4.3.3 Hot bending 3) For 2,25 Cr 1 Mo and 0,5 Cr 0,5 Mo 0,25 V grade steels,
heat treatment may be omitted for pipes having thickness
In the case of hot bending, all arrangements shall be lower than 8,0 mm, diameter not exceeding 100,0 mm and
made to permit careful checking of the metal temperature and service temperature not exceeding 450°C.
to prevent rapid cooling, especially for alloy steels.
Hot bending shall, in general, be carried out in the
Table 7.4.3-2
temperature range 850°C to 1000°C for all steel grades; Heat treatment after bending
however, a decreased temperature down to 750°C may be
accepted during the forming process.
Heat treatment and
Hot forming of austenitic stainless steel shall be Type of steel
temperature, [°C]
carried out in the temperature range 850°C to 1150°C.
Carbon and carbon-manganese Normalising, 880°C ÷ 940°C
7.4.3.4 Heat treatment of pipes after bending Carbon-molybdenum,
Normalising, 900°C ÷ 940°C
The heat treatments shall not impair the specified (0,3 Mo)
properties of the material. Chromium-molybdenum, Normalising, 900°C ÷ 960°C
(1 Cr 0,5 Mo) Tempering, 640°C ÷ 720°C
7.4.3.4.1 Copper and copper alloy Chromium-molybdenum, Normalising, 900°C ÷ 960°C
Copper and copper alloy pipes shall be suitably (2,25 Cr 1 Mo) Tempering, 650°C ÷ 780°C
annealed after cold bending if their external diameter exceeds Chromium-molybdenum-
Normalising, 930°C ÷ 980°C
50,0 mm. vanadium
Tempering, 670°C ÷ 720°C
(0,5 Cr 0,5 Mo 0,25 V)

June 2018 73
7.4.3.4.3 The stress relieving heat treatment shall consist of 7.4.6 Hose assemblies
heating the piping slowly and uniformly to a temperature
within the given range, soaking at this temperature for a 7.4.6.1 General and definitions
suitable period, in general one hour per 25,0 mm of thickness 7.4.6.1.1 Hose assemblies consist of short length of metallic
with minimum half an hour, cooling slowly and uniformly in or non-metallic hoses completed with end fittings ready for
the furnace to a temperature not exceeding 400°C and installation. Hose assemblies including their couplings shall
subsequently cooling in still air. be suitable for media, pressures and temperatures they are
For quenched and tempered steel, the heat designed for.
treatment temperature shall not be higher than t T = -20°C 7.4.6.1.2 The selection of hose assemblies shall be based on
where t T is the temperature of the final tempering treatment the maximum permissible working pressure of the system
of the material. concerned. A pressure of 0,5 MPa shall be considered as the
minimum working pressure.
7.4.4 Protection of piping systems against
overpressure 7.4.6.1.3 High-pressure hose assemblies made of non-
metallic materials
7.4.4.1 The following piping systems shall be fitted with Hose assemblies which are suitable for use in
safety valves to avoid unallowable overpressures: systems with distinct dynamic load characteristics.
– piping systems and valves in which liquids can be
enclosed and heated; 7.4.6.1.4 Low-pressure hose assemblies made of non-
metallic materials
– piping systems which may be exposed in service to
pressures in excess of the design pressure. Hose assemblies which are suitable for use in
systems with predominant static load characteristics.
Safety valves must be capable of discharging the
medium at a maximum pressure increase of 10%. Safety 7.4.6.1.5 Burst pressure
valves shall be type approved and sealed after setting. Burst pressure is the internal static pressure at
7.4.4.2 Where provision is made for a reducing valve on which a hose assembly will be destroyed.
the pipeline, a pressure gauge and a safety valve shall be 7.4.6.1.6 Flexible hoses shall be designed and constructed in
installed on the lower pressure side. An arrangement for by- accordance with recognized National or International
passing reducing valve is permitted. standards acceptable to the Register. The number of flexible
hoses shall be kept to a minimum. Flexible hoses shall be
7.4.4.3 Air escaping from the pressure relief (safety) valves installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction.
of the pressurised air receivers installed in the engine rooms
shall be led from the pressure relief valves to the open air. Flexible hoses shall not be used to compensate for
misalignment between sections of piping.
Open escape of fuel oil and lubrication oil from
safety valves is not permitted. 7.4.6.1.7 Flexible hose assemblies may be accepted for use
in fuel oil, lubricating, hydraulic and thermal oil systems,
7.4.5 Protection against corrosion fresh water and river water cooling systems, compressed air
systems, bilge and ballast systems and Class III steam
7.4.5.1 Steel pipes of bilge, ballast and river water systems. Flexible hoses in high-pressure fuel oil injection
(outboard water) systems as well as of air, sounding and systems are not accepted.
overflow pipes of water tanks and of alternating water
ballast-fuel oil tanks, gas vent pipes of cargo tanks and air 7.4.6.1.8 Flexible hoses may only be used when necessary to
pipes of cofferdams in tank vessels, shall be protected against admit relative movements between machinery and fixed
corrosion and protective coatings shall be applied upon piping systems. The hoses with couplings shall be type
completion of bending, forming and welding works. The approved. Manufacturers of hose assemblies shall be
method of protection shall be approved by the Register. approved by the Register.
7.4.6.1.9 Flexible hoses shall be fire-resistant, if they are
7.4.5.2 Where bottom and side fittings are made of copper used in:
alloys, provision shall be made for protection of shell plating
and all elements which are in contact with such fittings, – pipes conveying fuel, lubricating and hydraulic oil;
against corrosion. – pipes connected with openings in shell plating;
7.4.5.3 Where galvanized river water pipes are connected – pipes for other flammable oil products;
with fittings, pump casings, aggregates and heat exchangers – pipes where damage to the joint may be a danger to the
made of copper alloys, provision shall be made for protection vessel or persons on board.
against contact corrosion. Flexible hoses are considered fire resistant when
7.4.5.4 Where pipes are protected against corrosion by connected to pipe line filled with water, after being subjected
special protective coatings, e.g. hot-dip galvanising, rubber to fire for 30 minutes at a temperature of 800°C while water
lining, etc., it shall be ensured that the protective coating will at the maximum service pressure is circulated inside the pipe
not be damaged during installation. and temperature at the outlets shall not be less than 80°C, still
remain watertight.
Fire resistance shall be demonstrated by testing to
ISO 15540 and ISO 15541.

74 June 2018
7.4.6.1.10 Use of hose clamps and similar types of end 7.4.6.3 Installation
attachments shall not be used for flexible hoses in piping 7.4.6.3.1 Flexible hoses shall be installed in clearly visible
systems for steam, flammable media, starting air systems or and readily accessible locations. Flexible hoses shall be
for river water systems where failure may result in flooding. limited to a length necessary to provide for relative
In other piping systems (fresh water system, charging and movement between fixed and flexibly mounted items of
scavenging air lines), the use of hose clamps may be accepted machinery/equipment or systems.
where the working pressure is less than 0,5 MPa. The clips
shall be of stainless steel and doubled at each connection. 7.4.6.3.2 Flexible hose assemblies are not to be installed
Means shall be provided to prevent the pipe from pulling out where they may be subjected to torsion deformation
of the hose when under pressure. (twisting) under normal operating conditions. The minimum
bending radius of installed flexible hoses is not to be less
7.4.6.1.11 For hoses of non-metallic materials than specified by the manufacturers.
documentation, showing the suitability of the hose for its
intended use shall be submitted for approval. 7.4.6.3.3 Non-metallic hose assemblies are installed in the
vicinity of hot components they shall be provided with type
7.4.6.1.12 Flexible hoses constructed of rubber materials approved heat-protection sleeves. In case of flammable fluids
and intended for use in bilge, ballast, compressed air, fuel oil, the heat-protection sleeve shall be applied such that in case of
lubricating, hydraulic and thermal oil systems shall a hose or end fitting leakage oil spray on hot surfaces will not
incorporate a single, double or more, closely woven integral occur.
wire braid or other suitable material reinforcement.
Flexible hoses of plastics materials for the same 7.4.6.4 Marking of hose assemblies
purposes, such as Teflon or Nylon, which are unable to be Hose assemblies shall be permanently marked to
reinforced by incorporating closely woven integral wire ensure traceability to the hose assembly manufacturer,
braid, shall have suitable material reinforcement as far as production date and product type. The scope of marking
practicable. should be as follows:
Where rubber or plastics materials hoses shall be – manufacturer sign;
used in oil supply lines to burners, the hoses shall have – date of manufacture (month/year);
external wire braid protection in addition to the reinforcement
– product type according to type approval certificate;
mentioned above. Flexible hoses for use in steam systems
shall be of metallic construction. – nominal diameter;
7.4.6.1.13 Where a flexible hose assembly is made up of – maximum permissible working pressure or nominal
items from different manufacturers, the components shall be pressure;
clearly identified and traceable to evidence of prototype – maximum permissible working temperature.
testing.
7.4.7 Types of connections
7.4.6.1.14 Requirements of this Head may also be applied
to temporarily-connected flexible hoses or hoses of portable 7.4.7.1 Direct connections of pipe lengths may be made by
equipment. direct welding, flanges, threaded joints or mechanical joints,
and should be to a recognized standard or of a design proven
7.4.6.2 Testing
to be suitable for the intended purpose and acceptable to the
7.4.6.2.1 For non-metallic high-pressure hose assemblies the Register.
test pressure is 2 times the maximum permissible working
pressure. For non-metallic low pressure hose assemblies the 7.4.7.2 The expression “mechanical joints” (see the Rules,
test pressure is 1,5 times the maximum permissible working Part 9 – Machinery, 1.3.7.4 and 1.3.7.5) means devices
pressure respectively the nominal pressure. Minimum test intended for direct connection of pipe lengths other than by
pressure has to be at least 1,0 MPa. welding, flanges or threaded joints.
7.4.6.2.2 For metallic hose assemblies the test pressure is 1,5 7.4.7.3 Welded connections
times the maximum permissible working pressure The welding of joints shall be carried out by
respectively the nominal pressure. Minimum test pressure has qualified welders using approved welding procedure
to be at least 1,0 MPa. specifications (WPS) and type approved welding
7.4.6.2.3 For non-metallic as well as metallic hose consumables. Welding of joints belonging to Class I and
assemblies the burst pressure shall be at least 4 times the Class II piping systems, requires approval based on a welding
maximum permissible working pressure or the nominal procedure qualification test (PQR).
pressure. Excepted hereof are non-metallic hose assemblies .1 But welded joints
with a maximum permissible working pressure or nominal
pressure of not more than 2,0 MPa. For such components the Butt welded joints shall be of full penetration type, in
burst pressure has to be at least 3 times the maximum general, with or without special provision for a high
permissible working pressure or the nominal pressure. quality of root side.
For hose assemblies in process and cargo piping for Butt welded joints with special provision for a high
gas and chemical tank vessels (type G and C) the burst quality of root side may be used for piping of any Class,
pressure is required to be at least 5 times the maximum any outside diameter.
permissible working pressure. Butt welded joints without special provision for a high
quality of root side may be used for piping systems of
Class II and III irrespective of outside diameter.

June 2018 75
The expression “special provision for a high quality of fatigue, severe erosion or crevice corrosion is expected to
root side” means that butt welds were accomplished as occur.
double welded or by use of a backing strip or inert gas Threaded joints for direct connectors of pipe
back-up on first pass, or other similar methods accepted lengths with tapered thread shall be permitted for:
by the Register.
a) Class I, outside diameter not more than 33,7 mm;
.2 Slip-on sleeve and socket welded joints
b) Class II and Class III, outside diameter not more than
Slip-on sleeve and socket welded joints shall have 60,3 mm.
sleeves, sockets and weldments of adequate dimensions
conforming to the Register Rules or recognized standard. Threaded joints with parallel thread shall be
permitted for Class III, diameter not more than 60,3 mm.
Slip-on sleeve socket welded joints may be used in Class
III systems, any outside diameter. In particular cases, sizes in excess of those
mentioned above may be accepted by the Register if in
In particular cases, slip-on sleeve and socket welded compliance with a recognized national and/or international
joints may be permitted by the Register for piping standard.
systems Class I and II having outside diameter ≤ 88,9
mm except for piping systems conveying toxic media or 7.4.7.6 Welding and non-destructive tests of welded
services where fatigue, severe erosion or crevice joints
corrosion is expected to occur. 7.4.7.6.1 For piping systems belonging to Class I and II,
Slip-on sleeve and socket welded joints in stainless steel welding may only be executed by companies approved by the
pipes shall be subject to the Register’s consideration on a Register.
case by case basis. 7.4.7.6.2 Welded joints of pipes shall be made by means of
electric arc or oxyacetylene welding, or any other previously
7.4.7.4 Flange connections
approved process.
.1 The dimensions and configuration of flanges and bolts
When the design pressure exceeds 0,7 MPa,
shall be chosen in accordance with a standards
oxyacetylene welding is not permitted for pipes with an
recognized by the Register. Flanges may be cut from
external diameter greater than 100,0 mm or a thickness
plates or may be forged or cast.
exceeding 6,0 mm.
Gaskets shall be suitable for the media being conveyed
7.4.7.6.3 The location of welded joints shall be such that as
under design pressure and temperature conditions and
many as possible can be made in a workshop. The location of
their dimensions and configuration shall be in accordance
welded joints to be made on board shall be so determined as
with recognized standards.
to permit their joining and inspection in satisfactory
For non-standard flanges the dimensions of flanges and conditions.
bolts shall be subject to special consideration by the
7.4.7.6.4 If the difference of thickness between pipes to be
Register. Flanges made of non-ferrous metals may be
butt welded exceeds 10% of the thickness of the thinner pipe
used in accordance with the relevant standards and within
plus 1,0 mm, subject to a maximum of 4,0 mm, the thicker
the limits laid down in the approvals;
pipe shall be thinned down to the thickness of the thinner
.2 examples of flange attachments are shown in Figure pipe on a length at least equal to 4 times the offset, including
7.4.7-1. However, other types of flange attachments may the width of the weld if so desired.
be considered by the Register on a case by case basis;
7.4.7.6.5 Edge preparation shall be in accordance with
.3 flange attachments shall be in accordance with national recognized standards and/or approved drawings. The
or international standards that are applicable to the piping preparation of the edges shall be preferably carried out by
system and shall recognized the boundary fluids, design mechanical means. When flame cutting is used, care should
pressure and temperature conditions, external or cyclic be taken to remove the oxide scales and any notch due to
loading and location, as shown in Table 7.4.7-1. irregular cutting by matching grinding or chipping back to
NOTE: For type D, the pipe and flange shall be screwed sound metal.
with a tapered thread and the diameter of the screw portion 7.4.7.6.6 Tack welds should be made with an electrode
of the pipe over the thread shall not be appreciably less than suitable for the base metal; tack welds which form part of the
the outside diameter of the unthreaded pipe. For certain finished weld should be made using approved procedures.
types of thread, after the flange has been screwed hard home, When welding materials require preheating, the same
the pipe shall be expanded into the flange. preheating should be applied during tack welding.
7.4.7.5 Slip-on threaded joints 7.4.7.6.7 After repair welding has been performed, the
complete weld shall be subjected to at least to the same non-
Slip-on threaded joints having pipe threads where destructive method(s) as specified for the original weld.
pressure-tight joints are made on the threads with parallel or
tapered threads, shall comply with requirements of a 7.4.7.6.8 For non-magnetic materials dye-penetrant testing
recognized national or international standard. (PT) shall be used in lieu of magnetic particle examination.
Slipped-on threaded joints may be used for outside 7.4.7.6.9 Non-destructive tests of welded joints shall be
diameters as stated below except for piping systems made in accordance with the Rules, Part 26 – Welding, 2.3
conveying toxic or flammable media or services where and 3.3.

76 June 2018
A B C D E
A1 B1 C1 E1
A2 B2 C2 E2
B3 C3
Figure 7.4.7-1
Examples of flange attachments
Table 7.4.7-1
Application of flange connections depending upon the Class of piping and kind of fluids
Toxic, corrosive and

Steam and Lubricating oil Other
combustible media,
Pipe thermal oils and fuel oil media
liquefied gases (LG)
Class
Flange Flange Flange Flange
p 4), [MPa] Temperature Temperature
type type type type
> 1,0 A > 400°C A > 400°C A
I A-B
≤ 1,0 A-B 1) ≤ 400°C A-B 1) ≤ 400°C A-B
> 250°C A-B-C > 250°C A-B-C
II - A-B-C A-B-C-E2 3)
≤ 250°C A-B-C-D-E2 ≤ 250°C A-B-C-D-E2
III - - - A-B-C-D-E2 A-B-C-E2 - A-B-C-D-E2-E1 2)
Notes:
1) Type B for outside diameter not more than 150,0 mm, only.
2) Type E1 for water pipes and open ended lines, only.
3) Type E2 for oil pipes with t < 150°C and p < 1,6 MPa, only.
4) Design pressure, p, [MPa].
protect the insulation from being impregnated with

7.4.8 Protection of high temperature pipes and flammable oils. Particular attention shall be paid to lagging in
components way of flanges.
All pipes and other components where the
temperature may exceed 220°C shall be efficiently insulated
(see 1.3.8). Where necessary, precautions shall be taken to

June 2018 77
7.4.9 Provision for expansion which the accumulation of liquids during operation could
cause damage shall be equipped with special drain
7.4.9.1 Piping systems shall be so designed and pipes so arrangements.
fixed as to allow for relative movement between pipes and
the vessel’s structure, having due regard to the: 7.6 Pipe valves and fittings, pumps and
– temperature of the fluid conveyed; expansion bellows
– coefficient of thermal expansion of the pipes material;
7.6.1 Construction
– deformation of the vessel’s hull.
7.6.1.1 Valves and fittings are normally to be built in
7.4.9.2 All pipes subject to thermal expansion and those accordance with a recognized standard (DIN, EN, JIS, ASME
which, due to their length, may be affected by deformation of and API). Otherwise, they are subject to special consideration
the hull, shall be fitted with expansion pieces or bends. for approval by the Register (see the Rules, Part 1 –
7.4.9.3 Pipes intended for carrying hot media and having Classification and Surveys, Chapter II, Table 3.2-10, item
considerable longitudinal extension shall have thermal 22.).
compensators or as many bends as will provide adequate self- 7.6.1.2 Threaded covers may be used for valves of
compensation of the pipeline. diameter up to 32,0 mm inclusive, and shall be reliably
Internal radius of bending shall not be less than secured. Nut of the cock plug shall be protected against
specified in 7.4.2. spontaneous unscrewing.
7.5 Layout, marking and installation 7.6.1.3 Valve bodies of nominal size DN50 and larger shall
be self-draining or be equipped with drain plug.
7.5.1 Piping systems shall consist of permanently
7.6.1.4 Valves, cocks and other accessories shall, in
installed pipes and fittings connected to the vessel’s structure
general, be arranged so that they are easily visible and
by means of collars or similar devices.
accessible for manoeuvring, control and maintenance. They
7.5.2 Shipyards shall take care that: shall be installed in such a way as to operate properly.
a) the arrangement of supports and collars shall be such that Hand-operated valves shall be closed by turning in
pipes and flanges are not subjected to abnormal bending the clockwise direction.
stresses, taking into account their own mass, the metal 7.6.1.5 When the valves are designed for one way flow, the
they are made of, and the nature and characteristics of the direction of flow shall be clearly and legible marked on the
fluid they convey, as well as the contractions and valve. The direction may be cast into the valve housing.
expansions to which they are subjected;
b) heavy components in the piping system, such as valves, 7.6.1.6 Indicators shall be provided showing the
shall be independently supported. open/closed position of valves unless their position is shown
by other means.
7.5.3 Piping systems shall be adequately identified
7.6.1.7 Valves and fittings in piping systems shall be
according to their purpose. Valves shall be permanently and
compatible with the pipes to which they are attached in
clearly marked. The marking shall comprise at least the
respect of their strength (see 7.3.1.6 for design pressure) and
following details:
shall be suitable for effective operation at the maximum
– material of valve body; working pressure they will experience in service.
– nominal diameter;
7.6.1.8 If the body or some other important part of the
– nominal pressure. armature is made of several parts, such as housing separately
and flanges separately and are joined by thread, the
7.5.4 Pipe penetrations leading through bulkheads/decks connections shall not be secured against loosening by Loctite
and tank walls shall be water and oil tight. Bolts through or other similar means. The connections shall be performed
bulkheads are not permitted. Holes for fastening screws shall by tapered threads, as shown in Figure 7.4.7-1 “D”.
not be drilled in the tank walls.
7.6.1.9 Connecting of the ball valves body from several
7.5.5 Sealing systems for pipes penetrating through pieces may be accepted by bolting or other suitable way,
watertight bulkheads and decks as well as through fire provided that metal to metal sealing is ensured.
divisions shall be approved by the Register unless the pipe is
welded into the bulkhead/deck. 7.6.1.10 Manually operated butterfly valves, which are
designed for throttling service, shall be equipped with a
7.5.6 In machinery spaces and tunnels, the cocks, valves locking arrangement that holds the disc in any relevant
and other accessories of the fluid lines referred to in this position.
Section shall be placed:
7.6.2 Pumps
– above the floor (see 7.14.3.9); or
– when this is not possible, immediately under the floor, 7.6.2.1 Displacement pumps must be equipped with
provided provision is made for their easy access and sufficiently dimensioned relief valves without shutoff to
control in service. prevent any excessive overpressure in the pump housing.
7.5.7 Piping systems shall be so arranged that they can be 7.6.2.2 Rotary pumps must be capable of being operated
completely emptied, drained and vented. Piping systems in without damage even when the delivery line is closed.

78 June 2018
7.6.2.3 Pumps mounted in parallel shall be protected Bilge lines valves and control lines shall be located
against overloading by means of non-return valves fitted at as far as possible from the bottom and sides of the vessel.
the outlet side. The requirements stated here above also apply here
to the location of valves and control lines.
7.6.3 Arrangement and installation of valves, fittings
and instruments 7.6.4.3.2 Where remote controlled valves are arranged inside
the ballast tanks, the valves should always be located in the
7.6.3.1 Valves and fittings on watertight bulkheads shall be tank adjoining that to which they relate.
secured by studs screws into reinforced steel flange (pad)
7.6.4.3.3 Remote controlled valves mounted on high and
welded to the bulkhead. It is permitted to install short pipes
wing fuel tanks shall be capable of being closed from outside
welded to the flanges between valves and bulkheads.
the compartment in which they are installed.
The thread stud holes shall not be deeper than the
7.6.4.3.4 Where remote controlled valves are arranged inside
thickness of welded flange (see 7.8.1.4).
cargo tanks, valves should always be fitted in the tank
7.6.3.2 Valve chests and manual-controlled valves shall be adjoining that to which they relate. A direct arrangement of
placed in easy accessible places. the remote controlled valves in the tanks concerned is
permitted only if each tank is fitted with two suction lines
7.6.3.3 Instruments for control and measurement in fuel oil each of which is provided with a remote controlled valve.
and lubricating oil systems shall be provided with valves or
cocks as to be separated from pipeline. 7.6.4.4 Control stands
7.6.3.4 Thermometers and other temperature-detecting 7.6.4.4.1 The control devices of remote controlled valves of
elements in fluid systems under pressure shall be provided a system shall be arranged together in one control stand.
with pockets built and secured so that the thermometers and 7.6.4.4.2 The control devices shall be clearly and
detecting elements can be removed while keeping the piping permanently identified and marked.
under pressure. It shall be recognized at the control stand whether
7.6.3.5 Level switches fitted to flammable oil tanks shall the valves are open or closed.
be contained in a steel or other fire-resisting enclosure. 7.6.4.4.3 In the case of bilge valves and valves for
changeable tanks, the closed position shall be indicated by
7.6.3.6 Shut-off valves shall be fitted where necessary to limit position indicators approved by the Register as well as
isolate pumps, heat exchangers, pressure vessels, etc., from by visual indicators at the control stand.
the rest of the piping system when necessary, in particular to
allow the isolation of duplicate components without 7.6.4.4.4 On passenger vessels, the control stand for remote
interrupting the fluid circulation, as well as for survey or controlled bilge valves shall be located outside the machinery
repair purposes. spaces and above the bulkhead deck.
7.6.4.4.5 Compressed air shall not be used as energy source
7.6.4 Remote controlled valves in remote control systems for the valves and fittings installed
7.6.4.1 General in cargo tanks.
7.6.4.1.1 These requirements apply to hydraulically, 7.6.4.5 Power units
pneumatically or electrically operated valves in piping 7.6.4.5.1 Power units shall be equipped with at least two
systems and sanitary discharge pipes. independent sets for supplying power for remote controlled
7.6.4.1.2 Unless otherwise specified, the valves and cocks valves.
which cannot be fitted in places where they are at all times 7.6.4.5.2 The energy required for the closing of valves which
readily accessible shall be provided with remote control. are not closed by spring power shall be supplied by a
7.6.4.2 Construction pressure accumulator.
7.6.4.2.1 The valves provided with remote control system 7.6.4.5.3 Pneumatically operated valves can be supplied with
shall be so constructed that, in case of failure of the remote air from the general compressed air system.
control system the valves remain, or automatically return, in Where the quick-closing valves of fuel tanks are
a position that will not bring the vessel into dangerous closed pneumatically, a separate pressure accumulator shall
situation. be provided. This shall be of adequate capacity and shall be
7.6.4.2.2 Valves and fittings with remote control shall be located outside the engine room. Filling of this accumulator
also provided with local manual control. The remote control by a direct connection to the general compressed air system is
system and means of local operation shall be independent, so permitted. A non-return valve shall be arranged in the filling
provided that opening and/or closing of the valves by local connection of the pressure accumulator.
manual control shall not render remote control system The accumulator shall be provided either with a
inoperable. pressure control device with a visual and audible alarm or
For vessel’s side valves and valves on the collision with a hand-compressor as a second filling appliance.
bulkhead, the means for local manual operation shall be The hand-compressor shall be located outside the
permanently attached. engine room.
7.6.4.3 Arrangement of valves 7.6.4.6 After installation on board, the entire system shall
7.6.4.3.1 The accessibility of the valves for maintenance and be subjected to an operational test.
repairing shall be taken into consideration. Valves in bilge
lines and sanitary pipes shall always be accessible.

June 2018 79
7.6.5 Expansion bellows 7.7.1.8 All the openings in shell plating for the bottom and
side of river and ice chests shall be fitted with protective
7.6.5.1 The use of expansion bellows shall be restricted as gratings or screens.
far as practicable. Documentation and calculation of
expansion bellows may be carried out in accordance with the The width of slots between the grating bars shall
EJMA standard. not exceed 12,0 mm, whereas the dimensions of meshes in
screens shall not exceed 12 x 12 mm. The total area of the
7.6.5.2 Expansion bellows are subject to approval for their slots or meshes shall not be less than 2,5 times the total cross-
intended use and shall be delivered with Register certificate sectional area of the installed river water inlet valves.
(EN 10204, type 3.2).
7.7.1.9 Provisions shall be made for clearing river chest
7.6.5.3 The bellows shall be so designed and installed that gratings. Compressed air for blowing through river chest
pulling or blowing out is prevented. gratings may exceed 0,2 MPa only if the river chests are
constructed for higher pressures. Clearing pipelines shall be
7.6.5.4 The pipeline, in which an expansion bellow shall be
provided with screw-down non-return valves.
fitted, shall be adequately adjusted, aligned and clamped.
For ice chests, clearing arrangements may be
7.6.5.5 When found necessary, protection against omitted.
mechanical damage of the expansion bellows may be
required. 7.7.2 Openings in shell plating, bottom and side valves
and fittings
7.7 River suction chest, ice chest, openings in
shell plating and bottom and side fittings 7.7.2.1 Number of openings in the shell plating shall be
kept to a minimum. Therefore, where possible, discharge
7.7.1 River and ice chest pipelines shall be connected to common discharges.
7.7.1.1 River water (outboard water) inlet and overboard 7.7.2.2 Arrangement of river water inlet and discharge
discharge valves shall be secured: openings in the vessel’s shell plating shall be such as to
prevent:
– directly on the shell plating; or
.1 discharges water, sewage, ash and other wastes being
– on river suction chests or ice chest; or
sucked by river water pumps;
– on extra-reinforced and short distance pieces attached to
.2 sewage and water discharged shall not be permitted to
the shell (see 7.7.2.4).
pass into the vessel’s spaces through the side scuttles and
7.7.1.2 Each river and ice chest and boxes of shell coolers into the lifeboats and life rafts when launching.
shall be provided with an air pipe which can be shut-off and Where it is impracticable to comply with
which shall extend above the bulkhead deck (see 7.11.1.1). requirement .2, discharge openings shall be fitted with
Where this is impracticable, use of pipe line loop with shut- appropriate arrangements which prevent discharged water
off valve laid sufficiently high above the deepest load line from penetrating into the vessel’s spaces, lifeboats and life
will be specially considered by the Register. The inside rafts.
diameter of the air pipe shall be compatible with the size of
the river chests and shall not be less than 30 mm. 7.7.2.3 As a rule, bottom and side valves and fittings shall
be installed on welded pads and shall be approved by the
7.7.1.3 River water inlets shall be so designed and arranged Register. The holes for the fastening bolts or studs shall not
as to limit turbulence and to avoid the admission of air due to be of through type and shall end in welded pads.
motion of the vessel.
If valves are bolted to pads on the vessel side, the
7.7.1.4 Suction and discharge valves of steel, river and ice pads shall be welded to the vessel side as described for
chests and distance pieces shall be protected against distance pieces below.
corrosion by an efficient coating or equivalent.
7.7.2.4 The valves and fittings may be installed on the
7.7.1.5 On vessels with ice strengthening, one of river welded distance pieces (thick- welded connecting pipes),
chests shall function as an ice chest. Ice chest design shall provided the latter are of rigid construction and of a
allow an effective separation of ice and removal of air from minimum length and shall be approved by the Register.
the ice chest to ensure reliable operation of the river water Distance pieces shall be located in readily accessible places
system. for maintenance and for measuring of shell plating thickness
under service conditions. The wall thickness of a distance
7.7.1.6 On vessels with ice strengthening, provision shall piece shall not be less than the minimum thickness of the
be made for heating of river and ice chests as well as of side shell plating at the vessel ends. However, it need not be more
valves above the load waterline. than 8 mm. The distance piece shall extend through the shell
For this purpose a recirculation line of outlet water plating or river chest, and shall be welded on both sides or
from cooling of the engines shall be connected to the chest: with full penetration welding.
for ice chest the cross-sectional area of the line shall be at
least equal to that of the overboard discharge pipeline. 7.7.2.5 No part of fittings installed on shell plate below the
bulkhead deck, as well as of the bottom fittings (e.g. gasket
7.7.1.7 For river chests, the diameter of the cooling water made of lead), shall be made of materials which can readily
recirculation pipe shall not be less than 0,85 of the discharge be deteriorated in the event of fire.
pipe diameter.

80 June 2018
7.7.2.6 The use of butterfly and ball valves will be fore side of the bulkhead. Such valves shall be controllable
specially considered by the Register. In any event, butterfly from a ready accessible position on the deck and fitted with
and ball valves not fitted with flanges are not to be used for indicators (valve open/valve closed).
water inlets or overboard discharges unless provisions are However, the Register could accept the fitting of
made to allow disassembling at water of the pipes served by this valve on the after side of the collision bulkhead provided
these valves without any risk of flooding. Valves with only that the valve is readily accessible under all service
one flange may be used on the shell plating and on the river conditions and the space in which it is located is not a cargo
chests only after special approval. space.
Cocks on the vessel’s side shall be so arranged that
the handle can only be removed when the cock is closed. 7.8.1.3 The valves fitted on collision bulkhead below the
bulkhead deck shall be of steel, bronze or other approved
7.7.2.7 Spindles and closing parts of the bottom and shell ductile material (see 1.1.4.13). Valves of grey cast iron or
plate valves and fittings shall be made of corrosion-resistant similar material are not acceptable.
materials.
7.8.1.4 Where the pipelines pass through watertight
All suction and discharge pipes shall be adequately bulkheads, decks or other watertight structures, provision
protected where they are liable to be damaged by cargo etc. shall be made for penetration pieces, bulkhead flanges or
7.7.2.8 As a rule, the discharge valves at the shell plating other similar arrangements ensuring watertight integrity of
shall be of non-return shut-off type. On agreement with the the structure concerned.
Register, such a valve may be replaced by a non-return valve Holes for bolts and studs shall not penetrate the
or by a pipeline loop laid sufficiently high (0,3 m) above the watertight structures, but shall terminate in the welded pads.
deepest load line. Gaskets shall not be made of materials which
7.7.2.9 Two valves shall be provided for main propulsion readily deteriorate in case of fire.
plants. The cooling water pumps of important auxiliaries Penetration pieces attached by welding to
essential for the vessel’s safe should be connected to the river watertight decks and bulkheads shall be thicker by 1,5 to 3,0
chests over separate valves. mm than the wall thickness of a pipe to be connected,
depending on its diameter and they shall be welded on both
7.7.2.10 River water inlet and discharge valves, situated on sides of the bulkhead or deck.
shell plating in machinery spaces, serving main and auxiliary
machinery shall be provided with control from inside of this 7.8.1.5 Where pipes pass through watertight bulkheads and
space. The controls shall be easily accessible and fitted with decks that confine watertight compartments, valves capable
an indicator showing whether the valves are “Closed” or of being operated from above the bulkhead deck shall be
“Open”. fitted. The valves shall be of steel or of another material
equivalent to steel in fire resistance.
7.7.2.11 The driving means for operating the bottom and
side inlet fittings shall be situated in readily accessible places 7.8.1.6 Penetration of pipes through fire-resisting divisions
and shall be fitted with an arrangement indicating whether shall be so made that fire resistance of the division does not
the valve is open or closed. deteriorate.
In passenger vessels, these means shall be located 7.8.1.7 Where plastic pipes pass through main fire-resisting
above the floor plating of machinery spaces. bulkheads, steel sockets of adequate length shall be used with
In cargo vessels, these means are recommended to valves capable of being closed from either side of the
be located above the floor plating of machinery spaces. bulkhead (see 7.2.8.2).
7.7.2.12 River water inlets and discharge valves for systems These valves shall be of steel or other material
where plastic piping is used shall be arranged with approved equivalent to steel in fire resistance.
remote closing arrangement.
7.8.2 Leading of pipes in tanks
7.8 Leading of pipelines 7.8.2.1 In general, the passage of pipes through tanks,
when permitted shall include special arrangements such as
7.8.1 Leading of pipelines through watertight and reinforced thickness or tunnels. It applies particularly for the
fire-resisting structures fuel oil pipes, bilge pipes, ballast pipes, air vent pipes,
7.8.1.1 The number of pipe penetrations in watertight sounding pipes, overflow pipes, scuppers and sanitary
bulkheads shall be kept to a minimum compatible with the discharges.
design and proper operation of the vessel. Where penetrations Junctions of pipes inside tanks shall be made by
are necessary, arrangements shall be made to maintain the welding or flange connections.
watertight integrity.
7.8.2.2 Drinking water and feed water pipes shall not be
7.8.1.2 Only one pipeline is permitted to be led below the led without tunnel through fuel and lubricating oil storage
bulkhead deck through the collision bulkhead for handling tanks.
the liquid contained in the forepeak. Where the forepeak is Fuel oil and lubrication oil pipes shall not pass
divided by a longitudinal bulkhead into two watertight through drinking water and feed water tanks unless they are
compartments, one suction branch pipe serving each led in oil-tight tunnels, forming part of the tank structure.
compartment may be provided.
On each pipeline mentioned above, a shut-off valve
shall be provided being installed on the welded pad on the

June 2018 81
7.8.2.3 River water and lubricating oil pipes with no ducts, 7.8.4 Leading of pipes in refrigerated cargo spaces
as well as air, overflow and sounding pipes are permitted to
be led through fuel oil storage tanks if seamless pipes without No pipes shall be led through refrigerated cargo
detachable joints inside such tanks are used. Where spaces unless they are intended to serve these spaces. Where
detachable joints cannot be avoided, they shall be flange leading of such pipes cannot be avoided, they shall be
connections with gaskets resistant to oil. carefully insulated. This requirement equally applies to air
and sounding pipes too. In these spaces pipes shall not have
7.8.2.4 Where no tunnels are used in leading pipes through sections in which water may collect and freeze.
tanks and where compensation of thermal expansion is
required, bends of the pipes themselves shall be made inside 7.8.5 Leading of pipes in vicinity of electrical
the tank. equipment
Where pipes are led through tunnels, it is 7.8.5.1 Leading of pipes subjected to pressure above or
recommended that the thermal compensators be situated behind main and emergency switchboards or the control
outside the tunnel. panels of essential machinery and equipment shall be avoided
as far as possible. If this is impracticable, all detachable pipe
7.8.3 Leading of pipes in cargo holds and other spaces joints and valves shall be at a safe distance from the
7.8.3.1 Pipes shall be secured in a way as not to interfere switchboard or well shielded from it.
with the stresses from thermal expansion, undue Leading of pipes from the front and side of the
deformations of vessel structure and vibrations. switchboard and control panel is permitted at a distance of at
least 500,0 mm, provided that these pipelines, for a length of
7.8.3.2 Pipes passing through cargo holds, chain lockers 1500,0 mm from the switchboard or control panel, have no
and other spaces in which they are subject to mechanical detachable joints or that flanged joints are fitted with
damage shall be adequately protected.
protecting casings.
7.8.3.3 Fuel oil, steam and water piping as well as pressure 7.8.5.2 Leading of pipes through special electrical spaces
pipes of hydraulic drives, with the exception of bilge pipes, (see the present Rules, Chapter II, 1.2.22) and also through
are, as a rule, not permitted in dry cargo holds. accumulator (storage) battery rooms is not permitted.
In exceptional cases, which are subject to special Exception is made for fire smothering pipes, compressed air
consideration by the Register, these pipes may be permitted pipes and those serving electrical equipment installed in these
provided they are led in tunnels, or where the pipes employed spaces.
are of increased thickness and protected by strong steel
casings. 7.8.6 Leading of pipes in unattended machinery
spaces
7.8.3.4 Steam piping shall not be led through paint rooms
or other spaces intended for carriage of readily flammable Joints of pipelines of Class I conveying fuel and
materials. lubricating oil shall be welded. Detachable joints are
permitted to be used but their number shall be kept to a
7.8.3.5 Where hot pipes pierce bulkheads made of minimum; in this case, protective casings shall be provided in
combustible materials, provision shall be made for structural the places where detachable joints are fitted.
measures preventing bulkheads from being affected by
increased temperature. 7.9 Bilge system
7.8.3.6 Fuel oil piping shall not be led through 7.9.1 General requirements
accommodation and service spaces (see 1.1.4.12 and
1.1.4.10 respectively). An exception can be made for fuel oil 7.9.1.1 The bilge pumping system shall consist of pumps
pipelines of the emergency diesel generator, and also for connected to a bilge main line so arranged as to allow the
filling pipes which are permitted to be led through the draining of compartments mentioned in 7.9.1.2 through bilge
sanitary spaces, provided the pipes used have a thickness of branches, distribution boxes and bilge suctions.
not less than 5 mm and no detachable joints are employed.
7.9.1.2 It shall be possible to pump out each watertight
7.8.3.7 Piping of all systems and ventilation ducts shall, compartment separately. However, that requirement shall not
where necessary, be fitted with suitable arrangements to apply to watertight compartments that are normally sealed
permit drainage or blowing-off the working medium or hermetically during operation.
condensates.
7.9.1.3 Bilge pumping system is not intended at coping
Structural measures shall be taken to protect the with water ingress resulting from structural or main river
hull and equipment from adverse effect of the agents water piping damage.
discharged.
7.9.1.4 The bilge system shall be able to work while the
7.8.3.8 Pipes carrying dangerous gases or liquids, and other essential installations of the vessel, especially the
particularly those under such a high pressure that a leak could firefighting installations, are in service.
pose a danger to persons, shall not be located in the
accommodation or in corridors leading to the
accommodation. This does not apply for the pipes of
liquefied gas installations for domestic purposes, and to
steam pipes and hydraulic system pipes, provided they are
fitted in metal sleeves.

82 June 2018
7.9.2 Pumps – they meet the capacity requirements;

7.9.2.1 Vessels requiring a crew shall be equipped with – suitable piping arrangements are made;
two independent bilge pumps which shall not be installed – pumps are available for bilge duty when necessary.
within the same space. At least one of these shall be motor Fuel and oil pumps are not to be connected to the
driven. However, for vessels with a power of less than 225 bilge system.
kW or with a deadweight of less than 350,0 t, or where
vessels not intended for the carriage of goods have a Bilge ejectors are acceptable as bilge pumping
displacement of less than 250,0 m3, one pump will suffice arrangements provided that there is an independent supply of
which can be either manually-operated or motor-driven. On driving water.
passenger vessels further bilge pumps may be required 7.9.2.9 Where there is no source of electrical power on
according to size and propulsion power. board of non-self-propelled vessels, hand pumps shall be
One of the pumps may be replaced by a hydraulic provided, in sufficient number and so positioned as to permit
ejector connected to a high-pressure water pump and capable an adequate drainage of all the compartments of the vessel.
of ensuring the drainage under similar conditions to those Hand pumps shall be capable of being operated
obtained with the other pump. from positions above the load waterline and shall be readily
On passenger vessels, the pump supplying the accessible at any time. Hand pump suction lift shall be well
ejector is not to be used for other services. within the capacity of the pump.
7.9.2.2 Each of the required pumps shall be capable of use 7.9.2.10 Non-self-propelled unmanned vessels may be
on each watertight compartment. drained by the facilities of the motor vessel, pusher or tug.
7.9.2.3 The minimum pumping capacity Q 1 of the first 7.9.2.11 On board non-self-propelled vessels having a
bilge pump shall be calculated using the following formula: source of electrical power, mechanical pumps shall be
provided for draining the various compartments of the vessel.
1 0,1 ⋅ d1 , [ l/min ]
Q= 2
(7.9.2-1) The number and capacity of the bilge pumps shall comply
with the relevant requirements of 7.9.2.1 and 7.9.2.3.
where:
7.9.2.12 For compartments of small sizes (see 7.9.11), hand
d1 = internal diameter of the bilge main, determined in pumps operable from a position located above the load
accordance with 7.9.3.1, [mm]. waterline are acceptable.
The minimum pumping capacity Q 2 of the second
bilge pump shall be calculated using the following formula: 7.9.2.13 In catamarans and similar vessels, in each hull at
least one bilge pump shall be installed, in general.
Q=
2 0,1 ⋅ d 22 , [ l/min ] (7.9.2-2)
7.9.3 Pipe diameters
where: 7.9.3.1 Internal diameter d 1 of the bilge main and of the
d2 = internal diameter of the branch suctions branch suctions connected directly to the pump shall not be
determined in accordance with 7.9.3.1, [mm]. less than that determined in accordance with the following
formula:
The hand pump shall have a capacity not less than
3,5 m3/hr.
d1 = 1,5 ⋅ L ⋅ ( B + D ) + 25 , [ mm ] (7.9.3-1)
7.9.2.4 If the capacity of one of the pumps is less than the
Rule capacity, the deficiency may be compensated by an where:
excess capacity of the other pump; as a rule, such deficiency L = the maximum length of the hull, excluding rudder
is not permitted to exceed 30% of the Rule capacity. This and bowsprit, [m];
provision does not apply to passenger vessels. B, D = breadth and depth of the vessel respectively, see
7.9.2.5 Bilge pumps driven from the main engine with the the Rules, Part 2 – Hull and Hull Equipment,
capacity less than determined in accordance with 7.9.2.3 is Chapter I – Section 3, [m].
permitted provided that the capacity of independent pumps is Internal diameter d 2 of the branch suctions
increased respectively. connected to the bilge main shall not be less than that
determined in accordance with the following formula:
7.9.2.6Bilge pumps shall be of the self-priming type.
d 2 = 2,0 ⋅ l ⋅ ( B + D ) + 25 , [ mm ]
Centrifugal pumps shall be fitted with efficient priming
(7.9.3-2)
means, unless an approved priming system is provided to
ensure the priming of pumps under normal operating where:
conditions.
l = length of watertight compartment to be drained,
7.9.2.7 Centrifugal bilge pumps shall be arranged in such a measured over its bottom, [m];
way that any suction line is not led through more than two = for the purpose of calculation of Q 2 , it shall be
non-return valves, preferably not more than one. Centrifugal taken to be the length of the longest watertight
bilge pumps shall be located as low as possible in the vessel. compartment.
7.9.2.8 Other pumps may be used for bilge duties, such as The branch bilge pipe diameter may be taken not
fire, general service, sanitary service or ballast pumps, greater than the diameter of the main bilge pipe.
provided that:

June 2018 83
In vessels of dredging fleet having hopper spaces, 7.9.4.3 Bilge pumping system shall be so arranged as to
the internal diameter of the bilge main and direct suctions prevent the possibility of river water passing inside the
from the pump, shall be determined by the following vessel, or from one watertight compartment into another. For
formula: this purpose the suction valves of the distribution chests of
the bilge pipes, as well as the valves of the branch suctions
d3 = 1,5 ⋅ L ⋅ ( B + D ) − l1 ⋅ ( b + D ) + 25 , [ mm ] (7.9.3-3) connected directly to the main, shall be of screw-down non-
return type. Other equivalent arrangements are permitted.
where:
7.9.4.4 In the case of small vessels with only one cargo
l1 = length of hopper space, [m]; hold, the branch bilge pipes serving the various spaces can
b = mean width of hopper space, [m]. also be connected to the bilge pumps over changeover or
The inside diameter of the main bilge pipe in the three-way angle cocks.
engine rooms of tank vessels, shall be determined by the 7.9.4.5 Bilge valves shall be arranged so as to be always
following formula: accessible irrespective of the ballast and loading condition of
the vessel. Bilge valves, cocks and mud boxes shall be fitted
d 4 = 3,0 ⋅ l2 ⋅ ( B + D ) + 25 , [ mm ] (7.9.3-4) at, or above, the machinery space platforms. Where this is not
practicable, they may be situated just below the platform,
where:
provided readily removable traps or covers are fitted, and
l2 = total length of spaces between cofferdam or cargo nameplates indicate the presence of these fittings.
bulkhead and stern tube bulkhead, [m].
7.9.4.6 The arrangement of bilge pipelines shall be such as
7.9.3.2 In vessels having length L less than 25,0 m, the to ensure the possibility of draining the engine rooms through
internal diameter of the bilge main and of the branch suctions the suctions directly connected to the largest of the specified
may be reduced to 35,0 mm. bilge pump, the other compartments being simultaneously
7.9.3.3 Internal diameter of the bilge main and the branch drained by other pumps. Its diameter shall not be less than
suctions which are directly connected to the bilge pump shall that of the main bilge pipe. However, the direct suction in the
not be in any case less than diameter of suctions of the bilge engine room need be fitted with only one screw-down non-
pump suction. return valve.
Where the direct suction is connected to a
7.9.3.4 Cross-sectional area of the pipe, connecting the centrifugal pump which can also be used for cooling water,
distribution chest with the bilge main shall not be less than ballast water or fire-extinguishing, a screw-down non-return
the total cross-sectional area of two largest branch bilge valve shall be fitted in the discharge pipe of the pump.
suctions connected to the chest, but it shall not be greater
than the sectional area of the bilge main. 7.9.4.7 The arrangement of bilge pipelines shall be such as
to enable one of the pumps to be operated in case the rest of
7.9.3.5 The diameter of the emergency bilge suction in the the pumps are inoperative or are used for other purposes.
engine room shall not be less than that of the pump suction. Suction branches of bilge pipelines shall be independent of
7.9.3.6 The required pipe thickness of bilge lines shall be other piping systems, up to the connections to the pumps.
in accordance with Table 7.4.1-1. 7.9.4.8 As a rule, bilge pipes shall be led outside the
double bottom. Where it is necessary to lead these pipes
7.9.4 Piping arrangement
through the tanks for storage of fuel oil, lubricating oil, boiler
7.9.4.1 Bilge lines and bilge suctions shall be so arranged feed water and drinking water, the pipes shall meet the
that the bilges can be completely drained even under requirements of 7.8.2.
unfavourable trim conditions. Where the pipes are led through the double bottom,
Bilge suctions shall be so arranged as not to impede the suction pipes in each watertight compartment shall be
the cleaning of bilges and bilge wells. They shall be fitted fitted with non-return valves.
with easily detachable, corrosion-resistant strums. The
7.9.4.9 On each self-propelled vessel with main engines of
distance between the open ends of the bilge suction pipes and
total power output 225,0 kW and above, provision shall be
the bottom of the bilge or wells shall be adequate to allow a
made for emergency bilge drainage of engine rooms, in
full flow of water and to facilitate cleaning.
addition to the suctions required by 7.9.4.6.
7.9.4.2 Bilge lines and their branch suctions shall be so For this purpose, the cooling water pump of
arranged as to enable any watertight compartment to be maximum capacity shall be fitted with direct bilge suction
drained by one of the pumps required in 7.9.2.1. This branches located at the drainage level of the engine room and
requirement does not apply neither to the peaks, pump rooms fitted with non-return screw-down valves. The diameter of
and cofferdams of tank vessels, drained by individual pumps, these direct suction branches shall be at least equal to the
nor to the tanks intended only for storage of liquids. diameter of the pump suction.
Where the spaces are not fitted with bilge suctions, Where the pumps specified above are not suitable
other means for draining water shall be provided. for emergency drainage, a direct emergency bilge suction
branch shall be connected to the largest available independent
power pump not intended for drainage.
The capacity of this pump shall exceed that
required in 7.9.2.3 by an amount satisfactory to the Register.

84 June 2018
The diameter of the suction emergency branches shall not be Such holds shall be filled with ballast water by
less than that of the pump suction. means of ballast piping that is permanently installed and
Hand control wheel for non-return screw-down independent of the drainage pipes, or by means of branch
valves fitted to the suction branches shall be fitted above the pipes that can be connected to the main drainage pipe by
engine room flooring to a sufficient height and shall have flexible pipes or flexible adaptors. Water intake valves
name plate “Emergency drainage only”. located in the bottom of the hold shall not be permitted for
this purpose.
7.9.4.10 On vessels where the use of portable drainage
arrangements or drainage by means of the facilities of the 7.9.5 Drainage of machinery spaces
tug-pusher is permitted, the compartments may be drained
7.9.5.1 The arrangement and the number of bilge suctions
through the deck manholes with the use of a flexible hose if
in the engine and boiler rooms shall comply with 7.9.4.12 to
no cargo is available under the manholes, or through the
7.9.4.15. One of the bilge suctions shall be connected directly
permanent suction risers terminating in a deck socket and a
to a largest independent bilge pump (see 7.9.4.6). On
branch pipe to which a hose is connected.
passenger vessels each of the independent power bilge pumps
7.9.4.11 Where a bilge system incorporates permanently located in machinery spaces, shall have two branch bilge
installed pipeline, the bilge-bottom discharge pipes intended suctions arranged on both sides of these spaces. The branch
to discharge oily water overboard shall be equipped with the bilge suction shall be connected to the bilge main.
shut-off valves that have been sealed in position either by the
7.9.5.2 Suctions for bilge drainage of machinery spaces
inspection body or by the Register.
and shaft tunnels shall be fitted with readily accessible mud
Locking the shut-off valves in position shall be boxes. The pipes between the mud boxes and the bilges shall
regarded as equivalent to sealing in accordance with above be as straight as practicable. The lower ends of these pipes
mentioned. The key or keys for the locking of the shut-off shall not be fitted with strum boxes. Mud boxes shall have
valves shall be indicated accordingly and kept in a marked covers that can be easily opened. The total cross-sectional
and easily accessible location in the engine room. area of the mud box opening shall not be less than twice the
7.9.4.12 Oily water separating and filtering equipment shall clear area of the given suction pipe.
be used for purification of water before discharging On vessels of less than 25,0 m in length strum
overboard or collecting tanks shall be provided for bilge boxes may be used instead of mud boxes provided they are
water contaminated with oil. The installation and operation of accessible for cleaning.
such equipment shall not interfere with normal functioning of
7.9.5.3 No strum boxes or strainers shall be fitted on the
the bilge and ballast systems.
suction for emergency bilge drainage.
7.9.4.13 Arrangement and the number of bilge suctions shall
7.9.5.4 Vessels having an electric propulsion installation
be determined depending on the shape and size of
shall be provided with arrangement for proper drainage of the
compartments. Bilge suctions are normally to be located on
wells under the main generators and propulsion motors, as
both sides of the vessel. Short and narrow compartments (e.g.
well as with automatic alarms to give warning at excess of
compartments located fore and aft in the vessel) may be
permissible water level in the wells (see 1.3.6.2).
provided with one bilge suction if it ensures efficient
drainage of the compartment. Automatic drainage of wells under main generators
and propulsion motors is recommended to be used.
Bilge suctions shall be arranged in each
compartment in such a manner as to ensure complete 7.9.6 Drainage of tunnels
drainage of the compartment with the vessel being heeled 50
either way. Each shaft tunnel and each pipe tunnel shall have
the bilge suction branch, from the well in the after part of the
7.9.4.14 There shall be at least one bilge suction on both the tunnel, connected to the bilge main.
starboard and port sides of all flat-bottomed, drainable
Where the shape of the bottom or the length of the
compartments that are wider than 5,0 m.
tunnel requires, additional bilge suctions may be provided in
In watertight compartments where the rise of floor the fore part of the tunnel.
exceeds 5° and in the vessel’s ends, bilge suctions shall be
Bilge suctions of the shaft tunnel shall be made in
fitted near the centre line.
compliance with the requirements of 7.9.5.2.
7.9.4.15 Throughout the entire length of the vessel branch
bilge suction of the bilge system shall be installed in the 7.9.7 Drainage of cargo spaces
following way: 7.9.7.1 Cargo holds shall be fitted with bilge suctions
– in vessels without a trim the suctions shall be installed at connected to the bilge main. Cargo hold bilges shall be
the aft bulkheads of the forward compartments and at the provided with arrangements for bilge water level
fore bulkheads of the aft compartments; measurement.
– in vessels with a trim by the stern the suctions shall be 7.9.7.2 In vessels with double bottom, bilge suctions shall
installed at the aft bulkheads of the compartments. be provided in the holds on each side aft. Where the double
7.9.4.16 Compartments or other spaces that are capable of bottom plating extends from side to side, the bilge suctions
carrying ballast need to be connected to the drainage system shall be led to wells located at the wings. Where the double
only by means of a simple closing device. That requirement bottom plating slopes down to the centreline by more than 5°,
shall not apply to holds that are capable of carrying ballast. a centreline well with a suction is also to be provided.

June 2018 85
If the inner bottom is of a particular design, shows 7.9.9.2 For arrangement of cofferdams in tank vessels type
discontinuity or is provided with longitudinal wells, the C and N, the requirements given in the Rules, Part 4 –
number and position of bilge suctions will be given special Additional Requirements for Notations, Chapter II, 4.3.2 and
consideration by the Register. 5.3.2 respectively, apply.
7.9.7.3 Where the length of the hold exceeds 35,0 m, bilge 7.9.10 Drainage of fore and after peaks
suctions shall be fitted in the fore and aft parts of this hold.
At narrow ends of cargo spaces a single bilge suction may be 7.9.10.1 Connection of the fore and after peaks to the
permitted. general bilge system is not permitted.
7.9.7.4 In vessels without double bottom, bilge suctions 7.9.10.2 Where the peaks are not used as water ballast tanks
shall be provided in the holds: or as other tanks, independent drainage by hand pumps or
water ejectors may be provided. The pumps shall be located
– at the aft end in the centreline where the rise of floor
above the freeboard deck.
exceeds 5°;
– at the aft end on each side in other cases. 7.9.10.3 Drainage of the after peak may be carried out
through the discharge pipe into the bilges or drainage wells of
Additional suctions may be required if, due to the
the adjacent compartment.
particular shape of the floor, the water within the
compartment cannot be entirely drained by means of the The discharge pipe shall be fitted with a self-
suctions mentioned above. closing valve installed on the after peak bulkhead from the
side of the adjacent compartment.
7.9.7.5 Drainage into the bilges of cargo spaces from the
spaces located in other watertight compartments is not 7.9.10.4 Where the after peak terminates at the engine room,
permitted. it may be drained to the engine room bilge through the
discharge pipe with an easy accessible shut-off valve fitted to
7.9.7.6 Where close ceilings or removable covers are fitted the bulkhead on the engine room side. It is recommended that
over the bilges or wells in cargo spaces, provision shall be the valve be self-closing. Similar emptying of the fore peak
made for free access of water into the bilges or wells. into an adjoining space is not permitted.
7.9.7.7 Branch bilge suctions shall be fitted with strum 7.9.10.5 Drainage of the peaks on non-self-propelled vessels
boxes or strainers having perforations of 8,0 to 10,0 mm in and the vessels with length less than 25,0 m may be carried
diameter. Total area of these perforations shall not be less out by water draining into adjacent compartment, if the
than twice the clear area of the given suction pipe. control of the self-closing valves installed on the peak
The strum boxes and strainers shall be removable, bulkheads is carried out from the deck.
or provision shall be made for cleaning them without
disassembling any connection of suction branch. The strum 7.9.11 Drainage of other spaces
boxes shall be protected against corrosion. 7.9.11.1 Chain lockers may be connected to the main bilge
7.9.7.8 In bulk carrier holds the bilge system shall be so system or drained by means of hand pumps, water ejectors or
designed that its operability may not be affected when bulk other arrangements. Draining to the forepeak tank is not
cargo is carried. permitted.
7.9.11.2 Drainage of steering gear rooms and other small
7.9.8 Drainage of refrigerated spaces
compartments situated above the after peak may be carried
7.9.8.1 Provision shall be made for draining all the spaces, out by means of hand pumps or water ejectors or by means of
trays, chutes and other places which may accumulate water. drain pipes led into the machinery space bilges or shaft
tunnel. The drain pipes shall be fitted with self-closing valves
7.9.8.2 Drain pipes from non-refrigerated spaces are not located in easily visible and accessible positions. The internal
permitted to be led into the bilges (wells) of refrigerated diameter of the drain pipes shall not be less than 40,0 mm.
spaces. On passenger vessels, drain pipes are not permitted for
7.9.8.3 Each drain pipe of refrigerated cargo spaces shall drainage of the above mentioned spaces.
be fitted with a liquid sealed trap or with another equivalent
7.9.12 Bilge testing
arrangement. The head of liquid shall be such that the
arrangement will work effectively under any service All bilge arrangements shall be tested under
conditions. Liquid sealed traps shall be placed in accessible Register supervision.
positions outside the insulation.
7.10 Ballast system
7.9.8.4 As a rule, no shut-off valves shall be fitted on the
drain pipes from refrigerated spaces. 7.10.1 General requirements
7.9.9 Drainage of cofferdams 7.10.1.1 Ballast systems in connection with bilge systems
shall be so designed as to avoid any risk of undesirable
7.9.9.1 Cofferdams filled with water shall be provided with communication between spaces or with the river.
a drainage facility. The arrangement of branch suctions in
cofferdams shall be comply with requirements of 7.9.7.

86 June 2018
7.10.1.2 All tanks including aft and fore peak and double ballasting. Where butterfly valves are used, they shall be of a
bottom tanks intended for ballast water shall be provided type able to prevent movement of the valve position due to
with suitable filling and suction pipes connected to special vibration or flow of fluids.
power-driven pumps of adequate capacity according to Remote control valves
7.10.2.1.
Remote control valves, where fitted, shall be arranged so
7.10.1.3 For each hull of a twin-hulled vessel, an that they close and remain closed in the event of loss of
independent ballast system shall be provided. control power. The valves may remain in the last ordered
position upon loss of power, provided that there is a
7.10.2 Pumps readily accessible manual means to close the valves upon
7.10.2.1 Any vessel shall be provided with at least one loss of power.
pump for charging and discharging ballast tanks. Remote control valves shall be clearly identified as to the
Capacity of the ballast pump shall be such as to tanks they serve and shall be provided with position
ensure the speed of water of not less than 2,0 m/s, with the indicators at the ballast control station.
suction pipe diameter taken from formula (see 7.10.3.1) as 7.10.4.4 Arrangement of the suctions shall be such as to
for the largest ballast tank. ensure discharging of water from any of the ballast tanks,
7.10.2.2 General service pump, bilge, fire or standby regardless of whether the vessel is upright or listed not more
cooling water pumps of sufficient capacity (see 7.10.2.1) may than 5°.
be used as ballast pumps. 7.10.5 Operational testing
7.10.2.3 Where the fuel oil tanks are, in general, used as The ballast arrangement shall be subjected to
ballast tanks, the standby cooling water pump or a fire pump operational testing under the Register supervision.
shall not be used for ballasting, nor shall the ballast pump be
used as fire pump or standby cooling pump. 7.11 Air, overflow and sounding systems
7.10.2.4 The pumps used for pumping out ballast water from
7.11.1 Air pipes
the double-bottom tanks shall be of self-priming type.
7.11.1.1 Each tank intended for storage of liquid, each
7.10.3 Pipe diameters cofferdam and void spaces with bilge connections, as well as
7.10.3.1 Internal diameter of the ballast pipes from separate river and ice chests and boxes of shell coolers, in order to
tanks shall be determined by the following formula: allow the passage of air or liquid so as to prevent excessive
pressure or vacuum in the tanks or compartments, in
u 16 ⋅ V , [ mm ]
d= 3 particular in those which are fitted with piping installations,
(7.10.3-1)
shall have air pipes.
where: Air pipes of river and ice chests and boxes of shell
V = volume of the ballast tank, [m3]. coolers shall have shut-off valves fitted directly on the chests
The diameter, determined in this way, may be and boxes.
adapted to the nearest standard size. 7.11.1.2 Air pipes of double-bottom tanks and of tanks
7.10.3.2 The diameter of the ballast main shall not be less adjoining the shell plating, of cofferdams and void spaces
than the maximum diameter of the suction determined by the with bilge connections, as well as the air pipes of river and
formula (see 7.10.3.1). ice chests and boxes of shell coolers, shall be extended above
the bulkhead deck. For chests and boxes, the requirements
7.10.4 Ballast valves and piping arrangements given in 7.7.1.2 apply.
7.10.4.1 Ballast water pipes are not to pass through drinking 7.11.1.3 Air pipes shall be fitted at the highest part of the
water, feed water, thermal oil or lubricating oil tanks. tank and, as a rule, at a place that is at maximum distance
from the filling pipe. The number and arrangement of the
7.10.4.2 If not contained in pipe tunnels, the ballast steel pipes shall be selected depending on the shape and size of the
pipes passing through tanks intended to contain fresh water, tank and shall be so performed that the tanks can be aerated
fuel oil or liquid cargo are: and deaerated, so that the design pressure of the tanks will
– to have reinforced thickness; not be exceeded. The arrangement shall also preclude the
– to consist either of a single piece or of several pieces formation of air pockets. Air pipes shall be laid vertically.
assembled by welding, by reinforced flanges or by 7.11.1.4 Tanks extending from side to side of the vessel
devices deemed equivalent for the application shall be fitted with air pipes at both sides. At the narrow ends
considered; of double bottom tanks in the forward and after parts of the
– to have a minimal number of joints in these lines; vessel, only one air pipe is sufficient.
– to have expansion bends in these lines within the tank, Where only one air pipe is provided, it is not to be
where needed; used as a filling pipe.
– not to have slip joints. Air pipes of tanks intended for various purposes
shall not be led into a common line.
7.10.4.3 Ballast tank valves
Valves controlling flow to ballast tanks shall be
arranged so that they remain closed at all times except when

June 2018 87
7.11.1.5 The height of air pipes from the deck to the level to Where the air pipes from several tanks fitted with
which liquid may have access from below shall not be less overflow pipes are combined, the cross-sectional area of the
than 400,0 mm. In justified cases Register may consider the common air pipe shall be at least 1/3 of the area of the
possibility for reducing that height. common filling pipe of these tanks.
Air pipes shall be located in protected places where 7.11.1.13 Notwithstanding the requirements of 7.11.1.2, an
there is no possibility of their damage during cargo handling inner air pipe diameter in all cases shall be at least 40,0 mm
operations and closing appliances shall be readily accessible for water tanks and 50,0 mm for other tanks. In the case of
at all times. In case where it is possible that air pipe still small gravity filled tanks smaller bore pipes may be accepted
could be damaged in normal operation on board, additional but in no case is the bore to be less than 25,0 mm. The
reinforcement is required. minimum wall thicknesses of air, overflow and sounding
7.11.1.6 The upper end of each air pipe shall be made as a pipes shall be in accordance with Table 7.4.1-1.
bend, with its opening facing downwards or shall have 7.11.1.14 The arrangement of the air pipes shall preclude the
another construction agreed upon with the Register. formation of hydraulic seals in the pipes under normal
7.11.1.7 The open ends of the air pipes of the fuel oil and conditions of list and trim.
lubricating oil tanks, as well as of cofferdams on tank vessels 7.11.1.15 Air pipes of the fuel and lubrication oil tanks in
type N and C, shall be led to positions at open deck where the way of the accommodation and refrigerated cargo spaces
issuing vaporous cannot incur a fire hazard. shall not have detachable connections.
Vents for fuel oil service tanks, fuel oil storage
tanks and lubricating oil tanks directly serving the propulsion 7.11.1.16 Name plates shall be affixed to the upper ends of all
and generator engines shall be so located and arranged that in air and sounding pipes.
the event of a broken vent pipe, this will not directly lead to 7.11.1.17 For air, overflow and sounding pipes of drinking
the risk of ingress of river water splashes or rainwater. water tanks, the requirements given in 7.21.5 apply.
7.11.1.8 The open ends of the air pipes of each fuel oil tank 7.11.1.18 Air pipe closing devices shall be of a type
in tank vessels type G, C and N, as well as in other vessels, acceptable to the Register. Air pipe automatic closing devices
shall extend to not less than 500,0 mm above the open deck. shall be tested in accordance with a National or International
These open ends and the open ends of overflow pipes leading Standards (IACS UR P3) recognized by the Register.
to the deck shall be fitted with a protective device consisting
of a gauze diaphragm or a perforated plate according to the 7.11.1.19 Materials
Rules, Part 4 – Additional Requirements for Notations, a) Air, overflow and sounding pipes shall be made of steel
Chapter II, 3.3.6, 4.3.7 and 5.3.8 for tank vessels type G, C or any other material approved for the application
and N respectively. The ventilation openings of cofferdams considered;
shall be fitted with a flame arrester according to applicable b) exposed parts of air, overflow, and sounding pipes shall
requirements from the Rules, Part 4 – Additional be made of approved metallic materials.
Requirements for Notations, Chapter II – Transport of
dangerous goods. 7.11.2 Overflow pipes
7.11.1.9 Air pipes of the independent (removable) 7.11.2.1 Fuel oil tanks shall be provided with overflow pipes
lubricating oil storage tanks, hydraulic oil tanks and waste oil directing fuel oil to an overflow tank or storage tank the
tanks may terminate in spaces where the tanks are installed. capacity of which shall not be less than that of the overflow
In this case measures shall be taken to preclude spillage of oil tank specified in 7.11.2.7 and which shall be equipped in
onto electrical equipment or heated surfaces in case the tank accordance with 7.11.2.8.
is overflowing. Overflow pipes may be omitted if fuel oil system is
Air pipes of the lubricating oil storage tanks which so designed that no spilling overboard can occur during the
form part of the vessel’s shell shall terminate in the engine loading and transfer of fuel oil.
room casing above the bulkhead deck.
7.11.2.2 The cross-sectional area of the overflow pipe shall
7.11.1.10 Total cross-sectional area of the air pipes of tanks not be less than the cross-sectional area of the filling pipe of
filled by gravity shall not be less than the total cross-sectional the tank when filling it with hand pump.
area of the filling pipes of these tanks. When the tank is filled with the mechanically-
7.11.1.11 Total cross-sectional area of the air pipes of tank driven pump, cross-sectional area of the overflow pipe shall
filled by the vessel’s pumps or shore pumps, shall not be less not be less than 1,25 the cross-sectional area of the filling
than 1,25 times the cross-sectional area of the filling pipe of pipeline of the tank.
that tank. The cross-sectional area of the overflow main is not
Cross-sectional area of a common air pipe from to be less than the aggregate cross-sectional area of the two
several tanks shall not be less than 1,25 times the area of the largest pipes discharging into the main.
common filling pipeline of these tanks.
7.11.1.12 Where a tank filled by vessel’s pumps or from
shore pumps, is fitted with an overflow pipe, the total cross-
sectional area of air pipes of the tank shall not be less than
1/3 of the area of the filling pipe.

88 June 2018
7.11.2.3 Where overflows from tanks intended to contain glass or shockproof plastics which do not lose transparency
the same liquid or different ones are connected to a common under the effect of fuel oil and lubricating oil. Cylindrical
overflow system, provision shall be made to prevent any risk glass level gauges are not permitted.
of intercommunication between the various tanks in the A self-closing cock shall be fitted at the lower end
course of movements of liquid when emptying or filling, or of level indicator at the connection to the tank. If the level
due to the inclination of the vessel, or overfilling of any tank indicator is connected to the tank below the maximum liquid
from another assumed flooded due to hull damage. level, the self-closing cock shall be fitted at the top end.
7.11.2.4 Where filling of a tank is performed by a power Self-closing cocks on lubricating oil tanks with a
pump, it is recommended to fit on the overflow pipe an alarm capacity below 500,0 l may be omitted.
or a sight glass to indicate when the tank is full.
7.11.3.4 Special arrangements for sounding pipes of
Sight glasses may be accepted on overflow lines flammable oil tanks
from fuel oil and lubricating oil systems provided that:
a) Where sounding pipes are used in flammable (except
– they are located in a vertically dropping line on readily lubricating) oil systems, they shall terminate in the open
visible, accessible and well-lit position; air, where no risk of ignition of spillage from the
– they are protected against mechanical damages; sounding pipe might arise. In particular, they are not to
– the glass is of heat resisting type. terminate in passenger or crew (accommodation) spaces.
As a general rule, they are not to terminate in machinery
7.11.2.5 Overflow pipes passing through cargo holds shall spaces. However, where the Register considers that this
be protected against damage. requirement is impracticable, it may permit termination
in machinery spaces on condition that the following
7.11.2.6 The internal diameter of overflow pipes shall not be
provisions are satisfied:
less than 50,0 mm.
.1 in addition, an oil-level gauge is provided meeting
7.11.2.7 The capacity of an overflow tank shall not be less the provisions of 7.11.3.3;
than 10 minute capacity of the fuel oil transfer pump. .2 the sounding pipes terminate in locations remote
7.11.2.8 An overflow tank shall be provided with audible from ignition hazards unless precautions are taken,
and visual alarms operating whenever the tank filling exceeds such as the fitting of effective screens, to prevent the
75%. fuel oil in the case of spillage through the
terminations of the sounding pipes from coming into
7.11.3 Sounding arrangements contact with a source of ignition;
7.11.3.1 Each tank, cofferdams and void spaces with bilge .3 the terminations of sounding pipes are fitted with
connections, as well as bilge and bilge wells in spaces which self-closing blanking devices and with a small
are not accessible at all times, shall be fitted with sounding diameter self-closing control cock located below the
pipes carried, as a rule, to the open deck. As far as possible, blanking device for the purpose of ascertaining
sounding pipes shall be laid straight and shall extend as near before the blanking device is opened that fuel oil is
as possible to the bottom. On application, the provision of not present. Provision shall be made so as to ensure
sounding pipes for bilge wells in permanently accessible that any spillage of fuel oil through the control cock
spaces may be dispensed with. involves no ignition hazard;
Sounding pipes of independent tanks are not always b) for lubricating oil and fuel oil leakage tanks, the oil-level
required to be laid to the open deck. gauge mentioned in a), .1 and the control cock mentioned
in a), .3 need not be provided on condition that the
The openings of sounding pipes shall be located at sounding pipes are fitted with appropriate means of
a sufficient distance from boilers, electrical equipment and closure;
machine components with high surface temperatures.
Sounding pipes shall be located as close as possible to c) short sounding pipes may be used for tanks other than
suction pipes. double bottom tanks without the additional closed level
gauge provided an overflow system is fitted.
7.11.3.2 For tanks and other spaces which normally may
contain liquids, following could be accepted instead of 7.11.3.5 Closing appliances
sounding pipes: a) Self-closing appliances shall be fitted with cylindrical
– type approved remote level gauge, effectively protected plugs having counterweights such as to ensure automatic
against possible mechanical damage; or closing;
– a remote level gauging system of an approved type, b) closing appliances not required to be of the self-closing
provided an emergency means of sounding is available in type may consist of a metallic screw cap secured to the
the event of failure affecting such system. pipe by means of a chain or a shut-off valve.
For fuel storage tanks, the provision of sounding 7.11.3.6 Where the vessel has a flat bottom and tanks or
pipes is sufficient. bilge extend from one side to the other, the sounding pipes
shall be installed at each side of the vessel.
7.11.3.3 The level indicators of fuel oil and lubricating oil
tanks, fitted with transparent inserts, shall be protected The pipes shall be as straight as possible and if
against damage. curved to suit the structure of the vessel, the curvature must
be sufficiently easy to permit the ready passage of the
Transparent inserts of fuel oil and lubricating oil sounding rod or chain. Upper ends of sounding pipes shall be
tanks shall be manufactured of unbreakable fireproof flat situated on readily accessible places over the bulkhead deck.

June 2018 89
7.11.3.7 Sounding pipes of the double bottom water storage 7.12.2 Exhaust gas pipes
tanks are permitted to be led into spaces below the bulkhead
deck that are located above them, provided they are 7.12.2.1 The exhaust gas pipes, as a rule, shall be led to the
accessible at all times. Such pipes shall not be used as air open decks. The exhaust gases shall be completely ducted out
pipes and shall be fitted with self-closing cocks. of the vessel.
7.11.3.8 Provision shall be made under the open ends of the 7.12.2.2 The exhaust gas pipes shall not be laid through the
sounding pipes for welded-on striking pads of adequate side shell plating to the atmosphere. Laying of exhaust gas
thickness and size or other strengthening to protect the pipes through the shell plating at the stern is permitted.
bottom plating from damaging by a sounding rod. Provision shall be made in such cases for arrangements (e.g.
gooseneck extended up to the bulkhead deck as much as
When sounding pipes with closed lower ends are practical) precluding the possibility of river water penetrating
used, the closing plate shall have reinforced scantlings. the engine.
7.11.3.9 Internal diameter of the sounding pipes shall not be 7.12.2.3 The exhaust gas pipes shall be led at a distance not
less than 32,0 mm. less than 450,0 mm from fuel oil tanks being measured from
Internal diameter of sounding pipes led through the exhaust pipe insulation.
refrigerated spaces where the temperature may drop to 0°C
and below, as well as of the pipes of tanks fitted with heating 7.12.2.4 Intercommunication of engine exhaust gas lines
installation, shall not be less than 50,0 mm. Within or boiler smoke ducts
refrigerated spaces the pipes shall be insulated. a) Exhaust gas from different engines shall not be led to a
common exhaust main or exhaust gas boiler, unless each
7.11.3.10 Where the sounding pipes project above the open exhaust pipe is provided with a suitable isolating device;
deck, they shall be located at such positions where they
cannot be damaged or they shall be provided with adequate b) smoke ducts from boilers discharging to a common
guards. funnel shall be separated to a height sufficient to prevent
smoke passing from a boiler which is operating to a
7.11.3.11 Sounding pipes of tanks shall be provided close to boiler out of action.
the top of the tank with holes for equalizing the pressure.
7.12.2.5 Boilers designed for alternative oil firing and
7.11.3.12 The sounding pipe openings are always to be exhaust gas operation
accessible and fitted with watertight closures. Plugs and Where boilers are designed for alternative oil firing
threaded parts of sounding pipes on open decks shall be made and exhaust gas operation, the exhaust gas pipe from the
of bronze, brass or stainless steel. Application of other engine shall be fitted with an isolating device and safety
materials is subject to the Register acceptance on a case by arrangements to prevent the starting of the fuel oil burning
case basis. units if the isolating device is not in the closed position.
7.11.3.13 Sounding pipes passing through cargo holds shall 7.12.2.6 The exhaust gas pipes and silencers shall be
be laid in protected spaces or they shall be protected against suitably insulated or water cooled in the engine rooms.
damage. Protection against physical contact may suffice outside the
7.11.3.14 Sounding pipes shall not be used neither as filling engine rooms.
nor vent pipes. Uptakes of boilers and exhaust gas pipes of internal
combustion engines shall be thermally insulated by means of
7.12 Exhaust system suitable insulating material, with double walls or a screen.
7.12.1 General requirements Where the thermal insulation is provided, insulating
materials shall comply with requirements of 1.3.8.1 and
7.12.1.1 This Head applies to: 1.3.8.3.
– exhaust gas pipes from engines;
7.12.3 Double walls or a screen are permitted to be used
– smoke ducts from boilers. only at places where, in case of overflow, pouring of fuel on
7.12.1.2 Exhaust gas systems shall be so designed as to: them is precluded.
– limit the risk of fire; 7.12.3.1 Drains shall be provided where necessary in
– prevent gases from entering manned spaces; exhaust systems, and in particular in exhaust ducting below
exhaust gas boilers, in order to prevent water flowing into the
– prevent water from entering engines. engine.
7.12.1.3 Exhaust gas systems shall be so designed that 7.12.3.2 All suitable measures shall be taken to avoid
pressure losses in the exhaust lines do not exceed the ingress of the exhaust gases into the various compartments.
maximum values permitted by the engine or boiler Exhaust pipes passing through accommodation or the
manufacturers. wheelhouse shall, within these, be covered by protective gas-
7.12.1.4 Materials of exhaust gas pipes and fittings shall be tight sheathing.
resistant to exhaust gases and suitable for the maximum The gap between the exhaust pipe and this
temperature expected. sheathing shall be open to the outside air.
7.12.1.5 For thermal oil heaters heated by exhaust gases, the
requirements given in 5.3.6.4 apply.

90 June 2018
7.12.3.3 Exhaust pipes and smoke ducts shall be so designed Places where dampers and their driving gear are
that any expansion or contraction does not cause abnormal installed shall be readily accessible and painted red.
stresses in the piping system, and in particular in the Indicators shall be provided to show whether the
connection with engine turbochargers. The devices used for damper is closed or open.
supporting the pipes shall allow their expansion or
contraction. Where the damper is installed not on the bulkhead,
the duct between the bulkhead and the damper shall be made
7.12.3.4 The exhaust gas pipes shall be arranged and of steel or other equivalent material and, where necessary,
protected in such a way that they cannot cause a fire. Exhaust shall be provided with insulation corresponding to the degree
gas pipes of engines and boilers shall be fitted with thermal of fire integrity of the bulkhead.
compensators.
7.13.1.5 In places of possible sweating the ventilation ducts
7.12.3.5 A high temperature alarm shall be provided in the shall be properly insulated. Drain plugs shall be provided for
exhaust gas manifolds of thermal oil heaters to detect any the portions of ducts where water is likely to accumulate.
outbreak of fire.
7.13.1.6 Ventilation ducts for removal of explosion and fire-
7.12.3.6 Use of non-metallic materials dangerous vapours and gases shall be gastight and shall not
The use of non-metallic materials in water cooled communicate with the ducts of other spaces.
exhaust systems will be given special consideration by the Closures of these ducts shall be such as to preclude
Register on a case by case basis. the possibility of spark formation. Outlets of the ducts, except
The consideration shall be carried out including the those mentioned in 7.13.4.3, shall be fitted with flame
following conditions: arresters.
– flexible exhaust hoses (ISO 13363) shall be type 7.13.1.7 Ventilation ducts leading to cargo spaces,
approved; machinery spaces and other spaces fitted with fire smothering
– the exhaust temperature alarm (visual and audible) shall facilities shall have closing arrangements.
be installed in the water cooled exhaust system. Closing arrangements shall be provided with means
for closing them from positions outside these spaces.
7.12.3.7 Materials, manufacture and application of exhaust
gas pipes shall be in lieu with 7.2.2, 7.4.7.3 and 7.4.7.4 as 7.13.1.8 On ice-strengthened vessels, ventilation ducts shall
well as Tables 7.1.1.3-1, 7.4.1-1, 7.4.1-3 and 7.4.7-1. be protected against penetration of snow.
7.12.4 Silencer and spark arresters 7.13.1.9 Ventilator heads of supply ducts and the air inlets
of ventilation systems shall be so located that the risk of
7.12.4.1 Silencers and spark arresters shall be so arranged as drawing in of air contaminated by gas, oil vapours, etc., is
to provide easy access for cleaning and overhaul. For this minimized, and admission of river water into the ventilation
purpose they shall be fitted with appropriate handholes and ducts is precluded. Height of ventilator head coamings
drain cocks. measured from the open deck shall be at least 400,0 mm.
7.12.4.2 Where exhaust gas boilers and spark arresters of the
7.13.2 Ventilation of machinery spaces and tunnels
wet type are installed, measures shall be taken to prevent the
entry of water into the engines. For this purpose the drain 7.13.2.1 All spaces from which machinery is operated,
pipes shall be led into the bilges of the engine room and shall including engine and cargo pump spaces, where flammable
be provided with hydraulic seals. or toxic gases or vapours may accumulate, or where a low
oxygen atmosphere may occur, shall be provided with
7.13 Ventilation system adequate ventilation under all conditions.
7.13.1 Ventilation ducts 7.13.2.2 Ventilation of machinery spaces shall be such as to
ensure that when the machinery and boilers therein are
7.13.1.1 Ventilation ducts shall not be led through operating at full load in all service conditions including
watertight bulkheads below the bulkhead deck. heavy weather, a supply of air is maintained to the spaces
7.13.1.2 Where trunkways and vertical ducts of the sufficient for the safety and comfort of the personnel and the
ventilation system pass through watertight decks, they shall operation of machinery and boilers.
be watertight and equivalent in strength to adjacent hull The ventilation shall ensure removal of gases
structures within a single watertight compartment below the heavier than air from the lower zones of those spaces, from
bulkhead deck. below floor plates, from where fuel oil system equipment,
daily service and storage tanks are installed.
7.13.1.3 Ventilation ducts shall be adequately protected
against corrosion or constructed of corrosion-resistant 7.13.2.3 The air supply shall be achieved through the
materials. suitably protected openings (ventilators) arranged in such a
way that they can be used in all weather conditions.
7.13.1.4 Where ventilation ducts pass through the main fire-
retarding bulkheads, they shall be fitted with steel closing fire 7.13.2.4 Shaft tunnels shall be properly ventilated.
dampers installed, in general, on the bulkheads.
Fire dampers shall be capable of being locally
closed from both sides of the bulkheads.

June 2018 91
7.13.2.5 Space containing emergency diesel-generator shall b) 3,0 kW for lead accumulators.
be provided with appropriate means to ensure an air supply
sufficient for the emergency diesel-generator to continue 7.13.4.2 The air shall enter at the bottom and be discharged
running at full load in all service conditions when the space is at the top so as to ensure total gas extraction. Ventilation
closed. ducts shall not include any devices which obstruct the air
flow such as stop valves.
7.13.2.6 All forced ventilation systems in the space to be
protected shall be shut down automatically as soon as the 7.13.4.3 Outlets of ventilation ducts shall be so constructed
fire-extinguishing system is activated. as to preclude the admission of river water, atmospheric
precipitation and solids.
7.13.2.7 Ventilation of a closed engine room shall be so Discharges of exhaust ducts shall be led to places
arranged that at an ambient temperature of 20°C the mean where the issuing gases do not present a fire hazard. The
temperature in the engine room does not exceed 40°C. exhaust ducts shall be gastight.
7.13.2.8 For machinery space fans, the requirements given No flame arresters shall be installed.
in 11.3.1.6 apply.
7.13.4.4 Chests of accumulator batteries having a charging
7.13.3 Ventilation of closed spaces on ferries and holds capacity not over 0,2 kW may be ventilated through the
intended for carriage of motor vehicles with fuel openings in the lower and upper parts of the chest to ensure
in their tanks removal of the gases.
7.13.3.1 These spaces shall have mechanical exhaust 7.13.4.5 The required air throughput Q shall be calculated
ventilation independent from other ventilation systems. by the following formula:
If individual spaces have effective closures,
Q =f ⋅ I gas ⋅ n ,  m3 /h  (7.13.4-1)
ventilation ducts shall be separate for each of them. The fans
shall be operated from outside the ventilated spaces and shall
be capable of ensuring at least: where:
.1 10 air changes per hour; f = 0,11 for accumulators with liquid electrolytes;
– in cargo spaces for the carriage of motor vehicles = 0,03 for accumulators with enclosed cells
with fuel in their tanks in passenger vessels carrying (electrolyte immobilised in gel, non-woven fibrous
more than 36 passengers; material);
– in special category spaces of all passenger vessels; I gas = 1/4 of the maximum current of the charging
device, [A];
.2 6 air changes per hour on all other vessels.
n = number of cells in series circuit.
7.13.3.2 The ventilation shall be such as to provide even
In the case of buffer accumulators of the on board
distribution of air supply and shall prevent formation of
network, other methods of calculation taking into account the
trapped zones.
characteristic charging curve of the charging devices may be
7.13.3.3 The ventilation system shall be equipped with accepted by the Register, provided that these methods are
devices indicating any loss or reduction of the ventilating based on the provisions of the Register or on relevant
capacity and operation of the fans. These devices shall be standards.
installed in the wheelhouse. Instead of them, the following
7.13.4.6 Where natural ventilation is used, the cross-section
means may be provided:
of the air ducts shall be sufficient for the required air
.1 visual signals indicating the operation of each fan; throughput on the basis of an air flow velocity of 0,5 m/s.
.2 interlock to permit the electric motor of the fan to start However, the cross section shall have a minimum value of:
only if the ventilation duct is open; a) 80 cm2 for lead accumulators;
.3 audible signals for spontaneous stop of the electric motor. b) 120 cm2 for nickel-cadmium accumulators.
7.13.3.4 Arrangements shall be provided to permit a rapid 7.13.4.7 Where mechanical ventilation is used, a fan shall be
shutdown and effective closure of the ventilation system from provided, preferably with an exhauster device; its motor shall
outside of the space in case of fire, taking into account the be clear of the gas stream and the air stream. Fans shall be of
weather conditions. a construction precluding the production of sparks through
7.13.3.5 Construction of the fans shall comply with the contact between a blade and the fan casing and shall avoid
requirements of the 11.3. any electrostatic charges.
7.13.3.6 Ventilation ducts and their closures shall be made 7.13.4.8 The internal surfaces of the exhaust ducts, as well
of steel. as the ventilating fans and their motors shall be protected
against the action of the electrolyte. Natural ventilation ducts
7.13.4 Ventilation of accumulator (storage) battery shall also be so protected.
rooms, cupboard or chest 7.13.4.9 “Fire, naked flame and smoking prohibited” signs
7.13.4.1 Provision shall be made for effective ventilation according to Figure 2 of Annex 4 (ES-TRIN) having a
when accumulators are installed in a closed battery room, minimum diameter of 10,0 cm shall be affixed to the doors or
cupboard or chest. Mechanical ventilation shall be provided covers of accumulators battery rooms, cupboards or chests
for charging power of more than: containing accumulators.
a) 2,0 kW for nickel-cadmium accumulators;

92 June 2018
7.13.5 Ventilation of fire-extinguishing CO2 storage a) Pressure pipes for conveying pressurized fuel oil with
spaces pressure greater than 0,18 MPa shall be arranged in
clearly visible and accessible positions;
Fire-extinguishing CO 2 storage spaces located
below the open deck shall be provided with an independent b) parts of flammable oil systems under pressure exceeding
system of mechanical exhaust ventilation from the lower 0,18 MPa such as pumps, filters and heaters shall comply
parts of the compartment which enables at least 6 air changes with the provisions of item a) above.
per hour.
7.14.2 Pumps
Fans shall be activated automatically once the
door/access hole have been opened. 7.14.2.1 Fuel oil transfer power-driven pump and a standby
pump which may be a hand pump shall be provided for fuel
7.13.6 Ventilation of galleys oil transfer from storage tanks into daily service tanks. Any
suitable pump, including the fuel oil separator pump, if any,
7.13.6.1 Galleys ventilation systems shall, in general, be may be used as a standby pump.
separated from ventilation systems serving other spaces.
On vessels with a daily consumption of fuel oil less
Exhaust ducts from galley ranges shall be than 1,0 t, a hand pump is permitted.
manufactured from steel where they pass through
accommodation spaces or spaces containing combustible 7.14.2.2 Fuel oil transfer pumps (as well as lubricating oil
materials. transfer pumps) and fuel oil separator pumps, if any, besides
local control, shall be provided with stopping devices
7.13.6.2 Each exhaust duct shall be fitted with: operable from always accessible positions outside the spaces
– grease trap readily removable for cleaning; where the pumps are installed.
– fire damper located in the lower end of the duct. 7.14.2.3 Fuel transfer, feed and booster pumps shall be
7.13.7 Ventilation of cargo holds designed for the intended operating temperature. Fuel oil
transfer pumps shall not be used for other purposes.
The ventilation of cargo holds may be either natural
or artificial. The number of air changes of cargo holds is 7.14.2.4 Shut-off valves shall be fitted on the pressure side
determined depending on the cargo being carried. and suction side of fuel oil pumps.
7.14.2.5 Where necessary, transfer pumps shall be fitted on
7.13.8 Ventilation of accommodation
their discharge side with a relief valve leading back to the
7.13.8.1 It shall be possible to ventilate the communal living suction of the pump or to any other place deemed
quarters and sleeping cabins adequately even when the doors satisfactory.
are closed. Ventilation shall ensure adequate air circulation in
7.14.2.6 Fuel oil filters shall be fitted in the delivery line of
all climatic conditions.
the fuel pumps. Mesh size and filter capacity shall be in
7.13.8.2 The accommodation shall be so designed and accordance with the requirements of the manufacturer of the
arranged as to prevent as far as possible the entry of foul air engine.
from other areas of the vessel such as engine rooms or holds;
where forced-air ventilation is used, the intake vents shall be 7.14.3 Piping arrangement
so placed as to satisfy the above requirements. 7.14.3.1 In general, the fuel oil pipeline shall have no
communication with other piping systems and shall not pass
7.14 Fuel oil system either through cargo tanks, slop tanks and thermal oil tanks
(see 7.8.2.2).
7.14.1 General requirements
7.14.1.1 This Head applies to all fuel oil systems supplying 7.14.3.2 Fuel oil tanks and their pipelines and other
any kind of installation. accessories shall be laid out and arranged in such a way that
neither fuel nor fuel vapours may accidentally reach the
The fuel oils used on board shall comply with 1.2.6. inside of the vessel and cannot be ignited by hot surfaces or
7.14.1.2 For fuel oil supply equipment forming part of: electrical equipment.
– diesel engines: see 2.7.1; 7.14.3.3 Fuel oil pipes, their connections, seals and fittings
– boilers and thermal oil heaters: see 5.4. shall be made of materials that are able to withstand the
mechanical, chemical and thermal stresses to which they are
7.14.1.3 Fuel oil systems shall be so designed as to ensure likely to be subjected. The fuel pipes shall not be subjected to
the proper characteristics (purity, viscosity, pressure) of the any adverse influence of heat and it shall be possible to
fuel oil supply to engines, heaters and boilers. inspect and repaired them throughout their length.
7.14.1.4 Fuel oil systems shall be so designed that, in the 7.14.3.4 Transfer, suction and other low pressure oil pipes
event that any one essential auxiliary of such systems and all pipes passing through fuel oil storage tanks shall be
becomes inoperative, the fuel oil supply to boilers and made of steel, having flanged or other approved joints
engines can be maintained. Partial reduction of the suitable for a working pressure of not less than 0,7 MPa. The
propulsion capability may be accepted, however, when it is flanges shall be machined and the jointing material shall be
demonstrated that the safe operation of the vessel is not impervious to oil. Where the pipes are 25,0 mm bore or less,
impaired (see 1.2.7.4). they may be of seamless copper or copper alloy, except those
which pass through fuel oil storage tanks.
7.14.1.5

June 2018 93
Grey cast iron valves may be used in piping 7.14.4 Drainage arrangements of fuel oil tanks
systems where the design pressure is lower than 0,7 MPa and
the design temperature is below 60°C. For fuel oil sampling and draining water from the
bottom of the daily service and storage tanks, these tanks
7.14.3.5 Fuel oil pipes, as a rule, shall not be led directly shall be fitted with self-closing valves or cocks, and means
above the internal combustion engines, heating appliances, shall be provided for collecting all waste oil in drain tanks.
exhaust gas pipes, steam pipes (except heating steam coils), The drain pipes shall be fitted with sight glasses.
steam boilers and boiler uptake. Where trays are available, open funnels may be used instead
In exceptional cases, it is permitted to lead the fuel of sight glasses.
oil pipes above the said equipment provided that in these
positions the pipes have no detachable joints or that in 7.14.5 Arrangements for collection of leakage fuel oil
necessary places provision is made for trays preventing the 7.14.5.1 Tanks not forming part of vessel’s hull (non-
spillage of fuel oil on the equipment. structural tanks), as well as pumps, heat exchangers, filters,
7.14.3.6 Fuel oil pipes, which, if damaged, would allow fuel burners and other equipment shall be fitted with drip trays
oil to escape from a storage or daily service tank having a where there is a possibility of fuel oil leakage.
capacity of 50 lit. and above situated above the double 7.14.5.2 Drain pipes from the drip trays shall be led into fuel
bottom, as well as the pipes intended to equalize the level of oil drain tanks. Drainage of fuel oil into bilges and overflow
fuel tanks, shall be provided with shut-off valves fitted tanks is not permitted. The coaming height of drip trays shall
directly on the tanks. These valves shall be capable of being be appropriate for the service and not less than 75,0 mm.
remotely closed from accessible places located outside the
space containing the tanks. Quick-closing valves are 7.14.5.3 The internal diameter of the drain pipes shall not be
recommended for that purpose. less than 25,0 mm.
Daily service tanks shall be provided with quick- 7.14.5.4 The ends of the drain pipes shall be led to the tank
closing valves that can be operated from the deck. If the bottom with a minimum gap. Where the drain tank is situated
operating device is concealed, the lid or cover shall not be in the double-bottom space, structural measures shall be
lockable. The operating device shall be marked in red. If the taken to prevent penetration of water into machinery spaces
device is concealed it shall be marked with a symbol for the through the open ends of the drain pipes in the event of
“quick-closing valve on the tank” in accordance with Figure damage to the shell plating.
9 of Annex 4 (ES-TRIN) with a side length of at least 10,0
Provision shall be made for an alarm device to give
cm.
warning if the fuel oil reaches the upper predetermined level
Daily service tanks of up to 50,0 l capacity in the drain tank.
mounted directly on diesel engines need not be fitted with
remote controlled shut-off valves. 7.14.5.5 Where drain pipes from the drip trays in various
watertight spaces are led into the common drain tank,
7.14.3.7 When fuel oil tanks are connected with each other, structural measures shall be taken to prevent penetration of
cross-sectional area of the connecting pipelines (fittings) water from one flooded space to the other through the open
shall be at least 1,25 times the cross-sectional area of the ends of the drain pipes.
filling pipelines for fuel intake.
7.14.6 Oily water and used oil stores
7.14.3.8 Flanged and screwed socket connections and
flexible parts in fuel oil lines shall be screened or otherwise 7.14.6.1 It shall be possible to store, on board, oily water
suitably protected to avoid, as far as practicable, oil spray or accumulated during operation. The engine room bilge is
oil leakages onto hot surfaces, into machinery air intakes, or considered to be a store for this purpose.
other sources of ignition.
7.14.6.2 In order to store used oils there shall, in the engine
The number of detachable pipe connections shall be room, be one or several specific receptacles whose capacity
limited to those which are necessary for mounting and corresponds to at least 1,5 times the quantity of the used oils
dismantling. Pipes running below engine room floor need from the sumps of all of the internal combustion engines and
normally not to be screened. transmissions installed, together with the hydraulic fluids
In general, flanged connections according to from the hydraulic fluid tanks.
recognized standards shall be used. The connections used in order to empty the
7.14.3.9 Fuel oil system valve drives, if valves are located in receptacles referred to above shall comply with European
the machinery spaces, shall be fitted on easy accessible standard EN 1305:1996.
places, above floor plating (see 7.5.6). 7.14.6.3 Where vessels are only used on short-haul
7.14.3.10 Shut-off valves in fuel return (spill) lines to tanks operation the Register may grant exceptions from the
may be permitted, ensuring that return line to the tanks under requirements of 7.14.6.2.
normal operating conditions will not be blocked.
7.14.7 Filling of fuel oil storage tanks
7.14.3.11 Glass and plastic components are not permitted in
7.14.7.1 Filling of fuel oil storage tanks shall be carried out
fuel systems.
through a permanently installed pipeline from the open deck.
Sight glasses made of glass located in vertical This pipeline shall be provided with the required fittings
overflow pipes may be permitted (see 7.11.2.4). ensuring fuel oil delivery to all storage tanks.

94 June 2018
7.14.7.2 Fuel oil tanks shall be safeguarded against fuel 7.14.8.3 Fuel tanks for engines of working gear on floating
spills during bunkering by means of appropriate on board equipment do not have to form an integral part of the hull or
technical devices. be firmly attached to it. Mobile tanks may be used, provided
If fuel oil is taken on from bunkering stations with that they comply with the following conditions:
their own technical devices to prevent fuel spills on board .1 the capacity of these tanks is not to exceed 1000,0 l;
during bunkering, the above mentioned requirement does not .2 it shall be possible to attach the tanks sufficiently firmly
apply. and to earth them;
7.14.7.3 If fuel tanks are fitted with an automatic shut-off .3 the tanks shall be made from steel of a sufficient wall
device, the sensors shall stop fuelling when the tank is 97% thickness and shall be installed in a drip tray. The latter
full: this equipment shall meet the “failsafe” requirements. shall be designed to prevent leaking fuel contaminating
If the sensor activates an electrical contact, which the waterways.
can break the circuit provided by the bunkering station by a The drip tray may be dispensed with if double-skin
binary signal, it shall be possible to transmit the signal to the tanks with a leak protection or leakage warning system are
bunkering station by means of a watertight connection plug used and which are filled only via an automatic delivery
meeting the requirements of IEC publication 60309-1:2012 valve. The provisions of .3 shall be deemed to be fulfilled if
for 40,0 to 50,0 V DC, housing colour white, earthing contact the construction of a tank has been certified and approved
position ten o'clock. according to the regulations of National standards.
7.14.7.4 The filler orifices for fuel tanks shall be marked 7.14.8.4 Fuel oil tanks directly supplying the main
distinctly. The orifice for the fuel tank filler necks shall be on propulsion unit, engines needed for safe operation of the
the deck, except for the daily service tanks. The filler neck vessel and the driving engines for bow-thrusters shall be
shall be fitted with a connection piece in accordance with fitted with a device emitting both visual and audible signals
European standard EN 12827:1999. in the wheelhouse if their level of filling is not sufficient to
ensure further safe operation.
7.14.7.5 On twin-hulled vessels, the suction pipelines shall
ensure the filling of fuel oil tanks of any of the hulls as well The low level alarm shall be fitted at a height which
as pumping of fuel oil from the tanks of one hull into the enables the vessel to reach a safe location in accordance with
tanks of the other. the class notation without refilling the daily service tank. For
level indicators of fuel oil tanks, the requirements given in
7.14.7.6 The end of the fuel oil filling pipe shall be led to 7.11.3.3 apply.
the tank bottom with a minimum gap.
7.14.8.5 Valves and pipe connections shall be attached to
7.14.7.7 Filling lines shall be led through the tank top. strengthening flanges welded to the tank surfaces. Holes for
Where this is impracticable, the filling lines shall be fitted attachment bolts shall not be drilled in the tank surfaces.
with non-return valves installed directly on the tanks. When Instead of strengthening flanges, short distance pieces of
filling line is led through tank top, which, if damaged, would rigid construction welded into the tank surfaces may be
allow fuel oil to escape from the tank situated above the accepted, the length of which is not to exceed about 1,5∙D of
double bottom, the filling pipe shall be fitted with non-return the pipe.
valve installed directly on the tank.
Threaded connections below the oil level may be
Where filling pipes are used as suction pipes, non- used up to and including DN 25, provided tapered threads
return valves shall be replaced with remote-controlled shut- will be used.
off valves operable from accessible position outside the space
in which the tank is located. 7.14.8.6 Fuel oil tanks located on open decks and
superstructure decks, as well as in other exposed places shall
7.14.7.8 Air and sounding pipes shall not be used to fill fuel be protected against the action of sunrays.
oil tanks.
7.14.8.7 Fuel oil tanks shall be separated from
7.14.8 Fuel oil tanks accommodation spaces, drinking and feed water tanks and
lubricating oil tanks by means of cofferdams.
7.14.8.1 Fuel oil shall be stored in oil-tight steel tanks which
are either an integral part of the hull or which are firmly 7.14.8.8 Fuel oil tanks shall be provided with openings
attached to the hull. If so required by the design of the vessel, having leak-proof closures (with oil-resistant seal) for the
an equivalent material in terms of fire-resistance may be tank cleaning, maintenance and inspection.
used.
7.14.8.9 Daily service tanks shall be so arranged that water
These requirements shall not apply to tanks having and residues can settle out despite the movement of the
a capacity of no more than 12,0 l that have been incorporated vessel.
in auxiliaries during their manufacture.
7.14.8.10 As a rule, the fuel oil tanks shall not be arranged in
7.14.8.2 The fuel supply shall be stored in several tanks so the machinery spaces. If the fuel oil tanks are arranged in
that, even in event of damage to one tank, the fuel supply will machinery spaces, they shall be made of steel or other
not be entirely lost (at least 1 storage tank and 1 equivalent material.
service/settling tank).
7.14.8.11 The inlet openings of suction pipes shall be located
above the drain pipes.

June 2018 95
7.14.8.12 No fuel oil tanks may be located forward of the 7.15 Lubricating oil system
collision bulkhead or aft of the aft-peak bulkhead.
7.14.8.13 Fuel oil tanks and their fittings provided in the
machinery space shall not be located directly above engines, 7.15.1.1 This Head applies to lubricating oil systems serving
boilers, exhaust pipes (see 7.12.2.3) nor in places where they all kind of installations (e.g., diesel engines, power
are likely to reach a high temperature (≥ 220°C), unless transmission systems, control and activating systems,
special arrangements are provided with the agreement of the controllable pitch propellers, disengaging couplings -
Register (adequate drip trays provided below tanks). Where clutches), for lubrication purposes.
fuel oil tanks are situated near to boilers or other hot surfaces,
7.15.1.2 For lubricating oil supply equipment forming part
the tanks shall be well insulated (see 1.2.12.7).
of:
7.14.9 Fuel oil supply system of internal combustion – diesel engines: see 2.7.2 and 2.7.3;
engines – reduction gears and couplings: see 6.9.
7.14.9.1 The equipment of fuel oil system shall be capable 7.15.1.3 Each propulsion and auxiliary engine, each
of supplying fuel oil suitably prepared and cleaned to the emergency diesel generator engine as well as their gearing
extent required for the given engine. and hydraulic coupling filling systems shall be provided with
7.14.9.2 The suctions of engine fuel pumps shall be so individual independent lubricating oil systems.
arranged as to prevent the pumping of water and sludge likely Common lubricating systems of the auxiliary
to accumulate after decanting at the lower part of daily engines are, in each case, subject to special consideration by
service tanks. the Register.
7.14.9.3 The filter fitted in the fuel oil supply line to the 7.15.1.4 Where necessary, priming pumps shall be provided
engine shall be such that it can be cleaned without for supplying lubricating oil to the engines.
interrupting the operation of the engine. For filters, the
7.15.1.5 The suction connections of lubricating oil pumps
requirements given in 2.7.3.3 and 2.7.3.4 apply.
shall be located as far as possible from oil drain pipes so that
7.14.9.4 In multi-engine installations, which are supplied neither air nor sludge can be sucked up irrespective of the
from the same fuel source, means of isolating the fuel supply inclination of the vessel.
and spill piping to individual engines shall be provided. The
7.15.1.6 If the lubricating oil pump is not fitted with a relief
means of isolation shall not affect the operation of the other
or bypass valve, such valve shall be installed on the pressure
engines, and shall be operable from a position not rendered
pipeline.
inaccessible by a fire on any of the engines.
7.15.1.7 Lubrication pumps driven by the engines shall be
7.14.9.5 Excess fuel oil from pumps or injectors shall be led
so designed that the lubricating oil supply is ensured over the
back to the daily service tanks, or to other tanks intended for
whole range of operation.
this purpose.
7.15.1.8 Extreme care shall be taken to ensure that
7.14.9.6 Emergency diesel-generator shall be provided with
lubricating oil pipes and fittings, before installation, are free
a separate fuel oil tank located in the same room. The fuel oil
from scale, sand, metal particles and other foreign matter.
from such tank shall not be used for other purposes.
The contents of that tank shall be such as to provide 7.15.2 Piping, valves and fittings
running of the engine at full load in duration at least 3 hours.
7.15.2.1 Lubricating oil systems shall be separated from
7.14.10 Fuel oil supply to boilers other systems. Lubricating oil system pipes shall not be
connected to the pipes of other systems.
7.14.10.1 Pumps supplying fuel oil to the boilers shall not be
used for other purposes. 7.15.2.2 Lubricating oil systems shall be constructed to
ensure reliable lubrication over the whole range of speed and
7.14.10.2 Pipes supplying fuel oil to the burners of each during run-down of the engines and to ensure adequate heat
boiler shall be fitted with quick-closing valve operated by transfer.
hand.
7.15.2.3 If lubricating oil drainage from the engine
This requirement applies to the boilers put into
crankcase through a flexible joint is provided, then a steel,
action by hand igniters, as well as to the boilers with fuel oil
bronze or brass valve suitable to be secured in the closed
supplied by gravity.
position shall be installed before the flexible joint.
Where an automated auxiliary boiler is installed, no
quick-closing valve is required. 7.15.2.4 For lubricating oil lines and tanks, the requirements
given in 7.14.3.2 and 7.14.3.3 apply.
7.14.10.3 Where fuel oil is supplied by gravity, filters shall be
fitted on the pipe suppling fuel oil to the burners. 7.15.3 Filters
7.14.10.4 Oil burning installation of the boilers shall comply 7.15.3.1 In systems where the lubricating oil circulates
with the requirements of 5.4. under pressure, efficient filtering shall be arranged.
7.14.10.5 Thermometers and pressure gauges shall be 7.15.3.2 Lubricating oil filters shall be fitted in the delivery
installed in appropriate places on the pipes supplying fuel oil line of the lubricating oil pumps.
to the burners.

96 June 2018
7.15.3.3 Mesh size and filter capacity shall be in accordance 7.15.7 Arrangements for collection of leakage
with the requirements of the manufacturer of the engine. lubricating oil
7.15.3.4 Main lubricating oil filters shall be fitted with In unattended machinery spaces the same
differential pressure monitoring. requirements as for fuel oil systems are valid according to
7.14.5.
7.15.3.5 For filters and filter arrangements, the requirements
given in 2.7.3.1, 2.7.3.2 and 2.7.3.5 apply. 7.16 Cooling water system
7.15.4 Lubricating oil level indicators 7.16.1 General requirements
7.15.4.1 Lubricating oil level glasses shall be connected to 7.16.1.1 This Head applies to cooling systems using the
the tanks by means of self-closing shut-off valves. For following cooling media:
lubricating oil level indicators, the requirements given in
7.11.3.3 apply. – river water (outboard water cooling system);
– fresh water (internal water cooling system).
7.15.4.2 Engines with their own lubricating oil charge shall
be provided with a means of determining the oil level from Air cooling systems will be given special
outside during operation. This requirement also applies to consideration.
reduction gears, thrust bearings and shaft bearings. 7.16.1.2 River water and fresh water cooling systems shall
be so arranged as to maintain the temperature of the cooled
7.15.5 Lubricating oil supply to internal combustion media (lubricating oil, hydraulic oil, charge air, etc.) for
engines propulsion machinery and essential equipment within the
7.15.5.1 In the case of remote starting of an engine or manufacturer’s recommended limits during all operations,
machinery requiring initial lubrication, it shall be activated including starting and manoeuvring, under the inclination
automatically before the machinery has been brought into angles and the ambient conditions specified in 1.2.4 and
operation, and efficient lubrication shall condition the start- 1.2.5.
up of such machinery. 7.16.1.3 The water cooling system of main and auxiliary
7.15.5.2 The lubrication oil drain pipes from the engine engines shall be of two-circuit type. Provision shall be also
crankcase to the circulating-discharge tank shall be located in made for direct cooling of the engine with river water from
the latter so as to be permanently submerged into the oil the river water circulating pump.
during the operation of the engine. Drain pipes from two or 7.16.1.4 Where river water is intended to be used in an
more engines shall not communicate with each other (see internal water cooling system, the construction of such a
2.5.2.4 and 2.5.2.5). system is subject to the Register approval on a case by case
7.15.5.3 The capacity of each oil filter shall exceed by 10% basis. A closed single-circuit system is permitted in vessels
the maximum capacity of the pump. less than 20,0 m in length, except tugs and pushers.
7.15.5.4 Lubricating oil system shall be fitted with control 7.16.1.5 In each circuit, it is permitted to cool several
and measuring instruments. engines (main and/or auxiliary engines) by one independently
driven pump. In this case, the capacity of the pump shall be
7.15.6 Lubricating oil tanks sufficient for simultaneous cooling of all engines when
running at maximum load. The cooling pipeline shall have a
7.15.6.1 Lubricating oil shall be stored in oil-tight steel
water control valve at inlet to each engine.
tanks which are either an integral part of the hull or which are
firmly attached to the hull. If so required by the design of the 7.16.1.6 The cooling water pump(s) may be worked from
vessel, an equivalent material in terms of fire-resistance may the engines or be driven independently. The ballast, fire or
be used. These requirements shall not apply to tanks having a other general service pumps operated only for clean water
capacity of no more than 25,0 l. Lubricating oil tanks shall may be used as standby cooling pumps.
not have common bulkheads with drinking and feed water
tanks, fuel oil tanks and accommodation spaces (see 7.16.1.7 A reserve pump with a capacity not less than that of
7.14.8.7). the main pump shall be provided in an independent river
water cooling and lubricating system for stern bearings. Any
7.15.6.2 No lubricating oil tanks shall be located forward of river water general purpose pump may be used as a reserve
the collision bulkhead. pump.
Lubricating oil tanks and their fittings provided in 7.16.1.8 Where cooling water pumps can develop a pressure
the machinery space shall not be located directly above head greater than the design pressure of the system, they shall
engines, boilers, exhaust pipes nor in places where they are be provided with relief valves on the pump discharge to
likely to reach a high temperature, unless special effectively limit the pump discharge pressure to the design
arrangements are provided with the agreement of the Register pressure of the system.
(adequate drip trays provided below tanks).
7.16.2 Piping arrangements
7.15.6.3 The suction pipes from the lubricating oil tanks
situated outside the double bottom shall be fitted with shut- River water cooling system shall be supplied from
off valves installed directly on the tanks. at least two interconnected river water inlets arranged in
engine room (see 7.7.2.10). On vessels with one main engine
7.15.6.4 The filler orifices for lubricating oil tanks shall be
of less than 220,0 kW power output, one river water inlet is
marked distinctly.

June 2018 97
permitted located in the machinery space, in this case 7.16.8 Fresh water coolers (keel coolers)
provision shall be made for two parallel-connected filters.
7.16.8.1 For fresh water coolers forming part of the vessel’s
7.16.3 Cooling water filters shell plating and for special outboard coolers, provision shall
be made for satisfactory de-aeration of the cooling water.
On the suction lines of water cooling system Drawings of the cooler and the cooler arrangement shall be
servicing the propulsion and auxiliary internal combustion submitted for approval.
engines, the filters shall be fitted behind the river suction
chests. 7.16.8.2 Fresh water coolers shall be fitted with pressure
gauge connections at the fresh water inlet and outlet.
The river suction chests and piping systems shall be
arranged so as to enable the filters to be cleaned without 7.16.8.3 Coolers external to the hull (chest coolers and keel
having to stop the cooling pumps. coolers) shall be fitted with isolating valves at the shell.
7.16.4 Expansion tank of fresh water cooling 7.17 Compressed air system
7.16.4.1 The fresh water cooling system shall be provided 7.17.1 General requirements
with expansion tank, in which water level shall be higher
than the highest level of water in the engine. The expansion 7.17.1.1 This Head applies to compressed air systems
tank shall be connected to the suction pipelines of the pumps intended for essential services, and in particular to:
and may be common for the cooling system of several – starting of engines;
engines.
– control and monitoring.
7.16.4.2 The tank shall be fitted with a filling connection, a
7.17.1.2 The compressed air systems shall be so designed
drain and an air pipe and shall be fitted with an alarm to give
that, in the event of failure of one air compressor or one air
warning on the minimum water level.
receiver intended for starting, control purposes or other
In closed circuits, the expansion tanks shall be essential services, the air supply to such services can be
fitted with overpressure/underpressure valves. maintained.
7.16.4.3 Expansion tank shall be provided with manhole for 7.17.1.3 The compressed air system for starting the main
inspection and cleaning. and auxiliary engines shall be arranged so that the necessary
initial charge of starting air can be developed on board vessel
7.16.5 Cooling of internal combustion engines
without external aid. If, for this purpose, an emergency air
7.16.5.1 In the cooling system of engines, the arrangement compressor or an electric generator is required, these units
of the river water discharge pipes shall be such that the shall be powered by a hand-starting fuel oil engine or a hand-
highest cooled spaces of the engines, air coolers, water operated compressor.
coolers and lubricating oil coolers are always filled with
7.17.1.4 Pressure water tanks and other tanks connected to
water and formation of trapped zones is excluded.
the compressed air system shall be considered as pressure
vessels and shall comply with the requirements in 5.5.
7.16.5.2 The cooling system shall be fitted with
7.17.1.5 For compressed air connections for blowing
thermometers and cooling water temperature control devices
through river chests refer to 7.7.1.9. For the compressed air
(see 2.9.2 and 2.9.4). The suitable alarms shall be provided to
supply to pneumatically operated valves refer to 7.6.4.
warn of the limit value of the cooling water temperature.
7.16.5.3 On ice-strengthened vessels, it is recommended to 7.17.2 Number and capacity of starting air receivers
provide arrangements for heating the engines prior to 7.17.2.1 Compressed air system of propulsion engines shall
starting. Engines shall be heated by heated cooling water, be of such a construction as to ensure simultaneous starting
steam shall not be used for this purpose. and reversing of all propulsion engines.
7.16.6 Heat exchangers and coolers 7.17.2.2 The starting air of the propulsion engines and the
associated pneumatic control systems shall be stored in not
7.16.6.1 The coolers of cooling water systems, engines and
less than two independent air receivers or in two independent
equipment shall be so designed to ensure that the specified
groups of several air receivers. Each of these two air
cooling water temperatures can be maintained under all
receivers or each group of them shall have a capacity
operating conditions. Cooling water temperatures shall be
sufficient to provide starting air in the amount not less than
adjusted to meet the requirements of engines and equipment.
50% of that required in 7.17.2.3, 7.17.2.4 and 7.17.2.6.
7.16.6.2 Shut-off valves shall be provided at the inlet and
7.17.2.3 The total capacity of the air receivers for starting
outlet of all heat exchangers. Every heat exchanger and
and reversing of the propulsion engines shall ensure, without
cooler shall be provided with a vent and a drain.
replenishment, not less than 12 consecutive starts alternating
7.16.7 Emergency generating units between ahead and astern speed of each cold and ready to
start conditions, as well as the function of control systems.
Internal combustion engines driving emergency
generating units shall be fitted with independent cooling
systems. Such cooling systems shall be made proof against
freezing.

98 June 2018
7.17.2.4 The total capacity of air receivers for starting of the 7.17.3 Compressors
propulsion engines connected to a controllable pitch propeller
or some other device, enabling to start without opposite 7.17.3.1 The number of the main air compressors, as a rule,
torque, shall be sufficient to provide not less than 6 starts of shall be at least two. The total capacity of the main
each engine being in cold and ready to start conditions, and compressors shall be sufficient for the filling of the main air
where there are more than two engines, at least 3 starts of receivers during one hour for starting the main engines,
each engine. At the same time, the function of engine control beginning from the atmospheric pressure to the pressure
air systems shall be provided. required to carry out the number of starts and manoeuvres
referred to in 7.17.2.3 and 7.17.2.4. One of the main
7.17.2.5 For starting of the auxiliary engines provision shall compressors may be attached to the engine. The capacity of
be made for at least one air receiver with a capacity sufficient individual main compressors shall be approximately the
for carrying out 6 starts of the engine of maximum output, in same. The capacity of the independently driven compressors
cold and ready to start conditions. shall not be less than 50% of that required of all the main
On special agreement with the Register such air compressors, but not less than the air consumption for the
receiver may be omitted. tyfon according to 7.17.2.6.
In this case shall be possible to start auxiliary 7.17.3.2 In vessels of restricted areas of navigation with
engines from one air receiver or one group of air receivers of reversible propulsion engines, it is permitted to install one
the main engines. independently driven compressor, whereas in vessels with
propulsion engines of non-reversible type, one attached
7.17.2.6 It is permitted that the starting air stored in one air compressor, if provision is made for the air receivers to be
receiver or in a group of air receivers of the propulsion
filled by shore-based facilities. The capacity of the
engines according to 7.17.2.2 is used to feed the tyfon whistle compressors shall be in compliance with the requirements of
and other needs of the vessel, provided the capacity of the air 7.17.3.1.
receiver is increased by an amount of air specified below for
special air receiver of the tyfon, or where the air receiver is 7.17.3.3 Air compressors shall be located in spaces provided
fitted with automatic replenishing means or with warning with sufficient ventilation.
alarms, which shall operate as soon as the pressure in the air
receiver goes down by not more than 0,5 MPa below the 7.17.4 Piping arrangement
working pressure. 7.17.4.1 Pipes intended for filling air receivers shall be led
Where an air receiver is fitted especially for the directly from the compressor to the air receiver and shall be
tyfon, its capacity shall be determined so that the tyfon will completely separate from the starting air pipes.
be able to work continuously for 2 min. An hourly
performance of compressor shall not be less than that 7.17.4.2 Each of the starting air receivers specified in 7.17.2
required to provide continuous operation of tyfon during 8 shall be capable of being filled from each main compressor
min. specified in 7.17.3. For air receivers interconnection, see
7.17.2.7.
Where an air receiver is anticipated to feed the
tyfon and control systems, as well as for other vessel 7.17.4.3 Non-return shut-off valves shall be installed on the
purposes, the capacity of the air receiver shall be increased as discharge pipes, behind each compressor.
compared with that designed for tyfon only. Provision shall The piping supplying starting air to each engine
be made for automatic replenishing or signaling means which shall have a non-return valve installed before the starting
shall operate as soon as the amount of air in the air receiver is valve of the engine.
such as required for tyfon only.
The non-return valve may be omitted, if provision
7.17.2.7 The air receivers of auxiliary engines indicated in is made in the engine design for suitable safety devices
7.17.2.5 may be replenished from the propulsion air receivers protecting the piping from the effects of an internal explosion
stated in 7.17.2.6. Any possibility of back flow shall be (see 2.10.2.3).
excluded.
7.17.4.4 The temperature of air entering the receivers, shall
7.17.2.8 Where a compressed air system is used as one of not exceed 90°C. Where required, provision shall be made
the means of starting the emergency diesel generator, the own for appropriate coolers.
independent air receiver may be filled from main and The compressed gas piping shall not be led under
auxiliary starting air receivers through a suitable non-return the engine room floor plating.
valve fitted in the emergency generator room, or from an
electric air compressor supplied from the emergency 7.17.4.5 The compressed air piping shall be led as straight
switchboard. as possible with a slope for water drainage. The pipes shall
not have a slope in the direction of the master starting valve
Compressed air in the starting air receiver shall be
of the engine.
sufficient for at least three consecutive starts at all times.
7.17.4.6 Suitable arrangements for separating accumulations
of oil and water shall be fitted on the pipes between
compressors and receivers, unless draining arrangements are
fitted on the compressors.
7.17.4.7 Means shall be provided to prevent overpressure in
any part of compressed air systems.

June 2018 99
If air is led from a safety valve or a safety plug of 7.18.1.7 The suction head of feed pumps shall be such as to
air receivers outside the machinery space (open air - see prevent cavitation as far as possible.
7.4.4.3), the pipeline cross section shall not be less than twice
the cross sectional area of a safety valve or a safety plug. 7.18.2 Piping arrangement
Suitable arrangements for water drain shall be 7.18.2.1 In open circuit feed systems the feed water pumps
provided on the pipeline. shall be provided with suctions from the hot well and from
the feed water storage tanks.
7.17.4.8 Only type tested hose assemblies made of metallic
materials may be used in starting air lines of diesel engines 7.18.2.2 Feed water systems for boilers
which are permanently kept under pressure. a) Each boiler shall be provided with a main and an
auxiliary feed water systems;
7.18 Boiler feed water and circulating
arrangement, condensate recirculation b) each feed water system shall be fitted with a shut-off
valve and a check valve at the boiler inlet. Where the
7.18.1 Feed water pumps shut-off valve and the check valve are not directly
connected in series, the intermediate pipe shall be fitted
7.18.1.1 Each essential auxiliary boiler or a group of boilers with a drain;
shall be provided with at least two independent feed water
pumps. c) each feed water pump shall be fitted with a shut-off valve
on the suction side and a screw-down non-return valve on
For auxiliary boilers which are not intended for the delivery side. The pipes shall be so arranged that each
essential services, as well as the exhaust gas boilers so pump can supply each feed water system;
constructed that they can be left without water when heated
by exhaust gases, one feed water pump may be accepted. d) continuous flow boilers need not to be fitted with the
valves required in b) provided that the heating of the
7.18.1.2 For boilers with manual feed regulation the boiler is automatically switched off should the feed water
capacity of each pump shall not be less than 1,5 times the supply fail and that the feed water pump supplies only
rated capacity of the boilers, and for boilers with automatic one boiler.
control systems, not less than 1,15 times their rated capacity.
7.18.2.3 Structural measures shall be taken to prevent the
Where several feed water pumps are installed, their feed water being contaminated by oil and oily water.
adopted capacity shall be such that in the event of failure of
any of the pumps the total capacity of the rest of the pumps is 7.18.2.4 Feed water systems may not pass through tanks
not less than the capacity required in the foregoing for each which do not contain feed water (see 7.8.2.2).
pump.
7.18.2.5 Unless overpressure is prevented by the pump
The capacity of each feed water pump of a characteristics, means shall be provided which will prevent
continuous flow boiler shall not be less than the rated overpressure in any part of the feed water systems.
capacity of the boiler.
7.18.2.6 Feed pumps and pipes shall be provided with
7.18.1.3 Special requirements may be approved for the valves so arranged that any one pump can be overhauled
capacity of the feed water pumps for plants incorporating a while the boilers are operating at full load.
combination of oil fired and exhaust gas boilers.
7.18.3 Tanks
7.18.1.4 Feed water pumps shall be so arranged or equipped
that no backflow of water can occur when the pumps are not 7.18.3.1 One storage tank may be considered sufficient for
in operation. auxiliary boiler units.
Feed water pumps shall be used only for feeding 7.18.3.2 Feed water tanks shall be separated from tanks
boilers. containing fuel oil and lubricating oil by cofferdams.
7.18.1.5 For electric drives, a separate lead from the
7.18.4 Boiler water circulating systems
common bus-bar to each pump motor is sufficient.
7.18.4.1 Each forced-circulation boiler shall be equipped
7.18.1.6 Feed water pumps shall be so laid out that the with two circulating pumps powered independently of each
delivery pressure can satisfy the following requirements: other. Failure of the circulating pump in operation shall be
– the required capacity according to 7.18.1.2 shall be signalled by an alarm. The alarm may only be switched off if
achieved against the maximum permissible working a circulating pump is started or when the boiler firing is shut
pressure of the steam producer; down.
– the safety valves shall have a capacity equal 1,0 times the 7.18.4.2 The provision of only one circulating pump for
approved steam output at 1,1 times the permissible each boiler is sufficient if:
working pressure.
– the boilers are heated only by gases whose temperature
The resistances to flow in the piping between the does not exceed 400°C; or
feed water pump and the boiler shall be taken into
consideration. – a common stand-by circulating pump is provided which
can be connected to any boiler; or
In the case of continuous flow boilers the total
resistance of the boiler shall be taken into account. – the burners of oil-fired auxiliary boilers are so arranged
that they are automatically shut-off should the circulating
pump fail and the heat stored in the boiler does not cause

100 June 2018
any unacceptable evaporation of the water present in the The surface temperature of steam systems in the
boiler. pump rooms of tank vessels may nowhere exceed 220°C.
One circulating pump is sufficient for continuous It shall be ensured that the steam lines are fitted
flow boilers. with sufficient expansion arrangements.
7.18.5 Condensate recirculation 7.19.11 Pipe penetrations through bulkheads and decks
shall be insulated to prevent heat conduction.
The condensate of all heating systems used to heat
oil (fuel, lubricating, cargo oil, etc.) shall be led to 7.19.12 Wherever necessary, machines and apparatus in
condensate observation tanks. These tanks shall be fitted with steam systems shall be protected against foreign matter by
air vents. steam strainers.
7.19 Steam systems 7.19.13 Welded connections in steam systems are subject to
the applicable requirements of the Rules, Part 26 – Welding.
7.19.1 Where two or more boilers are connected to a
common steam line, a non-return valve shall be fitted on the Pipe joints shall be as few as practicable and
steam pipe of each boiler before connection to the common preferably butt welded.
line. These valves may not be fitted if the stop valves of the
7.20 Thermal oil systems
boilers are of non-return shut-off type.
7.19.2 The blow-down and the scum valves of two or
more boilers may be connected to a common discharge, 7.20.1.1 Thermal oil installation is defined as an
provided a non-return shut-off valve is fitted between each arrangement in which thermal oil is heated and circulated for
boiler and a common discharge. the purpose of heating cargo or fuel oil or for production of
steam and hot water for auxiliary purpose.
7.19.3 Steam lines shall be so installed and supported that
expected stresses due to thermal expansion, external loads 7.20.1.2 This Head applies to all thermal oil systems
and shifting of the supporting structure under both normal involving organic liquids heated below their initial boiling
and interrupted service conditions will be safely temperature at atmospheric pressure by means of:
compensated. – oil fired heaters;
7.19.4 Every steam pipe and every fitting connected – exhaust gas heaters; or
thereto through which steam may pass shall be so designed, – electric heaters.
constructed and installed as to withstand the maximum
7.20.1.3 Thermal oil systems shall be so designed as to:
working stresses to which it may be subjected.
– avoid overheating of the thermal oil and contact with air;
7.19.5 In the steam line supplying machinery and – take into account the compatibility of the thermal oil with
arrangements designed for a lower pressure than the boiler the heated products in case of contact due to leakage of
pressure, reducing valves shall be fitted and requirements of coils or heater tubes;
7.4.4.2 shall be complied with.
– prevent oil from coming into contact with sources of
7.19.6 As far as practicable, the steam pipelines within the ignition.
engine and boiler rooms shall be led in the upper parts of
7.20.1.4 Thermal oil shall not be used for the direct heating
these spaces, in a position accessible for observation and
of:
servicing. In general, the steam lines shall not be led near the
fuel oil tanks and the electric equipment. – accommodation;
Leading of steam lines under the floor plating of – fresh drinking water;
engine and boiler rooms, with the exception of boiler heating – liquid cargoes with flashpoints below 60°C, except there
coils and blow-off pipes, is not permitted. is a separate secondary system located completely within
the cargo area.
7.19.7 Steam lines are not to pass through accommodation
spaces, unless they are intended for heating purposes. 7.20.1.5 All parts of the system in which thermal oil can
expand due to the absorption of heat from outside, shall be
7.19.8 Every steam consuming unit shall be capable of safeguarded against excessive pressure.
being shut off from the system.
7.20.1.6 Thermal oil shall be stored in oil tight steel tanks
7.19.9 Steam lines shall be so installed that water pockets which are either an integral part of the hull or which are
will be avoided. Means shall be provided for the reliable firmly attached to the hull.
drainage of the piping system. Steam traps have to be
7.20.1.7 Thermal oil tanks and their fittings shall not be
approved by the Register.
located directly above engines or exhaust pipes.
7.19.10 Steam lines shall be effectively insulated to prevent 7.20.1.8 Thermal oil tanks and their pipelines and other
heat losses. At points where there is a possibility of contact, accessories shall be so located and equipped that thermal oil
the surface temperature of the insulated steam lines may not cannot spread either inside the vessel or on deck and cannot
exceed 80°C. Wherever necessary, additional protection be ignited by hot surfaces or electrical equipment.
arrangements against unintended contact shall be provided.

June 2018 101
7.20.1.9 No thermal oil tanks may be located forward of the 7.20.3 Design and equipment of expansion, storage and
collision bulkhead. drainage tanks
7.20.1.10 All vessels (tanks), including those open to the 7.20.3.1 Expansion tank (vessel)
atmosphere, shall be designed for a pressure of at least 0,2 7.20.3.1.1 An expansion tank shall be provided in thermal
MPa, unless provision has to be made for a higher working oil systems. An expansion tank shall be fitted at the highest
pressure. level of the thermal oil system.
7.20.1.11 Oil fired and exhaust fired thermal oil heaters and The space provided for expansion shall be such that
heat exchangers shall be designed, equipped and controlled in the increase in the volume of the thermal oil at the maximum
accordance with the requirements specified in 5.3 and 5.5. thermal oil temperature can be safely accommodated. The
following shall be regarded as minimum requirements: 1,5
7.20.1.12 For testing of thermal oil system, the requirements
times the increase in volume for charges up to 1000,0 l, and
given in 5.3.20 apply. 1,3 times the increase for charges over 1000,0 l. The volume
7.20.2 Installation of thermal oil plants is the total quantity of thermal oil contained in the system up
to the lowest liquid level in the expansion tank.
7.20.2.1 Thermal oil heaters normally shall be located in 7.20.3.1.2 The expansion tank shall be so designed,
spaces separated from main and auxiliary machinery spaces. installed and connected to the circuit as to ensure that the
Where demonstrated that the above mentioned temperature inside the tank remains below 50°C.
arrangement is not practical, thermal oil heaters located in 7.20.3.1.3 An alarm for low liquid level shall be installed,
machinery spaces and protected by adequate screening may e.g. by means of an adjustable level switch on the level
be accepted, subject to special consideration by the Register indicator, in order to give an early warning of a falling liquid
for each particular case. level in the expansion tank (e.g. in case of a leakage). An
7.20.2.2 The arrangement shall provide easy access to all alarm is also to be provided for the maximum liquid level.
parts of the thermal oil plant for operation, inspection, When the level of liquid drops below the
maintenance and cleaning. permissible level, the heating of thermal liquid in boilers
shall be stopped automatically and the circulating pumps
7.20.2.3 If oil fired thermal oil heaters are installed in
shall be shut down.
separate room, the room shall have mechanical ventilation,
automatic fire detecting and an approved fixed fire- 7.20.3.1.4 For rapid drainage in case of danger, a quick
extinguishing system, operated from an easily accessible drainage valve shall be fitted directly to the expansion tank
place outside the room. Stop of ventilation, oil-burner and with remote control from outside the space in which the
oil-booster pumps is also to be arranged outside the room. equipment is installed. The quick drainage line may be routed
Ventilating ducts shall be possible to close by means of flaps. jointly with the overflow line to the drainage tank.
7.20.3.1.5 The opening of the quick drainage valve or the
7.20.2.4 Thermal oil piping shall be installed so as to
actuation of the emergency shut-off device shall activate an
provide sufficient flexibility to accommodate thermal
alarm. At the same time, a non-safety related shut-down of
expansion. The use of bellows or similar expansion elements
the oil burner at the oil fired heater should be carried out.
in thermal oil piping is not permitted within machinery
spaces. The thermal oil pipes shall be suitably supported and 7.20.3.1.6 Where the expansion tank is installed outside
anchored. the engine room, the quick drainage valve may be replaced
by an emergency shut-off device (quick-closing valve)
7.20.2.5 Thermal oil pipes shall have welded connections, which, in the event of danger, prevents the egress of large
with the exception of flange connections required for quantities of thermal oil.
servicing system components. The number of detachable pipe 7.20.3.1.7 A safety expansion line shall connect the
connections (flanged joints) shall be minimized. system to the expansion tank. This shall be installed with a
7.20.2.6 Pipe penetrations through bulkheads and decks continuous positive gradient and shall be dimensioned in a
shall be insulated against heat conduction to the bulkhead. way that a pressure increase of more than 10% above the
Pipelines passing through cargo holds shall be installed in maximum permissible working pressure in the system is
such a way that no damage can be caused. avoided.
7.20.2.7 Devices for safe sampling shall be provided at a 7.20.3.2 Thermal oil storage and drainage tanks
suitable location in the thermal oil circuit (see 5.3.15). 7.20.3.2.1 At the lowest point of the system, a drainage
tank shall be located, the capacity of which is sufficient to
7.20.2.8 Any thermal oil emitted shall be safely drained off.
hold the volume of the largest isolatable system section.
Drip trays with drains to a waste oil tank shall be arranged
under all plant components, e.g. pumps, filters, etc., where 7.20.3.2.2 A separate storage tank shall be provided to
leakage may occur. compensate any losses. The stock of thermal oil shall be at
least 40% of the capacity of the system. Depending on the
7.20.2.9 The laying of pipes through accommodation, public system design, a smaller stock may be acceptable.
or service spaces (see 1.1.4.10) is not permitted. Thermal oil
7.20.3.2.3 In exceptional cases, approval may be given for
pipes passing through main and auxiliary machinery spaces
the drainage tank and the storage tank to be combined.
shall be restricted as far as possible.
Combined storage/drainage tanks shall be dimensioned in a
way that in addition to the stock of thermal oil, there is
volume for the content of the largest isolatable system
section.

102 June 2018
7.20.3.3 Drain pipes 7.20.5.2 Non-return valves shall be fitted in the pressure
Where provided, drain pipes of thermal oil tanks lines of the pumps. Valves in return pipes shall be secured in
shall be fitted with self-closing valves or cocks. the open position.
7.20.3.4 Air pipes 7.20.6 Filters

7.20.3.4.1 All air pipes shall be led to open deck and shall 7.20.6.1 A device which efficiently filters the thermal oil
be arranged with drainable water traps at the lowest points. shall be provided in the circuit. In the case of essential
7.20.3.4.2 Air pipes fitted to the expansion and drainage services, the filters provided for this purpose shall be so
tanks shall be suitably sized to allow the quick gravity arranged that they can be easily cleaned without stopping the
drainage referred to in 7.20.3.1.4. thermal oil supply.
7.20.3.4.3 The applicable requirements of 7.11.1 shall be 7.20.6.2 The fineness of the filter mesh shall comply with
complied with. the requirements of the thermal oil heating installation
7.20.3.5 Overflow pipes manufacturer.
7.20.3.5.1 The expansion tank shall be fitted with an 7.20.7 Construction of thermal oil piping systems
overflow pipe led to the drainage or storage tank. This
overflow pipe may be combined with the quick draining line 7.20.7.1 Materials
provided for in 7.20.3.1.4. 7.20.7.1.1 Casings of pumps, valves and fittings shall be
7.20.3.5.2 The applicable requirements of 7.11.2 shall be made of steel, nodular cast iron having mainly ferritic
complied with. structure or other ductile material (see 1.1.4.13).
7.20.7.1.2 Tubes and pipes for thermal oil shall be
7.20.3.6 Sounding pipes and level indicators seamless steel tubes and pipes or welded tubes and pipes
Sounding pipes shall comply with the provisions of which are approved as equivalent to seamless types.
7.11.3. Level indicators shall comply with the provisions of 7.20.7.1.3 Grey cast iron and copper alloys may not be
7.11.3.3. used for mountings and fittings of thermal oil heaters.
Expansion tanks shall be equipped with a type 7.20.7.1.4 The material of the sealing joints shall be
approved liquid level indicators with a mark indicating the suitable for permanent operation at the design temperature
lowest permissible thermal oil level. and resistant to the thermal oil.
Level indicators made from glass, Plexiglas or
plastic are not permitted. 7.20.7.2 Pipe connections
7.20.7.2.1 Pipe connections shall comply with 7.4.7 and to
7.20.4 Pumps be suitable for the design temperature of the thermal oil
7.20.4.1 At least two circulating pumps shall be provided for system.
thermal oil, of such a capacity as to maintain a sufficient flow 7.20.7.2.2 Screw couplings of a type approved by the
in the heaters with any one pump out of action. Register may be accepted for pipes of an outside diameter not
However, for circulating systems supplying non- exceeding 15,0 mm provided they are fitted with cutting rings
essential services, one circulating pump only may be or equivalent arrangements.
accepted. 7.20.7.3 Insulation and shielding
7.20.4.2 It shall be possible to stop the circulating pumps by All insulation shall be covered with an outer
an emergency switch from a position outside the room in barrier, which shall be impervious to liquid. In areas and
which they are installed. locations where pipes may be exposed to mechanical impact,
the outer barrier shall be made of galvanized steel plates or
7.20.4.3 Circulating pumps shall be provided with pressure aluminium plates of sufficient impact strength to resist
gauges at a suitable position on both the delivery and suction deformations from normal wear and strain.
sides.
7.20.8 Thermal oils
7.20.4.4 A transfer pump shall be provided for filling the
system as well as thermal oil transfer and for draining the 7.20.8.1 The thermal oil has to remain serviceable for at
system. least 1 year at the specified thermal oil temperature. Its
suitability for further use shall be verified at appropriate
7.20.4.5 The pumps shall be so mounted that any oil leakage
intervals, but at least once a year.
can be safely disposed of. The shaft sealing of circulating
pumps must be so designed that oil leakage cannot occur in 7.20.8.2 Thermal oils may only be used within the limits set
an unacceptable manner and unacceptable leakage rate. by the manufacturer. A safety margin of about 500C shall be
maintained between the discharge temperature and the
7.20.4.6 Notices shall be posted at the control stations of the
maximum permissible film temperature specified by the
circulating pumps stating that the pumps shall be in operation
manufacturer.
at least for 10 minutes after stop of burners.
7.20.8.3 Precautions shall be taken to protect the thermal oil
7.20.5 Valves in thermal oil systems from oxidation.
7.20.5.1 Valves shall be designed for a nominal pressure of 7.20.8.4 Copper and copper alloys, which lead due to their
PN16. Valves shall be mounted in accessible positions. catalytic effect to an increased ageing of the thermal oil, shall
Bellow sealed valves shall preferably be used. be avoided or oils with specific additives shall be used.

June 2018 103
7.21 Drinking (potable) water system transporting sanitary sewage shall not be led over the
drinking water tanks.
7.21.1 Vessels with accommodation spaces shall be
provided with a drinking water system for the purpose of 7.21.9 Pressure vessels for the storage of drinking water
drinking, cooking and dish washing and water for sanitary shall be filled with compressed air of natural composition.
purpose (fresh water). Drinking water shall be supplied to the Where the compressed air is taken from tanks of
vessel by flexible hose assemblies. The assemblies shall be other systems on board the vessel or from compressors, an air
durable, covered with smooth coating and fitted with marked filter or oil trap shall be fitted on the filling pipe just before
connections for shore hydrants. Filling connections shall be the drinking water tank.
located sufficiently high above deck (not less than 400,0 mm)
This requirement is not applicable where the
and shall be fitted with a closing device. Filling connections
pressure vessel for the storage of drinking water is provided
shall not be fitted to air pipes.
with a membrane separating the drinking water from the
The filling connections shall be so marked as to compressed air.
warn the user against introducing other liquids.
7.21.10 Pressure vessels for the storage of drinking water
7.21.2 Separate drinking water pumps shall be provided shall be either approved by the Register, or made in
for drinking water systems. accordance with the relevant standards under the survey of a
Drinking water pumps shall not be used for other competent technical inspection body.
services. The pressure lines of the pumps of drinking water
pressure tanks shall be fitted with screw-down non-return 7.22 Scuppers and sanitary discharges
valves.
7.22.1 For vessels of less than 25,0 m in length and non-
7.21.3 Drinking water installations shall: propelled vessels, Register may consider and approve
deviation from below mentioned requirements.
– on their inner surfaces be made of a material which
resists corrosion and poses no physiological danger; 7.22.2 Scuppers, sufficient in number and suitable in size,
– be free of pipe sections where a regular flow of water is shall be provided to permit the drainage of water likely to
not guaranteed; and accumulate in the spaces which are not located in the vessel’s
– be protected against excessive heating. bottom.
7.21.4 In addition to 7.21.3, drinking water tanks shall: 7.22.3 The number of scuppers and sanitary discharge
openings in the shell plating shall be reduced to a minimum
– have a capacity of at least 150,0 l per person normally either by making each discharge serve as many as possible of
living on board, and at least per crew member; the sanitary and other pipes, or in any other satisfactory
– have a suitable, lockable opening to enable the inside to manner.
be cleaned;
– have a water level indicator. 7.22.4 Except otherwise specified, the design of scuppers
and sanitary discharges shall, in general, comply with
7.21.5 Air/overflow pipes shall be extended above the recognized national or international standard acceptable to
open deck and shall be protected against the entry of foreign the Register (reference is made to ISO 15749-1 to -5, as
bodies, dust or insects by a fine corrosion-resistant mesh applicable).
screen and may not be routed through tanks which do not
contain drinking water. 7.22.5 Scuppers from the superstructures and the deck-
houses shall be led on vessel’s side.
Sounding pipes shall terminate sufficiently high
above deck and may not be laid through tanks which contain 7.22.6 Scuppers from cargo spaces, other than ro-ro
other media than water. spaces, intended for the carriage of motor vehicles with fuel
in their tanks for their own propulsion shall not be led to
7.21.6 Drinking water tanks (non-structural and structural machinery spaces or other places where sources of ignition
tanks) shall be separated from other liquid tanks by means of may be present.
cofferdams. Drinking water pipes shall not pass through
tanks containing other liquids (see 7.8.2.2). Connections are 7.22.7 The wall thickness of scuppers and discharge pipes
not permitted between the drinking water supply system and shall not be less than the shell plating thickness in way of the
other pipes. Pipes carrying gas or liquids other than drinking scuppers, respectively discharge pipes, but needs not exceed
water shall not pass through drinking water tanks (see 8,0 mm.
7.8.2.2).
7.22.8 All shell fittings and valves required by this Head
7.21.7 Drinking water tanks shall be constructed of shall be of steel, bronze or other approved ductile material
stainless steel or any other material which is not harmful for (see 1.1.4.13). Valves of grey cast iron or similar material are
health and which shall not deteriorate water properties. The not acceptable. All scupper and discharge pipes to which this
Register may accept the use of other materials in the case the Head refers shall be of steel or other equivalent material and
internal tank surfaces are covered with suitable protective in compliance with the requirements of the Rules, Part 25 –
lining or coating which is not detrimental for health and shall Metallic material.
not deteriorate water properties. Plastic shall not be used for the portion of discharge
7.21.8 Location of drinking water tanks shall preclude the line from the shell to the first valve.
possibility of heating the water inside the tanks. Pipes

104 June 2018
7.22.9 Where valves are required to have positive means 7.23.1.8 Arrangement of the hydraulic oil tanks, shall meet
of closing, such means shall be readily accessible and the requirements of 7.20.1.6 to 7.20.1.9.
provided with an indicator showing whether the valve is open
or closed. 7.23.1.9 Provisions shall be made to allow the drainage of
the hydraulic oil contained in the installation to a suitable
7.22.10 Where plastic pipes are used for sanitary discharges collecting tank. Suitable oil collecting arrangements (e.g. drip
and scuppers, the valve at the shell shall be operated from trays) for leaks shall be fitted below hydraulic valves,
outside the space in which the valve is located. cylinders, filters, pumps etc.
7.22.11 Where scupper and sanitary discharge pipes are led 7.23.1.10 Arrangements shall be made for connecting a
through cargo spaces, the pipes and the valves with their pressure gauge where necessary in the piping system.
controls shall be adequately protected by strong casings or 7.23.2 Documentation to be submitted
guards.
The diagram of the hydraulic system together with
7.22.12 As a rule, scupper and sanitary discharge pipes are drawings of the cylinders containing all the data necessary
not to pass through fuel oil tanks or cargo oil tanks. Scupper for assessing the system, e.g. operating data, descriptions,
and sanitary discharge pipes are normally not to pass through materials used, etc., shall be submitted to the Register for
fresh and drinking water tanks. approval.
7.22.13 Where sanitary discharges and scuppers lead 7.23.3 Materials
overboard through the shell in way of machinery spaces, the
fitting at the shell of a locally operated positive closing valve 7.23.3.1 Components fulfilling a major function in the
together with a non-return valve inboard may be accepted. power transmission system normally shall be made of steel or
cast steel in accordance with the Rules Part 25 – Metallic
The control of the valves shall be in an easily
materials. The use of other materials is subject to special
accessible position.
agreement with Register.
7.23 Hydraulic systems Hydraulic cylinders are preferably to be made of
steel, cast steel or nodular cast iron having mainly ferritic
7.23.1 General requirements structure.
7.23.1.1 Unless otherwise specified, this Head applies to all 7.23.3.2 Pipes shall be made of seamless or longitudinally
hydraulic power installations intended for essential services. welded steel tubes.
Essential services should be considered as defined in 1.1.4.9.
7.23.3.3 Materials used for all parts of hydraulic seals shall
7.23.1.2 For the purpose of this Head, a power unit is the be compatible with the working fluid at the appropriate
assembly formed by the hydraulic pump and its driving working temperature and pressure.
motor.
7.23.3.4 Testing of materials
An actuator is a component which directly converts
hydraulic pressure into mechanical action. The following components shall be tested under
supervision of Register in accordance with the Rules, Part 25
7.23.1.3 The hydraulic installations intended for steering – Metallic materials:
gears shall comply also with the requirements of 8.3. – pressure pipes with DN > 50 (see Table 7.2.10-1);
7.23.1.4 As far as practicable, hydraulic systems shall be so – hydraulic cylinders, where the product of the pressure
designed as to: and the diameter is greater than the following:
– avoid any overload of the system;
pw ⋅ di > 2000 (7.23.3-1)
– maintain the actuated equipment in the requested position
(or the driven equipment at the requested speed); where:
– avoid overheating of the hydraulic oil; pw = maximum permissible working pressure, [MPa];
– prevent hydraulic oil from coming into contact with di = inner diameter of a tube, [mm].
sources of ignition.
7.23.4 Design and equipment
7.23.1.5 As a rule, hydraulic systems shall be so designed
that, in the event that any one essential component becomes 7.23.4.1 General requirements
inoperative, the hydraulic power supply to essential services 7.23.4.1.1 When a hydraulic power system is
can be maintained. simultaneously serving one essential system and other
systems, it shall be ensured that operation of such other
7.23.1.6 Hydraulic oils used for hydraulic power
systems, or a single failure in the installation external to the
installations shall have a flashpoint not lower than 150°C and
essential system, is not detrimental to the operation of the
be suitable for the entire service temperature range. The
essential system. The requirement above applies in particular
hydraulic oil shall be replaced in accordance with the
to steering gear.
specification of the installation manufacturer. Hydraulic oil
shall not corrode or attack chemically the components in the 7.23.4.1.2 Hydraulic systems shall be supplied either from
system. a common power station or from a number of power stations,
each serving a particular system.
7.23.1.7 A failure of the hydraulic system shall not cause
damage to the associated part of machinery or equipment.

June 2018 105
7.23.4.1.3 Where the supply is from a common power 7.23.4.3 Oil level indicators
station and in the case of hydraulic drives whose piping Tanks within the hydraulic system shall be
system is connected to other hydraulic systems, a second equipped with oil level indicators.
pump set shall be provided.
An alarm located in the wheelhouse shall be fitted
7.23.4.1.4 Hydraulic systems shall not be capable of being for the lowest permissible oil level.
initiated merely by starting the pump. The movement of the
equipment shall be controlled from special operating stations. 7.23.4.4 Hose lines
The controls shall be so arranged that, as soon as they are 7.23.4.4.1 Hose assemblies comprise hoses and their
released, the movement of the hoist ceases immediately. fittings in a fully assembled and tested condition.
7.23.4.1.5 Local controls, inaccessible to unauthorized 7.23.4.4.2 High-pressure hose assemblies shall be used if
persons, shall be fitted. The movement of hydraulic necessary for flexible connections. These hose assemblies
equipment should normally be visible from the operating shall meet the requirements of 7.4.6 or an equivalent
stations. If the movement cannot be observed, audible and/or standard. The hose assemblies shall be properly installed and
visual warning devices shall be fitted. In addition, the suitable for the relevant operating media, pressures,
operating stations are then to be equipped with indicators for temperatures and environmental conditions.
monitoring the movement of the hoist.
7.23.4.4.3 In systems important to the safety of the vessel
7.23.4.1.6 In or immediately at each power unit (ram or and in spaces subjected to a fire hazard, the hose assemblies
similar) used to operate equipment which moves vertically or shall be fire-resistant or to be protected correspondingly.
rotates about a horizontal axis, suitable precautions shall be
taken to ensure a slow descent following a pipe rupture. 7.23.4.5 Filters
7.23.4.5.1 Suitable filter or other means for effective
7.23.4.2 Pipes
filtration shall be fitted in the hydraulic oil circuit. Where
7.23.4.2.1 The pipes of hydraulic systems shall be filters are fitted on the discharge side of hydraulic pumps, a
installed in such a way as to ensure maximum protection relief valve leading back to the suction or to any other
while remaining readily accessible. convenient place shall be provided on the discharge side of
7.23.4.2.2 Pipes shall be installed at a sufficient distance the pumps.
from the vessel’s shell. As far as possible, pipes should not 7.23.4.5.2 In the case of hydraulic systems and appliances
pass through cargo spaces. Pipes may be led through tanks in working continuously such as hydraulic main propulsion,
pipe tunnels only. steering gears, hydrodynamic couplings, the possibility of
7.23.4.2.3 Leading of hydraulic systems pipelines in the cleaning oil filters without stopping the system shall be
double bottom is not permitted. The pipelines of hydraulic provided.
systems are not to have detachable joints in hardly accessible
spaces. 7.23.5 Testing in the manufacturer’s works
7.23.4.2.4 Detachable pipe connections and valves in 7.23.5.1 Testing of power units
hydraulic pressure piping shall be at a safe distance from The power units of hydraulic systems are required
electrical appliances, boilers, exhaust pipes and other sources to undergo test on a test stand. The relevant works test
of ignition. certificates shall be presented at time to the final inspection
7.23.4.2.5 Hydraulic arrangements shall be protected with of the hydraulic system.
relief valves. Unless provided otherwise in other Parts of the Hydraulic pumps shall be subjected to pressure and
Rules, the opening pressure of the relief valve shall not operational tests.
exceed 1,1 of the maximum working pressure.
7.23.5.2 Pressure and tightness tests
The nominal flow rate of the relief valves shall be
so selected that the generated hydraulic oil pressure does not 7.23.5.2.1 Pressure components shall undergo a pressure
exceed 1,1 of the pre-set pressure of valve opening at the test, using the following test pressure:
maximum pump output.
t 1,5 ⋅ pw , [ MPa ]
p= (7.23.5-1)
7.23.4.2.6 Pipes shall be so installed that they are free
from stress and vibration. where:
The piping system shall be fitted with filters for pt = test pressure, [MPa];
cleaning the hydraulic fluid.
pw = maximum permissible working pressure or
Equipment shall be provided to enable the pressure at which the relief valve is open, [MPa];
hydraulic system to be vented.
= for working pressures above 20,0 MPa, the test
7.23.4.2.7 Where the hydraulic system includes pressure need not exceed p w + 10,0 MPa.
accumulators, the accumulator chamber shall be permanently
7.23.5.2.2 For pressure testing of pipes, their valves and
connected to the safety valve of the associated system. The
fittings, and also of hose assemblies, see 7.3 and 7.4.6.2.
gas chamber of the accumulators shall only be filled with
inert gases. Gas and hydraulic fluid shall be separated by Tightness tests shall be performed on components
accumulator bags, diaphragms or similar devices. to which this is appropriate.
7.23.4.2.8 Pipe lines shall not have soldered joints. 7.23.6 On board trials
7.23.4.2.9 Piping and tubing shall be flushed and cleaned
before being connected to control systems. After installation, the equipment shall undergo an
operational test.

106 June 2018
8.1.3.6 Power source

8 STEERING GEAR Power source: the power supply to the steering
drive unit and the steering gear produced by an on-board
8.1 General requirements network, batteries or an internal combustion engine.
8.1.1 Application 8.1.3.7 Actuating system
8.1.1.1 Unless otherwise specified, the requirements of this Actuating system means the hydraulic equipment
Section apply to the steering gear systems of all mechanically provided for supplying power to turn the rudder stock,
propelled vessels, and to the steering mechanism of thrusters comprising a drive unit or units, together with the associated
used as means of propulsion. pipes and fittings, and a rudder actuator. The power actuating
systems may share common mechanical components, i.e.
8.1.1.2 This Section shall be applied in analogous manner tiller, quadrant and rudder stock, or components serving to
to rudder propellers in their function as steering gear. the same purpose.
8.1.2 Documentation to be submitted 8.1.3.8 Rudder actuator
Before starting construction, all plans and Rudder actuator is the component which directly
specifications listed in the Rules, Part 1 – Classification and converts hydraulic pressure into mechanical action to move
Surveys, Chapter II, Table 3.2-11 shall be submitted to the the rudder.
Register for approval. 8.1.3.9 Manual drive
8.1.3 Definitions Manual drive applies to a system whereby manual
operation of the hand wheel moves the rudder by means of a
8.1.3.1 Steering system mechanical transmission, without any additional power
Steering system applies to all the equipment source.
necessary for steering the vessel, such as to ensure the
8.1.3.10 Rate-of-turn regulator
manoeuvrability laid down in ES-TRIN, Chapter 5
Manoeuvrability. Rate-of-turn regulator: equipment which
automatically produces and maintains a given rate of turn of
8.1.3.2 Main steering gear the vessel in accordance with preselected values.
Main steering gear is the machinery, rudder
8.1.3.11 Maximum ahead service speed
actuators, steering gear drive units, if any, and ancillary
equipment and the means of applying torque to the rudder Maximum ahead service speed is the greatest speed
stock (e.g. tiller or quadrant) necessary for effecting which the vessel is designed to maintain in service at the
movement of the rudder for the purpose of steering the vessel deepest draught.
under normal service conditions. 8.1.3.12 Maximum astern speed
8.1.3.3 Auxiliary steering gear Maximum astern speed is the speed which it is
Auxiliary steering gear is the equipment other than estimated the vessel can attain at the designed maximum
any part of the main steering gear necessary to steer the astern power at the deepest draught.
vessel in the event of failure of the main steering gear but not 8.1.3.13 Maximum working pressure
including the tiller, quadrant or components serving the same
purpose. Auxiliary steering gear may share the tiller or Maximum working pressure is the maximum
similar component with the main steering gear. expected pressure in the system when the steering gear is
operated to comply with the provisions of 8.2.3.1, b).
8.1.3.4 Steering gear control system
8.1.4 Materials and welding
Steering gear control system is the equipment by
which orders are transmitted from the wheelhouse to the 8.1.4.1 The machinery parts stated in Table 8.1.4-1 are
steering gear drive units. Steering gear control systems subject to supervision of the Register in the process of
comprise transmitters, receivers, hydraulic control pumps and manufacture, regarding their compliance with the approved
their associated motors, motor controllers, piping and cables. technical documentation and the requirements of the Rules,
Part 25 –Metallic materials and Part 26 – Welding.
8.1.3.5 Drive unit
Drive unit applies to the steering gear drive, 8.1.4.2 Manufacturer’s inspection certificate (EN 10204,
between the power source and the steering gear. type 3.1) may be accepted for low stressed parts, provided
that all characteristics for which verification is required are
The steering gear drive is:
guaranteed by such certificate.
– in the case of electric steering gear, an electric motor and
its associated electrical equipment; 8.1.4.3 Tests for materials of hydraulic piping, cylinders,
valves and accessories shall comply with the provisions of
– in the case of electrohydraulic steering gear, an electric
7.23.3.4 and Table 7.2.10-1.
motor and its associated electrical equipment and
connected pump; 8.1.4.4 In the case of small hand-operated main steering
– in the case of other hydraulic steering gear, a driving gears and small manually operated auxiliary steering gear
engine and connected pump. Register may dispense with testing the materials of individual
components such as gear shafts, etc.

June 2018 107
Table 8.1.4-1
Machinery parts which are subject to supervision of the Register
Component Material 1), 2) Relevant reference

Tiller of main and emergency gear Cast steel the Rules, Part 25, 3.12
Cast steel the Rules, Part 25, 3.12
Rudder quadrant and rudder stock yoke Forged steel the Rules, Part 25, 3.11
Pistons with rods
Cylinders Steel pipe the Rules, Part 25, 3.10.2
Drive shaft Forged steel the Rules, Part 25, 3.11
Pinions, gear wheels and tooth rims Cast steel the Rules, Part 25, 3.12
Notes:
1) For material, the requirements given in 8.1.4.6 and 8.3.2 apply.
2) Nodular cast iron and cast steel parts where dimensional stability is important e.g. tiller and rotor transmitting rudder torque by
means of keyless conical or cylindrical connection shall be stress relieved.
8.1.4.5 Materials in bolts, pins and keys shall be of rolled, 8.2.1.5 Powered steering systems shall be designed in such
forged or cast steel in accordance with the Rules, Part 25 – a way that the rudder cannot change position unintentionally.
Metallic materials. In general, such material shall have a
minimum specified tensile strength in the range of 400,0 8.2.1.6 The penetrations for the rudder stocks shall be so
N/mm2 to 900,0 N/m2. Yield stress shall not be less than 200 designed as to prevent the spread of water-polluting
N/mm2. lubricants.
8.1.4.6 The welding details and welding procedures shall 8.2.1.7 Accumulators, if any shall comply with the
be approved. All welded joints within the pressure boundary requirements stated in 5.5.6.
of a rudder actuator or connecting parts transmitting 8.2.1.8 The electrical power circuits and the steering gear
mechanical loads shall be of full penetration type or of control systems with their associated components, cables and
equivalent strength. Welded parts shall be stress relieved. pipes required by these Rules shall be separated as far as
8.1.4.7 Defects may be repaired by welding only on forged practicable throughout their length.
parts or steel castings of weldable quality. Such repairs shall 8.2.1.9 Electrical installations shall comply with the
be conducted under the supervision of the Register in requirements of the present Rules, Chapter II – Electrical
accordance with the applicable requirements of the Rules, installations.
Part 26 –Welding.
8.2.2 Number of steering gear
8.1.4.8 Where appropriate, consideration will be given to
the acceptance of non-ferrous material. 8.2.2.1 The steering system shall incorporate a powered
drive unit if so required by the forces needed to actuate the
8.2 Design and equipment rudder.
8.2.1 General requirements 8.2.2.2 Unless expressly provided otherwise, every vessel
shall be provided with a main steering gear and an auxiliary
8.2.1.1 Vessels shall be fitted with a reliable steering steering gear to the satisfaction of the Register.
system which provides at least the manoeuvrability required
Each steering gear shall be able to operate the
by ES-TRIN, Chapter 5 Manoeuvrability.
rudder on its own and independently of the other system. The
8.2.1.2 Steering gears shall be so installed that they are Register may agree to components being used jointly by the
accessible at all times and can be maintained without main and auxiliary steering gear.
difficulty.
8.2.3 Main steering gear
8.2.1.3 The steering system as a whole shall be designed
for permanent lists of up to 15°, trims up to 5° and ambient 8.2.3.1 The main steering gear and rudder stock shall be:
temperatures from – 20°C to + 50°C. a) of adequate strength and capable of steering the vessel at
maximum ahead service speed, which shall be
8.2.1.4 The construction of steering gear shall be such as to
demonstrated;
minimize local concentrations of stress.

108 June 2018
b) capable of putting the rudder over from 35° on one side 8.2.6.1.2 Where the main steering gear is arranged in
to 30° on the other side with the vessel at its deepest accordance with 8.2.7.3, two independent control systems
draught and running ahead at maximum ahead service shall be provided, both operable from the wheelhouse. This
speed and, under the same conditions, from 35° on either does not require duplication of the steering wheel or steering
side to 30° on the other side in not more than 28 seconds; lever.
c) operated by power where necessary to fulfil the 8.2.6.2 Control of the auxiliary steering gear
requirements of b); and
8.2.6.2.1 Control of the auxiliary steering gear shall be
d) so designed that they will not be damaged at maximum provided on the wheelhouse, in the steering gear
astern speed; however, this design requirement need not compartment or in another suitable position.
be proved by trials at maximum astern speed and
maximum rudder angle. 8.2.6.2.2 If the auxiliary steering gear is power operated, its
control system is also to be independent of that of the main
The main steering gear shall normally be power- steering gear.
operated.
8.2.6.3 The remote control equipment for the entire
8.2.3.2 Manual operation is acceptable for rudder stock steering system shall be installed in a permanent manner and
diameters up to 150,0 mm calculated for torsional loads in be arranged in such a way that the course selected is clearly
accordance with the Rules. visible. If the remote control equipment can be disengaged, it
In the case of multi-surface rudders controlled by a shall be equipped with an indicating device displaying the
common steering gear, the specified diameter shall be respective operational conditions “in service” or “out of
determined by applying the following formula: service”. The disposition and manipulation of the controls
shall be functional.
dT = 3 ∑ dTi3 , [ mm ] (8.2.3-1)
8.2.6.4 For systems that are subsidiary to the steering
system, such as active bow- thrusters, remote control
where:
equipment not permanently installed shall be acceptable
dT = theoretical rudder stock diameter, [mm]. provided that such a subsidiary installation can be activated
Not more than 30 turns of the hand wheel shall be by means of an override at any time within the wheelhouse.
necessary to put the rudder from one hard over position to the
8.2.6.5 Rudder-propeller, water-jet, cycloidal-propeller
other. Taking account of the efficiency of the system, the
and bow-thruster systems
force required to operate the hand wheel should, in general,
not exceed 200,0 N. 8.2.6.5.1 In the case of rudder-propeller, water-jet, cycloidal-
propeller and bow-thruster systems, equivalent devices shall
The manual steering wheel shall not be driven by a
be acceptable as control, indicating and monitoring devices
powered drive unit.
(see 1.2.10 and items above mentioned, 8.2.6.3 and 8.2.6.4).
Regardless of rudder position, a kick-back of the
8.2.6.5.2 In analogy to 1.2.10.5, each unit shall be controlled
wheel shall be prevented when the manual drive is engaged
by a lever which moves in the form of an arc within a vertical
automatically.
plane that is approximately parallel to the direction of the
8.2.4 Auxiliary steering gear thrust of the unit. From the position of the lever the direction
of the thrust acting on the vessel shall be clear.
The auxiliary steering gear shall be: 8.2.6.5.3 If rudder propeller or cycloidal-propeller systems
a) of adequate strength and sufficient to steer the vessel at are not controlled by means of levers, the Register may allow
navigable speed and capable of being brought speedily derogations from 1.2.10.5.
into action in an emergency;
b) operated by power where necessary to meet the 8.2.7 Drive (power) units and power source
requirements of item a). 8.2.7.1 Steering systems fitted with two powered drive
Manual operation of auxiliary steering gear systems units shall have at least two power sources. If the second
is permitted where the size of the system allows this. power source for the powered steering gear is not constantly
available while the vessel is under way, a buffer device
8.2.5 Arrangement of main and auxiliary gear for carrying adequate capacity shall provide back-up during the
actuating the rudder period needed for start-up.
The main steering gear and the auxiliary steering 8.2.7.2 In the case of electrical power sources, no other
gear for actuating the rudder shall be so arranged that the power consumers may be supplied by the main power source
failure of one of them will not render the other one for the steering system. In the case of electric main and
inoperative. auxiliary drives their supply and control systems shall be
independent of each other. Each of these two drives shall
8.2.6 Control of the steering gear have its own electric motor.
8.2.6.1 Control of the main steering gear 8.2.7.3 Where the main steering gear comprises two or
8.2.6.1.1 Control of the main steering gear shall be provided more identical drive units, auxiliary steering gear need not be
on the wheelhouse. fitted, provided that the main steering gear is capable of
operating the rudder:
a) as required in 8.2.3.1, b), while operating with all drive
units;

June 2018 109
b) as required in 8.2.4, a), while any one of the drive units is 8.2.10 End position limitation
out of operation.
8.2.10.1 For limitation of end positions, rudder stoppers
8.2.7.4 In the event of failure of a single component of the shall be provided. Where necessary, a mechanical safety
main steering gear, excluding the rudder tiller or similar device at the end position shall be supplied.
components as well as the cylinders, rotary vanes and casing,
means shall be provided for quickly regaining control of one 8.2.10.2 In the case of hydraulic steering gear without an
steering system. end position limitation of the tiller and similar components, a
mechanical end position limiting device shall be fitted within
8.2.7.5 In the event of a loss of hydraulic oil, it shall be the rudder actuator.
possible to isolate the damaged system in such a way that the
second control system remains fully serviceable and may take 8.2.11 Locking equipment
over in not more than five seconds. 8.2.11.1 Steering gear systems shall be equipped with a
8.2.7.6 If the second drive unit or manual drive is not locking system effective in all rudder positions. Where
placed in service automatically, it shall be possible to do so hydraulic plants are fitted with shut-offs directly at the
immediately by means of a single operation by the helmsman cylinders or rotary vane casings, special locking equipment
that is both simple and quick. may be dispensed with.
8.2.7.7 The second drive unit or manual drive shall ensure 8.2.11.2 For steering gears with cylinder units which may be
the manoeuvrability required by ES-TRIN, Chapter 5 independently operated these shut-off devices do not have to
Manoeuvrability as well. be fitted directly on the cylinders.
8.2.7.8 If the steering gear has a powered drive unit, a 8.2.12 Overload protection
second independent drive unit or an additional manual drive
8.2.12.1 Power operated steering gear systems shall be fitted
shall be present. In case of failure or malfunction of the drive
with overload protection (slip coupling, relief valve) to
unit of the rudder system, the second independent drive unit
ensure that the driving torque is limited to the maximum
or the manual drive has to be in operation within 5 seconds.
permissible value. The overload protection device shall be
8.2.7.9 Where both the main and secondary drive unit is secured to prevent re-adjustment by unauthorized persons.
power hydraulic, the respective pumps shall be driven Means shall be provided for checking the setting while in
independently. service.
8.2.7.10 No other power consumers may be connected to the 8.2.12.2 The pressurized casings of hydraulic steering gear
hydraulic steering gear drive unit. which also fulfil the function of the locking equipment
mentioned in 8.2.11 shall be fitted with relief valves unless
8.2.8 Mechanical steering drives with remote control they are so designed that the pressure generated when the
8.2.8.1 Rope for steering line pilotage shall be flexible, elastic limit torque is applied to the rudder stock cannot cause
galvanized, cross-twisted and unravelling. rupture or permanent deformation of the pressurized casings.
8.2.8.2 Chain cables, pull rods and galvanized steering 8.2.12.3 In the case of hydraulic steering gears, the torque
steel ropes which are included in the steering line convoy transmitted by the rudder, e.g. as a result of grounding, shall
pilotage shall be fitted with devices for slackening of a rope; in addition, be limited by safety valves.
moreover, tightening springs shall be fitted on each side in 8.2.12.4 Manually operated steering gear may be protected
the steering line pilotage. Gear components of the steering against the overload with cushion springs in the driving unit.
drive unit shall comply with the standards recognized by the When a manual steering drive is used as the auxiliary drive,
Register. overload protection need not be fitted.
8.2.8.3 Construction of rudder indicators (supports, 8.2.13 Rudder angle indication
transmissions, couplings) shall be such as to prevent its
locking or damage of its parts due to the hull deformation or 8.2.13.1 The rudder position shall be clearly indicated in the
rolling. wheelhouse and at all steering stations. Where the steering
gear is operated electrically or hydraulically, the rudder angle
8.2.8.4 Transmissions from mechanical steering drives of shall be signalled by a device (rudder position indicator)
oil tank vessels (type N) intended for transportation, pumping which is actuated either by the rudder stock itself or by parts
and storing of liquids with flash point below 55°C shall be which are rigidly connected to it. The rudder position at any
laid in chutes or ducts. Construction of units and parts of moment shall also be indicated at the steering gear itself.
these drives which are being rubbed shall to prevent sparking.
8.2.13.2 The rudder angle indication shall be independent of
8.2.9 Rudder angle limitation the steering gear control system. If the rudder-position
Power operated steering gears shall be provided indicator is electric it shall have its own power supply.
with positive arrangements, such as limit switches on both 8.2.13.3 Any rudder angle indicator fitted shall function for
sides, for stopping the gear before the rudder stoppers are both the main and secondary gear.
reached. These arrangements shall be synchronized with the
gear itself and not with the steering gear control. 8.2.14 Indicators and monitoring devices
8.2.14.1 An optical and acoustic alarm shall be present at
the steering position to signal the following:

110 June 2018
– oil level of the hydraulic tanks falling under the lowest 8.3.1.2 Hydraulic cylinders, hydraulic pumps and hydraulic
content level in accordance with 8.3.7.2 and decrease of motors as well as electric motors shall be examined at the
service pressure of the hydraulic system; latest every eight years by a specialized firm and repaired if
– failure of the electrical supply for the steering control; required.
– failure of the electrical supply for the drive units; 8.3.1.3 Arrangements for bleeding air from the hydraulic
– failure of the rate-of-turn regulator; system shall be provided, where necessary.
– failure of the required buffer devices. 8.3.1.4 Drip trays shall be provided at places of possible
leakage of the working medium from hydraulic equipment.
8.2.14.2 Monitoring and alarm systems, including the rudder
angle indicators, shall be designed, built and tested to the 8.3.2 Materials
satisfaction of the Register.
8.3.2.1 Ram cylinders, pressure housings of rotary vane
8.2.15 Rate-of-turn regulators type actuators, hydraulic power piping valves, flanges and
fittings, and all steering gear components transmitting
8.2.15.1 Rate-of-turn regulators and their components shall mechanical forces to the rudder stock (such as tillers,
meet the requirements laid down in the present Rules, quadrants, or similar components), excluding bolts, pins and
Chapter II, 1.9.19. keys, shall be of steel, nodular cast iron or other approved
8.2.15.2 The proper functioning of the rate-of-turn regulator ductile material duly tested, including non-destructive
shall be displayed at the steering position by means of a examination for internal defects, in accordance with the
green indicating light. requirements of the Rules, Part 25 – Metallic materials and
Part 26 – Welding.
Any lack of or unacceptable variations in the
supply voltage and an unacceptable decrease in the speed of 8.3.2.2 In general, such material shall not have an
rotation of the gyroscope shall be monitored. elongation of less than 12% nor a tensile strength in excess of
650,0 N/mm2.
8.2.15.3 Where, in addition to the rate-of-turn regulator,
there are other steering systems, it shall be possible to clearly Grey cast iron may be accepted for redundant parts
distinguish at the steering position which of these systems with low stress level, excluding cylinders, upon special
has been activated. It shall be possible to shift from one consideration.
system to another immediately. The rate-of-turn regulator Pressure vessels in general shall be made of steel,
shall not have any influence on the steering systems. cast steel or nodular cast iron having mainly ferritic structure.
8.2.15.4 The electricity supply to the rate-of-turn regulator 8.3.2.3 The pipes of hydraulic steering gear shall be made
shall be independent of other power consumers. of seamless or longitudinally welded steel tubes. The use of
cold-drawn, un-annealed tubes is not permitted.
8.2.15.5 The gyroscopes, detectors and rate-of-turn
indicators used in the rate-of-turn regulators shall meet the At points where they are exposed to damage,
minimum requirements of the minimum specifications and copper pipes for control lines shall be provided with
test conditions concerning rate-of-turn displays for inland protective shielding and shall be safeguarded against
waterways, as laid down in ES-TRIN, Section II of Annex 5. hardening due to vibration by the use of suitable fastenings.
8.2.15.6 Where rate-of-turn regulators are used, it shall be 8.3.2.4 Oil seals between non-moving parts, forming part
possible for the rate-of-turn control to be released in any of the external pressure boundary, shall be of the metal upon
given position without altering the speed selected. metal type or of an equivalent type.
The control shall turn through a wide enough arc to Oil seals between moving parts, forming part of the
guarantee adequately precise positioning. The neutral external pressure boundary, shall be duplicated, so that the
position shall be clearly perceptible from the other positions. failure of one seal does not render the actuator inoperative.
It shall be possible to increase or decrease the level of Alternative arrangements providing equivalent protection
illumination. against leakage may be accepted at the discretion of the
Register.
8.2.15.7 The rate-of-turn indicator shall be located ahead of
the helmsman and within his field of vision. 8.3.3 Isolating valves
8.3 Hydraulic system Shut-off valves, non-return valves or other

appropriate devices shall be provided to:
8.3.1 General requirements – comply with the availability requirements of 8.2.5,
8.3.1.1 The design pressure for calculations to determine 8.2.7.3 and 8.2.7.9;
the scantlings of piping and other steering gear components – keep the rudder steady in position in case of emergency.
subjected to internal hydraulic pressure shall be at least 1,25 In particular, for all vessels with non-duplicated
times the maximum working pressure to be expected under actuators, isolating valves shall be fitted at the connection of
the operational conditions specified in 8.2.3.1, b), taking into pipes to the actuator, and shall be directly fitted on the
account any pressure which may exist in the low pressure actuator.
side of the system.

June 2018 111
8.3.4 Piping The Register may require, for the relief valves, discharge
capacity tests and/or shock tests.
8.3.4.1 The dimensions, design and arrangement of the
piping shall as far as possible exclude mechanical damage or 8.3.7 Hydraulic tanks
damage resulting from fire.
8.3.7.1 Tanks forming part of the hydraulic system shall be
8.3.4.2 The pipes of hydraulic steering gear systems shall fitted with oil level indicators.
be installed in such a way as to ensure maximum protection
while remaining readily accessible. 8.3.7.2 Hydraulic tanks shall be equipped with a warning
system that monitors for any dropping of the oil level below
Pipes shall be installed at a sufficient distance from
the lowest content level needed for safe operation.
the vessel’s shell. As far as possible, pipes should not pass
through cargo spaces. 8.3.8 Hydraulic pumps
Pipes shall be so installed that they are free from
8.3.8.1 Hydraulic pumps shall be type tested in accordance
stress and vibration.
with the provisions of 8.6.1.2. Special care shall be given to
8.3.4.3 The pipes of main and auxiliary steering gear the alignment of the pump and the driving motor.
systems are normally to be laid independently of each other.
8.3.8.2 Hydraulic pumps should be protected by means of
With the Register’s consent, the joint use of pipes for the
non-return valves mounted at the discharge part.
main and auxiliary steering gear systems may be permitted.
In such cases, the design pressure for pipes and 8.3.9 Filters
joints shall be 1,5 times the maximum permissible working
pressure. 8.3.9.1 Hydraulic power operated steering gear shall be
provided with arrangements to maintain the cleanliness of the
8.3.4.4 The power piping for hydraulic steering gear shall hydraulic fluid taking into consideration the type and design
be arranged so that transfer between units can be readily of the hydraulic system.
effected.
8.3.9.2 Filters of appropriate mesh fineness shall be
8.3.4.5 The hydraulic piping system, including joints, provided in the piping system, in particular to ensure the
valves, flanges and other fittings shall comply with the protection of the pumps.
Register requirements for Class I components irrespective of
pressure and temperature. 8.4 Power, construction and dimensioning
8.3.5 Hydraulic hoses 8.4.1 General requirements
8.3.5.1 Hoses shall be high-pressure hydraulic hoses 8.4.1.1 The component parts of the steering system shall be
according to recognized standards and suitable for the fluids, rugged enough to always be able to withstand the stresses to
pressures, temperatures and ambient conditions in question. which they may be subjected during normal operation. No
They shall be of a type approved by the Register. external forces applied to the rudder shall impair the
operating capacity of the steering gear and its drive unit.
8.3.5.2 Hydraulic hoses are:
a) only permissible, if vibration absorption or freedom of 8.4.1.2 All steering gear components transmitting
movement of components makes their use inevitable; mechanical forces to the rudder stock, which are not
protected against overload by structural rudder stops or
b) to be designed for at least the maximum service pressure; mechanical buffers, shall have strength at least equivalent to
c) to be renewed at the latest every eight years. that of the rudder stock in way of the tiller.
8.3.5.3 The burst pressure of hoses shall not be less than 8.4.1.3 The steering gear shall be fitted to the rudder stock
four times the design pressure. in such a way that forces from the actuator are effectively
transmitted to the rudder stock in all operating conditions.
8.3.6 Relief valves Dismantling of connection shall be possible without causing
8.3.6.1 Relief valves shall be fitted to any part of the damage to the rudder stock or steering gear.
hydraulic system which can be isolated and in which pressure 8.4.1.4 Final connection of steering gear to the rudder
can be generated from the power source or from external stock shall be performed according to approved procedure, in
forces. The setting of the relief valves shall not exceed the presence of the Register.
design pressure. The valves shall be of adequate size and so
arranged as to avoid an undue rise in pressure above the 8.4.1.5 The fastening arrangement for fixing the steering
design pressure. gear to the foundation shall be designed to withstand all
possible loads generated from rudder or drive unit during
8.3.6.2 The setting pressure of the relief valves shall not be operation.
less than 1,25 times the maximum working pressure.
8.4.2 Power of steering gear
8.3.6.3 The minimum discharge capacity of the relief
valve(s) shall not be less than the total capacity of the pumps, The power of the steering gear is governed by the
which can deliver through it (them), increased by 10%. requirements set out in 8.2.3 and 8.2.4. The minimum
Under such conditions, the rise in pressure shall not exceed requirement with regard to the maximum effective torque M T
10% of the setting pressure. In this respect, due consideration for which the steering gear including piping shall be designed
shall be given to the foreseen extreme ambient conditions in shall be calculated according to the following formula:
relation to oil viscosity.

112 June 2018
dT3
MT = , [ Nm] (8.4.2-1)
74 ⋅ k1
where:
dT = theoretical rudder stock diameter, [mm];
n
 235  1
k1 =   ;
 ReH 
R eH = yield strength of rudder stock material, [N/mm2];
= The applied value for R eH shall not be greater
than 0,7∙R m or 450 N/mm2 whichever is less;
Rm = minimum ultimate tensile strength of the steel
used, [N/mm2];
n1 = coefficient;
= 0,75 for R eH > 235 N/mm2; Figure 8.4.3.2-1
Hub dimensions
= 1,00 for R eH ≤ 235 N/mm2.
For the determination of the pertinent working 8.4.3.3 Tillers, tiller arms, quadrants and key ways
pressure (maximum pressure), the frictional losses in the a) The scantling of the tiller shall be determined as follows:
steering gear including piping shall be considered.
the section modulus of the tiller arm in way of the end
The relief valves shall be set at this pressure value. fixed to the boss shall not be less than the value Z b , in
8.4.3 Design of transmission components [cm3], calculated from the following formula:
8.4.3.1 The design calculations for those parts of the 0,147 ⋅ d 3 L ' Re
=
Zb ⋅ ⋅ , cm3  (8.4.3-2)
steering gear which are not protected against overload shall 1000 L R 'e
be based on the elastic limit torque of the rudder stock. The
elastic limit torque to be used is: where:
d = minimum actual rudder stock diameter, [mm];
26,6 ⋅ d 3
MF = , [ Nm] (8.4.3-1) L = distance from the centreline of the rudder stock to
1000 ⋅ k1
the point of application of the load on the tiller (see
where: Figure 8.4.3.3-1);
d = the value used for the minimum actual rudder L’ = distance between the point of application of the
stock diameter, [mm]; above load and the root section of the tiller arm
under consideration (see Figure 8.4.3.3-1);
= need not be larger than 1,145∙d T.
Re = value of the minimum specified yield strength of
In the case of multi-surface rudders, the diameter of the material at ambient temperature, [N/mm2];
only one rudder stock, i.e. the largest, shall be taken into
account. R’ e = design yield strength, [N/mm2];
The loads on the components of the steering gear = R e , where R ≥ 1,4∙R e ;
determined in this way shall be below the yield strength of = 0,417∙(R e + R), where R < 1,4∙R e ;
the materials used. The design of parts of the steering gear R = value of the minimum specified tensile strength
with overload protection shall be based on the loads of the material at ambient temperature, [N/mm2].
corresponding to the response threshold of the overload
The width and thickness of the tiller arm in way of
protection.
the point of application of the load shall not be less than one
8.4.3.2 Tiller and rotary vane hubs half of those required by the above formula.
Tiller and rotary vane hubs made of material with In the case of double arm tillers, the section
tensile strength of up to 500,0 N/mm2 shall satisfy the modulus of each arm shall not be less than one half of the
following conditions in the area where the force is applied section modulus required by the above formula;
(see Figure 8.4.3.2-1): b) the scantling of the quadrants shall be determined as
– height of hub: H 0 ≥ 1,0∙d, [mm]; specified in a) for the tillers. When quadrants having two
– outside diameter: d a ≥ 1,8∙d, [mm]. or three arms are provided, the section modulus of each
arm shall not be less than one half or one third,
In special cases the outer diameter may be reduced respectively, of the section modulus required for the
to d a ≥ 1,7∙d, [mm], but the height of the hub shall then be at tiller.
least H 0 ≥ 1,145∙d, [mm].
Arms of loose quadrants not keyed to the rudder stock
may be of reduced dimensions to the satisfaction of the
Register, and the depth of the boss may be reduced by
10%;

June 2018 113
c) keys should be designed according to the following – if split on one side: minimum two clamping bolts shall be
provisions: fitted;
– the key shall be made of steel with a yield stress not – one or two keys shall be fitted (see Figure 8.4.3.6-1).
less than that of the rudder stock and that of the tiller The keys shall be arranged at an angle of 90° to the
boss or rotor without being less than 235 N/mm2; split joints plane.
– the width of the key shall not be less than 0,25∙d;
– the thickness of the key shall not be less than 0,10∙d;
– the ends of the keyways in the rudder stock and in the
tiller (or rotor) shall be rounded and the keyway root
fillets shall be provided with small radius of not less
than 5% of the key thickness;
– the permissible surface pressure of the key and
keyway should not exceed 90% of the materials yield
strength.
Figure 8.4.3.6-1
Split hub connection
Figure 8.4.3.3-1 8.4.3.7 Shrink-fit connections of tiller (or rotor) to stock

Tiller arm shall satisfy the following provisions:
a) the safety factor against slippage is not to be less than:
8.4.3.4 Where materials with a tensile strength greater than – for keyed connections: 1;
500,0 N/mm2 are used, the section of the hub may be reduced
– for keyless connections: 2;
by 10%.
b) the friction coefficient shall be taken equal to:
8.4.3.5 Where the force is transmitted by clamped or
– 0,15 for steel and 0,13 for nodular graphite cast iron,
tapered connections, the elastic limit torque may be
in the case of hydraulic fit;
transmitted by a combination of frictional resistance and a
positive locking mechanism using adequately tightened bolts – 0,17 in the case of dry shrink fitting;
and a key. c) the combined stress according to the von Mises criterion,
For the elastic limit torque according to formula due to the maximum pressure induced by the shrink
given in 8.4.3.1, the thread root diameter, in [mm], of the fitting and calculated in way of the most stressed points
bolts can be determined by applying the following formula: of the shrunk parts, is not to exceed 80% of the yield
stress of the material considered.
1
, [ mm ]
NOTE: Alternative stress values based on FEM
d B= 9,76 ⋅ d ⋅ (8.4.3-3)
z ⋅ ReH ⋅ k1 calculations may also be considered by the Register.
d) the entrance edge of the tiller bore and that of the rudder
where: stock cone shall be rounded or bevelled.
d = actual rudder stock diameter, [mm];
8.5 Requirements for vessels equipped with
= need not be larger than 1,145∙d T.
thrusters as steering means
z = total number of bolts;
R eH = yield strength of the bolt material, [N/mm2]; 8.5.1 General
8.4.3.6 Connection between steering gear and rudder stock 8.5.1.1 The main and auxiliary steering gear referred to in
by means of split type hub shall comply with the following: 8.2 may consist of thrusters of the following types:
– azimuth thrusters;
– if split on both sides: minimum two clamping bolts shall
– water-jets;
be fitted on each side;
– cycloidal propellers;

114 June 2018
complying with the provisions of Section 10, as far as by ES-TRIN, Chapter 5 Manoeuvrability or if they are only
applicable. needed for the stopping test.
8.5.1.2 Actuation system 8.5.3.2 Where there are two or more rudder-propeller,
Thrusters used as steering means shall be fitted water-jet or cycloidal-propeller installations that are
with a main actuation system and an auxiliary actuation independent of each other the second actuation system is not
system. necessary if the vessel retains the manoeuvrability required
by ES-TRIN, Chapter 5 Manoeuvrability if one of the
8.5.1.3 Control system systems fails.
Where the steering means of the vessel consists of
two or more thrusters, their control system shall include a 8.6 Tests in the manufacturer’s works
device ensuring an automatic synchronisation of the thruster
8.6.1 Testing of drive units
rotation, unless each thruster is so designed as to withstand
any additional forces resulting from the thrust exerted by the 8.6.1.1 The drive units are required to undergo test on a
other thrusters. test stand. The relevant works test certificates shall be
presented at the time of the final inspection of the steering
8.5.2 Use of azimuth thrusters gear.
8.5.2.1 Azimuth thrusters used as sole steering means 8.6.1.2 Hydraulic pumps shall be subjected to pressure and
Where the vessel is fitted with one azimuth thruster operational tests. Where the drive power of the hydraulic
used as the sole steering means, this thruster shall comply pump is 50 kW or more, these tests shall be carried out in
with 8.2.3.1, except that: presence of the Register.
a) the main actuation system is required to be capable of a 8.6.1.3 For electric motors, see the present Rules, Chapter
rotational speed of at least 0,4 rpm and to be operated by II – Electrical installations.
power where the expected steering torque exceeds 1,5
kNm; 8.6.2 Pressure and tightness tests
b) the auxiliary actuation system is required to be capable of 8.6.2.1 Pressure components shall undergo a pressure test,
a rotational speed of at least 0,1 rpm and to be operated using the following testing pressure:
by power where the expected steering torque exceeds 3
t 1,5 ⋅ pw , [ MPa ]
p=
kNm. (8.6.2-1)
8.5.2.2 Azimuth thrusters used as auxiliary steering
where:
gear
Where the auxiliary steering gear referred to in
2.4.1 consists of one or more azimuth thrusters, at least one pw = maximum permissible working pressure or
such thruster shall be capable of: pressure at which the relief valve is open, [MPa];
– steering the vessel at maximum ahead service speed; = for working pressures above 20 MPa, the test
pressure need not exceed p w + 10,0 MPa.
– being brought speedily into action in case of emergency;
– having a rotational speed of at least 0,4 rpm. 8.6.2.2 For pressure testing of pipes, their valves and
fittings and also for hose assemblies, see 7.3 and 7.4.6.2.
The auxiliary actuation system referred to in 8.5.1.2
need not be fitted. Tightness tests shall be performed on relevant
components.
8.5.2.3 Omission of the auxiliary actuation system
Where the steering means of the vessel consists of 8.6.3 Final inspection and operational test
two independent azimuth thrusters or more, the auxiliary 8.6.3.1 Following testing of the individual components and
actuation system referred to in 8.5.1.2 need not be fitted after completion of assembly, the steering gear is required to
provided that: undergo final inspection and an operational test in the
– the thrusters are so designed that the vessel can be steered presence of the Register. The overload protection shall be
with any one out of operation; adjusted at this time.
– the actuation system of each thruster complies with 8.6.3.2 Where the manufacturing works does not have
8.5.1.2, b). adequate facilities, the aforementioned tests including the
adjustment of the overload protection can be carried out on
8.5.3 Rudder-propeller, water-jet, cycloidal-propeller
board the vessel. In these cases, at least functional testing
and bow-thruster systems
under no-load conditions shall be performed in the
8.5.3.1 Where the thrust vectoring of rudder-propeller, manufacturer’s works.
water-jet, cycloidal-propeller or bow-thruster installations is
remotely actuated by electric, hydraulic or pneumatic means, 8.7 Testing on board
there shall be two steering controls, each independent of the
other, between the wheelhouse and the propeller- or thruster- 8.7.1 For testing on board, the requirements given in
installation. 15.3.7 apply.
Such systems are not subject to this item if they are
not needed in order to achieve the manoeuvrability required

June 2018 115
8.7.2 The correct installation of the steering system shall

be inspected by the Register. For this purpose the Register 9 WINDLASSES, WINCHES AND
can require the following documents: MOORING MACHINERY
a) description of the steering system;
b) drawings of and information on the steering gear drive 9.1 General requirements
units and the steering control;
9.1.1 Scope
c) information concerning the steering gear;
The Rules contained in this Section apply to bow
d) electrical wiring diagram;
anchor windlasses, stern anchor windlasses, wire rope
e) description of the rate-of-turn regulator; windlasses, winches, mooring machinery and bunker masts.
f) operating and maintenance instructions for the steering
system. 9.1.2 Certification
9.1.2.1 Windlasses and winches shall be of an approved
8.7.3 Operation of the entire steering system shall be
type in compliance with:
checked by means of a navigation test. If a rate-of-turn
regulator is installed it shall be checked that a predetermined – for materials, 9.1.4;
course can be reliably maintained and that bends can be – for design and equipment, 9.2;
negotiated safely. – for testing, 9.5 and 9.6.
8.7.4 Power-driven steering systems shall be inspected 9.1.3 Documentation to be submitted
by a Surveyor of the Register:
a) before being put into service; 9.1.3.1 For each type of anchor windlass and chain stopper,
general and sectional drawings, circuit diagrams of the
b) after a failure; hydraulic and electrical systems and detail drawings of the
c) after any modification or repair; main shaft, cable lifter and brake shall be submitted to the
d) regularly at least every three years. Register for review/approval.
8.7.5 The inspection has to cover at least: 9.1.3.2 A description of the anchor windlass including the
proposed overload protection and other safety devices is
a) a check of conformity with the approved drawings and at likewise to be submitted.
periodical inspections whether alterations in the steering
system were made; 9.1.3.3 The strength calculation for bolts, chocks and
b) a functional test of the steering system for all operational stoppers securing the windlass to the deck is likewise to be
possibilities; submitted.
c) a visual check and a tightness check of the hydraulic 9.1.3.4 Where an anchor windlass shall be approved for
components, in particular valves, pipelines, hydraulic several strengths and types of chain cable, the calculation
hoses, hydraulic cylinders, hydraulic pumps, and relating to the maximum braking torque shall be submitted
hydraulic filters; and proof furnished of the power and hauling-in speed in
d) a visual check of the electrical components, in particular accordance with 9.3.1.1 corresponding to all the relevant
relays, electric motors and safety devices; types of anchor and chain cable.
e) a check of the optical and acoustic control devices. 9.1.4 Materials
8.7.6 An inspection attestation, signed by a Surveyor of 9.1.4.1 The machinery parts stated in Table 9.1.4-1 are
the Register, shall be issued, showing the date of inspection. subject to supervision of the Register in the process of
manufacture, regarding their compliance with the approved
technical documentation and the requirements of the Rules,
Part 25 – Metallic materials.
9.1.4.2 Testing of materials
The material of components which are stressed by
the pull of the chain when the cable lifter is disengaged (e.g.
main shaft, cable lifter, housing, frame, brake bands, brake
spindles, brake bolts, tension straps) shall possess mechanical
characteristics in conformity with the Rules, Part 25 –
Metallic materials. Evidence of this may take the form of a
certificate issued by the steelmaker (EN 10204, type 3.1)
which contains details of composition and the results of the
tests prescribed in the Rules, Part 25 – Metallic materials.
In the case of hydraulic systems, the material used
for pipes (see 7.23.3.4 and Table 7.2.10-1) as well as for
pressure vessels shall also be tested.

116 June 2018
Table 9.1.4-1

Drive and intermediate shafts Forged steel the Rules, Part 25, 3.11
Pinions, gear wheels and tooth rims Cast steel the Rules, Part 25, 3.12
Cable lifters Grey cast iron the Rules, Part 25, 3.13.3
Claw clutches
Brake band Rolled steel the Rules, Part 25, 3.2
Fastening elements (bolts, nuts) Forged steel the Rules, Part 25, 3.11
9.1.4.3 Materials for details listed in Table 9.1.4-1 (cable 9.2.4 Braking equipment
lifters, claw clutches, brake band) may be selected according
to standards. In that case the use of these materials is subject 9.2.4.1 Windlasses shall be fitted with cable lifter brakes
to approval by the Register, during the inspection of technical which are capable of holding a load equal to 80% of the
documentation. nominal breaking load of the chain. In addition, where the
gear mechanism is not of self-locking type, a device (e.g.
9.2 Design and equipment gearing brake, lowering brake, oil hydraulic brake) shall be
fitted to prevent paying out of the chain should the power
9.2.1 Type of drive unit fail while the cable lifter is engaged.
9.2.1.1 Windlasses are normally to be driven by an engine 9.2.4.2 If brakes are power operated, additional means
which is independent of other deck machinery. The piping shall be provided for manual operation. Manual operation
systems of hydraulic windlass engines may be connected to shall be possible under all working conditions, including
other hydraulic systems provided that this is permissible for failure of the power drive.
the latter. The windlasses are, however, to be capable of
being operated independently of other connected systems. 9.2.5 Pipes
9.2.1.2 When dropping and hoisting the anchors a mass of For the design and dimensions of pipes, valves,
50,0 kg and over as well as holding a vessel at anchorage a fittings and hydraulic piping systems, see Section 7.
capstan or windlass shall be provided.
9.2.6 Cable lifters
9.2.1.3 Manual operation as the main driving power can be
permitted for anchors with a weight up to 250,0 kg. 9.2.6.1 Cable lifters shall have at least five snugs. For
horizontal axis cable lifters, the wrapping angle shall not be
9.2.1.4 In the case of hydraulic drives with a piping system less than 115°, whereas for vertical axis cable lifters - not less
connected to other hydraulic systems a second pump unit is than 150°.
recommended.
9.2.6.2 Cable lifters shall ensure passing the joining links
9.2.1.5 When chains are replaced by ropes, anchor winches in both horizontal and vertical positions. Cable lifters of the
may be used. Towing winches may be used as anchor vertical anchor capstans shall ensure passing the joining links
hoisting gear. in vertical position.
9.2.2 Overload protection 9.2.6.3 For cable lifters used for studless chains, the
requirements of EN 14874 (inland navigation vessels studless
For protection of the mechanical parts in the case of anchor chain cable lifter) can be applied.
the windlass jamming, an overload protection (e.g. slip
coupling, relief valve) shall be fitted to limit the maximum 9.2.7 Windlass as warping winch
torque of the drive engine (see 9.3.1). The setting of the
overload protection shall be specified (e.g. in the operating Combined windlasses and warping or mooring
instructions). winches shall not be subjected to excessive loads even when
the maximum pull is exerted on the warping rope.
9.2.3 Clutches
9.2.8 Electrical equipment
Windlasses shall be fitted with disengaging
clutches between the cable lifter and the drive shaft. In an The electrical equipment shall comply with the
emergency case, hydraulic or electrically operated clutches present Rules, Chapter II – Electrical installations.
shall be capable of being disengaged by hand.

June 2018 117
9.2.9 Hydraulic equipment The pull of stern windlasses with an anchor rope
can be determined by reference to the anchor weight and the
Tanks forming part of the hydraulic system shall be diameter of the corresponding chain cable.
fitted with oil level indicators. The lowest permissible oil
level shall be monitored. 9.3.1.2 The nominal output of the power units shall be such
Filters for cleaning the operating fluid shall be that the conditions specified above can be met for 30 minutes
located in the piping system. without interruption. In addition, the power units shall be
capable of developing a maximum torque equal to 1,5 times
9.2.10 Wire rope windlass the rated torque for at least two minutes at a correspondingly
reduced lifting speed.
9.2.10.1 The rope drum diameter shall be at least 14 times
the required rope diameter. 9.3.1.3 At the maximum torque specified in 9.3.1.2, a
short-time overload of up to 20% is permitted in the case of
9.2.10.2 The drive of the windlass shall be capable of being internal combustion engines.
uncoupled to the rope drum. The rope end fastening of the
windlass shall brake if the wire rope shall be released. 9.3.1.4 An additional reduction gear stage may be fitted in
order to achieve the maximum torque.
9.2.10.3 Rope drums shall be provided with flanges whose
outer diameter extend above the top layer of the rope by at 9.3.1.5 With manually operated windlasses, steps shall be
least 2,5 times rope diameter unless the rope is prevented taken to ensure that the anchor can be hoisted at a mean
from overriding the flange by a spooling device or other speed of 0,033 m/s with the pull specified in 9.3.1.1. This
means. shall be achieved without exceeding a manual force of 150,0
N applied to a crank radius of about 350,0 mm with the hand
9.2.11 Chain stoppers crank turned at about 30,0 rpm.
Where a chain stopper is fitted, it shall be able to 9.3.1.6 As the anchor approaches the hawse, the drive shall
withstand a pull of 80% of the chain breaking load. Where no be provided for heaving-in speed not over 10,0 m/min. It is
chain stopper is fitted, the windlass shall be able to withstand recommended that the speed during pulling the anchor into
a pull of 80% of the chain breaking load. The caused stress in the hawse shall not be more than 7,0 m/min.
the loaded parts of the windlass may not exceed 90% of the
yield strength of the respective parts and the windlass brake 9.3.2 Design of transmission elements
is not permitted to slip.
9.3.2.1 The basis for the design of the load-transmitting
9.2.12 Connection with deck components of windlasses is given by the anchors and chain
cables specified in the Rules, Part 25 – Metallic materials,
The windlass, the foundation and the stoppers shall Sections 6 and 7.
be connected efficiently and safely to the deck.
9.3.2.2 The cable lifter brake shall be so designed that the
9.2.13 Additional requirements anchor and chain can be safely stopped while paying out the
chain cable.
9.2.13.1 The anchor machinery intended for handling with
mooring operations shall comply also with the requirements 9.3.2.3 The dimensional design of those parts of the
of 9.7. windlass which are subjected to the chain pull when the cable
lifter is disengaged (cable lifter, main shaft and braking
9.2.13.2 Machinery and machinery elements for which the equipment, bedframe and deck fastening) shall be based on a
remote control is provided shall be manually operated from theoretical pull equal to 80% of the nominal breaking load
the local position. The failure of any element or the whole specified in the Rules, Part 25 – Metallic materials for the
remote control system is not to affect adversely the normal chain in question.
operation of the anchor machinery and equipment manually
operated from the local position. 9.3.2.4 The design of the main shaft shall take account of
the braking forces, and the cable lifter brake shall not slip
9.3 Power and design when subjected to this load. The design of all other windlass
components shall be based upon a force acting on the cable
9.3.1 Driving power lifter pitch circle and equal to 1,5 times the nominal pull
9.3.1.1 Depending on the grade of the chain cable, specified in 9.3.1.1.
windlasses shall be capable of exerting the following nominal At the theoretical pull, the force exerted on the
pulls Z 1 and Z 2 at a speed of at least 0,15 m/s: brake hand-wheel shall not exceed 500,0 N.
The total stresses applied to components shall be
Z=
1 28 ⋅ d 2 , [ N ] for chain grade CRS-L1 below the minimum yield point of the materials used.
(9.3.1-1)
Z=
2 32 ⋅ d 2 , [ N ] for chain grade CRS-L2 9.3.2.5 The foundations and pedestals of windlasses and
chain stoppers shall be adequate designed to withstand the
where:
forces and loads as specified in 9.2.11 and in Items here
Z 1 , Z 2 = pull, [N]; above.
d = diameter of anchor chain, [mm];
CRS-L1, CRS-L2 = chain grades according to the Rules,
9.4 Winches
Part 25 – Metallic materials, Section 7. 9.4.1 Winches shall be designed in such a way as to
enable work to be carried out safely. They shall be fitted with

118 June 2018
devices that prevent unintentional load release. Winches that As a minimum requirement, this test is required to
do not lock automatically shall be fitted with a brake that is demonstrate that the conditions specified in 9.3.1.1, 9.3.1.2
adequate to deal with their tractive force. and 9.3.2.2 can be fulfilled.
9.4.2 Hand operated winches shall be fitted with devices 9.7 Mooring machinery
to prevent kickback of the crank. Winches that are both
power and manually driven shall be designed in such a way 9.7.1 Drive
that the motive-power control cannot actuate the manual
9.7.1.1 The mooring machinery drive shall provide for an
control.
uninterrupted heaving-in of a mooring line at a rated pull
9.5 Tests in the manufacturer’s works with the rated speed for a period of not less than 30 min.
The speed of heaving-in of a mooring line by the
9.5.1 Testing of driving engines use of a warping drum both at the rated pull and without load
shall not exceed 0,3 m/s.
The power units are required to undergo test on a
test stand. The relevant works test certificates shall be 9.7.1.2 The mooring machinery drive shall be capable to
presented at the time of the final inspection of the windlass. provide for force of at least 1,5 times the nominal force when
Hydraulic pumps shall be subjected to pressure and winding up the first rope winding layer on the drum under
operational tests. nominal working conditions (see 9.7.1.1) for two minutes.
9.5.2 Pressure and tightness tests 9.7.2 Overload protection.
9.5.2.1 Pressure components shall undergo a pressure test, If the maximum torque of the drive may bring
using the following testing pressure: about a larger load on the mooring machinery components
than that specified in 9.7.4, an overload protection shall be
t 1,5 ⋅ pw , [ MPa ]
p= (9.5.2-1) provided.
where: 9.7.3 Brakes

pt = test pressure, [MPa]; 9.7.3.1 The mooring machinery shall be provided with an
pw = maximum permissible working pressure or automatic normally closed brake. The brake shall ensure
pressure at which the relief valve is open, [MPa]; holding of an outside effort affecting the drum equal to 1,5
times the rated pull.
= for working pressures above 20 MPa, the test
pressure need not exceed p w + 10,0 MPa. 9.7.3.2 The mooring machinery drum shall be provided
with a brake which should ensure keeping the mooring rope
9.5.2.2 For pressure testing of pipes, their valves and
from unreeling at a pull in the line equal to 0,8 times the
fittings and also for hose assemblies, see 7.3 and 7.4.6.2.
breaking load of the line on the first rope winding layer on
Tightness tests shall be performed on components the drum.
to which this is appropriate.
If the drum is fitted with another safety device it
9.5.3 Final inspection and operational testing shall be capable of disengaging the drum when the mooring
rope is under the load.
9.5.3.1 After finishing manufacture, windlasses are
The force applied to the brake drive handle is not to
required to undergo final inspection and operational testing at
exceed 740,0 N.
twice the nominal pull in the presence of Register. The
hauling-in speed shall be verified with continuous application 9.7.4 Strength tests
of the nominal pull. During the tests, particular attention shall
be given to the testing and, where necessary, setting of 9.7.4.1 The mooring machinery elements situated in lines
braking and safety equipment. of force flow shall be tested for strength under the rated pull
on the mooring drum. In this case, the reference stresses in
9.5.3.2 In the case of anchor windlasses for chains > 14,0 the elements shall not exceed 0,4 of the yield point of the
mm in diameter this test shall be performed in the presence of element material.
a Surveyor of the Register.
9.7.4.2 Elements of holding down bolts and fastening
In the case of anchor windlasses for chains ≤ 14,0
elements of mooring winches to the foundation shall be
mm diameter, the manufacturer’s inspection certificate (EN
checked for stresses caused by the maximum torsional
10204, type 3.1) will be accepted.
moment of prime mover when the drum is effected by one
9.5.3.3 Where manufacturing works does not have effort equal to breaking load of the mooring rope.
adequate facilities, the aforementioned tests including the Besides, the strength of the warping drum shaft
adjustment of the overload protection can be carried out on under the load applied in the middle of his length, equal to
board the vessel. In these cases, functional testing in the the breaking force of the mooring rope shall be checked.
manufacturer’s works shall be performed under no-load
In all cases, the stress in the elements shall not
conditions.
exceed 0,95 of the yield point of the element material.
9.6 Shipboard trials The strength of the elements shall allow for all
possible directions of loads that may arise during operation.
The anchor equipment shall be tested during river The strength of the mooring rope shall be indicated on the
trials according 15.3.8. machinery.

June 2018 119
9.7.5 Automatic mooring machinery

9.7.5.1 The performance and durability of the automatic 10 LATERAL THRUST UNITS
mooring winches are not to be inferior to the similar-purpose
non-automatic machinery.
9.7.5.2 Automatic winches shall be equipped with the 10.1.1 The following requirements apply to the lateral
manual control to provide the possibility of non-automatic thrust unit, the control station and all the transmission
operation. elements from the control station to the lateral thrust unit.
9.7.5.3 The following shall be provided: 10.1.2 In particular, these requirements cover:
– sound warning alarm operating with the maximum – azimuth thrusters;
permissible length of the mooring rope veered out; – cycloidal propellers;
– an indicator of the actual pull in the mooring rope under – water-jet propulsion;
the automatic operation.
– tunnel thrusters.
9.7.5.4 The automatic mooring winch shall be provided
with a brake fitted on the winch drum, which holds against 10.1.3 Lateral thrust units shall be capable of being
the breaking load in the mooring line. operated independently of other connected systems.
10.1.4 The mounting and installation of the thrusters shall

be in accordance to approved drawings and according to
manufacturer’s specification.
10.1.5 Thrusters developing power equal to 110,0 kW

or more
The requirements of this Section apply to the
following types of thrusters developing power equal to 110,0
kW or more:
– transverse thrusters intended for manoeuvring;
– thrusters intended for propulsion and steering.
10.1.6 Thrusters developing power less than 110 kW

Thrusters of less than 110,0 kW shall be built in
accordance with good engineering practice and tested as
required in 10.8.1 to the satisfaction of the Register.
10.1.7 Water-jet units with main steering function are also

regarded as steering gear for the vessel.
10.1.8 Thruster shall be capable of withstanding the loads

imposed by all permissible operating conditions including
effects of thermal expansion elastic deformations.
10.2 Definitions
10.2.1 Thruster
A thruster is a propeller installed in a revolving
nozzle or in a special transverse tunnel in the vessel, or a
water-jet. A thruster may be intended for propulsion,
manoeuvring and steering or any combination thereof.
Propulsion propellers in fixed nozzles are not considered
thrusters (see 4.1.1).
10.2.2 Transverse thruster

A transverse thruster is an athwartship thruster
developing a thrust in a transverse direction for manoeuvring
purposes.
10.2.3 Azimuth thruster

An azimuth thruster is a thruster which has the
capability to rotate through 360° in order to develop thrust in
any direction.

120 June 2018
10.2.4 Continuous duty thruster 10.4.2 Plans to be submitted for water-jets

A continuous duty thruster is a thruster which is The plans listed in the Rules, Part 1 –
designed for continuous operation, such as a propulsion Classification and Surveys, Chapter II, Table 3.2-12 (items
thruster. 20. to 26.) shall be submitted.
10.2.5 Intermittent duty thruster 10.4.3 Additional data to be submitted

An intermittent duty thruster is a thruster designed The data and documents listed in the Rules, Part 1
for operation at full power for a period not exceeding 1 hour, – Classification and Surveys, Chapter II, Table 3.2-12 (items
followed by operation at reduced rating for a limited period 6. to 10.) shall be submitted by the manufacturer together
of time not exceeding a certain percentage of the hours in a with the plans.
day and a certain (lesser) percentage of the hours in a year. In
general, athwartship thrusters are intermittent duty thrusters. 10.5 Materials
10.2.6 Tunnel thruster 10.5.1 Propellers
Tunnel thruster is a thruster mounted in a tunnel for For requirements relative to materials intended for
the purpose of providing lateral thrust for the vessel. propellers, see Table 4.4.3-1.
10.2.7 Water-jet 10.5.2 Other thruster components

10.2.7.1 A water-jet is equipment constituted by a tubular For the requirements relative to materials intended
casing (or duct) enclosing an impeller. The shape of the for other parts of the thrusters, such as gears, shafts,
casing is such as to enable the impeller to produce a water-jet couplings, etc., refer to the applicable parts of the Rules.
of such intensity as to give a positive thrust. Water-jets may For the pipes and hoses for drive systems of lateral
have means for deviating the jet of water in order to provide a thrust units, see 8.3.2.3 and 7.23.4.4, respectively.
steering function.
10.5.3 Propulsion and steering thrusters
10.2.7.2 Impeller
Impeller is the rotating hub with blades All materials intended for parts transmitting torque
(shafts, gears, etc.) and for propeller/impeller blades shall be
The impeller is connected to the shaft. The impeller tested in accordance with the requirements of 3.1.3.3, 4.4.2
is usually cast in one piece. Alternatively, the blades are and 6.4. in the presence of a Register.
welded onto the hub.
In case of an input power of less than 110,0 kW,
10.2.7.3 Reversing bucket the properties of the materials used for shafts, gears and
Reversing bucket is used for reversing purposes, propellers must comply with the Rules, Part 25 – Metallic
the water-jet incorporates components that can force its entry materials. Proof may take place by manufacturer’s inspection
into the water flow thereby turning the water-jet discharge to certificates (EN 10204, type 3.1 or 2.2).
be thrown somewhat forwards. This creates a reversing force
that acts on the vessel. The flow is either thrown forwards in 10.5.4 Transverse thrusters
an angle directed below the vessel, or to both of the sides of All materials for parts of transverse/athwartship
the water-jet. The components used for this purpose is thrusters shall possess the properties specified in the Rules,
denoted a bucket. Part 25 – Metallic materials. Proof may take place by
manufacturer’s inspection certificates (EN 10204, type 3.1 or
10.3 Thrusters intended for propulsion 2.2).
10.3.1 In general, at least two azimuth thrusters with 10.6 Transverse thrusters and azimuth thrusters
independent power supply shall be fitted in vessels where
these are the sole means of propulsion. 10.6.1 Prime movers
Single azimuth thruster installations will be
10.6.1.1 Diesel engines intended for driving thrusters shall
specially considered by the Register on a case by case basis. comply with the applicable requirements of Section 2.
Single water-jet installations are permitted.
10.6.1.2 Electric motors intended for driving thrusters and
10.3.2 The arrangement of thrusters shall be such that the their feeding systems shall comply with the requirements of
vessel can be satisfactorily manoeuvred with both thrusters the present Rules, Chapter II - Electrical installations.
simultaneously as well as with a single thruster and shall be In particular:
demonstrated during trials to an accepted trials programme.
.1 provisions shall be made to prevent starting of the motors
10.4 Documentation to be submitted whenever there are insufficient generators in operation;
.2 intermittent duty thrusters will be the subject of special
10.4.1 Plans to be submitted for athwartship thrusters consideration by the Register.
and azimuth thrusters
10.6.1.3 Electric motors, irrespective of their power output,
For thrusters developing power equal to 110 kW or used for powering the propulsion thrusters are subject to the
more, the plans listed in the Rules, Part 1 – Classification Register survey during their production.
and Surveys, Chapter II, Table 3.2-12 (items 1. to 5. and 11.
to 19.) shall be submitted.

June 2018 121
10.6.1.4 Prime movers shall be tested in accordance with the 10.6.4 Gears
requirements applicable to the type of mover used.
10.6.4.1 Gears of thrusters intended for propulsion shall be
10.6.2 Propellers in accordance with the applicable requirements of this
Section, applying the safety factors for propulsion gears. For
For propellers of thrusters intended for propulsion, safety factors see Rules, Part 9 – Machines, 4.2.
the requirements of 4.5.4 apply.
10.6.4.2 Gears of thrusters intended for manoeuvring only
For propellers of thrusters intended for
shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of
manoeuvring only, the requirements of 4.5.4 also apply,
Section 6, applying the safety factors for auxiliary gears.
although the increase in thickness of 10% does not need to be
applied. 10.6.5 Nozzles and connections to hull for azimuth
thrusters
10.6.3 Shafts
10.6.5.1 For the requirements relative to the nozzle
10.6.3.1 For propeller shafts of thrusters intended for
structure, see the Rules, Part 2 – Hull and Hull Equipment,
propulsion, the requirements of 3.2.4.1 apply.
Chapter VI, 5.8.
10.6.3.2 For propellers of thrusters intended for
10.6.5.2 The scantlings of the nozzle connection to the hull
manoeuvring only, the minimum diameter d s of the shaft
and the welding type and size will be specially considered by
shall not be less than the value obtained by the following
the Register, which reserves the right to require detailed
formula:
stress analysis in the case of certain high power installations.
1
ds = 6
( C ⋅ M T )2 + ( D ⋅ M )2 ⋅ 3 , [ mm ] (10.6.3-1)
10.6.5.3 For steerable thrusters, the equivalent rudder stock
1 − Q4 diameter shall be calculated in accordance with the
requirements of the Rules, Part 2 – Hull and Hull Equipment,
where: Chapter VI, Section 5.
MT = maximum transmitted torque, [Nm]; 10.6.6 Transverse thruster tunnel
= where not indicated, M T may be assumed equal
10.6.6.1 The thickness of the tunnel shall not be less than
P
to: 9550 ⋅ ; the adjacent part of the hull.
n
Special consideration will be given by the Register
P = maximum power of the thruster prime mover, to tunnels connected to the hull by connecting devices other
[kW]; than welding.
n = rotational speed of the propeller, [rpm]; 10.6.6.2 In the propeller area, the thruster tunnel shall be
M = bending moment at the shaft section under protected against damages caused by cavitation erosion by
consideration, [Nm]; effective measures, such as stainless steel plating.
C = coefficient;
10.6.7 Electrical supply for steerable thrusters
28000
= 10, 2 + ; 10.6.7.1 The generating and distribution system shall be
RS ,min designed in such a way that the steering capability of the
D = coefficient; thruster can be maintained or regained within a period of 45
seconds, in the event of single failure of the system, and that
170000 the effectiveness of the steering capability is not reduced by
= ;
412 + RS ,min more than 50% under such conditions. Details of the means
provided for this purpose shall be submitted to the Register.
R s, min = minimum yield strength of the shaft material,
[N/mm2]; 10.6.7.2 The failure of one thruster unit or its control system
Q = coefficient; is not to render any other thruster inoperative. A single
failure of generator/switchboard should not lead to failure of
= 0, for solid shafts and if Q ≤ 0,3; any other generator/switchboard.
= the ratio between the diameter of the hole and the
external diameter of the shaft for hollow shafts. 10.6.8 Lubrication system
The above diameter d s shall be increased by 10% in 10.6.8.1 The lubrication system shall be designed to provide
the case of keyed connection to the propeller in way of key. all bearings, gear meshes and other parts requiring oil with
adequate amount of oil for both lubrication and cooling
10.6.3.3 A shaft sealing box shall be installed to prevent
purposes. This shall be maintained under all environmental
water from gaining access to internal parts of the thruster or
conditions as stated in 1.2.4 and 1.2.5.
into the vessel. The sealing arrangement shall protect steel
shafts from water, unless corrosion-resistant steel especially 10.6.8.2 Bearings shall be identifiable and shall have a life
approved by the Register is used. adequate for the intended purpose. However, their life cannot
be less than:
– 40000 hours for continuous duty thrusters. For vessels
with restricted service, a lesser value (20000 hours) may
be considered by the Register;

122 June 2018
– 5000 hours for intermittent duty thrusters. performed at the rated rotational speed and full torque load
on the shaft and column, if any.
10.6.8.3 Bearing of the turning column shall ensure
compensation of axial forces in both directions. The Register may consider performance of some or
all operation tests on board the vessel.
10.6.8.4 Where the lubricating oil for the azimuth thrusters
is circulated under pressure, provision shall be made for the 10.8.4 Operational tests include:
efficient filtration of the oil. For propulsion thrusters it shall .1 start and stop tests of the drive, and reversing tests;
be possible to change or clean filters without interrupting the
.2 operational tests of thruster as a steering unit;
oil supply.
.3 tests of control systems.
10.6.8.5 For monitoring the lubricating oil level, equipment
Factory operating tests shall be performed in
shall be fitted to enable the oil level to be determined.
accordance with the approved programme and in the presence
10.6.9 Openings of the Register.
Inspection holes shall be provided to enable the 10.8.5 After the operational tests, visual examination of
necessary periodical survey of the main parts of thrusters and the whole thruster and, in justified cases, also internal
water-jets (inspection of the shaft and impeller). examination shall be performed with particular regard to
gearing.
10.7 Steering thruster controls
10.8.6 Thruster trials on board the vessel shall be
10.7.1 Controls for steering thrusters shall be provided performed in accordance with the approved programme. The
from the wheelhouse, the machinery control station and trials shall confirm the thruster ability to provide propulsion
locally. Means shall be provided to stop each thrust unit and steering in all intended modes of service and
locally and at the wheelhouse. manoeuvring.
10.7.2 Indication system shall clearly display, at every 10.8.7 The trials shall be performed at different
steering position, at least the following data: operational speeds of the vessel, different settings and power
– rotating direction and rotational speed for fixed pitch output of thrusters as well as during rapid manoeuvring
arrangements; started in the most adverse combinations of the vessel speed
and thruster settings.
– pitch and rotational speed for controllable pitch
arrangements; 10.8.8 For multiple thruster plants, the manoeuvrability
– thrust angle. properties shall be tested with one thruster inactive.
The angle indicator shall be independent of the 10.8.9 After the operational tests at the manufacturer’s
control system. works and on board the vessel, a lubricating oil sample shall
10.7.3 In the case of azimuth thrusters where reverse be checked for the content of metallic and non-metallic
manoeuvre is effected through the column turning by 180°, solids.
the time for such turning shall not exceed 30 s. 10.8.10 Testing of electrical equipment such as motors shall
10.7.4 For steering thruster control, the requirements comply with the requirements of the present Rules, Chapter
given in 8.5.3 apply. II - Electrical installations.
10.8 Survey and testing 10.9 Water-jets
10.8.1 The scope of survey of thrusters with the motors 10.9.1 Shafts
having power less than 110 kW is subject to the Register 10.9.1.1 The diameter of the shaft supporting the impeller
consideration on a case by case basis. shall not be less than the diameter d obtained by the
Mass produced thrusters may be accepted within following formula:
the framework of the type approval program of the Register.
P 1
10.8.2 The Register survey of the production and testing d= 100 ⋅ f ⋅ h ⋅ 3 ⋅3 , [ mm ] (10.9.1-1)
n 1 − Q4
of thrusters covers:
– checking of conformity of the applied materials and where:
manufacturing procedures with the approved P = power, [kW];
documentation;
n = rotational speed, [rpm];
– checking the conformity of workmanship with the
approved documentation; 560
f = 3 ;
– testing of thruster’s installations including pressure tests Rm + 160
of housings, piping and fittings as well as operational
tests at the manufacturer’s works. Rm = the ultimate tensile strength of the shaft material,
[N/mm2];
10.8.3 Operational tests at the manufacturer’s works shall h = 1,0 when the shaft is only transmitting torque
be performed on a test stand which allows the test to be loads, and when the weight and thrust of the

June 2018 123
propeller are totally supported by devices located in 10.9.6.3 The fastening of the water-jet to the hull and the
the fixed part of the thruster; structural strengthening around the water-jet unit with
= 1,22 where the impeller is fitted with key or ducting shall be carried out in agreement with the approved
shrink-fitted; drawings.
Q = coefficient; 10.9.6.4 Impeller clearances and shaft alignment shall be
= 0, for solid shafts and if Q ≤ 0,3; checked after installation and shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer’s specification.
= the ratio between the diameter of the hole and the
external diameter of the shaft for hollow shafts. 10.9.6.5 Thrust bearing axial clearances after installation
shall be verified to be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
10.9.1.2 The shafts shall be protected against corrosion by specification, unless verified during assembly of the water-
means of either a continuous liner or an oil-gland of an jet.
approved type, or by the nature of the material of the shaft.
10.9.6.6 The ducting shall be manufactured in accordance
10.9.2 Guide vanes and shaft support with drawings and specifications from the water-jet designer.
10.9.2.1 Guide vanes and shaft supports, if any, shall be The surfaces shall be smooth and free from sharp edges or
fitted in accordance with direction of flow. Trailing and buckling that could give raise to turbulence in the water flow
leading edges shall be fitted with rounded profiles. and thereby adversely affect water-jet operating conditions.
10.9.2.2 Fillet radius shall, in general, not be less than the

maximum local thickness of concerned element. Fatigue
strength calculation shall be submitted.
10.9.3 Stator and impellers

10.9.3.1 Design shall take into account the loads developed
in free going conditions and also in peculiar manoeuvres like
crash stop.
10.9.3.2 Tip clearance shall take into account vibratory
behaviours, displacements and any other expansion mode in
all operating conditions of the water-jet. Fillet radius shall, in
general, not be less than the maximum local thickness of
concerned element.
10.9.3.3 There shall be no natural frequency of stator blades
or rotor blades in the vicinity of the excitation frequencies
due to hydrodynamic interaction between stator blades and
rotor blades. Calculations shall be submitted for maximum
speed and any currently used speed.
10.9.3.4 The impeller shall be statically balanced.
10.9.4 Nozzle and reversing bucket

Design of nozzle and reversing buckets shall take
into account the loads developed in all operating conditions
of the water-jet, including transient loads.
10.9.5 Steering performance

Steering and reversing mechanisms shall be
designed taking into account the worst permissible
operational conditions. Steering performance and emergency
steering availability shall be at least equivalent to the
requirements in 8.5.2 and 8.5.3.
10.9.6 Installation and survey

10.9.6.1 The installation and arrangement of the water-jet
unit with auxiliaries shall comply with the manufacturer’s
specification.
10.9.6.2 Vessel external parts of the water-jet shall be
protected by guard rails or other suitable means.

124 June 2018
11.1.3 Crankshaft
11 AUXILIARY MACHINERY 11.1.3.1 The crankshafts shall be made of steel having a
tensile strength from 410,0 to 780,0 N/mm2. The use of steel
11.1 Power-driven air compressor
having a tensile strength over 780,0 N/mm2 shall be subject
11.1.1 General requirements to special consideration by the Register on a case by case
basis.
11.1.1.1 Compressors shall be so designed that the air
temperature at the air cooler outlet does not exceed 90°C. 11.1.3.2 Cast iron crankshafts may be manufactured only of
the nodular cast iron of ferritic/pearlitic structure (tensile
11.1.1.2 The compressors shall be provided with proper strength 500,0 ≤ R m ≤ 700,0 N/mm2) according to the Rules,
filtering equipment in order to deliver air free from oil, Part 25 – Metallic materials, Table 3.13.4.5. The use of
moisture and other contamination. special cast iron alloys shall be agreed with the Register.
11.1.1.3 The compressor cooling water spaces shall be fitted 11.1.3.3 For crank pin diameter and thickness of crank web,
with drain arrangements. see the Rules, Part 9 – Machines, 5.1.3.3 and 5.1.3.4.
11.1.1.4 The piping to and from the compressor shall be 11.1.4 Instruments
arranged in order to prevent condensation from entering the
cylinders. 11.1.4.1 Each compressor stage shall be fitted with a
Pipes between the compressors and pressure vessels suitable pressure gauge, the scale of which must indicate the
shall not have connections to other machinery. relevant maximum permissible working pressure.
11.1.1.5 Starting air compressors shall satisfy the 11.1.4.2 Provision shall be made to measure the air
requirements of 7.17.3. For materials see Table 11.2.2-1. temperature at the delivery pipe immediately after the
compressor.
11.1.1.6 Material tests shall be performed on crankshafts
with a calculated crank pin diameter of > 50,0 mm. For crank 11.1.4.3 The instrumentation of the attached compressors
pin diameters of ≤ 50,0 mm, certificate for material issued by shall be subject to special consideration by the Register on a
the manufacturer (EN 10204, type 3.1), may be accepted. case by case basis.
11.1.1.7 Air compressors shall be arranged and located so as 11.1.5 Workshop testing
to minimise the intake of oil or water contaminated air (see 11.1.5.1 All parts subject to pressure of the compressors
1.3.1.4). shall be hydraulically pressure tested in the manufacturer’s
11.1.1.8 Drawings showing longitudinal and transverse works to 1,5 times the design pressure for the respective
cross-sections, the crankshaft and the connecting rod shall be parts, but not less than 0,4 MPa.. The test pressure need not
submitted to the Register. For compressors of special type exceed the design pressure by more than 7,0 MPa.
and design, the extent of the documentation shall be 11.1.5.2 Function testing and setting of the safety valves
considered on a case by case basis. shall be carried out on each compressor in the presence of the
11.1.2 Safety arrangements Register.
11.1.2.1 Each compressor stage shall be fitted with a 11.1.5.3 A capacity test shall be carried out with the
suitable safety valve preventing the pressure rise in the stage compressor running at design condition (rated speed,
above 1,1 times of the rated pressure when the delivery pipe pressure, temperature, etc.). The capacity test may be waived
valve is closed. for compressors produced in series and when previous tests
have been carried out on similar compressors with
The safety valve design shall prevent any satisfactory result. The capacity test shall be witnessed by the
possibility of its adjustment or disconnection after being Register.
fitted on the compressor.
11.1.6 Name plate
11.1.2.2 The compressor crankcases of more than 0,5 m3 in
volume shall be fitted with safety valves meeting the Every compressor shall carry a name plate with the
requirements of 2.5.3. following information:
11.1.2.3 On the delivery pipe immediately after the – manufacturer;
compressor a safety fuse or a signal device shall be fitted – year of construction;
operating before the air temperature reaches 120°C. – effective suction rate, [m3/h];
11.1.2.4 The casings of the intermediate coolers shall be – discharge pressure, [MPa];
fitted with safety devices providing for a free escape of air in – speed, [rpm];
case the pipes are broken.
– power consumption, [kW].
11.1.2.5 Where one compressor stage comprises several
cylinders which can be shut off individually, each cylinder
shall be equipped with a safety valve and a pressure gauge.

June 2018 125
11.2 Pumps 11.2.1.8 For the purpose of hydrostatic pressure testing,

pump casings shall not be painted on their internal or external
11.2.1 General requirements surfaces.
11.2.1.1 The following pumps are subject to final inspection 11.2.1.9 Provision shall be made to prevent the pumped
and to hydraulic performance testing in the manufacturer’s fluid from penetration to the bearings. However, this does not
works under the supervision of the Register: apply to the pumps, where the pumped fluid is employed also
– bilge pumps / bilge ejectors; for lubrication of bearings.
– ballast pumps; 11.2.1.10 The pump glands arranged on the suction side are
– river water (outboard water) cooling pumps for main recommended to be fitted with hydraulic seals.
engines;
11.2.2 Materials
– fresh water cooling pumps for main engines;
– fire pumps including pumps serving fixed fire- 11.2.2.1 The machinery parts stated in Table 11.2.2-1 are
extinguishing systems, e.g. pressure water spraying subject to supervision of the Register in the process of
(sprinkler) pumps; manufacture, regarding their compliance with the approved
technical documentation and the requirements of the Rules,
– emergency fire pumps; Part 25 – Metallic materials.
– boiler feed water pumps;
11.2.2.2 Materials for details listed in Table 11.2.2-1 may be
– circulating pumps for boilers with forced circulation; selected according to standards as well. In that case the use of
– lubricating oil pumps for main engine and main reduction these materials is subject to approval by the Register, during
gear; the inspection of technical documentation.
– fuel oil booster and transfer pumps; 11.2.2.3 The materials of the pump components shall be
– circulating pumps for thermal oil system; suitable for the proposed applications. They shall be selected
– cargo pumps; with due regard to the operating conditions and the nature of
the liquid to be handled.
– hydraulic pumps for steering gears, controllable pitch
propellers, windlasses and thrusters. 11.2.2.4 Casings for pumps intended to be used for piping
systems of pipe Class I and II shall be manufactured by the
11.2.1.2 The following contractually agreed operating data
Register approved manufacturers.
shall be verified during the performance test:
For the use in pipe Class III piping systems an
– pump capacity Q, in [m3/h];
approval according to other recognized standards may be
– delivery head H, in [m]; accepted.
– pump power input P, in [kW];
11.2.2.5 The following are subject to material testing and
– speed of rotation n, in [rpm]. certification in accordance with the Register’s Rules (EN
11.2.1.3 Pump capacities shall be checked with the pump 10204, type 3.2):
running at design condition (rated speed and delivery head, – casings of boiler water circulating pumps and boiler feed
viscosity, etc.). water pumps with a permitted working pressure of p w ≥
During the performance test, the pump shall be 1,0 MPa;
checked for smooth running and bearing temperature. – casings of pumps for handling dangerous chemicals;
– casings of circulating pumps for thermal oil system.
11.2.1.4 For centrifugal pumps having capacities less than
1000,0 m3/h, the pump characteristic (head-capacity curve) For all other pumps, the casing materials may be
shall be determined for each type of pump. attested by a test report 2.2 or type 3.1 according to EN
10204. The same procedure is also to be applied to the
11.2.1.5 Pump housings, except those for cargo oil pumps, materials used for rotating components.
shall be hydrostatically tested at a pressure of 1,5 times the
design pressure, but not less than 0,4 MPa However, the test 11.2.2.6 Limits on the application of materials for pump
pressure need not exceed the design pressure by more than casings
7,0 MPa. Grey cast iron (at least EN-GJL-200/GG-20):
Cargo oil pumps shall be tested to 1,3 times the – max. permissible working temperature t ≤ 200°C;
design pressure, with a minimum of 1,4 MPa. Hydrostatic – max. permissible working pressure p w ≤ 1,6 MPa.
testing of pump housings on submerged pumps may not be
Nodular cast iron (elongation A 5 at least 12%):
required.
– max. permissible working temperature t ≤ 300°C for
11.2.1.6 For centrifugal pumps the design pressure shall be nodular cast iron in ordinary qualities;
the design pressure head on the head-capacity curve. For – max. permissible working temperature t ≤ 350°C for
displacement pumps the design pressure shall not be taken nodular cast iron in special qualities.
less than the relief valve opening pressure.
For nodular cast iron in ordinary and special qualities see
11.2.1.7 For displacement pumps the setting and correct the Rules, Part 25 – Metallic Materials, Table 3.13.4.5.
dimensioning of the relief valve shall be checked. Steel and cast steel for general applications:
– max. permissible working temperature t ≤ 300°C.

126 June 2018
Cast copper alloys: 11.2.2.7 Casting defects in pump casings may be repaired
– max. permissible working temperature t ≤ 200°C for only by recognized methods. The Register shall be notified
copper and aluminium brass; prior to the execution of the repair.
– max. permissible working temperature t ≤ 300°C for 11.2.3 Safety devices
copper nickel alloys.
Aluminium casting alloys: 11.2.3.1 If the design of the pump does not preclude the
possibility of pressurising above the rated value, a safety
– max. permissible working temperature t ≤ 200°C with
valve shall be fitted on the pump casing or on the pipe before
the approval of the Register.
first stop valve.
Plastics:
– the use of plastics requires the approval of the
Register in the individual case of application.
Table 11.2.2-1

CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS, FANS AND AIR BLOWERS
Shafts
Impellers, rotors, blades Copper alloy the Rules, Part 25, 4.2
Aluminium alloy the Rules, Part 25, 5.2
Casings
Copper alloy the Rules, Part 25, 4.2
SCREW, GEAR AND ROTARY PUMPS
Shaft, screw, rotor Nodular cast iron the Rules, Part 25, 3.13.4
Casings and housing of screw pump
Gears Nodular cast iron the Rules, Part 25, 3.13.4
COMPRESSORS AND PISTON TYPE PUMPS
Crankshafts Forged steel the Rules, Part 25, 3.11
Connecting rods, piston rods Forged steel the Rules, Part 25, 3.11
Pistons
Cylinder blocks and cylinder covers Nodular cast iron the Rules, Part 25, 3.13.4
Cylinder liners Grey cast iron the Rules, Part 25, 3.13.3

June 2018 127
11.3.1.4 The suction pipes of fans and air blowers shall be

11.2.3.2 In pumps intended for transferring flammable protected against entry of foreign materials.
liquids, the by-pass from safety valves shall be affected to the
suction side of the pump. 11.3.1.5 The lubricating oil system of the turbocharger
bearings shall be so arranged as to prevent the oil from
11.2.3.3 Provision shall be made to prevent hydraulic getting into the supercharging air.
impacts; the use of the by-pass valves for this purpose is not
recommended. 11.3.1.6 In case of emergency, it shall be possible to shut
down the motors driving the blower and suction fans from
11.2.4 Strength calculations outside the space in which they are located, and from outside
11.2.4.1 The critical rotation speed of the pump rotor is not the machinery spaces.
to be less than 1,3 of the rated one. 11.3.1.7 Fans serving hazardous spaces (enclosed or semi-
11.2.4.2 The pump components shall be checked for enclosed spaces and zones where the explosion is likely to
strength under stresses corresponding to the pump rated occur) shall be delivered with the Register certificate (EN
parameters. In this case, the reference stresses are not to 10204, type 3.2).
exceed 0,4 of yield strength of the component material. 11.3.2 Strength test
11.2.5 Self-priming pumps 11.3.2.1 The impellers shall be so dimensioned that at a
11.2.5.1 The pumps provided with self-priming devices speed equal to 1,3 of the rated one, reference stresses at any
shall ensure operation under “dry suction” conditions and are, section are not in excess of 0,95 of yield strength of the
in general, to be fitted with arrangements (strainer, fine filter) component material.
preventing the self-priming device from operating with 11.3.2.2 The impellers shall be also tested for strength
contaminated water. during at least 3 minutes at rotation speed equal to 1,2 times
11.2.5.2 The self-priming pumps shall have the place for the rated one. Strength shall be considered sufficient if there
connecting a vacuum pressure gauge on their suction side. are no deformation traces after testing. Such testing of the
prototype of impellers is mandatory. Series specimens may
11.2.5.3 Emergency fire pumps shall be of self-priming type not be subjected to such testing, provided each impeller
or be equipped with additional suction aid. forging shall be tested by one of the approved non-
destructive methods.
11.2.6 Attached pumps
11.3.3 Additional requirements for the pump rooms
All the pumps attached on the engine shall be so
fans
designed as to ensure supply to the engine under all operating
conditions of the engine. 11.3.3.1 The clearances between the fan casing and the
rotating parts shall be such as to exclude any possibility of
11.2.7 Additional requirements for pumps that serve contact between the rotating parts and the casing even in the
for transferring of flammable liquids case of damage to the bearings. These clearances shall not be
11.2.7.1 Shaft-sealing shall be so arranged that leakage less than 0,1 bearings diameter and, in all cases, shall not be
occurred will not cause the formation of vapours and gases in less than 2,0 mm and in general not more than 13,0 mm.
such quantities as to create easily flammable mixture of air 11.3.3.2 Protection screens of not more than 13,0 mm
and gas. square mesh shall be fitted in the inlet and outlet ventilation
11.2.7.2 The possibility of overheating and ignition in the openings on the open deck to prevent the entrance of objects
sealing of rotating parts due to friction shall be excluded. into the fan housing.
11.2.7.3 When materials of low electrical conductivity 11.3.3.3 To prevent electrostatic charges both in the rotating
(plastic material, rubber etc.) are used in the pumps structure, body and casing they shall be made of antistatic materials.
provision shall be made for removal of electrostatic charges Furthermore, the installation on board of the ventilation units
by means of the conductor situated in the material or by shall be such as to ensure their safe bonding to the vessel’s
means of charge releasing device. hull according to requirements of the present Rules, Chapter
II - Electrical installations.
11.3 Fans and air blowers 11.3.3.4 The impeller and the housing (in way of the
11.3.1 General requirements impeller) shall be made of materials which are recognized as
being spark proof.
11.3.1.1 The requirements of this Head shall be complied The following combinations of materials of
with when designing and manufacturing fans intended to impeller and housing are considered spark proof:
complete the systems specified in Section 7 as well as boiler
fans and internal combustion engine turbochargers. .1 non-metallic antistatic materials;
.2 non-ferrous-based alloys;
11.3.1.2 For materials see Table 11.2.2-1. For exhaust gas
turbochargers, the requirements in 2.7.6.1 apply. .3 austenitic stainless steel;
.4 impeller is made of aluminium alloy or magnesium alloy
11.3.1.3 The rotors of fans and air blowers shall be and housing is made of cast iron or steel (austenitic
dynamically balanced together with couplings in compliance stainless steel included), only if a ring of suitable
with 6.12.

128 June 2018
thickness of non-ferrous materials is fitted inside the

housing in way of impeller; 12 HOISTING DEVICES OF
.5 any combination of cast iron and steel impellers and WHEELHOUSE
housings (including austenitic stainless steel), provided
the tip clearance is not less than 13,0 mm. 12.1 General requirements
Other combinations of materials of impellers and
12.1.1 The requirements of this Section apply to the design
housings may also be permitted if they are recognized as non-
and construction of systems for hoisting and lowering of
sparking by appropriate tests.
wheelhouses on all types of vessels.
11.3.3.5 The following combinations of materials of
impeller and housing are not permitted: 12.1.2 A vertically movable wheelhouse shall permit
efficient steering of the inland navigation vessel and shall not
.1 impellers made of aluminium alloy or magnesium alloy endanger the stability of the vessel.
and housings made of ferrous-based alloys;
.2 impellers are made of ferrous-based alloys and housings 12.1.3 A vertically movable wheelhouse and its gear shall
are made of aluminium or magnesium alloys; be designed in such a way as not to adversely affect the
.3 impellers and housings are made of ferrous-based alloys safety of persons on board; it shall be possible to fix the
with less than 13,0 mm tip clearance. wheelhouse in different positions along the vertical axis. A
possibility for immediate release of the fixing arrangements
should be ensured under all operational conditions inclusive
of a total power failure.
12.1.4 Hoisting and lowering shall not interfere with

operations performed from the wheelhouse.
12.1.5 Before starting construction, all plans,

specifications and calculations shall be submitted to the
Register for review/approval.
12.1.6 The following plans and particulars shall be

submitted for approval for hydraulic systems for hoisting and
lowering of wheelhouses:
– arrangement plan of hydraulic cylinder;
– detail plans of hydraulic cylinder;
– plans showing connections of cylinder(s) to wheelhouse
and cylinder(s) to vessel;
– diagram of hydraulic system;
– working and relief pressure of hydraulic system;
– for synchronised telescopic cylinders, the working and
relief pressure for each compartment.
12.1.7 The cylinders, hydraulic power piping, valves,

flanges and fittings and all components transmitting
mechanical forces to the wheelhouse shall be of steel or other
approved ductile material, duly tested in accordance with the
requirements of the Rules, Part 25 – Metallic materials. In
general, such material shall have an elongation of not less
than 12% nor a tensile strength in excess of 650 N/mm2.
Special consideration will be given to the acceptance of grey
cast iron for valve bodies and redundant parts with low stress
levels.
12.1.8 Where appropriate, consideration will be given to

the acceptance of non-ferrous material.
Hydraulic hoses are:
a) only permissible, if vibration absorption or freedom of
movement of components makes their use inevitable;
b) to be designed for at least the maximum service pressure;
c) to be renewed at the latest every eight years.
Arrangements shall be provided to avoid an
uncontrolled lowering of the wheelhouse in case of hose
rupture.

June 2018 129
12.1.9 The welding details and welding procedures shall possibility of mechanical damage to them (see the present
be approved. All welded joints within the pressure boundary Rules, Chapter II, 13.8.3.20).
or connecting parts transmitting mechanical loads shall be
full penetration type or of equivalent strength. 12.2.5 The device for fastening the cables may also be
used for laying hoses or pipes leading into the wheelhouse.
12.1.10 The design of synchronised telescopic cylinders The distance between such hoses or pipes and the cables shall
shall be such that the working pressure in each compartment not be less than 100,0 mm.
shall not exceed the design pressure of that compartment
under all conditions of service, otherwise each compartment 12.2.6 It shall be possible to operate the lifting mechanism
shall be provided with a safety relief valve discharging to from inside the wheelhouse. Optical signalling of the
atmospheric pressure. following positions shall be provided at the steering position:
– electric drive switchboard live;
12.1.11 The hydraulic cylinder(s) shall be of an approved
type. – wheelhouse in lower terminal position;
Arrangements shall be provided to maintain the – wheelhouse in upper terminal position;
cleanliness of the hydraulic fluid taking into consideration the – wheelhouse locked in fixed position (if applicable).
type and design of the hydraulic system.
12.2.7 Optical and acoustic signalling of wheelhouse
12.1.12 External stairs for access to the wheelhouse are not movements shall be provided. The signals shall be visible
a classification item. It is however recommended to indicate and audible in and near the wheelhouse.
clearly the number of persons that are allowed
simultaneously on the stairs and for which the stairs have 12.3 Requirements relating to the hoisting gear
been approved by the competent authority. drive
12.1.13 The Register shall carry out supervision during 12.3.1 The gear for hoisting and lowering the wheelhouse
manufacture, in compliance with the approved technical shall have a power drive capable of functioning under all
documentation. normal conditions of vessel’s operation.
12.1.14 A vertically movable wheelhouse and their 12.3.2 The wheelhouse shall be equipped with an
appliances shall be inspected by the Register: emergency lowering device independent of the power drive.
a) before being put into service for the first time; Emergency lowering of the wheelhouse shall be effected
under its own weight and shall be smooth and controllable.
b) before being put back into service after any major
modification or repair; and 12.3.3 The hoisting mechanism shall enable the
c) regularly, at least every five years. wheelhouse to stop and remain fixed in any position. Safe
access to and exit from the wheelhouse shall be possible in
In these inspections proof of adequate strength and
any position.
stability shall be provided by calculations. An inspection
attestation shall be issued, signed by a Surveyor of the 12.3.4 Automatic cutting out of the hoisting mechanism
Register and showing the date of inspection. (limit switches) in the terminal positions shall be provided.
12.1.15 A vertically movable wheelhouse and their 12.3.5 Lowering of the wheelhouse shall be effected by
appliances shall be inspected regularly, but at least once one person under all conditions. Emergency lowering shall be
every twelve months, by a competent person. The safety of possible from both inside and outside the wheelhouse. The
the installation shall be established by a visual check and a speed of emergency lowering of the wheelhouse shall not be
check on satisfactory operation. less than the speed of lowering effected by means of the main
drive.
12.2 Requirements relating to construction
12.3.6 The use of a self-braking hoisting mechanism shall
12.2.1 The hoisting mechanism shall be designed to hoist not be permitted.
at least 1,5 times the weight of the wheelhouse fully equipped
and fully manned. 12.3.7 Connecting the hydraulic system for hoisting the
wheelhouse to another hydraulic system must, in each
12.2.2 The mechanism for hoisting the wheelhouse shall separate case, be approved by the Register.
function reliably and without jamming under all possible
conditions of asymmetrical load as well as at all angles of 12.3.8 The feed for the electric drive of the wheelhouse
vessel’s list and trim which could occur during its normal hoisting gear and the switchboard of its signalling system
operation. shall be supplied from busbars on the main distributor panel
fed directly from the generator or transformer; these electric
12.2.3 The wheelhouse shall be earthed so that it would be drives shall be provided with independent feeders of their
in effective metallic contact with the vessel’s hull. The own.
protective earthing device may at the same time form an
integral part of the lightning conductor system if the lightning Their feed from busbars on the emergency
conductor receiver is located on the wheelhouse. switchboard shall be assured in the same way.
12.2.4 The feed cables for systems inside the wheelhouse

shall be laid and fastened in such a way as to exclude the

130 June 2018
is gastight and can only be opened from outside the

13 LIQUEFIED GAS INSTALLATIONS superstructure. It shall be so located that the distribution
FOR DOMESTIC PURPOSES pipes leading to the gas consumption points are as short as
possible.
13.1 General requirements 13.4.2 No more receptacles may be in operation
13.1.1 The following requirements apply to permanently simultaneously than are necessary for the functioning of the
installed domestic liquefied gas installations on vessels. installation. Several receptacles may be connected only if a
reversing coupler is used. Up to four receptacles may be
13.1.2 Deviations from these requirements are connected per supply unit. The number of receptacles on
permissible, required they are permitted by the statutory board, including spare receptacles shall not exceed six per
regulations in force in the area of service. installation.
13.1.3 Liquefied gas installations consist essentially of a 13.4.3 Up to six receptacles may be connected on
supply unit comprising one or more gas receptacles, and of passenger vessels with galleys or canteens for passengers.
one or more pressure regulators, a distribution system and a The number of receptacles on board, including spare
number of gas-consuming appliances. receptacles, shall not exceed nine per installation.
Spare and empty receptacles not in the supply unit 13.4.4 Pressure regulators, or in case of two-stage
shall not be considered part of the installation. regulation the first pressure regulator, shall be fitted to a wall
13.1.4 Installations may be operated only with commercial in the same cupboard as the receptacles.
propane. 13.4.5 Supply units shall be so installed that any leaking
13.1.5 Documentation to be submitted gas can escape from the cupboard into the open without any
risk of it penetrating inside the vessel or coming into contact
Documentation given in the Rules, Part 1 – with a source of ignition.
Classification and Surveys, Chapter II, Table 3.2-13 shall be
submitted to the Register for review/approval. 13.4.6 Cupboards shall be constructed of flame-retardant
materials and shall be sufficiently ventilated by apertures in
13.2 Gas installations the top and bottom. Receptacles shall be placed upright in the
cupboards in such a way that they cannot overturn.
13.2.1 Liquefied gas installations shall be suitable
throughout for use with propane and shall be built and 13.4.7 Cupboards shall be so built and placed that the
installed in accordance with the Rules. temperature of the receptacles cannot exceed 50°C.
13.2.2 Liquefied gas installations may be used only for 13.4.8 The words “Liquefied gas” and a “Fire, naked
domestic purposes in the accommodation and the flame and smoking prohibited” symbol at least 10 cm in
wheelhouse, and for corresponding purposes on passenger diameter in accordance with Figure 2 of Annex 4 (ES-TRIN)
vessels. shall be affixed to the outer wall of the cupboard.
13.2.3 There may be a number of separate installations on 13.5 Spare and empty receptacles
board. A single installation shall not be used to serve
accommodation areas separated by a hold or a fixed tank. Spare and empty receptacles not located in the
supply unit shall be stored outside the accommodation and
13.2.4 No part of a liquefied gas installation shall be the wheelhouse in a cupboard built in accordance with 13.4.
located in the engine room.
13.6 Pressure regulators (reducers)
13.3 Gas receptacles
13.6.1 Gas-consuming appliances may be connected to
13.3.1 Only receptacles with an approved content of receptacles only through a distribution system fitted with one
between 5,0 and 35,0 kg are permitted. For passenger vessels, or more pressure regulators to bring the gas pressure down to
the use of receptacles with a larger content may be approved the utilisation pressure. The pressure may be reduced in one
on a case by case basis. or two stages. All pressure regulators shall be set
permanently at a pressure determined in accordance with
13.3.2 Receptacles shall bear the official stamp certifying 13.7.
that they have been accepted following the required tests.
13.6.2 The final pressure regulators shall be either fitted
13.3.3 Receptacles shall not be filled with liquefied gas on with or immediately followed by a device to protect the pipe
board a vessel. automatically against excess pressure in the event of a
malfunctioning of the pressure regulator. It shall be ensured
13.4 Location and arrangement of supply units that in the event of a leak in the protection device any leaking
gas can escape into the open without any risk of it penetrating
13.4.1 Supply units shall be installed on deck in a
inside the vessel or coming into contact with a source of
freestanding or wall cupboard located outside the
ignition; if necessary, a special pipe shall be fitted for this
accommodation in a position such that it does not interfere
purpose.
with movement on board. They shall not, however, be
installed against the fore or aft bulwark. The cupboard may
be a wall cupboard set into the superstructure provided that it

June 2018 131
13.6.3 The protection devices and vents shall be protected 13.10 Gas-consuming appliances and their
against the entry of water. installation
13.7 Pressure 13.10.1 The only appliances that may be installed are
propane-consuming appliances approved by the Register and
13.7.1 Where two-stage regulating systems are used, the equipped with devices that effectively prevent the escape of
mean pressure shall not be more than 0,25 MPa above gas in the event of either the flame or the pilot light being
atmospheric pressure. extinguished.
13.7.2 The pressure at the outlet from the last pressure 13.10.2 Appliances shall be so placed and connected that
regulator shall not be more than 0,005 MPa above they cannot overturn or be accidentally moved and any risk
atmospheric pressure, with a tolerance of 10%. of accidental wrenching of the connecting pipes is avoided.
13.8 Piping and flexible tubes 13.10.3 Heating and water-heating appliances and
refrigerators shall be connected to a flue for evacuating
13.8.1 Pipes shall consist of permanently installed steel or
combustion gases into the open air.
copper tubing in compliance with requirements of Section 7.
However, pipes connecting with the receptacles 13.10.4 The installation of gas-consuming appliances in the
shall be high-pressure flexible tubes or spiral tubes suitable wheelhouse is permitted only if the wheelhouse is so
for propane. Gas-consuming appliances may, if not constructed that no leaking gas can escape into the lower
permanently installed, be connected by means of suitable parts of the vessel, in particular through the penetrations for
flexible tubes not more than 1,0 m long. control lines to the engine room.
13.8.2 Pipes shall be able to withstand any stresses, in 13.10.5 Gas-consuming appliances may be installed in
particular regarding corrosion and strength, which may occur sleeping quarters only if combustion is independent of
under normal operating conditions on board and their ambient air in the quarters.
characteristics and layout shall be such that they ensure a
satisfactory flow of gas at the appropriate pressure to the gas- 13.10.6 Gas-consuming appliances in which combustion
consuming appliances. depends on ambient air shall be installed in rooms which are
sufficiently large.
13.8.3 Pipes shall have as few joints as possible. Both
pipes and joints shall be gastight and shall remain gastight 13.11 Ventilation and evacuation of combustion
despite any vibration or expansion to which they may be gases
subjected.
13.11.1 In rooms containing gas-consuming appliances in
13.8.4 Pipes shall be readily accessible, properly fixed and which combustion depends on ambient air, fresh air shall be
protected at every point where they might be subject to supplied and combustion gases evacuated by means of
impact or friction, particularly where they pass through steel ventilation apertures of adequate dimensions, with a clear
bulkheads or metal walls. The entire surface of steel pipes section of at least 150,0 cm2 per aperture.
shall be treated against corrosion.
13.11.2 Ventilation apertures shall not have any closing
13.8.5 Flexible pipes and their joints shall be able to device and shall not lead to sleeping quarters.
withstand any stresses which may occur under normal
operating conditions on board. They shall be installed in such 13.11.3 Evacuation devices shall be so designed as to
a way that they are free of tension, cannot be heated ensure the safe evacuation of combustion gases. They shall
excessively and can be inspected over their entire length. be reliable in operation and made of non-combustible
materials. Their operation shall not be affected by forced
13.9 Distribution system ventilation.
13.9.1 It shall be possible to shut off the entire distribution 13.12 Tests and trials
system by means of a main valve which is at all times easily
and rapidly accessible. 13.12.1 The completed installation shall be subjected to
tests defined in 13.12.2 to 13.12.8.
13.9.2 Each gas-consuming appliance shall be supplied by
a separate branch of the distribution system, and each branch 13.12.2 Medium-pressure pipes between the closing device,
shall be controlled by a separate closing device. referred to in 13.9.4, of the first pressure regulator and the
valves fitted before the final pressure regulator:
13.9.3 Valves shall be fitted at points where they are a) pressure test, carried out with air, an inert gas or a liquid
protected from the weather and from impact. at a pressure 2,0 MPa above atmospheric pressure;
13.9.4 An inspection connection shall be fitted after each b) tightness test, carried out with air or an inert gas at a
pressure regulator. It shall be ensured using a closing device pressure 0,35 MPa above atmospheric pressure.
that in pressure tests the pressure regulator is not exposed to
13.12.3 Pipes at the service pressure between the closing
the test pressure.
device, referred to in 13.9.4, of the only pressure regulator or
the final pressure regulator and the valves fitted before the
gas-consuming appliances:

132 June 2018
– tightness test, carried out with air or an inert gas at a representative submits a reasoned request, the Register may
pressure of 0,1 MPa above atmospheric pressure. extend the validity of the attestation for not more than three
months without carrying out the acceptance test referred to in
13.12.4 Pipes situated between the closing device, referred 13.13.
to in 13.9.4, of the only pressure regulator or the final
pressure regulator and the controls of gas-consuming
appliances:
– tightness test at a pressure of 0,015 MPa above
atmospheric pressure.
13.12.5 In the tests referred to in 13.12.2, b), 13.12.3 and

13.12.4, the pipes are deemed gastight if, after sufficient time
to allow for equalisation with ambient temperature, no
decrease in the test pressure is observed during a further 10
minute test period.
13.12.6 Receptacle connectors, pipe joints and other fittings

subjected to the pressure in the receptacles, and joints
between pressure regulators and the distribution pipe:
– tightness test, carried out with a foaming substance, at the
service pressure.
13.12.7 All gas-consuming appliances shall be brought into

service at the nominal capacity and shall be tested for
satisfactory and undisturbed combustion at different capacity
settings.
Flame failure devices shall be checked to ensure
that they operate satisfactorily.
13.12.8 After the test referred to in 13.12.7, it shall be

verified for each gas-consuming appliance connected to a
flue, whether, after five minutes’ operation at the nominal
capacity, with windows and doors closed and the ventilation
devices in operation, any combustion gases are escaping into
the room through the air intake.
If there is a more than momentary escape of such
gases, the cause shall immediately be detected and remedied.
The appliance shall not be approved for use until all defects
have been eliminated.
13.13 Acceptance test

13.13.1 Liquefied gas installations shall be checked by the
Register, in order to verify whether the installation conforms
to the requirements of this Section:
a) before being put into service for the first time;
modification or repair; and
c) on every renewal of the attestation referred to in 13.14.
13.13.2 An inspection attestation shall be issued, signed by

a Surveyor of the Register and showing the date of
inspection.
13.14 Attestation
13.14.1 The attestation to the effect that all liquefied gas
installations conform to the requirements of this Section will
be issued by the Register following the acceptance test
referred to in 13.13.
13.14.2 The attestation shall be valid for a period not

exceeding three years. It may be renewed only after a further
acceptance test carried out in accordance with 13.13.
Exceptionally, where the owner of a vessel or his

June 2018 133
dynamic moments resulting from the torsional vibrations

14 TORSIONAL VIBRATIONS or the stresses in the coupling elements and the
comparison with the permissible values;
14.1 Application .6 for reduction gears:
14.1.1 The requirements of this Section apply to the dynamic moments on the (tooth) gearing and the
shafting of the following installations: comparison with the mean torque, dynamic moments in
the range of the rated number of revolutions as specified
.1 propulsion systems with prime movers developing 220,0
in 4.;
kW or more;
.7 for diesel generators:
.2 other systems with internal combustion engines
developing 110,0 kW or more and driving auxiliary variable moments on rotor and their comparison with the
machinery intended for essential services. torque moment;
.8 drawings and calculations of vibration dampers if any;
14.1.2 The requirements of this Section may be waived at
.9 amplitude of vibrations, at the point where the
the Register’s discretion in cases where satisfactory service
measurement of torsional vibrations corresponds to the
operation of similar installations is demonstrated or in the
calculated values of stresses and dynamic moments
case of vessels intended for operation in restricted
required, in compliance with .4 and .5.
geographical areas.
14.2.3 Modifications of existing plants
Where substantial modifications of existing plants,
14.2.1 The calculation of torsional vibrations shall include such as:
the following operations:
– change of the running speed or power of the engine;
.1 running with spare propeller, if its moment of inertia
– replacement of an important component of the system
differs from that of the working propeller by 10% or
(propeller, flexible coupling, damper) by one of different
more;
characteristics; or
.2 operation at maximum power take-off and idle running,
– connection of a new component;
in case of controllable pitch propeller and cycloidal
are carried out, new vibration analysis shall be submitted for
propeller (Voith-Schneider);
approval.
.3 operation with additional power consumers connected to
the system, if the inertia moment of the power consumer 14.3 Permissible stresses
is significant in comparison with that of the working
cylinder; 14.3.1 Crankshafts and generator shafts
.4 astern running if a reverse gear is fitted; 14.3.1.1 Permissible stresses due to torsional vibrations in
.5 with one cylinder not firing; crankshafts of main engines when running continuously shall
.6 with individual and simultaneous operation of the main not exceed the values of alternating torsional stresses for
engines for multi engine plants fitted with one reduction which the calculation of the engine crankshaft calculation is
gearing. approved (see the Rules, Part 9 – Machinery, 2.4.3).
14.3.1.2 Permissible stresses due to torsional vibration for
14.2.2 The calculation of torsional vibrations shall contain crankshafts of engines driving generators and other auxiliary
all necessary data such as: machinery for essential services shall not exceed the values
.1 detailed data of the component parts of the dynamic of alternating torsional stresses for which the calculation of
system: the engine crankshaft calculation is approved (see the Rules,
– size of moments of mass inertia and torsional Part 9 – Machinery, 2.4.3).
stiffness of dynamic system;
14.3.1.3 Permissible stresses in crankshafts, in [N/mm2], of
– layouts of all possible operating variants of systems main engines for speed ranges forbidden for continuous
referred to in 14.2.1; operation and allowed only to be rapidly passed through shall
– type and the parameters of the vibration damper, not exceed the following values:
flexible couplings, gearing and generators;
 n  2 ⋅ Rm − 510
.2 natural frequency tables for all modes having significant τ dop1 =±2,0 ⋅  45 − 0, 4 ⋅ d − 13 ⋅ i  ⋅ (14.3.1-1)
resonances within the range of 0,2 to 1,2 of the rated  n Rm
number of revolutions; within the speed range:
.3 firing order in cylinders of internal combustion engine 0,7∙n for vessels with ice strengthening;
and the geometrical sums of the relative vibration
0,8∙n for other vessels.
amplitudes of the cranks of the working cylinders for all
orders and modes under consideration; where:
.4 stresses at the weakest cylindrical cross sections of the τ dop1 = permissible stresses, [N/mm²];
shafting resulted from the existing moment of all d = shaft diameter, [mm];
resonances in the speed range of 0,2 to 1,2 of the rated
number of revolutions; ni = speed under consideration, [rpm];
.5 for flexible couplings: n = rated speed, [rpm];

134 June 2018
Rm = tensile strength of the shaft material, [N/mm²]. = when the intermediate shaft material is an alloy
For vessels the main engines of which run steel having the tensile strength exceeding 800,0
continuously with the maximum torque moment at speeds N/mm², for the calculation purpose will be
lower than rated values (e.g. tugs and similar), n i = n shall be considered that of R m = 800,0 N/mm² only;
taken in all cases. = when the propeller shaft material is a carbon,
Critical speeds within the manoeuvring speed carbon-manganese or alloy steel having the tensile
ranges shall be avoided. strength exceeding 600,0 N/mm², for the
calculation purpose will be considered that of R m =
14.3.1.4 Permissible stresses due to torsional vibration, in 600,0 N/mm² only;
[N/mm2], in speed range 0,85∙n÷1,05∙n, for shafts of Cd = size factor;
generators shall not exceed the values determined by:
= 0,35 + 0,93∙d -0,2
2 ⋅ Rm − 510
τ dop , g = (
± 22,5 − 0, 2 ⋅ d ⋅ ) Rm
(14.3.1-2)
Ck = factor for different shaft design features (see
Table 14.3.2-1);
d = shaft diameter, [mm];
where:
λ = speed ratio n k /n or n i /n, whichever is applicable;
τ dop,g = permissible stresses, [N/mm²];
ni = rated speed under consideration, [rpm];
d = generator shaft diameter, [mm];
n = rated speed, [rpm].
n = nominal rotational speed, [rpm];
For vessels the main engine of which run
Rm = tensile strength of generator shaft material, continuously with maximum torque at speeds less than
[N/mm²]. calculated n (e.g. tugs etc.) the formula for permissible stress
14.3.1.5 Permissible stresses in generator shafts, in τ dop1 given in 14.3.2.1 shall be used throughout the speed
[N/mm2], forbidden for continuous operation and allowed range 0,2∙n to 1,05∙n.
only to be rapidly passed through shall not exceed the value 14.3.2.2 Permissible stresses, in [N/mm2], for speed ranges
of 5∙τ dop,g . forbidden for continuous running and allowed only to be
14.3.1.6 Forbidden number of revolutions shall not be rapidly passed through (i.e. barred speed ranges), shall not
allowed in the speed range: exceed the values determined by:
> 0,70∙n - for vessels with ice strengthening; 1,7 ⋅ τ dop 2
τ dop 3 = ± (14.3.2-3)
> 0,80∙n - for main engines of other vessels; Ck
≥ 0,85∙n - for generators and generator diesel engines. For notations see 14.3.2.1.
14.3.2 Intermediate, thrust and propeller shafts Barred speed range for continuous running is not
allowed with number of revolutions:
14.3.2.1 Permissible stresses due to torsional vibrations, in
[N/mm2], for continuous operation in speed range: ≥ 0,7∙n - for vessels with ice strengthening;
0,7∙n ÷1,05∙n - for vessels with ice strengthening; ≥ 0,8∙n - for other vessels.
0,9∙n ÷1,05∙n - for other vessels; Barred speed ranges in one-cylinder misfiring
shall not exceed the values determined by the formula: conditions of single propulsion engine vessels shall enable
safe navigation.
R − 160
τ dop1 =
± m ⋅ Ck ⋅ Cd ⋅ 1,38 (14.3.2-1) 14.3.2.3 If the minimum intermediate shaft, thrust shaft or
18 propeller shaft diameter is greater than minimum permissible
Permissible stresses, in [N/mm2], in speed ranges value calculated in accordance with 3.2.2, 3.2.3 or 3.2.4
lower than the above mentioned shall not exceed the values respectively, permissible stresses due to torsional vibrations
determined by: may be greater than determined in accordance with 14.3.2.1,
subject to consideration of the Register.
Rm − 160  n 
2
τ dop 2 =± ⋅ Ck ⋅ Cd ⋅ 3 − 2 ⋅  i   (14.3.2-2) 14.3.2.4 Greater values of the permissible stresses
18  n  determined by alternative formula which are not referred to
in 14.3.2.1, shall be considered by the Register on a case by
where: case basis.
τ dop1 = permissible stresses, [N/mm²];
14.3.3 Diesel generators
τ dop2 = permissible stresses, [N/mm²];
Variable torque moments on the generator rotor
Rm = tensile strength of the shaft material, [N/mm²]; under conditions of the rated loading of generator within the
= when the intermediate shaft material is a carbon speed range 0,95∙n ÷ 1,10∙n, shall not exceed the double rated
or carbon-manganese steel having the tensile torque moment of the main engine.
strength exceeding 600,0 N/mm², for the
calculation purpose will be considered that of R m =
600,0 N/mm² only;

June 2018 135
Table 14.3.2-1
C k - factors for different design features
Design features Ck
Intermediate shafts with
1. straight sections and integral coupling flanges 5) 1,0
2. shrink-fit coupling (keyless) 1) 1,0
3. keyways, tapered connections 2) 0,60
4. keyways, cylindrical connections 2) 0,45
5. radial holes 6) 0,50
6. longitudinal slot 3) 0,30
Thrust shafts external to engines
7. on both sides of thrust collar 5) 0,85
8. in way of axial bearing where a roller bearing is used as a thrust bearing 0,85
Propeller shafts
9. flange mounted 4), 5), keyless taper fitted propellers 4) and key fitted propellers 4) 0,55
10. between forward edge of aft most bearing and forward stern tube seal 0,80
Notes:
1) C k refers to the plain shaft sections only. Where shafts may experience vibratory stresses close to the permissible stresses for
continuous operation, an increase in diameter to the shrink fit diameter shall be provided, e.g. a diameter increase of 1% to 2%
and a blending radius as described in first General note.
2) At a distance of not less than 0,2∙d M from the end of the keyway the shaft diameter may be reduced to the diameter calculated
with k = 1,0. In general, keyways are not to be used in installations with a barred speed range. Fillet radius in the transverse
section of the bottom of the keyway shall not be less than 0,0125∙d M .
3) Length of the slot shall not exceed 0,8∙d M . Inner diameter shall not exceed 0,8∙d M . Width of the slot shall be higher than 0,1∙d M .
The end rounding of the slot shall not be less than half its width. An edge rounding should preferably be avoided, as this
increases the stress concentration slightly. The values in the Table are valid for 1, 2 and 3 slots, i.e. with slots at 360º
respectively, 180° respectively and 120° apart.
4) Applicable to the portion of the propeller shaft between the forward edge of the aftermost shaft bearing and the forward face of
the propeller hub (or shaft flange), but not less than 2,5 times the required diameter.
5) Fillet radius shall not be less than 0,08∙d M .
6) Diameter of radial bore shall not exceed 0,3∙d M . Intersection between a radial and an eccentric axial bore is a subject of special
consideration.
General notes:
• Transitions of diameters shall be designed with either a smooth taper or a blending radius. For guidance, a blending radius equal to
the change in diameter is recommended.
• Higher values of C k factor based on direct calculations may also be considered.
• The determination of C k factor for shafts other than those given in this Table will be given special consideration by the Register.
14.3.4 Gears 14.3.5 Flexible couplings

14.3.4.1 The torsional vibration torque in any gear step is 14.3.5.1 Flexible couplings shall be capable of withstanding
not to exceed 30% of the torque corresponding to the the mean transmitted torque and the torsional vibration torque
approved rating throughout the service speed range. throughout the service speed range, without exceeding the
Where the torque transmitted at nominal speed is limits for continuous operation imposed by the manufacturer
less than that corresponding to the approved rating, higher (permissible vibratory torque and power loss).
torsional vibration torques may be accepted, subject to Where such limits are exceeded under misfiring
special consideration by the Register. conditions, appropriate restrictions of power or speed shall be
established.
14.3.4.2 Gear hammering induced by torsional vibration
torque reversal is not permitted throughout the service speed 14.3.5.2 Flexible couplings fitted in generating sets are also
range, except during transient running at speed ratios λ ≤ 0,3. to be capable of withstanding the torques and twist angles
Where calculations show the existence of torsional arising from transient criticals and short-circuit currents.
vibration torque reversals for speed ratios λ > 0,3, the Start-up conditions are also to be checked.
corresponding speed ranges shall be identified by appropriate
14.3.6 Dampers
investigations during river trials and considered as barred
speed ranges in accordance with 14.5. 14.3.6.1 Torsional vibration dampers shall be such that the
permissible power loss recommended by the manufacturer is
not exceeded throughout the service speed range.

136 June 2018
14.3.6.2 Dampers for which a failure may lead to a Additionally the tachometer tolerance has to be
significant vibration overload of the installation will be the added. At each end of the barred speed range the engine shall
subject of special consideration. be stable in operation.
14.4 Torsional vibration measurements 14.5.3.2 In general, and subject to 14.5.3.1, the barred speed
range , in [rpm], shall be determined by the formula:
14.4.1 General
 nk 
a) The Register may require torsional vibration 16 ⋅ nk 18 −  ⋅ nk
≤ nz ≤  n  (14.5.3-1)
measurements to be carried out during the vessel’s river
nk 16
trials under its supervision in the following cases: 18 −
n
– where the calculations indicate the possibility of
dangerous critical speeds in the operating speed where:
range;
nk = critical speed range, [rpm];
– where doubts arise as to the actual stress amplitudes
n = rated speed range, [rpm];
or critical speed location; or
– where barred speed ranges need to be verified; nz = barred speed range, [rpm].
b) where measurements are required, a comprehensive 14.5.4 Barred speed range (see 14.5.3) where the stresses
report including the analysis of the results shall be due to torsional vibration, or the torque moments in the
submitted to the Register; flexible couplings or reduction gears (see 14.2.2.5 and
c) the requirement for measurements will be communicated 14.2.2.6) exceed the permissible values, shall be increased by
to the yard/engine supplier with the approval letter for the 0,03∙n in both directions.
torsional vibration calculation.
14.5.5 In case of the barred speed range, the accuracy of
14.4.2 Method of measurement tachometer shall be within ± 2,5%. Barred speed range shall
be clearly marked on tachometer scale.
When measurements are required, the method of
measurement shall be submitted to the Register for approval. 14.5.6 Where the operation referred to in 14.2.1.5 proves,
The type of measuring equipment and the location of the by calculation or measurement, that there are zones where
measurement points shall be specified. stresses due to torsional vibration or torque moments in
flexible couplings or reduction gears, exceed the permissible
14.4.3 In case that the measuring results are not conclusive values, it shall be necessary:
enough in respect to the calculations, the Register reserve the
right to ask for further investigations or new approval of a .1 when the main engine is provided with the automatic
revised and adapted calculation model. alarm in case when one of cylinders is out of operation,
to provide instructions concerning forbidden area
14.4.4 Where measurements of identical propulsion plants conditions of the engine operation in compliance with
(specifically sister vessels) are available, further torsional 14.5.3 and 14.5.4;
vibration measurements for repeat vessels may, with the .2 in case the automatic alarm referred to in item .1 is not
consent of the Register, be dispensed with. provided, forbidden speed range shall not be allowed as a
rule, or it shall be indicated on the tachometer as
14.4.5 Where existing propulsion plants are modified, specified in 14.5.5 provided that the forbidden speed
Register reserves the right to require a renewed investigation range does not impede the normal service of the vessel.
of the torsional vibration characteristics.
14.5 Barred speed ranges

14.5.1 Barred speed ranges shall be passed through as
quickly as possible. In specifying barred speed ranges it is
important to ensure that the navigating and manoeuvring
functions are not unreasonably restricted.
14.5.2 Where the torsional vibration stresses exceed the

limiting values for continuous running determined by the
items 14.3.1.1, or 14.3.1.2, or by the formula for permissible
stress τ dop2 given in 14.3.2.1, for barred speed ranges shall be
imposed.
14.5.3 The limits of the barred speed range shall be

determined as follows:
14.5.3.1 The barred speed range shall cover all speeds where
the acceptable limits (τ dop ) are exceeded. For controllable
pitch propellers with the possibility of individual pitch and
speed control, both full and zero pitch conditions have to be
considered.

June 2018 137
15.2.2.2 Exemptions
15 TESTS ON BOARD Exemption from some of the river trials may be
considered by the Register in the case of vessels having a
15.1 General requirements sister vessel for which the satisfactory behaviour in service
has been demonstrated.
15.1.1 Application
An exemption shall in any case be subject to trials
This Section covers on board tests, both at the at the moorings to verify the safe and efficient operation of
moorings and during river trials. Such tests are additional to the propulsion system.
the workshop tests required in the other Sections of this
Chapter. 15.3 On board tests for machinery
15.1.2 Purpose of on board tests 15.3.1 Conditions of river trials
On board tests are intended to demonstrate that the 15.3.1.1 Degree of loading of vessels and convoys during
main and auxiliary machinery and associated systems are navigation tests
functioning properly, in particular in respect of the criteria During navigation tests, vessels intended to carry
imposed by the Rules. The tests shall be witnessed in the goods shall be loaded to at least 70% of their tonnage and
presence of a Surveyor of the Register. loading, distributed in such a way as to ensure a horizontal
attitude as far as possible. If the tests are carried out with a
lesser load the approval for downstream navigation shall be
A comprehensive list of the on board tests intended restricted to that loading.
to be carried out by the shipyard shall be submitted to the
Register. For each test, the following information shall be 15.3.1.2 Test area
provided: The navigation tests shall be carried out on areas of
inland waterways that have been designated by the Register.
– scope of the test;
Those test areas shall be situated on a stretch of
– parameters to be recorded.
flowing or standing water that is if possible straight, at least
15.2 General requirements for on board tests 2,0 km long and sufficiently wide and is equipped with
highly distinctive marks for determining the position of the
15.2.1 Trials at the moorings vessel.
Trials at the moorings shall demonstrate the It shall be possible for the Surveyor to plot the
following: hydrological data such as depth of water, width of navigable
channel and average speed of the current in the navigation
a) satisfactory operation of the machinery in relation to the area as a function of the various water levels.
service for which it is intended;
b) quick and easy response to operational commands; 15.3.1.3 Power of the machinery
c) safety of the various installations, as regards: a) The power developed by the propulsion machinery in the
course of the river trials shall be as close as possible to
– the protection of mechanical parts; the power for which classification has been requested. In
– the safeguards for personnel; general, this power is not to exceed the maximum
d) accessibility for cleaning, inspection and maintenance. continuous power at which the weakest component of the
Where the above features are not deemed propulsion system can be operated. In cases of diesel
satisfactory and require repairs or alterations, the Register engines, it is not to exceed the maximum continuous
reserves the right to require the repetition of the trials at the power for which the engine type concerned has been
moorings, either wholly or in part, after such repairs or approved;
alterations have been carried out. b) where the rotational speed of the shafting is different
from the design value, thereby increasing the stresses in
15.2.2 River trials excess of the maximum permissible limits, the power
developed in the trials shall be suitably modified so as to
15.2.2.1 Scope of the tests
confine the stresses within the design limits.
River trials shall be conducted after the trials at the
moorings and shall include the following: 15.3.1.4 Determination of the power and rotational speed
a) demonstration of the proper operation of the main and a) The rotational speed of the shafting shall be recorded in
auxiliary machinery, including monitoring, alarm and the course of the river trials, preferably by means of a
safety systems, under realistic service conditions; continuous counter;
b) check of the propulsion capability when one of the b) in general, the power shall be determined by means of
essential auxiliaries becomes inoperative; torsiometric readings, to be effected with procedures and
c) detection of dangerous vibrations by taking the necessary instruments deemed suitable by the Register.
readings when required; As an alternative, for reciprocating internal
d) checks either deemed necessary for vessel classification combustion engines, the power may be determined by
or requested by the interested parties and which are measuring the fuel consumption and on the basis of the other
possible only in the course of navigation. operating characteristics, in comparison with the results of
bench tests of the prototype engine.

138 June 2018
Other methods of determining the power may be e) starting and reversing manoeuvres;
considered by the Register on a case by case basis. f) operation in reverse direction of propeller rotation at a
minimum engine speed of n = 0,7∙n 0 for 30 minutes (see
15.3.2 Navigation and manoeuvring tests
1.2.7);
15.3.2.1 Navigability and manoeuvrability shall be checked g) tests of the monitoring, alarm and safety systems;
by means of navigation tests. The Register may dispense with
h) for engines fitted with independently driven blowers,
all or part of the tests where compliance with the navigability
emergency operation of the engine with the blowers
and manoeuvrability requirements is proven in another
inoperative.
manner.
NOTE 1: The test in c) shall be performed only where
15.3.2.2 Speed trials
permitted by the engine adjustment.
a) Where required, the speed of the vessel and convoys (see
1.2.7.6) shall be determined using procedures deemed NOTE 2: The test in f) may be performed during the dock or
suitable by the Register; river trials.
b) the vessel speed shall be determined as the average of the 15.3.3.3 Main propulsion engines driving controllable
speeds taken in not less than two pairs of runs in opposite pitch propellers or reversing gears
directions. a) The scope of the river trials for main propulsion engines
15.3.2.3 Astern trials driving controllable pitch propellers or reversing gears
shall comply with the relevant provisions of 15.3.3.2;
a) The ability of the machinery to reverse the direction of
thrust of the propeller in sufficient time (see 1.2.10.6), b) engines driving controllable pitch propellers shall be
and so to bring the vessel to rest within reasonable tested at various propeller pitches.
distance from maximum ahead service speed, shall be 15.3.3.4 Engines driving generators for propulsion
demonstrated and recorded;
River trials of engines driving generators for
b) the stopping times, vessel headings and distances propulsion shall include the following tests:
recorded on trials, together with the results of trials to
determine the ability of vessels having multiple a) operation at 100% power (rated power) for at least 2
propellers to navigate and manoeuvre with one or more hours;
propellers inoperative, shall be available on board for the b) operation at normal continuous cruise power for at least 1
use of the Master or designated personnel; hour;
c) where the vessel is provided with supplementary means c) operation at 110% power for 30 minutes;
for manoeuvring or stopping, the effectiveness of such d) operation in reverse direction of propeller rotation at a
means shall be demonstrated and recorded as referred to minimum engine speed 70% of the nominal propeller
in a) and b). speed for 30 minutes;
15.3.2.4 Stopping capacity, turning capacity, capacity for e) starting manoeuvres;
taking evasive action and capacity for going f) tests of the monitoring, alarm and safety systems.
astern
NOTE 1: The test in d) may be performed during the dock or
For stopping capacity, turning capacity, capacity
river trials.
for taking evasive action and capacity for going astern, the
requirements given in 1.2.8 apply. NOTE 2: The above tests a) to f) shall be performed at rated
speed with a constant governor setting. The powers refer to
15.3.3 Tests of diesel engines the rated electrical powers of the driven generators.
15.3.3.1 General 15.3.3.5 Engines driving auxiliaries
a) The scope of the trials of diesel engines may be expanded a) Engines driving generators or important auxiliaries shall
in consideration of the special operating conditions, such be subjected to an operational test for at least 2 hours.
as towing, etc.; During the test, the set concerned is required to operate at
b) where the machinery installation is designed for residual its rated power for at least 1 hour;
or other special fuels (see 1.2.6.4), the ability of engines b) it shall be demonstrated that the engine is capable of
to burn such fuels shall be demonstrated. supplying 100% of its rated power and, in the case of on
15.3.3.2 Main propulsion engines driving fixed pitch board generating sets, account shall be taken of the times
propellers or impellers needed to actuate the generator’s overload protection
system.
River trials of main propulsion engines driving
fixed pitch propellers or impellers shall include the following 15.3.4 Tests of gears and couplings
tests:
15.3.4.1 Tests during river trials
a) operation at rated engine speed n 0 for at least 2 hours;
During the river trials, the performance of reverse
b) operation at engine speed corresponding to normal
and/or reduction gearing shall be verified, both when running
continuous cruise power for at least 1 hour;
ahead and astern.
c) operation at engine speed n = 1,032∙n 0 for 30 minutes;
d) operation at minimum load speed;

June 2018 139
In addition, the following checks shall be carried – optical check of the relative position of bushes after
out: fitting;
– check of the bearing and oil temperature: All – check of the flanged coupling parameters (gap and
temperatures shall reach stable values (no slow gradual sag);
increase) without exceeding the approved maximum – check of the centring of the shaft sealing glands;
values; b) engine (or gearbox) installation, with floating vessel:
– detection of possible gear hammering, where required by – check of the engine (or gearbox) flanged coupling
14.3.4; parameters (gap and sag);
– test of the monitoring, alarm and safety systems. – check of the crankshaft deflections before and after
After the river trial all oil filters shall be checked the connection of the engine with the shaft line, by
for particles. measuring the variation in the distance between
adjacent webs in the course of one complete
15.3.4.2 Check of the tooth contact revolution of the engine.
a) Prior to the start of river trials, the teeth of the gears NOTE: The vessel shall be in the loading conditions
belonging to the main propulsion plant shall be coloured defined in the alignment calculations.
with suitable dye to enable the contact pattern to be
established. During the river trials, the gears shall be c) Load on the bearings:
checked at all forward and reverse speeds to establish – check of the intermediate bearing load by means of
their operational efficiency and smooth running as well jack-up load measurements;
as the bearing temperatures and the pureness of the – check of the bearing contact area by means of coating
lubricating oil. At latest on conclusion of the river trials, with an appropriate compound.
the gearing shall be examined via the inspection openings
and the contact pattern checked. If possible the contact 15.3.5.2 Shafting vibrations
pattern has to be checked after conclusion of every load Torsional, bending and axial vibration
step. measurements shall be carried out where required by Section
Assessment of the contact pattern shall be based on the 14. The type of the measuring equipment and the location of
guide values for the proportional area of contact in the the measurement points shall be specified.
axial and radial directions of the teeth given in Table 15.3.5.3 Bearings
15.3.4-1 and shall take account of the running time and
The temperature of the bearings shall be checked
loading of gears during the river trial;
under the machinery power conditions specified in 15.3.1.3.
b) in the case of multistage gear trains and planetary gears
manufactured to a proven high degree of accuracy, 15.3.5.4 Stern tube sealing gland
checking of the contact pattern after river trials may, with The stern tube oil system shall be checked for
the consent of the Register, be reduced in scope; possible oil leakage at the stern tube seal (see 3.2.9.2).
c) the verification of tooth contact at river trials by methods 15.3.5.5 Propellers
other than that described above will be given special
consideration by the Register. a) The performance of the propeller shall be tested at both
full ahead operation and full astern operation;
Table 15.3.4-1 b) for controllable pitch propellers, the functioning of the
Percentage area of contact system controlling the pitch from full ahead to full astern
position shall be demonstrated. It shall also be checked
that this system does not induce any overload of the
Working depth Width of tooth engine;
Material
(without tip (without end
Shaping of teeth c) the proper functioning of the devices for emergency
relief) relief)
Heat-treated, hobbed, operations shall be tested during the river trials.
33%
formed by generating 70% 15.3.5.6 Measurement of crankshaft deflections
average values
method
Crankshaft deflections shall be measured at distance
Surface-hardened, 40% (R+0,5∙d W ) from the crankpin centre line (see Figure
80%
ground, shaved average values 15.3.5.6-1).
15.3.4.3 For testing of disengaging couplings, the
requirement given in 6.15.4.9 apply.
15.3.5 Tests of main propulsion shafting and propellers

15.3.5.1 Shafting alignment
Where alignment calculations are required to be
submitted in pursuance of 3.2.8, the alignment conditions
shall be checked on board as follows:
a) shafting installation and intermediate bearing position, Figure 15.3.5.6-1
before and during assembling of the shafts: Measurements of crankshaft deflection

140 June 2018
15.3.6 Tests of piping systems NOTE 2: For small vessels, the Register may accept
departures from the above list, in particular to take into
15.3.6.1 Pressure tests of piping after assembly on board account the actual design features of their steering gear.
For pressure tests of piping after assembly on
board, the requirements given in 7.3.3 apply. NOTE 3: Azimuth thrusters shall be subjected to the above
tests, as far as applicable (see 10.8).
15.3.6.2 Functional tests
During the river trials, piping systems serving 15.3.8 Tests of windlasses
propulsion and auxiliary machinery, including the associated 15.3.8.1 The working test of the windlass shall be carried
monitoring and control devices, shall be subjected to out in the presence of the Register.
functional tests at the nominal power of the machinery.
Operating parameters (pressure, temperature, and 15.3.8.2 The anchor equipment shall be tested during river
consumption) shall comply with the values recommended by trials. As a minimum requirement, this test is required to
the equipment manufacturer. demonstrate that the conditions specified in 9.3.1 can be
fulfilled.
15.3.6.3 Performance tests
The Register reserves the right to require 15.3.9 Tests of air starting system for main and
performance tests, such as flow rate measurements, should auxiliary engines and pressure vessels
doubts arise from the functional tests. 15.3.9.1 The capability of the starting air system to charge
15.3.6.4 For testing of remote controlled valves, the the air receivers within one hour from atmospheric pressure
requirement given in 7.6.4.6 apply. to a pressure sufficient to ensure the number of starts required
in 7.17.2.3, 7.17.2.4 and 7.17.2.5 for main and auxiliaries
15.3.7 Tests of steering gear engines shall be demonstrated.
15.3.7.1 General 15.3.9.2 Pressure vessels shall be tested according
a) The steering gear shall be tested during the river trials requirements stated in 5.5.1.7.
under the conditions stated in 15.3.1 in order to 15.3.10 Tests of compressors
demonstrate, to the Surveyor’s satisfaction, that the
applicable requirements of Section 8 are fulfilled; After installation on board, the compressor and the
b) for controllable pitch propellers, the propeller pitch shall system to which it is connected shall be function tested under
be set at the maximum design pitch approved for the working conditions.
maximum continuous ahead rotational speed; The function test shall include testing of any
c) if the vessel cannot be tested at the deepest draught, control and safety functions.
alternative trial conditions will be given special
15.3.11 Tests of hoisting devices of wheelhouse
consideration by the Register. In such case, the vessel
speed corresponding to the maximum continuous number After installation on board, hoisting devices of
of revolutions of the propulsion machinery may apply. wheelhouse shall be tested according requirement stated in
12.1.14.
15.3.7.2 Tests to be performed
Tests of the steering gear shall include at least: 15.3.12 Tests of liquefied gas installations for domestic
a) functional test of the main and auxiliary steering gear purposes
with demonstration of the performances required by 8.2.3 Liquefied gas installations for domestic purposes
and 8.2.4; shall be tested according requirements stated in 13.12 to
b) test of the steering gear drive units, including transfer 13.14.
between steering gear drive units;
c) test of the isolation of one power actuating system,
15.4 Inspection of machinery after river trials
checking the time for regaining steering capability; 15.4.1 General
d) test of the hydraulic fluid refilling system;
a) For all types of propulsion machinery, those parts which
e) test of the alternative power supply; have not operated satisfactorily in the course of the river
f) test of the steering gear controls, including transfer of trials, or which have caused doubts to be expressed as to
controls and local control; their proper operation, shall be disassembled or opened
g) test of the means of communication between the for inspection.
wheelhouse, the engine room and the steering gear Machinery or parts which are opened up or disassembled
compartment; for other reasons shall be similarly inspected;
h) test of the alarms and indicators; b) should the inspection reveal defects or damage of some
i) where the steering gear design is required to take into importance, the Register may require other similar
account the risk of hydraulic locking, a test shall be machinery or parts to be opened up for inspection;
performed to demonstrate the efficiency of the devices c) an exhaustive inspection report shall be submitted to the
intended to detect this. Register for information.
NOTE 1: Tests d) to i) may be carried out either during the
mooring trials or during the river trials.

June 2018 141
15.4.2 Diesel engines

a) In general, for all diesel engines, the following items
shall be verified:
– the deflection of the crankshafts, by measuring the
variation in the distance between adjacent webs in the
course of one complete revolution of the engine;
– the cleanliness of the lubricating oil filters;
b) in the case of propulsion engines for which power tests
have not been carried out in the workshop, some parts,
agreed upon by the interested parties, shall be
disassembled for inspection after the river trials.

142 June 2018
Part 3 – Machinery, Systems and Electricity Chapter II - ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
II ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 1.2.7 Emergency transitional source of electric power

Emergency transitional source of electric power is a
1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS source of electric power intended to supply essential
consumers on board vessel from the moment the voltage
1.1 Application disappears from the busbars of the main switchboard until the
emergency source of electric power takes the load.
1.1.1 These requirements apply to electrical installation
aboard inland vessels as well as on other water craft and 1.2.8 Emergency lighting
floating equipment on inland waters.
Emergency lighting is lighting of the vessel
1.1.2 The Register retains the right to take into compartments and spaces by means of lighting fixtures fed
consideration any execution or the mode of installation of from the emergency source of electric power or from the
electrical equipment, which differs from those required in the emergency transitional source of electric power.
present part of the Rules and to approve them, if it appears
for sure, that the reliability of the equipment achieved in such 1.2.9 Safety voltage
way is equal to or higher of the reliability required by this Safety voltage is any voltage not dangerous either
part of the Rules. to crew or passengers. This condition is considered to be
satisfied if the windings of transformers, converters and other
1.1.3 When no special requirements are specified for devices for stepping down voltages are isolated electrically
certain parts of an electrical installation or an electrical and if the values of the stepped down voltages do not exceed
equipment, the safety level shall be considered satisfactory these values:
when these parts have been installed in accordance with an
approved European Standard or in accordance with the – 50,0 V between poles for direct voltage;
requirements of the Register. – 50,0 V between phases or between phases and the
vessel’s hull for alternating voltage.
1.1.4 Except where a specific statement is made to the
contrary, all requirements of this Chapter are applicable to 1.2.10 Monitoring system
both alternating current and direct current installations.
Monitoring system is a system designed to observe
1.2 Definitions and explanations the correct operation of the equipment by detecting incorrect
functioning (measure of variables compared with specified
1.2.1 Unless otherwise stated, the terms used in this value).
Chapter have the definitions laid down by the International
Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standards. 1.2.11 Electric power source
Electric power source is an energy source from
1.2.2 Environmental conditions
which electric power is obtained.
The equipment and installations shall be designed Main source of electric power is a source intended
for a permanent list of the vessel of up to 15° and internal to supply electric power to the main switchboard for
ambient temperatures from 0°C to + 40°C and on deck from distribution to all services necessary for maintaining the
– 20°C to + 40°C. They shall be fully functional up to these vessel in normal operational and habitable conditions.
limits.
1.2.12 Main switchboard
1.2.3 Essential services
Main switchboard is a switchboard which is
For essential services, see the present Rules, directly supplied by the main source of electric power and is
Chapter I, 1.1.4.9. intended to distribute electric energy to the vessel’s services.
1.2.4 Earthing 1.2.13 Emergency switchboard
The earth connection to the general mass of the hull Emergency switchboard is a switchboard which in
of the vessel in such a manner as will ensure at all times an the event of failure of the main electric power supply system
immediate discharge of electrical energy without danger. is directly supplied by the emergency source of electric
power or the emergency transitional source of electric power
1.2.5 Emergency condition and is intended to distribute electric energy to the emergency
Emergency condition is a condition under which services.
any services needed for normal operational and habitable
conditions are not in working order due to failure of the main 1.2.14 Distribution boards
source of electric power. Distribution boards are cabinets, recesses and
lockers with built-in fuses and switches intended for feeding
1.2.6 Emergency source of electric power a group of analogous consumers e.g. navigation lights
Emergency source of electric power is a source of distribution board, mooring winches distribution board,
electric power intended to supply essential consumers on accommodation lighting distribution board etc.
board vessel in case the voltage disappears from the busbars
of the main switchboard.

June 2018 143
Chapter II - ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS Part 3 – Machinery, Systems and Electricity
1.2.15 Hazardous areas circuit in non-load condition, but under certain conditions
(low-voltage, non-inductive load) it could break currents
1.2.15.1 Hazardous area: an area in which an explosive gas (less than nominal). It can also conduct currents under
atmosphere is or may be expected to be present, in quantities normal service conditions and for certain short time,
such as to require special precautions for the construction, conduct, short-circuit currents, as well.
installation and use of equipment.
.2 switch is a mechanical switching device able to connect,
NOTE: Explosive atmosphere: a mixture with air, under stand and disconnect currents under normal service
atmospheric conditions, of flammable substances in the form conditions including certain overloads. Switch is operated
of gas, vapour, dust, fibres, or flyings, which, after ignition, manually - mechanically.
permits self-sustaining flame propagation. .3 reversing switch - is a switch with two or more switching
1.2.15.2 Hazardous areas are classified in zones based upon positions but at least two of them serve for connecting or
the frequency and the duration of the occurrence of explosive disconnecting of current - circuits.
atmosphere. .4 contractor is a mechanical switching device with power
movement. Contractor is able to make, stand and break -
1.2.15.3 Hazardous areas for explosive gas atmosphere are
currents under normal service conditions under which
classified in the following zones:
understanding and certain service overload.
– zone 0: an area in which an explosive gas atmosphere is
.5 circuit breaker is a mechanical device able to work, stand
present continuously or is present for long periods or
and break currents under normal service conditions.
frequently;
Besides, it is able to work, stand for certain short time
– zone 1: an area in which an explosive gas atmosphere is and break short-circuit currents.
likely to occur in normal operation occasionally;
– zone 2: an area in which an explosive gas atmosphere is 1.2.21 Hull return
not likely to occur in normal operation but, if it does The distribution of direct or alternating current is
occur, is likely to do only infrequently and will exist for a said to be of the “hull return” type when the insulated
short period only. These areas also include areas directly conductors are connected to one of the feed poles and the hull
adjoining zone 1 that are not separated from one another or superstructure is connected to the other pole.
in a gas tight manner.
1.2.22 Special electrical spaces
1.2.16 Certified safe-type electrical equipment
Special electrical spaces are spaces or locations
Certified safe-type electrical equipment is an intended exclusively for electrical equipment and accessible
electrical equipment which has been tested and approved by only for authorized personnel.
the competent authority regarding its safety of operation in an
explosive atmosphere. 1.2.23 Control station
1.2.17 Explosion-proof electrical equipment Control station is group of control and monitoring
devices by means of which an operator can control and verify
Explosion-proof electrical equipment is electrical the performance of equipment.
installations, apparatus and appliances which, when correctly
installed and used within limits of their nominal values, will 1.2.24 Remote control
not cause ignition of explosive mixtures of vapours and gases
with air. Remote control is control from a distance of
apparatus by means of an electrical or other link.
1.2.18 Shaft generators
1.3 Documents to be submitted
Shaft generators are generators driven by the
propulsion machinery, or by the engines driving the 1.3.1 The drawings and documents listed below in 1.3.2
generators of the electrical propulsion plant and supplying the to 1.3.8 shall be submitted to the Register for review and
vessel’s mains or separate consumers. approval.
The Register reserves the right to call for additional
1.2.19 Black out situation
documents and drawings should those stipulated in 1.3.2 to
Black out situation is a situation when the main and 1.3.8 prove insufficient for an assessment of the plant. Where
auxiliary machinery installation, including the main power non-standard symbols are used in circuit and wiring
supply is out of operation but the services for bringing them diagrams, a legend explaining the symbols shall be provided.
into operation (e.g. compressed air, starting current from
battery etc.) are available. 1.3.2 Details of the nature and extent of the electrical
installations including the power balance (electrical balance).
1.2.20 Switchgear
1.3.3 A general circuit diagram of the electrical plant
Switchgear is a common term including all devices showing the basic configuration of the power supply system
for closing and opening electrical circuits: with details of the power ratings of generators, converters,
.1 isolating switch is a mechanical switching device having, transformers, storage batteries and all major consumers.
for the purpose of security, a contact distance in open
position according to the regulations. Isolating switch 1.3.4 Cable layout or tabulated list of cables showing
serves principally for disconnecting of the electrical cable sections and types as well as generator and consumer
loads (currents).

144 June 2018
1.3.5 Circuit diagrams for: 1.4.1.3 Type tests are carried out according to the
– main switchboard installations; Register’s Rules for approval of equipment. Scope of type
testing or electrical equipment shall be agreed with the
– emergency switchboard installations (where applicable); manufacturer. Technical particulars of testing are referred to
– spaces with an explosion hazard with details of installed in IACS UR E10 – Test Specification for Type Approval.
equipment;
1.4.1.4 Type tested installations, apparatuses and
– lighting system; assemblies shall be used within the scope of valid
– navigation light system; construction Rules only. The suitability for the subject
– electrical propulsion systems, where applicable. application shall be ensured.
1.3.6 Circuit diagrams of control, alarm and monitoring 1.4.1.5 Installations, equipment and assemblies subject
installations, where applicable, such as: to type approval
– alarm systems; The following installations, equipment and
assemblies are subject to type approval:
– fire alarm systems;
a) generators, power ≥ 50,0 kW/kVA;
– tank level indicators, alarms, shut-off facilities;
b) electrical rotating machines, power ≥ 50,0 kW/kVA;
– gas detector systems;
c) transformers, power ≥ 50,0 kW/kVA;
– emergency shut-off facilities;
d) storage batteries (accumulators);
– watertight door control systems;
e) storage battery chargers, power ≥ 2,0 kW;
– computer systems;
f) switchgear;
– communication systems;
g) cables and insulated wires;
– propulsion system.
h) control, monitoring, alarm and safety systems;
1.3.7 Steering gear circuit diagrams with details of the i) power electronics, power ≥ 50,0 kW/kVA.
drive, control and monitoring systems. The steering gear
includes lateral thrust propellers, active rudder equipment etc. 1.4.2 Exceptions
1.3.8 Installation plan Instead of the stipulated type approvals in well-

founded cases routine tests in the presence of a Surveyor may
The plan is to provide details of the exact location be carried out. An agreement with the Register prior to
of the switchboard, the size of service passageways, distances testing is required.
from bulkheads and frames etc.
1.5 Scope of supervision
1.3.9 Modification and extension
1.5.1 Supervision of the vessel’s electrical installations
Where major modifications are made to the
electrical plant of a vessel under construction or in service, 1.5.1.1 The equipment, systems and devices are subject the
the documents showing the modifications shall be submitted supervision on board vessel, referred to in the present Rules,
to the Register for approval. Chapter I, 1.1.4.9.
1.3.10 For the type approved electrical equipment no 1.5.1.2 Electrical equipment intended for domestic, living
documentation need be submitted for approval of supervision and technological application (referred to in the present
acceptance or issue of certificate. Rules, Chapter I, 1.1.4.9.4) shall be supervised on vessels
only by the Register as far as the following items are
1.3.11 The documents listed in the Rules, Part 1 – concerned:
Classification and Surveys, Chapter II, Table 3.2-14 bearing .1 effect of its operation to the available electrical power
the stamp of the Register shall be available on board: plant on board vessel;
for unmanned vessel, these documents shall not be .2 choice of cables and conductors square area and the ways
required to be on board but shall at all times be available of running the cables;
with the owner.
.3 means of protection, insulation and earthing.
1.4 Type approvals
1.5.2 Supervision during the manufacture of electrical
1.4.1 General equipment
1.4.1.1 The installations, equipment and assemblies 1.5.2.1 The following items of electrical equipment
mentioned in 1.4.1.5 are subject to mandatory type approval. intended for systems and devices, are subject to supervision
during manufacture:
1.4.1.2 Type tests shall be carried out in the presence of the
.1 electrical generating sets;
Register either in the manufacturer’s works or, by agreement,
in suitable institutions. .2 electrical machines;
.3 transformers;
.4 switchboards and distribution boards;
.5 control and monitoring desks;

June 2018 145
.6 electrical slip couplings and breaks; considerations may be based on the variations shown in
.7 apparatus and devices for starting, protection, control and Table 1.7-1 below.
commutation; Networks or sub-networks with greater voltage
.8 apparatus and devices for internal communication and variations may be approved for consumers intended for
signalling; operation with greater variations.
.9 built-in electrical measuring instruments;
Table 1.7-1
.10 static power converters and other power electronic Variations in voltage and frequency
equipment;
.11 heating and cooking electrical appliances; Variations
Variable
.12 electric fuel oil and lubricating oil heaters; Permanent Transient
.13 electrical apparatus and facilities to measure non- Frequency ± 5% ± 10% 5s
General
electrical values; Voltage + 6% to - 10% ± 20% 1,5s
.14 storage batteries; Battery –
Voltage ± 20%
operation
.15 power operated valves;
.16 servo-motors; 1.8 Materials
.17 cables and conductors;
1.8.1 The materials used for the construction of electrical
.18 built-in accessories; machines, cables and appliances shall be resistant to moist air
.19 stationary lights; and oil vapours. They shall not be hygroscopic and shall be
.20 other machinery and facilities not listed above if required flame-retardant.
by the Register.
1.8.2 Chemical composition of the material as well as the
1.5.2.2 Parts of electrical equipment referred to in 1.5.2.1.1 mode of protection against effects referred to in 1.8.1 is
to 1.5.2.1.6 and 1.5.2.1.17, in addition to the Certificate specified in the Rules, Part 25 – Metal Materials.
referred to in 1.4.1.5, shall be provided with the Certificate
for the supervision during manufacture and testing, after 1.8.3 Screws, nuts, hinges and similar items for securing
satisfactory results of the relevant testing in the presence of a enclosures of the electrical equipment installed on the open
Surveyor to the Register (EN 10204, type 3.2). deck and in spaces with increased humidity shall be
manufactured of corrosion-resistant materials and/or have
1.5.2.3 All explosion-proof electrical equipment and effective corrosion-resistant coating.
devices shall be tested for the validity of such design by the
authorized institution which shall issue the relevant 1.8.4 All current carrying parts of electrical equipment
Certificate. This Certificate does not exclude the supervision shall be of copper, copper alloys or other equivalent materials
and testing referred to in 1.4.1.5, 1.5.2.1 and 1.5.2.2 for all with the exception of:
electrical equipment for which they are mandatory. .1 rheostat elements which shall be made of mechanically
strong materials having high specific resistance and
1.6 Environmental conditions temperature withstanding;
1.6.1 Inclinations - Ambient conditions .2 short-circuit rotor windings of asynchronous and
synchronous motors which may be made of aluminium or
For environmental conditions, see 1.2.2. Where its alloys:
other conditions are likely (e.g. in the case of non-European
.3 carbon brushes, cermet contacts, slip rings and other
waters) proper account shall be taken of these.
similar parts where the properties specified so require;
1.6.2 Vibrations .4 parts of electrical equipment directly connected to the
vessel’s hull used as a return conductor with a single-wire
Electrical equipment and installations must be
system.
design and installed so that vibrations which occur in normal
service on board do not cause malfunctions or damage. The use of other materials for current carrying parts
is subject to special consideration by the Register.
The natural frequencies of foundations, fastenings
and suspensions for machines, appliances and electrical 1.8.5 Insulating materials for live parts shall have
components (including those inside appliances) shall not lie adequate electrical strength and resistance to creep currents,
within the frequency range 5,0 – 100,0 Hz. moisture and oil as well as sufficient mechanical strength or
If, for reasons of design, the natural frequency has shall be suitably protected.
unavoidably to lie within the aforementioned frequency Temperature of current carrying parts and their
range, the accelerations shall be sufficiently damped to connections shall not exceed permissible heating temperature
exclude the likelihood of malfunctions or damage. of the insulating materials at the rated load.
1.7 Quality of power supply 1.8.6 Non-flammable liquids may be used for cooling
uninsulated parts of electrical equipment. The use of
All the electrical appliances used on board shall be
flammable oils for this purpose is subject to special
so designed and constructed that they remain serviceable
consideration by the Register on a case by case basis.
despite the voltage and frequency variations occurring in
normal on board service. Unless otherwise specified,

146 June 2018
1.8.7 The insulating materials used for winding 1.9.2 Internal wiring
insulation in machines, apparatus and other equipment for
essential services shall comply with agreed standards. The 1.9.2.1 Stranded wires shall be used for internal wiring of
use of insulating materials not lower than Class E is the electrical equipment throughout. The use of solid wires is
recommended. subject to special consideration of the Register on a case by
case basis.
1.8.8 Insulating materials used for manufacture of cables 1.9.2.2 Internal wiring of distribution boards, control desks
are specified in Table 13.3.1-1. and similar, shall be performed by means of wires having
1.8.9 Usage of materials that contain asbestos in cross-sectional area not less than 1,0 mm2. For systems of
installations (e.g. thermal insulating materials, electrical control, protection, measurement, signalling and internal
cable materials, cable penetration sealing, brake linings, communication, the wires with cross-sectional area not less
circuit breakers arc chutes), including spare parts, is than 0,5 mm2 may be used. For electronically and electrical
prohibited for all vessels according to SOLAS Regulation II- equipment intended for transformation and transmission of
1/3-5, IACS UI SC 249 as well as MSC.1/Circ.1374 and low-power signals, wires of 0,5 mm2 may be used on
MSC.1/Circ.1379. agreement with the Register.
1.9.2.3 Current-carrying parts shall be so attached as they
1.9 Design requirements and protection of are not subjected additionally to mechanical stresses. Such
electrical equipment parts shall not be attached by screws fitted directly into
insulating material.
1.9.2.4 The ends of stranded cables and conductors shall be
1.9.1.1 Parts of the equipment which must be replaced prepared depending on the sort of terminals used or shall be
while in service, shall be installed in an easily accessible provided with cable lugs (see 13.8.10).
location and shall be easily dismounted.
1.9.2.5 Insulated conductors shall be laid up and secured in
1.9.1.2 Screws and nuts shall be protected against self- such a way that the insulation resistance is not reduced and
loosening and parts of the equipment which are frequently that they are not exposed to damage due to electrodynamics
opened or dismounted shall be well secured in order not to be loads, vibrations or shocks.
lost.
1.9.2.6 Provisions shall be made to ensure that under
1.9.1.3 Gaskets used in components of electrical equipment normal service conditions and for the duration of short-circuit
such as doors, covers sight holes and similar, shall comply current, the temperature of the insulated conductors will not
with the protection degree of the equipment. exceed the temperature allowed for such conductors.
The gaskets shall be secured to the covers or casings by their
construction. 1.9.2.7 Insulated conductors shall be so connected to
terminals or busbars that under normal operating conditions
1.9.1.4 If casings, covers and protective plates, protecting the conductor insulation temperature will not exceed the
access to live parts of electrical equipment are installed allowed temperature.
where unauthorized personnel has free access to them, they
shall be removed by special tools only. 1.9.3 Insulation clearance and creep distances (IEC
1.9.1.5 Component parts of electrical equipment where 60664-1)
condensation is likely to occur, shall be provided with water Minimum clearances between parts under different
drainage holes. The inside shall be so designed as to ensure voltage levels or between live parts and earthed metal parts
the condensate drainage from all the parts. both in air and across the insulating surface, shall correspond
The windings and live parts shall be so arranged and to rated voltage and operating conditions of such parts as
protected as not to be exposed to the effects of condense. given in the Table 1.9.3-1.
1.9.1.6 Component parts of electrical equipment with NOTE 1: L-L: Between two live parts and between a live
forced ventilation installed in the bottom part of damp spaces part and earthen part.
shall be so designed, that suction of moisture and oil vapours
is minimised. NOTE 2: L-A: Between a live part and a part which can
become accidentally dangerous, if live.
1.9.1.7 Where the control panels or desks are provided
with measuring instruments having oil, steam, water or 1.9.4 Protection against access to hazardous parts,
similar input, provision shall be taken to prevent these agents against solid foreign objects, against ingress of
from coming into contact with live parts in case the water
instruments and pipelines are damaged.
The type of minimum protection for parts of a
permanent electrical installation shall be as set out in the
following Table 1.9.4-1.

June 2018 147
Table 1.9.3-1
Insulation clearance and creep distances
Clearances distances, [mm] Creep distances, [mm]

System
J ≤ 63,0 A J ˃ 63,0 A
voltage, [V] J ≤ 63,0 A J ˃ 63,0 A
L-L L-A L-L L-A
up to 60 2,0 30 3,0 5,0 3,0 4,0
61 ÷ 250 3,0 5,0 5,0 6,0 4,0 8,0
251 ÷ 380 4,0 6,0 6,0 8,0 6,0 10,0
381 ÷ 500 6,0 8,0 8,0 10,0 10,0 12,0
501 ÷ 660 6,0 8,0 8,0 10,0 12,0 14,0
661 ÷ 750 10,0 14,0 10,0 14,0 14,0 20,0
751 ÷ 1000 14,0 20,0 14,0 20,0 20,0 28,0
Table 1.9.4-1
Minimum degrees of protection
Type of minimum protection in accordance with the European Standard EN 60529:2014

Switchboards, Lighting
Location Installation
Generators Motors Transformers Distribution 4) appliances/fire
fittings
Switching devices detectors
Operation rooms,
engine rooms and
IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 2) IP 22 1), 2) IP 44 IP 22
steering gear
compartments
Holds IP 55 IP 55 IP 55 IP 55
Storage battery
rooms and paint IP 44 and (Ex) 3)
lockers
Unroofed decks and
open steering IP 55 IP 55 IP 55 IP 55 IP 55
positions
Enclosed
IP 55 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22
wheelhouse
Accommodation,
except sanitary and IP 22 IP 20 IP 20
wet rooms
Sanitary and wet
IP 44 IP 44 IP 44 IP 55 IP 44
rooms
Notes:
1) Where equipment release large amounts of heat: IP 12.
2) Where the type of protection is not ensured by the equipment itself, the equipment location shall meet the conditions indicated in
the Table.
3) Certified safe type electrical equipment, for example installations:
a) allowed pursuant to the European Standard series EN 60079 in the version in force on 6 July 2017;
b) lower minimum type of protection depending on design, e.g. certain types of fire detector.
If lighting devices or fire detectors are used in storage battery and paint lockers, both conditions must be complied with.
4) For installation fittings for currents of 125A and greater: IP 66 (EN 60529:2017).
Protection against direct contact may be dispensed

1.9.5 Protection against electric shock: direct contact
with in the case of equipment using safety voltage.
Protection against direct contact includes all the In service spaces, live parts of the electrical
measures designed to protect persons against the dangers appliances shall remain protected against accidental contact
arising from contact with live parts of electrical appliances. when doors and covers which can be opened without a key or
Live parts are deemed to be conductors and conductive parts tool are opened for operation purposes.
of appliances which are live under normal operating
conditions.
Electrical appliances shall be so designed that the
person cannot touch or come dangerously close to live parts,
in way of the determined operation.

148 June 2018
1.9.6 Protection against electric shock: indirect The earthing at one end only of cables and wires in electronic
contact systems is recommended.
Electrical appliances shall be made in such a way 1.9.7.6 A conductor normally carrying current may not be
that persons are protected against dangerous contact voltages used simultaneously as an earthing conductor and may not be
even in the event of an insulation failure. connected with the latter by a common connection to the
For this purpose, the construction of the appliances vessel’s hull.
shall incorporate one of the following protective measures: 1.9.7.7 The cross-section of the earthing conductor shall be
– protective earthing (see 1.9.7); at least in accordance with Table 1.9.7-1 below.
– protective insulation (double insulation); 1.9.7.8 Bolts for fastening the earth conductor to the hull
– operation at very low voltages presenting no danger even shall be manufactured of brass or other corrosion-resistant
in the event of a fault. alloy. The bolt diameter shall not be less than 6 mm. Such
The additional usage of Residual Current Protective bolts shall not be used for other purposes. Places of
Devices is allowed except for steering and propulsion plant. conductor connections to the vessel’s hull shall be cleaned to
metal and properly protected against corrosion.
1.9.7 Protective earthing
1.9.7.9 Electrical equipment in the area subject to
1.9.7.1 Exposed metal parts which under normal operating explosion hazard is in every case to be fitted with an earthing
conditions are not live, such as electrical system frames and conductor irrespective of the type of mounting used.
casings of electrical installations and non- mobile electrical
1.9.7.10 Earthing of electrical equipment by connection to
equipment, shall be earthed separately if they are not so
pipelines, tanks and cylinders for compressed gases and oil
mounted as to be already in electrical contact with the
products is forbidden.
vessel’s hull. Earthing shall be effective and reliable.
1.9.7.2 Protection earthing as referred to in 1.9.7.1, is not Table 1.9.7-1
required for: Cross-section of earthing conductors
.1 electrical equipment of rated voltage lower than safety
voltage; Minimum cross-section of earthing
.2 electrical equipment provided with double or reinforced Cross-section conductors, [mm2]
insulation; of main Earthing
Earthing conductor
.3 metal parts of electrical equipment fastened in non- conductors, conductor
incorporated in the
conducting material or passing there through so that [mm2] separated from
cable
under normal operating conditions or damage these parts the cable
cannot become live; equal to the main
0,5 ÷ 4,0 4,0
conductor
.4 housings of specially insulated bearings;
equal to the main equal to the main
.5 lamp caps and fasteners for luminescent lamps, lamp > 4,0 ÷ 16,0
conductor conductor
shades, reflectors and guards supported on lamp holders > 16,0 ÷ 35,0 16,0 16,0
or lighting fixtures constructed of or screwed in non- equal to the half equal to the half
conducting material; > 35,0 ÷ 120,0
main conductor main conductor
.6 cable fastening; > 120,0 70,0 70,0
.7 metal parts of individual consumers under rated voltage
1.9.7.11 Earthing of aluminium structures on steel
up to 250,0 V supplied through an insulating transformer,
vessels
used exclusively for that consumer.
Superstructures of aluminium alloys fastened to the
1.9.7.3 The secondary windings of all measuring current vessel’s hull but insulated therefrom, shall be earthed with at
and voltage transformers shall be earthed. least two special conductors each having a cross-sectional
1.9.7.4 Where machines and equipment are earthed to the area not less than 16,0 mm2 which do not start electrolytic
hull via their mountings, care shall be taken to ensure good corrosion at their contact with the superstructure and hull.
conductivity by clean metal contact faces at the mounting. Such earth connections shall be carried out at different
Where the stipulated earth is not provided via the mountings locations around superstructure perimeter, shall be accessible
of machinery and equipment, a special earthing conductor for inspection and protected from damage.
shall be fitted for this purpose. 1.9.7.12 The casings of mobile electric equipment shall be
1.9.7.5 The metal armour or sheathing of cables and metal earthed by means of an additional conductor not normally
ducts for cables shall be earthed at both ends. carrying current and incorporated in the supply cable. This
requirement shall not apply when an isolation transformer is
Where cables are mounted on wood or a plastics used or to equipment fitted with protective insulation (double
material, one earth connection shall suffice. In alternating insulation).
current operation, single-conductor cables and ducts shall be
earthed at one point only. 1.9.7.13 The external earthing conductors shall be accessible
The metal armour, shielding and sheathing of for inspection and protected against getting loose and
cables shall not, under normal operating conditions, be used mechanical damage.
as conductors or for earthing.

June 2018 149
1.9.7.14 Earthing wires or earthing conductors of cables in fuels with a flash point > 60°C, if these liquids are heated to a
fixed equipment shall not be disconnected. temperature higher than 10°C below their flash point.
Electrical equipment shall not be installed or
1.9.8 Safe-type electrical equipment shall be chosen
operated in areas subject to explosion hazard, with the
depending on hazardous zones in accordance with the
exception of explosion-protected equipment (certified safety)
following criteria:
of a type suitable for shipboard use. Electrical equipment is
a) electrical equipment with respect to the degree and deemed to be explosion protected, if they are manufactured to
quality of safe-type execution is subject to the a recognized standard such as IEC 60079 publications or EN
supervision of the authorized organisation, certificates of 50014-50020, and if they have been tested and approved by a
which Register will accept irrespective of whether the testing authority recognized by the Register. Notes and
equipment is subject to supervision as referred to in 1.5 restrictions at the certificate shall be observed.
or not;
Certified safe-type electrical equipment listed in
b) in hazardous spaces only electrical equipment of safe- Table 1.9.11-1 is permitted.
type design corresponding to the temperature class and
explosion group mixture of vapours, gases and fibres Table 1.9.11-1
with air in such spaces, may be installed. Certified safe-type electrical equipment
1.9.9 Protection from explosion
Intrinsic safety Ex i
1.9.9.1 Only electrical equipment that has been explosion
Flameproof enclosure Ex d
proofed (certified safety) may be installed in rooms and areas
where explosive atmosphere is likely to accumulate. This Pressurized apparatus Ex p
equipment must be tested and approved as to its operating Increased safety Ex e
safety in an explosive atmosphere by testing institution Special type of protection Ex s
recognized on the basis of national provisions. Oil immersion Ex o
The installations in these rooms or areas of Encapsulation Ex m
switching devices for lighting appliances and other electrical Sand filled Ex q
equipment shall be avoided as far as possible. The explosion
proofing shall take account of the characteristics of the 1.9.12 Explosion protection: extended hazardous areas,
atmosphere that is likely to arise (explosion-potential group, zone 2
temperature class) and of the requirements of the relevant
zone. Areas directly adjoining zone 1 lacking gastight
separation from one another are allocated to zone 2.
Information and restrictions in the approval
certificates of the equipment must be observed. For equipment in these areas protective measures
shall be taken which, depending on the type and purpose of
1.9.9.2 The classification and evaluation of areas at risk of the facility, could comprise e.g.:
explosion shall be conducted and documented in accordance – use of explosion-protected facilities (certified safety); or
with International Standards EN 60079-10-1:2015 and EN
60079-10-2:2015. – use of facilities with type Ex n protection; or
– use of facilities which in operation do not cause any
1.9.10 Explosion protection: hazardous areas, zone 0 sparks and whose surfaces, which are accessible to the
These areas include for instance the insides of tanks open air, do not attain any unacceptable temperatures; or
and piping with a combustible liquid with a flash point ≤ – facilities which in a simplified way are overpressure-
60°C, or inflammable gases. encapsulated or are fume-tight-encapsulated (minimum
For electrical installations in these areas the protection class IP 55) and whose surfaces do not attain
permitted equipment that may be fitted is: any unacceptable temperatures.
– intrinsically safe circuits (protection class Ex ia) in 1.9.13 Explosion protection: electrical equipment in
accordance with International Standard IEC 60079- paint rooms
11:2012;
In the above mentioned rooms (zone 1) and in
– equipment specially approved for use in this zone by a ventilation ducts supplying and exhausting these areas,
test organisation recognized by the Register. electrical equipment shall be of certified type as give in 9.8 b)
1.9.11 Explosion protection: hazardous areas, zone 1 and comply at least with II B, T3 (explosion group and
temperature class).
These areas include e.g.: Switches, protective devices and motor switchgear
– paint rooms; for electrical equipment in these areas shall be of all-poles
– storage battery rooms; switchable type and shall preferably be fitted in the safe area.
Doors to paint rooms have to be gastight with self-closing
– areas with machinery, tanks or piping for fuels with a devices without holding back means.
flash point ≤ 60°C, or inflammable gases, see 1.9.15;
– ventilation trunks.
Areas subject to explosion hazard zone 1 also
include tanks, vessels, heaters, pipelines etc. for liquids or

150 June 2018
1.9.14 Protective measures in the case of ignitable dust 1.9.20 Explosion-proof lighting fixtures shall be so
installed that a free space around them is not less than 100,0
In spaces where explosive mixtures of dust or fibre
mm.
with air may occur, only electrical equipment with at least IP
65 degree of mechanical protection shall be installed. 1.9.21 Electrical equipment installed in the hazardous
Where the occurrence of explosive mixture is only areas and spaces, except fire alarm detectors, shall be
temporary resulting from improper sealed equipment or the provided with the switching device which disconnects all
ventilation cut-off, the electrical equipment with the IP 55 conductors under voltage and which shall be located outside
degree of mechanical protection may be installed. hazardous spaces.
Electrical equipment built in such spaces shall be so 1.9.22 Protection from bilge water
designed that the temperature of upper horizontal surfaces or
of those inclined at an angle up to 60° to the horizontal is, All generators, motors and electric couplings shall
under conditions of continuous operation 75°C below the be so arranged that they cannot be damaged by bilge water;
smouldering point of dust accumulated in these spaces. and, if necessary, a watertight coamings shall be provided to
The smouldering point is determined for a layer of form a well around the base of such equipment with
dust 5,0 mm thick. provision for removing water from the well (see the present
Rules, Chapter I, 1.3.6.2).
For dust explosion protection, the requirements
shall apply according to European Standard EN 60079-10- 1.10 Arrangement of electrical equipment
2:2015.
1.10.1 Electrical equipment and installations shall be so
1.9.15 Explosion protection: pipe tunnels installed as to provide an easy access to controls and to all
All equipment and devices in pipe tunnels parts that require maintenance, inspection and replacement.
containing fuel lines or adjoining fuel tanks shall be
1.10.2 The horizontal-shaft electrical machines shall be so
permanently installed irrespective of the flash point of the
installed that the shaft is positioned parallel to the centre line
fuels. Where pipe tunnels directly adjoin tanks containing
of the vessel. The installing of these machines with the shaft
combustible liquids with a flash point ≤ 60°C, e.g. in ore or
positioned in another direction is permitted only when the
oil carriers, or where pipes inside these tunnels convey
design of the machine ensures its normal operation under
combustible liquids with a flash point ≤ 60°C, all the
conditions referred to in the present Rules, Chapter I, 1.2.4
equipment and devices in pipe tunnels shall be certified
and 1.2.5.
explosion-protected in accordance with 1.9.11 (zone 1).
1.10.3 The air-cooled electrical equipment shall be so
1.9.16 Amount of electrical facilities
located that cooling air is not taken under the engine room
Amount and ignition protection of approved flooring (bilges) or other spaces where the air may be
electrical equipment in zone 0, zone 1 and zone 2 may be contaminated with substances having a harmful effect on
restricted in the different areas where they are used. The insulation (see 1.9.1.6).
relevant current construction Rules shall be observed for this
reason. 1.10.4 The electrical equipment built in the locations
exposed to vibrations and shocks exceeding the permissible
1.9.17 Explosion protection for vessels for the carriage levels (see 1.6.2) shall be mounted on shock absorbers or
of dangerous goods additional constructional modifications shall be made to
ensure normal operation under such conditions.
Regarding hazardous areas and approved electrical
equipment on vessels for the carriage of dangerous goods, see 1.10.5 Electrical equipment shall be fixed in such a
applicable Sections in the Rules, Part 4 – Additional manner that the elements of attachment do not impair the
Requirements for Notations, Chapter II – Transport of strength of decks or bulkheads as well as their tightness.
dangerous goods.
1.10.6 When the enclosure of electrical equipment is made
1.9.18 Storage batteries room of material different from that of the structure on which it is
installed, provisions shall be made to prevent electrolytic
See Section 5.
corrosion, if necessary.
1.9.19 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
1.10.7 No electrical equipment shall be fastened directly
The operation of the electric and electronic to the walls of tanks with flammable liquids, but at a distance
installations shall not be impaired by electromagnetic of not less than 75,0 mm from the tank walls. Alarm and
interference. General measures shall, with equal importance, automation (level, pressure, etc.) sensors may be attached
extend to: directly on the tank.
a) disconnection of the transmission paths between the 1.10.8 Open live parts of electrical equipment shall be
source of interference and affected equipment; positioned at least 300,0 mm horizontally and 1200 mm
b) reducing the causes of disturbance at their source; vertically apart from the unprotected non-combustible
c) reducing the sensitivity of affected equipment to materials.
interference.
Details are contained in IEC 60533:2015.

June 2018 151
1.11 Supply systems and characteristics of the 1.11.1.5 Systems using the hull as neutral conductor are not
supply permitted:
a) on tank vessels (see applicable requirements in the Rules,
1.11.1 Supply (distribution) systems Part 4 – Additional Requirements for Notations, Chapter
1.11.1.1 As a general principle, systems listed in 1.11.1.2 to II – Transport of dangerous goods);
1.11.1.4 are permitted. b) on floating craft or vessels whose hull can be dismantled.
1.11.1.2 The following supply systems are allowed for 1.11.2 Characteristics of the supply
direct current and single-phase alternating current:
1.11.2.1 General
a) two-conductor systems of which one is earthed
(L1/N/PE); The use of standard voltages and frequencies is
recommended.
b) single-conductor systems using the hull return principle,
only for local installations (for example, starting Generators may have rated voltages up to 5%
installations for internal combustion engines) (L1/PEN); higher than the rated voltage of the consumers.
c) two-conductor systems that are insulated from the 1.11.2.2 Maximum permissible voltages
vessel’s hull (L1/L2/PE). The operating voltages indicated in Table 1.11.2-1
1.11.1.3 The following supply systems are allowed for shall not be exceeded.
three-phase alternating current: If the required protective measures are complied
a) four-conductor systems with earthing of the neutral point, with, higher voltages are permissible:
not using the hull return principle (L1/L2/L3/N/PE) = a) for power installations whose power so requires;
network (TN-S) or network (TT); b) for special installations on board such as radio and
b) three-conductor systems insulated from the hull ignition devices.
(Ll/L2/L3/PE) = network (IT); The Register may allow other exceptions in
c) three-conductor systems with earthing of the neutral point justified cases if the required protective measures are
using the hull return principle except for terminal circuits complied with.
(L1/L2/L3/PEN).
1.11.1.4 The use of other systems is subject to special
consideration by the Register on a case by case basis.
Table 1.11.2-1
Maximum permissible operating voltages
Maximum permissible operating voltage

Type of equipment or installation
DC 1-phase AC 3-phase AC
Power and heating installations including the sockets for general use 250,0 V 250,0 V 690 V
Installations for lighting, for communication, of orders and information,
250,0 V 250,0 V –
including the sockets for general use
Sockets for current supply to mobile electrical equipment used on open
decks or in confined or damp metal-enclosed rooms other than boilers and
tanks:
– general; 50,0 V 1) 50,0 V 1) –
– in the event of an protection or isolation transformer serving a single
– 250,0 V 2) –
equipment being used;
– in the event of equipment fitted with protective insulation (double
250,0 V 250,0 V –
insulation) being used;
– in the event of use of residual current circuit breaker ≤ 30,0 mA. – 250,0 V 690,0 V
Mobile electrical equipment (such as electrical devices of containers,
engines, fans and pumps) which are not normally adjusted during operation
whose exposed conductive parts are earthed by a protective conductor
250,0 V 250,0 V 690,0 V
incorporated in the connecting cable and which are connected to the hull,
not only by this protective conductor, but by their location or by another
conductor
Sockets for current supply to mobile electrical equipment used in boilers
50,0 V 1) 50,0 V 1) –
and tanks
Notes:
1) When this voltage comes from higher voltage networks, a galvanic isolator (isolation transformer) must be used.
2) The secondary electrical circuit must be insulated from the chassis for all polarities.

152 June 2018
2.3.2 If storage batteries on board the vessel are the main

2 POWER SOURCE source or the source being part of the main source of electric
power, these batteries may also be considered as the
2.1 General requirements emergency source of electric power.
In this case, the capacity and location of the storage
2.1.1 Where vessel are fitted with an electrical
battery shall meet the requirements imposed on the
installation, that installation shall have at least two power
emergency source of electric power.
sources in such a way that where one power source fails the
remaining source is able to supply the consumer equipment The installation of the emergency source on non-
needed for the safe operation for at least 30 minutes. self-propelled vessels is subject to special consideration by
the Register.
2.1.2 The electric power shall be supplied within 30
seconds after the failure of the main source of electric power. 2.3.3 The capacity of the emergency source shall be
sufficient to supply all consumers necessary to the safety of
2.1.3 Adequate sizing of the power supply shall be all persons on board, due account being taken of consumers
demonstrated by means of a power balance calculation (see which may be required to operate simultaneously. At least the
2.5). following, if their use is prescribed, and if they each have no
independent emergency source of power, shall be supplied
2.1.4 Independently of 2.1.1, requirements from the simultaneously:
present Rules, Chapter I, 8.2.7.1 and 8.2.7.2 shall apply to
.1 navigation and signal lights;
the power source for the steering system (rudder
installations). .2 emergency lighting in accordance with the 11.6.1;
.3 alarm and safety systems;
2.2 Electric power source .4 internal communication facilities;
The electric power source may take the form of: .5 radio and telephone equipment;
a) two diesel sets. Special restrictions for the supply of .6 emergency floodlight;
steering gear systems are given in 9.1.3.8;
.7 controls of fixed fire-extinguishing systems;
b) one diesel set and one power supply battery (in
.8 fire pump and emergency pump (on passenger vessels);
accordance with c));
.9 emergency steering gear.
c) one generator driven by the main propulsion unit (e.g.
shaft generator) is accepted as a main source provided a 2.3.4 The emergency source of power shall not be
power supply battery is installed as the auxiliary source. installed forward of the collision bulkhead. If the space
This design may be accepted if, in all sailing and housing the emergency source is situated below the bulkhead
manoeuvring conditions, including propeller being deck, that space shall be accessible from the deck.
stopped, this generator is not less effective and reliable
than an independent generating set. 2.3.5 On passenger vessels not less than 25,0 m in length,
The power supply battery shall be capable of supplying the space housing the emergency source shall be enclosed by
essential consumers (see 2.3.3) for at least 30 minutes watertight and fire-resistant decks and watertight and fire-
(see 2.1.1) automatically and without intermediate resistant bulkheads.
recharging.
2.3.6 Provision shall be made for a possibility of testing
It shall be possible to recharge the battery with the means the whole emergency installation including automatic starting
available on board even when the main engine is devices of a diesel generator.
stationary, e.g. by using charging generators (lighting
dynamos) driven by auxiliary machinery or by shore 2.3.7 An indicator shall be mounted in the main control
power via a battery charger; station or on the main switchboard to show when the storage
d) other energy generating systems are considered by the battery which serves as an emergency source of electrical
Register case by case. power is being discharged.
2.3 Emergency source of electric power 2.3.8 The requirements given in 8.1.9 apply.
2.3.1 The emergency source of electric power shall be 2.3.9 Cables supplying emergency consumers shall be so
either: laid that in case of flooding of the spaces below the bulkhead
deck where the consumers are located, supplying of the
a) generator driven by a suitable prime mover (e.g. internal consumers located above this deck is not impaired.
combustion engine) with their own independent cooling
system, fuel supply and with satisfactory starting 2.3.10 Distribution boards for the emergency consumers
arrangements; the fuel used shall have a flash point of not supply shall not be installed below the bulkhead deck.
less than 43°C; or
b) storage battery capable of carrying the emergency load 2.4 Emergency source of electric power on
without recharging or without a voltage drop exceeding passenger vessels
that authorized (12% of the rated voltage during the For emergency source of electric power on
whole discharge period). passenger vessels, see the Rules, Part 4 – Additional
Requirements for Notations, Chapter I, 4.2.10.

June 2018 153
2.5 Power balance

3 ELECTRICAL ROTATING
2.5.1 A power balance for the electrical plant shall be
furnished as proof that the rating of the power source
MACHINES
(generator, battery, solar panels, etc.) is sufficient. An 3.1 General requirements
appropriate utilisation factor may be taken into account.
The power requirements shall be determined for 3.1.1 Unless otherwise stated in the following Rules, all
day/night running service and emergency supply, if any. motors and generators shall conform to a standard accepted
by the Register.
2.5.2 A table shall be compiled listing all the installed
electrical consumers together with their individual power 3.1.2 Generators, motors and their terminal boxes shall
ratings: be accessible for inspections, measurements and repairs. The
a) account shall be taken of the full power rating of those type of protection shall correspond to their location (see
consumers permanently required for the operation of the 1.9.4).
vessel; 3.1.3 The shafts for rotating machines, as well as
b) the installed capacity of consumers kept in reserve shall couplings being component parts of the shafting, used for
be listed. The consumption of those consumers which essential services shall be made out of materials complying
operate only following the failure of a unit of the same with the Rules, Part 25 – Metal Materials. In cases where
kind need not be included in the calculation; welding is applied to shafts and other torque members of
c) the aggregate power consumption of all consumers rotating machines, the plans are subject to the Register
intermittently connected to the supply shall be multiplied approval. For shaft material for generators and electric
by a common simultaneity factor and the result added to propulsion engines, see 1.9.3.
the sum of the permanently connected consumers.
3.1.4 In conjunction with the protective equipment to be
The simultaneity factor may be applied only once provided, generators shall be capable of withstanding the
in the course of the calculation. dynamic and thermal stresses produced by a short circuit. All
machines shall be so designed and constructed that the
2.5.3 Consumers with relatively high power
permissible temperature rises stated in the 1.2.2 are not
consumption, such as the drive units of bow thrusters, shall
exceeded.
be included in the calculation at their full rating even though
they may be used only intermittently. 3.1.5 Generators and electrical motors being part of
electrical propulsion system and, where justified, also
2.5.4 The sum of the loads represented by 2.5.2, a) and
machines of other designation, shall be provided with heating
2.5.2, c), with due allowance for the battery charging
arrangements to maintain their temperature at least 30C above
capacity, shall be used when deciding the generator rating.
the ambient air temperature.
2.5.5 Unless some other standby capacity such as a
3.1.6 The insulation classes have to correspond to the
floating battery is available, some spare capacity shall be
ratings IEC 60085:2007.
designed into the system to cover short-lived peak loads like
those caused by the automatic start-up of large motors. In the case of laminated insulations, the highest
temperature permitted for each individual insulating material
shall not be exceeded.
3.1.7 All windings shall be effectively protected against

the effects of moist or salty air and oil vapours.
3.1.8 On direct current machines, the commutating pole

windings shall be connected symmetrically to the armature,
wherever possible. Anti-interference capacitors shall be
connected directly to the armature terminals. Anti-
interference capacitors on generators shall have built-in cut-
outs.
3.1.9 The carbon brushes shall be compatible with the

slip-ring and commutator materials and, in the case of the
latter, with the commutating conditions.
The working position of the brush holder shall be
clearly and indelibly marked.
3.1.10 The terminals shall be located in an easily

accessible position and shall be dimensioned to suit the cross-
section of the cables to be connected. The terminals shall be
clearly marked.
The class of protection shall match that of the
machine and shall be at least IP 44.

154 June 2018
Exceptions to this Rule may be permitted for 3.1.20 Where a machine is so designed that at the point of
machines with a working voltage of 50 V or less. installation on board its lower part is situated below the floor
level, ventilating air intake shall not be effected through the
3.1.11 Motors, generators and transformers shall be bottom part of the machine (see 1.9.1.6).
provided by the manufacturer with a plate, which in addition
to the company name, the machine’s serial number and the 3.1.21 In cases where air coolers are provided for rotating
rated power must contain the essential rating data. machines, they shall be arranged so that there is no fear of
any water ingress into such machines due to any leakage or
3.1.12 Commutators, slip-rings and, wherever possible, condensation in the air coolers.
windings shall be easily accessible for the purposes of
inspection, maintenance and repair. On larger machines with 3.2 Overload condition
plain bearings it shall be possible to check the air gap.
3.2.1 Generators shall be so designed that after reaching
3.1.13 Commutator type machines shall be capable of the steady-state temperature corresponding to the rated load,
operating without sparking at any load from zero to rated they should be capable sustaining overcurrent in accordance
value. No sparking shall be possible at the permissible with the Table 3.2-1.
overloads, reversals or start-up to such an extent as to cause
damage to brushes or commutators. Table 3.2-1
3.1.14 The permissible wear of commutator blades or slip- Kind of Overcurrent, Duration of
rings shall be indicated on their outer front sides. generator [%] overload, [sec.]
alternating
50 120
3.1.15 A flexible copper conductor shall be used for current
drawing current from brushes. Brush holder springs shall not direct current 50 15
be used for this purpose.
3.2.2 Electrical motors shall be so designed that they are
3.1.16 Generators driven by the main engine, the propeller capable of developing without stopping, the increased torque
shaft or by an auxiliary set intended for another function shall specified in Table 3.2-2.
be designed as a function of the range of rotational speeds
which can occur during operation. 3.3 Alternating current generators
3.1.17 Generators driven by belts or chains by the main 3.3.1 General requirements
propulsion engine shall be so designed to withstand the effect
of lateral forces. 3.3.1.1 Each alternating current generator shall have a
separate, independent system for automatic voltage
3.1.18 Rotating machines shall have continuous regulation.
lubrication at all running speeds and all normal working
3.3.1.2 Failure in the automatic voltage regulation system
bearing temperatures. Bearings shall be so designed as to
of the generator shall not cause inadmissible rise of voltage at
avoid oil splashing or leaking along the shaft and penetrating
its terminals.
in the machine windings or live parts. Pressure lubrication
systems shall incorporate pressure indicators for oil supplied 3.3.1.3 Protection of alternating current generators shall
to a bearing. comply with the requirements of 8.2.
3.1.19 Provisions shall be made to prevent flow of creep
currents through sliding friction bearings of electric
propulsion engines and where justified of other machines,
too.
Table 3.2-2
Motor type Torque increase, [%] Duration of overload, [sec.] Testing conditions
1. Polyphase synchronous motors
Frequency, voltage and
as well as squirrel-cage motors
50 15 excitation to be maintained at
with starting current less than 4,5
rated levels
times the rated current
2. Asynchronous motors for
Frequency and voltage to be
continuous and intermittent 60 15
maintained at rated levels
service
3. Motors as specified in 2., but for
short time and continuous 100 15 As under 2.
service with varying load
4. Direct current motors Voltage to be maintained at
50 15
rated level

June 2018 155
3.4.2.4 Compound-wound generators shall have

3.3.2 Voltage regulation system independent devices for voltage regulation within a tolerance
3.3.2.1 Alternating current generators shall have voltage of ± 1% for generators rated up to 100,0 kW, or within ±
regulation system so adapted to the regulation characteristics 0,5% for generators exceeding 100,0 kW.
of the prime movers, that rated voltage may be maintained The above regulation limits shall be maintained
within ± 2,5% (emergency generator up to ± 3,5%) at all load with the generator cold and hot at any load within the
changes from no-load to rated load values, at rated power operating load range of the generator.
factor.
3.4.2.5 Direct current sets comprising compound-wound
Main generators may have their voltage maintained generators shall have such external characteristic, that the
within ± 3,5% of the rated value at all power factor values voltage of a hot generator adjusted to the rated value with an
from 0,6 to 0,9, excluding the rated power factor. accuracy of ± 1% at 20% of the load, does not vary at full
The above requirement is applicable if prime mover load by more than ± 1,5% for generators rated at 50 kW or
is operating at rated speed of rotation and generator rated over, and by more than ± 2,5% for generators with lower
load. output.
3.3.2.2 A sudden change of the symmetrical load of a Voltage variations in a compound-wound generator
generator running at rated speed and rated voltage, under running at 20% to 100% of the rated load shall not exceed the
given current and power factor conditions, shall not cause following limits:
voltage drop below 85% of the rated value or a rise above .1 ± 3% for generators rated at 50,0 kW and more;
120%. .2 ± 4% for generators rated over 15,0 kW but not higher
After such a change, the generator voltage shall be than 50,0 kW;
restored within not more than 1,5 second to ± 3% of the rated .3 ± 5% for generators rated at up to 15,0 kW.
value. For emergency sets these values may be increased,
respectively, to 5 seconds and ± 4% of the rated voltage. 3.4.2.6 Direct current sets comprising shunt-wound
generators shall have such external generator characteristic
Where no precise data are available on peak values
and such automatic voltage regulation that voltage is
of sudden load that may occur additionally to the existing
maintained within ± 2,5% of the rated value at all load
generator load, these may be taken equal to a load of 60% of
variations from zero to the rated load.
the rated current at an inductive power factor of 0,4 or less
which is connected at idle speed and then disconnected. 3.5 Generator prime movers
3.4 Direct current generators 3.5.1 Design and control
3.4.1 General requirements The design and control of generator prime movers
shall conform to the present Rules, Chapter I, Section 2.
3.4.1.1 The following may be used to supply direct current
shipboard networks: 3.5.2 Parallel operation
– regulated single or 3-phase alternating current generators
connected to a rectifier; The governing characteristics of prime movers in
the case of single or 3-phase generator sets of the same
– compound-wound generators; output operating in parallel shall ensure that, over the range
– shunt-wound generators with automatic voltage regulator. from 20% to 100% of the total active power, the share of
each machine does not deviate from its proportionate share
3.4.1.2 Shunt-wound direct current generators may be used by more than 15% of its rated active power.
only when equipped with automatic voltage regulators.
Where the units are differently rated, the deviation
3.4.1.3 Protection of direct current generators shall comply from the proportionate share within the load range stated
with the requirements of 8.2. shall not exceed the lesser of the following values:
3.4.2 Voltage regulation a) 15% of the rated active power of the largest machine;
b) 25% of the rated active power of the smallest machine.
3.4.2.1 Voltage regulators of compound-wound generators
shall enable reduction of no-load voltage with the generator 3.5.3 Cyclic irregularity
cold, by not less than 10% below the rated generator voltage
taking into account the increased speed of the prime mover The permissible cyclic irregularity shall be agreed
running at no-load. upon between the prime mover and generator manufacturers.
The following shall be ensured:
3.4.2.2 Manual voltage regulators shall be so designed, that
the voltage increases when their controls are rotated a) faultless parallel operation of 3-phase generators;
clockwise. b) regular or irregular load variations shall not give rise to
fluctuations in active power output exceeding 10% of the
3.4.2.3 Voltage regulators of shunt-wound direct current rated output of the machine concerned;
generators shall be so designed that, when the field current is
removed, the field winding is automatically connected to the c) practically non-flicker lighting at all working speeds.
discharge circuit.

156 June 2018
3.6 Testing of electrical rotating machines

4 TRANSFORMERS
3.6.1 Workshop certificates
For generators and electrical motors with rated 4.1 Application
power less than 50,0 kVA or 50,0 kW, which have not been The requirements of this Section apply to power
tested in the presence of the Register, workshop certificates and lighting transformers.
(EN 10204, type 3.1) shall be submitted.
3.6.2 Testing in the presence of the Register
4.2.1 Transformers shall be installed in well ventilated
3.6.2.1 All electrical machines shall be tested at the
locations or in well ventilated rooms. Transformers with
manufacturer’s works. Testing of electrical rotating
exposed live parts shall be installed in special spaces
machines, type and routine, shall be carried out regarding to
accessible only to the responsible personnel.
IACS UR E13 - Test requirements for Rotating Machines.
When test procedure is not specified, requirements 4.2.2 Primary and secondary windings of transformers
of IEC 60034 apply. shall be executed in an electrically isolated manner.
Autotransformers are excluded hereof.
3.6.2.2 All generators and electrical motors with an output
of 50,0 kVA or 50,0 kW and over shall be of type approved Corresponding tapping of the nominal voltage shall
(see 1.4.1.5) and tested at the manufacturer’s works in the be provided for setting the secondary voltage of transformers.
presence of the Register (EN 10204, type 3.2). Autotransformers are excluded hereof.
3.6.2.3 The Register reserves the right to stipulate that a 4.2.3 Dry-type transformers cooled by air shall be used
works test be performed on new types of machines which only. The use and arrangement of other types of transformers
shall be installed for the first time on a vessel with class or shall be subject to special consideration of the Register on a
where there are special grounds for specifying such a test. case by case basis.
Individual tests may be replaced by type tests. 4.2.4 Transformers shall be so constructed as to be
capable of withstanding at least 10% overload for 1 hour and
3.7 Electromagnetic brakes
50% overload for 5 minutes.
3.7.1 The brake shall operate when the break operating
4.2.5 Where transformers are arranged to operate in
coil becomes de-energized.
parallel, the rated power output of the smallest transformer
3.7.2 A 30% voltage drop below the rated value shall not shall not be less than half the rated power output of the
cause a hot brake to operate. largest transformer in the group.
3.7.3 Electromagnetic brakes shall allow for manual 4.2.6 As a general principle, the primary and secondary
release. windings of transformers shall be separated electrically. For
the adjustment of the secondary voltage, taps shall be
3.7.4 Electromagnetic brakes shall be fitted with at least provided corresponding to ± 2,5% of the rated voltage.
two pressure springs. Starting transformers are excepted from this
requirement.
3.7.5 The shunt windings of a compound-wound
electromagnetic brake shall be capable of holding off the 4.2.7 Scope and testing conditions of power and lighting
brake even when no current flows through the series winding. transformers are referred to in Work instruction QW58 of the
Register.
3.7.6 The shunt windings of electromagnetic brakes shall
be so constructed or protected that they can be safe from Transformers with a power rating of 50,0 kVA or
damage at overvoltages such as occur when they are more shall undergo a test at the manufacturer’s works in the
disconnected. presence of the Register (EN 10204, type 3.2).
4.2.8 The manufacturer shall fit to transformers a name

and date plate containing the serial number of the unit and all
essential operating data.
4.2.9 Terminals shall be provided in an accessible

position.

June 2018 157
5.3.2 For each type of battery an operation manual shall

5 STORAGE BATTERIES be delivered. It shall contain all information for proper
(ACCUMULATORS) maintenance and operation.
5.1 Application 5.4 Installation and location
5.1.1 These requirements apply to permanently installed 5.4.1 Storage batteries shall be installed in such a way
storage batteries. that they are accessible for cell replacement, inspection,
testing, topping-up and cleaning and so arranged as not to
5.1.2 Only storage batteries suitable for vessels use can shift with movements of the vessel.
be used.
5.4.2 Storage batteries shall not be installed in the
5.1.3 Storage batteries shall be in compliance with and wheelhouse, accommodation lounges and holds and in the
tested according to recognized standards, e.g.: case of passenger vessels in passenger rooms, cabins and
galleys. Above mentioned shall not apply for storage:
– IEC 60896-11 or IEC 60896-21,22, for Lead-acid
batteries; a) in mobile equipment; or
– IEC 60622, IEC 60623 or IEC 62259, for Nickel- b) with charging power of less than 0,2 kW.
Cadmium batteries.
5.4.3 Storage batteries shall not be installed in locations
5.1.4 The requirements of European Standard EN 62619 where they are exposed to unacceptably high or low
in the version in force on 6 July 2017 and EN 62620:2015 temperatures, spray or other effects liable to impair their
shall apply for lithium-ion accumulators. serviceability or reduce their life essentially. The interior
surfaces of all rooms, cupboards or chests, as well as shelving
5.1.5 Accumulator management systems for monitoring or other components intended for storage batteries shall be
the accumulators shall be used if possible. Lithium-ion protected against the harmful effects of the electrolyte.
accumulators must be equipped with such systems.
5.4.4 Storage batteries requiring a charging power of
These systems shall at a minimum comprise the
more than 2,0 kW shall be installed in a special room. If
following functionality:
placed on deck, they may also be enclosed in a cupboard. If
a) cell protection (short-circuit, external, internal, gas can escape from storage batteries, this room or cupboard
overcurrent, deep discharge, etc.); must be mechanically ventilated to the open deck (supply and
b) charge control, provided this is not by means of the exhaust air).
charger;
5.4.5 The charging power is calculated on the basis of the
c) load management; maximum charging current and the nominal voltage of the
d) determination of the charge level; accumulator, taking into account the characteristic charging
e) balancing of the cells; curves of the charging device.
f) thermal management. 5.4.6 Storage batteries requiring a charging power not
Depending on use, if possible, they should also exceeding 2,0 kW may also be installed below decks in a
feature the following functionality: cupboard or chest. They may also be installed without casing
g) determination of ageing, remaining capacity, internal in an engine room, electrical service room or any other well-
resistance etc.; ventilated place provided that they are protected against
falling objects and dripping water.
h) communication (e.g. with inverters and control devices);
i) authentication and identification; 5.4.7 Lead-acid batteries and alkaline storage batteries
j) history. shall not be installed in the same room or in the immediate
vicinity of each other.
5.2 Design and construction of cells
5.4.8 Measures shall be taken to prevent storage batteries
Cells shall be so designed that they retain their from shifting. The braces used shall not impede ventilation.
normal operation at inclination of up to 15° and no
electrolyte leaks out at inclination of up to 40°. Cells should 5.4.9 If batteries are installed in several floors, the free
be combined in cabinets, chests or racks if the weight of distance between them shall be at least 50,0 mm.
single cells allows this.
5.4.10 Leading of pipes through battery rooms shall be
The weight of a battery or battery element shall not arranged in accordance with the present Rules, Chapter I,
exceed 100,0 kg. 7.8.5.2.
5.3 Data plate and operation instructions
5.3.1 Each battery or battery element shall be marked
with manufacturer’s name and type of battery, containing all
relevant data for operation.

158 June 2018
5.4.11 Installation of electrical equipment

Only explosion protected lamps, switches, fan 6 DISTRIBUTION OF ELECTRIC
motors and space heating appliances shall be installed in POWER
battery rooms. The following minimum requirements shall be
observed: 6.1 Power supply of essential consumers
– explosion group II C; 6.1.1 The following consumers shall be supplied with
– temperature class T1. electric power by separate feeders from the main switchboard
Other electrical equipment is permitted only with busbars:
the special approval of the Register. .1 steering gear electrical drives;
.2 windlass electrical drives;
5.5 Ventilation
.3 fire pump electrical drives;
5.5.1 All battery installations in rooms, cupboards and .4 bilge/drainage pump electrical drives;
chests shall be constructed and ventilated in such a way as to .5 electric drives of compressors;
prevent the accumulation of ignitable gas mixtures.
.6 automatic pressure water spraying system (sprinkler)
5.5.2 For ventilation of storage battery rooms, cupboards pumps;
or chests, the requirements given in the present Rules, .7 main lighting switchboard;
Chapter I, 7.13.4 apply.
.8 navigational equipment distribution board;
5.6 Starter batteries .9 navigational and signalling lights distribution board;
.10 distribution board for supplying other essential
5.6.1 For starter batteries, the requirements given in the
consumers combined on the principle of similarity either
present Rules, Chapter I, 2.10.1 apply. requirements or function;
5.6.2 Wherever possible storage batteries used for .11 electric propulsion engines;
starting and preheating internal combustion engines shall be .12 distribution board of automatic fire detection and alarm
located close to the machines. system;
5.6.3 Starting internal combustion engines with the .13 distribution boards of electrical drives for mooring
vessel’s supply battery is permitted only in emergencies. winches, davit equipment and other gears, ventilation
and heating appliances;
5.7 Charging of batteries .14 control device of controllable pitch propeller;
5.7.1 Charging devices must basically be designed so .15 charging facilities of starter accumulator batteries for
that discharged batteries can be recharged within a maximum internal combustion engines and batteries supplying
of 15 hours to 80% of their nominal capacity, without essential consumers;
exceeding the amperage of maximum permissible charge .16 other machinery and installations, at the request of the
rate. Register.
5.7.2 Only automatic charging devices which correspond 6.1.2 It is permitted to supply consumers referred to in
to the charging characteristics of the battery type must be 6.1.1.4, 6.1.1.7, 6.1.1.8, 6.1.1.12, 6.1.1.13 and 6.1.1.15 from
used. distribution boards referred to in items 6.1.1.9 and 6.1.1.10
by separate feeders provided with appropriate switching and
5.7.3 For the simultaneous supply of consumer protective devices.
equipment while charging, the power requirements of the
consumer equipment must be taken into account when 6.1.3 In case that two or more same-purpose machinery’s
selecting the charger. A charging voltage of up to a or installations with electrical drives referred to in 6.1.1 are
maximum of 120% of the rated voltage must be observed installed, except those referred to in item 6.1.1.1, 6.1.1.5 and
irrespective of the current power requirements. 6.1.1.6, at least one of these shall be supplied by a separate
feeder from the main switchboard. Electrical drives of the
5.7.4 The charging facilities shall have means for rest of machinery may be supplied from distribution board or
measuring the voltage across battery terminals and charging special switching devices intended for the supply of essential
current, and in addition discharging current, if the battery is consumers.
emergency source of electric power.
When the main switchboard busbars are divided
5.7.5 Battery chargers with a rated power of 2,0 kW into sections having intersectional switching device, the
upwards shall be tested in manufacturer’s works in the electrical drives, distribution boards and special switching
presence of the Register. devices installed in double number or more, or supplied by
two feeders, shall be connected to different busbars sections.
6.1.4 Final circuits with rated current exceeding 16,0 A

may supply only one consumer.
Outputs to consumer equipment from the main
switchboard shall include a load switch or circuit-breaker for
nominal amperage greater than 16,0 A.

June 2018 159
6.1.5 Where the main source of electric power is 6.2.10 Only flexible, oil-resistant and flame retardant
necessary for propulsion and steering of the vessel, the cables shall be used as feeder cables.
system shall be so arranged that the electric power supply to
the equipment necessary for propulsion and steering and to 6.3 Power supply to other vessel
ensure safety of the vessel will be maintained or immediately
restored in the case of loss of any one of the generators in 6.3.1 When power is applied to other vessel, a separate
service. connection must exist.
6.3.2 The supply to the lighters of the convoy shall be

6.2 Connection to shore or other external
controlled by means of multipole switches installed on the
networks pusher.
6.2.1 The feed-in unit, that is the entire on board
6.3.3 Instruction plates shall be affixed to current take-
equipment for transferring electric power to the vessel, must
off devices and to craft-coupling devices, stipulating that
be designed as follows:
feeders must be disconnected before lighters are coupled or
.1 transfer from shore side power supply systems: uncoupled.
a) for currents up to 125,0 A, the requirements of
European Standards EN 158691 and EN 158693 in 6.3.4 Items 6.2.2 and 6.2.4 to 6.2.9 above shall apply
the version in force on 6 July 2017 shall be complied mutatis mutandis.
with;
b) for currents greater than 250,0 A, the requirements of
European Standards EN 16840:2017 shall be
complied with;
.2 in all other cases, the requirements of 6.2.2 to 6.2.9 shall
apply. The requirements specified shall be deemed to
have been complied with if the standards referred to in .1
are adhered to for the use in question.
6.2.2 Incoming supply lines from shore networks or other

external networks to the installations of the on board network
shall have a permanent connection on board in the form of
permanently fixed terminals or permanently fixed plug
sockets. Cables connections shall not be subjected to any
pulling load.
6.2.3 When the connection voltage exceeds 50,0 V, the

hull shall have an earthing connection. The earthing
connection should be specially marked.
6.2.4 The protective devices of the connections shall be

capable of being locked so as to prevent the concurrent
operation of the on board network generators and the shore
network or another external network. A brief period of
concurrent operation shall be permitted when changing from
one system to another without a break in voltage.
6.2.5 The connection shall be protected against short

circuits and overloads.
6.2.6 The main switchboard shall indicate whether the

connection is live.
6.2.7 Indicator devices shall be installed to allow

comparison of polarity in the case of direct current and phase
sequence in the case of alternating current between the
connection and the on board network.
6.2.8 A panel on the connection shall indicate:

a) the measures required to make the connection;
b) the kind of current and the nominal voltage and, for
alternating current, the frequency.
6.2.9 If sockets devices rated at more than 16,0 A are

used, steps shall be taken to ensure that connection and
disconnection can take place only when the line is dead.

160 June 2018
7.1.1.12 The maximum permissible temperature for busbars

7 SWITCHGEAR INSTALLATIONS and uninstalled connections of switching devices at the rated
load and short-circuit condition or at the permissible one
7.1 Switchboards second short-circuit load of copper busbars, shall be
determined according to IEC recommendations in agreement
7.1.1 General requirements with the Register.
7.1.1.1 Switchboards shall contain all the gear, switches, 7.1.1.13 The lighting fittings on the front side of
fuses and instruments necessary for operating and protecting switchboard panels shall be so arranged as not to interfere
the generators and main power distribution systems. with instrument observation or produce a blinding effect.
Equipment, switches, fuses and switchboard instruments
shall be arranged visibly and shall be accessible for 7.1.1.14 When circuit breakers and fuses are installed in the
maintenance, inspection and repair. switchboard, the fuses shall be positioned between busbars
and switches. The same pattern is applicable to other
Terminals for voltages up to 50,0 V, and for
switching devices.
voltages greater than 50,0 V shall be kept separately and
marked appropriately. 7.1.1.15 The power feed for the control of consumers shall
be picked up on the consumer side downstream of the main
7.1.1.2 For all switches and equipment marker plates
fuses. Exceptions will be permitted only in special cases.
indicating the circuit shall be affixed to the switchboards. The
nominal amperage and the circuit for fuses shall be identified. 7.1.1.16 Neutral conductors in 3-phase systems shall have at
least half the cross-section of the outer conductors. For line
7.1.1.3 The materials of switchboards shall have suitable
cross-sections of up to 16,0 mm2, neutral conductors shall
mechanical strength, be durable, flame-retardant, self-
have the full cross-section of the outer conductors. Equalizer
extinguishing and not be hygroscopic.
lines for 3-phase alternator exciters shall be designed to carry
Cupboards and wall recesses in which unprotected half the exciting current of the largest alternator and shall be
switching devices are installed shall be of a flame-retardant laid separately from other lines.
material or protected by a metal or other non-flammable
sheathing. The doors of cabinets and recesses shall bear a 7.1.1.17 With the exception of the connections between
notice drawing attention to the switchboard installed therein. switchgear and outgoing terminals, switchboards may only
contain lines with cross-sections of up to 50,0 mm2. If larger
7.1.1.4 Switchboards shall be of sufficient strength, to cross-sections are required, a main busbar system shall be
withstand mechanical stresses under service conditions as provided for connecting generators and consumers.
well as the stresses resulting from the short circuit conditions.
7.1.1.18 Lines without fuse protection from the main busbar
7.1.1.5 Switchboards shall be at least protected against to fuses and protective switches shall be as short as possible
drip. This protection is not required when the switchboards not longer than 1,0 m. They may not be laid and fastened
are fitted in spaces where no vertical water drops may enter together with other lines.
into them (see 12.2.9).
Shunt circuits within the switchboard shall be laid
7.1.1.6 Cable entries of switchboards shall be so separately from other lines and shall not, in general, be
constructed that no ingress of water into the switchboard is protected by fuses.
permitted along such cables. Important control lines shall be laid and protected
7.1.1.7 Handrails shall be fitted to the switchboards, in such a way they cannot be damaged by arcing due to
distribution boards and control consoles on their front sides. switching operations or, as far as possible, short-circuits.
Switchboards and distribution boards which are accessible 7.1.1.19 It shall be possible to observe meters and indicators
from the rear shall be provided with the horizontal handrails and to operate the switchgear from the front of the
fitted at the back. The materials which may be used for switchboard with the doors closed.
handrails are wood, insulating material or earthed metal pipes
with insulating covering. 7.1.1.20 Emergency switchboard, under normal service
conditions, shall be supplied from the main switchboard by a
7.1.1.8 Operating handles shall not, in general, be located supply feeder which shall be provided with an overload and
less than 300,0 mm above floor level. The operating handles short-circuit protection fitted at the main switchboard.
of generator switches shall be located at a distance of at least
The emergency switchboard shall be fitted with a
800,0 mm from the floor.
switch which in case of the voltage loss on the main
7.1.1.9 Busbars and bare connections shall be made of switchboard busbars will automatically switch-off the feeder.
copper. Busbars shall be fastened and secured in such a way Where the main switchboard shall be supplied from
that they are able to withstand the mechanical stresses the emergency switchboard, the automatic switch at the
produced by the greatest possible short-circuit currents. emergency switchboard shall be provided with at least short
7.1.1.10 When equipment with an operating voltage greater circuit protection.
than 50,0 V are installed behind doors, the current-carrying 7.1.1.21 Consumer equipment required for propelling the
components of these equipment shall be protected against vessel, for the steering systems according to the present
accidental contact while the doors are open. Rules, Chapter I, Section 8, for the rudder position indicators,
7.1.1.11 All screwed joints and connections shall be secured for navigation or for safety systems as well as consumer
against spontaneous loosening. Screws up to M4 size may be equipment, with a nominal amperage greater than 16,0 A
secured with lacquer or enamel. shall be supplied by separate circuits.

June 2018 161
7.1.1.22 The circuits of consumer equipment required for higher than 50,0 V shall be securely earthed with at least one
propelling and manoeuvring the vessel shall be supplied flexible brade.
directly by the main switchboard.
7.1.3.4 Where a number of distribution boards are supplied
7.1.2 Installation of switchboards via a common feeder cable without intermediate protection,
the busbars and the connecting terminals shall be
7.1.2.1 Switchboards shall be placed in accessible and dimensioned to withstand the total load.
sufficiently ventilated rooms, in order to be protected against
water and mechanical damage. 7.1.3.5 Distribution circuits shall be protected in
accordance with 8.1 against damage due to short-circuit and
Switchboards on the floor plates over the bilges
overload. Final sub-circuits with fuses rated at more than
shall be closed from below.
63,0 A shall be fitted with on-load switches. On-load
7.1.2.2 Switchboards shall not be placed near sounding switches may be dispensed with in final sub-circuits with
pipes or near the air pipes of fuel oil tanks. fuses rated up to 63,0 A provided that each connected
consumer can be disconnected by a switch located nearby.
7.1.2.3 Piping and air ducts shall be so arranged that in the
event of leakage the switchboards and control gear cannot be 7.1.3.6 Distribution boards for the supply of mobile
damaged. No pressure pipes shall be situated above or behind consumers, e.g. container plug sockets shall be individually
the main or emergency switchboard or the control panels of supplied from the distribution board and shall be individually
propulsion equipment. In vessels where this requirement fused and individually disconnectable. A pilot light or
cannot be met, no detachable pipe joints shall be installed voltmeter shall be provided to show whether the distribution
above or behind an electrical switchboard (see the present board is live.
Rules, Chapter I, 7.8.5.1).
7.1.3.7 Motor switchgear
7.1.2.4 Switchboards shall be arranged so as to give easy Motor switchgear shall be accessible for the
access to each component without danger to any personnel. A purposes of inspection and repair without the need to
service passageway at least 0,6 m wide shall be provided in disconnect other important circuits.
front of switchboards. A service passageway of not less than
Mechanical devices, ammeters or indicator lights
0,5 m behind the switchboard is required only when required
shall show whether the motor is switched on.
by its construction or maintenance.
Motor switchgear units or their control switches are
7.1.2.5 When the voltage is greater than 50,0 V, gratings or normally to be located close to their respective motors.
insulating mats shall be placed in front of the main
Where for operational reasons they are placed out
switchboard where the operator sits.
of sight of the motor, personnel working on the motor shall
No live parts may be mounted on the front side of be provided with means of protecting themselves against the
switchboards. unauthorized switching on of the motor.
Parts located to the rear of an open switchboard and Motors shall be disconnected on all poles as a
carrying voltages of more than 50,0 V shall be protected matter of principle.
against contact up to a height of 0,3 m.
7.1.4 Switchboard testing
7.1.2.6 Emergency switchboard shall be as close as
possible to the emergency source of power. Where a diesel 7.1.4.1 Before being installed on board, every switchboard
generator is an emergency source of electric power, together with all its equipment shall be subjected to tests at
emergency switchboard shall be installed in the same space the manufacturer’s works.
as the diesel generator, except where such an arrangement
would adversely affect the switchboard operation. 7.1.4.2 A test at the manufacturer’s works in the presence
of the Register shall be carried out on main switchboards for
7.1.2.7 Where the emergency source of electric power is a a connected generator output of more than 100,0 kW/kVA,
storage battery, the emergency switchboard shall be installed and on all switchboards for emergency generator sets. The
in separate space. The requirements for the storage battery Register reserves the right to call for a works test on other
compartments are given in 5.4. switchboards where there are special reasons for this.
7.1.3 Distribution boards 7.1.4.3 Operational test

As far as possible, the proper operation of the
7.1.3.1 The requirements set out in 7.1.1 apply in
equipment shall be checked in accordance with the design.
analogous manner.
7.1.4.4 High-voltage test
7.1.3.2 Distribution boards fitted in the places accessible to
unauthorized persons shall be provided with doors to be High-voltage test shall be performed for a period of
opened by special key which is the same for all distribution one minute at the test voltage shown in Table 7.1.4-1.
boards in the vessel. Measuring instruments and other ancillary
equipment may be disconnected during the test.
7.1.3.3 The doors of the distribution boards shall be so
designed as to ensure the access to all parts which need
maintenance and live parts of the device located on the doors
shall be protected against inadvertent touching.
Doors and withdrawable frames which are used for
mounting switching devices and instruments for voltage

162 June 2018
7.2.3.4 The replacement of fuse elements shall be possible

Table 7.1.4-1 without removing panels or covers.
High-voltage test If low voltage-high rupturing capacity fuses are
installed in switchboards, accessories and equipment for
Operating voltage, [V] Test voltage, [V] bodily protection shall be available for installing and
removing such fuse-links.
up to 60,0 1000,0
61,0 to 125,0 1500,0 7.2.3.5 The fuses in switchboards and distribution boards
126,0 to 250,0 2000,0 installed on the foundation at the floor level shall be located
251,0 to 500,0 2500,0 not lower than 150,0 mm or higher than 1800,0 mm from the
floor level. Live open parts of switchboards shall be located
7.1.4.5 Insulation resistance measurement at least 150,0 mm above the floor level.
Immediately after high-voltage test insulation 7.2.3.6 Screwed-in fuses shall be so installed that the
resistance measurement shall be performed using at least supply leads are connected to the lower terminal.
500,0 V DC. For the purpose of this test, large switchboards
may be divided into a number of test sections. The insulation 7.2.3.7 The fuses protecting the poles or phases of the
resistance of each section shall be at least 1,0 MΩ. same circuit shall be installed in a row, horizontally or
vertically, depending on the fuse design. The fuses in the
7.2 Switchgear alternating current circuit shall be positioned to follow the
sequence of phases i.e. from left to right or from top to
7.2.1 General bottom.
As a general principle, switchgear shall be type In direct current circuits, the positive-pole fuses
approved, designed and constructed in accordance with shall be fitted on the right at the top, or closest possible to the
standard IEC, EN or to other standards recognized by the service man.
Register.
7.3 Arrangement of switching devices,
7.2.2 Selection of switchgear measuring and monitoring devices
7.2.2.1 Switchgear shall be so selected that under normal 7.3.1 Generator, batteries and distribution circuits shall
operating conditions their voltages, loads and temperature be equipped with measuring and monitoring devices
rise limits are not exceeded. The gear shall also be capable of (ammeters, voltmeters, frequency meters, etc.) where the safe
withstanding without damages or exceeding permissible operation of the installation so requires, so that any faults can
temperature limits, loads expected in transient conditions. be discovered and corrected.
Short-circuit protection devices shall comply at least with the
standards taking into account the short-circuit power factor in 7.3.2 Switching devices used in connection with
the alternating current systems, as well as the values of initial generators and other essential consumers shall be installed in
and transient short-circuit currents. the switchboard fields associated with the appropriate
generators and consumers.
7.2.2.2 Switches shall simultaneously cut off all live
conductors. The switching position shall be easily 7.3.3 An ammeter and a voltmeter shall be provided for
identifiable. each direct current generator on the main and emergency
7.2.2.3 Circuit breakers shall be installed and connected to switchboard.
busbars in such a way that, when they are in open position, 7.3.4 Each alternating current generator on the main
none of the movable contacts and protective or control switchboard and each emergency generator on the emergency
devices associated with switches, are under voltage. switchboard shall be provided with the following
7.2.2.4 Circuit breakers shall be constructed and tested to instruments:
comply with IEC Publication 60947-1:2007 or other .1 ammeter with a change-over switch (for current
recognized standard. measurement in each phase);
7.2.3 Fuses .2 voltmeter with a change-over switch (for measuring
phase or line voltage);
7.2.3.1 Fuses shall be constructed and tested to comply .3 frequency meter (use of one double frequency meter is
with IEC Publication 60269 or other recognized standard. permissible for generators operating in parallel with
7.2.3.2 Fuses shall be of the enclosed-melt type and be changeover switch to each generator);
made of ceramic or an equivalent material and shall allow no .4 wattmeter (for output upwards of 50,0 kVA);
arc ejection to the outside, sparking or other harmful effect .5 other accessories as required.
upon the adjacent parts of the equipment.
7.3.5 In vessels having a low power electrical installation
7.2.3.3 Fuses shall be so installed in switchboards and
(up to 50,0 KVA) in which generators are not expected to
distribution boards that they are easily accessible and that the
operate in parallel, only one set referred to in 7.3.3 and 7.3.4
cartridge replacement is not dangerous for the operating
may be installed at the main and emergency switchboard
personnel. Rated voltage, rated currents, etc. shall be clearly
enabling measurements on each generator installed.
indicated on each fuse.

June 2018 163
7.3.6 The main switchboard (main distribution board)

shall be provided with ammeters for essential consumers 8 PROTECTION
rated at 20,0 A and over, unless these are mounted at the
consumers themselves. One ammeter with changeover switch 8.1 General requirements
may be installed, but for not more than six consumers.
8.1.1 Each outgoing circuit of distribution board shall be
The rated currents shall be marked on the
protected against short circuit and overload by the protective
instrument scales, or on a separate panel in the case of multi-
devices installed at the inception of each circuit. No overload
circuit instruments with changeover switch. The rated service
protection is required for the distribution board supply circuit
values shall be marked in red on the scales of all instruments.
if its outgoing circuits are provided with individual protective
7.3.7 Appropriate digital means of measuring and devices and if the supply cable is selected on the basis of
monitoring equipment is acceptable taking into account maximum service current.
bellow mentioned measuring ranges for voltage, current,
8.1.2 Protective devices shall be selected in accordance
power and frequency measurement.
with the characteristics of the equipment under protection in
7.3.8 Measuring instruments shall have measuring ranges order to make them activate under inadmissible overloads.
in excess of the rated values to be measured as follows:
8.1.3 The electric protection system shall be selective
.1 voltmeters: 120% of the rated voltage; with regard to overload and short-circuit currents. Such
.2 ammeters for generators not operating in parallel and for protection system shall be so designed that failure of non-
consumers: 130% of the rated current; essential consumers and their circuits could not adversely
.3 ammeters for generators operating in parallel: affect efficient operation of vessel’s generating plant and
supply of essential consumers.
– for load current:
130% of rated current; Short-circuit and overload protective devices shall
not activate at starting currents of the electrical equipment
– for reverse current (reefers only to direct current being under protection.
generators):
15% of rated current; 8.1.4 Overload protection shall be provided in:
.4 wattmeter’s for generators not operating in parallel: .1 not less than one phase or positive pole in a two-wire
130% of rated power; system;
.5 wattmeter’s for generators operating in parallel: .2 not less than two phases in an insulated three-wire three-
– power: 130% of the rated power; phase alternating current system;
– reverse power: 15% of the rated power; .3 all phases in a three-phase four-wire alternating current
system.
.6 frequency meters: ±10% of the rated frequency.
The specified measuring ranges may be changed on 8.1.5 Short-circuit protection shall be fitted in each
agreement with the Register. insulated pole of a direct current distribution system or in
each phase of an alternating current system.
7.3.9 For the connection of the external power source, Short-circuit protection shall be set to activate at
the main switchboard shall be provided with: not less than 200% of the rated current. Activation may be
.1 switching device; instantaneous or time delayed to ensure selective protection.
.2 protective device; The same protective device may be used for the short-circuit
protection of the consumer and belonging supply cable.
.3 measuring devices;
.4 means for the control of phase sequence. 8.1.6 Where cables of the reduced cross-sectional area
are used in some parts of a vessel’s network, additional
7.3.10 Non-earthed networks where the voltage is higher protection shall be provided for each of such cables if the
than 50,0 V must include a device for monitoring insulation basic protection is not capable to protect the cable with
equipped with a visual and audible alarm. In secondary reduced cross-sectional area.
installations such as control circuits, this device for
monitoring insulation may be dispensed with. 8.1.7 Protective devices excluding the possibility of
immediate repeated switching on after the protection
7.3.11 Manual voltage regulators on the main switchboard activation, shall not be used in supply circuits of the
and emergency switchboard shall be positioned close to the emergency switchboard as well as in those of emergency
measuring instruments associated with the particular consumers.
generator.
8.1.8 Short-circuit protection of consumers located in the
7.3.12 Device controls, measuring accessories, areas and spaces with the explosion risk shall activate
switchboards, panels and outgoing circuits shall be provided immediately.
with inscriptions. The switching position of the switchgear
shall also be indicated. 8.1.9 The emergency source of electric power shall be
Besides the rated currents of the fuses as well as the provided only with short-circuit protection. If the emergency
current settings of the circuit breakers, the tripping of other source of power is a diesel generator, visual and audible
switching devices shall also be marked. alarms shall be fitted in the main control station and
emergency switchboard to warn of the generator overload.

164 June 2018
8.2 Protection of generators lead is not connected. Reverse-current or reverse-power

protection shall still be capable for operation even if the
8.2.1 Generators not intended for parallel operation shall voltage is reduced to 60%, irrespective that reverse current or
be protected against short-circuit and overload. Melting fuses reverse power may have altered values proportional to such
may be used as protective devices for generators rated under voltage drop.
50,0 kW (kVA). Reverse-current or reverse-power protection shall
8.2.2 Generators intended for parallel operation shall be ensure transfer of power from the vessel’s network.
provided with the protection: 8.2.5 Undervoltage protection shall ensure the possibility
.1 against overload; of a reliable switching-on of the generator to the busbars
.2 against short-circuit; down to voltages till 85% of its rated voltage and shall ensure
switching off the generator at the voltage drop across the
.3 against reverse current or reverse power;
terminals within the range of 70% to 35% of the rated value.
.4 against undervoltage.
Undervoltage protection shall operate with a time-
It is recommended that the device used for delay when switching off the generator and instantly at the
generator overload protection shall be provided with visual repeated switching-on, if the minimum required voltage has
and audible alarms to operate with a time - delay of up to 15 not been reached.
minutes at the loads from 100% to 110% of the rated current.
The generator under overload protection at loads from 110% 8.2.6 Undervoltage protection shall function reliably
to 150% of the rated current, shall be switched off with a even in case of frequency drop to 25% of the generator rated
time-delay to suit generator thermal strength. frequency.
It is recommended that for setting of the protection
8.2.7 Protective devices with time delay for circuit
device at 150% of the rated generator current, the time delay
breaker opening shall be selected in such a way that after the
shall not exceed 2 minutes for the alternating current
time delay the normal short-circuit current is higher than the
generator and 15 seconds for a direct current generator. When
minimum operation current of protective tripping device.
loaded in excess of 150% of the rated current, the generator
shall be immediately switched off. 8.2.8 In generator excitation systems melting fuses may
Overload protection and time delay settings shall be be used as protective devices for semi-conductor elements.
selected to suit the overload characteristics of the generator
prime mover so that within the time-delay it is capable to 8.3 Protection of electrical motors
develop the necessary output.
8.3.1 Outgoing feeders from switchboards and power
The protective devices used for generator overload distribution boards, supplying electrical motors rated at over
protection shall not prevent the possibility of restarting the 0,5 kW shall be provided with short-circuit and overload
generator immediately. protection devices as well as with zero-voltage protection, if
8.2.3 Arrangements shall be provided to automatically the motor need not be automatically restarted.
and gradually disconnect the less essential consumers in the The overload and zero-voltage protective devices
event of the generator overload. This load shedding may be may be installed in the motor starter.
carried out in one or several steps, depending on the
complexity of vessel’s network and the generator ability to 8.3.2 The overload protection for continuously loaded
sustain the overload. motors shall be so set as to disconnect the motors over a
range of 105% to 125% of the rated current. The overload
This requirement may be dispensed with in the case protection may be replaced by visual and audible alarms in
of low power electrical installations (up to 50,0 kVA) if agreement with the Register.
approved by the Register.
8.3.3 The supply circuits of fire pump electrical drives
8.2.4 Reverse-current or reverse-power protection of shall not be provided with the protective devices operating on
generators intended for parallel operation shall be selected to the principle of electro-thermal relays.
suit the prime mover characteristics.
The respective protection settings shall be in accordance with The overload protective devices may be substituted
those referred to in Table 8.2.4-1. by visual and audible alarms.
8.4 Protection of transformers

Table 8.2.4-1
Reverse-current or reverse-power protection of generators 8.4.1 Short-circuit and overload protective devices shall
be installed in the transformer supply feeders. Transformers
Ranges of reverse-current or reverse-power rated up to 6,3 kVA may be protected by fuses only. The
Kind of overload protective devices may be replaced by visual and
protection settings related to generator
current audible alarms upon agreement with the Register.
prime mover (internal combustion engines)
Alternating No overload protection or alarm is required for
8-15% of generator, rated power, [kW]
current measuring transformers and supply transformers for the
Direct control circuits.
8-15% of generator, rated current, [kW]
current
8.4.2 Where transformers are intended for parallel
Reverse-current protection of direct current operation, the switches capable of disconnecting their
generators shall be installed in the pole to which the equaliser

June 2018 165
primaries and secondary but not necessarily simultaneously, For protective devices, it shall be ensured that upon
shall be installed. actuating:
Where such transformers are fed from different – the output will be reduced or defective part-systems will
sections of main switchboard, provision shall be made for be selectively disconnected;
interruption of parallel operation in case the sections from – drives will be stopped under control;
which the transformers are fed, are separated.
– the energy stored in components and in the load circuit
8.4.3 The switching-over of instrument current cannot have a damaging effect, when switching off.
transformers shall be so arranged as to prevent the possibility
of their secondary windings remaining open. 8.7.2 Special semiconductor fuses shall be monitored.
After tripping the equipment shall be switched off, if this is
8.5 Protection of storage batteries necessary for the prevention of damage. Activating of a
safety device shall trigger an alarm.
8.5.1 Storage batteries, other than those intended for
starting of internal combustion engines, shall be provided 8.7.3 Equipment without fuses is permissible if a short
with short-circuit current protection situated near the circuit will not lead to the destruction of the semiconductor
batteries, but not in battery’s cabinet or chest. components.
8.5.2 In case the conductors from the battery to motor 8.8 Exciter circuits
starter are not protected from short-circuit current and Exciter circuits and similar circuits whose failure
overload, they shall be so selected and installed to be safe might endanger the operation of essential systems may not be
from short-circuits and earth connections. protected, or may be protected only against short circuits.
8.5.3 Each battery charging system, shall be provided
8.9 Emergency circuit breakers devices
with protection against battery discharge due to voltage drop
or loss of the charger output voltage. For oil burners, oil and fuel pumps, oil and fuel
separators, if any, and engine room ventilators, emergency
8.6 Protection of signal lamps, voltmeters and circuit breaker devices shall be installed in central location
voltage coils in devices outside the rooms containing the equipment.
8.6.1 Signal lamps as well as measuring and recording
instruments shall be provided with short-circuit protection or
short-circuit current limiting devices.
Signal lamps need not be provided with their own
protection on condition that:
.1 the lamps are enclosed together with the device;
.2 the lamps are supplied from circuits inside the enclosure
of the device;
.3 the protection of the circuit of the device is rated for
current not exceeding 25,0 A;
.4 damage in the lamp circuit shall not cause interruption in
the operation of essential service;
.5 if connected to their own transformer.
Short-circuit protection or current limiting devices
shall be located as close as practicable to the terminals on the
supply side.
8.6.2 The voltage coils of apparatus and devices for

control and protection shall be protected against short-circuit
current, but they may have no protection of their own,
provided that the conditions specified below are met:
.1 the coils are enclosed with the device, are under overall
protection and belong to the control system of one
device;
.2 the coils are supplied from the supply feeder of that
device the protection of which is rated for current not
exceeding 25,0 A.
8.7 Protection of power electronics

8.7.1 Power electronics shall be protected against
exceeding of their current and voltage limits.

166 June 2018
c) hydraulic main and auxiliary steering gear systems.

9 STEERING GEARS, LATERAL 9.1.3.2 Electrical and electrohydraulic power unit shall be
THRUST PROPELLER SYSTEMS AND supplied via separate cable. The necessary fuse junctions and
ACTIVE RUDDER SYSTEMS, PUMPS, switchgear devices shall be housed in separate switch
FANS, ANCHOR AND MOORING containers. If installed together in switchboards, they shall be
suitably isolated from the feeder panels of other consumers.
MACHINERY
9.1.3.3 The systems shall be so designed that each drive
9.1 Steering gear unit can be put into operation either individually or jointly
from the wheelhouse. The feed for the remote control of the
9.1.1 General requirements motor switchgear shall be taken from the appropriate supply
9.1.1.1 In addition to the requirements of the present Rules, fuse.
steering gears shall comply with the requirements of the
9.1.3.4 Where a system is supplied from a battery, a
present Rules, Chapter I, Section 8 and applicable Sections of
voltage monitor shall be fitted which acts with a time delay to
the Rules, Part 2 – Hull and Hull Equipment, Chapter VI – trip a visual and audible alarm signal on the bridge if the
Hull outfitting. supply voltage drops more than 10%.
9.1.1.2 As a general principle, two steering gears, as
9.1.3.5 If the auxiliary steering gear is supplied from a
structurally independent as possible, shall be provided, i.e.:
battery, the latter shall be capable of sustaining the supply for
– 1 main and 1 auxiliary steering gear system; or 30 minutes without intermediate recharging.
– 2 main steering gear systems. 9.1.3.6 The changeover from the main to the auxiliary
9.1.1.3 The main steering gear system comprises all the steering gear system shall be able to be effected within 5
system components needed to steer the vessel under normal seconds.
design conditions. 9.1.3.7 Following a power failure, the steering gear drive
The auxiliary steering gear system generally systems shall automatically re-start as soon as the power
comprises equipment which, if the main steering gear system supply is restored.
malfunctions, is able to assume its duty with reduced or equal
capacity. 9.1.3.8 If the steering gear is operated only by electrically
driven power units or electrohydraulic power units, then at
9.1.2 Design features least one of the power units or rudder drives shall, in the
event of failure of the vessel’s network, be automatically
9.1.2.1 The rated output of the electrical machinery shall supplied by a battery until an auxiliary diesel set has been
be related to the maximum torque of the steering gear. For started and has taken over the power supply.
hydraulic steering gears, the rated output of the drive motors
shall be determined by reference to the maximum pump The battery is not required, in case that the standby
delivery against the maximum pressure produced by the auxiliary diesel set starts automatically and takes over the
steering gear (safety valve setting) with due allowance for power supply within 5 seconds after black-out.
pump efficiency. 9.1.3.9 Installations other than that described require the
The stalling torque of the motor shall equal at least Register’s special approval.
1,6 times the rated torque.
9.1.4 Protective equipment
Steering gear drive units shall comply at least with
the following modes of operation: 9.1.4.1 Circuits supplying the steering system according to
a) steering gears with intermitted power demand: the present Rules, Chapter I, 8.2.7.1 and 8.2.7.2 and their
control circuits shall be protected only against short circuits.
– S6: 25% for converters and motors of electro-
hydraulic steering gears; 9.1.4.2 Where fuses are used, their rated current shall be
– S3: 40% for motors of electromechanical steering two stages higher than that corresponding to the rated current
gears; of the motors. However, in the case of motors for intermittent
b) for steering gears with a constant power demand the service, the value shall not be greater than 160% of their
machines shall be designed for continuous service S1 (for rated current.
definition of service factor S, see IEC 60024). 9.1.4.3 Where power circuit breakers are used, their short-
9.1.2.2 With power-driven steering gears, the auxiliary circuit quick release device shall be set at not more than 10
drive shall be largely independent of the main drive so that a times the rated current of the electric drive motor.
failure in one system does not render the other one Thermal trips shall be disabled or shall be set to
inoperative. twice the rated current of the motor.
9.1.3 System requirements 9.1.4.4 Control circuits shall be fused for at least twice the
maximum circuit current rating. They shall be located on the
9.1.3.1 Systems may be differentiated as follows: load side of the main fuse of the electrical drive concerned.
a) hydraulically driven main steering gear with 9.1.4.5 The protective devices shall be coordinated in such
electrohydraulic auxiliary steering gear; a way that in the event of a fault, only the defective circuit is
b) electrohydraulic main steering gear comprising two disconnected while the supply to the intact circuits is
equivalent rudder drives; maintained.

June 2018 167
All non-earthed poles shall be fitted with fuses and 9.1.7 Auto pilot systems
shall be connected and disconnected simultaneously.
An indicator light showing that the auto pilot is
9.1.4.6 On relays and magnetic valves rectifiers or operative shall be installed.
capacitors in parallel shall be fitted to quench arcs. A failure of the control voltage and a deviation of
the rated rpm of the gyro shall trip a visual and audible alarm.
9.1.5 Indicating and monitoring equipment
The auto pilot system and its associated alarms shall be
9.1.5.1 As a general principle, separate indicators or supplied separately from each other.
monitors, as appropriate, shall be provided which respond to
the operative/inoperative state of the control circuits, a drop 9.1.8 Rudder angle indicator
in potential below the supply voltage (in the case of battery The actual position of the rudder shall be clearly
supply) and an inadmissible fall in the hydraulic oil level in indicated in the wheelhouse and at every steering station. In
the compensating tank. the case of electrical or hydraulic control systems, the rudder
9.1.5.2 A failure of the control voltage and any departure angle shall be indicated by a device (rudder angle transmitter)
from the limit values prescribed for safe operation shall trip a which is independent of the control system and actuated
visual and audible signal in the wheelhouse. It shall be either by the rudderstock itself or by parts rigidly connected
possible to cancel the audible signal. The cancellation of an to it.
audible alarm shall not prevent the signalling of a fault The system shall have a separate power supply and
affecting the other working parts of the steering gear systems. the indication shall be continuous.
Additionally installed transmitters for position indicators of
9.1.5.3 Operative signals and alarms: autopilot systems shall have a separate power supply and
a) 1 green indicator light each for the main and auxiliary shall be electrically isolated from the above mentioned
steering gears (or for each main steering gear, where system.
applicable) showing that the equipment is operative;
b) 1 red indicator light for the main and auxiliary steering 9.2 Lateral thrust propellers and active rudder
gears to signal a failure or a fault; systems
c) 1 red indicator light responding to a drop in potential of 9.2.1 General
10% below the rated network voltage. The signal
response shall be subjected to a time delay in order to The short-circuit protection of the supply shall
bridge voltage dips caused by starting operations (where conform to 9.1.4.
a system is supplied by a battery).
9.2.2 Drives
9.1.5.4 In addition, 3-phase alternating current systems
shall be provided with yellow indicator light signalling 9.2.2.1 Active rudder systems shall be rated for continuous
overload and phase failure. service (S1).
The phase failure monitor may be dispensed with if 9.2.2.2 Lateral thrust propeller systems shall be rated in
the system is supplied exclusively via power circuit breakers. accordance with the vessel’s operating conditions, but at least
The overload alarm may be dispensed with for drive systems for short-term duty (S2 - 30 min).
used exclusively for inching duty. The alarm may also be Lateral thrust propellers and active rudder systems
combined with other steering gear alarms. shall be protected against short circuits and overloads. The
Where bimetallic relays are used to signal overload protection shall be so designed that in the event of
overloading of the motors, these shall be set at 0,7 times the an overload a warning is first given followed by a reduction
rated current of the motor. of the output or the shutdown of the system should the
overload persist.
9.1.6 Rudder control
Motors for short-term duty shall be monitored for
9.1.6.1 It shall be possible to control the main and auxiliary critical winding temperature. An exceeding of temperature
steering gears from the main steering station. The controls limits shall be alarmed. If the maximum permissible
shall be so arranged that the rudder angle cannot be altered temperature is reached the output shall be automatically
unintentionally. reduced or the motor shall be switched off.
9.1.6.2 Where more than one power drive is installed, the 9.2.3 Monitoring
wheelhouse shall be provided with at least two mutually
independent steering gear control systems. 9.2.3.1 The wheelhouse shall be equipped with the
monitors and indicators described in 9.2.3.2 to 9.2.3.6.
Separate cables and lines shall be provided for
these control systems. 9.2.3.2 A blue indicator light signalling that the system is
The mutual independence of the steering gear operative.
control systems may not be impaired by the fitting of 9.2.3.3 A yellow indicator light for signalling an overload.
additional equipment such as autopilot systems.
9.2.3.4 Depending on the type of system, further indicators
9.1.6.3 A common selector switch shall be provided for shall be provided for signalling operational level and the
switching from one control system to another. desired direction of movement of the vessel.

168 June 2018
9.2.3.5 The controls of lateral thrust propeller systems shall that all these electrical motors could be stopped from not
take the form of pushbuttons or levers. The operating more than three positions.
direction shall correspond to the desired direction of
movement of the vessel. The electrical control system shall 9.5 Electrical drives for anchor and mooring
be fed from the supply to the main drive. machinery
9.2.3.6 Where fuses are used for short-circuit protection, a 9.5.1 In addition to the requirements of the present Part
phase monitor shall ensure that the system cannot be started of the Rules, the electrical drives of windlasses, anchor and
up in the event of a phase failure. mooring capstans and mooring winches shall comply with
the present Rules, Chapter I, Section 9.
9.3 Electrical drives for pumps
9.5.2 When alternating current squirrel-cage electrical
9.3.1 The electric motors of fuel oil and lubricating oil motors are used, the electrical drives of the anchor and
transfer pumps, as well as oil separators if any, shall be fitted mooring machinery shall ensure, after 30 minutes operation
with remote disconnecting devices located outside the spaces at the rated load, activating directly stalling of the electrical
of these pumps and outside the trunks of machinery spaces, motor in “on” position for at least 30 seconds for the anchor
but in close vicinity of exits from these spaces (see 8.9 and machinery and 15 seconds for the mooring machinery. For
the present Rules, Chapter I, 7.14.2.2). reconnecting stator winding motors, these requirements are
applicable to operation of the motor with the winding
9.3.2 The devices for switching off the electrical drives
producing maximum starting torque.
referred to in 9.3.1 shall be fitted in the enclosed boxes with
glass covers, located in conspicuous positions with The direct current electrical motors and alternating
explanatory inscriptions. In catamarans, these devices shall current wound-rotor motors shall withstand the above stated
be grouped separately for each hull. stalling conditions but at the torque twice that of the rated
value: in this case, the voltage may be below the rated value.
9.3.3 Local starting of fire and bilge pumps by starting After stalling condition the temperature rise shall
devices located adjacent to them shall be possible even in not exceed 130% of the permissible value.
case of failure in their remote control circuits.
9.5.3 In anchor and mooring capstans as well as in
9.4 Electrical drives for fans mooring winches, all speed steps intended only for mooring
operations shall be included into the overload protection of
9.4.1 The electrical motors for ventilation fans in
the electrical motor.
machinery spaces shall be provided with at least two
disconnecting switches. One of these switches shall be 9.5.4 The power supply of electric drives of anchor
located outside these machinery spaces and their casings, but capstans shall meet the requirements of 6.1.1 and 6.1.4.
in close vicinity of the exits from those spaces (see the
present Rules, Chapter I, 11.3.1.6). These disconnecting
switches are recommended to be positioned together with
similar switches referred to in 9.3.1.
9.4.2 The electrical motors for ventilation fans of cargo

holds and galley fans shall be provided with disconnecting
switches at locations readily accessible from the main deck,
but outside the machinery casings. Electrical motors of
forced exhaust ventilation from galley ranges shall be
additionally provided with a disconnecting switch located
inside the galley, regardless of the number of disconnecting
switches.
9.4.3 The electrical motors for the vessel’s general

ventilation shall be provided with at least two devices for
their remote disconnection with one of them located in the
wheelhouse and another one accessible from the open deck.
For vessels with the electrical installation of low power
(other than passenger vessels) it is permitted to use one
device of remote disconnection located in the wheelhouse or
in a place readily accessible from the main deck.
9.4.4 The electrical motors of fans in the rooms protected

by a fire-extinguishing system, shall be provided with a
disconnecting switch operating automatically when fire
extinguishing medium is discharged into the space (see the
present Rules, Chapter III, 5.3.3.2).
9.4.5 The disconnecting switches of the electrical motors

for fans referred above shall be so grouped on board vessel,

June 2018 169
10.2.2 Only waterproof heaters according to IEC 60335

10 ELECTRICAL HEATING AND may be used in washrooms, bathrooms and other damp
PREHEATING APPLIANCES spaces as well as in machinery spaces.
10.1 General requirements 10.3 Heating appliances
10.1.1 Only fixed type of electrical heating appliances 10.3.1 Electrical heating appliances intended for space
shall be permitted for use. heating shall be fixed and provided with thermal fuses
disconnecting the supply source when the temperature rise of
The use of portable, unsecured heating and cooking the enclosure exceeds the permissible limit.
appliances is not permitted except for appliances which are
under constant supervision when in use, e.g. soldering irons, 10.3.2 If a switch is not built in the heating appliance,
flat irons and appliances where special precautions are taken switching device shall be installed in the same room wherein
to prevent the build-up of heat to ignition temperature (e.g. this appliance is located. Switches shall disconnect
electric cushions and blankets). simultaneously all poles or phases.
10.1.2 Electrical heating and preheating appliances shall 10.4 Electrical equipment of heaters
be supplied from the main switchboard or from distribution
boards intended for this purpose and also from the lighting 10.4.1 Only heating elements with sheathed or ceramic
distribution boards complying with the requirements of the encased coils may be used.
11.5.1. To prevent the build-up of heat leading to excessive
temperature rises, every heater shall be equipped with
10.1.3 The supporting structural parts of electrical heating
thermal protection which interrupts the current as soon as the
appliances as well as the internal surfaces of enclosures, shall
maximum permissible heater temperature is exceeded.
be manufactured from non-combustible materials.
Automatic restarting shall be prevented.
10.1.4 Permissible current loss shall not exceed 1,0 mA
per 1,0 kW of rated power for each separately connected 10.4.2 Self-regulating material in heating elements may be
heating element or 10,0 mA for the appliance as a whole. dispensed with.
10.1.5 Electrical heating and preheating appliances shall 10.4.3 The operating switches shall disconnect all live
be so designed that the temperature of their components conductors when in the off position. The off position and the
which are handled by the personnel or which can be touched positions for the various operating levels shall be clearly
inadvertently does not exceed the values indicated in Table marked on the switches.
10.1.5-1.
10.4.4 Every space heater shall normally be connected to a
separate circuit. However, a number of small space heaters
Table 10.1.5-1 may be connected to a common circuit provided that their
Permissible temperatures total current input does not exceed 16¸,0 A.
Permissible 10.5 Electric ranges and cooking equipment

Specification
temperature
metallic 55°C 10.5.1 Electrical cooking appliances shall be so
Control handles and
constructed as to avoid possibility of cooking utensils being
other parts to be handled non-
65°C brought into contact with live parts and to prevent short
for long period of time metallic
circuits or damage to insulation due to liquid spilling or
The same, but where metallic 60°C
leakage.
short-time contact is non-
70°C
possible metallic 10.5.2 Only enclosed-type cooking plates may be used.
Enclosures of electric space heating
appliances at 20°C ambient 80°C 10.5.3 The switches of the individual cooking plates shall
temperature disconnect all live conductors when in the off position. The
Air coming out from a heating switch steps shall be clearly marked.
110°C
appliance into heated space Switches and other control elements shall be so
fitted that they are not exposed to radiant heat from the
10.1.6 The installation and use of electric heaters is not cooking plates or heating elements. The maximum
permitted in spaces where easily flammable gases or vapours permissible temperature limits specified in Table 10.1.5-1 are
may accumulate or in which ignitable dust may be deposited. applicable.
10.1.7 The enclosures of electrical heating appliances shall 10.6 Oil and water heaters
be so constructed as to prevent the possibility of any object
being placed upon them and air can circulate freely round the See the present Rules, Chapter I, 5.5.
heating elements.
10.2 Arrangement of heaters

10.2.1 For electrical heating appliances, the requirements
given in the present Rules, Chapter III, 2.1.8.1 apply.

170 June 2018
11.3 Mounting of lighting fixtures

11 LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS
11.3.1 All lighting fixtures shall be mounted in such a way
11.1 General requirements that combustible structural elements such as wood etc. will
not be ignited by the heat produced and the lighting fixtures
11.1.1 In all vessel’s rooms, spaces and locations where themselves are not exposed to damage.
the illumination is essential for safety of navigation, control
of machinery and gear devices as well as residence and 11.3.2 In bathrooms and shower rooms lighting fixtures
evacuation of passengers and crew, stationary main lighting shall be mounted in accordance with IEC.
fixtures shall be provided, which shall be supplied from the
main source of electric power. 11.4 Lighting in cargo holds
Where a lighting system is permanently installed,
11.1.2 Lighting likely to be exposed to more than ordinary
each final sub-circuit or each section shall be equipped with
risk of mechanical damage shall be protected against such
switches having clearly marked settings or with pilot lamps
damage or to be of a special robust construction.
showing whether the system is switched on. The switches
11.1.3 In rooms, spaces and locations with luminescent shall be located outside the holds in positions where they are
lamps where, machines and devices with visible rotating only accessible to authorized personnel.
parts are located, provisions shall be made to prevent The lighting fixtures shall be fitted with sufficiently
stroboscopic effect. robust wire guards or impact-resistant covers.
Their method of mounting shall ensure that they
11.1.4 Lighting appliances on open decks shall be so
cannot be damaged while work is in progress.
installed as not to impede the recognition of signal lights.
For explosion protection, see also 1.9.10 to 1.9.17.
11.1.5 In rooms and spaces illuminated with the discharge
lamps which do not ensure continuity of light at voltage 11.5 Power supply of main lighting circuit
variations according to Table 1.7-1, provision shall also be
made for lighting fixtures with incandescent lamps. 11.5.1 The distribution boards of the main lighting shall be
supplied by separate feeders from the main switchboard. The
11.1.6 Storage battery rooms and other spaces classified as main lighting distribution board may supply the electrical
hazardous, shall be illuminated with lighting fixtures located drives of non-essential consumers rated up to 0,25 kW as
in adjacent safe spaces through gastight windows or with the well as individual cabin heaters rated up to 10,0 A.
safe-type lighting fixtures located in these spaces (see 1.9.8).
11.5.2 The protective devices of lighting end circuits shall
11.1.7 The number of lamps and their distribution shall be be designed for a current rating not in excess of 16,0 A, the
such as to ensure satisfactory illumination. total load current of all the consumers connected, exceeding
not 80% of the rated current of the protective device.
11.2 Design of lighting fixtures The number of lighting fixtures supplied by end
11.2.1 Lighting fixtures shall have a base which reflects lighting circuits shall not exceed that referred to in the Table
and dissipates the heat produced by the light source. The 11.5.2-1.
mountings used shall provide a gap of at least 5,0 mm to Cabin fans and other minor appliances may be
allow cooling air to circulate between the base of the fixture supplied by end lighting circuits.
and a combustible surface to which it is fastened.
Table 11.5.2-1
11.2.2 The temperature of lighting fixtures should not The number of lighting fixtures
exceed 60°C where they can be touched easily.
11.2.3 Heat-resistant leads shall be used for the internal Maximum number of
Voltage
wiring of lamp-holders. lighting fixtures
up to 50,0 V 10
11.2.4 Metal lighting fixtures shall be fitted with an from 51,0 V to 120,0 V 14
earthing screw in the casing or base. All metal parts inside a from 121,0 V to 250,0 V 24
lighting fixture shall be conductively connected to each other.
The connecting terminals shall be directly fastened to the 11.5.3 When two or more lighting appliances are installed
lighting fixture. in an engine room or boiler room, they shall be distributed
between at least two circuits. This requirement shall also
11.2.5 Every lighting fixture shall be permanently marked apply to rooms where cooling machinery, hydraulic
with the maximum permissible wattage of the lamps to be machinery or electric motors are installed. The lamps shall be
fitted. so arranged that adequate lighting is maintained even if one
11.2.6 The lampholders fitted with screw caps shall be of the circuits fails.
such as to prevent the lamp from getting loose in service. No 11.5.4 Lighting fixtures and socket outlets in
switches are permitted to be fitted in lampholders. accommodation shall be supplied from the lighting
distribution board by separate feeders other than that intended
for supplying the common lighting fixtures.

June 2018 171
11.6 Emergency lighting system 11.7.5 The lighting switches for illumination of spaces
behind free-standing switchboards shall be installed near
11.6.1 At least the following places and stations shall be each access’s door behind such switchboards.
provided with sufficient emergency lighting:
.1 all corridors, stairways and exits from accommodation 11.7.6 Emergency lighting in the wheelhouse shall be
and service spaces; provided with a switch.
.2 machinery spaces and their exits and main sources of 11.8 Gas discharge lighting fixtures
electric power;
.3 all control stations, main and emergency switchboards; 11.8.1 Suppressers, condensers and other outfitting of gas
discharge lighting fixtures shall be protected by securely
.4 the space of emergency source of electric power, if any; earthed metal enclosures.
.5 wheelhouse;
.6 stowage locations for emergency and fireman's outfit and 11.8.2 Condensers of 0,5 and more µ F , shall be fitted with
manual fire discharging devices, which shall ensure that the voltage of
the condenser 1 minute after disconnection from supply does
extinguishers; not exceed 50,0 V.
.7 steering gear compartments;
11.8.3 Suppressers and transformers having a higher
.8 at fire and sprinkler pumps with control locations of their
inductively shall be installed as close as possible to the
motors;
lighting fixture they serve.
.9 places where collective life-saving appliances are stored,
handled and launched. 11.8.4 Gas discharge lamp installations supplied at over
250,0 V shall be provided with warning notices giving the
11.6.2 The main lighting fixtures may be used as voltage rating. All live parts of such installations shall be
emergency lighting fixtures if they are fed from the suitably protected.
emergency switchboard.
11.9 Socket outlets and plugs
11.6.3 The emergency lighting shall be so designed that a
fire or other casualty in the space containing the main source Socket outlets for portable lighting shall be
of electric power or lighting transformers if fitted, does not installed at least in the following places:
affect it. .1 on deck near the windlass;
11.6.4 Stationary lighting fixtures with built-in .2 in the steering compartment;
accumulators, automatically recharging from the main .3 in the emergency generator set compartment, if any;
lighting circuit and acting upon the failure in main lighting .4 in the propeller shaft tunnel;
system, may be used for emergency lighting.
.5 in the vicinity of winches:
11.6.5 Emergency lighting fixtures and lamps in .6 in machinery spaces;
accordance with 11.6.2 shall be marked in red. .7 behind the main switchboard;
11.6.6 The intensity of the emergency lighting shall be .8 in special electrical spaces;
prescribed by the Register. .9 in the wheelhouse;
11.7 Switches in lighting circuits .10 in spaces where centralized ventilation and air
conditioning installations are located.
11.7.1 Two-pole switches shall be used in all lighting
circuits. In dry accommodation and service spaces except 11.10 Navigation lights and signal lamps
wheelhouse, single-pole switches may be used in circuits of
11.10.1 Navigation lights means the masthead, side and
individual and group lighting fixtures with a total power
stern lights, and the lights visible from all sides, the blue
consumption of not more than 6,0 A, as well as in safety-
scintillating lights, yellow rapidly scintillating strong lights
voltage lighting fixtures.
for high-speed vessels and blue lights for the carriage of
11.7.2 Permanently installed vessel external lighting dangerous goods.
fixtures shall be provided with central switches located in the
11.10.2 For visual signals (marking) on vessels see CEVNI
wheelhouse or in any other permanently attended place
- European Code for Inland Waterways, Chapter 3 and Annex
situated on upper deck.
3.
11.7.3 The switches of lighting circuits of the fire-
11.10.3 Navigation lights, their casings and accessories
extinguishing (CO 2 ) storage spaces, shall be located outside
shall bear the approval mark prescribed by Directive
these spaces.
96/68/CE, as amended.
11.7.4 In emergency lighting circuits local switches shall
11.10.4 Switchboards for navigation lights and signal lamps
not be used for individual lighting fixtures, except in case
shall be installed in the wheelhouse and shall be clearly
they serve also as the main lighting fixtures in accordance
visible in all circumstances. They shall be supplied by a
with 11.6.2.
separate cable from the main switchboard or by two
independent secondary networks.

172 June 2018
11.10.5 A failure of the device according to 11.10.9 shall

not impair the operation of the navigation lights which it 12 INSTALLATION MATERIAL
monitors.
12.1 Design and mounting
11.10.6 Navigation lights shall be supplied, protected and
controlled separately from the navigation lights switchboard. 12.1.1 Installation appliances shall be adequately
protected against mechanical damage and shall be made of
11.10.7 The navigation lights switchboard may be enlarged corrosion-resistant materials.
to provide connections for other signal lamps. No other
consumers may be connected to this switchboard. Where appliances with casings of brass or other
copper alloys are fixed to aluminium surfaces, they shall be
11.10.8 Several signal lamps forming a functional unit and insulated from the latter to protect them against corrosion.
installed together at the same point may be jointly supplied,
controlled and monitored. The monitoring device shall be 12.1.2 Cable insertion nozzles of equipment must be
capable of identifying the failure of any one of these lights. It designed according to the cables to be connected and tailored
shall not be possible to use both light sources in a double to the types of cable used.
light (two lights mounted one above the other in the same 12.1.3 The space inside appliances shall be sufficient to
housing) simultaneously. enable insulated conductors to be connected without having
11.10.9 Current indicating lights or other equivalent to make sharp bends. Corners, edges and projections shall be
devices, such as repeater lights, for monitoring the navigation well rounded.
lights shall be installed in the wheelhouse unless that 12.1.4 Mobile appliances shall be provided with means of
monitoring can be performed direct from the wheelhouse. relieving tension in the cable so that the conductors are not
11.10.10 In wheelhouses designed for radar navigation by subjected to tensile load.
one person, repeater lights shall be installed on the control
12.2 Plug connections and switches
panel in order to monitor the navigation lights and the light
signals. Switches of navigation lights shall be included in the 12.2.1 The live contact components of sockets (outlets)
repeater lights or be adjacent to these and shall be clearly and plugs shall be so enclosed that they cannot be touched
assigned to them. under any circumstances, even during insertion of the plug.
The arrangement and colour of the repeater lights
for the navigation lights and light signals shall correspond to 12.2.2 The pin jacks of socket outlets shall be so
the actual position and colour of those lights and signals. constructed as to ensure permanent pressure in contact with
the plug pins.
The failure of a navigation light or light signal to
function shall cause the corresponding repeater light either to 12.2.3 Plugs with slotted pins are not permitted. The plug
go out or to provide a signal in another manner. pins for currents in excess of 10,0 A shall be cylindrically
shaped, solid or hollow.
11.10.11 Navigation lights shall be designed for the standard
voltages: 24,0 V, 110,0 V or 220,0 V. 12.2.4 Socket and plugs shall be so designed that it is not
possible to insert only one live contact pin into the socket or
11.10.12 The voltage at the lamp socket shall not
insert a live contact pin into the earthing contact or to change
permanently deviate by more than 5% above or below the
the sequence of phases or poles in case the motor direction of
standard voltages mentioned in 11.10.11.
rotation or the mode of operation of apparatus connected to
11.10.13 In vessels where the main source of power is a these socket depends on this sequence. When inserting the
storage battery and the main switchboard is installed in the plug into the socket, the earthing part of the plug shall make
wheelhouse the signal and navigational lights may be contact with the earthing part of the socket before connecting
supplied and controlled directly from the main switchboard. the live pins.
11.10.14 Signal and navigational lights shall be connected to 12.2.5 Socket rated at over 16,0 A shall be provided with
the supply circuit through a flexible cable with a plug built-in switches.
connector. Provision shall be made for interlocking such
sockets to prevent the plug being inserted or withdrawn when
11.10.15 The supply circuits of navigational lights shall be the socket switch is in the switched-on position.
two-wire system with a double-pole switch for each circuit
installed in the navigation lights distribution board. 12.2.6 Where a vessel is provided with sockets for a
variety of distribution systems differing in voltage or
frequency, use shall be made of sockets and plugs which
cannot be confused in order to ensure that an appliance
cannot be connected to a socket belonging to the wrong
system.
12.2.7 Socket shall be so constructed as to ensure the

required degree of mechanical protection regardless of
whether the plug is in or out of the socket.

June 2018 173
12.2.8 Wherever possible, appliances (sockets installed on

the open decks) shall be so designed and mounted that the 13 CABLES AND CONDUCTORS
plugs are inserted from down upwards.
12.2.9 Apart from the sockets standardized and
specifically approved for use in shipbuilding practice, 13.1.1 Cables used on board shall be of a type approved.
accommodation and day rooms may also be provided with Cables manufactured in accordance with the relevant
sockets designed for use on shore provided that they are recommendation of IEC Publication 60092 will be accepted
mounted in a dry position. by the Register provided that they are tested to satisfaction.
12.2.10 Only sockets with a permissible operating voltage 13.1.2 The requirements of this Chapter of the Rules do
in accordance with Table 1.11.2-1 are permitted in not apply to the coaxial cables, telephone cables and to power
washrooms and bathrooms. No sockets or switches may be cables designed for voltages above 1000,0 V.
fitted in shower cubicles, shower cabinets or close to The telecommunication, telephone and coaxial
bathtubs. Exempted from this requirement are razor sockets cables shall fulfil the requirements of IEC Publications:
with an isolating transformer. 60092-351, 60092-373, 60092-374, 60092-375, and 60331-
12.2.11 Switches shall simultaneously switch all non- 23. Optical fibre cables shall fulfil the requirements of IEC
earthed conductors within a circuit. Single-pole switches Publication 60331-25.
within non-earthed circuits are permitted in non-earthed 13.1.3 The voltage rating of a cable may not be less than
networks in lighting circuits of accommodation areas, except the rated working voltage of the relevant circuit.
in washrooms, bathrooms and other wet rooms.
13.1.4 Machines or equipment mounted on rubber or
12.2.12 The switching devices shall be installed in the spring vibration absorbers shall be connected via cables or
locations where concentration of gases, dust, water, vapours wires with sufficient flexibility.
and acid evaporations is excluded.
13.1.5 Cables shall be protected against any risk of
12.2.13 Switching devices provided with replaceable damage under normal operating conditions, in particular
contacts shall be such that the replacement of contacts is above decks and in the holds.
possible by means of standard tools without dismantling
switching device or its basic components. 13.1.6 Armoured cables or cables with an external metal
sheathing shall in no case be used for the supply of current to
12.2.14 No plug connections are normally to be provided in mobile equipment.
cargo holds.
Where power sockets are essential in special cases, 13.1.7 For electric cables on passenger vessels, see the
e.g. for supplying power to refrigerated containers, they shall Rules, Part 4 – Additional Requirements for Notations,
be supplied from their own sub-distribution boards with Chapter I, 4.2.10.
fused outlet switches which can be centrally disconnected
and are located outside the cargo holds. 13.2 Conductors
The sub-distribution boards shall be provided with 13.2.1 Cable conductors intended for supplying essential
devices indicating when they are live and which outlets are consumers shall be stranded (see also 13.8.1.2). Table 13.2.1-
connected/disconnected. 1 specifies the minimum required number of wires per
Sockets may only be installed at locations which conductor with respect to the nominal cross-sectional area.
give adequate protection against mechanical damage.
13.2.2 The mutual cross-position of two adjacent wires of
12.2.15 Sockets shall not be fitted in machinery spaces the conductor shall be displaced from one another by at least
below the plating and where approved safe-type equipment is 500,0 mm lengthwise. Such crossings shall not impair the
required. mechanical and electrical properties of the conductor.
12.2.16 Circuit boards and plug-in connections shall be 13.2.3 Particular wires of rubber-insulated copper
protected against unintentional mixing up. Alternatively they conductors shall be tinned or coated with suitable alloys.
shall be clearly marked to show where they belong. This requirement may be dispensed with, provided
the Register states, that the rubber insulation due to
12.2.17 In sockets, plugs and distribution boxes, no fuses
corresponding treatment does not affect adversely the metal
shall be installed.
of the conductor.
12.2.18 Switching device push buttons shall be so designed No tinning is required for conductors provided with
that they cannot be actuated accidentally. other types of insulation.

174 June 2018
13.4.3 Lead cable coverings shall be made of appropriate

Table 13.2.1-1 alloys in accordance with national standards. Pure lead
The minimum required number of wires coatings may be used only when they are covered with an
additional protective envelope.
Nominal Minimum permissible number of wires per
cross conductor Table 13.4.1-1
sectional area Tightened sector Coatings
Circular non-
of conductor, and circular
tightened conductors
[mm2] conductors Maximum
0,5 ÷ 6,0 7 – permissible service
Designation Type of coating
10 ÷ 16 7 6 temperature of
conductor, [°C]
25 ÷ 35 19 6
General purpose
50 ÷ 70 19 15 ST1 60
polyvinylchloride
95 37 15 Heat-resistant
120 ÷ 185 37 30 ST2 85
polyvinylchloride
240 ÷ 300 61 30 SE1 Polychloroprene 85
General note: Chlorosulfonated
S4 85
• The ratio between nominal diameters of two wires of polyethylene
mechanically tightened cable conductor shall not exceed
1:1,3, and for non-tightened geometrically formed wires 13.5 Protective sheathing
1:1,8.
13.5.1 Electrical protective sheathing shall consist of
13.3 Insulating materials braids made of copper wires. Where un-tinned copper wires
are used, they shall be protected additionally by suitable
The Table 13.3.1-1 specifies the insulating sheaths. Non-screening braids may be of galvanized steel
materials for cables and conductors. wires.
Application of other insulating materials is subject The braid shall be uniform and its density shall be
to special consideration by the Register on a case by case such that its mass is at least equal to 90% of the mass of the
basis. tube of equal diameter made of the same material and with a
wall thickness equal to the braid wire diameter.
Table 13.3.1-1
Insulating materials 13.5.2 Mechanical protective sheathing shall consist of
armour made of annealed steel wire or tape galvanised and
wound helically, with a suitable pitch, over the cable sheath
Permissible or an intermediate bedding over the sheath in such a way that
Type of Standard types of
conductor service a continuous cylindrical layer is formed to assure adequate
insulation insulating materials
temperature, [°C] protection and flexibility of the finished cable.
General purpose
PVC/A 60 At special request, the armour may be made of non-
polyvinylchloride
magnetic metals.
Heat-resistant
PVC/D 75
polyvinylchloride 13.5.3 Metal armour or braid made of steel wire or tape
Ethylene-propylene shall be protected against corrosion.
EPR 85
rubber
Cross-linked 13.5.4 Armour bedding shall be made of moisture resistant
XLPE 85 materials.
polyethylene
S95 Silicone rubber 95
13.6 Marking
13.4 Coatings
13.6.1 Rubber or polyvinylchloride-insulated cables for
13.4.1 Coatings of cables and conductors may be limit temperature exceeding 60°C, shall be marked in such a
manufactured of the following materials: manner as to clearly differ from all other cables.
.1 non-metallic materials as specified in Table 13.4.1-1; 13.6.2 Cable cores shall be marked with permanently
.2 lead; legible identifications.
.3 copper. In multi-core cables with cores arranged in several
Application of other materials is subject to special concentric layers, at least two adjacent cores in each layer
consideration by the Register on a case by case basis. shall be marked with different colours.
13.4.2 Cable coating shall be of uniform thickness, within 13.7 Conductor laying
permissible limits, throughout the length and shall envelope
13.7.1 Single-wire insulated conductors may be used for
the cable cores concentrically. The coating shall be
lighting and space heating and internal wiring of distribution
impervious covering tightly the protected cores.
boards and electrical devices.

June 2018 175
13.7.2 Non-insulated conductors and busbars are 13.8.1.5 Cables on diesel engines, heaters etc. liable to be
permitted only in internal parts of electrical devices. The exposed to high temperatures shall be routed so that they are
external installation of non-insulated wires and busbars shall protected against excessive external heating. If this is not
be permitted only if they are reliably protected. possible, oil-resistant cables with high heat resistance shall be
used. Cables not previously used shall be submitted to the
13.8 Cabling Register for approval before installation.
13.8.1 General requirements 13.8.1.6 In locations affected by the action of petroleum
products or other aggressive media, cables with sheathing
13.8.1.1 Cables shall be flame-retardant, self-extinguishing resistant to such media shall be used. Cables without such
and resistant to water and oil. In accommodation, the protection may be installed in such locations only, if laid in
Register may authorise the use of other types of cables, metallic pipes (see 13.8.7).
provided they are effectively protected, flame-retardant or
self-extinguishing. 13.8.1.7 In locations where cables may be exposed to
For determining that electric cables are flame- mechanical damage, the cables with appropriate protective
retardant, shall be recognized: armour shall be used. Cables without protective armour shall
be protected, in such locations by special covers or shall be
a) the requirements of European Standards series EN laid in the metallic pipes (see 13.8.7).
60332-1 and EN 60332-3 in the version in force on 6 July
2017; or 13.8.1.8 Cables which are laid in hazardous spaces shall be
b) equivalent regulations recognized by the Register. provided with one of the following armours:
The use of other cables, as well as conductors shall .1 copper armour or stainless steel armour (for cables with
be subject to special consideration by the Register (see mineral insulation);
13.8.7.7). .2 non-metallic sheathing with additional mechanical
protection for the detecting of earth connection;
13.8.1.2 Minimum cross-sections
.3 lead armour with additional mechanical protection.
The minimum cross-section of permanently laid
cables and wires in power, heating, lighting systems and 13.8.2 Determination of conductor cross-sections
control circuits for power plants shall be 1,0 mm2; in control
circuits of safety systems 0,75 mm2; in automation and 13.8.2.1 The sizes of cables and wires shall conform to the
telecommunication equipment 0,5 mm2; in details in Table 13.8.2-1 and Table 13.8.2-2, unless other
telecommunication systems not relevant to the safety of the conductor cross sections are necessitated by the permissible
vessel and for data bus/data cables 0,2 mm2. voltage drop for particular equipment items (see 13.8.2.2) or
by the elevated ambient temperature or by a special
Within accommodation and day rooms, flexible permissible working temperature (see also 13.8.1.4). See
leads with a conductor cross-section of 0,75 mm2 and over Table 13.8.1-1 for the correction factor.
may also be used for the mobile connection of appliances
with a current input of up to 6,0 A. 13.8.2.2 The cross-section of conductor wires shall comply
For power circuits supplying non-essential services, with the final permissible maximum temperature of
the cables with single-wire cores having cross-sectional area conductor wires (maximum permissible amperage) and
up to 1,5 mm2 may be used. permissible voltage drop. Such a drop between the main
switchboard and the least favourable point of the installation
13.8.1.3 In circuits with heavy inductive and capacitate shall not be more than 5% of nominal voltage for lighting and
loads, the cables intended for working voltage equal to twice more than 7% for power or heating installations.
the rated voltage of the circuit shall be used. However, the voltage drop on supply circuits from
13.8.1.4 Maximum permissible temperature for the batteries with voltages not exceeding 24,0 V may be
insulating material of the cable cores and conductors shall be permitted up to 10%.
at least 10°C higher than the expected ambient temperature. 13.8.2.3 When applying 13.8.2.2, reduced ventilation of
A correction factor indicated in Table 13.8.1-1 shall be shielded cables or cables in totally enclosed trunks has to be
applied to the permissible loading. taken into account.
Table 13.8.1-1 13.8.2.4 For navigation light circuits, the permissible

Correction factors for cables in higher ambient temperatures voltage drop may be limited to smaller values so as to ensure
the required lighting characteristics.
Maximum permissible Ambient temperature, [°C] At short-time service, e.g. at starting the electric
operating conductor motors, a greater voltage drop is permissible, provided it does
40 45 50 60 70 not adversely affect the work of the remaining electric
temperature
see Table consumers.
60°C 1,00 0,87 0,71 - -
13.8.2-1 13.8.2.5 Parallel cables may be calculated with the sum of
see Table their permissible loads and may be fused in common
85°C 1,00 0,94 0,89 0,74 0,57
13.8.2-2 provided that the current is equally shared between all the
parallel cables.
In every case, only cables of the same cross-
sectional area and length shall be used as parallel cables.

176 June 2018
Table 13.8.2-1
Current rating of cables with a maximum permissible conductor temperature of 60°C at an ambient temperature of 40°C
Short time service Short time service

Continuous service
Nominal cross-section S 2 = 30 minutes S 2 = 60 minutes
of the copper Maximum Maximum Maximum
Rated fuse Rated fuse Rated fuse
conductor, [mm2] permissible permissible permissible
current, [A] current, [A] current, [A]
Single core cables
1,0 9 10 10 10 10 10
1,5 14 16 15 15 15 15
2,5 19 20 20 20 20 20
4,0 26 25 28 25 28 25
6,0 34 36 36 36 36 36
10,0 46 50 49 50 49 50
16,0 62 63 66 63 66 63
25,0 82 80 87 80 87 80
35,0 101 100 108 100 107 100
50,0 126 125 136 160 134 160
70,0 156 160 171 160 165 160
95,0 189 160 217 224 202 200
120,0 219 224 251 250 234 224
150,0 251 250 294 300 271 250
185,0 287 250 353 315 311 300
240,0 337 315 420 − 371 −
300,0 388 355 500 − 435 −
Two core cables
1,0 8 6 9 10 9 10
1,5 11 10 12 16 12 16
2,5 17 16 18 20 18 20
4,0 22 20 23 25 23 25
6,0 29 25 31 25 31 25
10,0 39 36 41 36 41 36
16,0 53 50 60 63 56 63
25,0 70 63 83 80 75 80
Three or four core cables
1,0 6 6 7 10 7 10
1,5 9 10 10 10 10 10
2,5 14 16 15 16 15 16
4,0 18 20 19 20 19 20
6,0 24 25 25 25 25 25
10,0 32 36 36 36 34 36
16,0 43 36 50 50 46 50
25,0 57 50 70 63 60 63
35,0 71 63 88 80 75 80
50,0 89 80 115 100 100 100
70,0 109 100 151 125 125 125
95,0 132 125 194 200 161 160
120,0 153 160 234 225 161 200
5 to 24 core cables 1,5 mm2
5,0 8 6
7,0 7 6
10,0 6 6
12,0 6 6
14,0 6 6
16,0 6 6
19,0 5 4
24,0 5 4

June 2018 177
Table 13.8.2-2
Current rating of cables with a maximum permissible conductor temperature of 85°C at an ambient temperature of 40°C
Short time service Short time service

Continuous service
Nominal cross-section S 2 = 30 minutes S 2 = 60 minutes
of the copper Maximum Maximum Maximum
Rated fuse Rated fuse Rated fuse
conductor, [mm2] permissible permissible permissible
Single core cables
1,0 17 16 18 16 18 20
1,5 22 20 23 20 23 20
2,5 30 25 32 25 32 36
4,0 40 36 42 36 42 50
6,0 52 50 55 50 55 63
10,0 72 63 76 63 76 80
16,0 96 100 102 100 102 100
25,0 127 125 135 125 135 160
35,0 157 160 168 160 166 224
50,0 196 200 212 224 208 250
70,0 241 224 264 300 255 300
95,0 292 300 327 315 311 315
120,0 338 315 387 − 362 −
150,0 389 400 455 − 420 −
185,0 443 425 532 − 481 −
240,0 522 500 650 − 574 −
300,0 600 630 765 − 672 −
Two core cables
1,0 14 10 15 16 15 16
1,5 19 20 20 20 20 20
2,5 26 25 28 25 28 25
4,0 34 36 36 36 36 36
6,0 44 36 47 50 47 50
10,0 61 63 65 63 65 63
16,0 82 80 93 100 87 100
25,0 108 100 127 125 115 125
Three or four core cables
1,0 12 10 13 16 13 16
1,5 15 16 16 16 16 16
2,5 21 20 22 25 22 25
4,0 28 25 30 36 30 36
6,0 36 36 38 36 38 36
10,0 50 50 56 63 53 50
16,0 67 63 75 80 71 63
25,0 89 80 110 100 96 80
35,0 110 100 138 125 120 100
50,0 137 125 178 160 153 125
70,0 169 160 235 224 194 160
95,0 205 200 300 300 250 250
120,0 237 224 365 315 296 300
5 to 24 core cables 1,5 mm2
5,0 13 10
7,0 11 10
10,0 10 10
12,0 10 10
14,0 9 6
16,0 9 6
19,0 8 6
24,0 8 6

178 June 2018
13.8.3.9 Cables having insulating materials with different

13.8.2.6 Neutral conductors of 3-phase systems maximum-rated conductor temperatures shall not be bunched
The cross-section of neutral conductors of 3-phase together, or, where this is not practicable, the cables shall be
systems shall equal at least half that of the outer conductors. operated so that no cable reaches a temperature higher than
Where the cross-section of the outer conductors is 16,0 mm2 that permitted for the lowest temperature-rated cable in the
or less, the cross-section of the neutral conductor shall equal group.
that of the outer conductors.
13.8.3.10 The running of cables through areas with high
13.8.3 Installation of cables ambient temperatures should be avoided. If this is not
possible:
13.8.3.1 Cables shall be laid in runs which shall be straight
and accessible in such a manner that they are not exposed to a) the ambient temperatures must be taken into account
mechanical damage or oil, fuel, water and excessive external when determining the maximum permissible amperage;
heating. or
Cable runs shall be installed at a distance not closer b) the cable must be protected against damage by heat and
than 100,0 mm to source of heat. fire.
Cables shall not pass through a collision bulkhead. Sources of heat such as boilers, hot pipes etc. shall
be by-passed to avoid exceeding the permissible end
Cables from an emergency electric power source to temperature of the cable conductors. Where this is not
consumer equipment must be laid as far as possible in the possible, the cables shall be shielded from radiant heat.
safe area.
13.8.3.11 Cables with different protective sheathings, the less
13.8.3.2 Cables from generators and all cables going out resistant of which may be damaged, shall not be laid in
from the main or emergency switchboard up to the common ducts, pipes or conduits without being adequately
distribution boards or the power consumers themselves shall fastened.
be laid undivided and in a single length. The same applies to
all connecting cables in essential systems. Exemptions are 13.8.3.12 Cables of the electrical propulsion plant motors
subject to the Register’s express approval (e.g. for vessel shall be laid separately from the cables of lower voltage or
extensions or barrier containers at the movable cable loop for another purpose.
below the wheelhouse).
13.8.3.13 If equipment is fed by two separate cables, these
For elastically mounted machinery and equipment, cables shall be laid in separate runs as far apart as possible in
adequate freedom of movement shall be ensured by horizontal and vertical direction.
compensation bends.
13.8.3.14 When cables are laid in ducts or other structures of
13.8.3.3 No cables shall be installed at a distance less than combustible materials the ways of cable laying shall be
50,0 mm from the double bottom and from the fuel and oil protected against ignition by means of linings, coatings or
tanks. Cable runs shall be laid at a distance not less than 20,0 impregnation.
mm from the shell plating and decks as well as from
fireproof, watertight and gaslight bulkheads. 13.8.3.15 Cables in refrigerated spaces shall be provided with
protective sheath of metal, polychloroprene rubber or other
13.8.3.4 Where cables are laid in bunches, special material resistant to the cooling agent. When cables are
provisions shall be taken to prevent fire spread over cable provided with metal sheathing, it shall be adequately
runs. Cables having protective coverings which may damage protected against corrosion.
the coverings of other cables shall not be bunched together
with those other cables. 13.8.3.16 When laying the cables, the cable bending radius
shall be in accordance with Table 13.8.3-1.
13.8.3.5 Cables laid in bunches shall be tested in accordance
with the IEC 332-3. Table 13.8.3-1
13.8.3.6 Cables provided with metallic sheath may be Minimum internal radius of curvature
installed on light metal structures or be fastened by means of
light metal cable clips only if reliable anticorrosive protection Cables without
is foreseen. Outer diameter D Cables with metal
metal sheath or
of cable, [mm] sheath or braid
braid
13.8.3.7 No cable runs shall be laid through the cargo spaces
intended for carriage of dangerous goods. However, if this D ≤ 25,0 4∙D 6∙D
cannot be avoided, each particular case shall be subject to D ˃ 25,0 6∙D 6∙D
special consideration by Register.
13.8.3.17 Cables installed across expansion joints in the hull
13.8.3.8 No cables shall be installed under the machinery structure shall be provided with expansion loops having a
space flooring. If this cannot be avoided, cables shall be laid radius adequate for such a joint. The inside diameter of a loop
in metallic pipes or in closed conduits (see 13.8.7). shall not be less than 12 times the outside diameter of the
cable.
13.8.3.18 Cables and earthling conductors of the equipment
mounted on shock absorbers shall be so installed that they
cannot be damaged in service.

June 2018 179
13.8.3.19 Main and emergency power supply cables must not 13.8.5 Cables penetrating decks, bulkheads and
run through the same room. The Register may waive this elements of vessel structure
requirement if:
13.8.5.1 Where cables pass through bulkheads or decks, the
a) main and emergency power supply cables are laid as far cable penetrations shall not impair the mechanical strength,
apart from each other as possible; or water tightness and required fire protection properties (e.g.
b) the emergency power supply cables are fire-resistant. non-combustible, flame-retardant, fire-resistant) of the
This requirement shall have been fulfilled if they satisfy bulkheads and decks concerned. Penetrations through
the requirements of the International Standards series IEC watertight, gastight and fire bulkheads as well as decks shall
60331 in the version in force on 6 July 2017. be sealed.
13.8.3.20 Cables connected to vertically movable 13.8.5.2 When installing the cables through non-tight
wheelhouses shall be sufficiently flexible and shall have bulkheads or elements of vessel’s structure less than 6,0 mm
insulation with sufficient flexibility down to –20°C and thick, the penetrations of cables shall be fitted with linings or
resistance to steam and vapour, ultraviolet rays and ozone. rings to protect cables from damages.
For cables, the requirements given in the present Where bulkheads or vessel’s structure are more
Rules, Chapter I, 12.2.4 and 12.2.5 apply. than 6 mm thick, no linings or rings shall be required, but the
edges of holes shall be rounded.
13.8.4 Fastening of cables
Where rectangular holes are cut in bulkheads or
13.8.4.1 Cables shall be adequately fastened by means of elements of vessel’s structure, the corners shall be filleted.
clips, holders, hangers etc. manufactured of metal or other
13.8.5.3 Cables penetrating the decks shall be protected
non-combustible or flame-retardant material. Other
against mechanical damages to a height of 700,0 mm above
established fastenings approved by the Register may also be
the deck and where such damages are not likely to occur, to a
used.
height of 200,0 mm.
The fastener surface shall be sufficiently wide and
Cable penetrations shall be sealed with adequate
shall have no sharp edges.
cable compound.
The fasteners shall be so tightened that the cables
When installing individual cable sealing gland may
are securely fastened without damage to their outer protective
be used instead of cable compound.
coverings. Clips used for mineral-insulated copper-sheathed
cables shall be made of copper alloy if in electrical contact 13.8.5.4 When setting up cable harness penetrations, the fire
with the cable-sheath. protection properties of the partition must not be impaired.
This shall be deemed to be met if the cables meet the
13.8.4.2 Cables shall be fastened in such a way that any
provisions of the European Standard series EN 60332-3 in
tensile loads are kept within the permissible limits. This is
the version in force on 6 July 2017 or one of the rules
particularly applicable to cables with a small cross-section
recognized as an equivalent by the Register. If this is not the
and to those installed in vertical trays or vertical ducts.
case, fire stop equipment must be provided in the
13.8.4.3 Cables shall be so fastened that mechanical strains penetrations for long cable harnesses (more than 6,0 m
in cables are not transmitted to their inlets or connections. vertical and 14,0 m horizontal) if the cables are not
completely enclosed by cable ducts.
13.8.4.4 Cable trays and cables installed parallel to shell
plating, shall be fastened to vessel’s structure and not to shell 13.8.6 Cable compounds and packing
plating.
13.8.6.1 To fill up cable boxes in watertight bulkheads and
On watertight bulkheads and masts, cables shall be decks, the packing compounds shall be used which have good
fastened on special supports such as tray plates, bridges etc.
adhesion to the inside surfaces of cable boxes and cable
13.8.4.5 Cables running parallel to bulkheads subject to sheaths are resistant to action of water and oil products and
sweating shall be installed on bridges or perforated trays in which shall not shrink and be liable to cracking, also which
such a manner that free space is available between cables and shall ensure their tightness.
bulkheads.
13.8.6.2 Packings of cable penetrations through fire resisting
13.8.4.6 Cable trays shall be installed with a minimum bulkheads shall comply with the requirements for standard
number of crossings. fire tests specified for the given type of bulkhead in the
present Rules, Chapter III - Fire protection, detection and
Where cables cross each other, bridges shall be
extinction.
used, so that a distance of not less than 5,0 mm is left
between the bridge and the cable tray crossing it over. 13.8.7 Installation of cables in pipes and conduits
13.8.7.1 Metallic pipes and conduits wherein cables are laid
shall be protected from corrosion on the inside and the
outside surfaces. The inside surface shall be even and
smooth. Their ends shall be machined so that no damage is
caused to the cables when they are drawn through. Cables
with lead armour, without additional protective covering,
shall not be drawn through pipes or conduits.

180 June 2018
13.8.7.2 The pipe and conduit bending radius shall not be 13.8.8.4 Cables may be connected at places of tapping only
smaller than the permissible bending radius for cables of the within the distribution boxes by means of terminals.
largest diameter installed in them, in accordance with
13.8.3.16. 13.8.8.5 If during the installation of cables it appears
necessary to make additional connections, these shall be
13.8.7.3 The total cross-sectional area of all cables laid in affected in suitable distribution boxes fitted with terminals
pipe or conduit, measured on their outside diameters, shall and protected against harmful influence from outside.
not exceed 40% of the inside cross-sectional area of the pipe The application of other equivalent cable jointing
or conduit. and connection is subject to special consideration by the
13.8.7.4 The pipes and conduits shall be mechanically and Register on a case by case basis.
electrically continuous and reliably earthed if the earthing has
13.8.9 Special requirements for alternating current
not been already ensured by the pipe or conduit mode of
single-core cables
installation.
13.8.9.1 Alternating current single-core cables are not
13.8.7.5 The pipes and conduits shall be installed in such a
recommended. When however their use cannot be avoided,
manner that no water can accumulate therein. If this is not
they shall comply with the following requirements:
possible, ventilation holes shall be provided in the pipes and
conduits, as far as possible, in the highest and lowest points, .1 cables shall not be armoured with magnetic material;
so that air circulation is ensured and vapour condensation is .2 cables belonging to the same circuit shall be laid within
prevented. the same tray or pipe.
The holes shall be permitted only where they do not The cables may be laid in different pipes only in case
enhance the danger of explosion or fire. pipes of non-magnetic materials are used;
13.8.7.6 Cable pipes and conduits installed alongside .3 cable clamps shall include all the single core-cables of a
vessel’s hull which can be damaged due to the hull circuit, unless they are made of non-magnetic material;
deformation shall be provided with compensation facility. .4 cables shall be laid closely to each other and if they shall
be spaced in order to avoid heating, the distance between
13.8.7.7 If in accordance with 13.8.1.1 the cables with
them shall not be greater than one cable diameter.
combustible coverings may be used, these cables shall be
installed in metallic pipes over their total length. 13.8.9.2 Where single-core cables pass through bulkheads
and decks, there shall be no magnetic material between
13.8.7.8 Non-metallic ducting or conduit shall be of flame-
cables belonging to the same circuit.
retardant material. PVC conduit shall not be used in
refrigerated spaces or on open decks, unless specially The clearance between the cables and the magnetic
approved. material shall not be less than 75,0 mm.
13.8.8 Connection and prolongation of cables 13.8.9.3 When single-core cables having a current rating
over 250,0 A are laid along the steel structures, the clearance
13.8.8.1 Terminations and connections of all conductors between such cables and the structure shall be at least 50,0
must be designed so that the original electrical, mechanical, mm.
fire protection properties (e.g. non-combustible, flame-
retardant and fire-resistant) of the cable are preserved. This 13.8.9.4 When laying single-core cables of 30,0 m in length
requirement shall have been fulfilled if the terminations and and over with cross-section over 185,0 mm2, crossings of
the connections meet: cables shall be inter changed at distances not exceeding 15,0
m.
a) the International Standard IEC 60092-352:2005 number
3.28 in conjunction with Annex D of the Standard; or 13.8.9.5 Multicore cables with cores connected in parallel
b) equivalent regulation or Standard recognized by the shall be laid as single-core cables and all the requirements for
Register. single-core cables apply to this case.
The number of cable connections must be restricted 13.8.10 Cable ends
to a minimum.
13.8.10.1 The ends of all conductors or cross-sectional area
For repaired or replaced cables, sentence 1 shall greater than 4,0 mm2 shall be fitted with soldering sockets,
have been fulfilled if the cable connections comply with compression type sockets or mechanical clamps. Corrosive
International Standard IEC 60092-352:2005 number 3.28 in fluxes shall not be used.
conjunction with annex D of the Standard, or rules
recognized by the Register as being equivalent. 13.8.10.2 Cables having a hygroscopic insulation (e.g.
mineral insulated) shall have their ends sealed against ingress
13.8.8.2 Ends of rubber insulated cables, mineral insulated of moisture.
cables and those with metal armour when prolonged, shall be
so packed as to prevent moisture penetration inside the
cables.
13.8.8.3 Protective covering of cables inserted into a device,
apparatus or distribution box shall enter not less than 10,0
mm inside.

June 2018 181
14.2.2 If a main electric propulsion system is equipped

14 ELECTRICAL PROPULSION with only one propulsion engine and if the vessel has no
SYSTEMS additional propulsion system that ensures sufficient
propulsion power, the main electric propulsion system must
14.1 Definitions be designed in such a way that after a failure in the power
electronics or in the regulation and control, the vessel is still
14.1.1 Propulsion system capable of making steerageway under own power.
Propulsion system is a unit comprising an energy 14.2.3 In addition to the documentation according to
source (engine, generators, and battery/accumulator) 1.3.11, it is necessary to carry an overview of the electrical
including power electronics, gearbox, shaft, propeller, etc. system on board, stamped by the Register, which also
employed to generate movement of a vessel, an installation or contains the installation locations of the main components
equipment. and the electrical service rooms.
14.1.2 Electric vessel propulsion system 14.2.4 If the electric propulsion engines are fed by
batteries or accumulators, their capacity must be monitored
Electric vessel propulsion system is either a purely
and displayed. It must be ensured that the capacity of the
electric or diesel-electric or gas-electric vessel propulsion
batteries or accumulators shall enable the safe reaching of a
system, which is operated either by its own power supply or
berth under the vessel’s own power at all times and under all
by the on-board network. In the case of diesel-electric or gas-
conditions.
electric vessel propulsion system, this term refers solely to
the electrical components of the propulsion system in In the event of a drop of the capacity to the
question. minimum residual capacity required pursuant second
sentence, an alarm shall be triggered and displayed in the
14.1.3 Main electric propulsion system wheelhouse.
Main electric propulsion system is a vessel’s main 14.2.5 If, as concerns the electrical vessel propulsion
propulsion unit comprising at least one electric propulsion system, we are talking about gas or diesel electric propulsion,
engine. the electrical components must not negatively affect the gas,
or diesel engines.
14.1.4 Auxiliary propulsion system
Auxiliary propulsion system is an additional 14.2.6 A malfunction of the electric vessel propulsion
propulsion unit of a vessel that is not the main propulsion system shall not obstruct the operation of the vessel such that
unit. This also includes any bow thruster propulsion system. the emergency systems provided for in accordance with this
Section, in particular the steerageway under its own power or
14.1.5 Electric propulsion engine the emergency electric power supply, are affected.
Electric propulsion engine is an electric engine to 14.2.7 Two electric vessel propulsion systems can only be
propel the propeller shaft or the shaft of comparable deemed independent if the electric propulsion engine power
equipment such as water jet propulsion systems. supply circuits are completely separate from one another or if
an FMEA-S (Failure Mode Effects Analysis) safety study
14.1.6 Electrical service room demonstrates that no failure of one electric propulsion system
Electrical service room is a room in which impairs the operation of the other.
components of an electric propulsion system such as control
14.2.8 Diesel engines shall conform to the requirements of
cabinets or electric engines are located, and which is not a
the present Rules, Chapter I, Section 2.
main engine room or engine room.
14.2.9 The cable network for electrical propulsion systems
14.1.7 Accumulator
shall comply with the requirement of Section 13 (see
Accumulator is a rechargeable storage device for 13.8.3.12). If there is more than one propulsion unit, the
electrical energy on an electro-chemical basis. cables of any one unit shall, as far as is practicable, be run
over their entire length separately from the cables of the other
14.1.8 Battery units.
Battery is a non-rechargeable storage device for 14.2.10 In the electrical vessel propulsion system, the
electrical energy on an electro-chemical basis. voltage levels not exceeding the values referred to in Table
1.11.2-1 are permitted.
14.2 General requirements for electric vessel
propulsion systems 14.2.11 Electrical heating is recommended to be fitted in
the electrical service room (see 3.1.5).
14.2.1 Vessel’s main electric propulsion systems must
consist of at least two generating sets (gas or diesel engine 14.3 Generators, transformers and switchgear
and generator) or two electric power sources (accumulators), for electric vessel propulsion systems
switchgear, an electric propulsion engine and the steering
positions and, depending on the design of the system, the 14.3.1 The generators, transformers and switchgear must,
corresponding power electronics. according to their application and operating conditions, be
designed for:

182 June 2018
a) temporary overloads; and of the cooling system, an alarm shall be triggered and
b) the effects of manoeuvres. displayed in the wheelhouse.
14.3.2 The diesel or gas regulator of diesel or gas engines 14.5.4 Excitation circuits, the failure of which can
for electric propulsion systems must ensure safe operation endanger safe operation, may only be protected against short
over the entire speed range and for all sailing and circuits.
manoeuvring conditions in single and parallel operation. If a
generating set fails, there must be an automatic reduction in 14.6 Measuring, indicating and monitoring
power so that the main electric propulsion system continues equipment
with reduced power such that the vessel is still capable of
14.6.1 General
making steerageway under its own power.
Failures in measuring, indicating and monitoring
14.3.3 The generating sets must be designed so that they equipment shall not cause a failure of control and regulating.
can record the reverse power occurring during reversing
manoeuvres when considering the system concept. 14.6.2 Measuring equipment and indicators
14.3.4 Generators must be capable of being switched on 14.6.2.1 Electric propulsion motors and generators shall be
and off without interrupting electric main propulsion. provided with at least the measuring equipment and
indicators at control stations in compliance with 14.6.2.2 and
14.3.5 Generators may be used for supplying auxiliary 14.6.2.3.
electrical machines and devices, provided, voltage and
frequency stability can be assured under all running 14.6.2.2 At local control station:
conditions including those of manoeuvring in compliance – ammeter and voltmeter for each supply and each load
with Table 1.7-1. component;
– ammeter and voltmeter for each exciter circuit;
14.4 Electrical propulsion engines for electric
– revolution indicator for each shaft;
vessel propulsion systems
– electrical propulsion system ready for switching on;
14.4.1 Electric propulsion engines for electric vessel – electrical propulsion system ready for operation;
propulsion systems must, according to their application and
operating conditions, be designed for: – electrical propulsion system disturbed;
a) temporary overloads; and – power reduced;
b) the effects of manoeuvres. – control from the wheelhouse;
– control from the local control station.
14.4.2 Electric propulsion engines shall be designed in
such a way that harmonics of currents and voltages do not 14.6.2.3 At main control station in the wheelhouse:
impair their safe operation. – revolution indicator per shaft;
– indication of the power remaining available for the
14.4.3 The insulation of the windings must be designed for
electrical propulsion system in relation to the total
overvoltages, which can occur due to manoeuvres and
available vessel’s main power: the indication of
switching operations.
remaining power may be omitted in the case of power
14.4.4 Force-cooled electric propulsion engines must be management system;
dimensioned so that a limited operation is possible if the – electrical propulsion system ready for switching on;
forced cooling fails, sufficient at a minimum for movement – electrical propulsion system ready for operation;
under the vessel’s own power.
– electrical propulsion system disturbed;
14.4.5 Electric propulsion engines must withstand a short- – power reduced;
circuit at their terminals and in the system without damage
– request to reduce;
under rated operating conditions until the protective device is
triggered. – control from the wheelhouse;
– control from the local control station.
14.5 Power electronics for electric vessel
propulsion systems 14.6.3 Monitoring equipment
14.5.1 The power electronics requirements according to 14.6.3.1 The operating state of the electric vessel propulsion
the Section 15 shall apply with the following provisions. system and its principal components shall be displayed in the
wheelhouse and at the place in the propulsion system.
14.5.2 Power electronics must be designed for the 14.6.3.2 If the control system in the wheelhouse fails the
anticipated loads, including overload and short circuit, during monitoring and operation of the main electric propulsion
all operating and manoeuvring conditions. system must be possible on-site. The crew must be able to
14.5.3 If power electronics are force-cooled, they must be switch within a reasonably short time without having to make
able to continue operating with reduced power, ensuring that changes to the propulsion system and propeller speed and
the vessel is capable of making steerageway under own direction. A voice communication system must be provided
power, if their cooling system fails. In the event of a failure to the wheelhouse.

June 2018 183
14.6.3.3 The operating conditions and operation of the c) the power stored in components and in the load circuit
electrical vessel propulsion system, including the response of cannot have a detrimental impact when they are switched
the protective device, shall be documented in a non-volatile off.
computer memory such that the fault can be readily analysed
in a verifiable manner. 14.8.8 The triggering of protective, reducing and alarm
devices must be displayed visually and audibly in the
14.7 Control and regulation wheelhouse and at a suitable position of the vessel. The
display must be reset only after acknowledgement. An alarm
14.7.1 To protect the on-board network from being condition must remain visible even after the shutdown.
overloaded, provision shall also be made for:
a) an automatic shutdown of the electrical equipment not 14.9 Testing of the propulsion system
relating to personal safety or safe navigation; and
14.9.1 The test concept envisaged by the manufacturer
b) where required, additional automatic power limitation of must be submitted to the Register before being put into
the electric propulsion engines. service for the first time. The latter may demand additional
testing and proof confirming the safe operation of the electric
14.7.2 The provisions of the present Rules, Chapter I, vessel propulsion system and its functions. This applies in
1.2.7.4 apply by analogy. particular to those instances where the vessel is required to be
14.7.3 In the event of individual propulsion units being capable of making steerageway under its own power in the
shut down as a result of an automatic power limitation, the event of malfunctions. The test concept accepted by the
propulsion asymmetry shall be kept to a minimum. Register is deemed to be a manufacturer’s instructions as
construed by 14.9.2.
14.8 Protection of the propulsion systems
14.9.2 The testing of the electric propulsion systems must
14.8.1 The automatic switching off of the electric vessel be carried out by a Surveyor of the Register according to the
propulsion system, which would affect the manoeuvrability manufacturer’s instructions:
of the vessel, must be restricted to malfunctions that would a) before being put into service for the first time;
result in significant damage within the system (see the b) before being put back into service after any major
present Rules, Chapter I, 1.2.7.3 and 1.2.7.4). modification or repair;
14.8.2 Protective devices must be set so that it is not c) on every periodical inspection.
triggered in the event of loads referred to in 14.4.1. An inspection attestation shall be issued, signed by
a Surveyor and showing the date of the inspection. The
14.8.3 If an actual or reference value is lost: inspection attestation must be permanently kept on board.
a) the propeller speed must not increase to inadmissible
levels; 14.9.3 Shaft material for generators and electric
b) the propulsion system must not reverse of its own accord; propulsion engines
c) no other dangerous operating condition must arise. Tests of steel and iron materials, shall be made by a
shaft material test as for vessel’s shafting (see the present
14.8.4 If electric vessel propulsion systems can be Rules, Chapter I, 3.1.3). The testing of other important
mechanically locked uncontrollably, they must be equipped forgings and castings for electrical propulsion systems, e.g.
with a monitoring device which shall protect the electric rotors and pole shoe bolts, shall be agreed with the Register.
vessel propulsion system against damage.
14.9.4 Dock trial
14.8.5 Each electric propulsion engine shall be fitted with:
For scope and extent of dock trials, see 17.3.9.
a) earth fault monitoring;
b) differential protection or equivalent protective device; 14.9.5 River trial
and
For river trial programme, see 17.4.2.
c) winding temperature monitoring system with an alarm
trigger at inadmissible high winding temperatures. 14.10 General requirements for auxiliary
propulsion systems with power electronics
14.8.6 The following additional protective devices must be
provided: 14.10.1 An auxiliary propulsion system with power
a) overspeed protection; electronics for speed control shall comprise of minimum
b) protection against overcurrent and short circuit; switchgear, an electric propulsion engine and the
corresponding power electronics.
c) protection against harmful bearing currents on the electric
propulsion engine by means of steep voltage edges. 14.10.2 In addition to the power electronics requirements
according the Section 15, the requirements of 14.11. shall
14.8.7 It must be ensured when protective devices are also apply.
triggered that:
a) the power is reduced or malfunctioning subsystems are
selectively switched off;
b) propulsion systems are shut down in a controlled manner;

184 June 2018
14.11 Protective devices for auxiliary propulsion

systems with power electronics 15 POWER ELECTRONICS
14.11.1 The power electronics components must be 15.1 General requirements
protected against exceeding their current and voltage limits.
15.1.1 Definition
14.11.2 Semiconductor fuses must be monitored. In the
event of a failure, the auxiliary propulsion shall be switched Power electronics: an installation, appliance,
off if necessary in order to avoid consequential damage assembly or device for converting electrical energy with
having regard to the safe operation of the vessel. switching electronic devices or a system comprised thereof.
14.11.3 The triggering of protective devices must be 15.1.2 A separate device for disconnecting from the mains
indicated by an alarm signal in the wheelhouse and on the must be provided for each power electronics system. The
protective devices. The provisions of 14.8.7 shall also apply. combination fuse - switch may be used for consumer
equipment up to a nominal current of 315,0 A. In all other
cases, a circuit-breaker must be provided on the network side.
15.1.3 The power electronics should be readily accessible

for repairs and measurements. Appropriate devices must be
provided for checking functions and detecting malfunctions.
15.1.4 Control and signal electronics must be galvanically

separated from power circuits.
15.1.5 Converter systems must ensure safe operation even

with the largest permissible voltage and frequency
fluctuations. For impermissibly high frequency and/or
voltage variations in the supply voltage, the system must
switch itself off or remain in a safe operating condition.
15.1.6 Electric charges in assemblies should be reduced to

a voltage below 50,0 V in less than 5 seconds after
disconnecting from the network. If longer discharge times are
required, a warning sign must be affixed to the device.
15.1.7 The failure of external control signals, must not

lead to a dangerous condition.
15.1.8 Power electronics must be designed and installed in

such a way that the failure of control voltages cannot lead to
threats or damage to the system or device where the power
electronics is installed, or to the overall system.
15.1.9 In installation which is required for propulsion and

manoeuvrability as well as safety of the crew, vessel or
cargo, components must be provided for monitoring the
individual power electronic assemblies and subsystems in
order to facilitate error detection in the event of a malfunction
and prevent the existence of undetected errors.
15.1.10 The monitoring of the power electronics must

detect errors with certainty and prevent them from remaining
unrecognized.
15.1.11 Except for components, only power electronics that

have undergone type examination may be used. If the power
electronics feature protective and monitoring devices, the
examination must also include proof of the response
thresholds and coordinated interaction of all protective and
monitoring equipment. The type examination report shall be
included with the system documentation.
15.1.12 For protection of power electronics, the

requirements of 8.7 apply.
15.2 Cooling
15.2.1 Natural cooling shall be preferred.

June 2018 185
15.2.2 A comparable level of safety in operation shall be Service equipment intended to be fitted to internal
proved for liquid cooling and forced cooling. combustion engines or steering apparatus shall be tested
as follows:
15.2.3 An impairment of cooling shall not result in – f = 2,0 to 25,0 Hz;
unacceptable over temperatures. To prevent this, an over
temperature alarm shall be provided. a = ± 1,6 mm (amplitude a = 1/2 the vibration width);
– f = 25 Hz to 100 Hz;
15.3 Test conditions for electronic installations acceleration ± 4 g.
15.3.1 General The sensors intended to be installed in internal
combustion engine exhaust pipes may be exposed to
15.3.1.1 The test conditions in 15.3.2 shall apply only to considerably higher stresses. Account shall be taken of
electronic equipment that are necessary for the steering this during the tests.
system and the vessel’s propulsion machinery, including their f) The electromagnetic compatibility test shall be carried
ancillaries. out on the basis of European Standards EN 61000-4-
15.3.1.2 Power electronics equipment shall be individually 2:2009, EN 61000-4-3:2010, EN 61000-4-4:2012, at test
tested at the manufacturer’s works. A Works test report (EN degree number 3.
10204, type 2.2) shall be rendered on the tests carried out. g) Proof that the electronic equipment is adequate for these
Essential equipment from 50,0 kW/kVA upwards shall be test conditions shall be provided by their manufacturer. A
tested in the presence of the Register. certificate by the Register is also considered as a proof.
15.3.1.3 For testing of power electronics, see 17.3.5.
15.3.2 Test conditions

a) The stresses arising from the following tests shall not
cause electronic equipment to be damaged or to
malfunction. The tests in accordance with relevant
International Standards, such as IEC 60092-504:2016,
apart from the cold-condition test, shall be carried out
with the equipment switched on. These tests shall include
checking of proper operation.
b) For variations in voltage and frequency, see 1.7.
c) Heating test:
The sample is brought up to a temperature of 55°C within
a half-hour period. After that temperature has been
reached it is maintained for 16 hours. An operating test is
then carried out.
d) Cold-condition test:
The sample is switched off and cooled to -25°C and held
at that temperature for two hours. The temperature is then
raised to 0°C and an operating test is carried out.
e) Vibration test:
The vibration test shall be carried out along the three axes
at the resonance frequency of the equipment or of
components for the period of 90 minutes in each case. If
no clear resonance emerges the vibration test shall be
carried out at 30,0 Hz.
The vibration test shall be carried out by sinusoidal
oscillation within the following limits:
General:
– f = 2,0 to 13,2 Hz;
a = ± 1,0 mm (amplitude a = 1/2 the vibration width);
– f = 13,2 Hz to 100,0 Hz;
acceleration ± 0,7 g.

186 June 2018
16.2.2 There shall be an independent alarm system

16 CONTROL, MONITORING, ALARM enabling the accommodation, engine rooms and, where
AND SAFETY SYSTEMS FOR appropriate, the separate pump rooms to be reached.
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND 16.2.3 Alarm systems shall be so constructed that a failure
INTERNAL COMMUNICATION in the alarm system cannot result in a failure of the
equipment or installation being monitored.
16.1 General requirements Binary transmitters shall be designed on the rest-
current principle or on the supervised operating current
16.1.1 Control equipment needed to operate the vessel
principle.
shall be brought into its operating position easily. That
position shall be unambiguously clear. 16.2.4 Visual alarms shall remain visible until the
malfunction has been remedied; an alarm with
16.1.2 Monitoring instruments shall be easily legible. It
acknowledgement shall be distinguishable from an alarm
shall be possible to dim their lighting down to their
without acknowledgement.
extinction. Light sources shall be neither intrusive nor impair
the legibility of the monitoring instruments. 16.2.5 The power supply shall be monitored and a failure
shall cause an alarm. Test facilities are required for the
16.1.3 There shall be a system for testing the warning and
operation of light displays.
indicating lights.
The alarm system shall be supplied from the main
16.1.4 It shall be possible to clearly establish whether a power source and shall have battery support for at least 15
system is in operation. If its functioning is indicated by minutes.
means of an indicating light, this shall be green.
16.2.6 Alarm delays shall be kept within time limits to
16.1.5 Any malfunctioning or failure of systems that prevent any risk to the monitored system in the event of
require monitoring shall be indicated by means of red exceeding the limit value. Pressure alarms may in general not
warning lights. be delayed by more than 2 seconds. Level alarms shall be
delayed sufficiently to ensure that the alarm is not tripped by
16.1.6 An audible warning shall sound at the same time brief fluctuations in level.
that a red warning light lights up. Audible warnings may be
given by a single, collective signal. The sound pressure level 16.2.7 A failure of the power supply or disconnection of
of that signal shall exceed the maximum sound pressure level the system shall not alter the limit value settings at which a
of the ambient noise at the steering position by at least 3,0 fault is signalled.
dB(A).
16.2.8 The fault signalling systems of main engines with
16.1.7 The audible warning shall be capable of being engine-driven pumps shall be so designed that variations in
switched off after a malfunction or failure has been operating parameters due to manoeuvres do not trigger the
acknowledged. Such shutdown shall not prevent the alarm alarm.
signal from being triggered by other malfunctions. The red
warning lights shall only go out when the malfunction has 16.2.9 The sound pressure level for the alarm signal shall
been corrected. be at least 75,0 dB(A) within the accommodation area. In
engine rooms and pump rooms the alarm signal shall take the
16.1.8 The monitoring and indicating devices shall be form of a flashing light that is visible on all sides and clearly
automatically switched to an alternative power supply if their perceptible at all points.
own power supply fails.
16.2.10 The helmsman shall have within reach an on/off
16.1.9 For control, indicating and monitoring equipment switch controlling the alarm signal; switches which
and steering system, the requirements given in the present automatically return to the off position when released are not
Rules, Chapter I, 1.2.10 apply. acceptable.
For manual operation, the requirement given in the present
Rules, Chapter I, 1.3.9 apply. 16.2.11 It is recommended that the alarm signals should be
For safety devices, the requirements given in the present automatically suppressed when the main engine and
Rules, Chapter I, 1.2.9 apply. auxiliaries are taken out of service.
16.1.10 In wheelhouses designed for radar navigation by 16.3 Safety systems

one person it shall be possible to activate the sound signals
by a foot operated switch. That requirement shall not apply to 16.3.1 Safety system is a system intended to limit the
the “do not approach” signal in accordance with the consequence of failure and is activated automatically when
applicable navigational authority regulations. an abnormal condition appears.
16.2 Alarm systems 16.3.2 Safety systems shall be designed to halt or slow
down the operation of the affected installation, or to signal a
16.2.1 Alarm systems shall indicate unacceptable permanently manned station to do so before a critical state is
deviations from operating figures visually and audibly. The reached.
operative state of the system shall be indicated in the
wheelhouse and on the equipment. 16.3.3 Binary transmitters shall be designed according to
the operating current principle. If safety systems are not

June 2018 187
designed to be self-monitoring, their operation must be

verifiable. 17 TESTS ON BOARD
Safety systems must be independent of other
systems. 17.1 General
The tests are divided into:
16.4 Internal communication facilities on board
– tests during construction;
There shall be internal communication facilities on
– tests during commissioning;
board vessels with a wheelhouse designed for radar
navigation by one person. – tests during trial voyages.
It shall be possible to establish communication 17.2 Tests during construction
links from the steering position:
a) with the bow of the vessel or convoy; 17.2.1 During the period of construction of the vessel, the
installations (systems) shall be checked for conformity with
b) with the stern of the vessel or convoy if no direct
the documents reviewed/approved by the Register and with
communication is possible from the steering position;
the Rules.
c) with the crew accommodation;
d) with the boatmaster’s cabin. 17.2.2 Test certificates for tests which have already been
performed shall be presented to the Register on request.
Reception at all positions of these internal
communication links shall be via loudspeaker, and 17.2.3 Means of protection
transmission shall be via a fixed microphone. The link with
the bow and stern of the vessel or convoy may be of the The following means of protection shall be
radio-telephone type. checked:
a) protection against foreign bodies and water;
16.5 Radio telephony systems for vessels with
b) protection against electric shock, such as protective
wheelhouses designed for radar navigation earthing, protective separation or other measures as stated
by one person in Section 1;
16.5.1 Where vessel wheelhouses have been designed for c) measures of explosion protection.
radar navigation by one person, reception from the vessel to
vessel networks and that of nautical information shall be via a 17.2.4 Testing of the cable network
loudspeaker, and outgoing communications via a fixed Inspection and testing of cable installation and
microphone. Send/receive shall be selected by means of a cable routing with regard to:
push-button.
a) acceptability of cable routing with regard to:
It shall not be possible to use the microphones of – separation of cable routes;
those networks for the public correspondence network.
– fire safety;
16.5.2 Where vessel wheelhouses designed for radar – reliable supply of emergency consumers (where
navigation by one person are equipped with a radio telephone applicable);
system for the public correspondence network, reception b) selection and fastening of cables;
shall be possible from the helmsman’s seat.
c) construction of bulkhead and deck penetrations;
d) insulation resistance measurement.
17.3 Testing during commissioning of the

electrical equipment
17.3.1 General
Proofs are required of the satisfactory condition and
proper operation of the main and emergency power supply
systems, the steering gear and the aids of manoeuvring, as
well as of all the other installations specified in the Rules.
Unless already required in the Rules, the tests to be
performed shall be agreed with the Register in accordance
with the specific characteristics of the subject equipment.
17.3.2 Testing the generator sets supplying the vessel’s

network
A trial run of the generator sets shall be conducted
under normal operating conditions and the specified overload
capacity shall be demonstrated. Test shall be performed on
the following in particular:
– speed regulation and speed setting devices;

188 June 2018
– variations in voltage and speed (frequency) due to the 17.3.8 Indications in the wheelhouse, control,
connection and disconnection on the maximum load monitoring and alarm systems
expected in service;
17.3.8.1 Apart from required function test it has to be
– load sharing characteristic of generators running in proofed that all indications in the wheelhouse can be seen
parallel; properly during day and night.
– automatic or quick starters. The dimmer function shall be tested.
17.3.3 Storage batteries 17.3.8.2 The quality of the important intercommunication
systems shall be checked under high noise conditions.
The following shall be tested:
a) installation of storage batteries; 17.3.9 Electrical propulsion system
b) ventilation of storage battery rooms, cabinets or chests, Functioning of the electrical propulsion system
and cross-sections of ventilation ducts; shall be proved by a dock trial before river trials.
c) storage-battery charging equipment; At least the following trials/measurements shall be
d) the required caution labels and information plates. carried out in the presence of the Register:
– start-up, loading and unloading of the generating sets and
17.3.4 3.4 Switchgear
electric propulsion engines in accordance with the design
The following items shall be tested under of the electrical propulsion system and a check of
observance of: regulation, control and switchgear;
a) accessibility for operation and maintenance; – verification of propeller speed variation and all associated
b) protection against the ingress of water and oil from ducts equipment;
and pipes in the vicinity of the switchboards, and – verification of protection, monitoring and
sufficient ventilation; indicating/alarm equipment including the interlocks for
c) equipment of main and emergency switchboards with sufficient functioning;
insulated handrails, gratings and insulating floor – verification of insulation condition of the propulsion
coverings; circuits.
d) correct settings and operation of protection devices and
17.3.10 Delivery documentation
interlocks.
The Register reserves the right to demand the proof Proof shall be furnished to the Register that the
of selective arrangement of the vessel supply system. necessary delivery drawings, descriptions and operating
instructions are available on board the vessel. This includes
17.3.5 Power electronics the documents listed in 1.3.11.
The following items shall be tested: 17.4 Testing during trial voyages
a) ventilation of the place of installation;
17.4.1 General
b) function of the equipment and protection devices.
Proof is required that the power supply meets the
17.3.6 Power plants requirements under the various operating conditions of the
The following items shall be tested: vessel. All components of the system must function
satisfactorily under service conditions, i.e. at all main engine
a) motor drives together with the driven machines, which speeds and during all manoeuvres.
shall, wherever possible, be subjected to the most severe
anticipated operating conditions. 17.4.2 Electrical propulsion system
This test shall include a check of the settings of the
Trial programme
motor’s short-circuit and overcurrent protection devices;
The trial programme shall at least include:
b) the emergency remote stops of equipment such as engine
room fans and boiler blowers; a) continuous operation of the vessel at full propulsion load
until the entire electric vessel propulsion system has
c) closed loop controls, open loop controls and all electric
reached steady-state temperatures.
safety devices.
The trials shall be carried out at rated engine speed and
17.3.7 Lighting installations with an unchanged governor setting:
– at 100% power output (rated power): at least 2 hours;
The following shall be checked:
– with the propeller running astern during the dock test
– the functioning of the navigation lighting and its alarm
or during the river trial at a minimum speed of at
system;
least 70% of the rated propeller speed: 10 minutes;
– the functioning of the emergency lighting system;
b) reversal of the main electric propulsion system out of the
– the correct construction and installation of luminaries steady-state condition from full power ahead to full
with respect to the hazard of fire. power astern and maintaining of this setting until at least
the vessel has lost all speed. Characteristic values such as
speed, system currents and voltages, and the load sharing

June 2018 189
of the generators, shall be recorded. If necessary,

oscillograms shall be made;
c) performance of typical manoeuvres;
d) checking of the propulsion system in all operating
conditions;
e) checking of the network qualities in the vessel’s
propulsion network.

190 June 2018
Part 3 – Machinery, Systems and Electricity Chapter III - FIRE PROTECTION, DETECTION AND EXTINCTION
III FIRE PROTECTION, DETECTION 1.2.2 Fire-extinguishing appliances

AND EXTINCTION Fire-extinguishing appliances are portable
firefighting equipment (fire extinguishers, fire outfit and
consumable materials) intended for:
1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
– extinguishing of fire;
1.1 Application – protection of personnel when combating with fire;
1.1.1 The requirements of this Chapter of the Rules, shall – ensuring efficient operation of fire-extinguishing
apply to vessel’s structural fire protection, fire-extinguishing systems.
systems, fire detection and fire alarm systems as well as to
1.2.3 Fixed fire-extinguishing systems
fire-extinguishing appliances and tools on new vessels and on
existing vessels, in cases of significant repairs, modifications, Fixed fire-extinguishing systems are systems which
reconstruction or alternations of the equipment, as well as, are intended to supply fire- extinguishing medium to the
when the purpose of the vessel, navigation area or number of protected rooms or directly into them and which are
the passengers which the vessel is permitted to carry has been structurally fixed to the vessel’s hull.
changed, in extent deemed necessary by the Register
considering each case separately. 1.2.4 Fire detection arrangements
1.1.2 The fire protection requirements relating to the Fire detection arrangements are divided into:
machinery and parts thereof, electrical equipment, pumping a) fire detection and fire alarm systems arranged to detect an
and piping, fuel and lubrication oil tanks, boilers, outbreak of fire and initiate (automatically or manually) a
refrigerating plants etc. are set out in other applicable Parts of visual and audible fire signal in the central fire station;
the Rules. and
b) alarm sounder system for automatically giving audible
1.1.3 Additional requirements on fire protection, fire
warning of the release of fire-extinguishing medium into
detection and fire extinction on tank vessels and dry cargo
protected room in which personnel normally work or to
vessels intended for the carriage of dangerous goods are
which they have access.
given in the relevant Sections of the Rules, Part 4 –
Additional Requirements for Notations, Chapter II – 1.2.5 Structural fire protection
Transport of dangerous goods. Additional requirements for
passenger vessels are given in the Rules, Part 4 – Additional Structural fire protection is a complex of the
Requirements for Notations, Chapter I, Section 4. passive means of structural fire protection intended for:
a) prevention of generation of fire;
1.1.4 Where available, statutory Regulations in the
operating area of the vessel (e.g. European directives) shall b) containment of fire and smoke spreading throughout the
take precedence over the requirements of this Chapter. vessel;
c) creation of conditions for safe evacuation of persons from
1.1.5 In addition to the requirements specified in this the vessel’s spaces and from the vessel, as well as for
Chapter of the Rules and in order to define fire integrity effective extinction of the fire.
properties of materials and products as well as test
procedures for their acceptance, where applicable, the 1.2.6 A class divisions
requirements of the Fire Test Procedures Code (FTP Code)
1.2.6.1 “A” class divisions are those divisions formed by
shall apply.
bulkheads and decks which comply with the following
1.1.6 The suitability for fire protection of materials and criteria:
components shall be established by an accredited test a) they shall be constructed of steel or other equivalent
institution on the basis of appropriate test methods. material;
The test institution shall satisfy: b) they shall be suitably stiffened;
a) Fire Test Procedures Code; and c) they shall be so constructed as to be capable of
b) European Standard EN ISO/IEC 17025:2005 concerning preventing the passage of
the general requirements for the competence of testing smoke and flame to the end of the one-hour standard fire test
and calibration laboratories. (see FTP Code);
d) they shall be insulated with approved non-combustible
1.2 Definitions and explanations materials such that the average temperature of the
1.2.1 Fire-extinguishing systems and equipment unexposed side will not rise more than 1400C above the
original temperature, nor will the temperature, at any one
Fire-extinguishing systems and equipment are fixed point including any joint, rise more than 1800C above the
active means of fire extinction intended for fire-extinguishing original temperature.
and containment of fire spreading throughout the vessel. Depending on the time within which the above
indicated temperature rise is ensured in the course of the
standard fire test, they may be assigned the following fire
integrity standards:
– Class “A-60” for 60 min;

June 2018 191
Chapter III - FIRE PROTECTION, DETECTION AND EXTINCTION Part 3 – Machinery, Systems and Electricity
– Class “A-30” for 30 min; smoke and flame nor limitations relative to the temperature
– Class “A-15” for 15 min; rise. Combustible veneers are permitted provided they meet
the requirements of this Chapter of the Rules.
– Class “A-0“ for 0 min.
The Register requires a test of a prototype bulkhead 1.2.9 Non-combustible material
or deck in accordance with the Fire Test Procedures Code to
Non-combustible material is a material which
ensure that it meets the above requirements or integrity and
neither burns nor gives off flammable vapours in sufficient
temperature rise.
quantity for self-ignition when heated to approximately
1.2.6.2 The products indicated in Table 1.2.6-1 may be 750°C, this being determined in accordance with the Fire
installed without testing or approval. Test Procedures Code (Annex 1, Part 1, adopted by IMO by
Resolution MSC.61(67)). Any other material is a combustible
Table 1.2.6-1 material.
Products installed without testing or approval In general, products made only of glass, concrete,
ceramic products, natural stone, masonry units, common
Classification Product description metals and metal alloys are considered as being non-
A steel bulkhead with a scantling not less than combustible and may be installed without testing and
the minimum given below: approval.
Class A-0
– thickness of plating: 4,0 mm 1.2.10 Steel or other equivalent material
bulkhead
– stiffeners 60×60×5 mm spaced 600,0 mm
apart or structural equivalence Steel or other equivalent material means any non-
A steel deck with a scantling not less than the combustible material which, by itself or due to insulation
minimum given below: provided, has structural and integrity properties equivalent to
Class A-0 steel at the end of the applicable exposure to the standard fire
– thickness of plating: 4,0 mm
deck test (e.g., aluminium alloy with appropriate insulation).
– stiffeners 95×65×7 mm spaced 600,0 mm
apart or structural equivalence
1.2.11 Not readily ignitable material
1.2.7 B class divisions Not readily ignitable material means a material
1.2.7.1 “B” class divisions are those divisions formed by which will not give rise to smoke or toxic and explosive
bulkheads, decks, ceilings or linings which comply with the hazards at elevated temperatures. Reference is made to the
following criteria: Fire Test Procedure Code, Annex 1, Part 6, adopted by IMO
by Resolution MSC.61(67).
a) they shall be constructed of approved non-combustible
materials (combustible veneers are permitted, if in 1.2.12 Low flame spread surface material
compliance with other applicable requirements of this
Rules); Low flame spread means that the surface thus
described will adequately restrict the spread of flame, this
b) they shall be constructed as to be capable of preventing
being determined in accordance with the Fire Test Procedures
the passage of flame to the end of the first half an hour of
Code (Annex 1, Part 5, adopted by IMO by Resolution
the standard fire test (see FTP Code);
MSC.61(67)).
c) they shall have an insulation value such that the average
Non-combustible materials are considered as low
temperature of the unexposed side will not rise more than
flame spread. However, due consideration will be given by
140°C above the original temperature, nor will the
the Register to the method of application and fixing.
temperature at any one point, including any joint, rise
more than 225°C above the original temperature. Materials having high flame spread characteristics:
materials other than those specified above.
Depending on the time within which the above
indicated temperature rise is ensured in the course of the 1.2.13 Main vertical zones
standard fire test, they may be assigned the following fire
integrity standards: Main vertical zones are those sections into which
– Class “B-15” for 15 minutes; the hull, superstructure and deckhouses are divided by “A“
class divisions, the mean length and width of which on any
– Class “B-0” for 0 minutes. deck does not in general exceed 40,0 m.
The Register requires a test of a prototype division
in accordance with the Fire Test Procedures Code to ensure 1.2.14 Fire Test Procedures Code
that it meets the above requirements or integrity and Fire Test Procedures Code: the International Code
temperature rise. for the Application of Fire Test Procedures (FTP code)
1.2.7.2 In order to be defined as B class, a metal division adopted under Resolution MSC.307(88) by the Maritime
shall have plating thickness not less than 2,0 mm when Safety Committee of the International Maritime Organization
constructed of steel. (IMO).
1.2.8 C class divisions 1.2.15 Standard fire test
“C” class divisions are fire-resisting divisions Standard fire test means a test in which specimens
constructed of approved non-combustible materials. They of the relevant bulkheads or decks are exposed in a test
need meet neither requirements relative to the passage of furnace to temperatures corresponding approximately to the

192 June 2018
standard time-temperature curve in accordance with the test 1.2.22 Competent person
method specified in the Fire Test Procedures Code.
Competent person: a person who has acquired
1.2.16 Fire-resistance sufficient knowledge in the relevant area on the basis of his
or her professional training and experience and is sufficiently
Fire-resistance: the property of structural conversant with the relevant rules and regulations and the
components or devices as certified by the test procedure. The generally accepted technical rules (such as EN Standards,
recognized test methods for determining fire-resistance are relevant legislation, technical rules) to be able to assess the
Annex 1, Part 3, of the Code for Fire Test Procedures. operational safety of the relevant systems and equipment.
1.2.17 Flame-retardant 1.3 Particular areas on board
Flame-retardant: material which does not readily
1.3.1 Accommodation
catch fire, or whose surface at least restricts the spread of
flames pursuant to the test procedure. Accommodation: a space intended for the use of
The recognized test methods for determining that a persons normally living on board, including galleys, storage
material is flame-retardant are the respective requirements space for provisions, toilets and washing facilities, laundry
laid down in Annex 1, Parts 5 (Surface flammability test), 6 facilities, passageways, but not the wheelhouse.
(Test for the deck coverings), 7 (Test for hanging textiles and
plastics), 8 (Test for upholstered furniture) and 9 (Test for 1.3.2 Galley
components of bedding) of the Code for Fire Test 1.3.2.1 Galley: a room with stove or a similar cooking
Procedures. appliance.
1.2.18 Flashpoint Galleys shall comprise:
a) a cooker;
Flashpoint is the temperature in degrees Celsius
(closed cup test) at which a product will give off enough b) a sink with waste connection;
flammable vapour to be ignited, as determined by an c) a supply of potable water;
approved flashpoint apparatus. d) a refrigerator;
1.2.19 Lower flammable limit e) sufficient storage and working space.
Lower flammable limit is the lowest content (by 1.3.2.2 Galleys may be combined with communal living
volume) of the flammable substance which when mixed with quarters.
air is capable of igniting at an open flame and sustain fire of 1.3.2.3 Galleys shall not be located in spaces adjacent to
the mixture (and spread of flame on the mixture). store rooms for storage of readily flammable and combustible
1.2.20 Flammable liquids materials and to spaces for storage of fuel oil and lubricating
oil, except for supply units where receptacles of liquefied gas
Flammable liquids are liquids, or mixture of installations for domestic purposes are arranged.
liquids, or liquids containing solids in solution or suspension
(e.g. paints, varnishes, lacquers, etc.) which give off a 1.3.3 Lounge
flammable vapour at or below 60°C (closed cup test). Lounge: a room of an accommodation or a
1.2.21 Classification of extinguishing media passenger room. On board passenger vessels, galleys are not
regarded as lounges.
The extinguishing media shall be suitable at least
for the class of fire most likely to occur in the space (or 1.3.4 Store room
spaces) for which the fire extinguisher is intended, see Table Store room: a room for the storage of flammable
1.2.21-1. liquids and materials or a room with an area of over 4,0 m2
for storing supplies.
Table 1.2.21-1
Classification of extinguishing media 1.3.5 Passageway
Passageway: an area intended for the normal
Fire movement of persons and goods.
Fire hazard Extinguishing media
class
Solid combustible 1.3.6 Muster areas
materials of organic
A Water, dry powder, foam Muster areas: areas of the vessel which are
nature (e.g. wood, coal,
specially protected and in which persons muster in the event
fibre materials)
of danger.
Flammable liquids (e.g. Dry powder, foam,
B
oils, tars, petrol) carbon dioxide 1.3.7 Evacuation areas
Gases (e.g. acetylene, Dry powder, carbon
C Evacuation areas: part of muster areas of the vessel
propane) dioxide
Metals (e.g. aluminium, from which evacuation of persons can be carried out.
D Special dry powder
magnesium, sodium)

June 2018 193
1.3.8 Protected rooms 1.4.2 Subject to supervision by the Register during

manufacture are:
Protected rooms: rooms provided with a fixed fire-
extinguishing system or with a fixed fire detection and fire a) constructions and products intended for structural fire
alarm system. protection (division bulkheads, linings, ceilings,
insulation, doors, windows and scuttles);
1.3.9 Passenger rooms b) materials and products intended for surface finish and
Passenger rooms are rooms on board intended for furnishing of vessel’s spaces (veneers, floor coverings,
passengers and enclosed areas such as lounges, offices, textile and similar materials for upholstery and curtains);
shops, hairdressing salons, drying rooms, laundries, saunas, c) materials for primary deck coverings;
toilets, washrooms, passageways, connecting passages and d) items and parts of fire-extinguishing systems:
stairs not encapsulated by walls.
hydrants, fire hoses, couplings, fire hose nozzles, spray
1.3.10 Service spaces nozzles (sprinklers),
foam proportionators, generators, monitors, foam nozzles
Service spaces are those spaces used for galleys,
and foam concentrate tank (see also other relevant Parts
pantries containing cooking appliances, lockers, mail and
of the Rules);
specie rooms, store rooms, workshops other than those
forming part of the machinery spaces, and similar spaces and e) fire-extinguishing appliances and tools:
trunks to such spaces. fire extinguishers, fireman’s outfit, foam concentrate, etc.
1.3.11 Stairwell 1.4.3 Type approved products

Stairwell: the well of an internal staircase or of a The following materials, equipment, systems or
lift. products in general used for fire protection shall be type
approved by the Register, except for special cases for which
1.3.12 Control centre the acceptance may be given for individual vessels on the
Control centre: a wheelhouse, an area which basis of suitable documentation or ad hoc tests:
contains an emergency electrical power plant or parts thereof a) fire-resisting and fire-retarding divisions (bulkheads or
or an area with a centre permanently occupied by shipboard decks) and associated doors;
personnel or crew members, such as for fire alarm b) fire dampers;
equipment, remote controls of doors or fire dampers.
c) hoses;
1.3.13 Central fire station d) water spray nozzles;
Central fire station means a space or part of a space e) discharge nozzles;
containing fire alarm detection stations and remote start-up f) hydrants;
device of fire systems, if any, located in a wheelhouse or in g) extinguishing agents for fixed fire-extinguishing systems;
other control centre either with direct communication with
the wheelhouse or permanently attended when the vessel is h) portable fire extinguishers;
under way. i) fire detection and alarm system.
Exceptions to these Rules compatible with the
1.3.14 Main engine room
statutory Regulations of the vessel’s country of registration
Main engine room is a space where the propulsion may be agreed with the Register.
engines are installed. As regards the granting of type approval, the
requirements of the Rules, Part 1 – Classification and
1.3.15 Engine room Surveys apply.
Engine room is a space where internal combustion The Register may request type approval for other
engines are installed. materials, equipment, systems or products required by the
applicable provisions for vessels or installations of special
1.3.16 Boiler room types.
Boiler room is a a space housing a fuel-operated
installation designed to produce steam or heat thermal oil.
The documents listed in the Rules, Part 1 –
1.4 Scope of survey and technical Classification and Surveys, Chapter II, Table 3.2-15 shall be
documentation submitted to the Register.
1.4.1 Subject to supervision by the Register during 1.5 Fire control plans and instructions
construction of a vessel are: structural fire protection,
materials used for the interior finishing of vessel’s spaces In every self-propelled vessel at the central fire
with regards to their fire hazardous properties, fire- station, if any, wheelhouse and in conspicuous positions in
extinguishing systems, fire detection and fire alarm systems corridors and lobbies, there shall be exhibited General
as well as fire-extinguishing appliances and tools specified in Arrangement Plans showing clearly for each deck the
this Chapter of the Rules. following:
a) location of control centres;

194 June 2018
b) location of fire-resisting and fire-retarding divisions;

c) rooms provided with the fire detection and fire alarm 2 PREVENTION OF FIRE
systems;
2.1 Probability of ignition
d) rooms protected by fixed fire-extinguishing systems, with
the indicated locations of the system starting controls and 2.1.1 General
the disposition of fire hydrants;
The purpose of this Section is to prevent the
e) means of access to different compartments, decks etc.
ignition of combustible materials or flammable liquids. For
with the indication of means of escape, corridors and
this purpose, the following functional requirements shall be
doors;
met:
f) on passengers vessels: the ventilating systems including
a) means shall be provided to control leaks of flammable
particulars of the fan control positions, the position of
liquids;
dampers and identification numbers of the ventilating
fans serving each section; b) means shall be provided to limit the accumulation of
flammable vapours;
g) disposition of fire-extinguishing appliances, spare parts
and tools; c) the ignitability of combustible materials shall be
restricted;
h) location of remote closing devices (quick-closing valves)
of fuel tank pipelines. d) ignition sources shall be restricted;
e) ignition sources shall be separated from combustible
materials and flammable liquids; and
f) the atmosphere in cargo tanks shall be maintained out of
the explosive range.
2.1.2 Arrangements for fuel oil, lubrication oil and

other flammable oils
2.1.2.1 For arrangements of fuel oil, lubricating oil and for
other flammable oils, see the present Rules, Chapter I, 7.14
and 7.15 respectively.
2.1.2.2 Prevention of overpressure
Provisions shall be made to prevent overpressure in
any oil tank or in any part of the fuel oil system, including
the filling pipes served by pumps on board. Air and overflow
pipes and relief valves shall discharge to a position where
there is no risk of fire or explosion from the emergence of
oils and vapours.
2.1.2.3 Limitation in the use of oils as fuel
For approved fuels, the requirements given in the
present Rules, Chapter I, 1.2.6 apply.
2.1.2.4 Ventilation of machinery spaces
The ventilation of machinery spaces shall be
sufficient under normal conditions to prevent accumulation
of oil vapour (see the present Rules, Chapter I, 7.13.2.1).
2.1.3 Flexible pipes

Flexible pipes, if used, shall be in accordance with
other requirements specified in this Rules (see the present
Rules, Chapter I, 7.4.6).
2.1.4 Arrangements for liquefied gas for domestic

purposes
2.1.4.1 Where liquefied gas is used for domestic purposes
the arrangements for the storage, distribution and utilisation
of the liquefied gas shall be such that, having regard to the
hazards of fire and explosion which the use of such liquefied
gas may entail, the safety of the vessel and the persons on
board is preserved.
See also the present Rules, Chapter I, Section 13.

June 2018 195
2.1.4.2 Liquefied gas installations may be used only for 2.2 Fire growth potential
domestic purposes in the accommodation and the
wheelhouse, and for corresponding purposes on passenger 2.2.1 General
vessels.
2.2.1.1 The purpose of this Section is to limit the fire
2.1.4.3 Storage of the gas receptacles shall be located on growth potential in every space of the vessel. For this
the open deck or in a well ventilated space which opens only purpose, the following functional requirements shall be met:
to the open deck. a) means of control for the air supply to the space shall be
provided;
2.1.5 Installation of boilers
b) means of control for flammable liquids in the space shall
Auxiliary and domestic boilers shall be arranged in be provided; and
such a way that other equipment is not endangered, even in c) the use of combustible materials shall be restricted.
the event of overheating. They shall, in particular, be placed
as far away as possible from fuel oil tanks, lubricating oil 2.2.1.2 Furniture in corridors and stairway enclosures shall
tanks and hold bulkheads (see the present Rules, Chapter I, be limited in number, as far as practicable.
5.2.1.3 and 5.2.1.4). Oil-tight trays shall be located below oil-
2.2.1.3 All accommodation areas shall be fitted with
fired boilers.
electric lighting. Additional lamps using gas or liquid fuel
2.1.6 Insulation of hot surfaces may only be used in communal living quarters. Lighting
devices using liquid fuel shall be made of metal and shall
For hot surfaces and fire protection, the burn only fuels with a flash point above 55°C or commercial
requirements given in the present Rules, Chapter I, 1.3.8 paraffin oil. They shall be placed or attached so as not to
apply. constitute a fire hazard.
For insulation of exhaust gas lines see the present
Rules, Chapter I,, 2.7.5. 2.2.2 Control of flammable liquid supply
Fuel pumps, thermal oil pumps, fan motors and
2.1.7 Protective measures against explosion
boiler fans shall be equipped with emergency stops. The
For protective measures against explosion, see the outlet valves of fuel oil service tanks must be fitted with
present Rules, Chapter II, 1.9.9 to 1.9.15. remote closing devices (quick-closing valves). Emergency
stops and remote closing devices must be capable of being
2.1.8 Miscellaneous items of ignition sources and operated from permanently accessible open deck and
ignitability protected from unauthorized use (see the present Rules,
Chapter I, 7.14.3.6 and the present Rules, Chapter II, 8.9).
2.1.8.1 Electric heating appliances
No hooks or other devices on which clothing can be 2.2.3 Control of air supply
hung may be fitted above heaters without temperature
limitation. Means shall be provided for the airtight sealing of
boiler, engine and pump rooms. The air ducts to these spaces
Where heaters are fitted in the bulkhead lining, a shall be fitted with closing appliances or equivalent devices
trough made of non-combustible material shall be mounted made of non-combustible material which can be closed from
behind each heater in such a way as to prevent the the deck. Engine room skylights shall also be able to be
accumulation of heat behind the lining. closed from outside.
2.1.8.2 Electric radiators, if used, shall be fixed in position
2.2.4 Fire protection materials
and so constructed as to reduce fire risks to a minimum. No
such radiators shall be fitted with an element so exposed that 2.2.4.1 Materials used for manufacture of components and
clothing, curtains, or other similar materials can be scorched structures in engine and boiler rooms shall be non-
or set on fire by heat from the element. Electric radiators combustible. Walls, ceilings and doors of engine rooms,
shall be fixed in a position at a distance of not less than 50,0 boiler rooms and bunkers shall be made of steel or another
mm from bulkheads or linings. equivalent non-combustible material.
2.1.8.3 Waste receptacles 2.2.4.2 Structural bulkheads and decks separating control
In principle, all waste receptacles shall be centres, engine and boiler rooms and their casings, galleys
constructed of non-combustible materials with no openings in from adjacent spaces shall be manufactured of steel or
the sides or bottom (see IACS UI SC 166 Rev.1). another equivalent material.
2.1.8.4 Insulation of surfaces against oil penetration 2.2.4.3 All interior and outside stairways shall be
manufactured of non-combustible materials. The interior
In spaces where penetration of oil products is
stairways and enclosing structures located below the open
possible, the surface of insulation shall be impervious to fuel
deck shall be manufactured of steel or another equivalent
oil, lubricating oil and their vapours.
material.
2.2.4.4 Use of non-combustible materials
Insulating materials shall be non-combustible,
except in cargo spaces and refrigerated compartments of
service spaces. Vapour barriers and adhesives used in
conjunction with insulation, as well as insulation of pipe

196 June 2018
fittings for cold service systems, need not be of non- 2.3 Smoke generation potential and toxicity
combustible materials, but they shall be kept to the minimum
quantity practicable and their exposed surfaces shall have low 2.3.1 General
flame-spread characteristics.
The purpose of this Head is to reduce the hazard to
Cold service means refrigeration systems and life from smoke and toxic products generated during a fire in
chilled water piping for air conditioning systems. spaces where persons normally work or live. For this
2.2.4.5 Neither combustible nor oil-absorbing materials purpose, the quantity of smoke and toxic products released
shall be used as flooring, bulkhead lining, ceiling nor decks from combustible materials, including surface finishes,
in the machinery spaces, shaft tunnel or rooms where oil during fire shall be limited.
tanks are located. 2.3.2 Paints, varnishes and other finishes
2.2.4.6 All floor coverings in corridors, stairway 2.3.2.1 Paints, varnishes and other finishes used on
enclosures and escape routes serving accommodation and exposed interior surfaces shall not be capable of producing
service spaces and control centres shall have low flame- excessive quantities of smoke and toxic products, this being
spread characteristics. determined in accordance with the Fire Test Procedures
2.2.4.7 Materials capable of resisting the flame spread shall Code.
be used for manufacture of carpets and other coverings, 2.3.2.2 Requirement 2.3.2.1 only applies to
curtains, draperies, furniture covers and furnishings. accommodation, service spaces and control centres as well as
2.2.4.8 The bulkheads and decks of galleys shall be stairway enclosures.
constructed of steel or other equivalent material: adequate 2.3.2.3 Paints, varnishes and similar products having a
insulation shall be also provided in all cases. The deck of nitrocellulose or other highly inflammable base shall not be
galleys (floor) shall be lined with ceramic tiles or other used in machinery spaces.
equivalent non-combustible materials.
2.2.5 Store rooms for flammable liquids and materials

2.2.5.1 Flammable liquids and materials shall be stowed in
separate and designated enclosed spaces. Store room for
flammable liquids and materials shall be, in general, located
on the open deck and have direct access from the open deck.
2.2.5.2 Where a separate store room cannot be arranged, to
store flammable liquids with a flash point of less than 55°C
there shall be a ventilated cupboard made of non-combustible
material on deck. On its outside there shall be a symbol “Fire,
naked flame and smoking prohibited” with a diameter of at
least 10,0 cm in accordance with Figure 2 of Annex 4 (ES-
TRIN).
2.2.5.3 Portable fire extinguisher shall be located at the
entrance to the store room or adjacent to a cupboard.
2.2.5.4 Store rooms containing flammable liquids and
materials shall, in general, not be arranged within the same
superstructure or deckhouse where accommodation spaces
are located. In special cases, upon agreement with the
Register, such arrangement may be permitted, provided they
are not adjacent to accommodation and machinery spaces,
fuel oil and lubricating oil tanks.
2.2.5.5 Bulkheads and decks of store rooms shall be
manufactured of steel or another equivalent material. Where
hull, superstructures and deckhouses are made of other
material, bulkheads and decks of at least “B-15” class shall
be used in store rooms.
2.2.5.6 Store of rags and used rags shall be kept in store
rooms outside the machinery spaces. Service store of rags is
permitted to keep in the machinery spaces in individual steel
closable boxes.

June 2018 197
the burner can reach other parts of the engine room

3 FUEL FIRED HEATING, COOKING installations.
AND REFRIGERATING EQUIPMENT 3.4 Vaporising oil burner stoves
3.1 General requirements 3.4.1 It shall be possible to light vaporising oil burner
3.1.1 Heating, cooking and refrigeration equipment stoves without the aid of another combustible liquid. They
running on liquefied gas shall meet the requirements of the shall be fixed above a metal drip pan which encompasses all
present Rules, Chapter I, Section 13. the fuel-carrying parts, whose sides are at least 20,0 mm high
and which has a capacity of at least 2,0 l.
3.1.2 Heating, cooking and refrigeration equipment,
together with its accessories, shall be so designed and 3.4.2 For vaporising oil burner stoves installed in an
installed that it is not dangerous even in the event of engine room, the sides of the metal drip pan prescribed in
overheating. It shall be so installed that it cannot overturn or 3.4.1 shall be at least 200,0 mm high. The lower edge of the
be moved accidentally. vaporising burner shall be located above the edge of the drip
pan. In addition, the upper edge of the drip pan shall extend
3.1.3 The equipment referred to in 3.1.2 shall not be at least 100,0 mm above the floor.
installed in areas in which substances with a flash point
below 55°C are used or stored. No flues from these 3.4.3 Vaporising oil burner stoves shall be fitted with a
installations may pass through such areas. suitable regulator which, at all settings, ensures a virtually
constant flow of fuel to the burner and which prevents any
3.1.4 The supply of air necessary for combustion shall be fuel leak should the flame go out. Regulators shall be
ensured. considered suitable which function properly even when
exposed to vibration and inclined up to 12° and which, in
3.1.5 Heating appliances shall be securely connected to addition to a level-regulating float, have:
flues, which shall be fitted with suitable cowls or devices a) a second float which closes off the fuel supply safely and
affording protection against the wind. They shall be arranged reliably when the permitted level is exceeded; or
in such a manner as to permit cleaning.
b) an overflow pipe, but only if the drip pan has sufficient
3.2 Use of liquid fuels, oil-fired equipment capacity to accommodate at least the contents of the fuel
tank.
3.2.1 Heating, cooking and refrigeration equipment
which uses liquid fuel may be operated only with fuels whose 3.4.4 Where the fuel tank of a vaporising oil burner stove
flash point is above 55°C. is installed separately:
a) the drop between the tank and the burner feed may not
3.2.2 By way of derogation from 3.2.1, cooking exceed that laid down in the manufacturer’s operating
appliances and heating and refrigeration appliances fitted instructions;
with burners with wicks and running on commercial paraffin
b) it shall be so installed as to be protected from
oil may be permitted in the accommodation and wheelhouse
unacceptable heating;
provided the capacity of the fuel tank does not exceed 12,0 l.
c) it shall be possible to interrupt the fuel supply from the
3.2.3 Appliances fitted with burners with wicks shall be: deck.
a) fitted with a metal fuel tank whose filling aperture may
3.4.5 The flues of vaporising oil burner stoves shall be
be locked and which has no soft-solder joints below the
fitted with a device to prevent draught inversion.
maximum filling level, and shall be designed and
installed in such a way that the fuel tank cannot be 3.5 Atomising oil burner heating appliances
opened or emptied accidentally;
b) capable of being lit without the aid of another liquid fuel; Atomising oil burner heating appliances shall in
and particular meet the following requirements:
c) so installed as to ensure the safe evacuation of a) adequate ventilation of the burner shall be ensured before
combustion gases. the fuel is supplied;
b) the fuel supply shall be regulated by a thermostat;
3.3 Vaporising oil burner stoves and atomising c) the fuel shall be ignited by an electric device or by a pilot
oil burner heating appliances flame;
3.3.1 Vaporising oil burner stoves and atomising oil d) a flame monitoring device shall cut off the fuel supply
burner heating appliances shall be built in accordance with when the flame goes out;
best practice. e) the main switch shall be placed at an easily accessible
point outside the installation room.
3.3.2 Where a vaporising oil burner stove or an atomising
oil burner heating appliance is installed in an engine room, 3.6 Forced-air heating appliances
the air supply to the heating appliance and the engines shall
be so designed that the heating appliance and the engines can Forced-air heating appliances consisting of a
operate properly and safely independently of one another. combustion chamber around which the heating air is
Where necessary, there shall be a separate air supply. The conducted under pressure to a distribution system or to a
equipment shall be installed in such a way that no flame from room shall meet the following requirements:

198 June 2018
a) if the fuel is atomised under pressure the combustion air

shall be supplied by a blower; 4 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
b) the combustion chamber shall be well ventilated before SYSTEMS
the burner can be lit. Ventilation may be considered
complete when the combustion air blower continues to 4.1 Fire detectors
operate after the flame has gone out;
4.1.1 Where a fixed fire detection and fire alarm system
c) the fuel supply shall be automatically cut off if:
is required for the protection of spaces, at least one detector
– the fire goes out; complying with the requirements given in this Head shall be
– the supply of combustion air is not sufficient; installed in each such space.
– the heated air exceeds a previously set temperature;
or 4.1.2 Only heat, smoke or ion detectors shall be used as
fire detectors. Other types may only be used as additional
– the power supply of the safety devices fails.
detectors as flame or combination detectors (fire detectors
In the above cases the fuel supply shall not be re- combining two or more of the detectors).
established automatically after being cut off;
Fire detectors which respond to other factors
d) it shall be possible to switch off the combustion air and indicating the onset of a fire may be approved by the Register
heating air blowers from outside the room where the provided that they are no less sensitive than the detectors
heating appliance is located; above mentioned.
e) where heating air is drawn from outside, the intake vents
shall be located as far as possible above the deck. They 4.1.3 Fire detectors may be installed with or without
shall be installed in such a manner that rain and spray individual identification. Fire detectors shall be type
water cannot enter; approved. Detectors shall be located in easily accessible and
f) heating air pipes shall be made of metal; conspicuous places, be painted red and protected against
g) it shall not be possible to close the heating air outlet unauthorized operation.
apertures completely; 4.1.4 All automatic fire detectors shall be designed in
h) it shall not be possible for any leaking fuel to reach the such a way that they can be tested to ensure that they are
heating air pipes; working properly and brought back into service without
i) it shall not be possible for forced-air heating appliances having to replace any components.
to draw their heating air from an engine room.
4.1.5 Smoke detectors shall be set so that they respond to
3.7 Solid fuel heating a reduction in visibility per metre caused by smoke of more
than 2% to 12,5%. Smoke detectors fitted in galleys, engine
3.7.1 Solid fuel heating appliances shall be placed on a rooms and boiler rooms shall respond within sensitivity
metal plate with raised edges such that no burning fuel or hot limits meeting the requirements of the Register, whereby
cinders fall outside the plate. under-sensitivity or over-sensitivity of the detectors shall be
This requirement does not apply to appliances avoided.
installed in compartments built of non-combustible materials 4.1.6 Heat detectors shall be set so that with temperature
and intended solely to house boilers. increase rates of less than 1°C/min they respond at
3.7.2 Solid fuel boilers shall be fitted with thermostatic temperatures of between 54°C and 78°C.
controls to regulate the flow of combustion air. With higher rates of temperature increase, the heat
detector shall respond within temperature limits where under-
3.7.3 A means by which cinders can be quickly doused or over-sensitivity of the heat detector is avoided.
shall be placed in the vicinity of each heating appliance.
4.1.7 With the agreement of the Register, the permissible
operating temperature of heat detectors may be increased to
30°C above the maximum temperature in the upper part of
engine and boiler rooms.
Operation temperature of heat detectors in drying
rooms and similar spaces may be up to 130°C, and up to
140°C in sauna.
4.1.8 The sensitivity of flame detectors shall be sufficient

to detect flames against an illuminated background. Flame
detectors shall also be equipped with a system for identifying
false alarms.
4.2 Construction requirements

4.2.1 General
4.2.1.1 Any required fixed fire detection and fire alarm
system shall be capable of immediate operation at all times.

June 2018 199
4.2.1.2 The fixed fire detection and fire alarm system shall In order to avoid delays in detecting the origin of
not be used for any other purpose, except that closing of fire the fire, the number of enclosed spaces included in each fire
doors and similar functions may be permitted at the control detection zone shall be limited. There shall not be more than
panel. fifty enclosed spaces in one fire detection zone.
4.2.1.3 Fire alarm systems shall consist of: Where the fire detection system has remote
identification of individual fire detectors, the fire detection
a) fire detection system; zones may monitor several decks and any number of
b) fire indicator system; enclosed spaces.
c) control panel; 4.2.4.2 On passenger vessels which do not have a fire
as well as the external power supply. detection system with remote identification of individual fire
detectors, a fire detection zone shall not comprise more than
4.2.1.4 The fire detection system may be divided into one the area constituted in accordance with the Rules, Part 4 –
or more fire zones. The fire indicator system may have one or Additional Requirements for Notations, Chapter I, 4.2.7. The
more indicator devices. A fire detection zone may have one activation of a fire detector in an individual cabin in this fire
or more fire detectors. detection zone shall set off a visual and audible signal in the
4.2.1.5 Compulsory fire alarm systems shall be operational passageway outside that cabin.
at all times. 4.2.4.3 Galleys, engine rooms and boiler rooms shall
4.2.1.6 Fire detectors required in accordance with 4.3.2 constitute separate fire detection zones.
shall be automatic. Additional manually operated fire
4.2.5 Fire detection system and control panel
detectors may be installed.
4.2.5.1 Activation of a fire detector shall set off a visual
4.2.1.7 The system and its components shall be able to
and audible fire alarm signal at the control panel and the
withstand voltage fluctuations and surges, changes in ambient
indicator devices.
temperature, vibrations, humidity, shocks, impacts and
corrosion such as commonly occur on vessels. 4.2.5.2 The control panel and the indicator devices shall be
at a location which is permanently manned by crew or
4.2.2 Energy supply shipboard personnel. One indicator shall be at the steering
4.2.2.1 Energy sources and electric circuits necessary for position.
the operation of the fire alarm system shall be self- 4.2.5.3 The indicator devices shall indicate at least the fire
monitoring. Any fault occurring shall activate a visual and detection zone in which a fire detector has been activated.
audible alarm signal on the control panel which can be
distinguished from a fire alarm signal. 4.2.5.4 On or near each indicator device there shall be clear
information on the areas monitored and the location of the
4.2.2.2 There shall be at least two power sources for the fire detection zones.
electrical part of the fire alarm system, one of which shall be
an emergency power system (i.e. emergency power source 4.2.5.5 The control panel is the central control unit of the
and emergency switchboard). There shall be two separate fire alarm system. It also includes parts of the fire indicator
power-feeds solely for this purpose. These shall lead to an system (i.e. an indicator device).
automatic switch in or near the control panel of the fire alarm
system. On day-trip vessels up to 25,0 m L WL and on motor 4.3 Installation requirements
vessels a separate emergency power supply is sufficient.
4.3.1 Fire detectors shall be installed in such a manner as
4.2.3 Fire detection system to ensure the best possible operation of the system. Locations
in the vicinity of deck girders and ventilation shafts or other
4.2.3.1 Fire detectors shall be grouped in fire detection locations where air currents could adversely affect system
zones. operation and locations where impacts or mechanical damage
are likely shall be avoided.
4.2.3.2 Fire detection systems shall not be used for any
other purpose. By way of derogation the closing of the doors 4.3.2 In general, fire detectors located on the ceiling shall
in accordance with the Rules, Part 4 – Additional be at least 0,5 m away from bulkheads, except in corridors,
Requirements for Notations, Chapter I, 4.2.5 and similar lockers and stairways. The maximum distance between fire
functions may be activated and indicated on the control detectors and bulkheads shall conform to the following Table
panel. 4.3.2-1.
4.2.3.3 Fire detection systems shall be designed in such a The Register may stipulate or approve other
way that the first indicated fire alarm does not prevent fire distances on the basis of tests which prove the characteristics
alarms set off by other detectors. of the detectors.
4.2.4 Fire detection zones 4.3.3 The routing of electric cables for the fire alarm
system through engine rooms and boiler rooms or other high
4.2.4.1 Where the fire detectors cannot be remotely
fire risk areas is not permitted unless this is necessary for fire
identified individually, a fire detection zone shall not monitor
detection in those areas or connection to the corresponding
more than one deck. This does not apply to a fire detection
power supply.
zone which monitors an encapsulated stairwell.

200 June 2018
Table 4.3.2-1 4.6.2 An inspection certificate shall be issued, signed by

The maximum distance between fire detectors and bulkheads a Surveyor of the Register and showing the date of
inspection.
Maximum
Maximum Maximum
Type of distance of
floor surface distance
fire fire detectors
area per fire between fire
detector from
detector detectors
bulkheads
Heat 37,0 m2 9,0 m 4,5 m
Smoke 74,0 m2 11,0 m 5,5 m
4.4 Protection of accommodation and service

spaces, smoke detectors in stairways,
corridors and escape route
4.4.1 Smoke detectors shall be installed in all stairways,
corridors and escape routes within accommodation spaces.
Consideration shall be given to the installation of special
purpose smoke detectors within ventilation ducting.
4.4.2 Accommodation and service spaces of cargo

vessels and tank vessels shall be protected by a fixed fire
detection and fire alarm system and/or an automatic
sprinkler, fire detection and fire alarm system, depending on
a protection method adopted.
4.5 Protection of machinery spaces

4.5.1 A fixed fire detection and fire alarm system shall be
installed in any machinery space:
a) which is periodically unattended;
b) where the installation of automatic and remote control
systems and equipment has been approved in lieu of
continuous manning of the space; or
c) where the main propulsion and associated machinery
including sources of main electrical supply is provided
with various degrees of automatic or remote control and
is under continuous manned supervision from a control
room.
4.5.2 The fire detection system required in 4.5.1 shall be

so designed and the detectors so positioned as to detect
rapidly the onset of fire in any part of those spaces and under
any normal conditions of operation of the machinery and
variations of ventilation as required by the possible range of
ambient temperatures. Except in spaces of restricted height
and where their use is especially appropriate, detection
systems using only thermal detectors are not permitted.
4.6 Acceptance test

4.6.1 Fire alarm systems shall be checked by the
Register:
a) before being put into service for the first time;
modification or repair; and
c) regularly, at least every two years.
In the case of engine rooms and boiler rooms these
checks shall be made under various machine operation
conditions and under changing ventilation conditions.
Inspections as referred to in c) above may also be carried out
by a competent person from a competent firm specialising in
fire-extinguishing systems.

June 2018 201
5.1.2.8 Fire pumps and pipes intended for firefighting

5 FIRE FIGHTING purposes may neither be used for pumping of oil products,
lubricating oil or other flammable liquids nor as ballast
5.1 General water fire-extinguishing system pumps for tanks used for alternate carriage of fuel oil and
water ballast.
5.1.2.9 Fire pumps shall be fitted with the pressure gauge
5.1.1.1 Vessels shall be provided with fire pumps, fire on the pressure side.
mains, hydrants and hoses complying with the applicable
Relief valves shall be provided in conjunction with
requirements of this Section.
fire pumps if the pumps are capable of developing a pressure
5.1.1.2 The Register may waive the requirements of this exceeding the design pressure of the water service pipes,
Section for non-self-propelled vessels not intended to carry hydrants and hoses. These valves shall be so placed and
passengers whether: adjusted as to prevent excessive pressure in any part of the
– the vessel is part of a specified pushed convoy or side-by- fire main system.
side formation and the firefighting system of the Relief valve shall be connected to the suction side
propulsion vessel is determined in compliance with the of the pump. Relief valves shall be set to operate at a pressure
requirements of this Section considering the pushed exceeding the design pressure in the fire main by no more
convoy or side-by-side formation as a single vessel; or than 10%.
– the vessel is fitted with suitable piping systems 5.1.2.10 Fire pumps shall be driven from the sufficient
connectable to the firefighting system of the propulsion sources of power capable to ensure operation of pumps under
vessel. any operation conditions of the vessel, including the
condition when the vessel is at mooring.
5.1.2 Fire pumps
5.1.2.11 Each fire pump shall be fitted with shut-off valves
5.1.2.1 Self-propelled vessels shall be equipped with a
on suction and discharge pipes. The use of gate valves on
power driven pump suitable for use as a fire pump.
suction pipes is permitted.
5.1.2.2 The capacity of the fire pump, acting through fire Centrifugal pumps shall be connected to the fire
mains and hoses, shall be sufficient to project at least one jet mains by means of screw-down non-return valves or a
of water to any part of the vessel. This shall be based on a combination of a shut-off and a non-return device.
length of throw of 12,0 m from a 12,0 mm diameter nozzle.
5.1.2.12 Fixed fire pumps may be used for other shipboard
The minimum pump capacity must be 10,0 m3/h.
services (see the present Rules, Chapter I, 7.9.2.8 and
5.1.2.3 The pump shall have a drive independent of the 7.10.2.2), if the vessel is provided with at least two
main propulsion unit. On vessels with a gross volume independently driven pumps, one of which is at all times kept
(L·B·D) of up to 800,0 m3 or with a propulsive power of up to readily available for the fire fighting purpose.
350 kW, a bilge pump or cooling water pump coupled to the Where only one fire pump is installed on board the
main engine may also be used provided that the propeller vessel, it may be used for other purposes requiring only short
shafting can be disengaged (see the present Rules, Chapter I, time consumption of water (e.g. flushing out of decks, hawse
7.9.2.8). pipes, etc.).
5.1.2.4 Fire pumps and their power sources shall not be 5.1.3 Fire mains and hydrants
located forward of the collision bulkhead. Fire pumps and
their outboard connections shall be located as deep as 5.1.3.1 Materials readily rendered ineffective by heat shall
possible. Where such an arrangement is impracticable, the not be used for fire mains and hydrants unless adequately
pumps shall be of self-priming type. Pump suction shall be protected.
safeguarded even in lightship condition.
5.1.3.2 The pipes and hydrants shall be so placed that the
5.1.2.5 Fire pump starting arrangement in the machinery fire hoses may be easily coupled to them. The arrangement of
spaces shall be located in an easily accessible position in the pipes and hydrants shall be such as to avoid the possibility of
event of fire. freezing. Suitable drainage provisions shall be provided for
fire main piping. Isolation valves shall be installed for all
5.1.2.6 Combined ballast pumps, sanitary pumps, bilge open deck fire main branches used for purposes other than
pumps, general service pumps or other pumps exclusively firefighting.
pumping water may be accepted as fire pumps, if have the
capacity and pressure required for fire pumps and shall be 5.1.3.3 Fire mains shall be so arranged that a water jet can
connected to the fire main by means of a non-return valve. at all times be projected to any part of the vessel through a
single length of hose not exceeding 20,0 m.
5.1.2.7 If other fire-extinguishing systems using water
supplied by fire pumps are installed on board the vessel Deck-washing lines may be incorporated in the
(foam fire-extinguishing system, pressure water spraying fire-extinguishing system.
system, drenching system, etc.), the capacity of the pump 5.1.3.4 The diameter of the fire main and water service
shall be sufficient for delivery of water by the water fire main pipes shall be sufficient for the effective distribution of the
system to any part of the vessel and for parallel operation of maximum required discharge from the fire pump.
one of the above systems that require the largest quantity of
water.

202 June 2018
5.1.3.5 Each fire hydrant shall be provided with a closing 5.2 Automatic pressure water spraying system
valve and a standard quick-acting coupling. Hydrants fitted (sprinkler system)
on open deck shall have quick-acting plugs also. At least
three hydrants shall be provided. For vessels less than 40,0 m 5.2.1 General
in length, at least two hydrants shall be provided.
5.2.1.1 For protecting accommodation spaces, wheelhouses
5.1.3.6 Fire hydrants shall be placed: and passenger rooms, only suitable automatic pressure water
a) on open decks and in way of superstructure, hydrants spraying system is admitted as permanently installed
shall be located near the entrances and hatchways or firefighting system.
trunks leading into the enclosed spaces as well as next to 5.2.1.2 The automatic pressure water spraying system shall
cargo hatches; be ready for service at all times when there are persons on
b) inside the spaces: in corridors and lobbies, in the board. No additional action by crew members shall be
machinery spaces. required to trigger operation.
5.1.3.7 Fire hydrants shall be placed at a distance of not 5.2.1.3 Where fitted, automatic pressure water spraying
more than 1,35 m from decks or flooring. All fire hydrants system shall comply with the provisions of this Head.
shall be painted red and numbered. Alternative systems complying with recognized standards
may, subject to review or type approval, be accepted.
5.1.3.8 In vessels where deck cargo may be carried, the
positions of the hydrants shall be such that they are always 5.2.1.4 Installation or conversion of the systems shall be
readily accessible and the pipes shall be arranged as far as carried out only by specialised firms.
practicable to avoid risk of damage by such cargo.
5.2.1.5 Systems spraying smaller quantities of water shall
5.1.4 Fire hoses and nozzles have a type approval pursuant to IMO Resolution A.800 (19)
or another Standard recognized by the Register. Type
5.1.4.1 In general, vessels shall be provided with fire hoses approval shall be carried out by the Register or an accredited
the number, length and diameter of which shall comply with testing institution. The accredited testing institution shall
the size of the vessel and type of the vessel’s spaces. comply with the European Standard for general requirements
5.1.4.2 Fire hoses shall be made of non-perishable material for the competence of testing and calibrating laboratories (EN
approved by the Register and shall be sufficient in length to ISO/IEC 17025:2005).
project a jet of water to any of the spaces in which they may 5.2.1.6 The pressure water tank, pump and the piping of
be required to be used. Each hose shall be provided with a the spraying system, except for the piping connecting the
nozzle and the quick acting couplings of an approved type. spraying system to the water fire main system, shall be
5.1.4.3 Hoses must be able to be connected to the fire independent of all other systems.
mains via fire hydrants and quick couplings. The number of 5.2.1.7 Automatic pressure water spraying systems shall be
the fire hoses shall be equal to that of fire hydrants installed made of steel or equivalent non-combustible materials.
on the vessel (at least two hoses).
5.2.1.8 Automatic pressure water spraying systems shall be
5.1.4.4 Nozzles shall be of an approved dual-purpose type able to spray water at a rate of at least 5,0 l/m2 per minute
(i.e. spray/jet type) incorporating a shutoff. These shall be over the area of the largest room to be protected.
stowed in hose boxes placed close to the hydrants. Hose
boxes shall be properly marked. Hose wrenches shall be 5.2.2 Pressure water tanks
provided in every hose box.
5.2.2.1 The pressure water tanks shall be fitted with a
5.1.4.5 Fire hoses shall have a length of at least 10,0 m (if safety valve, connected directly without valves to the water
used with fire hydrants in the vessel’s spaces), but not more compartment, with a water level indicator that can be shut-off
than: and is protected against damage and with a pressure gauge.
a) 15,0 m in machinery spaces; 5.2.2.2 The pressure water tank shall comply with the
b) 20,0 m in other spaces and open decks. requirements for pressure vessels prescribed in the present
Rules, Chapter I, 5.5.
5.1.4.6 For the purposes of these Rules, standard fire
nozzle sizes shall be 12,0 mm, 16,0 mm and 19,0 mm or as 5.2.2.3 The volume of the pressure water tank shall be
near thereto as possible. Larger diameter nozzles may be equivalent to at least twice the specified pump delivery per
permitted at the discretion of the Register. minute.
For accommodation and service spaces, a nozzle 5.2.2.4 The tank shall contain a standing charge of fresh
size greater than 12,0 mm need not be used. water equivalent to at least the specified volume delivered by
the pump in one minute.
5.1.5 Non-self-propelled vessels
5.2.2.5 The tank shall be fitted with a connection to enable
5.1.5.1 Where a water fire-extinguishing system is
the entire system to be refilled with fresh water.
provided on a non-self-propelled vessel, the requirements set
out in 5.1.2 and 5.1.3 shall be applied as appropriate. 5.2.2.6 The pressure water tank shall be installed in a frost
proof space.
5.1.5.2 On a non-self-propelled vessels operated without
crews no firefighting arrangements are required. 5.2.2.7 Means shall be provided for replenishing the air
cushion in the pressure water tank.

June 2018 203
5.2.3 Pressure water spraying pumps 5.2.7 Piping, valves and fittings
5.2.3.1 The pressure pumps may only be used for 5.2.7.1 Lines between suction connection, pressure water
supplying water to the pressure water spraying systems. tank, shore connection and alarm valve shall comply with the
dimensional requirements set out in the present Rules,
5.2.3.2 In the event of a pressure drop in the system, the Chapter I, Table 7.4.1-1. Lines shall be effectively protected
pump shall start up automatically before the fresh water against corrosion.
charge in the pressure water tank has been exhausted.
Suitable means of testing shall be provided. 5.2.7.2 Check valves shall be fitted to ensure that raw
water cannot penetrate into the pressure water tank nor water
5.2.3.3 The pump shall be dimensioned so that it can for fire-extinguishing be discharged overboard through pump
continuously provide a sufficient water supply at the suction lines.
necessary pressure if all the spray nozzles necessary for
covering the area of the largest room to be protected are 5.2.7.3 Hose connections shall be provided at suitable
activated simultaneously. points on the port and starboard sides for supplying the
equipment with water from the shore. The connecting valves
5.2.3.4 The pump shall be provided with a direct suction shall be secured against being opened unintentionally.
connection at the vessel’s side. The shut-off device shall be
secured in the open position. A suitable raw water filter shall 5.2.7.4 Each line leading to a section of the system shall be
be fitted, the mesh size of which is able to prevent coarse equipped with an alarm valve (see also 5.2.9).
impurities from clogging the nozzles. The pump delivery
shall be fitted with a test valve with connecting pipes, the 5.2.7.5 Shut-off devices located between the pump delivery
cross-section of which is compatible with the pump capacity and the alarm valves shall be secured in the open position.
at the prescribed head. 5.2.8 Spray nozzles (sprinklers)
5.2.4 Location 5.2.8.1 The system shall be divided into sections, each with
5.2.4.1 The installation of components of automatic no more than 50 spray nozzles. A larger number of spray
pressure water spraying system within the rooms to be nozzles may be authorized by the Register with appropriate
protected shall be limited to the necessary minimum. corroboration, in particular a hydraulic calculation.
5.2.4.2 Pressure water tanks and pressure water pumps 5.2.8.2 The number and the layout of spray nozzles shall
shall be located outside and at a sufficient distance away ensure effective distribution of water in the rooms to be
from the rooms to be protected, from boiler room and from protected.
spaces containing oil treatment plant or internal combustion 5.2.8.3 A sprinkler section may extend only over one main
engines. fire zone or one watertight compartment and may not include
5.2.4.3 The pressure water spraying systems located in the more than two vertically adjacent decks.
cold storage and freezer rooms should not be permanently 5.2.8.4 Spray nozzles shall be triggered at a temperature
filled with water. These rooms can be protected with dry between 68°C and 79°C, in the galley areas at a maximum of
sprinklers. 93°C and in the saunas at a maximum of 141°C.
5.2.5 Water supply 5.2.8.5 The nozzles shall be made of corrosion-resistant
material. Nozzles of galvanized steel are not permitted.
5.2.5.1 The system shall be permanently maintained at the
necessary pressure and shall be ready at all times for 5.2.9 Indicating and alarm systems
immediate, automatic operation. The pipes shall be filled
with water up to the spray nozzles at all times. The system 5.2.9.1 Every spray nozzle section shall be equipped with
shall have a continuously working water supply. an alarm valve which, when a nozzle is opened, actuates a
visual and audible alarm at one or more suitable positions, at
5.2.5.2 In addition to the water supply to the spraying one of which must be permanently manned. In addition, each
equipment located outside the spaces to be protected, the alarm valve shall be fitted with a pressure gauge and a test
system shall also be connected to the fire main via a screw- valve with an inner diameter corresponding to a spray nozzle.
down non-return valve which will prevent a backflow from
the spraying system to the fire main. 5.2.9.2 At the positions mentioned here above, an
automatic indicating device shall be mounted which
5.2.5.3 In the event of pump failure, it shall be possible to identifies the actuated sprinkler section.
provide the spray nozzles with a sufficient water supply from
another on board pump. 5.2.9.3 The electrical installation must be self-monitoring
and shall be capable of being tested separately for each
5.2.6 Energy supply section.
5.2.6.1 The energy supply of the installation of automatic 5.2.10 Inspection and documentation
pressure water spraying system shall be provided by two
independent energy sources that shall not be installed in the 5.2.10.1 An installation plan of the automatic pressure water
same location. Each energy source shall be capable of spraying system shall be presented to the Register for
supplying the entire system unassisted. examination before installation of the system. The plan shall
indicate the types and performance data of the machines and
equipment used.

204 June 2018
5.2.10.2 The systems shall be checked by the Register: 5.3.2.3 Other extinguishing agents are permitted only if
a) before being put into service for the first time; agreed by the Register.
b) before being put back into service after they have been If other extinguishing agents will be permitted,
triggered; these fixed fire-extinguishing systems shall be type approved
by the Register as well.
c) before being put back into service after any major
modification or repair; and 5.3.3 Ventilation, air intake
d) regularly, at least every two years.
5.3.3.1 Combustion air for the propulsion engines shall not
Inspections as referred to in d) may also be carried be extracted from rooms that shall be protected by
out by a competent person from a competent firm permanently installed fire-extinguishing systems. This shall
specialising in fire-extinguishing systems. not apply where there are two mutually independent and
5.2.10.3 When carrying out the check in accordance with hermetically separated main engine rooms or if next to the
5.2.10.2, the Register shall verify whether the systems meet main engine room there is a separate engine room with a bow
the requirements of 5.2. thruster, ensuring that the vessel is able to make way under
its own power in the event of fire in the main engine room.
The check shall at least include:
a) external inspection of the entire system; 5.3.3.2 Any forced ventilation present in the room to be
protected shall switch off automatically if the fire-
b) functional testing of the safety systems and nozzles; extinguishing system is triggered.
c) functional testing of the pressure tanks and pumping
system. 5.3.3.3 There shall be devices available with which all
apertures which can allow air to enter or gas to escape from
An inspection attestation shall be issued, signed by the room to be protected can be quickly closed. It shall be
a Surveyor of the Register and showing the date of clearly recognisable whether they are open or closed.
inspection.
5.3.3.4 The air escaping from pressure relief (safety)
5.3 Fixed gas fire-extinguishing systems valves in the pressurised air receivers installed in engine
rooms shall be conveyed to the open air (see the present
5.3.1 General Rules, Chapter I, 7.4.4.3).
5.3.1.1 Fire-extinguishing systems, inert gas systems, CO 2 5.3.3.5 Over- or under-pressure resulting from the inflow
systems, aerosol systems etc. shall be installed after of extinguishing agent shall not destroy the components of
agreement with the Register in accordance with the the surrounding partitions of the room to be protected. It shall
Register’s Rules. be possible for the pressure to equalise without danger.
Fire-extinguishing systems not dealt with in this
5.3.3.6 Protected rooms shall have a facility for extracting
Chapter shall be in compliance with other Register’s Rules.
the extinguishing agent and the combustion gases. Such
5.3.1.2 The following requirements apply to fixed fire- facilities shall be capable of being operated from positions
extinguishing systems for protecting engine rooms, boiler outside the protected rooms and which must not be made
rooms, pump rooms and all spaces containing essential inaccessible by a fire within such spaces. If there are
equipment (switchboards, compressors, etc.) for the permanently installed extractors, it shall not be possible for
refrigeration equipment, if any. these to be switched on while the fire is being extinguished.
5.3.1.3 Equivalent aerosol fire-extinguishing systems (refer 5.3.4 Fire alarm system
to IMO MSC.1/Circ.1270, “Revised Guidelines for the
Approval of Fixed Aerosol Fire-Extinguishing Systems The room to be protected shall be monitored by
Equivalent to Fixed Gas Fire-Extinguishing Systems, as means of an appropriate fire alarm system. The alarm shall be
referred to in SOLAS 74, for Machinery Spaces”), type noticeable in the wheelhouse, the accommodation spaces and
approved by the Register, may be accepted as alternative the room to be protected.
arrangements for the protection of machinery spaces.
5.3.5 Piping system
5.3.2 Extinguishing agents 5.3.5.1 The extinguishing agent shall be conveyed to the
5.3.2.1 The following extinguishing agents may be used in room to be protected and distributed there by means of a
permanently installed fire-extinguishing systems: fixed piping system. Inside the room to be protected the
piping and associated fittings shall be made of steel. Tank
a) CO 2 (carbon dioxide); connecting pipes and expansion joints shall be exempt from
b) HFC-227 ea (heptafluoropropane - FM 200); this provided the materials used have equivalent properties in
c) IG-541 (52 % nitrogen, 40 % argon, 8 % carbon dioxide); case of fire.
d) FK-5-1-12 (dodecafluoro-2-methylpentane-3-one - Pipes shall be both internally and externally
Novec 1230); protected against corrosion. Distribution lines in protected
rooms shall not be galvanised internally. The piping and
e) Water.
associated fittings shall be adequately supported.
5.3.2.2 The fixed fire-extinguishing systems according to
5.3.2.1,b) to 5.3.2.1,e) shall be type approved by the Register.
Type approval shall be pursuant to IMO MSC/Circ. 848 and
MSC.1/Circ. 1316.

June 2018 205
5.3.5.2 The discharge nozzles shall be dimensioned and protected shall be designed so as to remain functional for at
fitted such that the extinguishing agent is evenly distributed. least 30 minutes in the event of fire. This requirement shall
In particular the extinguishing agent shall also be effective be fulfilled in the case of electric wiring if it complies with
beneath the floor plates. The discharge nozzles shall be made the International Standard IEC 60331-21:1999.
of steel or equivalent material. If triggering devices are installed in such a way that
5.3.5.3 The necessary pipes for conveying fire- they are out of sight the panel covering them shall be
extinguishing medium into protected rooms shall be provided identified by the “firefighting installation” symbol as shown
with control valves so marked as to indicate clearly the room in Figure 6 of Annex 4 (ES-TRIN), having a side length of at
to which the pipes are led. Suitable provision shall be made least 10,0 cm, and the following text in red lettering on a
to prevent inadvertent release of the medium into the room. white background:
The pipelines may pass through accommodation FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION
providing they are of substantial thickness and their tightness
is verified with a pressure test, after installation, at a pressure 5.3.6.4 If the fire-extinguishing system is intended for the
head not less than 5,0 MPa. In addition, pipelines passing protection of several rooms, the triggering devices for each
through accommodation shall be joined only by welding and room have to be separate and clearly identified.
shall not be fitted with drains or other openings within such 5.3.6.5 The instructions shall be posted alongside all
rooms. The pipelines shall not pass through refrigerated triggering devices and shall be clearly visible and indelible.
spaces. The instructions shall be at least in a language the master can
Piping passing through spaces other than the room read and understand and if this language is not English,
to be protected is subject to tightness testing after installation French or German, they shall be at least in English, French or
at 1,0 MPa. German in addition.
5.3.5.4 Pipelines between the CO 2 tanks and discharge They shall contain, in particular, instructions
valves shall be tested at 19,0 MPa for tanks filled to 0,675 regarding:
kg/l and at 22,5 MPa for tanks filled to 0,75 kg/l. a) triggering of the fire-extinguishing system;
5.3.5.5 The pipe thicknesses stated in Table 5.3.5-1 are the b) the need for checking to ensure that all persons have left
assigned minimum thicknesses. the room to be protected;
c) action to be taken by the crew when the fire-
Table 5.3.5-1 extinguishing system is triggered and when accessing the
Minimum steel pipe thicknesses for CO 2 protected room after triggering or flooding, in particular
with regard to the possible presence of dangerous
substances;
From pressure From discharge
D, [mm] tanks to discharge valves to nozzles, s, d) action to be taken by the crew in the case of failure of the
valves, s, [mm] [mm] fire-extinguishing system.
21,3 ÷ 26,9 3,2 2,6 5.3.6.6 The operating instructions shall point out that
30,0 ÷ 48,3 4,0 3,2 before the fire fighting system is triggered combustion
51,0 ÷ 60,3 4,5 3,6 engines drawing air from the room to be protected shall be
63,5 ÷ 76,1 5,0 3,6 shut down.
82,5 ÷ 88,9 5,6 4,0
101,6 6,3 4,0 5.3.7 Alarm device
108,0 ÷ 114,3 7,1 4,5 5.3.7.1 Permanently installed fire-extinguishing systems
127 8,0 4,5 shall be provided with an audible and visual alarm device.
133,0 ÷ 139,7 8,0 5,0
152,4 ÷ 168,3 8,8 5,6 5.3.7.2 The alarm device shall be set off automatically as
soon as the fire- extinguishing system is first triggered. The
5.3.6 Triggering device alarm device shall sound for an appropriate time before the
extinguishing agent is released and it shall not be possible to
5.3.6.1 Fire-extinguishing systems with automatic switch it off.
triggering shall not be permissible.
5.3.7.3 Alarm signals shall be clearly visible in the rooms
5.3.6.2 It shall be possible to trigger the fire-extinguishing to be protected and outside the accesses to them and clearly
system from a suitable place outside the room to be audible even under operating conditions producing the
protected. loudest inherent noise. They shall be clearly distinct from all
other sound and visual signals in the room to be protected.
5.3.6.3 Triggering devices shall be installed in such a way
that they can be operated even in case of a fire and in the 5.3.7.4 Sound alarms shall also be clearly audible in the
event of damage by fire or explosion in the room to be adjacent rooms even when connecting doors are closed and
protected the necessary quantity of extinguishing agent can under operating conditions producing the loudest inherent
still be conveyed. noise.
Non-mechanical triggering devices shall be 5.3.7.5 If the alarm device is not self-monitoring as regards
powered from two different mutually independent energy short-circuits, wire breaks and voltage drops, it shall be
sources. These energy sources shall be located outside the possible to check that it is working properly.
room to be protected. Control lines in the room to be

206 June 2018
5.3.7.6 At every entrance to a room that can be supplied b) tightness check on pipes;
with extinguishing agent, a clearly visible notice shall be put c) functional checking of control and triggering systems;
up bearing the following text in red lettering on a white
background: d) checking of tank pressure and content;
e) checking of tightness and facilities for locking the room
WARNING, FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION! to be protected;
LEAVE THE ROOM AS SOON AS THE WARNING f) checking the fire alarm system;
SIGNAL SOUNDS (description of signal) g) checking the alarm device.
5.3.8 Pressure tanks (compressed gas cylinders), 5.3.10.5 An inspection attestation shall be issued, signed by
fittings and pressure pipes a Surveyor of the Register and showing the date of the
inspection.
5.3.8.1 Pressure tanks, fittings and pressure pipes shall
conform to the requirements of the Rules of the Register. 5.3.11 Fire-extinguishing system operating with CO2
5.3.8.2 Pressure tanks shall be installed in accordance with Fire-extinguishing systems using CO2 as the
the manufacturer’s instructions and in compliance with other extinguishing agent shall comply with the following
applicable Rules of the Register. provisions in addition to the requirements under 5.3.1 to
5.3.8.3 Pressure tanks, fittings and pressure pipes shall not 5.3.10:
be installed in accommodation spaces. a) tanks of CO2 shall be housed outside the room to be
protected in a space or cabinet hermetically separated
5.3.8.4 The temperature in cabinets and storage spaces from other rooms. The doors to these installation spaces
containing pressure tanks shall not exceed 50°C. and cabinets shall open outwards, be lockable and bear
5.3.8.5 Cabinets or storage spaces on deck shall be firmly on the outside a symbol for “General danger warning” in
fixed in place and have air vents which shall be arranged in accordance with Figure 4 of Annex 4 (ES-TRIN), at least
such a way that in the event of a leak in the pressure tank no 5,0 cm in height, together with the marking “CO2” in the
gas can escape into the interior of the vessel. Direct same colour and with the same height;
connections to other rooms are not permitted. b) storage spaces below decks for CO2 tanks shall be
accessible only from the open air. These spaces shall
5.3.8.6 Bends or suitable compensators shall be provided
have their own adequate artificial ventilation system with
to accommodate the thermal expansion of the pipelines.
extraction ducts, completely separate from other
Hoses for connecting the CO2 tanks to the manifold shall be
ventilation systems on board (see the present Rules,
type approved and hose lines shall be fabricated by
Chapter I, 7.13.5);
manufacturers approved by the Register.
c) the CO2 tanks shall not be filled to more than 0,75 kg/l.
5.3.9 Quantity of extinguishing agent The specific volume of unpressurised CO2 gas shall be
taken to be 0,56 m3/kg;
If the quantity of extinguishing agent is intended
for protecting more than one room, the total amount of d) the volume of CO2 for the room to be protected shall be
extinguishing agent available does not need to be greater than at least 40% of its gross volume. It shall be possible to
the quantity necessary for the largest room to be protected. supply this volume within 120 seconds, and to check
whether supply has been completed;
5.3.10 Installation, inspection and documentation e) opening the tank valves and operating the discharge valve
5.3.10.1 The system shall be installed or converted only by a shall be by separate control operations;
firm specialising in firefighting systems. The requirements f) the appropriate time mentioned under 5.3.7.2 shall be at
specified by the extinguishing agent manufacturer and the least 20 seconds. There shall be a reliable device to
system manufacturer (product data sheet, safety data sheet) ensure the delay before delivery of the CO2 gas;
shall be complied with. g) the manifold from the tanks up to and including the
5.3.10.2 The system shall be checked by the Register: discharge valves shall be designed for a nominal working
pressure of PN100. Material certificates shall be provided
a) before being put into service for the first time; according to the requirements for pipe Class I;
b) before being put back into service after it has been h) pipelines between discharge valves and nozzles shall be
triggered; designed for a nominal working pressure of PN40.
c) before being put back into service after any major However, for the purpose of material certification this
modification or repair; and piping may be considered in pipe Class III.
d) regularly, at least every two years.
5.3.12 Fire-extinguishing system operating with HFC-
Inspections as referred to in d) may also be carried 227ea (FM 200)
out by a competent person from a competent firm
specialising in fire-extinguishing systems. Fire-extinguishing systems using HFC-227ea as the
extinguishing agent shall comply with the following
5.3.10.3 In the inspection the Register shall check whether provisions in addition to the requirements under 5.3.1 to
the system meets the requirements of 5.3. 5.3.10:
5.3.10.4 The inspection shall cover at least the following:
a) external inspection of the entire installation;

June 2018 207
a) if there are several rooms to be protected, each with a b) each tank containing FK-5-1-12 installed in the room to
different gross volume, each room shall be provided with be protected shall be equipped with an overpressure relief
its own fire-extinguishing system; valve. The pressure relief valve shall harmlessly release
b) each tank containing HFC-227ea that is installed in the the contents of the tank into the room to be protected if
room to be protected shall be equipped with a pressure the tank is exposed to the effects of fire and the fire-
relief valve. This shall harmlessly release the contents of extinguishing system has not been triggered;
the tank into the room to be protected if the tank is c) each tank shall be fitted with a device for checking the
exposed to the effects of fire and the fire-extinguishing gas pressure;
system has not been triggered; d) the tanks shall not be filled to more than 1,0 kg/l. The
c) each tank shall be fitted with a device for checking the specific volume of the unpressurised FK-5-1-12 shall be
gas pressure; taken to be 0,0719 m3/kg;
d) the tanks shall not be filled to more than 1,15 kg/l. The e) the volume of FK-5-1-12 for the room to be protected
specific volume of the unpressurised HFC-227ea shall be shall be at least 5,5% of the room’s gross volume. This
taken to be 0,1374 m3/kg; volume shall be supplied within 10 seconds;
e) the volume of HFC-227ea for the room to be protected f) the FK-5-1-12 tanks shall be provided with a pressure
shall be at least 8% of the room’s gross volume. This monitor which triggers an audible and visual alarm signal
volume shall be supplied within 10 seconds; in the wheelhouse in the event of an unauthorized loss of
f) the HFC-227ea tanks shall be provided with a pressure propellant. If there is no wheelhouse, this alarm signal
monitor which triggers an audible and visual alarm signal shall be given outside the room to be protected;
in the wheelhouse in the event of an unauthorized loss of g) after flooding, the concentration in the room to be
propellant. If there is no wheelhouse, this alarm signal protected shall not exceed 10,0% (volume).
shall be given outside the room to be protected;
5.3.15 Firefighting systems using water as the
g) after flooding, the concentration in the room to be
extinguishing agent
protected shall not exceed 10,5% (volume);
h) the fire-extinguishing system shall not contain any parts Firefighting systems using water as the
made of aluminium. extinguishing agent may only release this agent into the room
to be protected in the form of a water mist. The droplet size
5.3.13 Fire-extinguishing system operating with IG-541 must be between 5,0 and 300,0 microns.
Fire-extinguishing systems using IG-541 as the In addition to the requirements laid down in 5.3.2
extinguishing agent shall comply with the following to 5.3.8 and 5.3.10, 5.3.9 applies mutatis mutandis, these
provisions in addition to the requirements under 5.3.1 to firefighting systems must comply with the following
5.3.10: provisions:
a) if there are several rooms to be protected, each with a a) the firefighting system shall have a type approval
different gross volume, each room shall be provided with pursuant to MSC/Circ. 1165 or another Standard
its own fire-extinguishing system; recognized by the Register. Type approval shall be
carried out by the Register or an accredited testing
b) each tank containing IG-541 that is installed in the room institution. The accredited testing institution shall comply
to be protected shall be equipped with a pressure relief with the European Standard for general requirements for
valve. This shall harmlessly release the contents of the the competence of testing and calibrating laboratories
tank into the room to be protected if the tank is exposed (EN ISO/IEC 17025:2005);
to the effects of fire and the fire-extinguishing system has
not been triggered; b) the firefighting system must be sized according to the
largest of the rooms to be protected and must be able to
c) each tank shall be fitted with a device for checking the spray water continuously into the room for a minimum of
contents; 30 minutes;
d) the filling pressure of the tanks shall not exceed 20 MPa c) the pumps, their switching mechanisms and the valves
at a temperature of +15°C; that are required in order for the system to operate should
e) the volume of IG-541 for the room to be protected shall be installed in a room outside the rooms to be protected.
be at least 44% and no more than 50% of the room’s The room in which they are installed should be separated
gross volume. This volume shall be supplied within 120 from adjacent by at least type “A-30” partition walls;
seconds. d) the firefighting system must be completely full of water
5.3.14 Fire-extinguishing system operating with FK-5- at all times at least as far as the trip valves and be under
1-12 (Novec 1230) the required initial operating pressure. The water supply
pumps must be automatically initiated when the system is
Fire-extinguishing systems using FK-5-1-12 as the triggered. The system must feature a continuously
extinguishing agent shall comply with the following operating water supply. Measures must be taken to ensure
provisions in addition to the requirements under 5.3.1 to impurities do not affect system operation;
5.3.10: e) the capacity and design of the system’s pipe network
a) if there are several rooms to be protected, each with a must be based on a hydraulic calculation;
different gross volume, each room shall be provided with f) the number and arrangement of nozzles must ensure
its own fire-extinguishing system; sufficient distribution of water in the rooms to be
protected. The spray nozzles must be located so as to

208 June 2018
ensure that the water mist is distributed throughout the g) at suitable points below deck in engine rooms and boiler
room to be protected, especially in those areas where rooms such that no position in the space is more than
there is a higher risk of fire, including behind the fittings 10,0 m walking distance away from an extinguisher.
and beneath the floor;
5.5.3 In the part of machinery spaces situated below deck
g) the firefighting system’s electrical components in the
and containing internal combustion engines, additional fire
room to be protected must at a minimum comply with
extinguishers shall be mounted in such a way that an
protection class IP 54. The system shall feature two
extinguisher is accessible in the immediate vicinity of any
independent energy sources with automatic switching.
part of the room.
One of the power sources must be located outside the
room to be protected. Each power source should on its The number of additional fire extinguishers shall be
own be capable of ensuring the operation of the system; as indicated in Table 5.5.3-1.
h) the firefighting system must feature redundant pumps;
Table 5.5.3-1
i) the firefighting system must be equipped with a Portable fire extinguishers in machinery space
monitoring device which triggers an alarm signal in the
wheelhouse in the following cases:
Total power, [kW] Number of fire extinguishers
– drop in water tank level (if fitted);
over 100 up to 375 1
– power supply failure;
up to 750 2
– loss of pressure in the low pressure system pipework; 1 further extinguisher for each
– loss of pressure in the high pressure circuit; over 750
additional 750 kW or part thereof
– when the system is activated;
5.5.4 For the portable fire extinguishers required by
j) the documents required for the installation, functional
5.5.2, only powder type extinguishers with a content of at
testing and documentation of the installation referred to
least 6,0 kg or other portable extinguishers with the same
in 5.3.10 must include at a minimum:
extinguishing capacity may be used. They shall be suitable
– a schematic diagram of the system showing the for Class A, B and C fires. The maximum weight of a
sections of pipework and the types of spray nozzle; portable fire extinguisher ready for use shall not exceed 20
– the hydraulic calculation referred to in e); kg.
– the manufacturer’s technical documentation covering By way of derogation on vessels with no liquefied
all aspects of the installation; gas installations, spray foam fire extinguishers using aqueous
– the maintenance manual. film-forming foam (AFFF-AR) frost proof to -20°C are
permissible even if they are unsuitable for Class C fires.
5.4 Permanently installed firefighting systems These fire extinguishers shall have a minimum capacity of
for protecting objects 9,0 l.
Permanently installed firefighting systems for All extinguishers shall be suitable to extinguish
protecting objects are prohibited. fires in electrical systems of up to 1000,0 V.
5.5 Portable fire extinguishers 5.5.5 On vessels with electrical installations having an
operating voltage greater than 50,0 V, the extinguishing agent
5.5.1 Fire extinguishers shall have been type approved, shall also be suitable for fighting fire in electrical equipment.
or approved by Authorities in accordance with a recognized
standard. It is recommended that only dry powder 5.5.6 On motor vessels and vessels with oil-fired
extinguishers be used. Toxic extinguishing media and equipment, engine rooms and accommodation spaces shall be
extinguishing media liable to generate toxic gases may not be provided with dry powder extinguishers covering class A, B
used. and C fires.
5.5.2 There shall be at least one portable fire extinguisher 5.5.7 In addition powder, water or foam fire
in accordance with the European Standards EN 3-7:2007 and extinguishers may be used which are suitable at least for the
EN 3-8:2007 at each of the following places: class of fire most likely to occur in the room for which they
are intended.
a) in the wheelhouse;
In the case of water and foam fire extinguishers, the
b) close to each entrance from the deck to accommodation charge shall not be less than 9,0 l and not more than 13,5 l.
spaces;
c) close to each entrance to service spaces which are not 5.5.8 Portable fire extinguishers with CO2 as the
accessible from the accommodation spaces and which extinguishing agent may be used only for extinguishing fires
contain heating, cooking or refrigeration equipment using in galleys and electrical installations. The content of these
solid or liquid fuels or liquefied gas; fire extinguishers shall be no more than 1,0 kg per 15,0 m3 of
d) at each entrance to engine rooms; the room in which they are made available for use.
e) at each entrance to spaces in which oil-fired auxiliary CO2 fire extinguishers may not be located in
boilers or heating boilers are installed; accommodation and water fire extinguishers not in
machinery spaces.
f) at each entrance to spaces in which materials presenting a
fire hazard are stored; 5.5.9 Portable fire extinguishers shall be checked at least
every two years by a competent person. An inspection label

June 2018 209
shall be affixed to the fire extinguisher, signed by the

competent person and showing the date of the inspection. 6 ESCAPE
5.5.10 If portable fire extinguishers are installed in such a 6.1 General requirements
way that they are out of sight, the panel covering them shall
be identified by a symbol for fire extinguishers as shown in 6.1.1 The number, arrangement and dimensions of exits,
Figure 3 of Annex 4 (ES-TRIN), and having a side length of including emergency exits, shall be in keeping with the
at least 10,0 cm. purpose and dimensions of the relevant space. Where one of
the exits is an emergency exit, it shall be clearly marked as
5.5.11 Fire extinguishers with charges which are sensitive such.
to frost or heat shall be mounted or protected in such a way
that their effectiveness is guaranteed at all times. 6.1.2 Unless expressly provided otherwise in this
Section, at least two widely separated and ready means of
5.5.12 A method of application shall be clearly indicated escape shall be provided from all spaces or groups of spaces.
on each portable fire extinguisher.
6.1.3 Lifts shall not be considered as forming one of the
5.5.13 Fire extinguishers shall be secured with quick means of escape as required by this Section.
release straps or similar arrangements and shall be located in
positions protected against direct sunlight and rainfall at a 6.1.4 The escape trunk shall have clear dimensions of at
height of not more than 1,5 m from the floor to their handless least 0,6 x 0,6 m.
and at a distance of at least 1,5 m from heat sources.
6.2 Means of escape from control centres,
accommodation and service spaces
6.2.1 General
6.2.1.1 Stairways and ladders shall be so arranged as to
provide ready means of escape from accommodation and
from spaces in which the crew is normally employed, other
than machinery spaces.
6.2.1.2 All stairways in accommodation and service spaces
and control centres shall be of steel frame construction except
where the Register sanctions the use of other equivalent
material.
6.2.1.3 Doors in escape routes shall, in general, open in
way of the direction of escape, except that:
a) individual cabin doors may open into the cabins in order
to avoid injury to persons in the corridor when the door is
opened; and
b) doors in vertical emergency escape trunks may open out
of the trunk in order to permit the trunk to be used both
for escape and for access.
6.2.1.4 Special design requirements for accommodation
Communal living quarters and sleeping cabins shall
have at least two exits which are as far apart from each other
as possible and which serve as escape routes. One exit may
be designed as an emergency exit. This does not apply to
rooms with an exit leading directly onto the deck or into a
corridor which serves as an escape route, provided the
corridor has two exits apart from each other leading to port
and starboard. Emergency exits, which may include skylights
and windows, shall have a clear opening of at least 0,36 m2
and a shortest side no less than 0,5 m and permit rapid
evacuation in an emergency. Insulation and cladding of
escape routes shall be made of flame-retardant materials and
the usability of escape routes shall be guaranteed at all times
by appropriate means such as ladders or separately attached
rungs.
6.2.2 Escape arrangements

6.2.2.1 Below the lowest open deck the main means of
escape shall be a stairway and the second escape may be a
trunk or a stairway.

210 June 2018
6.2.2.2 Above the lowest open deck the means of escape 6.3.2 Every engine room and boiler room shall be
shall be stairways or doors to an open deck or a combination provided with two means of escape as widely separated as
thereof. possible. One of the means of escape shall be an emergency
exit. If a skylight is permitted as an escape, it must be
6.2.2.3 Exceptionally the Register may dispense with one possible to open it from the inside.
of the means of escape, for crew spaces that are entered only
occasionally, if the required escape route is independent of 6.3.3 In case of engine rooms and boiler rooms of less
watertight doors. than 35,0 m2 one means of escape may be accepted (see the
present Rules, Chapter I, 1.2.12.3).
6.3 Means of escape from machinery spaces
6.3.1 Means of escape from each machinery space shall
comply with the provisions of 6.3.2 and 6.3.3.

June 2018 211

CRS - Inland Navigation Vessels, Rules - Part3 - 2018-06

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CRS - Inland Navigation Vessels, Rules - Part3 - 2018-06

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RULES

FOR THE CLASSIFICATION OF

CROATIAN REGISTER OF SHIPPING

RULES FOR THE CLASSIFICATION OF INLAND NAVIGATION VESSELS

Rules for the Classification of Inland Navigation Vessels

7.4 Pipelines .......................................................................................................................................................................... 71

Rules for the Classification of Inland Navigation Vessels

13.9 Distribution system ....................................................................................................................................................... 132

II ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS ................................................................................................................... 143

Rules for the Classification of Inland Navigation Vessels

7.2 Switchgear..................................................................................................................................................................... 163

Rules for the Classification of Inland Navigation Vessels

15.1 General requirements .................................................................................................................................................... 185

III FIRE PROTECTION, DETECTION AND EXTINCTION ............................................................................ 191

Rules for the Classification of Inland Navigation Vessels

Part 3 – Machinery, Systems and Electricity Chapter I - MACHINERY AND SYSTEMS

Rules for the Classification of Inland Navigation Vessels

Chapter I - MACHINERY AND SYSTEMS Part 3 – Machinery, Systems and Electricity

Rules for the Classification of Inland Navigation Vessels

Part 3 – Machinery, Systems and Electricity Chapter I - MACHINERY AND SYSTEMS

Rules for the Classification of Inland Navigation Vessels

Chapter I - MACHINERY AND SYSTEMS Part 3 – Machinery, Systems and Electricity

Rules for the Classification of Inland Navigation Vessels

Part 3 – Machinery, Systems and Electricity Chapter I - MACHINERY AND SYSTEMS

Rules for the Classification of Inland Navigation Vessels

Chapter I - MACHINERY AND SYSTEMS Part 3 – Machinery, Systems and Electricity

Rules for the Classification of Inland Navigation Vessels

Part 3 – Machinery, Systems and Electricity Chapter I - MACHINERY AND SYSTEMS

Rules for the Classification of Inland Navigation Vessels

Chapter I - MACHINERY AND SYSTEMS Part 3 – Machinery, Systems and Electricity

Rules for the Classification of Inland Navigation Vessels

Part 3 – Machinery, Systems and Electricity Chapter I - MACHINERY AND SYSTEMS

1.3.9 Manual operation

1.3.10 Operating and maintenance instructions

1.4 Tests and trials

Rules for the Classification of Inland Navigation Vessels

Chapter I - MACHINERY AND SYSTEMS Part 3 – Machinery, Systems and Electricity

service, the ambient conditions given in Table 2.1.7-1 shall

Rules for the Classification of Inland Navigation Vessels

Part 3 – Machinery, Systems and Electricity Chapter I - MACHINERY AND SYSTEMS

Components Minimum required characteristics

Rules for the Classification of Inland Navigation Vessels

Chapter I - MACHINERY AND SYSTEMS Part 3 – Machinery, Systems and Electricity

2.3.2.4 Girder and frame assemblies should, so far as

Material tests 1) (mech. Non-destructive tests 6)

Rules for the Classification of Inland Navigation Vessels

Part 3 – Machinery, Systems and Electricity Chapter I - MACHINERY AND SYSTEMS

Parts under pressure Test pressure, p t 1)

2.5 Crankcase 2.5.2.3 If a forced extraction of the oil mist atmosphere

Rules for the Classification of Inland Navigation Vessels

Chapter I - MACHINERY AND SYSTEMS Part 3 – Machinery, Systems and Electricity

Rules for the Classification of Inland Navigation Vessels

Part 3 – Machinery, Systems and Electricity Chapter I - MACHINERY AND SYSTEMS

Rules for the Classification of Inland Navigation Vessels

Chapter I - MACHINERY AND SYSTEMS Part 3 – Machinery, Systems and Electricity

Rules for the Classification of Inland Navigation Vessels

Part 3 – Machinery, Systems and Electricity Chapter I - MACHINERY AND SYSTEMS

Rules for the Classification of Inland Navigation Vessels

Chapter I - MACHINERY AND SYSTEMS Part 3 – Machinery, Systems and Electricity

Rules for the Classification of Inland Navigation Vessels

Part 3 – Machinery, Systems and Electricity Chapter I - MACHINERY AND SYSTEMS

2.9.2 Main engines room control station 2.10 Starting arrangements

Rules for the Classification of Inland Navigation Vessels